Calibrari, Coduri de Eroare Pana x20001, Programare

10 Autocontrols
6400
20 Fault finding
6250H ---6850H
C90---C150
M120---M150 30 Service codes
N82h---N92h
N91h---N141h
N121LS---N141LS
N122 V---N142 V
40 Programming
N122 D---N142 D
T120c---T170c
T120cH ---T170cH 50 Tools
T120---T190
T170CR---T190CR
T121c---T171c
T121h---T191h
60 Other
T151eLS---T191LS
T132 V---T202 V
T132 D---T202 D
Diagnostics
and
Programming
Manual
Valtra Inc.
FIN---44200 Suolahti, FINLAND
Phone +358 2045501
Telefax +358 204550387
www.valtra.com
Order number 39 249 214
English
Copyright E 2010 by Valtra Inc.
11. Autocontrol
10. Autocontrol
12. Features
2
1.5.2008 Model Code Page
11. AUTOCONTROL
19.2.2010 All 110 1
Contents
11 Autocontrol:
111.1 ... Type plate (EEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
111.2 ... AC systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
111.3 ... Construction of tractor model 6400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
111.4 ... Construction of tractor model 6250H --- 6850H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
111.5 ... Construction of tractor model C90 --- C150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
111.6 . . . Construction of tractor model M120 --- M150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
111.7 . . . Construction of tractor model N101cCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
111.8 . . . Construction of tractor model N82h --- N92h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
111.9 . . . Construction of tractor model N91h --- N141h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
111.10 . . Construction of tractor model N121LS --- N141LS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
111.11 .. Construction of tractor model N122 V --- N142 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
111.12 .. Construction of tractor model N122 D --- N142 D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
111.13 .. Construction of tractor model T120c --- T170c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
111.14 .. Construction of tractor model T120cH --- T170cH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
111.15 .. Construction of tractor model T120 --- T190 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
111.16 .. Construction of tractor model T121c --- T191c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
111.17 .. Construction of tractor model T121h --- T191h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
111.18 .. Construction of tractor model T151eLS --- T191LS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
111.19 .. Construction of tractor model T132 V --- T202 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
111.20 .. Construction of tractor model T132 D --- T202 D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 All 110 2
4
Model Code Page
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 All 111.1 1
Type plate (EEC)
1. Model:
model indication used by service / spare part
2. Identification number:
chassis number
A Series 6000 Series

S Series N Series
T Series
5
Model Code Page
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 All 111.1 2
6
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 All 111.2 3
AC systems
An, Mezzo, Mega, HiTech Series
7
Model Code Page
22.1.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 All 111.2 4
C, M, S Series
4---2597
01/07
8
Model Code Page
22.1.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 All 111.2 5
T Series
9
Model Code Page
22.1.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 All 111.2 6
N, T1 Series
10
Model Code Page
11. AUTOCONTROL
19.2.2010 All 111.2 7
N2 and T2 Series
11
Model Code Page
11. AUTOCONTROL
19.2.2010 All 111.2 8
12
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 6400 111.3 9
6400, components
13
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 6400 111.3 10
AUTOCONTROL (AC 2.4)
14
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 6400 111.3 11
CAN BUS (AC 2.4)
15
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 6400 111.3 12
16
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 6250H-- 6850H 111.4 13
6250H --- 6850H, components
17
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 6250H-- 6850H 111.4 14
CAN BUS (AC 5.4)
18
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 C90-- C150 111.5 15
C90---C150, components
19
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 C90-- C150 111.5 16
20
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 C90-- C150 111.5 17
CAN BUS (AC 8.3)
21
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 C90-- C150 111.5 18
22
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 C90-- C150 111.5 19
CAN BUS (AC 8.5)
23
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 C90-- C150 111.5 20
24
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 M120-- M150 111.6 21
M120---M150, components
25
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 M120-- M150 111.6 22
26
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 M120-- M150 111.6 23
CAN BUS (AC 5.5)
27
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 M120-- M150 111.6 24
28
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 N101cCR 111.7 25
N101cCR, components
29
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 N101cCR 111.7 26
30
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 N101cCR 111.7 27
CAN BUS (AC 9.2)
31
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 N101cCR 111.7 28
32
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 N82h-- N92h 111.8 29
N82h---N92h, components
33
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 N82h-- N92h 111.8 30
34
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 N82h-- N92h 111.8 31
CAN BUS (AC 13.0)
35
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 N82h-- N92h 111.8 32
36
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 N91h-- N141h 111.9 33
N91h---N141h, components
37
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 N91h-- N141h 111.9 34
AUTOCONTROL (AC 10.0, AC 10.1 and AC 10.2)
38
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 N91h-- N141h 111.9 35
CAN BUS (AC 10.0)
39
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 N91h-- N141h 111.9 36
CAN BUS (AC 10.1)
40
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 N91h-- N141h 111.9 37
CAN BUS (AC 10.2)
41
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 N91h-- N141h 111.9 38
42
11. AUTOCONTROL N121LS--
1.5.2008 N141LS 111.10 39
N121LS---N141LS, components
43
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
1.5.2008 N141LS 111.10 40
CAN 2
CAN 1
44
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
1.5.2008 N141LS 111.10 41
CAN BUS (AC 11.2)
45
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
1.5.2008 N141LS 111.10 42
46
Model Code Page
1.5.2008
11. AUTOCONTROL
19.2.2010 N2 Versu 111.11 43
N2 Versu, components
47
Model Code Page
1.5.2008
11. AUTOCONTROL
19.2.2010 N2 Versu 111.11 44
CAN bus (AC15.2)
48
Model Code Page
1.5.2008
11. AUTOCONTROL
19.2.2010 N2 Direct 111.12 45
N2 Direct, components
49
Model Code Page
1.5.2008
11. AUTOCONTROL
19.2.2010 N2 Direct 111.12 46
CAN bus (AC14.2)
50
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T120c-- T170c 111.13 47
T120c ---T170c, components
51
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T120c-- T170c 111.13 48
52
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T120c-- T170c 111.13 49
CAN BUS (AC 2.4)
53
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T120c-- T170c 111.13 50
54
11. AUTOCONTROL T120cH --
1.5.2008 T170cH 111.14 51
T120cH---T170cH, components
55
1.5.2008 T170cH 111.14 52
56
1.5.2008 T170cH 111.14 53
CAN BUS (AC 5.4)
57
1.5.2008 T170cH 111.14 54
58
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T120-- T190 111.15 55
T120---T190, components
59
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T120-- T190 111.15 56
60
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T120-- T190 111.15 57
CAN BUS (AC 5.5)
61
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T120-- T190 111.15 58
62
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T120-- T190 111.15 59
CAN BUS (AC 6.1)
63
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T120-- T190 111.15 60
64
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T120-- T190 111.15 61
CAN BUS (AC 6.6)
65
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T120-- T190 111.15 62
66
Model Code Page
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T121c-- T171c 111.16 63
T121c ---T171c, construction
67
Model Code Page
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T121c-- T171c 111.16 64
68
Model Code Page
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T121c-- T171c 111.16 65
CAN BUS (AC 9.2)
69
Model Code Page
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T121c-- T171c 111.16 66
70
Model Code Page
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T121h-- T191h 111.17 67
T121h---T191h, construction
71
Model Code Page
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T121h-- T191h 111.17 68
AUTOCONTROL (AC 10.2 and AC 10.21)
72
Model Code Page
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T121h-- T191h 111.17 69
CAN BUS (AC 10.2)
73
Model Code Page
11. AUTOCONTROL
1.5.2008 T121h-- T191h 111.17 70
CAN BUS (AC 10.21)
74
Model Code Page
11. AUTOCONTROL T151eLS--
1.5.2008 T191LS 111.18 71
T151eLS---T191LS, construction
75
Model Code Page
1.5.2008 T191LS 111.18 72
CAN 2
CAN 1
76
Model Code Page
1.5.2008 T191LS 111.18 73
CAN BUS (AC 11.2)
77
Model Code Page
1.5.2008 T191LS 111.18 74
78
Model Code Page
11. AUTOCONTROL
19.2.2010 T2 Versu 111.19 75
T2 Versu, components
79
Model Code Page
11. AUTOCONTROL
19.2.2010 T2 Versu 111.19 76
CAN bus (AC15.2)
80
Model Code Page
11. AUTOCONTROL
19.2.2010 T2 Direct 111.20 77
T2 Direct, components
81
Model Code Page
11. AUTOCONTROL
19.2.2010 T2 Direct 111.20 78
CAN bus (AC14.2)
82
Model Code Page
12. FEATURES
1.5.2008 All 120 1
Contents
12 Features:
121.1 . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
121.2 . . . Preaheating and postheating, EEM2 and EEM3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
121.3 . . . Gear ratio tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
83
Model Code Page
12. FEATURES
1.5.2008 All 120 2
84
Model AC System Transmission Semi ---automatic EEM2 EEM3 TC1 TC2 TT UC1 INFOLINE AGROLINE PROLINE
range gear
6400 AC2.4 Syncro EEM2 AGROLINE
6250H AC5.2 HiTech TC1 INFOLINE

12. FEATURES
6350H AC5.2 HiTech TC1 INFOLINE

6550H AC5.4 HiTech EEM2 TC1 AGROLINE
6850H AC5.4 HiTech EEM2 TC1 AGROLINE
C90 AC8.3 HiTech TC1 INFOLINE (x)

C120 AC8.5 HiTech EEM2 TC1 AGROLINE (x)
C120e AC8.5 HiTech EEM2 TC1 AGROLINE (x)
85
M120 AC5.5 HiTech EEM2 TC1 AGROLINE (x)

M120e AC5.5 HiTech EEM2 TC1 AGROLINE (x)
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
(x) optional
All
Model
Code
121.1
1
Page
Engine functions Automatics TwinTrac Power lift
Model Can be Decreased DPS Transport Sigma ECO ECO U ---Pilot Front 4WD Full Differential Can be Can be ACB ACD Can be
fitted idle speed boost boost Power (always) feature axle, Automatics lock fitted fitted (radar) fitted
with when (std/eco) Steering Automatics with with with
Cruise P ---brake angle TwinTrac TwinTrac Turbine
Control on sensor (UC2) clutch
12. FEATURES
6400 X X ACB X
6250H X ACB X
6350H X ACB X
6550H X X ACB X
6850H X X ACB X
C90 ACB X
C100 ACB X
C110 ACB X
86
C120 X ACB X
C120e X X ACB
C130 X ACB X
C150 X ACB
M120 X X ACB X
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
M120e X X X ACB
M130 X X ACB X
All
M150 X X ACB
Model
Code
121.1
2
Page
range gear
N101cCR AC9.2 Syncro EEM3 AGROLINE

12. FEATURES
N91h AC10.0 HiTech TC1 AGROLINE

N101cCR AC10.2 HiTech EEM3 TC1 AGROLINE
N111eh AC10.1 HiTech EEM2 TC1 AGROLINE
N111ehCR AC10.2 HiTech EEM3 TC1 AGROLINE
N121h AC10.2 HiTech EEM3 TC1 AGROLINE
N141h AC10.2 HiTech EEM3 TC1 AGROLINE
N121LS AC11.2 HiTech Semi ---automatic EEM3 TC1 TC2 TT UC1 PROLINE
87
N141LS AC11.2 HiTech Semi ---automatic EEM3 TC1 TC2 TT UC1 PROLINE
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
121.1
3
Page
12. FEATURES
N101cCR X ACB X
N91h ACB X
N101h ACB X
N101hCR X X ACB X
N111h ACB X
N111eh X X ACB
N111ehCR X X X ACB
N121h X X X X ACB X
N141h X X X X ACB
88
N121LS X X X X X X X X
N141LS X X X X X X X
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
121.1
4
Page
range gear
T120c AC2.4 Syncro EEM2 AGROLINE

12. FEATURES

T170cCR AC2.7 Syncro EEM3 AGROLINE
T120cH AC5.4 HiTech EEM2 TC1 AGROLINE

T140ecH AC5.4 HiTech EEM2 TC1 AGROLINE
89
T170cHCR AC5.7 HiTech EEM3 TC1 AGROLINE
T120 AC5.3 HiTech TC1

T140e AC5.3 HiTech TC1
1.5.2008
31.10.2006

All
Model
Code
121.1
5
Page
12. FEATURES
T120c X X ACB
T130c X X ACB
T150c X X ACB
T160c X X ACB
T170c X X ACB
T170cCR X X ACB
T120cH X X ACB
T130cH X X ACB
T140ecH X X X ACB
90
T150cH X X ACB
T160cH X X ACB
T170cH X X ACB
T17cHCR X X X ACB
T120 X ACB
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
T130 X ACB
T140e X X ACB
All
T160 X ACB
Model
T170 X ACB
Code
121.1
6
Page
range gear
T120 AC5.5 HiTech EEM2 TC1 AGROLINE (x)

12. FEATURES
T140e AC5.5 HiTech EEM2 TC1 AGROLINE (x)

T160CR AC6.6 HiTech EEM3 TC1 TC2 PROLINE
T170CR AC5.6 HiTech EEM3 TC1 AGROLINE (x)
T180 AC6.1, HiTech EEM2 TC1 TC2 PROLINE
AC6.2
T190 AC6.1, HiTech EEM2 TC1 TC2 PROLINE
AC6.2
91
(x) optional
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
121.1
7
Page
12. FEATURES
T120 X X ACB
T130 X X ACB
T140e X X X ACB
T150 X X ACB
T160 X X ACB
T160CR X X Sigma U ---Pilot X X X X X
T170 X X ACB
T170CR X X X ACB
T180 X X Sigma U ---Pilot X X X X X
T180CR X X X X Sigma U ---Pilot X X X X X
92
T190 X X Sigma U ---Pilot X X X X X
T190CR X X X X Sigma U ---Pilot X X X X X
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
121.1
8
Page
range gear
T121c AC9.2 Syncro EEM3 ARGOLINE (x)

12. FEATURES

T121h AC10.2 HiTech EEM3 TC1 ARGOLINE (x)

T151eh AC10.2 HiTech EEM3 TC1 ARGOLINE (x)
T191h AC10.21 HiTech EEM3 TC1 PROLINE
93
T151eLS AC11.2 HiTech Semi ---automatic EEM3 TC1 TC2 TT UC1 PROLINE
T161LS AC11.2 HiTech Semi ---automatic EEM3 TC1 TC2 TT UC1 PROLINE
(x) optional
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
121.1
9
Page
12. FEATURES
T121c X ACB
T131c X ACB
T161c X ACB
T171c X ACB
T121h X X ACB
T131h X X X ACB
T151eh X X X X ACB
T161h X X X ACB
T171h X X X ACB
94
T191h X X X X Sigma
T151eLS X X X X U ---Pilot X X X X X
T161LS X X X U ---Pilot X X X X X
T171LS X X X U ---Pilot X X X X X
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
T191LS X X X X Sigma U ---Pilot X X X X X

All
Model
Code
121.1
10
Page
Model Code Page
12.FEATURES
1.5.2008 EEM models 121.2 11
EEM2 and EEM3 PREHEATING AND POSTHEATING
Temperature limits and heating times
EEM2 Software version

V1.1, V1.2, V1.3
Preheating 6000, C, M, N T
-- Temperature ... ---15˚C ---15˚C...0˚C 0˚C... ... ---15˚C ---15˚C...0˚C 0˚C...
-- Time 20 s 7s --- 15 s 5s ---
Postheating
-- Time 60 s 60 s 30 s 60 s 60 s 30 s

V1.5, V1.6
Preheating 6000, C, M, N T
-- Time 20 s 7s --- 15 s 5s ---
Postheating
-- Time 60 s 60 s 30 s 60 s 60 s 30 s

V1.1, V1.4
Preheating N, T
-- Temperature ... ---20˚C ---20˚C...5˚C 5˚C...
-- Time 25 s 5s ---
Postheating
-- Temperature ...0˚C 0˚C...15˚C 15˚C...
-- Time 60 s 60 s 30 s
95
Model Code Page
12. FEATURES
1.5.2008 EEM models 121.2 12
96
Model Code Page
12. FEATURES
1.5.2008 N series 121.3 13
Gear ratio, N series
97
Model Code Page
12. FEATURES
1.5.2008 T series 121.3 14
Gear ratio, T series
98
Model Code Page
12. FEATURES
1.5.2008 T1 series 121.3 15
Gear ratio, T1 series
99
12. FEATURES
19.2.2010 Versu 121.3 16
Gear ratio, N2 Versu and T2 Versu
100
Model Code Page
12. FEATURES
19.2.2010 Direct 121.3 17
Gear ratio, N2 Direct and T2 Direct
101
Model Code Page
12. FEATURES
19.2.2010 Direct 121.3 18
102
20. Basic fault finding
22. Front loader, Ålö
23. Basic measurements

104
Model Code Page
22. FRONT LOADER, ÅLÖ
22.1.2006 All 220 1
Contents
22 Front loader, Ålö:

221.1 . . . Fault finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
105
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 220 2
106
Model Code Page
22. FRONT LOADER, ÄLÖ
22.1.2006 All 221.1 1
ELECTRODRIVE CDC, components
Joystick
Control box
107
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 221.1 2
Valve block
Wiring diagram
108
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 221.1 3
Fault finding
Error codes
Error Led blinking on Led blinking on Description Error comes

Code Joystick Electronic box from
11 1Yellow + 1Green 1RedLed12 + Supply voltage read Control box
1RedLed13 on Electronic box is
too high
12 1Yellow + 2Green 1RedLed12 + Supply voltage read Joystick
2RedLed13 on Joystick is too high
13 1Yellow + 3Green 1RedLed12 + Supply voltage read Control box
3RedLed13 on Electronic box is
too low
14 1Yellow + 4Green 1RedLed12 + Supply Voltage read Joystick
4RedLed13 on Joystick is too low
15 No blinking (*) 1RedLed12 + CAN Rx failed on Joystick (*) In this case it’s not
5RedLed13 Electronic box possible to show error on
joystick because only
electronic box knows the
problem (joystick continues
to transmit until message
arrives to electronic box)
21 2Yellow + 1Green No blinking (**) CAN Rx failed on Control box (**) In this case it’s not
Joystick possible to show error on
electronic box because only
joystick knows the problem
(electronic box continues to
transmit until message
arrives to joystick)
22 2Yellow +2Green 2RedLed12 + Supply line to Control box Shut off system, disconnect
2RedLed13 Backpressure Coil and 7---pole connector and wait
Diverter 3 is interrupted a few minutes
23 2Yellow + 3Green 2RedLed12 + Supply line to On/Off Control box
3RedLed13 Coils (except divrter 3)
is interrupted
24 2Yellow + 4Green 2RedLed12 + Proportional coil 1A Control box
4RedLed13 not connected or not
working properly
25 2Yellow +5Green 2RedLed12 + Proportional coil 1B Control box
working properly
31 3Yellow + 1Green 3RedLed12 + Proportional coil 2A Control box
working properly
32 3Yellow + 2Green 3RedLed12 + Proportional coil 2B Control box
working properly
33 3Yellow + 3Green 3redLed12 + Backpressure coil not Control box (*) This error code is
3RedLed13 connected or not enabled only if settings for
working properly (*) SDM valve (=open center
valve) are loaded.
34 3Yellow + 4Green 3RedLed12 + One or more On/Off Control box
4RedLed13 coils not connected or
not working properly
35 3Yellow + 5Green 3RedLed12 + Joystick signal out of Joystick
5RedLed13 range on Y---axis
41 4Yellow + 1Green 4RedLed12 + Joystick signal out of Joystick
1RedLed13 range on X---axis
109
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 221.1 4
Error Led blinking on Led blinking on Description Error comes

Code Joystick Electronic box from
42 4Yellow + 2Green 4RedLed12 + Joystick Center Joystick
2RedLed13 Detection failed
43 4Yellow + 3Green 4RedLed12 + Supply line to AAC Control box Shut off system, disconnect
3RedLed13 interrupted 7---pole connector and wait
a few minutes
110
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 221.1 5
Trouble shooting
Symptom A ON/OFF lamp does not give light when P0 is activated
1. Press P4 and / or P5
a. If L1 and/or L2 gives light, exchange lamp in P0
b. If L1 and/or L2 doesn’t give light, check power source including fuses. See Wiring diagram.
2. Check L10 and L11
a. If L10 and L11 doesn’t give light, connect connector C1 directly to C2. If then L10 and L11 gives light,
exchange CANBUS cable.
b. Disconnect seven ---pole connector for loader
c. If L10 and L11 doesn’t give light, exchange control box. If that doesn’t help, see d.
d. If L10 and L11 doesn’t give light, exchange joystick.
Symptom B No function for boom and bucket

1. Factory setting
a. Restore factory setting. See Manual 12155016.
2.Check error codes on control box and joystick
a. Check the reason for error code in error code list. Code 3+4 deactivated by pressing P5. See
Manual 12155016.
b. Connect ground cable between bracket for Joystick and chassis. See manual 12155016.
3. Check signal transmission
a. When manoeuvring the joystick in X--- and Y--- direction, L12, L13, L14 and L15 shall give light for
each respective direction. L16 is always giving light 30sec after start and 4sec after manoeuvring.
4. Check CANBUS ---cable
a. Connect connector C1 to C2
5. Check connector C3
a. Cleanse
b. Check connector pins in connector
6. Check servo pressure
a. Increase to 2000 rpm
b. Measure servo pressure in M (BSP 1/4”). Use equipment withstanding 0---210bar.
c. Override proportional pressure reducing valve “C” (only for open centre) according to “Symptom
B“, 7a.
d. Check spool for servo pressure generating (only open centre)
7. Check proportional pressure reducing valves
a. Override proportional pressure reducing valves. Solenoids are activated mechanically in hole Ø
2mm close to the connector. See manual 12155016.
b. Proportional pressure reducing valves are interchangeable
8. Check system pressure
a. Measure pressure in port P
Symptom C No function for boom or bucket

1. See “Symptom B”
a. Point 1 --- 4
b. Point 7
2. Check signals for proportional pressure reducing valves
a. Move connector 1 and 2 to B2 and A2. Move connector 3 and 4 to B1 and A1
3. Check quick couplings
a. Remove quick couplings. Check poppets inside.
111
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 221.1 6
Symptom D No function for bucket

1. See “Symptom C”
2. Check valve for 3rd and/or 4th function
a. Spool not in neutral position
b. Check chock valves
Symptom E Uncontrolled movement of loader with handle in neutral

1. Factory setting
2. Check if electronic or hydraulic problem
a. Shut off suspension system for loader (if fitted)
b. Shut off CDC with P0 for verification if hydraulic or electronic problem
c. Check sticking in proportional pressure reducing valves
3. Thermo chock problem (mainly LS ---valve)
a. Check difference in temperature between oil and environment
b. Check / increase restrictor (only load sensing valve)
Symptom F Bad response or rattling function

1. Factory setting
2. Accumulator
a. Check servo pressure accumulator on valve. Repeated lowerings of boom from max. height shall
be possible.
3. Servo pressure
a. Check servo pressure generating when starting the tractor. See “Symptom B“, 6.
Symptom G No function for 3rd and/or 4th function

1. Check error codes on control box
a. Check the reason for error code in error code list. See manual 12155016.
2. Check the lamp on connector for 3rd alt 4th function valve
a. Lamps shall give light with activated function
b. Check harness for 3rd and/or 4th function
3. Measure voltage
a. Measure voltage between pin 1 and 2 ( at connector) with connector connected to solenoid
4. Check quick couplings
a. Remove quick couplings. Check poppets.
5. Check valve for 3rd and/or 4th function valve
a. Check sticking / spring for spool
Symptom H No function for Hydraulic Locking

1. Check error codes on control box
a. Check the reason for error code in error code list. See manual 12155016.
2. Check lamp on connector for valve
a. Lamp shall give light with activated function
b. Check harness
c. Check connection in 7---pole connector for loader. Note that there are two different connections
depending on product. See Manual 12155016.
112
Model Code Page
23. BASIC MEASUREMENTS
22.1.2006 All 230 1
Contents
23 Basic measurements:
231.1 . . . CAN ---BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
231.2 . . . Bosch VP30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
113
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 230 2
114
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 231.1 1
Measurements of the CAN BUS

--- There are terminal resistors (120 Ohm) inside the EC unit and the other near to TC1 unit.
--- If a fault code concerning CAN bus appears in the display (side pillar), there is a fault in CAN wires or in a control unit.
The system can automatically tell which of the control units can’t receive any message (the control units monitors each
others).
--- If the display is blank or if CAN messages don’t go through the CAN bus, a multimeter can be used to find the point where
the CAN bus wires are broken (or which of control units is faulty).
CAN bus is physically OK
--- If resistance between CAN ---Hi and CAN ---Lo wires (at any point) is about 60 ohm, CAN bus is physically OK.
The control units EC and TC1 are also OK, since the terminal resistors (120 ohm) are situated in EC and close to TC1.
--- The TC2 control unit and the ICL instrument panel are also OK, because the CAN bus goes through those units.
CAN bus wire is broken
--- If resistance between CAN Hi and Lo wires (at any point) is about 120 ohm, a CAN bus wire is broken (one or both wires).
115
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 231.1 2
CAN bus is physically broken
If the CAN bus is physically broken, start to determine where the faulty point is situated.
--- At first measure resistance of CAN ---Lo wire between e.g. EC and TC2 control units.
--- So, the measurement shall be done between connectors Lo---Lo or Hi ---Hi. If the resistance is about 0 ohm, the wire is OK
between measured points.
--- If the resistance is about 240 ohm, the bus wire is broken between measured points. In the figure the CAN ---Lo wire is
broken between TC1 and ICL instrument panel.
116
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 231.1 3
Short-- circuit in the CAN bus
-- If resistance between CAN ---Hi and CAN ---Lo is about 0 ohm, there is a short---circuit in the CAN bus.
--- Detach one of control units and measure the resistance between CAN ---Hi and CAN ---Lo connector pins on the control unit.
Fix the unit back if it is OK.
--- Then detach the next unit and measure it, and so on until the faulty unit has been found. If resistance is about 0 ohm the
unit is faulty.
---When all the units have been checked and still there is a short---circuit, the CAN bus wires must be faulty. To find the point
where the fault is situated the wires must be checked visually.
117
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 231.1 4
How to measure the voltage of the CAN bus
--- Switch the power on and measure the voltage between CAN ---Hi and CAN ---Lo wires and the earth.
--- The voltage should be between 2,4V...2,7 V
118
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 231.2 5
Bosch VP30 pump
1) Removing the connector:

--- pull first the locking part outwards (1)
--- pull the connector (2)
2) Switch the current on.

Measure the voltage between the poles 6 and 7 of the cable harness connector (A1M) for the control unit.
The value should be about 12 V.
3) Current off. Remove the connector from the control unit. Switch current on.
Measure the voltage between the pole 1 and earth. The value should be 2,4...2,7 V
119
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 231.2 6
4) Current off. Remove the connector from the control unit.. Switch current on.
Measure the voltage between the pole 2 and earth. The value should be 2,4...2,7 V
5) Current off. Remove the connector from the control unit. Switch current on.
Measure the voltage between the poles 2 and 1. The value should be about 0 V.
6) Current off. Measure the resistance between the poles 2 and 1. The value should be 110...130 ohms.
120
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 231.2 7
7) It is not allowed to make any resistance measurements from the Bosch VP30 PCU connector pins!
This may destroy the Bosch injection pump!!!
Make sure, that the Bosch VP30 PCU connector is disconnected, when you are measuring wirings.
8) Testing the injection pump solenoid.

Remove the fuse F4 (25A) from the fuse box (behind the engine shield plate).
Measure the current during starting. The value should be 2...3 A.
121
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 231.2 8
122
31. Checking of service
codes
30. Service codes
32. Service codes for Mezzo,
Mega, Hitech, C, M and T
Series
33. Service codes for LS,

Versu and Direct models
124
31. CHECKING OF SERVICE CODES
19.2.2010 All 310 1
Contents
31 Checking of service codes

311.1 ... Appearing of service codes and low fuel pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
311.2 ... Instrument panel’s low fuel level light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
311.3 ... Instrument panel’s engine oil pressure light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
311.4 ... Activation of the service mode FI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
311.5 ... ACB/ACDS power lift diagnostic light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
311.6 . . . ISO indicator light (ISO 11786 and ISO 11783) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
311.7 . . . Service code display on LS models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
311.8 . . . Service code display on Versu and Direct models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
311.9 . . . AutoComfort indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
311.10 . . Front axle suspension switch indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
125
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
1.5.2008 All 310 2
126
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 311.1 1
Appearing of service codes and low fuel pressure

Model AC system Service codes Low fuel pressure Explanation
Instrument panel (Infoline/Agroline)
No service codes.
If fuel feed pressure is low instument
panel’s low fuel level light is on
(flashes if pressure is unstable).
EEM
Agroline instrument panel
Instrument panel’s engine oil pressure

light flashes the EEM service codes.
If fuel feed pressure is low instrument
panel’s low fuel level light flashes.
Pillar display
Agroline instrument panel
Pillar display shows service codes of

transmission.
panel’s low fuel level light is on
(flashes if pressure is unstable).
EEM
Pillar display
Agroline Instrument panel
Pillar display shows transmission’s and

engine’s service codes.

panel’s low fuel level light flashes and
pillar display shows the service code
L353.
EEM
Pillar display
Proline instrument panel
If fuel feed pressure is low Proline

instument panel’s display shows
warning of low fuel pressure and pillar
display shows the service code L353.
127
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 311.1 2
128
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 311.2 3
Instrument panel’s low fuel level light (low fuel feed pressure)
Model AC system Low fuel feed pressure
129
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 311.2 4
130
Model Code Page
31. CHECKING OF SERVICE CODES 6400
22.1.2006 T120c-- T170c 311.3 5
Instrument panel’s engine oil pressure light

Instrument panel’s engine oil pressure light flashes the EEM service codes.
Note! The oil pressure fault takes priority over an EEM fault because an oil pressure fault is the most critical.
1. When a service code is activated. The engine oil pres- A service code is a two or three digit number (for example: 122
sure light flashes for 0.5 seconds at 4 second intervals. fuel pressure LOW, or 20 EC control unit inside temperature
Stop the engine by switching power off. too high). Format of service codes: 2 seconds ON = 100, 1
second ON= 10 and 0.5 seconds ON = 1. The service code
2. Switch power back on but don’t start engine. Immedi- is presented in a continual cycle.
ately press clutch pedal three times (must not take more
then 4 seconds). After 2.5 seconds the first service code will 4. The next service code can be seen by pressing the
appear. clutch pedal once. The next service code after that appears
the same way.
Note! If there are no service codes in memory then the en-
gine oil pressure light pulses (on for 0.75 seconds and off 5. When all service codes have been shown, then engine
0.25 seconds) continuously. By pressing the clutch pedal oil pressure light pulses 0.75 second on and 0.25 off con-
three times the engine oil pressure light returns to it’s nor- tinuously.
mal function. Pressing the clutch pedal three times will allow the function
of the engine oil pressure light to return to its normal func-
3. The service codes will be presented one by one. The tion and erase any service codes in the memory.
latest code will be shown first.
131
Model Code Page
31. CHECKING OF SERVICE CODES 6400
22.1.2006 T120c-- T170c 311.3 6
132
Model Code Page
31. CHECKING OF SERVICE CODES With HiTech
22.1.2006 Transmission 311.4 7
Activation of the service mode FI
Push the both push buttons of the DPS and the HiShift push button on the gear selector knob at the same time. Depress the
clutch pedal and turn the ignition on (or start the engine).
After this select desired F mode with the DPS buttons and confirm the choice with the DPS pre ---programming button.
F ---modes of the
tractor
Service memory Service memory mode FI has been made, where service codes can be checked and removed
mode FI
Test mode FII It is possible in the test mode FII to check the (electric) function of various components (control unit
input and output signals) by comparing actual values shown on the display from the different compo-
nents with the correct values.
Setting mode FIII In the setting mode FIII the calibrations and changes of the adjusting valves can be made for the
electric equipment.
Moving in the menu of the service mode
Return to menu of the F-- mode
Returning to the F mode menu from FI and FII can be done by pushing both the
DPS buttons and HiShift button on the speed gear lever knob at the same time.
Exit
Escaping from FIII mode occurs only by switching power off,

because the returning to F mode menu cannot be done in that
case.
133
Model Code Page
31. CHECKING OF SERVICE CODES With HiTech
FI: Service code memory mode
FI: Service code memory mode

There is a memory where the visible service codes can be checked and removed. The memory stores three latest service codes
and their running hours (according to the control unit hour counter, not an exact value).
When the service code memory has been activated, the display shows in the lower part of the display the service codes stored
in the memory. The service codes are visible in a correct order so that after the activation the oldest code is displayed. This service
code is visible for two seconds and after this is shown the running hours of the code. The running hours are shown also for two
seconds.
If there are many codes in the memory, a line is shown one second between each codes. Then the next code and the running
hours are shown. When all codes and running hours have been shown, the first code appears again in the display. The codes
are shown until the current is switched off or the DPS pre ---programming button is pressed for more than 4 seconds.
If there are no codes in the memory, the line is blinking in the lower part of the display. The service code memory can be emptied
by pressing the DPS pre ---programming button for more than 4 seconds, after which the codes disappear and the line starts to
blink.
Example: Checking and deleting of the service code from service memory mode.
1. Check the service codes.
2. If service codes are deleted from memory:

press the DPS pre ---programming button for more
than 4 seconds and switch power off.
3. If service codes are not deleted from memory:

escape from the service memory mode by switching
off current.
134
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 311.5 9
ACB/ACDS power lift
Function of diagnostic light
When the current is switched on with an ignition switch, the diagnostic light is lit for a while (book symbol). This is the self ---
testing of the ACB/ACDS system. After a short time the diagnostic light is lit continuously. This indicates that the power lift is
locked. When the light is on, all functions are locked, but the push buttons function.
The power lift is activated by turning the lift/lower switch first to the lifting and then to the lowering position, at which time the
diagnostic light goes out and the power lift responds to all switches. Immediately after the activating the ACB/ACDS limits the
supply current to the solenoid valves for safety. This limit delays movements of the lower links. The current supply limit disap-
pears, when the function limit of the control unit has been achieved or if the lift/lower switch is used anew.
After use of the push buttons the ACB/ACDS is locked and the diagnostic light is illuminated.
Service codes
ACB/ACDS power lift continually monitors possible malfunctions in the system. The faults are divided into three different levels
as follows:
1.
--- the power lift is locked
--- relay closes (protects outputs)
--- diagnostic light indicates the fault
--- Remedy: Repair the fault, start the tractor and activate the power lift.
2.
--- the power lift is locked.
--- diagnostic light indicates the fault
--- Remedy: Repair the fault and activate the power lift with the lift/lower switch
3.
--- the power lift continually functions
--- diagnostic light indicates the fault. When the lift/lower switch is turned, the diagnostic light goes out, if the fault has disap-
peared.
A possible fault can be localised with the aid of the diagnostic light, which displays by flashing the number of the service
code. For example, if the signal wire to the draft control selector is damaged or there is poor contacts in connectors (service
code 36), the diagnostic lights flashes as follows:
--- Long pause --- three flashes --- short pause --- six flashes.
During momentary faults, the diagnostic light flashes, until the lift/lower switch is turned, although the fault has already disap-
peared.
135
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 311.5 10
136
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 311.6 11
ISO 11786 (implement signal connector) and ISO 11783 (ISOBUS)
Function of the ISO indicator light

ISO 11786 and ISO 11783 control units continually monitors possible malfunctions in the system. System is working properly
if the ISO indicator light is on (not blinking or light is off).
The faults are divided into three different types as follows: input, output and other.
A possible fault can be localised with the aid of the ISO indicator light, which displays by flashing the number of the service
code. For example, if the parameter file is missing or error (service code 42), the ISO indicator light flashes as follows:
--- Long pause --- four flashes --- short pause --- two flashes.
137
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 311.6 12
138
Model Code Page
31.10.2006 LS 311.7 13
Service code display on LS models (displayed on TT)
When there is an active service code, the service manual

symbol is blinking. When the code disactivates blinking of the
symbol stops.
The symbol
Service code information in the service code screen is 11

characters long number in SPN/FMI/SA format.
--- The cursor can be moved in service code list by up
and down buttons. Short press moves cursor one

field to selected direction. Long press moves cursor
constantly to selected direction.
The service code can been seen on the service code screen.
That can be reached as follows. --- Short press of the [ESC] button returns to Tractor
info.
1. Short press of the [ESC] button returns to the main
screen.
--- Long press of the [ESC] button returns to previously
active drive display.
2. Move the cursor [RIGHT] to select Tractor info.
Tractor info shows general information of the tractor.
3. Long press of [OK] button activates the service

code screen and shows the active service codes.
139
Model Code Page
31.10.2006 LS 311.7 14
140
Model Code Page
31. CHECKING OF SERVICE CODES Versu
19.2.2010 Direct 311.8 15
Service code display on Versu and Direct models
When there is an active service code, the book symbol --- The cursor can be moved in service code list by up
flashes on the tractor terminal display. The flashing stops
when the service code deactivates. and down buttons. Short press moves cursor one
field to selected direction. Long press moves cursor
The service code can been seen on the service code screen. constantly to selected direction.
That can be reached as follows.
1. If the tractor terminal main menu is not displayed, press --- Short press of the ESC button returns to main menu.
ESC as many times as needed.
--- Long press of the ESC button returns to previously

active drive display.
2. Press the down arrow two times.

The service codes are displayed on the display.
Service code information in the service code screen is 11

characters long number in SPN/FMI/SA format.
141
Model Code Page
31. CHECKING OF SERVICE CODES N2 Series
19.2.2010 T2 Series 311.8 16
142
Model Code Page
1.5.2008
19.2.2010 All 311.9 17
AutoComfort indicator light

The service codes are shown by the blinking indicator light of the switch so that e.g. number 4 means four quick flashes of the
indicator light. Between the periods the indicator light is off about three seconds. These periods of four flashes and three
seconds will repeat as long as the control unit is switched off.
The diagnostics shows only one fault at a time. If there are several faults at the same time, the first fault in the list is shown.
When the fault has been corrected, the second fault will be shown after following start.
143
Model Code Page
1.5.2008
19.2.2010 All 311.9 18
144
Model Code Page
31. CHECKING OF SERVICE CODES N Series
19.2.2010 N2 Series 311.10 19
Front suspension switch indicator light

The service codes are shown by the blinking indicator light of the switch.
The switch indicator light blinks also when the calibration is in progress.
145
Model Code Page
1.5.2008
31. CHECKING OF SERVICE CODES N Series
19.2.2010 N2 Series 311.10 20
146
32. SERVICE CODES
19.2.2010 All 320 1
Contents
32 Service codes:
321.1 ... Service code and levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
321.2 ... Service codes of the AC system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
321.3 ... Calibration interruption codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
321.4 ... Service codes for ACB power lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
321.5 ... Service codes for ACDS power lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
321.6 . . . Service codes for ISO 11786 (implement signal connector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
321.7 . . . Service codes for Semi active cabin and front axle suspension (AutoComfort) . . . . 109
321.8 . . . Service codes for hydraulic front axle suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
147
32. SERVICE CODES
1.5.2008 All 320 2
148
Model Code Page
32. SERVICE CODES
22.1.2006 All 321.1 1
SERVICE CODE AND LEVELS

The self ---diagnosis of Auto Control follows up the possible faults in the system and shows the service code, which appear in the
front pillar display. A book image and the symbol of the module is shown in the front pillar display, which the fault has been found.
Construction of the service code
P101 Fault in the control current for the DPS1 solenoid (Y4)
the target number
the fault type
the fault group
The construction of the service code specifies the fault as fol-

low:
The first letter from left shows the fault group: The second number from left shows the fault type:
A: analog input (position and temp. sensors) 1=short circuit or cut
C: can messages 2=cut
d: digital input (switches) 3=value not in permissible limits
E: control unit fault 4=multi ---disc clutch is slipping
F: frequency input (rpm sensors)
P: proportional output (proportional valves) The two RH side number show the target number of the
L: logical fault (slipping clutch) fault:
01 ---99= target numbering
Service levels
Note! The service level for service code can be found in the Service level 3 (”home driving”)
service and calibration interruption code table (see code The service code in question in the display. Shuttle automatics
363.1). are not in function and the PTO stops. Driving direction can be
engaged only with clutch pedal depressed. The control unit
The number of the service levels is 5 pcs, in which the greatest reads shuttle parameters from the table for greatest tempera-
number means a great priority and vice versa. The service tures.
level is active, until the current is switched off. If there are two The control unit connects all faulty solenoid outputs unener-
service codes simultaneously with the priority of 3 (for gised and takes them out of use. After this the control unit
instance if two DPS proportional valves are in short circuit sim- chooses undamaged DPS ---solenoid output and uses the
ultaneously), then the service level is always changed to 5 and DPS speed in question. Now ”home driving” is possible.
the tractor cannot be driven, before the service has been
done. Service level 4 (power limitation)
The service code in the display. Engine power or engine
Service level 1 (”service code”) speed limited.
Only a service code in question in the display. The tractor can
be driven, but DPS can have malfunctions. Service level 5 (”immediate downdrive”)
The control unit connects all proportional valves unenergised.
Service level 2 (”PTO protection”) Only a service code in the display, not other information. The
The service code in the display. The PTO is disengaged tractor cannot be driven, before the service has been done.
immediately and a driver can activate it after the current is This is for protecting slipping clutches and engine overload-
switched off and on. The tractor can still be driven. ing.
149
Model Code Page
32. SERVICE CODES
22.1.2006 All 321.1 2
150
32. SERVICE CODES
31.10.2006 All 321.2 3
Service codes of the AC system
Structure of the service code table

Valtra Service code: Shown in display.
SisuDiesel fault code: Shown by illuminating of the oil pressure warning lamp (Syncro models).
Service level: There are 5 pcs of the service level.
1 = A service code in the display and tractor can be driven, but DPS can have malfunctions.
2 = A service code in the display and PTO is disengaged immediately and a driver can activate it after the current is switched off
and on. Tractor can still be driven.
3 = A service code in the display and shuttle automatics are not in function and the PTO stops. Driving direction can be engaged
only with clutch pedal depressed. The control unit reads shuttle parameters from the table for greatest temperatures.
4 = A service code in the display and engine power or engine speed limited.
5 = A service code in the display and tractor cannot be driven, before the service has been done.
Control unit:
TC1 = Transmission control unit 1
TC2 = Transmission control unit 2
EC = EC unit (EEM2 or EEM3)
Description: Description of Service Code.
Effect: E.g. fuel quantity reduction.
Solution: Instructions how to solve the problem.
Valtra Sisu Diesel Service Control Description Effect Solution

Service code fault code level unit
151
32. SERVICE CODES
31.10.2006 All 321.2 4
Service codes of the EC unit and Bosch VP Service codes of the Transmission control
30 injection pump unit (TC1)
Fault finding Transmission control unit (TC1)
1. Start fault finding after seeing the service code and then The Transmission control unit (TC1) limits actions of
switch the ignition off at least 5 seconds and then back to on. transmission, when service code is activated.Limited actions
could be e.g PTO is disengaged, shuttle automatics are not
If the service code is still active in function and driving direction can be engaged only with
clutch pedal depressed.It is possible that tractor cannot be
2 Do the fault finding according to service code table column driven, before service has been done.
“Solution”.
Possible influence of service code can be seen in service code Service codes of the Transmission control
table column “Reaction, influence, fuel quantity reduction“.
unit (TC2)
If the problem has not been solved after doing the fault finding
according to service code table column “Solution”. Transmission control unit (TC2)
Using another EC unit The Transmission control unit (TC2) limits actions of
transmission, when service code is activated.Limited actions
3. Then test the EC unit functionality with another EC unit. could be e.g PTO is disengaged, shuttle automatics are not
in function and driving direction can be engaged only with
NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code clutch pedal depressed.It is possible that tractor cannot be
E230 will be activated, because verification of the Bosch VP driven, before service has been done.
30 injection pump serial number is incorrect.
Also other service codes can be activated e.g the AC system

is diffrent (E233) If service code dissappear. Try the original
Engine control unit one more time.
If service code appears again, the original Engine control unit

could be damaged.
Using another Bosch VP 30 injection pump
4. Then test the Bosch VP 30 injection pump functionality with

another Bosch VP 30 injection pump.
NOTE If another Bosch VP 30 injection pump is used, service

code E230 will be activated, because verification of the Bosch
VP 30 injection pump serial number is incorrect.
When using another Bosch VP 30 injection pump, connect

only the Bosch VP 30 injection pump controller to connector
and switch ignition on.
If service code dissapper. Try the original Bosch VP 30

injection pump one more time.
If service code appear again, the original Bosch VP 30

injection pump could be damaged.
152
Valtra Sisu Service Control Description Effect Solution
Service Diesel level unit
code fault
code
A116 293 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Fuel filter Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
pressure 75 % from rated power. system is functional and the service code is not active with
The measurement has failed inside the the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
EC unit. Possible reason is EC unit NOTE Engine functions dependent on defective.
hardware defect. the fuel filter pressure are not active.
NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code
E237 (The engine specification number in the EC unit is
incorrect for this engine type) or E238 (Engine serial number
32. SERVICE CODES
in the EC unit does not match for the engine) will be

activated, because of engine serial number mismatch or
engine specification mismatch.
A118 93 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Oil pressure Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
The measurement has failed inside the 75 % from rated power. system is functional and the service code is not active with
EC unit. Possible reason is EC unit the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
hardware defect. NOTE Engine functions dependent on defective.
the oil pressure are not active.
153
A119 104 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Boost pressure Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
the boost pressure are not active.
1.5.2008

31.10.2006

All
Model

Code
321.2
5
Page
code fault
code
A120 117 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Intake manifold Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
temp. 75 % from rated power. system is functional and the service code is not active with
EC unit. Possible reason is EC unit NOTE Engine functions dependent on defective.
hardware defect. the intake manifold temperature are not
active. NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code
32. SERVICE CODES

A121 109 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Coolant temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
hardware defect. NOTE Engine protection and other defective.
functions dependent on the coolant
temperature are not active. NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code
154
NOTE Engine overheating protection is incorrect for this engine type) or E238 (Engine serial number
not active. The engine may damage, if in the EC unit does not match for the engine) will be
overheating happens. activated, because of engine serial number mismatch or
A122 266 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Rail pressure Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
The measurement has failed inside the Maximum injection quantity is reduced to system is functional and the service code is not active with
EC unit. Possible reason is EC unit 50 % from rated power. the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
hardware defect. defective.
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
NOTE Engine functions dependent on

the rail pressure are not active. NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code
All

Model

Code
321.2
6
Page
code fault
code
A128 3 TC1 Fault in the position sensor supply A service code in the side pillar display
voltage for front clutch pedal (B16) and shuttle automatics are not in function
and rear clutch pedal (B1W) and the PTO stops. Driving direction can
be engaged only with clutch pedal
depressed. The control unit reads shuttle
parameters from the table for greatest
32. SERVICE CODES
temperatures.
A159 19 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Battery voltage NOTE Engine functions dependent on 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
The measurement has failed inside the the battery voltage are not active. system is functional and the service code is not active with

E237(The engine specification number in the EC unit is
incorrect for this engine type) or E238 (Engine serial
number in the EC unit does not match for the engine) will be
155
A160 261 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Fuel temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
the fuel temperature are not active.
E237(The engine specification number in the EC unit is
1.5.2008

31.10.2006

All
Model
A215 124 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Fuel filter Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor wiring, connectors
pressure 75% from rated power. and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible
Fuel filter pressure sensor defect HIGH. oxidation).
NOTE Engine functions dependent on 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
the fuel filter pressure are not active. 3. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor operation.
Code
321.2
7
Page
code fault
code
A236 39 1 EC Injection timing and fuel amount are Engine may not start. 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
not correct If the service code is still active
The Bosch VP 30 injection pump 2. Check supply voltage of the Bosch VP 30 injection pump
controller cannot recognize begin of the controller from side pillar display (FII/E/Ai16) or Valtra
injection pulse. MultiTool I/O test.
3. Check contact of through the wiring.
32. SERVICE CODES
A263 442 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Fuel filter NOTE Engine functions dependent on 1. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor wiring, connectors
pressure the fuel filter pressure are not active. and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible
The measured fuel filter pressure signal oxidation.)
value has large, quick and random 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
variations indicating poor contact 3. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor operation.
between the sensor and the EC unit.
A311 3 TC1 Open circuit or short circuit fault in A service code in the side pillar display
the gearbox oil temperature sensor and shuttle automatics are not in function
(B14) and the PTO stops. Driving direction can
Fault code also activates, if oil be engaged only with clutch pedal
temperature over +150 ˚C. depressed. The control unit reads shuttle
156
temperatures.
A312 3 TC1 Partly short circuit or oxidation in the A service code in the side pillar display
gearbox oil temperature sensor (B14) and shuttle automatics are not in function
Fault code also activates, if oil and the PTO stops. Driving direction can
temperature below ---50 ˚C. be engaged only with clutch pedal
1.5.2008
temperatures.
31.10.2006
A313 3 TC1 Fault in the signal from front gas A service code in the side pillar display
pedal position sensor (B15) and shuttle automatics are not in function
All
and the PTO stops. Driving direction can

Model

temperatures.
Code
321.2
8
Page
code fault
code
A314 3 TC1 Fault in the signal from front clutch A service code in the side pillar display
pedal position sensor (B16) and shuttle automatics are not in function
32. SERVICE CODES
temperatures.
A317 291 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Fuel filter Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor wiring, connectors
pressure 75 % from rated power. and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible
The measured fuel filter pressure signal oxidation).
is below the normal operating range NOTE Engine functions dependent on 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
(< 0,2 V). the fuel filter pressure are not active. 3. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor operation.
A323 264 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Rail pressure Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check the rail pressure sensor wiring, connectors and
The measured rail pressure signal is Maximum injection quantity is reduced to contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
above the normal operating range 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
(> 4,8 V). 3. Check the rail pressure sensor operation.
157
rail pressure are not active.
Normally the service code L216 (PRV

recognised as OPEN) is related to the rail
pressure sensor fault. Due to the sensor
fault, the closed loop rail pressure control
is not possible any more. Full fuel supply
is demanded from the high ---pressure
1.5.2008
pump and the high pressure will force

31.10.2006
the PRV (Pressure Relief Valve) to open.

All
Model
Code
321.2
9
Page
code fault
code
A324 263 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Rail pressure Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check the rail pressure sensor wiring, connectors and
The measured rail pressure signal is Maximum injection quantity is reduced to contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
below the normal operating range 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
(< 0,4 V). 3. Check the rail pressure sensor operation.
32. SERVICE CODES
Normally the service code L216 (PRV

recognised as OPEN) is related to the rail
pressure sensor fault. Due to the sensor
fault, the closed loop rail pressure control
is not possible any more. Full fuel supply
is demanded from the high ---pressure
pump and the high pressure will force
the PRV (Pressure Relief Valve) to open.
A325 18 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Battery voltage 1. Check the generator, if charging voltage is correct.
Supply voltage for EC unit is very high.
158
A326 4 TC1 Fault in the supply voltage for TC1 A service code in the side pillar display
control unit and engine power or engine speed
limited.
A327 17 1 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Battery voltage 1. Check condition of the battery for too low voltage.
Supply voltage for EC unit is very low. 2. Check contacts through wiring from the battery to the EC
unit for bad contact at some connector.
3. Check the generator, if charging voltage is correct.
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
10
Page
code fault
code
A330 56 1 EC Supply voltage of Bosch VP 30 Engine may not start. 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
injection pump controller is too low If the service code is still active
Measured by the EC unit. 2. Check supply voltage of the Bosch VP 30 injection pump
controller from side pillar display (FII/E/Ai16) or Valtra
MultiTool I/O test.
3. Check condition of the battery for too low voltage
32. SERVICE CODES
(<11,5 V).
4. Check working of the generator.
5. Check all contacts and fuses and wiring condition from
battery to the EC unit and to the Bosch VP 30 injection
pump controller for bad contct at some connector or for a
short circuit.
A331 57 5 EC Supply voltage of Bosch VP 30 After delay (20 seconds) Bosch VP 30 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
injection pump controller is too high injection pump controller supply from EC If the service code is still active
Supply voltage above 17,0 V. unit will be cutted off. 2. Check supply voltage of the Bosch VP 30 injection pump
Measured by the EC unit. controller from side pillar display (FII/E/Ai16) or Valtra
MultiTool I/O test.
159
A332 114 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Intake manifold Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the intake manifold temperature sensor wiring,
temp. 75 % from rated power. connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins
The measured intake manifold air (possible oxidation).
temperature signal is below the normal NOTE Engine functions dependent on 2. Check the intake manifold temperature sensor operation.
operating range (the sensor is integrated the intake manifold temperature are not
to the boost pressure sensor). active.
A333 115 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Intake manifold Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the intake manifold temperature sensor wiring,
1.5.2008
temp. 75 % from rated power. connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins
31.10.2006
The measured intake manifold air (possible oxidation).

temperature signal is above the normal NOTE Engine functions dependent on 2. Check the intake manifold temperature sensor operation.
operating range (the sensor is integrated the intake manifold temperature are not
All
Model
to the boost pressure sensor). active.

Code
321.2
11
Page
code fault
code
A334 116 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Intake manifold Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check condition of the air ---cooling system. (Cleanliness,
temp. 75 % from rated power. pressure tightness, fan operation, etc.).
The measured intake manifold 2. Check the intake manifold temperature sensor (boost
temperature rises above the warning limit pressure sensor) wiring, connectors and contact surfaces of
(+90 ˚C). The temperature sensor is the connector pins (possible oxidation).
integrated to the boost pressure sensor. 3. Check the intake manifold temperature sensor operation.
32. SERVICE CODES
A335 121 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Water in fuel 1. Check water separator at the bottom of the pre ---filter.
Water level in the water separator rises to Drain water from the fuelling system.
warning level. If there is no water in the fuelling system
2. Check the wiring from EC unit to sensor connector.
3. Check the supply voltage at water detector sensor
connector.
A340 110 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Coolant temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the coolant temperature sensor wiring, connectors
The measured coolant temperature 75 % from rated power. and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible
signal is below the normal operating oxidation).
range. NOTE Engine overheating protection is 2. Check the coolant temperature sensor operation.
not active. The engine may damage, if
160
overheating happens.
A341 111 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Coolant temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the coolant temperature sensor wiring, connectors
The measured coolant temperature 75 % from rated power. and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible
signal is above the normal operating oxidation).
range. NOTE Engine overheating protection is 2. Check the coolant temperature sensor operation.
1.5.2008
A342 80 4 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Front gas pedal Idle speed: engine speed goes to low 1. Check the front gas pedal position sensor operation
31.10.2006
The measured voltage from the front gas idle rpm. (output voltage) through the whole mechanical travel.
pedal position sensor is below the 2. Check the front gas pedal position sensor wiring,
normal operating range. NOTE Engine operation will return back connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins
All
to normal, when front gas pedal position (possible oxidation).

Model
sensor signal is in normal range. 3. Check the 5 V power supply from EC unit to the sensor.
Code
321.2
12
Page
code fault
code
A343 81 4 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Front gas pedal Idle speed: engine speed goes to low 1. Check the front gas pedal position sensor operation
The measured voltage from the front gas idle rpm. (output voltage) through the whole mechanical travel.
pedal position sensor is above the 2. Check the front gas pedal position sensor wiring,
to normal, when front gas pedal position (possible oxidation).
32. SERVICE CODES
A344 84 4 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Rear gas pedal Idle speed: engine speed goes to low 1. Check the rear gas pedal position sensor operation
The measured voltage from the rear gas idle rpm. (output voltage) through the whole mechanical travel.
pedal position sensor is below the 2. Check the rear gas pedal position sensor wiring,
to normal, when rear gas pedal position (possible oxidation).
A345 85 4 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Rear gas pedal Idle speed: engine speed goes to low 1. Check the rear gas pedal position sensor operation
The measured voltage from the rear gas idle rpm. (output voltage) through the whole mechanical travel.
pedal position sensor is above the 2. Check the rear gas pedal position sensor wiring,
to normal, when rear gas pedal position (possible oxidation).
161
A348 1 TC2 Fault in the signal from front axle A service code in the side pillar display
steering position sensor (B2C) and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
have malfunctions.
A349 82 4 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Hand throttle Idle speed: engine speed goes to low 1. Check the hand throttle position sensor operation (output
The measured voltage from the hand idle rpm. voltage) through the whole mechanical travel.
throttle position sensor is below the 2. Check the hand throttle position sensor wiring, connectors
1.5.2008
normal operating range. NOTE Engine operation will return back and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible
31.10.2006
to normal, when hand throttle position oxidation).

All
Model
Code
321.2
13
Page
code fault
code
A350 83 4 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Hand throttle Idle speed: engine speed goes to low 1. Check the hand throttle position sensor operation (output
The measured voltage from the hand idle rpm. voltage) through the whole mechanical travel.
throttle position sensor is above the 2. Check the hand throttle position sensor wiring, connectors
normal operating range. NOTE Engine operation will return back and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible
to normal, when hand throttle position oxidation).
32. SERVICE CODES
A351 3 TC1 Fault in the signal from rear clutch A service code in the side pillar display
pedal position sensor (B1W) and shuttle automatics are not in function
temperatures.
A354 95 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Oil pressure Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the oil pressure sensor wiring, connectors and
The measured oil pressure sensor signal 75 % from rated power. contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
is too high (> 1,3V or > 200 kPa), when 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
engine is not running. NOTE Engine oil pressure protection is 3. Check the oil pressure sensor operation.
162
not active. The engine may damage, if oil
pressure is too low.
The measured oil pressure signal is 75 % from rated power. contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
below the normal operating range 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
(< 0,2 V). NOTE Engine oil pressure protection is 3. Check the oil pressure sensor operation.
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
The measured oil pressure signal is 75 % from rated power. contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
above the normal operating range 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
All
(> 4,7 V). NOTE Engine oil pressure protection is 3. Check the oil pressure sensor operation.
Model

Code
321.2
14
Page
code fault
code
A357 100 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Boost pressure Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the boost pressure sensor wiring, connectors and
The measured boost pressure signal is 75 % from rated power. contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
below the normal operating range 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
(< 0,2 V). NOTE Engine functions dependent on 3. Check the boost pressure sensor operation.
A358 101 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Boost pressure Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the boost pressure sensor wiring, connectors and
32. SERVICE CODES
The measured boost pressure signal is 75 % from rated power. contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation.)
above the normal operating range 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
(> 4,7 V). NOTE Engine functions dependent on 3. Check the boost pressure sensor operation.
A361 252 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Fuel temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the fuel temperature sensor wiring, connectors and
The measured fuel temperature signal is 75 % from rated power. contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
above the normal operating range. 2. Check the fuel temperature sensor operation.
A362 251 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Fuel temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the fuel temperature sensor wiring, connectors and
163
The measured fuel temperature signal is 75 % from rated power. contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
below the normal operating range. 2. Check the fuel temperature sensor operation.
A365 3 TC2 Fault in the signal from rear gas pedal A service code in the side pillar display
position sensor (B2W) and shuttle automatics are not in function
1.5.2008

31.10.2006

temperatures.
4 = A service code in the side pillar
All
display and engine power or engine

Model
speed limited.
Code
321.2
15
Page
code fault
code
A366 471 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Ambient NOTE Engine functions dependent on 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
pressure the ambient pressure sensor are not system is functional and the service code is not active with
EC unit monitoring system has detected active. the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
failure at EC unit internal ambient defective.
pressure sensor. Possible reason is EC
unit hardware defect. NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code
32. SERVICE CODES

A367 472 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Ambient NOTE Engine functions dependent on 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
pressure the ambient pressure sensor are not system is functional and the service code is not active with
EC unit monitoring system has detected active. the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
failure at EC unit internal ambient defective.
pressure sensor. Possible reason is EC
unit hardware defect. NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code
164
A368 473 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Ambient 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
pressure system is functional and the service code is not active with
Ambient pressure inside EC unit the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
controller is too high. Measured pressure defective.
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
>2000 hPa.
All

Model

Code
321.2
16
Page
code fault
code
A369 474 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Ambient 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
pressure system is functional and the service code is not active with
EC unit. Possible reason is EC unit defective.
hardware defect.
32. SERVICE CODES

A390 1 TC2 Fault in the supply voltage for TC2 A service code in the side pillar display
control unit and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
have malfunctions.
C131 141 4 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Vehicle CAN Valtra parameter, 1800 rpm.
EC unit is not able to communicate with
other control units on the CAN bus.
165
NOTE EC unit cannot detect open circuit
(wiring).
C132 142 4 EC EC unit is not able to communicate “Limp home” function will be activated in 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
with Bosch VP 30 injection pump the injection pump. If the service code is still active
controller Engine revs 1400 RPM continuously. 2. Check CAN bus between EC unit and Bosch VP 30
injection pump controller by doing the basic CAN bus
measurement.
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
C229 143 EC EC DIAGNOSTIC: ID module CAN 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
ID module CAN off. If the service code is still active
2. Check CAN bus between EC unit and ID module by doing
All
the basic CAN bus measurement.

Model
Code
321.2
17
Page
code fault
code
C233 49 4 EC There is problem at the CAN bus Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
between the Bosch injection pump 75 % from rated power. If the service code is still active
controller and EC unit 2. Check that Control stop (S36) is not active (check switch
The Bosch VP 30 injection pump and from side pillar display (FII/E/Ai5 or Valtra MultiTool I/O
controller see continuously no messages test).
or impaired value range in the control 3. Check CAN bus between EC unit and Bosch VP 30
32. SERVICE CODES
message. injection pump controller by doing the basic CAN bus

measurement.
C292 TC1 TTC timeout
C293 183 1 EC APPLICATION SPECIFIC CODES Cruise control will be switched off. 1.Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the
If CAN signal is incorrect or CAN ignition key again on.
message is on offline >250 ms, EC unit If the service code is still active
will switch cruise control off. This service 2. Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus
code is not used if CAN message for measurement.
cruise control is not received at all.
C295 4 TC1 From TC2 control unit not CAN bus A service code in the side pillar display
line contact to TC1 control unit and engine power or engine speed
166
limited.
C296 4 TC1 From ICL instrument not CAN bus line A service code in the side pillar display
contact to TC1 control unit and engine power or engine speed
limited.
C297 4 TC1 From EC control unit not CAN bus line A service code in the side pillar display
contact to TC1 control unit and engine power or engine speed
limited.
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
C330 51 4 EC EC unit is not able to communicate ”Limp home” function will be activated in 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
with Bosch VP 30 injection pump the injection pump. If the service code is still active
controller Engine revs 1400 RPM continuously. 2 Check CAN bus between the Bosch VP 30 injection pump
All
controller and EC unit by doing the basic CAN bus

Model
measurement. Disconnect the connector of Bosch VP 30

injection pump controller first when doing the resistance
measurement.
3. Check power supply for the injection pump.
Code
321.2
18
Page
code fault
code
d116 1 TC1 Fault in the DPS up ---down push A service code in the side pillar display
buttons (S23) and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
have malfunctions.
d117 5 TC1 Fault in the forward (S40) and reverse A service code in the side pillar display
driving direction (S41) reed relays and tractor cannot be driven, before the
service has been done.
32. SERVICE CODES
d118 2 TC1 Fault in PTO lever limit switches (S28 A service code in the side pillar display
and S29) and PTO is disengaged immediately and
a driver can activate it after the current is
switched off and on. Tractor can still be
driven.
d123 5 RC1 Fault in the forward (S40) or reverse A service code in the side pillar display
driving direction (S41) and parking and tractor cannot be driven, before the
brake (S15) reed relays service has been done.
d127 3 TC1 Fault in the control current for the A service code in the side pillar display
parking brake solenoid (Y18) and shuttle automatics are not in function
167
temperatures.
d129 1 TC1 Fault in the front (S23) and rear DPS A service code in the side pillar display
(S4W) pre ---programming buttons and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
have malfunctions.
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
d130 2 TC1 Fault in rear PTO switches (S25), A service code in the side pillar display
(S1A) and (S2A) and PTO is disengaged immediately and
All

Model
driven.
Code
321.2
19
Page
code fault
code
d133 3 TC1 Fault in the front (S9) and rear (S2W) A service code in the side pillar display
clutch pedal limit switches and shuttle automatics are not in function
32. SERVICE CODES
temperatures.
d152 5 TC1 Fault in the forward (S5W) and A service code in the side pillar display
reverse driving direction (S6W) reed and tractor cannot be driven, before the
relays in the reverse driving system service has been done.
d153 5 TC1 Fault in the forward (S5W) or reverse A service code in the side pillar display
driving direction (S6W) and parking and tractor cannot be driven, before the
brake (S7W) reed relays in the service has been done.
reverse driving system
d188 1 TC2 Fault in AUTO 4WD switch (S3C) A service code in the side pillar display
and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
168
have malfunctions.
d189 1 TC2 Fault in AUTO differential lock switch A service code in the side pillar display
(S1C) and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
have malfunctions.
d201 191 EC APPLICATION SPECIFIC CODES 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
External fault 1 via digital input If the service code is still active.
d202 192 EC APPLICATION SPECIFIC CODES 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
1.5.2008
External fault 2 via digital input If the service code is still active.
31.10.2006
d215 5 TC1 Fault in the front clutch pedal limit A service code in the side pillar display
switch (S9) and tractor cannot be driven, before the
All

Model
Code
321.2
20
Page
code fault
code
d254 5 TC1 Fault in the rear clutch pedal limit A service code in the side pillar display
switch (S2W) and tractor cannot be driven, before the
E102 23 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: EC unit temp. NOTE Engine functions dependent on 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
The measurement has failed inside the the EC unit temperature are not active. system is functional and the service code is not active with
32. SERVICE CODES

E124 37 5 EC The EC unit and Bosch VP 30 injection The engine will not start. 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
pump controller are not able to If the service code is still active
communicate because of wrong 2. Check that the injection pump is correct for the
169
configuration tractor/engine.
Also service code E220 (There is a fault
in the Bosch VP 30 injection pump
controller) is activated.
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
21
Page
code fault
code
E180 241 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Main relays 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the
High and low power outputs of the EC ignition key again on, if the service code occurs again
unit are supplied via the main relays. during next driving.
When short circuit to ground or power 2. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring,
supply is detected, Main relays will connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins
automatically shut off. To ensure that the (possible oxidation).
32. SERVICE CODES
short circuit to GND or power supply is 3. Measure the low side from wiring terminal to engine
either temporary or permanent, the Main ground, to see if there is a short circuit to power supply.
relays shall be reactivated after delay 4. Measure between the low side from wiring terminal to EC
time. If monitoring system detects unit injector connector, to see if there is a fault in the cable.
continuously short circuit to ground or 5. Measure between the high side from wiring terminal to EC
power supply Main relays will be shut off. unit injector connector, to see if there is a fault in thecable.
6. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
system is functional and the service code is not active with
the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
defective.
170
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
22
Page
code fault
code
When short circuit to ground or power 2. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring,
supply is detected, Main relays will connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins
automatically shut off. To ensure that the (possible oxidation).
32. SERVICE CODES
short circuit to GND or power supply is 3. Measure the high side from wiring terminal to engine
either temporary or permanent, the Main ground, to see if there is a short circuit to ground.
relays shall be reactivated after delay 4. Measure between the low side from wiring terminal to EC
time. If monitoring system detects unit injector connector, to see if there is a fault in the cable.
continuously short circuit to ground or 5. Measure between the high side from wiring terminal to EC
power supply Main relays will be shut off. unit injector connector, to see if there is a fault in the cable.
defective.
171
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
23
Page
code fault
code
When short circuit to ground or power 2. Measure the pin X1M:16 from wiring terminal, to see if
supply is detected, Main relays will there is a short circuit to power supply.
automatically shut off. To ensure that the 3. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
32. SERVICE CODES
short circuit to GND or power supply is system is functional and the service code is not active with
either temporary or permanent, the Main the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
relays shall be reactivated after delay defective.
time. If monitoring system detects
continuously short circuit to ground or NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code
power supply Main relays will be shut off. E237 (The engine specification number in the EC unit is
E183 236 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Main relay 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the
172
supply is detected, Main relays will there is a short circuit to ground.
automatically shut off. To ensure that the 3. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
short circuit to GND or power supply is system is functional and the service code is not active with
either temporary or permanent, the Main the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
relays shall be reactivated after delay defective.
time. If monitoring system detects
1.5.2008
continuously short circuit to ground or NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code
31.10.2006
power supply Main relays will be shut off. E237 (The engine specification number in the EC unit is
All
Model

Code
321.2
24
Page
code fault
code
E184 243 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Main relays 1. Measure the pin X1M:56 from wiring terminal, to see if
High and low power outputs of the EC there is a short circuit to power supply.
unit are supplied via the main relays. 2. Measure the pin X1M:23 from wiring terminal, to see if
When short circuit to ground or power there is a short circuit to power supply.
supply is detected, Main relays will 3. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
automatically shut off. To ensure that the system is functional and the service code is not active with
32. SERVICE CODES
short circuit to GND or power supply is the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
either temporary or permanent, the Main defective.
relays shall be reactivated after delay
time. If monitoring system detects NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code
continuously short circuit to ground or E237 (The engine specification number in the EC unit is
power supply Main relays will be shut off. incorrect for this engine type) or E238 (Engine serial number
E185 237 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: EC main relay 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the
173
supply is detected, Main relays will there is a short circuit to ground.
automatically shut off. To ensure that the 3. Measure the pin X1M:75 from wiring terminal, to see if
short circuit to GND or power supply is there is a short circuit to ground.
either temporary or permanent, the Main 4. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
relays shall be reactivated after delay system is functional and the service code is not active with
time. If monitoring system detects the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
continuously short circuit to ground or defective.
1.5.2008
power supply Main relays will be shut off.

31.10.2006

All
Model

Code
321.2
25
Page
code fault
code
E201 10 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIc: Self test 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition
When ignition is switched on, EC unit key back on. If the service code comes again, the EC unit
performs internal system checks. If any might be defective.
of these test fail, the system reports the 2. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
Power On self test defect. system is functional and the service code is not active with
32. SERVICE CODES
defective.

E206 221 5 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Self tests Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition
The test is made during system start---up Maximum injection quantity is reduced to key back on. If the service code is active, reason might be a
when the engine is not running. 50 % from rated power. defective EC unit.
The EC unit switchs off the power stages. 2. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
174
When the power stages are switched off NOTE If engine is not running Service system is functional and the service code is not active with
any injections should not be possible. code will not allow to start engine. the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
The EC unit tries to schedule fuel defective.
injections on all cylinders, if an injection
is detected the service code is activated. NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code
1.5.2008

31.10.2006

All
Model
Code
321.2
26
Page
code fault
code
The internal supply voltage is controlled 2. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
by an internal voltage check. If the NOTE If engine is not running Service system is functional and the service code is not active with
supply voltage overshoots a certain code will not allow to start engine. the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
32. SERVICE CODES
voltage range, the self test switch off the defective.

power stages.
The EC unit intentionally fails the supply NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code
voltage check that leads to switch off the E237 (The engine specification number in the EC unit is
power stages. When the power stages incorrect for this engine type) or E238 (Engine serial number
are switched off any injections should not in the EC unit does not match for the engine) will be
be possible. The EC unit tries to activated, because of engine serial number mismatch or
schedule fuel injections on all cylinders, if engine specification mismatch.
an injection is detected the service code
is activated.
175
The internal supply voltage is controlled 2. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
by an internal voltage check. If the NOTE If engine is not running Service system is functional and the service code is not active with
supply voltage overshoots a certain code will not allow to start engine. the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
voltage range, the self test switch off the defective.
power stages.
The EC unit intentionally fails the supply NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code
voltage check that leads to switch off the E237 (The engine specification number in the EC unit is
1.5.2008
power stages. When the power stages incorrect for this engine type) or E238 (Engine serial number
31.10.2006
are switched off any injections should not in the EC unit does not match for the engine) will be
be possible. The EC unit tries to activated, because of engine serial number mismatch or
schedule fuel injections on all cylinders, if engine specification mismatch.
All
Model
an injection is detected the service code

is activated.
Code
321.2
27
Page
code fault
code
E211 50 5 EC Supply voltage of Bosch VP 30 The engine will shutdown. 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
injection pump controller drops below If the service code is still active
allowed voltage limit (<6.0 V) 3. Check condition of the battery for too low voltage
(<11,5 V).
5. Check contcts through wiring from battery to the Bosch
32. SERVICE CODES
VP 30 injection pump fro bad contact at some connector.

6. Measure the voltage from EC unit pin 48 (+12 V) to pin 46
(GND). If voltage is more than 1 V below the battery voltage,
check +12 V continuous Bosch V 30 injection pump
controller fuse.
E212 53 4 EC EC unit cannot communicate correctly Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
with Bosch VP 30 injection pump 75 % from rated power. If the service code is still active.
controller by CAN bus 2. Check CAN bus between the Bosch VP 30 injection pump
measurement.
176
E213 54 5 EC EC unit cannot manage normal The engine will shutdown. 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
shutdown If the service code is still active.
EC unit will activate safety shutdown. 2. Check CAN bus between the Bosch VP 30 injection pump
measurement.
E214 55 5 EC The engine speed information is The engine will shutdown. 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
incorrect If the service code is still active.
1.5.2008
Crank shaft speed information and

31.10.2006
Bosch VP 30 injection pump controller

speed information do not match.
EC unit will activate safety shutdown.
All
Model
Code
321.2
28
Page
code fault
code
E217 30 5 EC There is a fault in the Bosch VP 30 The engine will shutdown. 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
injection pump controller If the service code is still active
2. Try another Bosch VP 30 injection pump to test if the
Bosch VP 30 injection pump controller is damaged. Service
code E230 (Bosch VP 30 injection pump controller serial
number does not match with the current EC unit) will be
32. SERVICE CODES
activated, because verification of the Bosch VP 30 injection

pump controller serial number is incorrect.
E218 31 4 EC There is a fault in the Bosch VP 30 Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
injection pump controller 75 % from rated power. If the service code is still active
E219 32 4 EC There is a fault in the Bosch VP 30 Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
177
injection pump controller 75 % from rated power. If the service code is still active
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
29
Page
code fault
code
E220 33 5 EC There is a fault in the Bosch VP 30 The engine will shutdown and will not 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
injection pump controller start. If the service code is still active
32. SERVICE CODES

E221 34 5 EC There is a fault in the Bosch VP 30 The engine will shutdown and will not 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
injection pump controller start. If the service code is still active
E222 25 1 EC There is a fault in the Bosch VP 30 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
178
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
30
Page
code fault
code
E228 173 1 EC Power parameters do not match with 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
current EC unit If the service code is still active
Service code will be activated if wrong 2. Download correct software to EC unit with Valtra MultiTool.
software has been downloaded to the EC
unit.
E229 174 1 EC Absolute maximum power value has 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
32. SERVICE CODES
not been activated If the service code is still active

Wrong software in the EC unit. 2. Change new EC unit and download correct software to it
with Valtra MultiTool.
E230 175 4 EC Bosch VP 30 injection pump controller Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
seriel number does not match with the Maximum injection quantity is reduced to If the service code is still active
current EC unit 75 % from rated power. 2. Couple current Bosch VP 30 injection pump controller to
EC unit with Valtra MultiTool.
E231 180 4 EC APPLICATION SPECIFIC CODES Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
Maximum power configuration is not fixed value 50 mg/stroke. If the service code is still active
correct for the vehicle. 2 Download correct software to EC unit.
179
Power information between EC unit and CR engines: Maximum rpm is 1500.
Transmission control unit do not match.
Wrong software in the EC unit or
Transmission control unit.
E232 181 5 EC APPLICATION SPECIFIC CODES The engine will not start. 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
Maximum vehicle speed information is If the service code is still active.
not correct for the application.
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
Control system Identification mismatch. If the service code is still active

EC unit has wrong AC---system ID. 2. Change correct control system id with Valtra MultiTool.
All
Model
Code
321.2
31
Page
code fault
code
There is a fault in the EC unit. If the service code is still active
Service code will be activated if wrong 2. Download correct software to EC unit with Valtra MultiTool.
software has been downloaded to the EC
unit.
E235 185 EC APPLICATION SPECIFIC CODES 1. Download correct software in the tractor.
32. SERVICE CODES
Service code will be activated if wrong 2. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the
software has been downloaded to the EC ignition key again on. If the service code comes again,
unit. reason might be a defective EC unit.
defective.

E230 (Bosch VP 30 injection pump controller serial number
does not match with the current EC unit) will be activated,
because verification of the Bosch VP 30 injection pump
180
serial number is incorrect.
Also other service codes can be activated e.g the AC system
is diffrent (E233).
E236 186 EC APPLICATION SPECIFIC CODES 1. Check the wirings of the switches to EC unit.
EC unit has detected invalid PTO cruise 2. Check the PTO switches operation.
request. For some reason there are up &
down request demand active
1.5.2008
simultaneously.
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
32
Page
code fault
code
E237 451 4 EC ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Download the correct software for the engine type or
The engine specification number in the Maximum injection quantity is reduced to change the correct EC unit for the engine type.
EC unit is incorrect for this engine type. fixed value 50 mg/stroke.
Service code can be activated if the EC
unit with incorrect software has been
mounted to the engine (example EC unit
32. SERVICE CODES
from 200 hp tractor to 150 hp tractor) or

incorrect software (wrong power level)
has been downloaded.
E238 452 4 EC ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Change correct EC unit for the engine.
Engine serial number in the EC unit does Maximum injection quantity is reduced to
not match for the engine. fixed value 50 mg/stroke.
E239 463 4 EC ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition
EC unit monitoring system has detected Maximum injection quantity is reduced to key back on. If the service code comes again, the ID module
missing or invalid engine specification in fixed value 50 mg/stroke. needs to be replaced.
the ID module.
181
missing or invalid engine serial number fixed value 50 mg/stroke. needs to be replaced.
in the ID module.
E244 4 TC1 Program parameters are missing from A service code in the side pillar display
TC1 control unit and engine power or engine speed
limited.
E245 5 TC2 Program parameters are missing from A service code in the side pillar display
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
TC2 control unit and tractor cannot be driven, before the

E246 5 TC2 Backup copy of the program A service code in the side pillar display
All
Model
parameters is missing from TC2 and tractor cannot be driven, before the
control unit service has been done.
Code
321.2
33
Page
code fault
code
E247 4 TC1 Backup copy of the program A service code in the side pillar display
parameter is missing from TC1 control and engine power or engine speed
unit limited.
E248 5 TC2 Calibration values are missing from A service code in the side pillar display
TC2 control unit and tractor cannot be driven, before the
32. SERVICE CODES
E249 5 TC2 Backup copy of the calibration values A service code in the side pillar display
is missing from TC2 control unit and tractor cannot be driven, before the
E250 1 TC1 Fault in the TC1 control unit A service code in the side pillar display
Saving the new data base failed in the and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
EEPROM memory. Now the TC1 control have malfunctions.
unit uses default values.
The checksum of the EEPROM memory and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
is faulty. Now the TC1 control unit uses have malfunctions.
182
default values.
Saving the new data base failed in the and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
EEPROM memory. Now the TC2 control have malfunctions.
unit uses default values.
The checksum of the EEPROM memory and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
1.5.2008
is faulty. Now the TC2 control unit uses have malfunctions.

31.10.2006
default values.
E254 465 EC ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module 1. ID module by pass functionality has been used to
All
EC unit system has set EC unit into an ID deactivate limitations for a defined time.
Model
module by pass state, where the limits

are not in effect.
Code
321.2
34
Page
code fault
code
E260 10 1 EC There is a fault in the EC unit 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
When ignition is switched on, EC unit If the service code is still active.
performs internal system checks.
E261 11 5 EC There is a fault in the EC unit The engine will shutdown and will not 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
start. If the service code is still active.
32. SERVICE CODES
E265 466 ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module 1. ID module by pass functionality has been used to
EC unit system has detected, that deactivate limitations for a defined time.
generated ID module by pass time has
expired. This service code will be NOTE Absolute maximum value for by pass time is 200 h!
activated if service code E290 (ID
module not present) is active and set by
pass time is 0h or previous set hours are
used.
E266 467 ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module 1. If EC unit has run without ID module over 200 h, by pass
EC unit system has detected, that functionality with this EC unit cannot be used anymore.
maximum ID module by pass time has
been used. This service code will be
183
activated only if service code E290 (ID
module not present) is active and
maximum ID module by pass time
expired.
NOTE Maximum hours for ID module by

pass time at EC unit are 200 h!
1.5.2008
E270 12 1 EC Valid Engine control unit parameters 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
31.10.2006
are not found on memory If the service code is still active

Application starts to use default EC unit 2. Download correct software to EC unit.
parameters.
All
Model
Code
321.2
35
Page
code fault
code
E271 13 4 EC EC unit parameter area on memory is Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
full fixed value 50 mg/stroke. If the service code is still active
Total amount of memory entries are 385 2. Change new EC unit and download correct software to it
pcs. with Valtra MultiTool.
E272 14 1 EC Allowed options for application have 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
been exceeded If the service code is still active
32. SERVICE CODES
Downloaded software/parameters do not 2. Download correct software to EC unit with Valtra MultiTool.
match with the current EC unit.
E286 231 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Main relay 1. Turn ignition key off and continuous power (= fuse) to the
When the ignition key has been switched EC unit off, wait 30 seconds and turn continuous power
off to shut off the system the EC unit (= fuse) and ignition key again on.
executes definite routines and finally the 2. If the service code occurs again during next EC unit shut
EC unit switches off power supply from off (ignition key off) the EC unit might be defective.
itself. After the final switch off command 3. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
is given to the EC unit a shut off timer is system is functional and the service code is not active with
started to increment and if this timer is the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
able to reach the certain value, this defective.
184
means the software is still running and
the EC unit power is not off. NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
36
Page
code fault
code
E287 233 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: EC unit main 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition
relay key back on. If the service code is active, reason might be a
When the ignition key has been switched defective EC unit.
off to shut off the system the EC unit 2. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
executes definite routines and finally the system is functional and the service code is not active with
EC unit switches off power supply from the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
32. SERVICE CODES
itself. After the final switch off command defective.

is given to the EC unit a shut off timer is
started to increment and if this timer is NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code
able to reach the certain value, this E237 (The engine specification number in the EC unit is
means the software is still running and incorrect for this engine type) or E238 (Engine serial number
the EC unit power is not off. The EC unit in the EC unit does not match for the engine) will be
shut off fault status is stored to the activated, because of engine serial number mismatch or
memory and begins of next driving cycle engine specification mismatch.
the status is checked and the service
code is activated.
185
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
37
Page
code fault
code
E288 245 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Recovery 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the
The EC unit makes reset by itself if ignition key again on, if the service code occurs again
during software execution happens during next driving cycle the reason might be a software
some illegal operation. Normally reason problem.
is that execution time for some operation 2. Download software to EC unit.
has exceeded. 3. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the
32. SERVICE CODES
Always after reset the EC unit check ignition key again on, if the service code occurs again
possible recovery and if recover has during next driving cycle the reason might be a defective EC
been happened the service code is unit.
activated. The engine could continue 4. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
running normally after the recovery. system is functional and the service code is not active with
defective.

186
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
38
Page
code fault
code
E289 246 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Recovery 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the
EC unit monitoring system has detected ignition key again on, if the service code occurs again
3 pcs recoveries within 2 seconds. The during next driving cycle the reason might be a software
EC unit makes reset by itself if during problem.
software execution happens some illegal 2. Download software to EC unit.
operation. Reason is that execution time 3. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the
32. SERVICE CODES
for some operation has exceeded. ignition key again on, if the service code occurs again
Always after reset the EC unit check during next driving cycle the reason might be a defective EC
possible recovery and if recover has unit.
been happened the service is activated. 4. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
The engine could continue running system is functional and the service code is not active with
normally after the recovery. the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
defective.

187
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
39
Page
code fault
code
E290 453 4 EC ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module Maximum rpm is 1500. A. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn
EC unit monitoring system cannot detect Maximum injection quantity is reduced to ignition key back on. If the service code is active always
ID module. fixed value 50 mg/stroke. when ignition is switched on and engine is not running.
1. Check the wiring from EC unit to ID module.
2. Check contacts through wiring from the EC unit to the ID
module for bad contact at some connector.
32. SERVICE CODES
3. Check the supply voltage to ID module. If the supply

voltage from EC unit is low, check the wiring from EC unit to
ID module.
4. If the wirings are OK, cause for the low voltage might be a
defective EC unit.
defective.

188
B. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn

ignition key back on. If the service code is active always
when ignition is switched on and engine is not running.
1. Check the CAN Hi wiring between EC unit and ID module
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
connector.
2. Check the CAN Lo wiring between EC unit and ID module
connector.
All
Model
Code
321.2
40
Page
code fault
code
E291 454 4 EC ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Download latest software in the EC unit.
EC unit monitoring system has detected Maximum injection quantity is reduced to
conflict between EC unit and ID module fixed value 50 mg/stroke.
versions. ID module contains newer
version than current EC unit. This service
code can activate, if example EC unit has
32. SERVICE CODES
been taken from vehicle which engine

specification number is equal, but
contains older EC unit software.
problem on ID module memory. fixed value 50 mg/stroke. needs to be replaced.
E296 459 EC ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition
EC unit monitoring system has detected key back on. If the service code comes again, the ID module
problem on ID module additional needs to be replaced.
memory.
189
E297 461 EC ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition
EC unit monitoring system has detected key back on. If the service code comes again, the ID module
problem on ID module software. Upon needs to be replaced.
system startup the reason of the latest
reset is determined. If the software
caused the reset, then this service code
is activated.
E298 462 EC ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module 1. Check contacts through wiring from the EC unit to the ID
1.5.2008
EC unit monitoring system has detected module for bad contact at some connector.
31.10.2006
problem on ID module power supply. 2. If the connectors are OK and service code is continuously
During system running state the reason active, reason might be a defective ID module.
of the latest reset is determined. If the
All
quick power cut off caused the reset,

Model
then this service code is activated.

Code
321.2
41
Page
code fault
code
EC unit monitoring system has detected the EC unit temperature are not active. system is functional and the service code is not active with
failure at EC unit internal temperature the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
sensor. Possible reason is EC unit defective.
hardware defect.
32. SERVICE CODES

EC unit monitoring system has detected the EC unit temperature are not active. system is functional and the service code is not active with
failure at EC unit internal temperature the replacement EC unit, then the original EC unit is
sensor. Possible reason is EC unit defective.
hardware defect.
190
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
42
Page
code fault
code
E305 20 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: EC unit temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the EC unit software version. If it is v 1,1 update the
Temperature inside EC unit is too high. 75 % from rated power. The engine will software with newest software (at least with v 1,2).
Reason could be example, when the shutdown after delay. 2. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the
overheating has stopped the engine and ignition key again on.
the cooling system does not work
anymore and temperature may rise A. If the service code IS ACTIVE CONTINUOUSLY, even
32. SERVICE CODES
inside the EC unit, because the airflow is the EC unit is cold. Test body temperature of the EC unit by
not cooling. touching. If the EC unit is not hot, but the service code is still
active. Reason might be a defective EC unit.
defective.

191
B. If the service code is NOT ACTIVE anymore, check

service codes L345 (The measured coolant temperature
exceeds the overheating warning limit) and L346 (The
measured coolant temperature exceeds the overheating
alarm limit) if one of these service codes has been active at
the same time. Then problem has probably caused by
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
engine overheating.
E310 20 1 EC Temperature inside EC unit is too high 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
(>120 ˚C) If the service code is still active
All
Model
Measured by the EC unit. 2. Check voltage value of the inside temperature of the EC
Limit value 1,2 V. unit from side pillar display (FII/E/Ai12) or Valtra MultiTool I/O
test.
Code
321.2
43
Page
code fault
code
E315 146 1 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Engine speed The EC unit will start to use hardwired A. Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus
reg. (via CAN). Requested speed by the throttles for speed control. In case there measurement.
CAN is above 3000 rpm. are no hardwired throttles the engine
If the seat direction is reverse (TwinTrac) runs at low idle speed. B. If there is UC2 (TwinTrac control unit)
and the rear gas pedal has not been 1. Check the rear gas pedal position sensor wiring,
calibrated, service code will be activated. connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins
32. SERVICE CODES
(possible oxidation).
2. Check the frear gas pedal position sensor operation.
E316 147 1 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Engine speed The EC unit will start to use hardwired A. Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus
reg. (via CAN). Requested speed by the throttles for speed control. In case there measurement.
CAN is below 500 rpm. are no hardwired throttles the engine
If the seat direction is reverse (TwinTrac) runs at low idle speed. B. If there is UC2 (TwinTrac control unit)
and the rear gas pedal has not been 1. Check the rear gas pedal position sensor wiring,
calibrated, service code will be activated. connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins
2. Check the frear gas pedal position sensor operation.
E325 44 4 EC Temperature measurement does not Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
192
work correctly inside the Bosch VP 30 75 % from rated power. If the service code is still active
injection pump controller and pump 2. Try another Bosch VP 30 injection pump to test if the
controller use default value for pump Bosch VP 30 injection pump controller is damaged. Service
temperature code E230 (Bosch VP 30 injection pump controller serial
E326 45 1 EC Battery voltage measurement does 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
1.5.2008
not work correctly inside the Bosch VP If the service code is still active
31.10.2006
30 injection pump controller and the 2. Try another Bosch VP 30 injection pump to test if the
pump use a default value for battery Bosch VP 30 injection pump controller is damaged. Service
voltage code E230 (Bosch VP 30 injection pump controller serial
All
Model

Code
321.2
44
Page
code fault
code
E341 248 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Water in fuel 1. The probably cause of the problem is the voltage drop
sensor supply down, during cranking.
Supply voltage for Water in fuel sensor is
too low. EC unit supply voltage has been A. If the service code L308 (Supply voltage for EC unit
below 6,5 V over delay time. is above normal ) is active continuously
1. Check condition of the battery for too low voltage.
32. SERVICE CODES
2. Check contacts through wiring from the battery to the EC

unit for bad contact at some connector.
B. The probably cause of the problem is the voltage

drop down, during cranking. If the service code is active
always when ignition is switched on and engine is not
running.
1. Check Water in fuel sensor for short circuit to ground.
2. If no short circuit is found, reason can be a defective EC
unit.
193
defective.

incorrect for this engine type) or E 238 (Engine serial
number in the EC unit does not match for the engine) will be
1.5.2008
31.10.2006

All
Model
Code
321.2
45
Page
code fault
code
E342 249 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Water in fuel 1. Check the generator, if charging voltage is correct.
sensor supply
Supply voltage for Water in fuel sensor is
too high. EC unit supply voltage has
been above 32 V over delay time.
E368 15 1 EC Reference supply voltage for sensors 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
32. SERVICE CODES
and throttles is too low If the service code is still active

Measured by the EC unit. 2. Check sensors and throttles.
Limit value 4,6 V. 3. Check boost pressure sensor for short circuit.
4. Check foot/hand throttles for short circuit.
5. Check oil pressure sensor for short cicuit.
E369 16 1 EC Reference supply voltage for sensors 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
and throttles is too high If the service code is still active
Measured by the EC unit. 2. Check sensors and throttles.
Limit value 5,2 V. 3. Check boost pressure sensor for short circuit.
4. Check foot/hand throttles for short circuit.
5. Check oil pressure sensor for short cicuit.
194
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
46
Page
code fault
code
E374 212 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: 5Vdc ref. NOTE The EC unit detects wrong values 1. Check reference supply lines from EC unit for short circuit
voltages by the sensors and throttles and for that to battery voltage.
Reference supply voltage for sensors behaviour of the engine is not correct. 2. Check boost pressure sensor for short circuit to +2 V.
and throttles is too high. Normally there should be +5 V.
3. Check hand throttle for short circuit to +12 V. Normally
there should be +5 V.
32. SERVICE CODES
4. Check oil pressure sensor for short circuit to +12V.

Normally there should be +5 V.
5. Check fuel filter pressure sensor for short circuit to +12V.
Normally there should be +5 V.
6. If no short circuit is found, reason might be a defective EC
unit.
defective.
195
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
47
Page
code fault
code
E375 211 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: 5Vdc ref. NOTE The EC unit detects wrong values 1. The probably cause of the problem is the voltage drop
voltages by the sensors and throttles and for that down, during cranking.
Reference supply voltage for sensors behaviour of the engine is not correct. If the service code is active always when ignition is switched
and throttles is too low. on and engine is not running
2. Check boost pressure sensor for short circuit to ground.
3. Check hand throttle for short circuit to ground.
32. SERVICE CODES
4. Check oil pressure sensor for short circuit to ground

5. Check fuel filter pressure sensor for short circuit to ground
unit.
defective.

196
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
48
Page
code fault
code
E376 214 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: 5Vdc ref. NOTE The EC unit detects wrong values 1. Check front gas pedal for short circuit to +12 V. Normally
voltages by the sensors and throttles and for that there should be +5 V.
Reference supply voltage for sensors behaviour of the engine is not correct. 2. Check read gas pedal for short circuit to +12 V. Normally
and throttles is too high. there should be +5 V.
unit.
32. SERVICE CODES

defective.

197
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
49
Page
code fault
code
E377 213 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: 5Vdc ref. NOTE The EC unit detects wrong values 1. The probably cause of the problem is the voltage drop
voltages by the sensors and throttles and for that down, during cranking. If the service code is active always
Reference supply voltage for sensors behaviour of the engine is not correct. when ignition is switched on and engine is not running.
and throttles is too low. 2. Check front gas pedal for short circuit to ground.
3. Check rear gas pedal for short circuit to ground.
32. SERVICE CODES
unit.
defective.

198
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
50
Page
code fault
code
E378 216 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: 5Vdc ref. NOTE The EC unit detects wrong values 1. Check rail pressure sensor for short circuit to +12V.
voltages by the sensors and throttles and for that Normally there should be +5 V.
Reference supply voltage for sensors behaviour of the engine is not correct. 2. If no short circuit is found, reason might be a defective EC
and throttles is too high. unit.
32. SERVICE CODES

defective.

E379 215 EC EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: 5Vdc ref. NOTE The EC unit detects wrong values 1. Check rail pressure sensor for short circuit to ground.
voltages by the sensors and throttles and for that 2. If no short circuit is found, reason might be a defective EC
Reference supply voltage for sensors behaviour of the engine is not correct. unit.
199
and throttles is too low. 3. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the
defective.

1.5.2008

31.10.2006

All
Model
Code
321.2
51
Page
code fault
code
E392 456 EC ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module A. If the service code is active ONLY when engine is
EC unit monitoring system has detected running
ID module supply voltage too high Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition
(>32 V), more than 1000 ms. key back on. Start the engine. If the service code is active
when the engine is running.
32. SERVICE CODES
B. If the service code is active when engine is NOT

running
Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition
key back on. If the service code is active always when
ignition is switched on and engine is not running.
1. Check supply voltage to the ID module.
2. If the supply to the ID module is higher than 36V, cause
for the high voltage can be a defective EC unit.
200
defective.

1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
52
Page
code fault
code
E393 457 EC ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module 1. The probably cause of the problem is the voltage drop
EC unit monitoring system has detected down, during cranking. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30
ID module supply voltage too low (<8 V), seconds and turn ignition key back on.
more than 1000 ms. If the service code is active always when ignition is switched
on and engine is not running.
32. SERVICE CODES
3. Check contacts through wiring from the EC unit to the ID

module for bad contact at some connector.
4. Check the supply voltage to ID module. If the supply
voltage from EC unit is low, check the wiring from EC unit to
ID module.
5. If the wirings are OK, cause for the low voltage might be a
defective EC unit.
defective.
201
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
53
Page
code fault
code
E394 458 EC ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module 1. Check the EC unit software version. If it is v 1,1 update the
EC unit monitoring system has detected software with newest software (at least with v 1,2).
ID module internal temperature
continuously over:
--- 95 ˚C, software version 1,1
32. SERVICE CODES
The ID module is mounted at the

location, which temperature is following
engine coolant temperature. In very high
temperature conditions engine coolant
temperature may continuously exceed
over 95˚C/110 ˚C, however ID module
components are well protected against
heat (resist for continuous 125 ˚C).
F131 284 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Cam speed Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. Check the camshaft sensor wiring, connectors and
sensor Maximum injection quantity is reduced to contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
No cam speed signal found. 75 % from rated power. Look for possible reverse connection.
2. Check the coil resistance of the sensors (the engine must
202
NOTE Engine starting may take longer be stopped).
than normally and running may be bad --- Camshaft sensor coil: 774 --- 946 .
due to missing/incorrect information for 3. Check the amshaft sensor mounting. The air gap between
injection timing control. The engine runs the sensor tip and trigger wheel teeth should be 0,2 --- 1,0
with crankshaft speed sensor signal. mm.
4. Check the condition of the camshaft trigger wheel. A
damaged tooth may generate an abnormal pulse shape.
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
54
Page
code fault
code
F225 271 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Crank speed Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. If the engine is running roughly, check the condition of the
sensor Maximum injection quantity is reduced to fuel, the fuel system and the mechanical condition of the
The crankshaft speed and angular 75 % from rated power. engine.
position evaluation module expects a 2. If the service code is coming up only occasionally, check
defined sequence of pulses from the NOTE Engine starting may take longer the possible conditions causing abnormal engine speed
crankshaft speed sensor (trigger wheel than normally and running may be bad changes, e.g. tractor mishandling.
32. SERVICE CODES
with 58 teeth and gap 2 teeth wide). If the due to missing/incorrect information for 3. Check the crankshaft sensor wiring, connectors and
pulses are not received at correct time, injection timing control. The engine runs contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
the Time Processing Unit (TPU) reports a with camshaft speed sensor signal. Look also for possible reverse connection.
fault. 4. Check the coil resistance of the crankshaft sensor (the
engine must be stopped).
--- Crankshaft sensor coil: 1120 --- 1530 .
5. Check the crankshaft sensor mounting. The air gap
between the sensor tip and trigger wheel teeth should be
0,2 --- 1,0 mm.
6. Check the condition and mounting of the crankshaft
trigger wheel (damaged teeth, positioning of the trigger
wheel).
203
F226 272 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Crank speed Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. Check the crankshaft sensor wiring, connectors and
The crankshaft speed and angular 75 % from rated power. Look also for possible reverse connection.
position evaluation module expects a 2. Check the coil resistance of the crankshaft sensor (the
defined sequence of pulses from the NOTE Engine starting may take longer engine must be stopped).
crankshaft speed sensor (trigger wheel than normally and running may be bad --- Crankshaft sensor coil: 1120 --- 1530 .
with 58 teeth and a gap 2 teeth wide). If due to missing/incorrect information for 3. Check the crankshaft sensor mounting. The air gap
too many pulses are received between injection timing control. The engine runs between the sensor tip and trigger wheel teeth should be
1.5.2008
two gaps, the system reports a fault. with camshaft speed sensor signal. 0,2 --- 1,0 mm.
31.10.2006
4. Look for possible devices using or carrying high currents,

high voltages or strong magnetic fields on or close to the
tractor, disturbing the speed sensor signal.
All
Model
5. Check the condition and mounting of the crankshaft

trigger wheel (damaged teeth, positioning of the trigger
wheel).
Code
321.2
55
Page
code fault
code
F227 273 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Crank speed Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. Check the crankshaft sensor wiring, connectors and
For correct crankshaft speed and angular 75 % from rated power. Look for possible reverse connection.
position evaluation, the pulses from the 2. Check the coil resistance of the crankshaft sensor (the
crankshaft speed sensor must have NOTE: Engine starting may take longer engine must be stopped).
correct direction of voltage change when than normally and running may be bad --- Crankshaft sensor coil: 1120 --- 1530 
32. SERVICE CODES
switching between teeth and gaps during due to missing/incorrect information for 3. Check the crankshaft sensor mounting. The air gap
rotation. A monitoring function can detect injection timing control. The engine runs between the sensor tip and trigger wheel teeth should be
the reverse polarity condition. with camshaft speed sensor signal. 0,2 --- 1,0 mm.
4. Check the condition of the crankshaft trigger wheel.
A damaged tooth may generate an abnormal pulse shape,
which can detected as reverse condition.
F228 281 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Cam speed Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. If the engine is running roughly, check the condition of the
Engine angular position is evaluated by 75 % from rated power. engine.
two separate functions: 2. If the service code is coming up only occasionally, check
Angle based Phase System (APS) NOTE Engine starting may take longer the possible conditions causing abnormal engine speed
Time based Phase System (TPS) than normally and running may be bad changes, e.g. tractor mishandling.
204
The calculation is based on crankshaft due to missing/incorrect information for 3. Check the camshaft sensor wiring, connectors and
sensor signal, camshaft sensor signal injection timing control. The engine runs contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
and internal EC unit time calculation. The with crankshaft speed sensor signal. Look also for possible reverse connection.
use of the two functions depends on the 4. Check the coil resistance of the sensors (the engine must
engine running state. be stopped)
--- Camshaft sensor coil: 774 --- 946 .
The camshaft speed and angular 5. Check the amshaft sensor mounting. The air gap between
position evaluation module expects a the sensor tip and trigger wheel teeth should be
1.5.2008
defined sequence of pulses from the 0,2 --- 1,0 mm.

31.10.2006
camshaft speed sensor (trigger wheel 6. Check the condition and mounting of the camshaft trigger
with 4 (4---cyl. engine) or 6 (6---cyl. wheel (damaged teeth, positioning of the trigger wheels).
engine) phase marks and one sync
All
Model
mark).
Code
321.2
56
Page
code fault
code
F229 282 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Cam speed Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. If the engine is running roughly, check the condition of the
Engine angular position is evaluated by 75 % from rated power. engine.
two separate functions: 2. If the service code is coming up only occasionally, check
Angle based Phase system (APS) NOTE Engine starting may take longer the possible conditions causing abnormal engine speed
Time based Phase System (TPS) than normally and running may be bad changes, e.g. tractor mishandling.
32. SERVICE CODES
The calculation is based on crankshaft due to missing/incorrect information for 3. Check the camshaft sensor wiring, connectors and
sensor signal, camshaft sensor signal injection timing control. The engine runs contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
and internal EC unit time calculation. The with crankshaft speed sensor signal. Look also for possible reverse connection.
use of the two functions depends on the 4. Check the coil resistance of the sensors (the engine must
engine running state. be stopped).
The camshaft speed and angular 5. Check the amshaft sensor mounting. The air gap between
position evaluation module expects a the sensor tip and trigger wheel teeth should be
defined sequence of pulses from the 0,2 --- 1,0 mm.
camshaft speed sensor (trigger wheel 6. Check the condition and mounting of the camshaft trigger
with 4 (4---cyl. engine) or 6 (6---cyl. wheel (damaged teeth, positioning of the trigger wheels).
engine) phase marks and one sync
205
mark).
F230 283 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Cam speed Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. Check the camshaft sensor wiring, connectors and
Cam speed sensor, reverse connected. 75 % from rated power. Look for possible reverse connection.
2. Check the coil resistance of the sensors (the engine must
NOTE Engine starting may take longer be stopped).
than normally and running may be bad --- Camshaft sensor coil: 774 --- 946 .
due to missing/incorrect information for 3. Check the amshaft sensor mounting. The air gap between
1.5.2008
injection timing control. The engine runs the sensor tip and trigger wheel teeth should be
31.10.2006
with crankshaft speed sensor signal. 0,2 --- 1,0 mm.

4. Check the condition of the camshaft trigger wheel.
A damaged tooth may generate an abnormal pulse shape,
All
Model
which can detected as reverse condition.

Code
321.2
57
Page
code fault
code
F232 269 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Speed sensor Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. If the engine is running roughly, check the condition of the
general Maximum injection quantity is reduced to fuel, the fuel system and the mechanical condition of the
Engine speed and angular position 75 % from rated power. engine.
measurement is based on signals from 2. If the service code is coming up only occasionally, check
crankshaft speed sensor and camshaft NOTE Engine starting may take longer the possible conditions causing abnormal engine speed
speed sensor. The evaluation error is than normally and running may be bad changes, e.g. tractor mishandling.
32. SERVICE CODES
activated, if any of these two sensor due to missing/incorrect information for 3. Check the crankshaft and camshaft sensor wiring,
signals is found to be defective or if the injection timing control. The engine may connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins
signals are not in correct phase be running with only one speed sensor (possible oxidation). Look also for possible reverse
compared to each other. One or more signal. connection.
additional speed sensor service codes 4. Check the coil resistance of the sensors (the engine must
may be active together with the be stopped).
evaluation error service code. --- Crankshaft sensor coil: 1120 --- 1530 
--- Camshaft sensor coil: 774 --- 946 
5. Check the crankshaft and camshaft sensor mounting. The
air gap between the sensor tip and trigger wheel teeth
should be 0,2 --- 1,0 mm.
6. Check the condition and mounting of the camshaft trigger
206
wheel and the crankshaft trigger wheel (damaged teeth,
positioning of the trigger wheels).
F283 48 4 EC The Bosch VP 30 injection pump Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
controller cannot recognize reference 70 %. Injection advance is delayed. If the service code is still active
pulses to the engine top dead center 2. Check speed sensor.
by the EC unit 3. Check ”DZG” wiring between the Bosch VP 30 injection
pump controller and EC unit.
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
58
Page
code fault
code
F284 184 4 EC APPLICATION SPECIFIC CODES Valtra parameter, 1800 rpm. 1.Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the
EC unit can not detect tractor speed via ignition key again on.
CAN bus (timeout for the message 5000 If the service code is still active.
ms). Service code will be activated 2. Check/ do the calibration of the speed sensors.
example: if CAN signal or velocity source
selection is incorrect. This service code 3. Check CAN bus between EC unit and Transmission
control unit by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
32. SERVICE CODES
can not detect missing wired inductive

sensor signal (tractors without CAN bus 4. Check EC unit configurations about Cruise control.
= without HiTech transmission).
F320 3 TC1 Fault in the F/R shuttle running A service code in the side pillar display
direction sensors (B12, upper) and and shuttle automatics are not in function
(B13, lower). and the PTO stops. Driving direction can
Sensors frequency difference over 30 %. be engaged only with clutch pedal
temperatures.
F321 3 TC1 Fault in the engine speed sensor A service code in the side pillar display
207
(B11). and shuttle automatics are not in function
The engine speed sensor (B11) has and the PTO stops. Driving direction can
lower rotation speed than the shuttle be engaged only with clutch pedal
(B12 and B13) sensors. depressed. The control unit reads shuttle
temperatures.
F322 5 Fault in the engine speed sensor
(B11).
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
The engine is running but the speed

signal is missing.
F324 1 TC1 Fault in the F/R shuttle running A service code in the side pillar display
All
direction sensors (B12, upper) and and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
Model
(B13, lower). have malfunctions.

Direction signal of the sensors change
when driving speed is over 10 km/h.
Code
321.2
59
Page
code fault
code
F342 66 4 EC EC unit cannot recognize correct Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
speed signal from the speed sensor Maximum injection quantity is reduced to If the service code is still active.
75 % from rated power. 2. Check contact of surfaces of pins (oxidation).
Injection advance is delayed. 3. Check the speed sensor wiring.
4. Check +12 V supply voltage for the speed sensor.
5. Check the sensor.
32. SERVICE CODES
F366 1 TC2 Fault in the signal from front axle A service code in the side pillar display
speed sensor (B5C) and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
have malfunctions.
F367 1 TC2 Fault in the signal from rear wheel A service code in the side pillar display
speed sensor (B1C) and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
have malfunctions.
F371 2 TC2 Fault in the signal from the engine A service code in the side pillar display
Sigma speed sensor (B4) and PTO is disengaged immediately and
driven.
208
F372 2 TC2 Fault in the signal from the PTO A service code in the side pillar display
Sigma speed sensor (B5) and PTO is disengaged immediately and
driven.
F373 2 TC2 Fault in the signal from front PTO A service code in the side pillar display
rotation speed sensor and PTO is disengaged immediately and
1.5.2008
31.10.2006

driven.
All
F374 TC2 Fault in the control current for the

Model
4WD solenoid (Y3)

Code
321.2
60
Page
code fault
code
F375 TC2 Fault in the control current for the
differential lock solenoid (Y1)
F382 1 TC2 Fault in the signal from the radar A service code in the side pillar display
(B10) and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
have malfunctions.
32. SERVICE CODES
L211 385 4 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Rail pressure Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Stop the engine. Check visually the engine high pressure
Rail pressure. Leakage detected during Maximum injection quantity is reduced to pipes etc. for possible leakage.
overrun. 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the injectors.
3. Check the rail pressure sensor wiring, connectors and
NOTE Engine functions dependent on contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
rail pressure are not active. 4. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
5. Check the rail pressure sensor operation.
NOTE Due to the very high injection
pressure (max. 1400 bar), during engine
running there is a serious risk for injury, if
at high pressure hide is a leakage.
209
EC unit monitoring system has detected Maximum injection quantity is reduced to pipes etc. for possible leakage.
leakage on high pressure side of 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the injectors.
injection system by quantity balance. 3. Check the rail pressure sensor wiring, connectors and
The set value of current for MPROP is NOTE Engine functions dependent on contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
higher than limit value. rail pressure are not active. 4. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
NOTE Due to the very high injection NOTE Due to the very high injection
pressure (max. 1400 bar), during engine pressure (max. 1400 bar), during engine
1.5.2008
running there is a serious risk for injury, if running there is a serious risk for injury, if
31.10.2006
at high pressure hide is a leakage. at high pressure hide is a leakage.

All
Model
Code
321.2
61
Page
code fault
code
L213 383 4 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Rail pressure Maximum rpm is 1500. A. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn
EC unit monitoring system has detected Maximum injection quantity is reduced to ignition key back on. Start the engine.If the service code
negative deviation on rail pressure. 50 % from rated power. is not active, reason might have been
Measured rail pressure is not decreasing A temporarily pressure peak (breakdown), during engine
according the setpoint value to MPROP. NOTE Engine functions dependent on running. Example abnormal load drop/fuel quantity drop
Typically it is indicating a leakage in the rail pressure are not active. during running.
32. SERVICE CODES
MPROP or MPROP stick with open

condition. B. If the service code is active always when engine is
running
1. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring
connector is in locking position.
2. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring,
connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins
(possible oxidation)
3. Measure the MPROP wiring.
4. Measure the power supply (12 V).
5. Measure the solenoid valve coil resistance. Correct
resistance: 2,6--- 3,15  at +20 ˚C.
210
contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
7. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
8. Check the rail pressure sensor operation
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
62
Page
code fault
code
L214 384 4 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Rail pressure Maximum rpm is 1500. A. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn
EC unit monitoring system has detected Maximum injection quantity is reduced to ignition key back on. Start the engine. If the service
positive deviation on rail pressure. 50 % from rated power. code is not active, reason might have been
Measured rail pressure is not increasing A temporarily pressure peak (breakdown), during engine
according the setpoint value to MPROP. NOTE Engine functions dependent on running. Example abnormal load drop/fuel quantity drop
Typically it is indicating a leakage in the rail pressure are not active. during running.
32. SERVICE CODES
injector or somewhere else at high

pressure side. NOTE Due to the very high injection B. If the service code is active always when engine is
pressure (max. 1400 bar), during engine running
NOTE Due to the very high injection running there is a serious risk for injury, if 1. Stop the engine. Check visually the engine high pressure
pressure (max. 1400 bar), during engine at high pressure hide is a leakage. pipes etc. for possible leakage.
running there is a serious risk for injury, if 2. Check the injectors.
at high pressure hide is a leakage. 3. Check the rail pressure sensor wiring, connectors and
L215 392 4 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Pressure relief Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Possible reason is defective PRV (pressure release valve).
valve Maximum injection quantity is reduced to
211
If the rail pressure is above monitoring 50 % from rated power.
limit for a certain time, EC unit monitoring
system will start the kick ---off function to NOTE If the rail pressure is above
open the PRV. If this kick ---off function monitoring limit for a certain time, EC unit
was not successful, service code L215 monitoring system will start the kick ---off
(PRV is sticking) will be activated. function to open the PRV. If this kick ---off
function was not successful, service
code L215 (PRV is sticking) will be
1.5.2008
activated.
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
63
Page
code fault
code
L216 391 4 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Pressure relief Maximum rpm is 1500. A. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn
valve Maximum injection quantity is reduced to ignition key back on. Start the engine. If the service
The pressure release valve (PRV) opens 50 % from rated power. code is not active, reason might have been
at a critical pressure (PRV opening A temporarily pressure peak (breakdown), during engine
pressure) and causes a pressure drop in NOTE Due to that PRV is open; Rail running. Example abnormal load drop/fuel quantity drop
the rail. EC unit monitoring system has pressure will be stable 600 --- 700 bar during running.
32. SERVICE CODES
recognized an open pressure relief valve and overflow to fuel tank is HIGH!
by detection of pressure variation in the B. If the service code is active always when engine is
rail. The pressure relief valve (PRV) is a NOTE In case of loose rail pressure running
mechanical safety valve, which sensor or rail pressure sensor error, 1. Stop the engine.
guarantees that pressure does not rise service code L216 (PRV recognised as 2. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring
above specific value. If the PRV opens it open) is activated also. Due to that there connector is in locking position.
will stay open as long as the engine is is no valid rail pressure information 3. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring,
running. available; EC unit monitoring system will connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins
kick ---off the PRV open. (possible oxidation)
212
resistance: 2,6--- 3,15  at +20 ˚C.
L217 441 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Fuel filter 1. Check the level of the fuel in the tank.
pressure 2. Check the possible leakages of low pressure pipes.
The measured fuel filter pressure is 3. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor wiring, connectors
detected to fluctuate more than normal and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible
range. oxidation).
4. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor operation.
5. Check the fuel lift pump operation.
1.5.2008
6. Check the fuel lift pump wirings, connectors and contact

31.10.2006
surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).

All
Model
Code
321.2
64
Page
code fault
code
L218 443 EC EC FUNCTIONS: Fuel filter pressure 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
Fuel filter press., plausibility defect in If the service code is still active.
running engine.
L223 444 EC EC FUNCTIONS: Fuel filter pressure 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
Fuel filter press., plausibility defect in If the service code is still active.
stopped engine.
32. SERVICE CODES
EC unit monitoring system has detected Maximum injection quantity is reduced to pipes etc. for possible leakage.
leakage on high pressure side of 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the injectors.
injection system during engine overrun. 3. Check the rail pressure sensor wiring, connectors and
Fault is monitored only when vehicle is NOTE Engine functions dependent on contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
not consuming any fuel while overrun. rail pressure are not active. 4. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
NOTE Due to the very high injection NOTE: Due to the very high injection
pressure (max. 1400 bar), during engine pressure (max. 1400 bar), during engine
running there is a serious risk for injury, if running there is a serious risk for injury, if
at high pressure hide is a leakage. at high pressure hide is a leakage.
213
L240 276 5 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Boost pressure The engine may not start or starts slowly 1. Check the engine air supply system completely:
The measured intake manifold pressure and runs badly. --- Air filter
(signal from boost pressure sensor) is --- Piping from air filter to turbocharger (look for obstacles in
below the warning limit during engine joints, bends)
cranking. --- Turbocharger
--- Piping from turbocharger to air cooler (look for obstacles
in joints, bends)
--- Air cooler
1.5.2008
--- Piping from air cooler to inlet manifold (look for obstacles
31.10.2006
in joints, bends)
2. Check the boost pressure sensor wiring, connectors and
All
Model
3. Check the boost pressure sensor operation.

Code
321.2
65
Page
code fault
code
L250 52 1 EC Normally the engine shutdown is 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
managed by CAN bus If the service code is still active
If the normal shutdown can not be 2. Check safety signal value from side pillar display
managed by CAN bus, the EC unit (FII/E/do10) or Valtra MultiTool I/O test.
activates safety shutdown signal which 3. Check safety (MAB) line between EC unit and Bosch VP
will shutdown the engine and always 30 injection pump controller for broken contact/wiring.
32. SERVICE CODES
after some seconds EC unit cuts power

supply to the Bosch VP 30 injection
pump controller. To be sure that the
safety signal is working in emergency
situation, the EC unit tests the safety line
continuously. If the test fails the service
code is activated.
L254 42 1 EC There is a fault in the Bosch VP 30 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
Internal speed or timing information 2. Check the battery and starter motor condition.
incorrect. 3. Check that there are no air leak into fuel at low ---pressure
side or air in the fuel system.
214
L256 46 4 EC There is a fault in the Bosch VP 30 Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
injection pump controller 70%. If the service code is still active
Timing device probably damaged. 2. Check that there are no air leak into fuel at low ---pressure
side.
L301 445 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Fuel filter 1. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor wiring, connectors
pressure and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible
EC unit monitoring system has detected oxidation).
1.5.2008
measured fuel filter pressure above 2. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor operation.
31.10.2006
normal level. 3. Check the fuel lift pump operation.

All
Model
Code
321.2
66
Page
code fault
code
L302 446 4 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Fuel filter Maximum rpm is 1800. A. If the lift pump is running
pressure Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check, if filter is choked (impurities, freezing, etc.).
EC unit monitoring system has detected 75 % from rated power. 2. Check, if leak/air is in the fuel system.
measured fuel filter pressure below 3. Check the fuel level from the tank!
normal level (<110 kPa). 4. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor.
32. SERVICE CODES
B. If the lift pump is NOT running

1. Check fuse of the feed pump.
2. Check relay of the feed pump.
L303 92 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Oil pressure Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. Check the oil pressure control valve.
Oil pressure ABOVE NORMAL Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 2. Check the oil pressure sensor wiring, connectors and
(9,5 bar/30 ˚C) 75% from rated power. contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
3. Check the oil pressure sensor operation.
NOTE Monitoring is active only when the
engine is running and the coolant
temperature is > 30 ˚C.
215
L304 382 5 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Rail pressure Engine will be shutted down 1. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring
The measured rail pressure is over immediately. connector is in locking position.
critical limit. Measured pressure is >1700 2. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring,
bar. In normal conditions the pressure connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins
release valve (PRV) opens at a critical (possible oxidation).
pressure (1600 ---1650 bar). 3. Measure the MPROP wiring.
1.5.2008
In case PRV mechanical failure, EC unit 5. Measure the solenoid valve coil resistance. Correct
31.10.2006
continuously monitors rail pressure and if resistance: 2,6--- 3,15  at +20 ˚C.
measured pressure >1700 bar, engine 6. Check the rail pressure sensor wiring, connectors and
will shutdown immediately. contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
All

Model

Code
321.2
67
Page
code fault
code
L305 381 4 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Rail pressure Maximum rpm is 1500. A. If the service code is not continuously active
The measured rail pressure is below the Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the fuel level from the tank!
warning limit. Warning limit is depending 50 % from rated power. 2. Check, if the fuel filters are choked (impurities, freezing,
on the engine speed. etc.).
NOTE Engine functions dependent on 3. Check the fuel low pressure side for possible leakair in the
rail pressure are not active. fuel system.
32. SERVICE CODES

NOTE Due to the very high injection surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
pressure (1400 bar), during engine
running there is a serious risk for injury, if B. If the service code is continuously active
the high pressure side has a leakage. 1. Stop the engine. Check visually the engine high pressure
pipes etc. for possible leakage.
2. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring
connector is in locking position.
3. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring,
connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins
216
resistance: 2,6--- 3,15  at +20˚C.
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
68
Page
code fault
code
L306 265 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Rail pressure Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring
The measured rail pressure is above the Maximum injection quantity is reduced to connector is in locking position.
warning limit: CP1H high pressure 50 % from rated power. 2. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring,
pump: 130 Mpa. connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins
NOTE Engine functions dependent on (possible oxidation).
rail pressure are not active. 3. Measure the MPROP wiring.
32. SERVICE CODES

resistance: 2,6 --- 3,15  at +20 ˚C.
L307 372 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Battery voltage 1. Check the generator, if charging voltage is correct.
Supply voltage for EC unit is above
normal.
L308 371 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Battery voltage 1. Check the generator, if charging voltage is correct.
217
Supply voltage for EC unit is above
normal.
L309 253 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Fuel temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the temperature of the fuel in the tank (If the tank is
The measured fuel temperature rises 75 % from rated power. almost empty and the ambient temperature is high, the
above the warning limit (+90 ˚C). temperature may rise due to hot fuel return).
2. Check the fuel temperature sensor wiring, connectors and
3. Check the fuel temperature sensor operation.
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
69
Page
code fault
code
L310 94 5 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Speed sensor No fuel injection. NOTE Engine will recover to normal operation, whenever the
general engine speed is reduced below 3000 rpm.
The service code is activated if the NOTE Running the engine at excessive
engine speed exceeds 3000 rpm during speed may damage the engine. NOTE Use tractor brakes, select proper gear.
operation. Possible cause is engine
braking at downhill with too low gear
32. SERVICE CODES
ratio.
L334 1 TC1 Driving speed too high A service code in the side pillar display
Transmission speed sensor (B6) signal and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
data over 65 km/h. have malfunctions.
L335 1 TC1 Engine rotation speed too high A service code in the side pillar display
Engine speed sensor (B11) signal data and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
over 2800 rpm. have malfunctions.
L336 94 5 EC The engine exceeds 3000 rpm during The engine will shutdown.
operation
Possible cause is engine braking at
downhill with too low gear ratio.
218
L337 98 1 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Oil pressure Oil pressure warning lamp illuminates. 1. Check the oil level and condition of oil.
The measured oil pressure is below the 2. Check the oil filter.
warning limit. 3. Check mechanical condition of the engine.
4. Check the idling speed.
5. Check the oil pressure sensor wiring, connectors and
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
70
Page
code fault
code
L338 99 5 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Oil pressure The engine will shutdown after delay. 1. Check the oil level and condition of oil.
The measured oil pressure is below the Oil pressure warning lamp illuminates. 2. Check the oil filter.
alarm limit. 3. Check mechanical condition of the engine.
The engine will stop after 30 seconds. 4. Check the idling speed.
5. Check the oil pressure sensor wiring, connectors and
32. SERVICE CODES

L345 112 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Coolant temp. Injection quantity is reduced according 1. Check the fan belt and the belt tension.
The measured coolant temperature to a temperature table. 2. Check the coolant level.
exceeds the overheating warning limit. 3. Check condition of the radiator.
4. Check the mechanical condition of the engine.
5. Check the coolant temperature sensor wiring, connectors
and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible
oxidation).
6. Check the coolant temperature sensor operation.
L346 113 5 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Coolant temp. Injection quantity is reduced according 1. Check the fan belt and the belt tension.
The measured coolant temperature to a temperature table. The engine will 2. Check the coolant level.
219
exceeds the overheating alarm limit. shutdown after delay. 3. Check condition of the radiator.
The engine will stop after 30 seconds. 4. Check the mechanical condition of the engine.
5. Check the coolant temperature sensor wiring, connectors
and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible
oxidation).
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
71
Page
code fault
code
L351 102 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Boost pressure Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. Check the boost air system tightness (piping, intercooler).
The measured boost pressure drops Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 2. Check the turbo charger condition.
below the alarm level during operation. 75 % from rated power. 3. Check the mechanical condition of the engine.
4. Check the boost pressure sensor wiring, connectors and
32. SERVICE CODES
L353 122 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Fuel filter 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
pressure If the service code is still active
Fuel feed pressure after filters lies too low 2. Check that lift pump is running, it should run for one
level (0,05 --- 0,2 bar) more than 20 minute after switching ignition on.
seconds. 3. Check fuel quality.
4. Filter is choked (impurities, freezing, etc).
5. Leak/air in the fuel system.
6. Check the fuel level.
7. Check the fuel pressure switch wiring.
8. Check the pressure switch.
220
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
72
Page
code fault
code
L355 43 1 EC The Bosch VP 30 injection pump 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
controller recognise over temperature If the service code is still active
2. If there are other service codes active example L345 or
L346. Check those service codes first.
If there are no other service codes
3. Fuel is too warm probably. Take tractor to shade for while.
32. SERVICE CODES
If the service code does not dissapper.

L359 123 4 EC EC unit has recognized continuous Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
timing device piston oscillation of Maximum injection quantity is reduced to If the service code is still active
Bosch VP 30 injection pump 75 % from rated power. 1. Check that there are no air leak into fuel at low ---pressure
Air in the fuel may cause oscillation of the side or air in the fuel system.
Bosch VP 30 injection pump timing 2. Measure the fuel pressure to see, if fuel filters or fuel lines
221
device. from tank are clogged. Run the engine on idle some
seconds. On idle pressure should be between 1,0 ---1,2 bar.
NOTE Clarify immediately of the air in 3. Check the fuel filters (main and pre) sealing condition and
the fuel system. filters tightness.
4. Replace original metal fuel feed pipe between Bosch VP
30 injection pump and the lift pump with clear flexible tube
(rubber/plastic) to see that there is no air in the fuel
anymore. If there are air in the fuel system, fuel in the clear
1.5.2008
flexible tube is gray, if there are no air the fuel in the clear
31.10.2006
flexible tube is yellow. If there is still air in the fuel, check all
fuel lines and filters tightness once again.
All
Model
Code
321.2
73
Page
code fault
code
L360 177 4 EC Limited time (200 h) for EC unit test Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
software has been exceeded 75 % from rated power. If the service code is still active
2. There is a test software in the tractor.
You must update a proper software to the tractor.
L361 103 4 EC ENGINE SENSORS: Boost pressure Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check, that the control system is configured according to
The measured boost pressure rises Maximum injection quantity is reduced to the original specification and no additional devices have
32. SERVICE CODES
above the warning limit during operation. 75% from rated power. been attached.
2. Check that the injectors and the turbocharger meet the
original specifications.
CR engine: 3. Check the boost pressure sensor wiring, connectors and
Maximum rpm is 1800. contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 4. Check the boost pressure sensor operation.
75 % from rated power.
L419 2 TC1 Fault in the rear PTO speed sensor A service code in the side pillar display
(B7) and PTO is disengaged immediately and
The rear PTO speed sensor (B7) has a driver can activate it after the current is
lower rotation speed than by the PTO switched off and on. Tractor can still be
222
lever selected rotation speed range (limit driven.
switch S28 and S29).
L422 4 TC1 The shuttle sensors (B12 and B13) A service code in the side pillar display
have lower rotation speed than the and engine power or engine speed
engine (B11) sensor limited.
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
74
Page
code fault
code
L449 1 TC2 Fault in the function of the 4WD A service code in the side pillar display
multi ---disc clutch and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
The front axle speed sensor (B5C) has have malfunctions.
18 % lower rotation speed than the
transmission speed sensor (B6) over
time of three seconds.
32. SERVICE CODES
P101 3 TC1 Fault in the control current for the A service code in the side pillar display
DPS1 solenoid (Y4) and shuttle automatics are not in function
temperatures.
DPS2 solenoid (Y6) and shuttle automatics are not in function
223
temperatures.
DPS3 valve (Y17) and shuttle automatics are not in function
1.5.2008

31.10.2006
temperatures.
All
Model
Code
321.2
75
Page
code fault
code
shuttle F valve (Y11) and shuttle automatics are not in function
32. SERVICE CODES
temperatures.
shuttle R valve (Y12) and shuttle automatics are not in function
temperatures.
P125 3 TC1 Fault in the control current for the rear A service code in the side pillar display
PTO valve (Y2) and shuttle automatics are not in function
224
temperatures.
P131 1 TC1 Fault in the control voltage for the A service code in the side pillar display
start blocking relay (K52) and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
have malfunctions.
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
76
Page
code fault
code
P132 1 TC1 Fault in the control voltage for the 4 A service code in the side pillar display
WD and tractor can be driven, but DPS can
Short circuit in the connector A1A3/1 have malfunctions.
output of the TC1 control unit.
P135 312 4 EC INJECTOR DIAGNOSTIC: Injector 1 Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check the EC unit injector connector contact terminals
EC unit monitoring system has detected Maximum injection quantity is reduced to and the EC unit pins for possible oxidation.
32. SERVICE CODES
short circuit between cables of injector 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the high side and low side wiring between solenoid
solenoid valve 1 on cylinder 1 valve 1 terminals and EC unit injector connector.
(6 ---cylinder and 4 ---cylinder engine). NOTE Short circuit between cables will 3. Check the solenoid valve 1 low side wiring for possible
Short circuit to power supply from switch off the bank (solenoid valves 1, 5 short circuit to any line or terminal connected to power
solenoid valve low side will activate this and 3). supply.
service code, too. 4. Measure the solenoid valve 1 coil resistance. Correct
resistance is 0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
P136 313 4 EC INJECTOR DIAGNOSTIC: Injector 1 Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check the EC unit injector connector locking. The
EC unit monitoring system has detected Maximum injection quantity is reduced to connector metallic locking lever must be in final position
open circuit in the wiring of injector 50 % from rated power. (locking position).
solenoid valve 1 on cylinder 1 2. Check the EC unit injector connector contact terminals
225
(6 ---cylinder and 4 ---cylinder engine). and the EC unit pins for possible oxidation.
3. Check the solenoid valve 1 cable connector fastening.
Correct tightening value for nuts is 1,5 Nm!
4. Check the high side and low side wiring between solenoid
valve 1 terminals and EC unit injector connector.
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
77
Page
code fault
code
short circuit to ground at injector 50 % from rated power. (locking position).
solenoid valve 1 on cylinder 1 2. Check the EC unit injector connector contact terminals
(6 ---cylinder and 4 ---cylinder engine). NOTE Short circuit to ground of solenoid and the EC unit pins for possible oxidation.
valve low side will switch off a single 3. Check the solenoid valve 1 cable connector fastening.
32. SERVICE CODES
injector. Correct tightening value for nuts is 1,5 Nm!

Short circuit to ground of solenoid valve
high side will switch off the bank 4 ---valve engines
(solenoid valves 1, 5 and 3). 1. Check carefully solenoid valve 1 connector installation for
possible ground connection of terminals, e.g. to valve
covers.
2. On the injector harness valve cover connector, measure
the resistance between solenoid valve 1 contact pins and
the engine ground for possible short circuit to ground.
3. On the injector harness EC unit injection connector,
measure the resistance between solenoid valve contact pins
and the engine ground for possible short circuit to ground.
226
5. Measure the solenoid valve 1 coil resistance. Correct
6. Measure the resistance between the solenoid valve 1
cable terminals and the engine ground to see, if there is a
short circuit to ground in the solenoid valve.
2 ---valve engines
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
1. On the injector harness EC unit injector connector,

measure the resistance between solenoid valve 1 contact
pins and the engine ground for possible short circuit to
All
ground.
Model
Code
321.2
78
Page
code fault
code
short circuit between cables of injector 50 % from rated power. (locking position).
solenoid valve 2 (6 ---cylinder engine: 2. Check the EC unit injector connector contact terminals
on cylinder 5, 4 ---cylinder engine: on and the EC unit pins for possible oxidation.
cylinder 2). Short circuit to power supply 3. Check the solenoid valve 2 cable connector fastening.
32. SERVICE CODES
from solenoid valve low side will activate Correct tightening value for nuts is 1,5 Nm!
this service code, too. 4. Check the high side and low side wiring between solenoid
cylinder 2). 3. Check the solenoid valve 2 cable connector fastening.
227
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
79
Page
code fault
code
on cylinder 5, 4 ---cylinder engine: on NOTE Short circuit to ground of solenoid and the EC unit pins for possible oxidation.
cylinder 2). valve low side, will switch off a single 3. Check the solenoid valve 2 cable connector fastening.
32. SERVICE CODES

high side, will switch off the bank 4 ---valve engines
covers.
228
2 ---valve engines
1.5.2008
31.10.2006

All
ground.
Model
Code
321.2
80
Page
code fault
code
solenoid valve 3 (6 ---cylinder engine: valve 3 terminals and EC unit injector connector.
on cylinder 3, 4 ---cylinder engine: on NOTE Short circuit between cables will 3. Check the solenoid valve 3 low side wiring for possible
cylinder 4). Short circuit to power supply switch off the bank (solenoid valves 1, 5 short circuit to any line or terminal connected to power
32. SERVICE CODES
from solenoid valve low side will activate and 3). supply.
this service code, too. 4. Measure the solenoid valve 3 coil resistance. Correct
229
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
81
Page
code fault
code
on cylinder 3, 4 ---cylinder engine: on NOTE Short circuit to ground of solenoid and the EC unit pins for possible oxidation.
cylinder 4). valve low side will switch off a single 3. Check the solenoid valve 3 cable connector fastening.
32. SERVICE CODES

high side will switch off the bank 4 ---valve engines
covers.
230
2 ---valve engines
1.5.2008
31.10.2006

All
ground.
Model
Code
321.2
82
Page
code fault
code
solenoid valve 4 (6 ---cylinder engine: valve 4 terminals and EC unit injector connector.
on cylinder 6, 4 ---cylinder engine: on NOTE Short circuit between cables will 3. Check the solenoid valve 4 low side wiring for possible
cylinder 3). Short circuit to power supply switch off the bank (solenoid valves 6, 2 short circuit to any line or terminal connected to power
32. SERVICE CODES
from solenoid valve low side will activate and 4). supply.
this service code, too. 4. Measure the solenoid valve 4 coil resistance. Correct
231
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
83
Page
code fault
code
P152 341 4 EC INJECTOR DIAGNOSTIC: Injector 4 Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check the EC injector connector locking. The connector
EC unit monitoring system has detected Maximum injection quantity is reduced to metallic locking lever must be in final position (locking
short circuit to ground at injector 50 % from rated power. position).
solenoid valve 4 (6 ---cylinder engine: 2. Check the EC injector connector contact terminals and
on cylinder 6, 4 ---cylinder engine: on NOTE Short circuit to ground of solenoid the EC pins for possible oxidation.
cylinder 3). valve low side, will switch off a single 3. Check the solenoid valve 4 cable connector fastening.
32. SERVICE CODES
injector. Short circuit to ground of Correct tightening value for nuts is 1,5 Nm!
solenoid valve high side, will switch off
the bank (solenoid valves 6, 2 and 4). 4 ---valve engines
1. Check carefully solenoid valve 4 connector installation for
covers.
3. On the injector harness EC injection connector, measure
the resistance between solenoid valve contact pins and the
engine ground for possible short circuit to ground.
232
valve 4 terminals and EC injector connector.
2 ---valve engines
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
1. On the injector harness EC injector connector, measure

All
Model

Code
321.2
84
Page
code fault
code
P155 352 4 EC INJECTOR DIAGNOSTIC: Injector 5 Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check the EC injector connector contact terminals and
EC unit monitoring system has detected Maximum injection quantity is reduced to the EC pins for possible oxidation.
solenoid valve 5 on cylinder 2. Short valve 5 terminals and EC injector connector.
circuit to battery (+) from solenoid valve NOTE Short circuit between cables will 3. Check the solenoid valve 5 low side wiring for possible
low side will activate this service code, switch off the bank (solenoid valves 1, 5 short circuit to any line or terminal connected to power
32. SERVICE CODES
too. and 3). supply.

P156 353 4 EC INJECTOR DIAGNOSTIC: Injector 5 Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check the EC injector connector locking. The connector
EC unit monitoring system has detected Maximum injection quantity is reduced to metallic locking lever must be in final position (locking
open circuit in the wiring of injector 50 % from rated power. position).
solenoid valve 5 on cylinder 2. 2. Check the EC injector connector contact terminals and
the EC pins for possible oxidation.
Correct tightening value for nuts is 1,5Nm!
233
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
85
Page
code fault
code
solenoid valve 5 on cylinder 2. 2. Check the EC unit injector connector contact terminals
NOTE Short circuit to ground of solenoid and the EC unit pins for possible oxidation.
valve low side will switch off a single 3. Check the solenoid valve 5 cable connector fastening.
32. SERVICE CODES
solenoid valve high side will switch off
covers.
234
2 ---valve engines
1.5.2008
31.10.2006

All
ground.
Model
Code
321.2
86
Page
code fault
code
solenoid valve 6 on cylinder 4. Short valve 6 terminals and EC unit injector connector.
circuit to power supply from solenoid NOTE Short circuit between cables will 3. Check the solenoid valve 6 low side wiring for possible
valve low side will activate this service switch off the bank (solenoid valves 6, 2 short circuit to any line or terminal connected to power
32. SERVICE CODES
code, too. and 4). supply.

and the EC unit pins for possible oxidation.
235
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
87
Page
code fault
code
NOTE Short circuit to ground of solenoid and the EC unit pins for possible oxidation.
valve low side, will switch off a single 3. Check the solenoid valve 6 cable connector fastening.
32. SERVICE CODES
solenoid valve high side, will switch off
covers.
236
2 ---valve engines
1.5.2008
31.10.2006

All
ground.
Model
Code
321.2
88
Page
code fault
code
P165 422 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Pump valve High pressure pump will start to provide 1. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring,
EC unit monitoring system has detected full fuel quantity and pressure for rail. connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins
short circuit to power supply on MPROP (possible oxidation).
low side. NOTE Due to that there is no control 2. Measure the low side from wiring terminal to engine
pulse (PWM) for MPROP; high pressure ground, to see if there is a short circuit to power supply.
pump will start to provide full fuel 3. Measure the solenoid valve coil resistance. Correct
32. SERVICE CODES
quantity and pressure for rail. resistance: 2,6 --- 3,15  at +20 ˚C.
NOTE Service code L215 (PRV

recognised as open) will be activated
also, due to full fuel quantity and
pressure at rail.
P166 423 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Pump valve High pressure pump will start to provide 1. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring
EC unit monitoring system has detected full fuel quantity and pressure for rail. connector is in locking position.
open circuit on MPROP low side. 2. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring,
NOTE Due to that there is no control connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins
pulse (PWM) for MPROP; high pressure (possible oxidation).
pump will start to provide full fuel 3. Measure between the low side from wiring terminal to EC
237
quantity and pressure for rail. unit injector connector, to see if there is a fault in the cable.
NOTE Service code L215 (PRV resistance: 2,6 --- 3,15  at +20 ˚C.
pressure at rail.
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
89
Page
code fault
code
P167 421 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Pump valve High pressure pump will start to provide 1. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring,
EC unit monitoring system has detected full fuel quantity and pressure for rail. connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins
short circuit to ground on MPROP low (possible oxidation).
side. NOTE Due to that there is no control 2. Measure the low side from wiring terminal to engine
pulse (PWM) for MPROP; high pressure ground, to see if there is a short circuit to ground (when the
pump will start to provide full fuel ignition key is off position there should not be connection to
32. SERVICE CODES
quantity and pressure for rail. ground).

NOTE Service code L215 (PRV resistance: 2,6 --- 3,15  at +20 ˚C.
recognised as open) will be activated 4. Measure from MPROP solenoid valve connector pins to
also, due to full fuel quantity and engine ground, to see if there is a short circuit to ground in
pressure at rail. the solenoid valve.
P233 40 5 EC There is a fault in the Bosch VP 30 The engine will shutdown and will not 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
injection pump start. If the service code is still active.
P234 41 4 EC There is a fault in the Bosch VP 30 Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Switch the ignition off (5 seconds) and back to on.
injection pump 75 % from rated power. If the service code is still active.
P238 315 4 EC INJECTOR DIAGNOSTIC: Injector 1 Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition
238
EC unit monitoring system has detected Maximum injection quantity is reduced to key back on. Start the engine.
current level error at injector solenoid 50 % from rated power.
valve 1 on cylinder 1 (6 ---cylinder and A. If the service code is not active, reason might have
4 ---cylinder engine). The probable NOTE Current level error will switch off been temporary current peak at solenoid valve. This may
cause for the problem is temporary the bank (solenoid valves 1, 5 and 3). happen due to temporary malfunction of injector. If the fault
current peak at solenoid valve. cannot be repeated within the next 10 operating hours, there
is no mechanical fault in the solenoid valve.
1.5.2008
B. If the service code is active always when engine is

31.10.2006
running, reason might be a defective solenoid valve or

incorrect solenoid valve for the engine type.
All
Model
Code
321.2
90
Page
code fault
code
EC unit monitoring system has detected Maximum injection quantity is reduced to key back on. Start the engine. If the service code is active
fast decay error at injector solenoid 50 % from rated power. always when engine is running, reason might be a defective
valve 1 on cylinder 1 (6 ---cylinder and EC unit.
4 ---cylinder engine). Fast decay control NOTE Fast decay error will switch off the
is monitoring, that the solenoid valve is bank (solenoid valves 1, 5 and 3).
32. SERVICE CODES
closed fast enough after each injection.

Fast decay error means, that injector
valve will be open longer than intended.
valve 2 (6 ---cylinder engine: on A. If the service code is not active, reason might have
cylinder 5, 4 ---cylinder engine: on NOTE Current level error will switch off been temporary current peak at solenoid valve. This may
cylinder 2). The probable cause for the the bank (solenoid valves 6, 2 and 4). happen due to temporary malfunction of injector. If the fault
problem is temporary current peak at cannot be repeated within the next 10 operating hours, there
solenoid valve. is no mechanical fault in the solenoid valve.
239
valve 2 (6 ---cylinder engine: on EC unit.
1.5.2008
cylinder 5, 4 ---cylinder engine: on NOTE Fast decay error will switch off the
31.10.2006
cylinder 2). Fast decay control is bank (solenoid valves 6, 2 and 4).
monitoring, that the solenoid valve is
All

Model

Code
321.2
91
Page
code fault
code
32. SERVICE CODES

valve 3 (6 ---cylinder engine: on EC unit.
240
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
92
Page
code fault
code
32. SERVICE CODES

valve 4 (6 ---cylinder engine: on EC.
241
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
93
Page
code fault
code
valve 5 on cylinder 2. The probable A. If the service code is not active, reason might have
cause for the problem is temporary NOTE Current level error will switch off been temporary current peak at solenoid valve. This may
current peak at solenoid valve. the bank (solenoid valves 1, 5 and 3). happen due to temporary malfunction of injector. If the fault
32. SERVICE CODES
cannot be repeated within the next 10 operating hours, there


valve 5 on cylinder 2. Fast decay EC unit.
control is monitoring, that the solenoid NOTE Fast decay error will switch off the
valve is closed fast enough after each bank (solenoid valves 1, 5 and 3).
242
injection. Fast decay error means, that
injector valve will be open longer than
intended.
1.5.2008
31.10.2006
All
Model
Code
321.2
94
Page
code fault
code
valve 6 on cylinder 4. The probable A. If the service code is not active, reason might have
cause for the problem is temporary NOTE Current level error will switch off been temporary current peak at solenoid valve. This may
current peak at solenoid valve. the bank (solenoid valves 6, 2 and 4). happen due to temporary malfunction of injector. If the fault
32. SERVICE CODES
cannot be repeated within the next 10 operating hours, there


valve 6 on cylinder 4. Fast decay EC unit.
control is monitoring, that the solenoid NOTE Fast decay error will switch off the
valve is closed fast enough after each bank (solenoid valves 6, 2 and 4).
243
injection. Fast decay error means, that
injector valve will be open longer than
intended.
P368 424 EC EC unit FUNCTIONS: Pump valve High pressure pump will start to provide 1. This service code will be activated always, if service code
EC unit monitoring system has detected full fuel quantity and pressure for rail. P135 (EC unit monitoring system has detected short circuit
excess temperature in power stage. between cables of injector solenoid valve 1 on cylinder 1)
When power supply defect occurs NOTE Due to that there is no control has caused excess temperature for power stage in EC unit.
1.5.2008
repeatedly, the EC unit gives an early pulse (PWM) for MPROP; high pressure 2. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition
31.10.2006
warning of an over temperature condition pump will start to provide full fuel key back on. Start the engine. If the service code is active
in the power stage. quantity and pressure for rail. always when engine is running, reason might be a defective
EC unit.
All
NOTE Service code L215 (PRV

Model

pressure at rail.
Code
321.2
95
Page
32. SERVICE CODES
1.5.2008 All 321.2 96
244
32. SERVICE CODES
31.10.2006 All 321.3 97
Calibration interruption codes

Dividing of the Calibration interruption codes
Calibration interruption codes have been divided into
different kind of sections.
Sections:
The PTO, shuttle and DPS clutches
C901 --- C907
The Gas pedal

C910 --- C917
The Speed sensors

C930 --- C945
The Steering angle

C950 --- C953
The Clutch pedal

C960 --- C963
Appearing of the calibration interruption codes

Calibration interruption codes appears only when
calibrating e.g. gas pedal for auto DPS.
245
32. SERVICE CODES
31.10.2006 All 321.3 98
246
Valtra Description Reaction, influence Solution
Service
Code
C901 Calibration interruption codes for the PTO, A service code in the side pillar display Do the calibration again.
shuttle and DPS clutches and tractor can be driven.
The seat switch does not recognize a driver or
clutch pedal has been depressed during calibration.
Parking brake applied, engine revs wrong, gearbox
temperature wrong, mechanical gear is not en-
32. SERVICE CODES
gaged or tractor on a slanting ground.

Initial pressure calibration does not find a correct
value in spite of many attempts. The tractor starts to
move too sharply. Ensure, that the tractor is on the
level ground and that the correct mechanical gear
has been engaged.
Clutch which is calibrated does not transmit enough
247
high torque. E.g. piston or valve trapped, pressure
of low pressure circuit is too low, leaks etc.
Calculated initial pressure index is not within given
limits (limits ---9...+9).
31.10.2006
22.1.2006
Calculated pre ---filling index is not within given li-

mits (e.g. clutch piston does not move freely or
clutch worn out) (limits ---9...+9).
All
Model
The pre ---filling time calibration does not find a cor-
rect value in spite of many attempts.
C910 Calibration interruption codes for the gas pedal A service code in the side pillar display Do the calibration again.
Gas pedal position value does not change evenly and tractor can be driven.
Code
between upper and lower positions.

321.3
Gas pedal lower position value outside the operat- and tractor can be driven.
99
Page
ing range.
Service
Code
Gas pedal upper position value outside the operat- and tractor can be driven.
ing range.
Engine rotation speed too low when the gas pedal and tractor can be driven.
is in lower position.
32. SERVICE CODES
Engine rotation speed too high, when the gas pedal and tractor can be driven.
is in upper position.
Engine rotation speed values does not change and tractor can be driven.
evenly between min and max rotation speed range.
Saving of the calibration values failed. and tractor can be driven.
Too fast calibration. The gas pedal was pressed too and tractor can be driven.
248
fast to down position.
C930 Calibration interruption codes for the speed A service code in the side pillar display Do the calibration again.
sensors and tractor can be driven.
Steering not calibrated.
Steering not in middle position.
31.10.2006
22.1.2006
Fault in the sensors. System assumes, that 4WD is
All
switched on.
Model
4WD is switched on.
Fault in the sensors. System assumes, that differen-
Code
321.3
tial lock is switched on.

100
Page
Differential lock is switched on.

Service
Code
Saving of the calibration values failed.
Fault in the calibration program.
32. SERVICE CODES
Fault in the signal from transmission sensor.
Fault in the signal from rear tyre sensor.
Fault in the signal from front axle sensor.
249
Fault in the radar signal.
Driving speed of the calibration too low or fault in
31.10.2006
22.1.2006
the radar signal.

All
Model
Driving speed of the calibration not even.

The control unit TC1 does not give transmission
speed message.
C950 Calibration interruption codes for the steering A service code in the side pillar display Do the calibration again.
Code
angle and tractor can be driven.

321.3
Sensor outside the limits values of the limit

positions.
101
Page
Service
Code
Sensors middle position outside the limit values.
Saving of the calibration failed.
32. SERVICE CODES
Middle positions sample values did not received
enough.
C960 Calibration interruption codes for the clutch A service code in the side pillar display Do the calibration again.
pedal and tractor can be driven.
Clutch pedal position value does not change evenly
Clutch pedel lower position value outside the
250
operating range.
Clutch pedal upper postion value outside the
operating range.
31.10.2006
22.1.2006
All
Model
Code
321.3
102
Page
32. SERVICE CODES
31.10.2006 All 321.4 103
Service codes of ACB power lift
Service code Fault Control Description

number unit con-
nector pin
11 Output/lifting 2 Output signal to lifting solenoid faulty or poor contacts in solenoid wire
to pin 6.
12 Output lowering 14 Output signal to lowering solenoid faulty or poor contacts in solenoid
wire to pin 6.
13 Short circuit 6 Measured current in pin 6 too high. Short circuit between pins 2 and 6
or between pins 14 and 6 (solenoid in short circuit)
14 Push button in 10 Signal from push buttons not OK. Push button or its wire damaged.
mudguard, up-
wards
15 Push button in 20 Signal from push buttons not OK. Push button or its wire damaged.
mudguard, down-
wards
16 Supply 12 Control unit supply not in order.
Supply of 9,5 V and earthing not in order
22 Position sensor 19 Signal from sensor faulty
--- Poor contact or position sensor disconnected
--- Possible short circuit or earthing
--- Position sensor faulty adjustment
23 Position control 16 Signal from potentiometer faulty. Poor contacts or wire loose.
potentiometer
24 Transport height 22 Signal from selector faulty. Poor contacts or wire loose.
selector
28 Up/stop/down 8 Signal from switch faulty. Poor contacts or wire loose.
switch
31 RH side draft sen- 18 Signal from sensor faulty:
sor --- Poor contact or wire disconnected
--- Sensor overloaded
32 LH side draft sen- 17 Signal from sensor faulty:
34 Lowering speed 24 Signal from selector faulty. Poor contacts or wire disconnected.
selector
36 Position control/ 4 Signal from selector faulty. Poor contacts or wire disconnected.
draft control selec-
tor
251
32. SERVICE CODES
22.1.2006 All 321.4 104
252
32. SERVICE CODES
1.5.2008 All 321.5 105
Service codes of ACDS power lift

number unit con-
nector pin
11 Output/lifting 37 Output signal to lifting solenoid faulty or poor contacts in solenoid wire
to pin 35. Battery voltage low in pin 29 (fuse fault).
12 Output lowering 19 Output signal to lowering solenoid faulty or poor contacts in solenoid
wire to pin 35. Battery voltage low in pin 29 (fuse fault).
13 Short circuit 35 Measured current in pin 35 too high. Short circuit between pins 19
and 35 or between pins 37 and 35 (solenoid in short circuit)
14 Open circuit 35 No current in pin 35, although solenoid is activated. Possible poor
contacts in wires to solenoid (pins 19, 37 and 35). Solenoid dama-
ged. No battery voltage in pin 29 (fuse fault)
15 Push buttons 9 Signal from push buttons not OK. Push button or its wire damaged.
16 Supply 2 (+) Control unit supply not in order.
20 (---) Supply of 9,5 V and earthing not in order
17 Battery 29 Battery voltage greater than 18 V
18 Lift/lower switch 21 Signal from switch faulty. Poor contacts or signal wire not connected.
22 Position sensor 6 Signal from sensor faulty

--- Poor contact or position sensor disconnected
--- Position sensor faulty adjustment
23 Position control 22 Signal from potentiometer faulty. Poor contacts or wire loose.
potentiometer
24 Transport height 3 Signal from selector faulty. Poor contacts or wire loose.
selector
31 RH side draft sen- 26 Signal from sensor faulty:
32 LH side draft sen- 7 Signal from sensor faulty:
33 Battery 24 Voltage too low (lower than 11,5 V).
34 Lowering speed 23 Signal from selector faulty. Poor contacts or wire disconnected.
selector
35 Slip control selec- 5 Signal from selector faulty. Poor contacts or wire disconnected.
tor
36 Position control/ 4 Signal from selector faulty. Poor contacts or wire disconnected.
draft control selec-
tor
37 Control valve Power lift does not lift, although current in lifting solenoid (pin 37). Dirt
in control valve. No oil pressure. Control valve damaged, valve spool
does not move.
253
32. SERVICE CODES
1.5.2008 All 321.5 106

number unit con-
nector pin
38 A. With pressure sensor (not Valtra equipment)
1. Check if there is a open circuit or sensor not connected or short
circuit to ground or a short circuit to power supply
B. No pressure sensor
1. Check the Drive Balance Control / Slip Control switch
--- that is not broken
--- there are maximum of four (4) positions on EHRD (on EHRB only
two) when rotating the selector (if there is more check the washers
with lugs that it is in correct position)
2. Check if there is a open circuit or shor circuit to ground or a short
circuit to power supply
4. Check if there is a EHR control unit failure on EHRD by switching
the slip on from Drive Balance Control / Slip Control switch (position 4)
--- if the LED indicator is on everything is OK
--- if the service code is active EHR control unit is defective.
41 Radar signal 10 Radar signal low, transmission sensor signal OK (can be verified only
in draft control mode). Poor contacts or radar damaged.
42 Signal from trans- 11 Transmission sensor signal low, radar signal in order (can be verified
mission sensor only in draft control mode). Poor contacts in sensor wire or sensor
faulty.
Note! Fault codes 41 and 42: the diagnostic light does not show the fault code, if both the transmission sensor signal and
radar signal are low, since this is a normal situation when the tractor is stationary.
254
32. SERVICE CODES
1.5.2008 All 321.6 107
Service codes of ISO 11786 (implement signal connector) and ISO 11783 (ISOBUS)
Same service code can hold different types of faults in same function. Example service code 11 holds the function of the
radar speed. The radar speed signal can be too high or the radar speed signal value can change too fast e.g. from 20 km/h to
35 km/h in a second or the radar speed value can not get via CAN bus.
Input signals
Flash code Fault Description Solution

11 R d speed
Radar p d V l too
Value t high
hi h
Too high rate of change
CAN timeout
12 T
Transmission
i i speed
p d V l too
Value t high
hi h
CAN timeout
13 Rear PTO ---speed Value too high
CAN timeout
14 Rear linkage position CAN timeout
Current too low
Current too high
15 Rear linkage up/down CAN timeout
16 Front PTO speed Value too high
CAN timeout
17 Front PTO position CAN timeout
18 Front linkage up/down CAN timeout
19 Engine speed Too high value
Can timeout
22 Left---turn signal lights CAN timeout
Right---turn signal lights CAN timeout
Left stop lights CAN timeout
Right stop lights CAN timeout
Tractor marker lights CAN timeout
Implement rear work lights CAN timeout
25 Driving direction information CAN timeout
Output signals
21 Rear linkage position Current too high or
Current too low
23 ECU_PWR or PWR Short circuit in the operating voltage
24 Indigating light Short circuit in the operating voltage
Other signals
32 Tractor CAN ---bus Bus---off or No acknowledgement
41 Adapting fault Power on self test
(e.g. flash ---memory)
42 Parameter file missing / faulty
255
32. SERVICE CODES
1.5.2008 All 321.6 108
256
Model Code Page
32. SERVICE CODES
1.5.2008 All 321.7 109
Service codes for Semi ---active cabin and front axle suspension (AutoComfort)
The service codes are shown by the blinking indicator light of the switch so that e.g. number 4 means four quick flashes of the
indicator light. Between the periods the indicator light is off about three seconds. These periods of four flashes and three
seconds will repeat as long as the control unit is switched off.
The diagnostics shows only one fault at a time. If there are several faults at the same time, the first fault in the list is shown.
When the fault has been corrected, the second fault will be shown after following start.

2 Cabin level failure Cabin level is wrong Check pneumatic system:
--- Position sensor signal is out of --- sufficient pressure (in valve input)
alarm range --- freezing of valve
--- Cab pposition can not reach --- defective valve
normal position in two minutes Check position sensor:
--- mounting
--- signal level (short or open circuit)
--- defective sensor
3 Front axle level failure Front axle level is wrong Check front axle position sensor:
Position sensor signal is out of --- mounting
alarm range --- signal level (short or open circuit)
--- defective sensor
4 Cabin level control valve (UP) Level control can not move up Check if there is a short circuit to ground
circuit the cabin or open circuit.
Circuit is open or short circuit Check resistance of coil.
5 Cabin level control valve Level control can not move Check if there is a short circuit to ground
(DOWN) circuit down the cabin or open circuit.
6 Front axle level control valve Level control can not move up Check if there is a short circuit to ground
(UP) circuit (error doesn’t exist if the front axle or open circuit.
down valve is not connected) Check resistance of coil.
Circuit is open or short circuit
7 Front axle level control valve Level control can not move Check if there is a short circuit to ground
(DOWN) circuit (error doesn’t down the front axle or open circuit.
exist if up valve is not connected) Check resistance of coil.
Circuit is open or short circuit
8 Right damping proportional Controller stop damping cont- Check if there is a short circuit to ground
valve rol for both damper or open circuit.
9 Left damping proportional val- Controller stop damping cont- Check if there is a short circuit to ground
ve rol for both damper or open circuit.
10 Supply or reference voltage out Damping and level control ac- Check voltage of power supply.
of normal range tives failing. Over voltage in Check voltage of reference line. If volta-
--- Supply voltage is over 8V reference line may damage ge is out of range check wiring (short
--- Reference voltage is under position sensors. circuits to ground and supply). If wiring
4,7V or over 5,3V is OK replace ECU.
11 Can bus failure Damping functionality is insuf- Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN
Controller can not receive data ficient. (Cabin level control bus measurement.
from CAN bus working as usual)
12 Calibration not passed Calibration is not passed and Check mechanical unrestrictedness of
Position sensor (Front axle or ca- original settings are restored. front axle and cabin.
bin) can not reach sufficient mo- Error code disappear after Measure signal levels from position sen-
vement during the calibration. controller reset. sor with MultiTool.
Minimum movement is 1V.
257
Model Code Page
32. SERVICE CODES
1.5.2008 All 321.7 110
258
Model Code Page
32. SERVICE CODES N Series
19.2.2010 N2 Series 321.8 111
Service codes for hydraulic front axle suspension

The service codes are shown by the blinking indicator light of the switch.
Service Indicator light behaviour Fault

code
11 light ON for 0.25 seconds Sensor failure
--- --- --- Sensor out of range, no sensor signal.
light OFF for 1.25 seconds

--- --- ---
light ON for 0.25 seconds
--- --- ---
22 light ON for 0.25 seconds, light OFF for 0.4 seconds, Output failure
light ON for 0.25 seconds No reaction over 25 seconds by active output.
--- --- ---
--- --- ---
light ON for 0.25 seconds, light OFF for 0.4 seconds,
light ON for 0.25 seconds
--- --- ---
--- light ON for 0.5 seconds, light OFF for 0.5 seconds Calibration in progress
259
Model Code Page
32. SERVICE CODES N Series
19.2.2010 N2 Series 321.8 112
260
33. SERVICE CODES LS,
19.2.2010 Versu, Direct 330 1
Contents
33 Service codes for LS, Versu and Direct models

331.1 ... Representation of service codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
331.2 ... FMI and Description (SAE J1939---73) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
331.3 ... Control units, names and CAN IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
331.4 ... Service codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
261
1.5.2008 Versu, Direct 330 2
262
19.2.2010 Versu, Direct 331.1 1
Representation of service codes

According to standard SAE J1939
Consists of 11 digits
Structure
SPN: Suspect Parameter Number (6 digits)
FMI: Failure Mode Identifier (2 digits)
SA: Sender Address (3 digits)
Example of new service code

000102 04 000, Boost pressure sensor defect LOW
000102 = SPN; fault target (0---524288)
04 = FMI; defined explanation (wire broken, short circuit), (0---31)
000 = SA; Sender Address (0---254), TC1 = 3, TC2 = 4, TT = 40
263
19.2.2010 Versu, Direct 331.1 2
264
Model Code Page
1.5.2008
19.2.2010 Versu, Direct 331.2 3
FMI and Description (SAE J1939---73)

FMI=0 DATA VALID BUT ABOVE NORMAL OPERATIONAL RANGE --- MOST SEVERE LEVEL
FMI=1 DATA VALID BUT BELOW NORMAL OPERATIONAL RANGE --- MOST SEVERE LEVEL
FMI=2 DATA ERRATIC, INTERMITTENT OR INCORRECT
FMI=3 VOLTAGE ABOVE NORMAL OR SHORTED TO HIGH SOURCE
FMI=4 VOLTAGE BELOW NORMAL OR SHORTED TO LOW SOURCE
FMI=5 CURRENT BELOW NORMAL OR OPEN CIRCUIT
FMI=6 CURRENT ABOVE NORMAL OR GROUNDED CIRCUIT
FMI=7 MECHANICAL SYSTEM NOT RESPONDING OR OUT OF ADJUSTMENT
FMI=8 ABNORMAL FREQUENCY OR PULSE WIDTH OR PERIOD
FMI=9 ABNORMAL UPDATE RATE
FMI=10 ABNORMAL RATE OF CHANGE
FMI=11 ROOT CAUSE NOT KNOWN
FMI=12 BAD INTELLIGENT DEVICE OR COMPONENT
FMI=13 OUT OF CALIBRATION
FMI=14 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
FMI=15 DATA VALID BUT ABOVE NORMAL OPERATING RANGE --- LEAST SEVERE LEVEL
FMI=16 DATA VALID BUT ABOVE NORMAL OPERATING RANGE --- MODERATELY SEVERE LEVEL
FMI=17 DATA VALID BUT BELOW NORMAL OPERATING RANGE --- LEAST SEVERE LEVEL
FMI=18 DATA VALID BUT BELOW NORMAL OPERATING RANGE --- MODERATELY SEVERE LEVEL
FMI=19 RECEIVED NETWORK DATA IN ERROR
FMI=20 TO 30 RESERVED FOR SAE ASSIGNMENT
FMI=31 NOT AVAILABLE OR CONDITION EXISTS
265
Model Code Page
1.5.2008
19.2.2010 Versu, Direct 331.2 4
266
19.2.2010 Versu, Direct 331.3 5
Control units, names and CAN IDs

Name CAN ID (dec)
EC Engine control unit 0
ICL Instrument panel, front 23
TC1 Transmission control unit 1 3
TC2 Transmission control unit 2 4
UC1 User control unit 1 5
UC2 TwinTrac control unit 6
EHR Hitch control unit 35
TT Tractor terminal 40
ISOAD ISOBUS control unit 220
(ISO 11786 and ISO 11783)
AUX1...AUX4, Valve no. x for Auxiliary Hydraulics 1 = 129
AUX1F...AUX3F 2 = 130
3 = 131
4 = 132
5 = 133
1F = 135
2F = 136
3F = 137
ACC Automatic climate control ---
SSA Suspension for steering axle ---
(hydro---pneumatic)
SUS1 AutoComfort 47
Suspension for cab and front axle
Semi ---active (pneumatic)
267
33. SERVICE CODES Advance,
19.2.2010 Versu, Direct 331.3 6
268
Service Code Description Effect Solution
000084 00 220 ISO 11786/11783: Transmission speed
Value is too high
CAN timeout
Value change rate is too high
000091 03 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Front gas pedal Idle speed: engine speed goes to low 1. Check the front gas pedal position sensor operation (output voltage)
The measured voltage from the front gas pedal idle rpm. through the whole mechanical travel.
33. SERVICE CODES
position sensor is above the normal operating NOTE Engine operation will return back 2. Check the front gas pedal position sensor wiring, connectors and
range. to normal, when front gas pedal position contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
000091 04 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Front gas pedal Idle speed: engine speed goes to low 1. Check the front gas pedal position sensor operation (output voltage)
The measured voltage from the front gas pedal idle rpm. through the whole mechanical travel.
position sensor is below the normal operating NOTE Engine operation will return back 2. Check the front gas pedal position sensor wiring, connectors and
range. to normal, when front gas pedal position contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
000094 02 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Fuel filter pressure Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
269
The measurement has failed inside the EC unit. 75 % from rated power. functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC
Possible reason is EC unit hardware defect. NOTE Engine functions dependent on unit, then the original EC unit is defective.
the fuel filter pressure are not active. NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code 009230 31
000 (The engine specification number in the EC unit is incorrect for this
engine type) or 009231 31 000 (Engine serial number in the EC unit
does not match for the engine) will be activated, because of engine
serial number mismatch or engine specification mismatch.
000094 03 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Fuel filter pressure Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
The measured fuel filter pressure signal is above the 75% from rated power. surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
normal operating range (> 4,7 V). NOTE Engine functions dependent on 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
7
Page
000094 04 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Fuel filter pressure Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact
The measured fuel filter pressure signal is below the 75 % from rated power. surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
normal operating range (< 0,2 V). NOTE Engine functions dependent on 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
000094 16 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Fuel filter pressure 1. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact
EC unit monitoring system has detected measured surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
fuel filter pressure above normal level. 2. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor operation.
33. SERVICE CODES
4. Check the fuel lift pump wirings, connectors and contact surfaces of
the connector pins (possible oxidation).
000094 18 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Fuel filter pressure Maximum rpm is 1800. A. If the lift pump is running
EC unit monitoring system has detected measured Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check, if filter is choked (impurities, freezing, etc.).
fuel filter pressure below normal level (<110 kPa). 75 % from rated power. 2. Check, if leak/air is in the fuel system.
3. Check the fuel level from the tank!
4. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor.
B. If the lift pump is NOT running
1. Check fuse of the feed pump.
2. Check relay of the feed pump.
270
000094 31 000 Fuel filter pressure LOW (with old switch)
000096 04 023 Proline instrument: Fuel sensor 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
Short circuit in the fuel sensor. If the service code is active
2. Check the fuel sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces of the
connector pins (possible oxidation).
3. Check the fuel sensor operation.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
000096 05 023 Proline instrument: Fuel sensor 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
Open circuit in the fuel sensor. If the service code is active
2. Check the fuel sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces of the
LS,
connector pins (possible oxidation)

Model
3. Check the fuel sensor operation

Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
8
Page
000097 31 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Water in fuel 1. Check water separator at the bottom of the pre ---filter. Drain water from
Water level in the water separator rises to warning the fuelling system.
level. If there is no water in the fuel system
2. Check the wiring from EC unit to sensor connector.
3. Check the supply voltage at water detector sensor connector.
000100 01 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Oil pressure The engine will shutdown after delay. 1. Check the oil level and condition of oil.
The measured oil pressure is below the alarm limit. Oil pressure warning lamp illuminates. 2. Check the oil filter.
The engine will stop after 30 seconds. 3. Check mechanical condition of the engine.
33. SERVICE CODES

5. Check the oil pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces
of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
000100 02 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Oil pressure Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
The measurement has failed inside the EC unit. 75 % from rated power. functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
Possible reason is EC unit hardware defect. then the original EC unit is defective.
NOTE Engine functions dependent on NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code 009230 31 000
the oil pressure are not active. (The engine specification number in the EC unit is incorrect for this engine
type) or 009231 31 000 (Engine serial number in the EC unit does not
match for the engine) will be activated, because of engine serial number
271
mismatch or engine specification mismatch.
000100 03 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Oil pressure Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the oil pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces
The measured oil pressure signal is above the 75 % from rated power. of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
normal operating range (> 4,7 V). 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
NOTE Engine oil pressure protection is 3. Check the oil pressure sensor operation.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
9
Page
The measured oil pressure signal is below the 75 % from rated power. of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
normal operating range (< 0,2 V). NOTE Engine oil pressure protection is 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
not active. The engine may damage, if oil 3. Check the oil pressure sensor operation.
000100 16 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Oil pressure Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. Check the oil pressure control valve.
The measured oil pressure is above the warning Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 2. Check the oil pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces
limit (9,5 bar/30 ˚C). 75% from rated power. of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
33. SERVICE CODES
NOTE Monitoring is active only when the 3. Check the oil pressure sensor operation.
engine is running and the coolant
temperature is > 30 ˚C.
000100 18 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Oil pressure Oil pressure warning lamp illuminates. 1. Check the oil level and condition of oil.
The measured oil pressure is below the warning 2. Check the oil filter.
limit. 3. Check mechanical condition of the engine.
5. Check the oil pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces
272
The measured oil pressure sensor signal is too high 75 % from rated power. of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
(> 1,3V or > 200 kPa), when engine is not running. NOTE Engine oil pressure protection is 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
not active. The engine may damage, if oil 3. Check the oil pressure sensor operation.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
10
Page
000102 02 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Boost pressure Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
the boost pressure are not active. NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code 009230 31 000
(The engine specification number in the EC unit is incorrect for this engine
33. SERVICE CODES
000102 03 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Boost pressure Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the boost pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact
The measured boost pressure signal is above the 75 % from rated power. surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
normal operating range (> 4,7 V). 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
NOTE Engine functions dependent on 3. Check the boost pressure sensor operation.
000102 04 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Boost pressure Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the boost pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact
The measured boost pressure signal is below the 75 % from rated power. surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
normal operating range (< 0,2 V). 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
NOTE Engine functions dependent on 3. Check the boost pressure sensor operation.
000102 16 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Boost pressure Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. Check, that the control system is configured according to the original
273
The measured boost pressure rises above the Maximum injection quantity is reduced to specification and no additional devices have been attached.
warning limit during operation. 75 % from rated power. 2. Check that the injectors and the turbocharger meet the original
specifications.
3. Check the boost pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact
000102 18 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Boost pressure Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. Check the boost air system tightness (piping, intercooler).
The measured boost pressure drops below the Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 2. Check the turbo charger condition.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
alarm level during operation. 75 % from rated power. 3. Check the mechanical condition of the engine.
LS,

Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
11
Page
000102 31 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Boost pressure The engine may not start or starts slowly 1. Check the engine air supply system completely
The measured intake manifold pressure (signal and runs badly. --- Air filter
from boost pressure sensor) is below the warning --- Piping from air filter to turbocharger (look for obstacles in joints, bends)
limit during engine cranking. --- Turbocharger
--- Piping from turbocharger to air cooler (look for obstacles in joints,
bends)
--- Air cooler
--- Piping from air cooler to inlet manifold (look for obstacles in joints,
bends)
33. SERVICE CODES

000105 02 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Intake manifold temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
the intake manifold temperature are not NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code 009230 31 000
active. (The engine specification number in the EC unit is incorrect for this engine
274
000105 03 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Intake manifold temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the intake manifold temperature sensor wiring, connectors and
The measured intake manifold air temperature 75 % from rated power. contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
signal is above the normal operating range (the 2. Check the intake manifold temperature sensor operation.
sensor is integrated to the boost pressure sensor). NOTE Engine functions dependent on
the intake manifold temperature are not
active.
000105 04 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Intake manifold temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the intake manifold temperature sensor wiring, connectors and
1.5.5008
The measured intake manifold air temperature 75 % from rated power. contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
19.2.2010
signal is below the normal operating range (the 2. Check the intake manifold temperature sensor operation.
sensor is integrated to the boost pressure sensor). NOTE Engine functions dependent on
LS,
the intake manifold temperature are not

Model
active.
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
12
Page
000105 16 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Intake manifold temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check condition of the air ---cooling system (Cleanliness, pressure
The measured intake manifold temperature rises 75 % from rated power. tightness, fan operation, etc.).
above the warning limit (+90 ˚C). The temperature 2. Check the intake manifold temperature sensor (boost pressure sensor)
sensor is integrated to the boost pressure sensor. wiring, connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible
oxidation).
3. Check the intake manifold temperature sensor operation.
000107 18 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Air filter pressure
000107 31 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Air filter pressure
33. SERVICE CODES
000109 03 000 Engine coolant pressure: sensor signal voltage

below normal
000109 04 000 Engine coolant pressure: sensor signal voltage
above normal
000110 00 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Coolant temp. Injection quantity is reduced according 1. Check the fan belt and the belt tension.
The measured coolant temperature exceeds the to a temperature table. The engine will 2. Check the coolant level.
overheating alarm limit. shutdown after delay. 3. Check condition of the radiator.
The engine will stop after 30 seconds. 4. Check the mechanical condition of the engine.
5. Check the coolant temperature sensor wiring, connectors and contact
275
000110 02 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Coolant temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
Possible reason is EC unit hardware defect. NOTE Engine protection and other then the original EC unit is defective.
functions dependent on the coolant NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code 009230 31 000
temperature are not active. (The engine specification number in the EC unit is incorrect for this engine
NOTE Engine overheating protection is type) or 009231 31 000 (Engine serial number in the EC unit does not
not active. The engine may damage, if match for the engine) will be activated, because of engine serial number
1.5.5008

19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
13
Page
000110 03 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Coolant temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the coolant temperature sensor wiring, connectors and contact
The measured coolant temperature signal is above 75 % from rated power. surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
the normal operating range. NOTE Engine overheating protection is 2. Check the coolant temperature sensor operation.
000110 04 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Coolant temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the coolant temperature sensor wiring, connectors and contact
The measured coolant temperature signal is below 75 % from rated power. surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
the normal operating range. NOTE Engine overheating protection is 2. Check the coolant temperature sensor operation.
33. SERVICE CODES

000110 16 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Coolant temp. Injection quantity is reduced according 1. Check the fan belt and the belt tension.
The measured coolant temperature exceeds the to a temperature table. 2. Check the coolant level.
overheating warning limit. 3. Check condition of the radiator.
4. Check the mechanical condition of the engine.
5. Check the coolant temperature sensor wiring, connectors and contact
000157 00 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Rail pressure The engine will stop immediately. 1. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring connector is in
The measured rail pressure is over critical limit. locking position.
276
Measured pressure is >1700 bar. In normal 2. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring, connectors
conditions the pressure release valve (PRV) opens and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
at a critical pressure (1600 ---1650 bar). 3. Measure the MPROP wiring.
In case PRV mechanical failure, EC unit 4. Measure the power supply (12 V).
continuously monitors rail pressure and if measured 5. Measure the solenoid valve coil resistance. Correct resistance:
pressure >1700 bar, engine will shutdown 2,6--- 3,15  at +20 ˚C.
immediately. 6. Check the rail pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces
of the connector pins (possible oxidation)
1.5.5008

19.2.2010

LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
14
Page
000157 01 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Rail pressure Maximum rpm is 1500. A. If the service code is not continuously active
The measured rail pressure is below the warning Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the fuel level from the tank!
limit. Warning limit is depending on the engine 50 % from rated power. 2. Check, if the fuel filters are choked (impurities, freezing, etc.).
speed. 3. Check the fuel low pressure side for possible leak/air in the fuel system.
NOTE Engine functions dependent on 4. Check the fuel lift pump wirings, connectors and contact surfaces of
rail pressure are not active. the connector pins (possible oxidation).
NOTE Due to the very high injection B. If the service code is continuously active
pressure (1400 bar), during engine 1. Stop the engine. Check visually the engine high pressure pipes etc. for
33. SERVICE CODES
running there is a serious risk for injury, if possible leakage.

the high pressure side has a leakage. 2. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring connector is in
locking position.
3. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring, connectors
and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
6. Measure the solenoid valve coil resistance. Correct resistance:
2,6--- 3,15  at +20˚C.
7. Check the rail pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces
277
000157 02 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Rail pressure Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
The measurement has failed inside the EC unit. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
Possible reason is EC unit hardware defect. 50 % from rated power. then the original EC unit is defective.
NOTE Engine functions dependent on NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code 009230 31 000
the rail pressure are not active. (The engine specification number in the EC unit is incorrect for this engine
1.5.5008
19.2.2010

LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
15
Page
000157 03 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Rail pressure Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check the rail pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces
The measured rail pressure signal is above the Maximum injection quantity is reduced to of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
normal operating range (> 4,8 V). 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
Normally the service code 009151 31 000

(PRV recognised as OPEN) is related to
33. SERVICE CODES
the rail pressure sensor fault. Due to the

sensor fault, the closed loop rail pressure
control is not possible any more. Full fuel
supply is demanded from the
high ---pressure pump and the high
pressure will force the PRV (Pressure
Relief Valve) to open.
000157 04 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Rail pressure Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check the rail pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces
The measured rail pressure signal is below the Maximum injection quantity is reduced to of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
normal operating range (< 0,4 V). 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
278
Normally the service code 009151 31 000

(PRV recognised as OPEN) is related to
the rail pressure sensor fault. Due to the
sensor fault, the closed loop rail pressure
control is not possible any more. Full fuel
supply is demanded from the
1.5.5008
high ---pressure pump and the high

19.2.2010
pressure will force the PRV (Pressure

Relief Valve) to open.
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
16
Page
000157 16 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Rail pressure Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring connector is in
The measured rail pressure is above the warning Maximum injection quantity is reduced to locking position.
limit: CP1H high pressure pump: 130 Mpa. 50 % from rated power. 2. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring, connectors
and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
NOTE Engine functions dependent on 3. Measure the MPROP wiring.
rail pressure are not active. 4. Measure the power supply (12 V).
2,6 --- 3,15  at +20 ˚C.
33. SERVICE CODES

000158 00 004 Fault in the supply voltage for TC2 control unit Tractor can be driven, but DPS can have
malfunctions.
000158 02 003 Fault in the supply voltage for TC1 control unit Engine power or engine speed limited.
000168 00 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Battery voltage 1. Check the generator, if charging voltage is correct.
Supply voltage for EC unit is very high.
000168 01 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Battery voltage 1. Check condition of the battery for too low voltage.
Supply voltage for EC unit is very low. 2. Check contacts through wiring from the battery to the EC unit for bad
279
contact at some connector.
000168 02 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Battery voltage NOTE Engine functions dependent on 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
The measurement has failed inside the EC unit. the battery voltage are not active. functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code 009230 31 000
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
17
Page
000168 03 035 Battery Check the generator, if charging voltage is correct.
Battery voltage greater than 18 V.
000168 04 035 Battery Check the power supply. Check the generator, if charging voltage is
Battery voltage too low. correct.
000168 16 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Battery voltage 1. Check the generator, if charging voltage is correct.
Supply voltage for EC unit is above normal.
000168 18 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Battery voltage 1. Check condition of the battery for too low voltage.
Supply voltage for EC unit is too low. 2. Check contacts through wiring from the battery to the EC unit for bad
33. SERVICE CODES

000174 02 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Fuel temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
the fuel temperature are not active. NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code 009230 31 000
280
000174 03 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Fuel temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the fuel temperature sensor wiring, connectors and contact
The measured fuel temperature signal is above the 75 % from rated power. surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
normal operating range. 2. Check the fuel temperature sensor operation.
000174 04 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Fuel temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the fuel temperature sensor wiring, connectors and contact
The measured fuel temperature signal is below the 75 % from rated power. surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
normal operating range. 2. Check the fuel temperature sensor operation.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010

LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
18
Page
000174 16 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Fuel temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the temperature of the fuel in the tank (If the tank is almost
The measured fuel temperature rises above the 75 % from rated power. empty and the ambient temperature is high, the temperature may rise
warning limit (+90 ˚C). due to hot fuel return).
2. Check the fuel temperature sensor wiring, connectors and contact
3. Check the fuel temperature sensor operation.
000177 00 003 Open circuit or short circuit fault in the gearbox Shuttle automatics are not in function
oil temperature sensor and the PTO stops. Driving direction can
Service code also activates if oil temperature over be engaged only with clutch pedal
33. SERVICE CODES
+150 ˚C. depressed. The control unit reads shuttle

temperatures.
000177 01 003 Partly short circuit or oxidation in the gearbox Shuttle automatics are not in function
oil temperature sensor and the PTO stops. Driving direction can
Service code also activates, if oil temperature below be engaged only with clutch pedal
---50 ˚C. depressed. The control unit reads shuttle
temperatures.
000186 00 220 ISO 11786/11783: Rear PTO speed
Value is too high.
281
000186 02 003 1) Fault in the rear PTO speed sensor PTO is disengaged immediately and a
The rear PTO speed sensor has lower rotation driver can activate it after the current is
speed than by the PTO lever selected rotation switched off and on. Tractor can still be
speed range (limit switch S28 and S29). driven.
000186 00 003 2) PTO module errors PTO not in use Check the PTO key value.
000186 01 003 PTO’s clutch sliding over 20% or errorneus ratio If the key value is correct check the function of the PTO sensor and the
. index engine speed.
1.5.5008
.
19.2.2010
.
00186 31 003
LS,
Model
1) The code is for LS models only.

2) The codes are for Versu and Direct models only.
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
19
Page
000186 02 004 Fault in the signal from front PTO rotation speed PTO is disengaged immediately and a
sensor driver can activate it after the current is
driven.
CAN timeout.
Value change rate is too high.
33. SERVICE CODES
000190 00 220 ISO 11786/11783: Engine speed

000190 01 003 Engine rotation speed too high Tractor can be driven, but DPS can have
Engine speed sensor signal data over 2800 rpm. malfunctions.
000190 02 004 Fault in the signal from the engine Sigma speed PTO is disengaged immediately and a
driven.
000190 09 220 ISO 11786/11783: Engine speed
CAN timeout.
282
000190 16 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Speed sensor general No fuel injection. NOTE Engine will recover to normal operation, whenever the engine
The service code is activated if the engine speed speed is reduced below 3000 rpm.
exceeds 3000 rpm during operation. Possible cause NOTE Running the engine at excessive
is engine braking at downhill with too low gear ratio. speed may damage the engine. NOTE Use tractor brakes, select proper gear.
000191 31 035 Signal from transmission sensor Check the sensor.
Transmission sensor signal absent although radar
signal OK (can be verified only in draft control
mode). Poor contacts in sensor wire or sensor
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
faulty.
000516 00 220 ISO 11786/11783: Radar speed
LS,

Model
000516 02 004 Fault in the signal from the radar Tractor can be driven, but DPS can have
malfunctions.
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
20
Page
000516 09 220 ISO 11786/11783: Radar speed
CAN timeout.
000516 10 220 ISO 11786/11783: Radar speed
000516 31 035 Radar signal Check the radar.
Radar signal absent although transmission sensor
signal OK (can be verified only in draft control
mode). Poor contacts or radar damaged.
33. SERVICE CODES
000626 03 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Intake air heater control

The voltage level of power supply is is too high
000626 04 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Intake air heater control
TThe voltage level of power supply is is too low
000627 03 129 Voltage output too high: Power supply 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 Short circuit. Power supply too high (over 15 V). 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131
132 129 = AUX 1 135 = AUX 1F If the service code is active
133 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F 3. Measure battery voltage and generator output.
134 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F 4. Check the wirings from valve control head.
135 132 = AUX 4
283
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
000627 04 129 Voltage supply too low: Power supply 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 Short circuit to ground. Power supply too low 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131 (below 11V).
132 If the service code is active.
134 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
135 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F

136 132 = AUX 4
137 133 = AUX 5
LS,
134 = AUX 6
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
21
Page
000628 12 129 Valve control head software failure: Error in the 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 software identification in the valve control head 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131 Fault in the component or in the control head.
132 If the service code is active the valve control head should be replaced.
133 129 = AUX 1 135 = AUX 1F
134 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F
135 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
136 132 = AUX 4
137 133 = AUX 5
33. SERVICE CODES
134 = AUX 6
000629 09 005 CAN bus defect Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
UC1 do not receive messages from other control
units.
000629 09 006 CAN bus defect Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
UC2 do not receive messages from other control
units.
000629 10 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Self test 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
When ignition is switched on, EC unit performs If the service code comes again, the EC unit might be defective.
internal system checks. If any of these test fail, the 2. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
system reports the Power On self test defect. functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
284
then the original EC unit is defective.
000629 12 220 ISO 11786/11783: Adapting fault
1.5.5008
Power on self test

19.2.2010
000629 31 005 No valid ECU parameter file Download the parameter file.
000629 31 006 No valid parameter file TwinTrac can not be used. Download the parameter file.
LS,
Model
000629 31 040 No valid parameter file Download the parameter file.

Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
22
Page
000630 12 129 Valve control head internal error: Calibration 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 memory 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
132 If the service code is active
133 129 = AUX 1 135 = AUX 1F 3. Check connectors to valve control head.
134 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F If it does not help the valve control head should be replaced.
135 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
136 132 = AUX 4
137 133 = AUX 5
33. SERVICE CODES
134 = AUX 6
000697 05 005 Auxiliary PWM Driver 1 (PRO1) Current Below
Normal or Open Circuit
000697 06 005 Auxiliary PWM Driver 1 (PRO1) Current Above
Normal or Grounded Circuit
285
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
000701 06 005 U ---pilot U ---pilot indicator led on the arm rest can Check wiring, connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins
Indicator led on the arm rest. Current Above normal not be controlled. (possible oxidation).
operating range or short circuit to ground. Check if there is a short circuit to ground on the indicator led or on the
LS,
Model
control unit.
000701 06 006 Auxiliary I/ O driver 1 (DO1) Current Above
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
23
Page
000702 06 005 Auxiliary I/ O driver 2 (DO2) Current Above
000702 06 006 TwinTrac Rear steering wheel can not be used to Check wiring, connectors and contact surfaces of the connector pins
Preventing of simultaneous usage of front and rear steer the tractor. (possible oxidation).
steering wheel. Current above normal operating Check if there is a short circuit to ground on the solenoid.
range or short circuit to ground.
000723 02 004 Fault in the signal from the PTO Sigma speed PTO is disengaged immediately and a
33. SERVICE CODES

driven.
000898 03 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Engine speed reg. (via The EC unit will start to use hardwired A. Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
CAN) throttles for speed control. In case there B. If there is UC2 (TwinTrac control unit)
Requested speed by the CAN is above 3000 rpm. are no hardwired throttles the engine 1. Check the rear gas pedal position sensor wiring, connectors and
If the seat direction is reverse (TwinTrac) and the runs at low idle speed. contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
rear gas pedal has not been calibrated, service 2. Check the frear gas pedal position sensor operation.
code will be activated.
000898 04 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Engine speed reg. (via The EC unit will start to use hardwired A. Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
CAN) throttles for speed control. In case there B. If there is UC2 (TwinTrac control unit)
Requested speed by the CAN is below 500 rpm. are no hardwired throttles the engine 1. Check the rear gas pedal position sensor wiring, connectors and
286
If the seat direction is reverse (TwinTrac) and the runs at low idle speed. contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
rear gas pedal has not been calibrated, service 2. Check the frear gas pedal position sensor operation.
code will be activated.
000904 02 004 Fault in the signal from front axle speed sensor Tractor can be driven, but DPS can have
malfunctions.
000986 03 000 Fan control: short to Bat+
000986 05 000 Fan control: open circuit
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
000986 06 000 Fan control: short to GND

LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
24
Page
001136 02 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: EC unit temp. NOTE Engine functions dependent on 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
The measurement has failed inside the EC unit. the EC unit temperature are not active. functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
33. SERVICE CODES
EC unit monitoring system has detected failure at the EC unit temperature are not active. functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
EC unit internal temperature sensor. Possible then the original EC unit is defective.
reason is EC unit hardware defect.
EC unit monitoring system has detected failure at the EC unit temperature are not active. functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
EC unit internal temperature sensor. Possible then the original EC unit is defective.
287
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
25
Page
001136 16 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: EC unit temp. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to 1. Check the EC unit software version. If it is v 1,1 update the software
Temperature inside EC unit is too high. Reason 75 % from rated power. The engine will with newest software (at least with v 1,2).
could be example, when the overheating has shutdown after delay. 2. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the ignition key
stopped the engine and the cooling system does again on.
not work anymore and temperature may rise inside A. If the service code IS ACTIVE CONTINUOUSLY, even the EC unit is
the EC unit, because the airflow is not cooling. cold. Test body temperature of the EC unit by touching. If the EC unit is
not hot, but the service code is still active. Reason might be a defective
EC unit.
1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
33. SERVICE CODES
functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
B. If the service code is NOT ACTIVE anymore, check service codes
000110 16 000 (The measured coolant temperature exceeds the
overheating warning limit) and 000110 00 000 (The measured coolant
temperature exceeds the overheating alarm limit) if one of these service
288
codes has been active at the same time. Then problem has probably
caused by engine overheating.
001595 02 004 Fault in the signal from rear wheel speed sensor Tractor can be driven, but DPS can have
malfunctions.
001639 31 000 Fan control: No speed signal
001873 03 035 Position sensor Check if there is a short circuit to power supply. Check mechanical
Mechanical adjustment not okay. Short circuit to adjustment.
1.5.5008
power supply.
19.2.2010
001873 04 035 Position sensor Check if there is a open circuit or sensor not connected or short circuit to
Open circuit or sensor not connected or short to ground.
LS,
ground.
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
26
Page
002004 09 003 From TC2 control unit not CAN bus line contact Engine power or engine speed limited.
to TC1 control unit
002023 09 003 From ICL instrument not CAN bus line contact to Engine power or engine speed limited.
TC1 control unit
002129 09 040 TT can not recognize AUX1 on the CAN bus AUX1 can not be controlled. Check that AUX1 is powered (led is yellow) if not check the power supply.
Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
33. SERVICE CODES
002135 09 040 TT can not recognize AUX1F on the CAN bus AUX1F can not be controlled. Check that AUX1F is powered (led is yellow) if not check the power
289
supply. Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
002660 03 040 Hydr. joystick 1 Joystick 1 can not be used to control Check if there is a short circuit to power supply.
Signal is above normal operating range or is in AUX1 or AUX1F. Check the signal value of Joystick 1 in calibration display. If it is close to
1.5.5008
short circuit to power supply. 5000 mV then there is a short circuit to power supply.
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
27
Page
002660 04 040 Hydr. joystick 1 Joystick 1 can not be used to control Check if there is a short circuit to gound.
Signal is below normal operating range or is in short AUX1 or AUX1F. Check the signal value of Joystick 1 in calibration display. If it is 0 mV
circuit to ground. then there is a short circuit to gound.
Check the wiring (Joystick < ---> UC1), connectors and contact surfaces
002660 09 040 Hydr. joystick 1 Joystick 1 can not be used to control Check the wiring (Joystick < ---> UC1) and connectors.
Signal timeout via CAN bus. AUX1 or AUX1F.
002660 13 040 Hydr. joystick 1 Joystick 1 can not be used to control Download parameters and calibrate joystick.
33. SERVICE CODES
Signal out of calibration range. AUX1 or AUX1F.

Signal is above normal operating range or is in AUX2 or AUX2F.
short circuit to power supply.
Signal is below normal operating range or is in short AUX2 or AUX2F. Check the wiring (Joystick < ---> UC1), connectors and contact surfaces
circuit to ground. of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
Signal timeout via CAN bus. AUX2 or AUX2F.
290
Signal out of calibration range. AUX2 or AUX2F.
Signal is above normal operating range or is in AUX3.
Signal is below normal operating range or is in short AUX3. Check the wiring (Joystick < ---> UC1), connectors and contact surfaces
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
Signal timeout via CAN bus. AUX3.

LS,
Signal out of calibration range. AUX3.

Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
28
Page
33. SERVICE CODES
Signal is above normal operating range or is in AUX3F.
Signal is below normal operating range or is in short AUX3F. Check the wiring (Joystick < ---> UC1), connectors and contact surfaces
Signal timeout via CAN bus AUX3F.
291
Signal out of calibration range. AUX3F.
1.5.5008

19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
29
Page
005000 09 023 Proline instrument: Engine rotation speed 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
Insturment do not receive engine rotation speed
message via CAN bus from EC unit. If the service code is active
2. Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
005001 09 023 Proline instrument: Rear PTO rotation speed 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
Instrument do not receive rear PTO rotation speed
and indicator light message via CAN bus from TC1. If the service code is active
33. SERVICE CODES
005002 09 023 Proline instrument: Transmission oil 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
temperature
Instrument do not receive transmission oil If the service code is active
temperature message via CAN bus from TC1. 2. Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
005003 09 023 Proline instrument: Engine coolant temperature 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
Instrument do not receive engine coolant tempeture
message via CAN bus from EC unit. If the service code is active
005004 09 023 Proline instrument: Transmission oil tempeture 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
indicator light
Instrument do not receive transmission oil If the service code is active
292
temperature indicator light message via CAN bus 2. Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
from TC1.
005005 09 023 Proline instrument: Engine information 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
Instrument do not receive fuel consumption and
engine indicator light messages such as oil If the service code is active
pressure, preheating of intake air, cruise and 2. Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
coolant temperature via CAN bus from EC unit.
1.5.5008
005006 09 023 Proline instrument: Driving speed 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
19.2.2010
Instrument do not receive driving speed message

via CAN bus from TC2. If the service code is active
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
30
Page
005007 09 023 Proline instrument: EHR information 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
Instrument do not receive EHR status information.
If the service code is active
005008 09 023 Proline instrument: Sigma 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
Instrument do not reveice Sigma percent and
indicator light message via CAN bus from TC2. If the service code is active
Sigma_info timeout from TC2 2. Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
33. SERVICE CODES
005009 09 023 Proline instrument: Tractor information 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
Instrument do not receive differential lock, 4wd and
parking brake indicator light messages via CAN bus If the service code is active
from TC1. 2. Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
005011 09 023 Proline instrument: Front PTO rotation speed 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
Instrument do not receive front PTO rotation speed
and indicator light message via CAN bus from TC1. If the service code is active
005810 09 003 From EC control unit not CAN bus line contact Engine power or engine speed limited.
to TC1 control unit
293
006002 02 004 Fault in the signal from front axle steering Tractor can be driven, but DPS can have
position sensor malfunctions.
006003 02 004 Fault in the signal from rear gas pedal position Shuttle automatics are not in function
sensor and the PTO stops. Driving direction can
temperatures.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
31
Page
006004 00 003 4WD errors 4WD not in use. Check the TC key value, tyre ratios and calibrate the speed sensors.
006004 01 003 Clutch slipped > 18 % over turnoff_diff ---time Check the function of the transmission output speed sensor and the front
. period. axle speed sensor.
.
.
006004 31 003
006004 07 004 Fault in the function of the 4WD multi ---disc Tractor can be driven, but DPS can have
clutch malfunctions.
The front axle speed sensor has 18 % lower rotation
33. SERVICE CODES
speed than the transmission speed sensor over

time of three seconds.
006005 00 003 4WD errors 4WD automatics not in use. Calibrate the speed sensors.
006005 01 003
.
.
.
006005 31 003
006005 03 004 Fault in AUTO 4WD switch Tractor can be driven, but DPS can have
malfunctions.
294
006006 03 004 Fault in AUTO differential lock switch Tractor can be driven, but DPS can have
malfunctions.
006007 02 003 Fault in the control current for the DPS1 Shuttle automatics are not in function
solenoid and the PTO stops. Driving direction can
temperatures.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
006008 02 003 Fault in the control current for the DPS2 Shuttle automatics are not in function
LS,

Model

temperatures.
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
32
Page
006009 02 003 Fault in the control current for the DPS3 valve Shuttle automatics are not in function
temperatures.
006010 02 003 Fault in the control current for the shuttle F Shuttle automatics are not in function
valve and the PTO stops. Driving direction can
33. SERVICE CODES

temperatures.
006011 02 003 Fault in the control current for the shuttle R Shuttle automatics are not in function
temperatures.
006012 02 003 Fault in the control current for the rear PTO Shuttle automatics are not in function
295
temperatures.
006013 02 003 Fault in the control voltage for the start blocking Tractor can be driven, but DPS can have
relay malfunctions.
006014 02 003 Fault in the control voltage for the 4 WD Tractor can be driven, but DPS can have
1.5.5008
Short circuit in the connector A1A3/1 output of the malfunctions.

19.2.2010
TC1 control unit.

LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
33
Page
006015 02 003 Fault in the position sensor supply voltage for Shuttle automatics are not in function
front clutch pedal and rear clutch pedal and the PTO stops. Driving direction can
temperatures.
006016 02 003 Fault in the signal from front clutch pedal Shuttle automatics are not in function
position sensor and the PTO stops. Driving direction can
33. SERVICE CODES

temperatures.
006017 02 003 Fault in the signal from rear clutch pedal Shuttle automatics are not in function
position sensor and the PTO stops. Driving direction can
temperatures.
006018 02 003 Fault in the DPS up ---down push buttons Tractor can be driven, but DPS can have
malfunctions.
296
006019 00 003 PTO module errors PTO not in use. Speed range switches stucked or short circuit to ref voltages.
006019 01 003 PTO’s speed ranges simultaneously connected.
.
.
.
006019 31 003
006020 02 003 Fault in the control current for the parking brake Shuttle automatics are not in function
1.5.5008

19.2.2010

LS,
Model
temperatures.
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
34
Page
006021 02 003 Fault in the front and rear DPS Tractor can be driven, but DPS can have
pre ---programming buttons malfunctions.
006022 00 003 PTO module errors PTO not in use. Mudguard button or cabin rocker switch stucked or short circuit to 5V.
006022 01 003 PTO’s start switches (mudguard and cabin)
. simultaneously active.
.
.
006022 31 003
33. SERVICE CODES
006023 00 003 Rear lever F and R active at the same time Rear shuttle lever is not working Check that F and R reed relays are mounted correctly and there is not a
006023 01 003 correctly. short circuit to supply voltage.
.
.
.
006023 31 003
006024 02 003 Fault in the front and rear clutch pedal limit Shuttle automatics are not in function
switches and the PTO stops. Driving direction can
temperatures.
297
006025 00 003 Rear lever P and (F or R) active at the same Rear shuttle lever is not working Check that P, F and R reed relays are mounted correctly and there is not a
006025 01 003 time correctly. short circuit to supply voltage.
.
.
.
006025 31 003
006026 02 003 Fault in the front clutch pedal limit switch Tractor cannot be driven, before the
1.5.5008

19.2.2010
006027 02 003 Fault in the rear clutch pedal limit switch Tractor cannot be driven, before the
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
35
Page
006028 02 003 Fault in the F/R shuttle running direction sensor Shuttle automatics are not in function
Sensors frequency difference over 30 %. and the PTO stops. Driving direction can
temperatures.
006029 02 003 Fault in the engine speed sensor Shuttle automatics are not in function
The engine speed sensor has lower rotation speed and the PTO stops. Driving direction can
than the shuttle sensors. be engaged only with clutch pedal
33. SERVICE CODES

temperatures.
006030 02 003 Fault in the F/R shuttle running direction Tractor can be driven, but DPS can have
sensors malfunctions.
Direction signal of the sensors change when driving
speed is over 10 km/h.
006031 02 003 1) The shuttle sensors have lower rotation speed Engine power or engine speed limited.
than the engine sensor
006031 00 003 2) Clutch axle/power shuttle sliding over 2% for Power shuttle unit goes to the neutral. Versu:
298
006031 01 003 over 1000ms C1, C2, C3, C4, F or R multidisc clutch sliding.
. Check the function of the proportional valves (check the spool has not
. stucked) and check the wirings.
. (Check also is there error codes 8127---8133).
006031 31 003 Check the function of the transmission input speed sensor and the
shuttle speed sensor
Direct (check also):
Transmission input speed = engine speed ---> check the engine
1.5.5008
speed sensor.
19.2.2010
Check the function of the hydrostat solenoid.

006032 00 003 Driving speed too high Tractor can be driven, but DPS can have
LS,
Transmission speed sensor signal data over 65 malfunctions.

Model
km/h.
1) The code is for LS models only.

2)
Versu, Direct
The codes are for Versu and Direct models only.

Code
331.4
36
Page
006043 02 003 Fault in the forward or reverse driving direction Tractor cannot be driven, before the
and parking brake reed relays service has been done.
006074 03 035 Up/stop/down switch Check if there is a short circuit to power supply.
Signal not connected. Short circuit to power supply. Check the ground (= pin 20) if it is not connected to panel.
Ground (= pin 20) not connected to panel.
006074 04 035 Up/stop/down switch Check if there is a short circuit to ground.
Signal short to ground.
006075 03 035 Position control potentiometer Check if there is a open circuit or potentiometer not connected.
33. SERVICE CODES
Signal from potentiometer faulty. Poor contacts or

wire loose.
006088 03 040 CAN BUS defect None of the AUX valves can not be Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
Short circuit in CAN 2 controlled.
006088 03 220 ISO 11786/11783: Tractor CAN bus Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
Bus ---off
006089 05 040 CAN bus defect None of the AUX valves can not be Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
Signal floats in CAN 2. controlled.
006089 05 220 ISO 11786/11783: Tractor CAN bus Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
No acknowledgement
299
006093 02 003 Fault in the forward and reverse driving Tractor cannot be driven, before the
direction reed relays service has been done.
006096 12 003 Program parameters are missing from TC1 Engine power or engine speed limited.
control unit
006096 12 004 Program parameters are missing from TC2 Tractor cannot be driven, before the
control unit service has been done.
1.5.5008
006096 12 220 ISO 11786/11783: Parameter file missing or

19.2.2010
faulty
006097 12 003 Backup copy of the program parameter is Engine power or engine speed limited.
LS,
missing from TC1 control unit

Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
37
Page
006097 12 004 Backup copy of the program parameters is Tractor cannot be driven, before the
missing from TC2 control unit service has been done.
006099 12 004 Calibration values are missing from TC2 control Tractor cannot be driven, before the
unit service has been done.
006100 12 004 Backup copy of the calibration values is missing Tractor cannot be driven, before the
from TC2 control unit service has been done.
006101 02 003 Calibration interruption codes for the PTO,
shuttle and DPS clutches
33. SERVICE CODES

temperature wrong, mechanical gear is not
engaged or tractor on a slanting ground.
300
temperature wrong, mechanical gear is not
engaged or tractor on a slanting ground.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010

LS,

Model
has been engaged.

Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
38
Page
has been engaged.
33. SERVICE CODES

301
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
Calculated pre ---filling index is not within given

limits (e.g. clutch piston does not move freely or
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
39
Page
Calculated pre ---filling index is not within given
limits (e.g. clutch piston does not move freely or
The pre ---filling time calibration does not find a
correct value in spite of many attempts.
33. SERVICE CODES

The pre ---filling time calibration does not find a
correct value in spite of many attempts.
006108 02 003 Calibration interruption codes for the gas pedal
Gas pedal position value does not change evenly
Gas pedal position value does not change evenly
302
Gas pedal lower position value outside the
operating range.
Gas pedal lower position value outside the
operating range.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
Gas pedal upper position value outside the

operating range.
LS,
Model
Gas pedal upper position value outside the

operating range.
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
40
Page
Engine rotation speed too low when the gas pedal
Engine rotation speed too low when the gas pedal
Engine rotation speed too high, when the gas pedal
33. SERVICE CODES
Engine rotation speed too high, when the gas pedal
Engine rotation speed values does not change
Engine rotation speed values does not change
303
006115 02 003 Calibration interruption codes for the speed
sensors
1.5.5008
19.2.2010

sensors
LS,

Model
sensors
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
41
Page
sensors
sensors
switched on.
33. SERVICE CODES
sensors
switched on.
sensors
4WD is switched on.
sensors
4WD is switched on.
304
sensors
Fault in the sensors. System assumes, that
differential lock is switched on.
sensors
Fault in the sensors. System assumes, that
differential lock is switched on.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
sensors
LS,
Model
sensors
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
42
Page
sensors
sensors
sensors
33. SERVICE CODES

sensors
sensors
sensors
305
sensors
sensors
1.5.5008
sensors
19.2.2010

LS,
sensors
Model

Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
43
Page
sensors
sensors
sensors
33. SERVICE CODES

sensors
sensors
the radar signal.
sensors
306
the radar signal.
sensors
sensors
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
006130 02 003 Calibration interruption codes for the steering

angle
LS,
Model
positions.
angle
Versu, Direct
positions.
Code
331.4
44
Page
angle
angle
angle
33. SERVICE CODES

angle
006133 02 003 Calibration interruption codes for the clutch
pedal
pedal
307
pedal
Clutch pedal lower position value outside the
operating range.
pedal
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
Clutch pedal lower position value outside the

operating range.
LS,
Model
pedal
operating range.
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
45
Page
pedal
operating range.
pedal
33. SERVICE CODES
pedal
angle
enough.
angle
enough.
308
006142 03 220 ISO 11786/11783: Rear linkage position
Voltage too high
Voltage too low
CAN timout
006143 09 220 ISO 11786/11783: Rear linkage up/down
1.5.5008
CAN timout
19.2.2010
006144 03 220 ISO 11786/11783: ECU_PWR or PWR

Short circuit in the operating voltage
LS,
006145 03 220 ISO 11786/11783: Indigating light

Model
Short circuit in the operating voltage

Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
46
Page
006147 12 003 Fault in the TC1 control unit Tractor can be driven, but DPS can have
Saving the new data base failed in the EEPROM malfunctions.
memory. Now the TC1 control unit uses default
values.
Saving the new data base failed in the EEPROM malfunctions.
memory. Now the TC2 control unit uses default
values.
33. SERVICE CODES

Voltage is too high
Voltage is too low
The checksum of the EEPROM memory is faulty. malfunctions.
Now the TC1 control unit uses default values .
The checksum of the EEPROM memory is faulty. malfunctions.
Now the TC2 control unit uses default values.
309
sensors
speed message.
sensors
speed message.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010

Too fast calibration. The gas pedal was pressed too
LS,
Model

Too fast calibration. The gas pedal was pressed too
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
47
Page
006153 09 220 ISO 11786/11783: Front PTO position
CAN timeout
006154 00 220 ISO 11786/11783: Front PTO speed
Value is too high
CAN timeout
Value change rate is too high
33. SERVICE CODES
006155 09 220 ISO 11786/11783: Front linkage up/down

CAN timeout
006163 09 220 ISO 11786/11783: Left ---turn signal lights
CAN timeout
006164 09 220 ISO 11786/11783: Right ---turn signal lights
CAN timeout
006165 09 220 ISO 11786/11783: Left stop lights
CAN timeout
006166 09 220 ISO 11786/11783: Right stop lights
310
CAN timeout
006167 09 220 ISO 11786/11783: Tractor marker lights
CAN timeout
006168 09 220 ISO 11786/11783: Implement rear work lights
CAN timeout
006169 02 003 Fault in the engine speed sensor
The engine is running but the speed signal is
1.5.5008
missing.
19.2.2010
006170 09 220 ISO 11786/11783: Driving direction information

CAN timeout
LS,
Model

angle
Steering angle sensor is not in use.
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
48
Page
angle
Steering angle sensor is not in use.
006173 07 003 If solenoids Y17T and Y18T are connect as
crossing pinning or solenoids wire is broken
group gear change from neutral goes wrong
direction
006174 07 003 LL lever’s limit switches S49 and S50 are
33. SERVICE CODES
wrongly connected
006175 02 003 Range gear switch S5T analog signal is inside
approved states
(OFF = 0,9---1,3V, ON = 2,4---3,0 V).
006175 03 003 Range gear switch S5T analog signal is in
short ---circuit to ground or connector is not
connected (< 0,1 V)
006175 04 003 Range gear switch S5T analog signal is in
short ---circuit to power supply (> 4,9 V)
006176 03 003 Range gear analog angle sensor B11T is in
311
short ---circuit to power supply (> 4,9 V)
006176 04 003 Range gear analog angle sensor B11T is in
short ---circuit to ground or connector is not
connected < 0,1 V)
006177 03 003 Calibration interruption codes for the
semi ---automatic range gear.
Parameters could not been saved.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010

semi ---automatic range gear
Parameters could not been saved.
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
49
Page
Group M is not engaged during the start of
calibration. Group M is not recognised during the
start of calibration although Group M may be
engaged.
Group M is not engaged during the start of
33. SERVICE CODES
calibration. Group M is not recognised during the

start of calibration although Group M may be
engaged.
Limit value was too high or too low comparing to
reference value.
Limit value was too high or too low comparing to
reference value.
312
Measured limit value is over the operating range.
Measured limit value is over the operating range.
1.5.5008
006181 09 003 TC1 can not receive CAN messages from TTC Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
19.2.2010
006300 09 040 TT can not recognize UC1 on the CAN bus Joysticks can not be used to control AUX Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
valves. Drive display information can not
LS,
be shown.
Model
006301 09 040 TT can not recognize UC1 on the CAN bus Joysticks can not be used to control AUX Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
valves. Drive display information can not
be shown.
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
50
Page
006302 03 040 Joystick selection rotary switch Joysticks 1 and 2 can not be used to Replace TT.
Signal is above normal operating range or is in control AUX1 and AUX2 or AUX1F and
short circuit to power supply. AUX2F.
006302 04 040 Joystick sclection rotary switch Joysticks 1 and 2 can not be used to Replace TT.
Signal is below normal operating range or is in short control AUX1 and AUX2 or AUX1F and
circuit to gound. AUX2F.
006302 13 040 Joystick selection rotary switch Joysticks 1 and 2 can not be used to Replace TT.
Out of calibration, signal is not inside the operating control AUX1 and AUX2 or AUX1F and
33. SERVICE CODES
range. AUX2F.
006303 03 040 Flow control rotary switch Flow control can not be used to control Replace TT.
Signal is above normal operating range or is in AUX valves flow.
Signal is below normal operating range or is in short AUX valves flow.
circuit to ground.
Out of calibration, signal value out of resistor grid AUX valves flow.
voltage levels.
313
006304 03 040 CAN bus defect Drive display information can not be Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
Short circuit in CAN 1. shown.
006305 05 040 CAN bus Drive display information can not be Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
Signal floats in CAN 1 shown.
006306 02 040 Front pto switch error (enabled state not Front PTO can not be controlled. Check front PTO switch and wiring from TC2.
detected)
006307 02 040 Power socket switch error (enabled state not Power socket PTO can not be controlled. Check front power socket switch and wiring from TC2.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
detected)
006308 02 040 U ---Pilot switch error (enabled state not U ---Pilot can not be controlled. Check front U ---Pilot switch and wiring from TC2.
detected)
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
51
Page
006309 09 040 CAN timeout from TC2 Next functions are blocked: Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement from TC2 to
--- U ---Pilot ACHT. Check power supply of TC2.
--- Front PTO
--- Power socket
--- Hydraulic buttons outside of tractor
--- Front linkage/loader switch
006310 02 040 Rear mudguard auxiliary hydraulics plus button
Voltage Above Normal, or Shorted to High Source.
33. SERVICE CODES
006311 02 040 Rear mudguard auxiliary hydraulics minus

button
Voltage Above Normal, or Shorted to High Source.
006900 00 003 Internal software error. Error in the multidisc clutch control 1. Turn the ignition key off ---on.
006900 01 003 C1 clutch initialization failure. functions. 2. If error code is still active, download software packet (replace all).
.
. 3. If error code doesn’t disappear replace TC1 controller.
.
006900 31 003
314
.
.
006901 31 003
.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
.
006902 31 003
LS,
006903 01 003 C4 clutch initialization failure. functions.

Model
2. If error code is still active, download software packet (replace all).

.
.
Versu, Direct
006903 31 003
Code
331.4
52
Page
006904 01 003 Clutch index not allowed. functions. 2. If error code is still active, download software packet (replace all).
.
.
006904 31 003
006905 01 003 Clutch driving method not allowed. functions. 2. If error code is still active, download software packet (replace all).
.
33. SERVICE CODES

.
006905 31 003
007002 09 035 CAN Timeout 1. Check that the tractor has been programmed at least with MultiTool
Possible reason that EHR unit can not get message version 4.3.0.0.
via CAN bus from TC2 2. Check the CAN bus.
007100 00 003 Powershift errors. Error in the multidisc clutch control 1. Turn the ignition key off ---on.
007100 01 003 Shifting error, speed matching information not functions. 2. If error code is still active, download software packet (replace all).
. arrived in time (>2000ms).
315
.
007100 31 003
007101 01 003 Shifting error, shift initialization error. functions. 2. If error code is still active, download software packet (replace all).
.
.
007101 31 003
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
007102 01 003 Shifting error, gear failure after shifting. functions. 2. If error code is still active, download software packet (replace all).
.
LS,

Model
.
007102 31 003
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
53
Page
007103 00 003 Powershift errors. There has been over one step powershift 1. Check the function of the F and R proportional valves (that the spool is
007103 01 003 Shifting error, power shuttle did not release. change (e.g. 1 to 3) and the shuttle unit not stucked).
. has not gone to neutral in certain time. 2. Check the wirings of the proportional valves.
.
.
007103 31 003
007200 00 003 Hydrostatic unit overheating 100˚C = Gearbox oil temperature If the temperature is over 200˚C check the sensor and wirings.
007200 01 003 indicator light illuminates. Check the function of the visco and the radiator is clean.
. 105˚C = Gearbox oil temperature
33. SERVICE CODES
. indicator light illuminates and buzzer Check that TC1 software version is 2.1.19.11 (VMT V6.8.0.0) or newer.
. sounds.
007200 31 003 110˚C = Gearbox oil temperature
indicator light illuminates, buzzer sounds,
error code is displayed and power
shuttle goes to neutral.
007201 00 003 Brake pressure switch logical state wrong Check that there is not open circuit and the sensor is connected.
007201 01 003 Brake pressure switch input (TC2) is braking ON Check also that there is right switch in the tractor. There are different
. (switch is open) but brake pedal switches (TC1) are switches for the brake fluid (blue mark in the switch) and mineral oil
. NOT pressed. Brake pedal switch is normally (booster brakes, red mark in the switch).
. closed switch and when the pressure is over 4 bar
316
007201 31 003 switch opens. (or open circuit or sensor not
connected).
007202 00 003 Hydrostatic unit pressure Error code is displayed and buzzer Reduce the load.
007202 01 003 Possibly too heavy load. sounds.
.
.
.
007202 31 003
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
007202 00 003 Hydrostatic unit pressure Error code is displayed, buzzer sounds If the error code is active and there is not a heavy load, possibly the
007202 01 003 Possibly too heavy load. and power shuttle goes to neutral. sensor is not working correctly.
. Check the function of the sensor and wirings.
LS,
.
Model
.
007202 31 003
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
54
Page
007209 00 003 Robot is not able to engage N. Check the function of the robot solenoids and wirings.
007209 01 003 Robot gear has not gone to neutral in a certain time. Check the function of the robot position sensors.
.
.
.
007209 31 003
008001 00 003 Battery Voltage VP3 Po 5---8 and Po 19---20 not in use. Check the battery voltage and the cables are connected properly.
008001 01 003 Battery voltage under 8V (FMI 4) or over 17V (FMI Check the function of the alternator.
. 3). Error code is activated if engine is running and
33. SERVICE CODES
. voltage limit is exceeded over 3 seconds. If there is not the error codes 8003 and 8005 check the fuse F25 and the
. pin 1 is connected properly.
008001 31 003
008003 00 003 Battery Voltage VP2 TC1 is not working. Check the battery voltage and the cables are connected properly.
008003 31 003
008005 00 003 Battery Voltage VP1 TC1 is not working. Check the battery voltage and the cables are connected properly.
317
008005 31 003
008007 00 003 Lowering solenoid (Y6T), 3.5A PWM out 10
008007 01 003 (POH10)
.
.
1.5.5008
.
19.2.2010
008007 31 003
008010 00 003 Outside temperature sensor Outside temperature not in use. Check the sensor and wirings (check that there is not water inside the
LS,
008010 01 003 connector).

Model
Possibly Visco fan is rotating all the time

. with maximum speed.
.
.
008010 31 003
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
55
Page
008011 00 003 Transmission oil temperature sensor Default value for the transmission Check the sensor and wirings
008011 01 003 temperature in use ---> power shuttle
. open time is longer.
. Range gear shifting is slow.
.
008011 31 003 Possibly Visco fan is rotating all the time
with maximum speed.
008012 00 003 Hydrostatic unit speed sensor (Direct) / Trans- Versu input speed: open loop control for Check the sensor and wirings.
008012 01 003 mission input speed (Versu), DSM the multidisc clutches ---> ”sharp” If also error codes 8013 or 8016, check the fuse F31
33. SERVICE CODES
. Powershift gear changes (and power

. shuttle).
.
008012 31 003
008013 00 003 Shuttle speed sensor, DSM Open loop control for the power shuttle Check the sensor and wirings.
008013 01 003 multidisc clutches ---> ”sharp” direction If also error codes 8012 or 8016, check the fuse F31
. changes.
.
.
008013 31 003
008014 00 003 PTO Speed Sensor PTO not in use. Check the sensor and wirings (supply, signal and gnd)
318
008014 01 003 If also error codes 8020, 8018, 8019, 8015, 8017 or 8014, check the fuse
. F26.
.
.
008014 31 003
008015 00 003 Front axle speed sensor 4wd always ON. Check the sensor and wirings (supply, signal and gnd)
008015 01 003
.
1.5.5008
.
19.2.2010
.
008015 31 003
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
56
Page
008016 00 003 Transmission output speed sensor (4WD) Sensor not in use. Check the sensor and wirings (supply, signal and gnd)
008016 01 003 TC1 uses shuttle speed sensor signal. If also error code 8013, check the fuse F31.
.
. TC1 uses sensors in order described
. below:
008016 31 003 1. Transmission output speed
2. Shuttle speed
3. Front axle
4. Rear wheel speed
5. Radar (<2 km/h speed is zero)
33. SERVICE CODES
008017 00 003 Rear wheel speed sensor Differential lock automatics not in use. Check the sensor and wirings (supply, signal and gnd).
008017 01 003
.
.
.
008017 31 003
008018 00 003 SIGMA engine speed sensor Sigma not in use. If FMI 5 (open circuit) and tractor is not sigma model, check ’Sigma
008018 01 003 installed’ index value.
. Check the sensor and wirings (supply, signal and gnd)
.
.
319
008018 31 003
008019 00 003 SIGMA PTO speed sensor Sigma not in use If FMI 5 (open circuit) and tractor is not sigma model, check ’Sigma
008019 01 003 installed’ index value.
. Check the sensor and wirings (supply, signal and gnd)”
.
.
008019 31 003
1.5.5008
008020 00 003 Radar 4WD automatics not in use. Check the function of the radar and wirings.
19.2.2010
008020 01 003
.
.
LS,
.
Model
008020 31 003
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
57
Page
008022 00 003 Group gear (robot) position sensor Normal range gear change is not Check the sensor and wirings.
008022 01 003 possible (blinking range gear symbol). If the sensor is working correctly, calibrate the robot.
. Range gear change possible only when
. tractor is not moving.
.
008022 31 003
008023 00 003 Main gear robot Position Normal range gear change is not Check the sensor and wirings.
008023 01 003 possible (blinking range gear symbol). If the sensor is working correctly, calibrate the robot.
. Range gear change possible only when
33. SERVICE CODES
. tractor is not moving.

.
008023 31 003
008024 00 003 Clutch pedal Clutch pedal is not working properly. Check the sensor and wirings (supply, signal and gnd).
008024 01 003
.
.
.
008024 31 003
008025 00 003 Trailer hook releasing Trailer hook releasing not in use. Check the function of the switch and wirings.
008025 01 003 If FMI 5 (open circuit) and there is not trailer hook release equipment,
320
. check ’Trailer hook release switch installed’ parameter value.
.
.
008025 31 003
008026 00 003 HST pressure sensor Mp Check the sensor and wirings.
008026 01 003 Error in the HST pressure sensor.
.
.
1.5.5008
.
19.2.2010
008026 31 003
008032 00 003 Shuttle lever (F N R P) Power shuttle goes to neutral. Check the function of the shuttle lever.
LS,
008032 01 003
Model
Check the shuttle lever wirings and the magnet is not broken.
.
.
.
008032 31 003
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
58
Page
008033 00 003 Pre ---programming button Pre ---programming button not in use. Check the function of the button and wirings.
008033 01 003
.
.
.
008033 31 003
008034 00 003 Seat Switch Driver not on the seat. Only FMI 3 (short to battery) possible to diagnose.
008034 01 003 Check the sensor and wirings.
.
33. SERVICE CODES
.
.
008034 31 003
008035 00 003 Hudrostatic unit pressure sensor Ms Error in the hydrostatic unit pressure Check the sensor and wirings.
008035 01 003 sensor.
.
.
.
008035 31 003
008036 00 003 Hydraulic oil temperature Hydraulic oil temperature information not Check the sensor and wirings.
008036 01 003 in use. NOTE: There is an additional resistor for the sensor in the EHR switch
321
. Possibly Visco is rotating all the time with panel.
. maximum speed.
.
008036 31 003
008042 00 003 Power shuttle lever digital N undefined I/O error Power shuttle goes to neutral. Check the digital N signal wirings and the function of the shuttle lever N
008042 01 003 signal.
.
.
1.5.5008
.
19.2.2010
008042 31 003
008043 00 003 Mudguard down button, left/right Mudguard down button not in use. Check the mudguard button and wirings.
LS,
008043 01 003 (diagnosed by EHR. Check the EHR error codes)

Model
.
.
.
008043 31 003
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
59
Page
008044 00 003 Hydrostatic unit temperature sensor Check the sensor and wirings.
008044 01 003 Error in the hydrostatic unit temperature sensor.
.
.
.
008044 31 003
008051 00 003 ”Reverse ON” (Output for: reverse buzzer and Atomatic rear working lights and reverse Only FMI 3 (shorted to high source) possible to diagnose.
008051 01 003 automatic rear working lights) buzzer not in use. Check the relay K20.
.
33. SERVICE CODES
. Check the wirings.

. Check the function of the output.
008051 31 003
008052 00 003 Hydraulics activation Hydraulics not in use Check the functions of the output, wirings and relay K4.
008052 01 003
.
.
.
008052 31 003
008054 00 003 ECO mode switch ECO mode not in use. Check the function of the switch and wirings.
008054 01 003 If FMI 5 (open circuit) and tractor is not eco model, check ’ECO switch
322
. installed’ parameter value.
.
.
008054 31 003
008055 00 003 4WD switch Possibly 4WD not in use. Check the function of the switch and wirings.
008055 01 003
.
.
1.5.5008
.
19.2.2010
008055 31 003
008056 00 003 Differential lock switch Possibly differential lock not in use. Check the function of the switch and wirings.
LS,
008056 01 003
Model
.
.
.
008056 31 003
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
60
Page
008057 00 003 Front tyre position sensor Differential lock automatics is not Check the function of the sensor and wirings (supply, signal and gnd).
008057 01 003 working properly.
.
.
.
008057 31 003
008058 00 003 Left brake pedal switch Differential lock automatics is not Check the function of the switch and wirings.
.
33. SERVICE CODES
.
.
008058 31 003
008059 00 003 Right brake pedal switch Differential lock automatics is not Check the function of the switch and wirings.
.
.
.
008059 31 003
008060 00 003 Engine brake switch (Direct) / Shifting Engine brake or shifting automatics Check the function of the switch and wirings.
008060 01 003 automatics switch (Versu) possibly not working properly.
323
.
.
.
008060 31 003
008061 00 003 PTO speed 1 (lever in front position)/PTO speed Possibly PTO not in use. Check the function of the switches and wirings.
008061 01 003 2 (lever in rear position)
.
.
1.5.5008
.
19.2.2010
008061 31 003
008062 00 003 PTO off / stand by / 5PS Auto PTO (auto stop) Possibly PTO not in use Check the function of the both switches (PTO Auto stop and PTO
LS,
008062 01 003 off/stand by/start) and wirings

Model
.
.
.
008062 31 003
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
61
Page
008063 00 003 PTO start/stop / 5PS Auto PTO (auto stop) Possibly PTO not in use Check the function of the both switches (PTO Auto stop and PTO
008063 01 003 off/stand by/start) and wirings
.
.
.
008063 31 003
008064 00 003 PTO start (mudguard), Left/Right Possibly PTO mudguard button not in Check the function of the mudguard button and wirings.
008064 01 003 use. Check that there is not water inside the connector.
.
33. SERVICE CODES
.
.
008064 31 003
008065 00 003 Clutch pedal switch Posiibly clutch pedal is not working Check the function of the switch and wirings.
008065 01 003 properly.
.
.
.
008065 31 003
008066 00 003 Driving mode switch (Direct) / Auto traction Direct: error in the driving mode rocker Check the rocker switch and wirings.
008066 01 003 switch (Versu) switch. Last selected mode in use and
324
. after bootup Auto mode in use.
.
.
008066 31 003
008067 00 003 LL switch (robot neutral request) S49 (LL OFF, Possibly LL not in use. Check the function of the switch and wirings.
008067 01 003 rear switch)
.
.
1.5.5008
.
19.2.2010
008067 31 003
008068 00 003 LL switch (LL on/off) S50 (LL ON, front switch) Possibly LL not in use. Check the function of the switch and wirings.
LS,
008068 01 003
Model
.
.
.
008068 31 003
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
62
Page
008069 00 003 Mudguard up left/right (S1E,S2E,S3E,S4E) Mudguard button not in use. Check the mudguard button and wirings.
008069 01 003
.
.
.
008069 31 003
008070 00 003 5V sensor supply VPS1 There could be several error codes from Check that there is not a short circuit to gnd or supply voltage (e.g.
008070 01 003 the switches and sensors. mudguard buttons, front tyre position sensor, outside temperature
. Error code diagnosed if the voltage is sensor).
33. SERVICE CODES
. under 4700 mV (FMI4) or over 5300 mV NOTE: 5V supply for the mudguard buttons and the front tyre position
. (FMI3). sensor and the outside temperature sensor changed from TC1 to TC2
008070 31 003 (chassis number Wxxxxx --->)
008071 00 003 5V Supply VPS2 There could be several error codes from Check that there is not a short circuit to gnd or supply voltage (e.g.
008071 01 003 the switches and sensors. mudguard buttons, front tyre position sensor, outside temperature
. Error code diagnosed if the voltage is sensor).
. under 4700 mV (FMI4) or over 5300 mV NOTE: 5V supply for the mudguard buttons and the front tyre position
. (FMI3). sensor and the outside temperature sensor changed from TC1 to TC2
008071 31 003 (chassis number Wxxxxx --->)
008072 00 003 3,3 V Supply VPS3 There could be several error codes from Check that there is not a short circuit between 5V and 3,3V ref
325
008072 01 003 the switches and sensors Error code
. diagnosed if the voltage is under 3000
. mV or over 3600 mV.
.
008072 31 003
008073 00 003 Lifting / lowering solenoid common pin Possibly lifting/lowering is not working. Check the connection of the common pin (pin 73) and wirings.
008073 01 003
.
1.5.5008
.
19.2.2010
.
008073 31 003
LS,
008074 00 003 Powershift solenoid 1 Possibly Powershifts are not working Check the solenoid and wirings.
Model
008074 01 003 properly.

.
.
.
Versu, Direct
008074 31 003
Code
331.4
63
Page
008075 00 003 Powershift solenoid 2 Possibly Powershifts are not working Check the solenoid and wirings.
008075 01 003 properly.
.
.
.
008075 31 003
008076 00 003 Hydrostat solenoid (Direct) / Powershift Hydrostat solenoid: power shuttle goes Check the solenoid and wirings.
008076 01 003 solenoid 3 (Versu) to neutral
. Possibly Powershifts are not working
33. SERVICE CODES
. properly.
.
008076 31 003
008077 00 003 NC (VPS) / Powershift solenoid 4 (5PS) Possibly Powershifts are not working Check the solenoid and wirings.
008077 01 003 properly.
.
.
.
008077 31 003
008078 00 003 Forward solenoid Possibly F direction is not possible to Check the solenoid and wirings.
008078 01 003 engage. Check the function of the clutch pedal switch (F/R solenoids gnd goes
326
. throw the switch).
.
.
008078 31 003
008079 00 003 Rearward solenoid Possibly R direction is not possible to Check the solenoid and wirings
008079 01 003 engage. Check the function of the clutch pedal switch (F/R solenoids gnd goes
. throw the switch).
.
1.5.5008
.
19.2.2010
008079 31 003
008080 00 003 PTO Clutch PTO not in use. Check the PTO solenoid and wirings.
LS,
008080 01 003
Model
Check the PTO emergency stop plug.

.
.
.
008080 31 003
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
64
Page
008081 00 003 Trailer hook releasing Possibly trailer hook releasing is not Check the function of the solenoid and wirings.
008081 01 003 working.
.
.
.
008081 31 003
008083 00 003 Shifting valve 1 (Joystick upper button) Shifting valve control not in use. Check the relay and wirings.
008083 01 003
.
33. SERVICE CODES
.
.
008083 31 003
008084 00 003 Shifting valve 2 (Joystick lower button) Shifting valve control not in use. Check the relay and wirings.
008084 01 003
.
.
.
008084 31 003
008085 00 003 Parking brake solenoid Parking brake not in use. Check the solenoid and wirings.
008085 01 003
327
.
.
.
008085 31 003
008086 00 003 Brake cooling Brake cooling not in use. Check the solenoid and wirings.
008086 01 003
.
.
1.5.5008
.
19.2.2010
008086 31 003
008087 00 003 4WD solenoid 4WD possibly not working properly. Check the solenoid and wirings.
LS,
008087 01 003
Model
.
.
.
008087 31 003
Versu, Direct
008088 00 003 Slip control LED LED is not working. Check the wirings and the function of the EHR switch card.
008088 01 003
Code
.
331.4
.
.
008088 31 003
65
Page
008089 00 003 Diagnostic LED LED is not working. Check the wirings and the function of the EHR switch card.
008089 01 003
.
.
.
008089 31 003
008090 00 003 Differential lock solenoid Differential lock possibly not working Check the solenoid and wirings.
008090 01 003 properly.
.
33. SERVICE CODES
.
.
008090 31 003
008091 00 003 M to H valve (earlier: Group gear (M) solenoid) Error in the range gear function. Check the solenoid and wirings.
008091 01 003 Ignition key off ---on ---> another range
. gear possible to use.
.
.
008091 31 003
008092 00 003 H to M valve (earlier: Group gear (H) solenoid) Error in the range gear function. Check the solenoid and wirings.
328
.
.
008092 31 003
008093 00 003 1 to 2 valve (earlier: Main gear (1) solenoid) Error in the range gear function. Check the solenoid and wirings.
.
1.5.5008
.
19.2.2010
008093 31 003
008094 00 003 2 to 1 valve (earlier: Main gear (2) solenoid) Error in the range gear function. Check the solenoid and wirings.
LS,
008094 01 003
Model
Ignition key off ---on ---> another range

.
.
008094 31 003
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
66
Page
008100 00 003 Power shuttle errors Power shuttle goes to neutral. Check the function of the shuttle lever N voltage and digital N signal.
008100 01 003 Power shuttle lever digital N logical error, digital N Check the shuttle lever wirings and the magnet is not broken.
. asserted but lever voltage window not N.
.
.
008100 31 003
008101 01 003 Power shuttle lever voltage in Error window. Check the shuttle lever wirings and the magnet is not broken.
.
33. SERVICE CODES
.
.
008101 31 003
008102 01 003 Power shuttle lever voltage in Fail window. Check the shuttle lever wirings and the magnet is not broken.
.
.
.
008102 31 003
008103 01 003 Power shuttle lever state machine in ERROR state. Check the shuttle lever wirings and the magnet is not broken.
329
.
.
.
008103 31 003
008104 01 003 Power shuttle lever voltage at N but digital N not Check the shuttle lever wirings and the magnet is not broken.
. asserted.
.
1.5.5008
.
19.2.2010
008104 31 003
008105 00 003 Parking brake ensure connection in error state P blinking, buzzer on and handbrake is Check the relay K2 and P signal wirings.
LS,
008105 01 003 possible not working.

Model
.
.
.
008105 31 003
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
67
Page
008110 00 003 Software error. TC1 uses factory values. Tractor is not Check the calibrations and all the index values (parameter structure has
008110 01 003 Wrong configuration data version ID. working properly. changed compared to the previous version and TC1 uses factory values).
. These error codes could happen after downloading NOTE: When the factory values are in use, the error code disappears.
. new software.
.
008110 31 003
008111 01 003 Configuration data checksum failed. working properly. changed compared to the previous version and TC1 uses factory values).
33. SERVICE CODES
. new software.
.
008111 31 003
008112 01 003 Calibration, ehr data and ehr calibration data check working properly. changed compared to the previous version and TC1 uses factory values).
. failed. NOTE: When the factory values are in use, the error code disappears.
. These error codes could happen after downloading
. new software.
008112 31 003
008113 01 003 Wrong parameter or product version ID. working properly. changed compared to the previous version and TC1 uses factory values).
330
. new software.
.
008113 31 003
008114 01 003 Parameter check digit not in correct place. working properly. changed compared to the previous version and TC1 uses factory values).
. new software.
1.5.5008
.
19.2.2010
008114 31 003
LS,
008115 01 003 Wrong user data’s version ID. working properly. changed compared to the previous version and TC1 uses factory values).
Model
. new software.
.
008115 31 003
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
68
Page
008116 01 003 User data’s check digit not in correct place. working properly. changed compared to the previous version and TC1 uses factory values).
. new software.
.
008116 31 003
008117 00 003 Error code memory full (over 30 error codes). It is not possible to show all the active If there is a lot of FMI 09 (CAN timeout) error codes, check the CAN bus
008117 01 003 error codes. wirings.
. If there is a lot of error codes from the switches, check the 5V and 3,3V
33. SERVICE CODES
. reference voltages that there is not any short circuits.

.
008117 31 003
008118 00 003 PTO key value is not valid (value is not in PTO not in use. Check the PTO key value.
008118 01 003 correct area)
.
.
.
008118 31 003
008119 00 003 Seat direction changed while tractor is moving. Set the shuttle lever to P position and back N/F/R position.
008119 01 003 (Error code is diagnosed over 0,1 km/h speed) If the fault code is still active check the seat direction switch. If the switch
331
. is ok and the error code is active check the transmission speed sensor
. (no speed when tractor is standing still).
.
008119 31 003
008120 00 003 TC key value is not valid (value is not in correct Tractor is not working properply. Check the TC key value.
008120 01 003 area)
.
.
1.5.5008
.
19.2.2010
008120 31 003
008121 00 003 TwinTrac module timeout. TwinTrac not in use Check the fuse.
LS,
008121 01 003
Model
Check the CAN bus wires.

.
. If there is not TwinTrac but error code is active check the ’Twin Trac
. installed’ index value.
008121 31 003
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
69
Page
008122 00 003 NAPTO input signal shorted to GND. PTO not in use. Check the TC2 NA PTO connections.
008122 01 003
.
.
.
008122 31 003
008123 00 003 NAPTO CAN signal timeout PTO not in use Check the TC2 control unit
008123 01 003
.
33. SERVICE CODES
.
.
008123 31 003
008124 00 003 Front throttle pedal up limit switch. Error in the pedal up position limit switch. Check the function of the limit switch and check also the function of the
008124 01 003 FMI=7: According to the limit switch pedal NOT Direct: Driving possible only with hand position sensor.
. pressed but according to the sensor pedal pressed throttle and manual mode. Check that the switch is correctly adjusted.
. (recovery after bootup).
. Versu: Driving possible with hand NOTE: Switch assembled to the Versu models from the chassis number
008124 31 003 FMI=13: According to the limit switch pedal throttle. V37320.
pressed but according to the sensor pedal NOT If there is not the switch but error code is active check the index value
pressed (automatic recovery when conditions are ’front throttle pedal limit switch installed’.
OK).
332
Check if the throttle pedal automatic calibration (EEM) is ON or OFF. If the
calibration is OFF (the pedal signal value compared to the engine
min/max speed is constant 1V (up) --- 3V (down)). Then adjust the pedal
up position to the 1V.
008125 00 003 F ---current output is sourcing current even if Power shuttle goes to neutral. Possible software error.
008125 01 003 powershuttle lever is not in F ---position Turn the ignition key off ---on.
.
. If the error code is still active check the wirings from TC1 to solenoid.
1.5.5008
.
19.2.2010
008125 31 003
008126 00 003 R---current output is sourcing current even if Power shuttle goes to neutral. Possible software error.
LS,
008126 01 003 powershuttle lever is not in R---position

Model
Turn the ignition key off ---on.

.
. If the error code is still active check the wirings from TC1 to solenoid.
.
008126 31 003
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
70
Page
008127 00 003 F ---Clutch voltage/current too low Power shuttle goes to neutral. Error code is an additional information if the F multidisc clutch is slipping.
008127 01 003 The clutch is slipping because the voltage is too low or the resistant value
. of the solenoid is not correct.
.
.
008127 31 003
008128 00 003 R---Clutch voltage/current too low Power shuttle goes to neutral. Error code is an additional information if the R multidisc clutch is slipping.
008128 01 003 The clutch is slipping because the voltage is too low or the resistant value
. of the solenoid is not correct.
33. SERVICE CODES
.
.
008128 31 003
008129 00 003 PTO ---Clutch voltage/current too low Power shuttle goes to neutral. Error code is an additional information if the PTO multidisc clutch is
008129 01 003 slipping. The clutch is slipping because the voltage is too low or the
. resistant value of the solenoid is not correct.
.
.
008129 31 003
008130 00 003 C1 ---Clutch voltage/current too low Power shuttle goes to neutral. Error code is an additional information if the C1 multidisc clutch is
333
.
.
008130 31 003
.
1.5.5008
.
19.2.2010
008131 31 003
LS,
Model

.
.
008132 31 003
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
71
Page
.
.
008133 31 003
008150 00 003 ROBOT errors, Main robot sensor voltage out of Error in the robot function. Check the function of the main robot position sensor.
008150 01 003 window Make the robot calibration.
.
33. SERVICE CODES
.
.
008150 31 003
008151 00 003 ROBOT errors, Group robot sensor voltage out Error in the robot function. Check the function of the main robot position sensor.
008151 01 003 of window Make the robot calibration.
.
.
.
008151 31 003
008152 00 003 Both creeper switches are active at the same Creeper is not possible to engage. Check the function of the switches and wirings
008152 01 003 time Blinking creeper symbol in the display.
334
.
.
.
008152 31 003
009006 31 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Vehicle CAN Valtra parameter, 1800 rpm.
EC unit is not able to communicate with other
control units on the CAN bus.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
NOTE EC unit cannot detect open circuit (wiring).

LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
72
Page
009008 31 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: ID module CAN NOTE Communication between EC unit 1. Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement between
EC unit is not able to communicate with ID module and ID module is not possible, therefore EC unit and ID module. If the harness and connectors are OK, reason
on the CAN bus. service codes 009233 31 000 (ID module might be a defective EC unit.
not present) and 009242 31 000 2. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
NOTE EC unit cannot detect open circuit (wiring). (Generated bypass time expired) will be functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
activated after delay time. then the original EC unit is defective.
33. SERVICE CODES
009010 02 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Ambient pressure 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
The measurement has failed inside the EC unit. functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
335
009010 03 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Ambient pressure NOTE Engine functions dependent on 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
EC unit monitoring system has detected failure at the ambient pressure sensor are not functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
EC unit internal ambient pressure sensor. Possible active. then the original EC unit is defective.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010

LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
73
Page
009010 04 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Ambient pressure NOTE Engine functions dependent on 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
EC unit monitoring system has detected failure at the ambient pressure sensor are not functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
EC unit internal ambient pressure sensor. Possible active. then the original EC unit is defective.
reason is EC unit hardware defect. NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code 009230 31 000
33. SERVICE CODES
009010 16 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Ambient pressure 1. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
Ambient pressure inside EC unit controller is too functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
high. Measured pressure >2000 hPa. then the original EC unit is defective.
009021 03 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: 5Vdc ref. voltages NOTE The EC unit detects wrong values 1. Check reference supply lines from EC unit for short circuit to battery
Reference supply voltage for sensors and throttles by the sensors and throttles and for that voltage.
is too high. behaviour of the engine is not correct. 2. Check boost pressure sensor for short circuit to +2 V. Normally there
336
should be +5 V
3. Check hand throttle for short circuit to +12 V. Normally there should be
+5 V.
4. Check oil pressure sensor for short circuit to +12V. Normally there
should be +5 V.
5. Check fuel filter pressure sensor for short circuit to +12V. Normally
there should be +5 V.
6. If no short circuit is found, reason might be a defective EC unit.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
74
Page
009021 04 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: 5Vdc ref. voltages NOTE The EC unit detects wrong values 1. The probably cause of the problem is the voltage drop down, during
Reference supply voltage for sensors and throttles by the sensors and throttles and for that cranking.
is too low. behaviour of the engine is not correct. If the service code is active always when ignition is switched on and
engine is not running
2. Check boost pressure sensor for short circuit to ground.
3. Check hand throttle for short circuit to ground.
4. Check oil pressure sensor for short circuit to ground
5. Check fuel filter pressure sensor for short circuit to ground
33. SERVICE CODES

009022 03 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: 5Vdc ref. voltages NOTE The EC unit detects wrong values 1. Check front gas pedal for short circuit to +12 V. Normally there should
Reference supply voltage for sensors and throttles by the sensors and throttles and for that be +5 V.
is too high. behaviour of the engine is not correct. 2. Check read gas pedal for short circuit to +12 V. Normally there should
337
be +5 V.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
75
Page
009022 04 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: 5Vdc ref. voltages NOTE The EC unit detects wrong values 1. The probably cause of the problem is the voltage drop down, during
Reference supply voltage for sensors and throttles by the sensors and throttles and for that cranking.
is too low. behaviour of the engine is not correct. If the service code is active always when ignition is switched on and
engine is not running.
2. Check front gas pedal for short circuit to ground.
3. Check rear gas pedal for short circuit to ground.
33. SERVICE CODES
009023 03 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: 5Vdc ref. voltages NOTE The EC unit detects wrong values 1. Check rail pressure sensor for short circuit to +12V. Normally there
Reference supply voltage for sensors and throttles by the sensors and throttles and for that should be +5 V.
is too high. behaviour of the engine is not correct. 2. If no short circuit is found, reason might be a defective EC unit.
Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
338
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
76
Page
009023 04 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: 5Vdc ref. voltages NOTE The EC unit detects wrong values 1. Check rail pressure sensor for short circuit to ground.
Reference supply voltage for sensors and throttles by the sensors and throttles and for that 2. If no short circuit is found, reason might be a defective EC unit.
is too low. behaviour of the engine is not correct. 3. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
33. SERVICE CODES
009024 16 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Water in fuel sensor 1. Check the generator, if charging voltage is correct.
supply
Supply voltage for Water in fuel sensor is too high.
EC unit supply voltage has been above 32 V over
delay time.
339
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
77
Page
009024 18 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Water in fuel sensor 1. The probably cause of the problem is the voltage drop down, during
supply cranking.
Supply voltage for Water in fuel sensor is too low.
EC unit supply voltage has been below 6,5 V over A. If the service code 000168 18 000 (supply voltage for EC unit is
delay time. too low) is active continuously
2. Check contacts through wiring from the battery to the EC unit for bad
33. SERVICE CODES
B. The probably cause of the problem is the voltage drop down,

during cranking. If the service code is active always when ignition is
switched on and engine is not running
1. Check Water in fuel sensor for short circuit to ground.
2. If no short circuit is found, reason can be a defective EC unit.
340
type)or 009231 31 000 (Engine serial number in the EC unit does not
009025 31 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Self tests Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
The test is made during system start---up when the Maximum injection quantity is reduced to If the service code is active, reason might be a defective EC unit.
engine is not running. 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
The EC unit switchs off the power stages. When the functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
power stages are switched off any injections should NOTE If engine is not running Service then the original EC unit is defective.
1.5.5008
not be possible. The EC unit tries to schedule fuel code will not allow to start engine.
19.2.2010
injections on all cylinders, if an injection is detected NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code 009230 31 000
the service code is activated. (The engine specification number in the EC unit is incorrect for this engine
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
78
Page
The internal supply voltage is controlled by an functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
internal voltage check. If the supply voltage NOTE If engine is not running Service then the original EC unit is defective.
overshoots a certain voltage range, the self test code will not allow to start engine.
switch off the power stages. NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code 009230 31 000
The EC unit intentionally fails the supply voltage (The engine specification number in the EC unit is incorrect for this engine
check that leads to switch off the power stages. type) or 009231 31 000 (Engine serial number in the EC unit does not
33. SERVICE CODES
When the power stages are switched off any match for the engine) will be activated, because of engine serial number
injections should not be possible. The EC unit tries mismatch or engine specification mismatch.
to schedule fuel injections on all cylinders, if an
injection is detected the service code is activated.
The internal supply voltage is controlled by an functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
internal voltage check. If the supply voltage NOTE If engine is not running Service then the original EC unit is defective.
overshoots a certain voltage range, the self test code will not allow to start engine.
switch off the power stages. NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code 009230 31 000
The EC unit intentionally fails the supply voltage (The engine specification number in the EC unit is incorrect for this engine
341
check that leads to switch off the power stages. type) or 009231 31 000 (Engine serial number in the EC unit does not
When the power stages are switched off any match for the engine) will be activated, because of engine serial number
injections should not be possible. The EC unit tries mismatch or engine specification mismatch.
to schedule fuel injections on all cylinders, if an
injection is detected the service code is activated.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
79
Page
009030 03 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Main relays 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the ignition key
High and low power outputs of the EC unit are again on, if the service code occurs again during next driving.
supplied via the main relays. When short circuit to 2. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring, connectors
ground or power supply is detected, Main relays will and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation)
automatically shut off. To ensure that the short 3. Measure the low side from wiring terminal to engine ground, to see if
circuit to GND or power supply is either temporary there is a short circuit to power supply.
or permanent, the Main relays shall be reactivated 4. Measure between the low side from wiring terminal to EC unit injector
after delay time. If monitoring system detects connector, to see if there is a fault in the cable.
continuously short circuit to ground or power supply 5. Measure between the high side from wiring terminal to EC unit injector
33. SERVICE CODES
Main relays will be shut off. connector, to see if there is a fault in thecable.
342
supplied via the main relays. When short circuit to 2. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring, connectors
ground or power supply is detected, Main relays will and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation)
automatically shut off. To ensure that the short 3. Measure the high side from wiring terminal to engine ground, to see if
circuit to GND or power supply is either temporary there is a short circuit to ground.
or permanent, the Main relays shall be reactivated 4. Measure between the low side from wiring terminal to EC unit injector
after delay time. If monitoring system detects connector, to see if there is a fault in the cable.
continuously short circuit to ground or power supply 5. Measure between the high side from wiring terminal to EC unit injector
Main relays will be shut off. connector, to see if there is a fault in the cable.
1.5.5008

19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct

Code
331.4
80
Page
supplied via the main relays. When short circuit to 2. Measure the pin X1M:16 from wiring terminal, to see if there is a short
ground or power supply is detected, Main relays will circuit to power supply.
automatically shut off. To ensure that the short 3. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
circuit to GND or power supply is either temporary functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
or permanent, the Main relays shall be reactivated then the original EC unit is defective.
after delay time. If monitoring system detects
continuously short circuit to ground or power supply NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code 009230 31 000
33. SERVICE CODES
Main relays will be shut off. (The engine specification number in the EC unit is incorrect for this engine
009031 06 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Main relay 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the ignition key
High and low power outputs of the EC unit are again on, if the service code occurs again during next driving
ground or power supply is detected, Main relays will circuit to ground.
343
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
81
Page
009032 03 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Main relays 1. Measure the pin X1M:56 from wiring terminal, to see if there is a short
High and low power outputs of the EC unit are circuit to power supply.
ground or power supply is detected, Main relays will circuit to power supply.
33. SERVICE CODES
009032 06 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: EC main relay 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the ignition key
High and low power outputs of the EC unit are again on, if the service code occurs again during next driving
ground or power supply is detected, Main relays will circuit to ground.
automatically shut off. To ensure that the short 3. Measure the pin X1M:75 from wiring terminal, to see if there is a short
circuit to GND or power supply is either temporary circuit to ground.
or permanent, the Main relays shall be reactivated 4. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
after delay time. If monitoring system detects functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
344
continuously short circuit to ground or power supply then the original EC unit is defective.
Main relays will be shut off.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
82
Page
009033 31 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Main relay 1. Turn ignition key off and continuous power (= fuse) to the EC unit off,
When the ignition key has been switched off to shut wait 30 seconds and turn continuous power (= fuse) and ignition key
off the system the EC unit executes definite routines again on.
and finally the EC unit switches off power supply 2. If the service code occurs again during next EC unit shut off (ignition
from itself. After the final switch off command is key off) the EC unit might be defective.
given to the EC unit a shut off timer is started to 3. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
increment and if this timer is able to reach the functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
certain value, this means the software is still running then the original EC unit is defective.
and the EC unit power is not off.
33. SERVICE CODES
009034 31 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: EC unit main relay 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
When the ignition key has been switched off to shut If the service code is active, reason might be a defective EC unit.
off the system the EC unit executes definite routines 2. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
and finally the EC unit switches off power supply functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
from itself. After the final switch off command is then the original EC unit is defective.
given to the EC unit a shut off timer is started to
increment and if this timer is able to reach the NOTE If EC unit from another tractor is used, service code 009230 31 000
345
certain value, this means the software is still running (The engine specification number in the EC unit is incorrect for this engine
and the EC unit power is not off. The EC unit shut type) or 009231 31 000 (Engine serial number in the EC unit does not
off fault status is stored to the memory and begins match for the engine) will be activated, because of engine serial number
of next driving cycle the status is checked and the mismatch or engine specification mismatch.
service code is activated.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
83
Page
009035 31 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Recovery 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the ignition key
The EC unit makes reset by itself if during software again on, if the service code occurs again during next driving cycle the
execution happens some illegal operation. Normally reason might be a software problem.
reason is that execution time for some operation 2. Download software to EC unit.
has exceeded. 3. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the ignition key
Always after reset the EC unit check possible again on, if the service code occurs again during next driving cycle the
recovery and if recover has been happened the reason might be a defective EC unit.
service code is activated. The engine could 4. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
continue running normally after the recovery. functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
33. SERVICE CODES
009036 31 000 EC unit DIAGNOSTIC: Recovery 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the ignition key
EC unit monitoring system has detected 3 pcs again on, if the service code occurs again during next driving cycle the
recoveries within 2 seconds. The EC unit makes reason might be a software problem.
reset by itself if during software execution happens 2. Download software to EC unit.
some illegal operation. Reason is that execution 3. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the ignition key
346
time for some operation has exceeded. again on, if the service code occurs again during next driving cycle the
Always after reset the EC unit check possible reason might be a defective EC unit.
recovery and if recover has been happened the 4. Check the EC unit operation with another EC unit. If the system is
service is activated. The engine could continue functional and the service code is not active with the replacement EC unit,
running normally after the recovery. then the original EC unit is defective.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
84
Page
009070 31 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Crank speed sensor Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. If the engine is running roughly, check the condition of the fuel, the fuel
The crankshaft speed and angular position Maximum injection quantity is reduced to system and the mechanical condition of the engine.
evaluation module expects a defined sequence of 75 % from rated power. 2. If the service code is coming up only occasionally, check the possible
pulses from the crankshaft speed sensor (trigger conditions causing abnormal engine speed changes, e.g. tractor
wheel with 58 teeth and gap 2 teeth wide). If the NOTE Engine starting may take longer mishandling.
pulses are not received at correct time, the Time than normally and running may be bad 3. Check the crankshaft sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces of
Processing Unit (TPU) reports a fault. due to missing/incorrect information for the connector pins (possible oxidation). Look also for possible reverse
injection timing control. The engine runs connection.
with camshaft speed sensor signal. 4. Check the coil resistance of the crankshaft sensor (the engine must be
33. SERVICE CODES
stopped).
--- Crankshaft sensor coil: 1120 --- 1530 .
5. Check the crankshaft sensor mounting. The air gap between the
sensor tip and trigger wheel teeth should be 0,2 --- 1,0 mm.
6. Check the condition and mounting of the crankshaft trigger wheel
(damaged teeth, positioning of the trigger wheel).
009071 31 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Crank speed sensor Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. Check the crankshaft sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces of
The crankshaft speed and angular position Maximum injection quantity is reduced to the connector pins (possible oxidation). Look also for possible reverse
evaluation module expects a defined sequence of 75 % from rated power. connection.
pulses from the crankshaft speed sensor (trigger 2. Check the coil resistance of the crankshaft sensor (the engine must be
wheel with 58 teeth and a gap 2 teeth wide). If too NOTE Engine starting may take longer stopped).
many pulses are received between two gaps, the than normally and running may be bad --- Crankshaft sensor coil: 1120 --- 1530 .
347
system reports a fault. due to missing/incorrect information for 3. Check the crankshaft sensor mounting. The air gap between the
injection timing control. The engine runs sensor tip and trigger wheel teeth should be 0,2 --- 1,0 mm.
with camshaft speed sensor signal. 4. Look for possible devices using or carrying high currents, high voltages
or strong magnetic fields on or close to the tractor, disturbing the speed
sensor signal.
5. Check the condition and mounting of the crankshaft trigger wheel
(damaged teeth, positioning of the trigger wheel).
009072 31 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Crank speed sensor Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. Check the crankshaft sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces of
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
For correct crankshaft speed and angular position Maximum injection quantity is reduced to the connector pins (possible oxidation). Look for possible reverse
evaluation, the pulses from the crankshaft speed 75 % from rated power. connection.
sensor must have correct direction of voltage 2. Check the coil resistance of the crankshaft sensor (the engine must be
LS,
change when switching between teeth and gaps NOTE: Engine starting may take longer stopped).
Model
during rotation. A monitoring function can detect the than normally and running may be bad --- Crankshaft sensor coil: 1120 --- 1530 
reverse polarity condition. due to missing/incorrect information for 3. Check the crankshaft sensor mounting. The air gap between the
injection timing control. The engine runs sensor tip and trigger wheel teeth should be 0,2 --- 1,0 mm.
with camshaft speed sensor signal. 4. Check the condition of the crankshaft trigger wheel. A damaged tooth
Versu, Direct
may generate an abnormal pulse shape, which can detected as reverse

condition.
Code
331.4
85
Page
009080 31 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Cam speed sensor Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. If the engine is running roughly, check the condition of the fuel, the fuel
Engine angular position is evaluated by two Maximum injection quantity is reduced to system and the mechanical condition of the engine.
separate functions: 75 % from rated power. 2. If the service code is coming up only occasionally, check the possible
Angle based Phase System (APS) conditions causing abnormal engine speed changes, e.g. tractor
Time based Phase System (TPS) NOTE Engine starting may take longer mishandling.
The calculation is based on crankshaft sensor than normally and running may be bad 3. Check the camshaft sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces of
signal, camshaft sensor signal and internal EC unit due to missing/incorrect information for the connector pins (possible oxidation). Look also for possible reverse
time calculation. The use of the two functions injection timing control. The engine runs connection.
depends on the engine running state. with crankshaft speed sensor signal. 4. Check the coil resistance of the sensors (the engine must be stopped).
33. SERVICE CODES

The camshaft speed and angular position 5. Check the amshaft sensor mounting. The air gap between the sensor
evaluation module expects a defined sequence of tip and trigger wheel teeth should be 0,2 --- 1,0 mm.
pulses from the camshaft speed sensor (trigger 6. Check the condition and mounting of the camshaft trigger wheel
wheel with 4 (4---cyl. engine) or 6 (6---cyl. engine) (damaged teeth, positioning of the trigger wheels).
phase marks and one sync mark).
009081 31 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Cam speed sensor Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. If the engine is running roughly, check the condition of the fuel, the fuel
Engine angular position is evaluated by two Maximum injection quantity is reduced to system and the mechanical condition of the engine.
separate functions: 75 % from rated power. 2. If the service code is coming up only occasionally, check the possible
Angle based Phase system (APS) conditions causing abnormal engine speed changes, e.g. tractor
Time based Phase System (TPS) NOTE Engine starting may take longer mishandling.
The calculation is based on crankshaft sensor than normally and running may be bad 3. Check the camshaft sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces of
348
signal, camshaft sensor signal and internal EC unit due to missing/incorrect information for the connector pins (possible oxidation). Look also for possible reverse
time calculation. The use of the two functions injection timing control. The engine runs connection.
depends on the engine running state. with crankshaft speed sensor signal. 4. Check the coil resistance of the sensors (the engine must be stopped).
The camshaft speed and angular position 5. Check the amshaft sensor mounting. The air gap between the sensor
evaluation module expects a defined sequence of tip and trigger wheel teeth should be 0,2 --- 1,0 mm.
pulses from the camshaft speed sensor (trigger 6. Check the condition and mounting of the camshaft trigger wheel
wheel with 4 (4---cyl. engine) or 6 (6---cyl. engine) (damaged teeth, positioning of the trigger wheels).
1.5.5008
phase marks and one sync mark).

19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
86
Page
009082 31 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Cam speed sensor Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. Check the camshaft sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces of
Cam speed sensor, reverse connected. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to the connector pins (possible oxidation). Look for possible reverse
75 % from rated power. connection.
2. Check the coil resistance of the sensors (the engine must be stopped).
NOTE Engine starting may take longer --- Camshaft sensor coil: 774 --- 946 .
than normally and running may be bad 3. Check the amshaft sensor mounting. The air gap between the sensor
due to missing/incorrect information for tip and trigger wheel teeth should be 0,2 --- 1,0 mm.
injection timing control. The engine runs 4. Check the condition of the camshaft trigger wheel. A damaged tooth
with crankshaft speed sensor signal. may generate an abnormal pulse shape, which can detected as reverse
33. SERVICE CODES
condition.
009083 31 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Cam speed sensor Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. Check the camshaft sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces of
No cam speed signal found. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to the connector pins (possible oxidation). Look for possible reverse
75 % from rated power. connection.
2. Check the coil resistance of the sensors (the engine must be stopped).
NOTE Engine starting may take longer --- Camshaft sensor coil: 774 --- 946 .
than normally and running may be bad 3. Check the amshaft sensor mounting. The air gap between the sensor
due to missing/incorrect information for tip and trigger wheel teeth should be 0,2 --- 1,0 mm.
injection timing control. The engine runs 4. Check the condition of the camshaft trigger wheel. A damaged tooth
with crankshaft speed sensor signal. may generate an abnormal pulse shape.
349
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
87
Page
009090 31 000 ENGINE SENSORS: Speed sensor general Maximum rpm is 1800. 1. If the engine is running roughly, check the condition of the fuel, the fuel
Engine speed and angular position measurement is Maximum injection quantity is reduced to system and the mechanical condition of the engine.
based on signals from crankshaft speed sensor and 75 % from rated power. 2. If the service code is coming up only occasionally, check the possible
camshaft speed sensor. The evaluation error is conditions causing abnormal engine speed changes, e.g.tractor
activated, if any of these two sensor signals is found NOTE Engine starting may take longer mishandling.
to be defective or if the signals are not in correct than normally and running may be bad 3. Check the crankshaft and camshaft sensor wiring, connectors and
phase compared to each other. One or more due to missing/incorrect information for contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation). Look also for
additional speed sensor service codes may be injection timing control. The engine may possible reverse connection.
active together with the evaluation error service be running with only one speed sensor 4. Check the coil resistance of the sensors (the engine must be stopped).
33. SERVICE CODES
code. signal. --- Crankshaft sensor coil: 1120 --- 1530 

--- Camshaft sensor coil: 774 --- 946 
5. Check the crankshaft and camshaft sensor mounting. The air gap
between the sensor tip and trigger wheel teeth should be 0,2 --- 1,0 mm.
6. Check the condition and mounting of the camshaft trigger wheel and
the crankshaft trigger wheel (damaged teeth, positioning of the trigger
wheels).
009100 31 000 Upgrade protection fault
009107 31 000 Invalid ECU source address selection
009131 03 000 INJECTOR DIAGNOSTIC: Injector 1 Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check the EC unit injector connector contact terminals and the EC unit
EC unit monitoring system has detected short Maximum injection quantity is reduced to pins for possible oxidation.
350
circuit between cables of injector solenoid valve 1 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the high side and low side wiring between solenoid valve 1
on cylinder 1 (6 ---cylinder and 4 ---cylinder terminals and EC unit injector connector.
engine). Short circuit to power supply from NOTE Short circuit between cables will 3. Check the solenoid valve 1 low side wiring for possible short circuit to
solenoid valve low side will activate this service switch off the bank (solenoid valves 1, 5 any line or terminal connected to power supply.
code, too. and 3). 4. Measure the solenoid valve 1 coil resistance. Correct resistance is
0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
009131 05 000 INJECTOR DIAGNOSTIC: Injector 1 Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check the EC unit injector connector locking. The connector metallic
EC unit monitoring system has detected open Maximum injection quantity is reduced to locking lever must be in final position (locking position).
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
circuit in the wiring of injector solenoid valve 1 on 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the EC unit injector connector contact terminals and the EC unit
cylinder 1 (6 ---cylinder and 4 ---cylinder engine). pins for possible oxidation.
3. Check the solenoid valve 1 cable connector fastening. Correct
LS,
tightening value for nuts is 1,5 Nm!

Model
4. Check the high side and low side wiring between solenoid valve 1
terminals and EC unit injector connector.
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
88
Page
EC unit monitoring system has detected short Maximum injection quantity is reduced to locking lever must be in final position (locking position).
circuit to ground at injector solenoid valve 1 on 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the EC unit injector connector contact terminals and the EC unit
cylinder 1 (6 ---cylinder and 4 ---cylinder engine). pins for possible oxidation.
NOTE Short circuit to ground of solenoid 3. Check the solenoid valve 1 cable connector fastening. Correct
valve low side will switch off a single tightening value for nuts is 1,5 Nm!
injector.
Short circuit to ground of solenoid valve 4 ---valve engines
high side will switch off the bank 1. Check carefully solenoid valve 1 connector installation for possible
33. SERVICE CODES
(solenoid valves 1, 5 and 3). ground connection of terminals, e.g. to valve covers.
2. On the injector harness valve cover connector, measure the resistance
between solenoid valve 1 contact pins and the engine ground for possible
short circuit to ground.
3. On the injector harness EC unit injection connector, measure the
resistance between solenoid valve contact pins and the engine ground for
possible short circuit to ground.
5. Measure the solenoid valve 1 coil resistance. Correct resistance is
0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
6. Measure the resistance between the solenoid valve 1 cable terminals
351
and the engine ground to see, if there is a short circuit to ground in the
solenoid valve.
2 ---valve engines
1. On the injector harness EC unit injector connector, measure the
resistance between solenoid valve 1 contact pins and the engine ground
for possible short circuit to ground.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010

0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
LS,
Model
solenoid valve.
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
89
Page
009131 11 000 INJECTOR DIAGNOSTIC: Injector 1 Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
EC unit monitoring system has detected current Maximum injection quantity is reduced to Start the engine.
level error at injector solenoid valve 1 on cylinder 50 % from rated power.
1 (6 ---cylinder and 4 ---cylinder engine). The A. If the service code is not active, reason might have been
probable cause for the problem is temporary NOTE Current level error will switch off temporary current peak at solenoid valve. This may happen due to
current peak at solenoid valve. the bank (solenoid valves 1, 5 and 3). temporary malfunction of injector. If the fault cannot be repeated within
the next 10 operating hours, there is no mechanical fault in the solenoid
valve.
33. SERVICE CODES
B. If the service code is active always when engine is running,

reason might be a defective solenoid valve or incorrect solenoid valve for
the engine type.
EC unit monitoring system has detected fast decay Maximum injection quantity is reduced to Start the engine. If the service code is active always when engine is
error at injector solenoid valve 1 on cylinder 1 50 % from rated power. running, reason might be a defective EC unit.
(6 ---cylinder and 4 ---cylinder engine). Fast decay
control is monitoring, that the solenoid valve is NOTE Fast decay error will switch off the
closed fast enough after each injection. Fast decay bank (solenoid valves 1, 5 and 3).
error means, that injector valve will be open longer
than intended.
352
(6 ---cylinder engine: on cylinder 5, 4 ---cylinder terminals and EC unit injector connector.
engine: on cylinder 2). Short circuit to power NOTE Short circuit between cables will 3. Check the solenoid valve 2 low side wiring for possible short circuit to
supply from solenoid valve low side will activate this switch off the bank (solenoid valves 6, 2 any line or terminal connected to power supply.
service code, too. and 4). 4. Measure the solenoid valve 2 coil resistance. Correct resistance is
0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
circuit in the wiring of injector solenoid valve 2 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the EC unit injector connector contact terminals and the EC unit
pins for possible oxidation.
LS,
(6 ---cylinder engine: on cylinder 5, 4 ---cylinder

Model
engine: on cylinder 2). 3. Check the solenoid valve 2 cable connector fastening. Correct
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
90
Page
circuit to ground at injector solenoid valve 2 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the EC unit injector connector contact terminals and the EC unit
(6 ---cylinder engine: on cylinder 5, 4 ---cylinder pins for possible oxidation.
engine: on cylinder 2). NOTE Short circuit to ground of solenoid 3. Check the solenoid valve 2 cable connector fastening. Correct
valve low side, will switch off a single tightening value for nuts is 1,5 Nm!
injector.
high side, will switch off the bank 1. Check carefully solenoid valve 2 connector installation for possible
33. SERVICE CODES
0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
353
solenoid valve.
2 ---valve engines
1.5.5008
19.2.2010

0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
LS,
Model
solenoid valve.
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
91
Page
level error at injector solenoid valve 2 50 % from rated power.
(6 ---cylinder engine: on cylinder 5, 4 ---cylinder A. If the service code is not active, reason might have been
engine: on cylinder 2). The probable cause for the NOTE Current level error will switch off temporary current peak at solenoid valve. This may happen due to
problem is temporary current peak at solenoid the bank (solenoid valves 6, 2 and 4). temporary malfunction of injector. If the fault cannot be repeated within
valve. the next 10 operating hours, there is no mechanical fault in the solenoid
valve.
33. SERVICE CODES

the engine type.
error at injector solenoid valve 2 (6 ---cylinder 50 % from rated power. running, reason might be a defective EC unit.
engine: on cylinder 5, 4 ---cylinder engine: on
cylinder 2). Fast decay control is monitoring, that NOTE Fast decay error will switch off the
the solenoid valve is closed fast enough after each bank (solenoid valves 6, 2 and 4).
injection. Fast decay error means, that injector valve
will be open longer than intended.
354
0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,

Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
92
Page
circuit to ground at injector solenoid valve 3 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the EC unit injector connector contact terminals and the EC unit
(6 ---cylinder engine: on cylinder 3, 4 ---cylinder pins for possible oxidation.
injector.
high side will switch off the bank 1. Check carefully solenoid valve 3 connector installation for possible
33. SERVICE CODES
0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
355
solenoid valve.
2 ---valve engines
1.5.5008
19.2.2010

0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
LS,
Model
solenoid valve.
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
93
Page
valve.
33. SERVICE CODES

the engine type.
error at injector solenoid valve 3 (6 ---cylinder 50 % from rated power. running, reason might be a defective EC unit.
356
0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,

Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
94
Page
009134 06 000 INJECTOR DIAGNOSTIC: Injector 4 Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check the EC injector connector locking. The connector metallic
circuit to ground at injector solenoid valve 4 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the EC injector connector contact terminals and the EC pins for
(6 ---cylinder engine: on cylinder 6, 4 ---cylinder possible oxidation.
injector. Short circuit to ground of
solenoid valve high side, will switch off 4 ---valve engines
the bank (solenoid valves 6, 2 and 4). 1. Check carefully solenoid valve 4 connector installation for possible
33. SERVICE CODES
ground connection of terminals, e.g. to valve covers.

3. On the injector harness EC injection connector, measure the resistance
between solenoid valve contact pins and the engine ground for possible
terminals and EC injector connector.
0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
357
solenoid valve.
2 ---valve engines
1. On the injector harness EC injector connector, measure the resistance
1.5.5008
19.2.2010

0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
LS,
Model
solenoid valve.
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
95
Page
valve.
33. SERVICE CODES

the engine type.
error at injector solenoid valve 4 (6 ---cylinder 50 % from rated power. running, reason might be a defective EC.
358
009135 03 000 INJECTOR DIAGNOSTIC: Injector 5 Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check the EC injector connector contact terminals and the EC pins for
EC unit monitoring system has detected short Maximum injection quantity is reduced to possible oxidation.
on cylinder 2. Short circuit to battery (+) from terminals and EC injector connector.
solenoid valve low side will activate this service NOTE Short circuit between cables will 3. Check the solenoid valve 5 low side wiring for possible short circuit to
code, too. switch off the bank (solenoid valves 1, 5 any line or terminal connected to power supply.
and 3). 4. Measure the solenoid valve 5 coil resistance. Correct resistance is
0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
1.5.5008
009135 05 000 INJECTOR DIAGNOSTIC: Injector 5 Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Check the EC injector connector locking. The connector metallic
19.2.2010
circuit in the wiring of injector solenoid valve 5 on 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the EC injector connector contact terminals and the EC pins for
possible oxidation.
LS,
cylinder 2.
Model

Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
96
Page
cylinder 2. pins for possible oxidation.
solenoid valve high side will switch off 4 ---valve engines
33. SERVICE CODES

0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
359
solenoid valve.
2 ---valve engines
1.5.5008
19.2.2010

0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
LS,
Model
solenoid valve.
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
97
Page
2. The probable cause for the problem is temporary A. If the service code is not active, reason might have been
current peak at solenoid valve. NOTE Current level error will switch off temporary current peak at solenoid valve. This may happen due to
the bank (solenoid valves 1, 5 and 3). temporary malfunction of injector. If the fault cannot be repeated within
valve.
33. SERVICE CODES

the engine type.
error at injector solenoid valve 5 on cylinder 2. 50 % from rated power. running, reason might be a defective EC unit.
Fast decay control is monitoring, that the solenoid
valve is closed fast enough after each injection. Fast NOTE Fast decay error will switch off the
decay error means, that injector valve will be open bank (solenoid valves 1, 5 and 3).
longer than intended.
360
on cylinder 4. Short circuit to power supply from terminals and EC unit injector connector.
solenoid valve low side will activate this service NOTE Short circuit between cables will 3. Check the solenoid valve 6 low side wiring for possible short circuit to
code, too. switch off the bank (solenoid valves 6, 2 any line or terminal connected to power supply.
and 4). 4. Measure the solenoid valve 6 coil resistance. Correct resistance is
0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
circuit in the wiring of injector solenoid valve 6 on 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the EC unit injector connector contact terminals and the EC unit
LS,

Model

Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
98
Page
solenoid valve high side, will switch off 4 ---valve engines
33. SERVICE CODES

0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
361
solenoid valve.
2 ---valve engines
1.5.5008
19.2.2010

0,21---0,25  at +20 ˚C.
LS,
Model
solenoid valve.
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
99
Page
4. The probable cause for the problem is temporary A. If the service code is not active, reason might have been
current peak at solenoid valve. NOTE Current level error will switch off temporary current peak at solenoid valve. This may happen due to
the bank (solenoid valves 6, 2 and 4). temporary malfunction of injector. If the fault cannot be repeated within
valve.
33. SERVICE CODES

the engine type.
error at injector solenoid valve 6 on cylinder 4. 50 % from rated power. running, reason might be a defective EC unit.
Fast decay control is monitoring, that the solenoid
valve is closed fast enough after each injection. Fast NOTE Fast decay error will switch off the
decay error means, that injector valve will be open bank (solenoid valves 6, 2 and 4).
longer than intended.
009140 03 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Hand throttle Idle speed: engine speed goes to low 1. Check the hand throttle position sensor operation (output voltage).
362
The measured voltage from the hand throttle idle rpm. through the whole mechanical travel.
position sensor is above the normal operating 2. Check the hand throttle position sensor wiring, connectors and contact
range. NOTE Engine operation will return back surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
to normal, when hand throttle position 3. Check the 5 V power supply from EC unit to the sensor.
sensor signal is in normal range.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
100
Page
009140 04 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Hand throttle Idle speed: engine speed goes to low 1. Check the hand throttle position sensor operation (output voltage)
The measured voltage from the hand throttle idle rpm. through the whole mechanical travel.
position sensor is below the normal operating 2. Check the hand throttle position sensor wiring, connectors and contact
range. NOTE Engine operation will return back surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
to normal, when hand throttle position 3. Check the 5 V power supply from EC unit to the sensor.
009141 03 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Rear gas pedal Idle speed: engine speed goes to low 1. Check the rear gas pedal position sensor operation (output voltage)
The measured voltage from the rear gas pedal idle rpm. through the whole mechanical travel.
position sensor is above the normal operating 2. Check the rear gas pedal position sensor wiring, connectors and
33. SERVICE CODES
range. NOTE Engine operation will return back contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
to normal, when rear gas pedal position 3. Check the 5 V power supply from EC unit to the sensor.
009141 04 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Rear gas pedal Idle speed: engine speed goes to low 1. Check the rear gas pedal position sensor operation (output voltage)
The measured voltage from the rear gas pedal idle rpm. through the whole mechanical travel.
position sensor is below the normal operating 2. Check the rear gas pedal position sensor wiring, connectors and
range. NOTE Engine operation will return back contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
to normal, when rear gas pedal position 3. Check the 5 V power supply from EC unit to the sensor.
009150 05 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Rail pressure Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Stop the engine. Check visually the engine high pressure pipes etc. for
Rail pressure. Leakage detected during overrun. Maximum injection quantity is reduced to possible leakage.
363
50 % from rated power. 2. Check the injectors.
NOTE Engine functions dependent on of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
NOTE Due to the very high injection
pressure (max. 1400 bar), during engine
1.5.5008
at high pressure side is a leakage.

19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
101
Page
EC unit monitoring system has detected leakage on Maximum injection quantity is reduced to possible leakage.
high pressure side of injection system by quantity 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the injectors.
balance. The set value of current for MPROP is 3. Check the rail pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces
higher than limit value. NOTE Engine functions dependent on of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
NOTE Due to the very high injection pressure (max. 5. Check the rail pressure sensor operation.
1400 bar), during engine running there is a serious NOTE Due to the very high injection
risk for injury, if at high pressure side is a leakage. pressure (max. 1400 bar), during engine
33. SERVICE CODES

009150 16 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Rail pressure Maximum rpm is 1500. A. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key
EC unit monitoring system has detected negative Maximum injection quantity is reduced to back on. Start the engine.If the service code is not active, reason
deviation on rail pressure. Measured rail pressure is 50 % from rated power. might have been
not decreasing according the setpoint value to A temporarily pressure peak (breakdown), during engine running.
MPROP. Typically it is indicating a leakage in the NOTE Engine functions dependent on Example abnormal load drop/fuel quantity drop during running.
MPROP or MPROP stick with open condition. rail pressure are not active.
B. If the service code is active always when engine is running
1. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring connector is in
locking position.
2. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring, connectors
364
and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation)
2,6--- 3,15  at +20 ˚C.
1.5.5008

19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
102
Page
009150 18 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Rail pressure Maximum rpm is 1500. A. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key
EC unit monitoring system has detected positive Maximum injection quantity is reduced to back on. Start the engine. If the service code is not active, reason
deviation on rail pressure. Measured rail pressure is 50 % from rated power. might have been
not increasing according the setpoint value to A temporarily pressure peak (breakdown), during engine running.
MPROP. Typically it is indicating a leakage in the NOTE Engine functions dependent on Example abnormal load drop/fuel quantity drop during running.
injector or somewhere else at high pressure side. rail pressure are not active.
B. If the service code is active always when engine is running
NOTE Due to the very high injection pressure (max. NOTE Due to the very high injection 1. Stop the engine. Check visually the engine high pressure pipes etc. for
1400 bar), during engine running there is a serious pressure (max. 1400 bar), during engine possible leakage.
33. SERVICE CODES
risk for injury, if at high pressure side is a leakage. running there is a serious risk for injury, if 2. Check the injectors.
at high pressure side is a leakage. 3. Check the rail pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces
EC unit monitoring system has detected leakage on Maximum injection quantity is reduced to possible leakage.
high pressure side of injection system during 50 % from rated power. 2. Check the injectors.
engine overrun. Fault is monitored only when 3. Check the rail pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact surfaces
vehicle is not consuming any fuel while overrun. NOTE Engine functions dependent on of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
NOTE Due to the very high injection pressure (max. 5. Check the rail pressure sensor operation.
365
1400 bar), during engine running there is a serious NOTE: Due to the very high injection
risk for injury, if at high pressure side is a leakage. pressure (max. 1400 bar), during engine
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
103
Page
009151 07 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Pressure relief valve Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Possible reason is defective PRV (pressure release valve).
If the rail pressure is above monitoring limit for a Maximum injection quantity is reduced to
certain time, EC unit monitoring system will start the 50 % from rated power.
kick ---off function to open the PRV. If this kick ---off
function was not successful, service code 009151 NOTE If the rail pressure is above
07 000 (PRV is sticking) will be activated. monitoring limit for a certain time, EC unit
monitoring system will start the kick ---off
function to open the PRV. If this kick ---off
function was not successful, service
33. SERVICE CODES
code 009151 07 000 (PRV is sticking) will

be activated.
009151 31 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Pressure relief valve Maximum rpm is 1500. A. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key
The pressure release valve (PRV) opens at a critical Maximum injection quantity is reduced to back on. Start the engine. If the service code is not active, reason
pressure (PRV opening pressure) and causes a 50 % from rated power. might have been
pressure drop in the rail. EC unit monitoring system A temporarily pressure peak (breakdown), during engine running.
has recognized an open pressure relief valve by NOTE Due to that PRV is open; Rail Example abnormal load drop/fuel quantity drop during running.
detection of pressure variation in the rail. The pressure will be stable 600 --- 700 bar
pressure relief valve (PRV) is a mechanical safety and overflow to fuel tank is HIGH! B. If the service code is active always when engine is running
valve, which guarantees that pressure does not rise 1. Stop the engine.
above specific value. If the PRV opens it will stay NOTE In case of loose rail pressure 2. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring connector is in
open as long as the engine is running. sensor or rail pressure sensor error, locking position.
366
service code 009151 31 000 (PRV 3. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring, connectors
recognised as open) is activated also. and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation)
Due to that there is no valid rail pressure 4. Measure the MPROP wiring.
information available; EC unit monitoring 5. Measure the power supply (12 V).
system will kick ---off the PRV open. 6. Measure the solenoid valve coil resistance. Correct resistance:
2,6--- 3,15  at +20 ˚C.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
104
Page
009152 31 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Fuel filter pressure 1. Check the level of the fuel in the tank.
The measured fuel filter pressure is detected to 2. Check the possible leakages of low pressure pipes.
fluctuate more than normal range. 3. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact
4. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor operation.
009153 31 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Fuel filter pressure NOTE Engine functions dependent on 1. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor wiring, connectors and contact
33. SERVICE CODES
The measured fuel filter pressure signal value has the fuel filter pressure are not active. surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation.)
large, quick and random variations indicating poor 2. Check the 5 V power supply to the sensor.
contact between the sensor and the EC unit. 3. Check the fuel filter pressure sensor operation.
009154 31 000 Fuel filter pressure, plausibility defect in running
engine
009155 31 000 Fuel filter pressure, plausibility defect in
stopped engine
009170 05 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Lift pump control 1. Check the lift pump wiring, connectors and contact surfaces of the
There is a open circuit connector pins (possible oxidation.)
2. Check the power supply to the lift pump.
367
3. Check the lift pump operation.
009170 06 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Lift pump control 1. Check the lift pump wiring, connectors and contact surfaces of the
There is a short circuit to ground connector pins (possible oxidation.)
2. Check the power supply to the lift pump.
3. Check the lift pump operation.
009171 05 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Grid heater control 1. Check the grid heater wiring, connectors and contact surfaces of the
1.5.5008
2. Check the relays of grid heater control.

19.2.2010
3. Check the power supply to the grid heater.

4. Check the grid heater operation.
LS,
009171 06 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Grid heater control 1. Check the grid heater wiring, connectors and contact surfaces of the
Model

2. Check the relays of grid heater control.
3. Check the power supply to the grid heater.
4. Check the grid heater operation.
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
105
Page
009172 03 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Start relay control 1. Check the start relay wiring, connectors and contact surfaces of the
There is a short circuit to battery voltage connector pins (possible oxidation.)
2. Check the power supply to the start relay.
3 Check the grid heater operation.
33. SERVICE CODES
Excess temperature connector pins (possible oxidation.)
There is a short circuit to battery voltage connector pins (possible oxidation.)
368
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
106
Page
009174 03 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Pump valve High pressure pump will start to provide 1. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring, connectors
EC unit monitoring system has detected short full fuel quantity and pressure for rail. and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
circuit to power supply on MPROP low side. NOTE Due to that there is no control 2. Measure the low side from wiring terminal to engine ground, to see if
pulse (PWM) for MPROP; high pressure there is a short circuit to power supply.
pump will start to provide full fuel 3. Measure the solenoid valve coil resistance. Correct resistance:
quantity and pressure for rail. 2,6 --- 3,15  at +20 ˚C.
NOTE Service code 009151 07 000,

(PRV recognised as open) will be
activated also, due to full fuel quantity
33. SERVICE CODES
and pressure at rail.

009174 05 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Pump valve High pressure pump will start to provide 1. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring connector is in
EC unit monitoring system has detected open full fuel quantity and pressure for rail. locking position.
circuit on MPROP low side. NOTE Due to that there is no control 2. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring, connectors
pulse (PWM) for MPROP; high pressure and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
pump will start to provide full fuel 3. Measure between the low side from wiring terminal to EC unit injector
quantity and pressure for rail. connector, to see if there is a fault in the cable.
NOTE Service code 009151 07 000, 2,6 --- 3,15  at +20 ˚C.
369
009174 06 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Pump valve High pressure pump will start to provide 1. Check from the high pressure pump, the MPROP wiring, connectors
EC unit monitoring system has detected short full fuel quantity and pressure for rail. and contact surfaces of the connector pins (possible oxidation).
circuit to ground on MPROP low side. NOTE Due to that there is no control 2. Measure the low side from wiring terminal to engine ground, to see if
pulse (PWM) for MPROP; high pressure there is a short circuit to ground (when the ignition key is off position there
pump will start to provide full fuel should not be connection to ground).
quantity and pressure for rail. 3. Measure the solenoid valve coil resistance. Correct resistance:
2,6 --- 3,15  at +20 ˚C.
1.5.5008
NOTE Service code 009151 07 000, 4. Measure from MPROP solenoid valve connector pins to engine ground,
19.2.2010
(PRV recognised as open) will be to see if there is a short circuit to ground in the solenoid valve.
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
107
Page
009174 31 000 EC unit FUNCTIONS: Pump valve High pressure pump will start to provide 1. This service code will be activated always, if service code 009174 03
EC unit monitoring system has detected excess full fuel quantity and pressure for rail. 000 (EC unit monitoring system has detected short circuit to power
temperature in power stage. When power supply supply on MPROP low side) has caused excess temperature for power
defect occurs repeatedly, the EC unit gives an early NOTE Due to that there is no control stage in EC unit.
warning of an over temperature condition in the pulse (PWM) for MPROP; high pressure 2. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
power stage. pump will start to provide full fuel Start the engine; if the service code is active always when engine is
quantity and pressure for rail. running, reason might be a defective EC unit.
NOTE Service code 009151 07 000,

33. SERVICE CODES

009230 31 000 ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Download the correct software for the engine type or change the
The engine specification number in the EC unit is Maximum injection quantity is reduced to correct EC unit for the engine type.
incorrect for this engine type. Service code can be fixed value 50 mg/stroke.
activated if the EC unit with incorrect software has
been mounted to the engine (example EC unit from
200 hp tractor to 150 hp tractor) or incorrect
software (wrong power level) has been
downloaded.
370
009231 31 000 ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Change correct EC unit for the engine.
Engine serial number in the EC unit does not match Maximum injection quantity is reduced to
for the engine. fixed value 50 mg/stroke.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
108
Page
009233 31 000 ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module Maximum rpm is 1500. A. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key
EC unit monitoring system cannot detect ID Maximum injection quantity is reduced to back on. If the service code is active always when ignition is
module. fixed value 50 mg/stroke. switched on and engine is not running
1. Check the wiring from EC unit to ID module.
2. Check contacts through wiring from the EC unit to the ID module for
bad contact at some connector.
3. Check the supply voltage to ID module. If the supply voltage from EC
unit is low, check the wiring from EC unit to ID module.
4. If the wirings are OK, cause for the low voltage might be a defective EC
33. SERVICE CODES
unit.
B. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key
371
back on. If the service code is active always when ignition is
switched on and engine is not running
1. Check the CAN Hi wiring between EC unit and ID module connector.
2. Check the CAN Lo wiring between EC unit and ID module connector.
009234 31 000 ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Download latest software in the EC unit.
EC unit monitoring system has detected conflict Maximum injection quantity is reduced to
between EC unit and ID module versions. ID fixed value 50 mg/stroke.
module contains newer version than current EC
1.5.5008
unit. This service code can activate, if example EC

19.2.2010
unit has been taken from vehicle which engine

specification number is equal, but contains older
EC unit software.
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
109
Page
009235 03 000 ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module A. If the service code is active ONLY when engine is running
EC unit monitoring system has detected ID module Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
supply voltage too high (>32 V), more than 1000 Start the engine. If the service code is active when the engine is running.
ms. 1. Check the generator, if charging voltage is correct.
B. If the service code is active when engine is NOT running

Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on. If
the service code is active always when ignition is switched on and engine
is not running.
33. SERVICE CODES
1. Check supply voltage to the ID module.

2. If the supply to the ID module is higher than 36 V, cause for the high
voltage can be a defective EC unit.
372
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
110
Page
009235 04 000 ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module 1. The probably cause of the problem is the voltage drop down, during
EC unit monitoring system has detected ID module cranking. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key
supply voltage too low (<8 V), more than 1000 ms. back on.
If the service code is active always when ignition is switched on and
engine is not running
3. Check contacts through wiring from the EC unit to the ID module for
bad contact at some connector.
4. Check the supply voltage to ID module. If the supply voltage from EC
33. SERVICE CODES
unit is low, check the wiring from EC unit to ID module.

5. If the wirings are OK, cause for the low voltage might be a defective EC
unit.
373
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
111
Page
009235 16 000 ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module 1. Check the EC unit software version. If it is v 1,1 update the software
EC unit monitoring system has detected ID module with newest software (at least with v 1,2).
internal temperature continuously over:
The ID module is mounted at the location, which

temperature is following engine coolant
temperature. In very high temperature conditions
33. SERVICE CODES
engine coolant temperature may continuously

exceed over 95 ˚C/110 ˚C, however ID module
components are well protected against heat (resist
for continuous 125 ˚C).
009235 31 000 ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module Maximum rpm is 1500. 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
EC unit monitoring system has detected problem Maximum injection quantity is reduced to If the service code comes again, the ID module needs to be replaced.
on ID module memory. fixed value 50 mg/stroke.
009236 31 000 ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
EC unit monitoring system has detected problem If the service code comes again, the ID module needs to be replaced.
on ID module additional memory.
009237 31 000 ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
374
EC unit monitoring system has detected problem If the service code comes again, the ID module needs to be replaced.
on ID module software. Upon system startup the
reason of the latest reset is determined. If the
software caused the reset, then this service code is
activated.
009238 31 000 ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module 1. Check contacts through wiring from the EC unit to the ID module for
EC unit monitoring system has detected problem bad contact at some connector.
on ID module power supply. During system running 2. If the connectors are OK and service code is continuously active,
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
state the reason of the latest reset is determined. If reason might be a defective ID module.
the quick power cut off caused the reset, then this
service code is activated.
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
112
Page
EC unit monitoring system has detected missing or Maximum injection quantity is reduced to If the service code comes again, the ID module needs to be replaced.
invalid engine specification in the ID module. fixed value 50 mg/stroke.
EC unit monitoring system has detected missing or Maximum injection quantity is reduced to If the service code comes again, the ID module needs to be replaced.
invalid engine serial number in the ID module. fixed value 50 mg/stroke.
009241 31 000 ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module 1. ID module by pass functionality has been used to deactivate limitations
EC unit system has set EC unit into an ID module for a defined time.
33. SERVICE CODES
by pass state, where the limits are not in effect.

009242 31 000 ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module 1. ID module by pass functionality has been used to deactivate limitations
EC unit system has detected, that generated ID for a defined time.
module by pass time has expired. This service code
will be activated if service code 009233 31 000 (ID NOTE Absolute maximum value for by pass time is 200h!
module not present) is active and set by pass time
is 0h or previous set hours are used.
009243 31 000 ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module 1. If EC unit has run without ID module over 200h, by pass functionality
EC unit system has detected, that maximum ID with this EC unit cannot be used anymore.
module by pass time has been used. This service
code will be activated only if service code 002933
375
31 000 (ID module not present) is active and
maximum ID module by pass time expired.
NOTE Maximum hours for ID module by pass time

at EC unit are 200h!
009244 31 000 ID MODULE DIAGNOSTIC: ID module
ID module recovery
009300 31 000 Maximum power mismatch
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
009301 31 000 Maximum vehicle speed mismatch

009302 31 000 Control system identification mismatch
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
113
Page
009303 31 000 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CODES Cruise control will be switched off. 1.Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the ignition key again
If CAN signal is incorrect or CAN message is on on.
offline >250 ms, EC unit will switch cruise control If the service code is still active
off. This service code is not used if CAN message 2. Check CAN bus by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
for cruise control is not received at all.
009304 31 000 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CODES Valtra parameter, 1800 rpm. 1.Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the ignition key again
EC unit can not detect tractor speed via CAN bus on.
(timeout for the message 5000 ms). Service code If the service code is still active
will be activated example: if CAN signal or velocity
33. SERVICE CODES
2. Check/ do the calibration of the speed sensors.

source selection is incorrect. This service code can 3. Check CAN bus between EC unit and Transmission control.
not detect missing wired inductive sensor signal unit by doing the basic CAN bus measurement.
(tractors without CAN bus = without HiTech 4. Check EC unit configurations about Cruise control.
transmission).
009305 31 000 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CODES 1. Download correct software in the tractor.
Service code will be activated if wrong software has 2. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn the ignition key
been downloaded to the EC unit. again on. If the service code comes again, reason might be a defective
EC unit.
376
009306 31 000 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CODES 1. Check the wirings of the switches to EC unit.
EC unit has detected invalid PTO cruise request. 2. Check the PTO switches operation.
1.5.5008
For some reason there are up & down request

19.2.2010
demand active simultaneously.

009310 31 000 External fault 1 via digital input
LS,
Model
009311 31 000 External fault 2 via digital input

Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
114
Page
011011 05 035 Output/lifting Check if there is a open circuit in solenoid ---wiring (pin 37 to 35).
Lift---valve not connected. Open circuit in solenoid
wiring. Valve ---solenoid short to ground.
011012 05 035 Output/lowering Check if there is a open circuit in solenoid ---wiring (pin 19 to 35).
Lower ---valve not connected. Open circuit in
solenoid wiring. Valve ---solenoid short to ground.
011013 31 035 Solenoid short circuit Check solenoid for short circuit ( 35 to 37, or 35 to 19).
Solenoid short circuit to power supply. --- short from pin 37 or pin 19 to power supply.
33. SERVICE CODES
--- short from pin 35 to power supply.

011014 31 035 Solenoid fault Check if there is a short circuit in pin 35 to ground.
No current in pin 35, although solenoid is activated.
Possible poor contacts in wires to solenoid (pins 19,
37 and 35). Solenoid damaged.
011015 31 035 Push button in mudguard Check if there is a short circuit in pin 9 to ground. Check the usage of
Signals from push buttons not OK or push button push buttons if buttons are pushed during “Ignition On”.
malfunction.
011016 04 035 Power supply Check if there is a short circuit in power supply to ground.
011024 03 035 Transport height selector Check if there is a open circuit or potentiometer not connected.
377
Signal from selector faulty. Poor contacts or wire
loose.
011024 04 035 Transport height selector
Open circuit or sensor not connected or short to
ground.
011026 03 035 External sensor Check if there is a short circuit to power supply.
Short circuit to power supply.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
011031 00 035 RH side draft sensor Overload at draftpin (draftsignal > 8,0 V).
Overload at draftpin (draftsignal > 8,0 V).
011031 01 035 RH side draft sensor Overload at draftpin (draftsignal < 2,0 V).
LS,
Overload at draftpin (draftsignal < 2,0 V).

Model
011031 03 035 RH side draft sensor Check if there is a short circuit to power supply.
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
115
Page
011031 04 035 RH side draft sensor Check if there is a open circuit or sensor not connected or short circuit to
Open circuit or sensor not connected or short to ground.
ground.
011032 00 035 LH side draft sensor Overload at draftpin (draftsignal > 8,0 V).
Overload at draftpin (draftsignal > 8,0 V).
011032 01 035 LH side draft sensor Overload at draftpin (draftsignal < 2,0 V).
Overload at draftpin (draftsignal < 2,0 V).
011032 03 035 LH side draft sensor Short to 10 V.
33. SERVICE CODES

011032 04 035 LH side draft sensor Open circuit or sensor not connected or short to ground.
ground.
011034 03 035 Lowering speed selector Check if there is a open circuit or potentiometer not connected.
Open circuit or potentiometer not connected.
011036 03 035 Position control / draft control selector Check if there is a open circuit or potentiometer not connected.
Open circuit or potentiometer not connected.
011036 04 035 Position control / draft control selector
378
ground.
011037 07 035 Control valve Check the valve.
Hitch fails to lift despite active LIFT current at pin 37.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
116
Page
011038 03 035 Pressure sensor A. With pressure sensor (not Valtra equipment)
Short circuit to power supply. 1. Check if there is a short circuit to power supply
--- there are maximum of four (4) positions on EHRD (on EHRB only two)
when rotating the selector (if there is more check the washers with lugs
that it is in correct position)
2. Check if there is a short circuit to power supply
33. SERVICE CODES
4. Check if there is a EHR control unit failure on EHRD by switching the

slip on from Drive Balance Control / Slip Control switch (position 4)
011038 04 035 Pressure sensor A. With pressure sensor (not Valtra equipment)
Open circuit or sensor not connected or short to 1. Check if there is a open circuit or sensor not connected or short circuit
ground. to ground
--- there are maximum of four (4) positions on EHRD (on EHRB only two)
when rotating the selector (if there is more check the washers with lugs
379
that it is in correct position)
2. Check if there is a open circuit or shor circuit to ground
4. Check if there is a EHR control unit failure on EHRD by switching the
slip on from Drive Balance Control / Slip Control switch (position 4)
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
117
Page
010257 00 003 Abnormal software reboot Power shuttle goes to neutral and cruise Software error. Vontact Valtra service for detailed information
010257 01 003 control memory is erased. Check that TC1 software version is Direct: 2.1.19.11, Versu: 1.1.19.11
. (VMT V6.8.0.0) or newer.
.
.
010257 31 003
010258 00 003
010258 01 003
33. SERVICE CODES
.
.
.
010258 31 003
.
.
.
012500 00 003
012500 01 003
.
.
380
.
012500 31 003
160512 03 129 Voltage output too high: Power supply 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 Short circuit. Power supply too high (over 15 V). 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131
133 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F 3. Measure battery voltage and generator output.
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
135 132 = AUX 4

136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
118
Page
160512 04 129 Voltage supply too low: Power supply 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 Short circuit to ground. Power supply too low 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131 (below 11 V).
134 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F
135 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
136 132 = AUX 4
137 133 = AUX 5
33. SERVICE CODES
134 = AUX 6
160768 12 129 Valve control head software failure: 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 Error in the software identification in the valve 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131 control head
132 Fault in the component or in the control head. If the service code is active the valve control head should be replaced.
133
134 129 = AUX 1 135 = AUX 1F
135 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F
136 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
137 132 = AUX 4
133 = AUX 5
134 = AUX 6
381
161280 12 129 Valve control head internal error: Calibration 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 memory 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
135 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
136 132 = AUX 4
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
137 133 = AUX 5

134 = AUX 6
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
119
Page
298964 02 129 Valve control head internal error: Timer values 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 for cl control out of range. 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
33. SERVICE CODES
298968 11 129 Valve control head internal error 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 Calculation: Interpolation Check. 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
298970 02 129 Valve control head internal error: Illegal 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 combination of inverted ports and float 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
382
131 properties
132 Function failure in valve control head. If the service code is active
133 3. Check connectors to valve control head.
135 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F
136 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
137 132 = AUX 4
133 = AUX 5
134 = AUX 6
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
120
Page
298971 02 129 Valve control head internal error: Illegal Valve 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 State and illegal Port Flow Command 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131 Function failure in valve control head.
135 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
136 132 = AUX 4
137 133 = AUX 5
33. SERVICE CODES
134 = AUX 6
298972 02 129 Valve control head internal error: Illegal Valve 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 State 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
135 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
136 132 = AUX 4
137 133 = AUX 5
134 = AUX 6
383
298973 02 129 Valve control head internal error: Port Flow 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 Command above 100% 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
135 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
136 132 = AUX 4
137 133 = AUX 5
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
134 = AUX 6
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
121
Page
130 combination of Port Flow Command and Float 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131 state
135 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F
136 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
137 132 = AUX 4
33. SERVICE CODES
133 = AUX 5
134 = AUX 6
130 combination of Port Flow Command and 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131 Blocked state
135 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F
136 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
137 132 = AUX 4
133 = AUX 5
384
134 = AUX 6
298976 02 129 Valve control head internal error: Invert port 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 Malfunction in valve control head. Warning only! 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131
135 132 = AUX 4
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
136 133 = AUX 5

137 134 = AUX 6
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
122
Page
298977 02 129 Valve control head internal error: Shape 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
131
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
33. SERVICE CODES
298978 02 129 Valve control head internal error: Slope 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
131
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
298979 02 129 Valve control head internal error: Dead Band 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 Compensation 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
385
131 Malfunction in valve control head. Warning only!
135 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
136 132 = AUX 4
137 133 = AUX 5
134 = AUX 6
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
123
Page
298980 02 129 Valve control head internal error: Float threshold 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
131
133 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F 3. Check connectors to valve control head controller.
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
33. SERVICE CODES
298981 02 129 Valve control head internal error: Ramps 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
131
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
298982 02 129 Valve control head internal error: Scaling 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
386
131
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
124
Page
298983 02 129 Valve control head internal error: Command out 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 of range 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131 Probably some failure inside valve control head.
133 129 = AUX 1 135 = AUX 1F 3. Check connectors to valve control head controller.
135 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
136 132 = AUX 4
137 133 = AUX 5
33. SERVICE CODES
134 = AUX 6
298984 02 129 Illegal CAN address in the valve control head 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 Probably some failure inside valve control head. 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
298985 19 129 CAN bus off between valve control head --- TT 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
387
130 Timeout. 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131
133 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F 3. Measure CAN voltage and resistance (measure both CAN ---lo and
134 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F CAN ---hi).
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
125
Page
298986 07 129 Valve control head internal error 1. Main spool can not reach neutral. Make sure there is no dirt between
130 Failure in the mechanical system. the pin and the spool.
131 2. Turn the ignition key on.
132 129 = AUX 1 135 = AUX 1F 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
133 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F
134 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F If the service code is active the valve control head should be replaced.
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
33. SERVICE CODES
298987 07 129 Valve control head internal error 1. Main spool can not reach neutral. Make sure there is no dirt between
133 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
130 Failure in the mechanical system. 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
388
131
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
126
Page
298989 07 129 Valve control head failure 1. Main spool can not reach neutral. Make sure there is no dirt between
133 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
33. SERVICE CODES
130 Mechanical system not responding or out of 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131 adjustment.
135 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
136 132 = AUX 4
137 133 = AUX 5
134 = AUX 6
298991 07 129 Valve control head failure 1. Main spool can not reach neutral. Make sure there is no dirt between
389
133 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
127
Page
298992 12 129 Valve control head self ---test when ignition key 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 turned to ON position 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131 Fault in the component or in the control head. Valve
132 control head did not start up correctly. If the service code is active
133 3. Measure CAN voltage and resistance (measure both CAN ---lo and
134 129 = AUX 1 135 = AUX 1F CAN ---hi).
135 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F
136 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
137 132 = AUX 4
33. SERVICE CODES
133 = AUX 5
134 = AUX 6
130 Fault in the component or in the control head. Valve 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131 control head did not start up correctly.
135 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
136 132 = AUX 4
137 133 = AUX 5
134 = AUX 6
390
298994 12 129 Valve control head wire broken or short circuited 1. Turn the ignition key off, wait 30 seconds and turn ignition key back on.
130 Fault in the component or in the control head. 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131
132 The wire for measuring the estimated flow inside If the service code is active the valve control head should be replaced.
133 valve control head is broken or short circuited.
134
135 129 = AUX 1 135 = AUX 1F
136 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
137 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F

132 = AUX 4
133 = AUX 5
LS,
134 = AUX 6
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
128
Page
130 EEPROM error. 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
33. SERVICE CODES
130 Internal error in the valve control head. 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
130 Out of calibration. 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
391
131
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
129
Page
131
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
33. SERVICE CODES
131
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
392
131
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
130
Page
130 Failure in the valve control head. 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
33. SERVICE CODES
130 Calculation error. 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
131
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
393
131
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
LS,
Model
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
131
Page
131
133 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F
134 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
33. SERVICE CODES
299005 07 129 Valve control head error 1. Make sure that valve control head is mounted correctly and there is no
130 Failure in the mechanical system. dirt between the pin and the spool.
131
132 129 = AUX 1 135 = AUX 1F
133 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F
134 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
130 Internal error in the valve control head. 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.
394
131
133 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F
134 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F
135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
1.5.5008
19.2.2010
130 Fault in the valve control head. 2. Activate auxiliary hydraulics.

131
LS,
133 130 = AUX 2 136 = AUX 2F

Model
134 131 = AUX 3 137 = AUX 3F

135 132 = AUX 4
136 133 = AUX 5
137 134 = AUX 6
Versu, Direct
Code
331.4
132
Page
41. Programming
40. Programming procedure
42. Settings and

calibrations
Setting mode FIII
396
41. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
19.2.2010 All 410 1
Contents
41 Programming procedure:
411.1 ... Programming and settings procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
411.2 ... Programming and settings procedure, LS models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
411.3 ... Programming and settings procedure, Versu models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
411.4 ... Programming and settings procedure, Direct models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
411.5 ... Recognizing of the transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
411.6 . . . Tyre size parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
397
Model Code Page
22.1.2006
1.5.2008 All 410 2
398
41. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE All except
1.5.2008 LS models 411.1 1
Programming and settings procedure (quick instruction)
ALL OPERATIONS MUST BE PERFORMED IN THE FOLLOWING ORDER.

OTHERWISE SOME CALIBRATIONS MAY FAIL.
A B C
WHEN YOU PROGRAM THE WHEN YOU FIT A NEW WHEN YOU FIT A READY---
TRACTOR TC1 (A1A), TC2 (A1C) PROGRAMMED NEW TC1 (A1A)
1.1 (units not changed) 1.1 OR 1.1 OR EC (A1M) CONTROL UNIT.
EC (A1M) CONTROL UNIT (possible for tractors that have
one control unit only, TC1 or EC)
T160CR, T180, T180CR, T190,
T190CR ONLY:
Before programming make the FIT THE UNIT FIT THE UNIT
1.2 calibrations C70 and C80 to test 1.2 ON THE TRACTOR 1.2 ON THE TRACTOR
that the steering sensor and
speed sensors work properly
PROGRAMME TRACTOR WITH VALTRA MultiTool.

1. Start the application “C,M,N,T / EEM / 6250 --- 6350 R41108---“. Choose
tractor model. Wait, the MultiTool makes a connection to the tractor.
--- If it does not connect, ensure that TC1 control unit has CAN---ID no. 3
(Module Identification), if needed download CAN---ID no. 3 to TC1 control
unit.
--- If there appears a notice e.g. that module no. 3 or 4 is missing but module
1.3 no. 254 is found, let the program change CAN ---ID to the control unit
(CAN ---ID numbers for the control units are: TC1 (A1A) = 3, TC2 (A1C) =
4)
2. DOWNLOAD SOFTWARE
3. DOWNLOAD PARAMETERS
After downloading the software, also the parameters must be always
downloaded, except models without HiTech transmission. When needed,
the parameters can be changed separately (if the tractor has already the
correct software).
ONLY EEM2 MODELS (Bosch VP30):

TRACTOR STANDING STILL, ENGINE STOPPED, PARKING BRAKE ON,
IGNITION SWITCH AT POSITION “1”
2
MultiTool application “EEM2VP basic MAKE ENGINE SETTINGS ACCORDING TO See code
settings” THE TABLE “ EEM2 ENGINE SETTINGS”. 421.1
ONLY EEM3 MODELS (Common Rail):

2
MultiTool application “EEM2VP/EEM3CR MAKE ENGINE SETTINGS ACCORDING TO See code
testing+adjustments” THE TABLE “EEM3 ENGINE SETTINGS”. 421.2
Go to next page
399
1.5.2008 LS models 411.1 2
Continues
ONLY EEM2 MODELS (Bosch VP30):
MultiTool application “MAX DRIVING SPEED” SET THE MAXIMUM DRIVING SPEED ALLOWED
“Basic settings” FOR THE TRACTOR IN CASE (33, 43 OR 53 KM/H).
NOTE THAT THE MAXIMUM DRIVING SPEED

MUST CONFORM AT ISSUED COUNTRY
AUTHORITIES AND LAWS.
3
“TYRE INDEX” SET THE TYRE INDEX TO CONFORM TO THE
CURRENT TYRE SIZE AND THE TRANSMISSION
TYPE OF THE TRACTOR IN CASE.
NOTE
THESE SETTINGS AFFECT TO FUNCTIONS BY THE SAME WAY AS THE INDEXES NO. 21 AND 22 IN THE
SETTING MODE FIII. INDEXES 21 AND 22 CAN BE SET ONLY ONCE WHEREAS BY MULTITOOL THE
SETTINGS CAN BE MADE AS MANY TIMES AS NEEDED.
NOTE If it is not possible to enter to the setting mode FIII:

--- do not press the brake pedal
--- check the fuse F27
4 --- turn the seat to forward direction
SETTING CALIBRATION
MODE FIII C20 CALIBRATE FRONT CLUTCH PEDAL
CALIBRATE REAR CLUTCH PEDAL (Twin Trac system)
(TURN THE SEAT BACKWARDS)
SETTING SETTING See code

SET TYRE PARAMETER
MODE FIII 20 411.5
SETTING
SET PTO RATIO 1 (lever forwards)
5 30
SET PTO RATIO 2 (lever rearward)
31
SETTING
100 SET OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE UNIT (1= ˚C, 2= ˚F)
110 SET DRIVING SPEED UNIT (1= km/h, 2= miles/h)
SETTING NOTE THESE SETTINGS AND CALIBRATIONS ONLY

MODE FIII IN T160CR, T180, T180CR, T190 AND T190CR MODELS
SETTING STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INSTALLED

125 SET 1 = Installed
6
CALIBRATION
C70 CALIBRATE STEERING SENSOR (front axle position sensor)
C80 CALIBRATE SPEED SENSORS
WARM UP THE TRACTOR BY DRIVING

(transmission oil temperature +30˚...60˚C)
(Temperature can be seen in the test mode FII, module A, item 12)
SETTING CALIBRATION CALIBRATE FRONT GAS PEDAL

7 MODE FIII C50 (this is done for the DPS functions)
Go to next page
400
1.5.2008 LS models 411.1 3
Continues
SETTING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATIONS

MODE FIII
C90 CALIBRATE THE SHUTTLE CLUTCH F (forward)
C100 CALIBRATE THE SHUTTLE CLUTCH R (rearward)
8 C110 CALIBRATE THE DPS CLUTCH C1
C120 CALIBRATE THE DPS CLUTCH C2
NOTE DPS CLUTCH C3 HAS NOT AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
9 TURN THE IGNITION SWITCH OFF TO ESCAPE FROM THE SETTING MODE
TEST THE SHUTTLE CLUTCH FUNCTION

10 IF NEEDED, ADJUST THE SHUTTLE CLUTCH WITH SETTINGS
50, 52 (F) AND 51, 53 (R) IN THE SETTING MODE FIII
TEST THE DPS CLUTCH FUNCTION

11 IF NEEDED, ADJUST THE DPS CLUTCH WITH SETTINGS
60, 63 (C1), 61, 64 (C2) AND 62, 65 (C3) IN THE SETTING MODE FIII
NOTE THIS CALIBRATION ONLY IN MODELS THAT HAVE SIGMA POWER PROPERTY
CALIBRATE THE SIGMA POWER SYSTEM

NOTE Calibration must be done during 60 seconds after switching on the ignition.
Calibration instruction:
12
1. Turn the ignition off
2. Engage the parking brake
3. Disengage the PTO (the lever in middle position and the switch in off position)
4. Start the engine and adjust the engine revs about 1800 r/min
5. Let the engine run about 1800 r/min for minimum 30 seconds. The calibration
results are saved automatically in a memory.
6. Check the function of Sigma Power

--- measure the engagement torque by dynometer or test it with suitable
implement attached on PTO
--- the Sigma lamp must illuminate when torque is high enough
SERVICE
13 MODE FI
CLEAR THE SERVICE CODES FROM SERVICE MODE FI
14 TEST RUN THE TRACTOR
CHECK IF ANY SERVICE CODES HAVE APPEARED DURING THE TEST

15 RUN. IF NEEDED, REPAIR THE FAULTS AND BEGIN FROM POINT 13
AGAIN
401
1.5.2008 LS models 411.1 4
402
19.2.2010 LS models 411.2 5
Programming and settings procedure (quick instruction)

OTHERWISE SOME CALIBRATIONS MAY FAIL.
A B
WHEN YOU PROGRAM THE WHEN YOU FIT A NEW
TRACTOR TC1 (A1A), TC2 (A1C), EC (A1M),
1.1 (units not changed) 1.1 TT(P2) or UC1 (A3A) CONTROL UNIT
Before programming make the calibrati-

ons C70 (Only TLS models with steering
angle sensor) and C80 (all LS models) to FIT THE UNIT
1.2 test that the steering angle sensor and 1.2 ON THE TRACTOR
speed sensors work properly
PROGRAMME TRACTOR WITH VALTRA MultiTool.

1. Start the application “C,M,N,T / EEM / 6250 --- 6350 R41108---“. Choose tractor model. Wait, the MultiTool
makes a connection to the tractor.
--- If it does not connect, ensure that TC1 control unit has CAN---ID no. 3 (Module Identification), if needed
download CAN---ID no. 3 to TC1 control unit.
--- If there appears a notice e.g. that module no. 3 or 4 is missing but module no. 254 is found, let the program
change CAN ---ID to the control unit (CAN ---ID numbers for the control units are: TC1 (A1A) = 3, TC2 (A1C) = 4,
1.3 EC (A1M) = 0, TT (P2) = 40, UC1 (A3A) = 5 )
2. DOWNLOAD SOFTWARE
3. DOWNLOAD PARAMETERS
After downloading the software, also the parameters must be always downloaded, except models without
HiTech transmission. When needed, the parameters can be changed separately (if the tractor has already the
correct software).
Tractor terminal settings:

Go to the Service and Calibration mode from Tractor terminal main menu
by pressing OK button three times and once ESC button
2
Press Right Press Right Make settings Exit from the service menu
arrow button arrow button by switching power off
EEM3 ENGINE SETTINGS (Common Rail):

3
MultiTool application “EEM2VP/EEM3CR MAKE ENGINE SETTINGS ACCORDING TO See code
testing+adjustments” THE TABLE “EEM3 ENGINE SETTINGS”. 421.2
Go to next page
403
19.2.2010 LS models 411.2 6
Continues
NOTE If it is not possible to enter to the setting mode FIII:

--- do not press the brake pedal
--- check the fuse F27
--- turn the seat to forward direction
4
SETTING CALIBRATION
MODE FIII C20 CALIBRATE FRONT CLUTCH PEDAL
CALIBRATE REAR CLUTCH PEDAL (Twin Trac system)
(TURN THE SEAT BACKWARDS)
SETTING SETTING See code

MODE FIII 20 SET TYRE PARAMETER 411.5
SETTING
30 SET PTO RATIO 1 (lever forwards)
5 31 SET PTO RATIO 2 (lever rearward)
SETTING
100 SET OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE UNIT (1= ˚C, 2= ˚F)
110 SET DRIVING SPEED UNIT (1= km/h, 2= miles/h)
SETTING SETTING STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

MODE FIII 125
SET 1 = Installed
SET 0 = Tractor has Auto---Guide Readiness or full

6 Auto---Guide system
SET 0 = Not installed
CALIBRATION NOTE SETTING INDEX 125 = 1

C70 CALIBRATE STEERING SENSOR (front axle position sensor)
CALIBRATION CALIBRATE SPEED SENSORS

C80
WARM UP THE TRACTOR BY DRIVING

(transmission oil temperature +30˚...60˚C)
(Temperature can be seen in the test mode FII, module A, item 12)
SETTING CALIBRATION CALIBRATE SEMI ---AUTOMATIC RANGE GEAR

7 MODE FIII C40
8 SETTING CALIBRATION CALIBRATE FRONT GAS PEDAL

MODE FIII C50 (this is done for the DPS functions)
SETTING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATIONS

MODE FIII
C90 CALIBRATE THE SHUTTLE CLUTCH F (forward)
C100 CALIBRATE THE SHUTTLE CLUTCH R (rearward)
9 C110 CALIBRATE THE DPS CLUTCH C1
C120 CALIBRATE THE DPS CLUTCH C2
NOTE DPS CLUTCH C3 HAS NOT AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
Go to next page
404
19.2.2010 LS models 411.2 7
Continues
10 TURN THE IGNITION SWITCH OFF TO ESCAPE FROM THE SETTING MODE
TEST THE SHUTTLE CLUTCH FUNCTION

11 IF NEEDED, ADJUST THE SHUTTLE CLUTCH WITH SETTINGS
50, 52 (F) AND 51, 53 (R) IN THE SETTING MODE FIII
TEST THE DPS CLUTCH FUNCTION

12 IF NEEDED, ADJUST THE DPS CLUTCH WITH SETTINGS
60, 63 (C1), 61, 64 (C2) AND 62, 65 (C3) IN THE SETTING MODE FIII
NOTE THIS CALIBRATION ONLY IN T191LS MODEL
CALIBRATE THE SIGMA POWER SYSTEM

NOTE Calibration must be done during 60 seconds after switching on the ignition.
Calibration instruction:
13
1. Turn the ignition off
2. Engage the parking brake
3. Disengage the PTO (the lever in middle position and the switch in off position)
4. Start the engine and adjust the engine revs about 1800 r/min
5. Let the engine run about 1800 r/min for minimum 30 seconds. The calibration
results are saved automatically in a memory.
6. Check the function of Sigma Power

--- measure the engagement torque by dynometer or test it with suitable
implement attached on PTO
--- the Sigma lamp must illuminate when torque is high enough
14 TEST RUN THE TRACTOR
CHECK IF ANY SERVICE CODES HAVE APPEARED DURING THE TEST RUN.
15 IF NEEDED, REPAIR THE FAULTS AND TEST RUN THE TRACTOR AGAIN
405
19.2.2010 LS models 411.2 8
406
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 411.3 9
Programming and settings procedure, Versu

OTHERWISE SOME CALIBRATIONS MAY FAIL OR ADJUSTING THE TRACTOR MAY BE UNNECESSARILY
COMPLICATED.
A1 When you program the B1 When you fit a new control unit: C1 When you fit a new engine
tractor TC1 (A1A), TC2 (A2A), UC1 control unit: EC (A1M)
(units not changed) (A3A), TT (P2) or LCD (P6)
2
WRITE DOWN THE POWER TRANSMISSION INDEXES
MultiTool application: Transmission => Versu/Direct adjustment+calibrations => Indexes
=> Index adjustment
1. Start the MultiTool application. Under Indexes, select Index adjustment.
2. Write down the values of the indexes number 1, 3, 30, 440, 441, 451 and 453. You may need
the values later.
3 COPY THE POWER TRANSMISSION INDEXES ONTO A MEMORY CARD (using MultiTool)
=> Save indexes to memory card
1. Start the MultiTool application. Under Indexes, select Save indexes to memory card.
2. Save the indexes. (Make sure that the tractor number is displayed correctly on the MultiTool
display.)
4 B4 Fit a new control unit to C4 Fit the control unit to the

the tractor. tractor.
5 PROGRAM THE TRACTOR

MultiTool application: Software => C,M,N,T...
1. Start the MultiTool application. Select the tractor model and wait while MultiTool establishes a
connection with the tractor.
--- If Multitool detects that one of the control units is missing (and a replacement control unit has
been fitted instead), a new window is displayed. In this window you can correct the CAN ---ID
of the replacement control unit.
--- The CAN ---ID numbers of the replacement control unit are the following: TC1 (A1A) = 003,
TC2 (A2A) = 004, UC1 (A3A) = 005, TT (P2) = 040, LCD (P6) = 059.
2 Load the software.
3. Load the parameters.
--- Once the software has been loaded, the parameters must ALWAYS be loaded as well.
Go to next page
407
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 411.3 10
Continued
6 PROGRAM THE ENGINE

MultiTool application: Software => EEM3CR engine (Common Rail)
1. Start the MultiTool application. Run the search function.
--- When the ID module of the engine is OK, MultiTool is able to suggest the appropriate engine
programme. Select this programme.
--- If the engine control unit cannot retrieve the required information from the ID module, MultiTool lists all
the programmes that are compatible with the engine control unit. Select the programme appropriate for
the tractor model in question. (Use the table of programmes.)
2. Load the software.
7 Note! Only perform this step if the TT control unit (the tractor terminal in the armrest) has been replaced or
additional hydraulic valves or levers have been fitted.
MultiTool application: Working hydraulics => CAN---hydr.,diagn.+set(LS, N2, T2) => Hydraulics
configuration download
Download the hydraulic configuration using the Valtra MultiTool service terminal:
1. Start the MultiTool application.
2. Download the correct hydraulic configuration.
3. Use the Tabular view to make sure that all valves and controls are OK.
8 Note! Only perform this step if the engine control unit (EC) has been replaced or reprogrammed.
MultiTool application: EEM ENGINE => EEM2VP/EEM3CR testing+adjustments
Check the engine settings using the Valtra MultiTool service terminal:
1. Stop the tractor, engage the parking brake, switch off the engine and turn the ignition key to position 1.
3. Check the values of the settings. If necessary, adjust them to match the nominal values. (See table of
target values.)
9 1 P
Perform the tractor settings (units):
Open the Service and Calibration mode from the tractor terminal main menu by
pressing the OK button three times and the ESC button once.
S ET
1. Press the down arrow button.

2. Press the left arrow button.
3. Adjust the settings.
4. Exit from the service menu by switching off the power.
Go to next page
408
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 411.3 11
Continued
10 1 P
Activate the equipment:
SET
1. Press the down arrow button (four times).

2. Press the right arrow button.
3. Perform the equipment usage (ON= in use, OFF = not in use)
Front PTO, Sigma power, Front power lift
11 1 P
Perform the calibrations for the control levers of the hydraulics:
S ET

3. Perform the calibrations for each control lever.
12 Load the saved power transmission system indexes from the memory card to the tractor.
MultiTool application: Transmission => Versu/Direct adjustments+calibrations => Indexes => Load
indexes from memory card
2. Under Indexes, select Load indexes from memory card.
3. Select the index file, whose name matches the tractor in question.
The TC1 control unit restores all index values in use before the programming was started.
13
Apply the new default values for the indexes.
MultiTool application: Transmission => Versu/Direct adjustments+calibrations => Reset indexes by
default values => Reset indexes by default values
2. Select Reset indexes by default values.
The TC1 control unit applies the factory default values to all the indexes included in the new software (indexes
500---599). The control unit also overrides the previous calibrations. All calibrations must therefore be
performed again.
Go to next page
409
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 411.3 12
Continued
14 Check the default index values of the power transmission system.
MultiTool application: Transmission => Versu/Direct adjustments+calibrations => Indexes => Index
adjustment
Index 1: Tyre parameter (dynamic radius)
Index 3: Clutch pedal engaging position (from software version 1.8.0.0). Set the index value 2 (value 2 must be
selected when the function of the clutch pedal is tested later in this instruction).
Index 30: F&R engagement, rapidity (from software version 1.8.0.0). Set the index value 4 (value 4 must be
selected when the fine adjustment indexes for the power shuttle clutches are set later in this instruction).
Index 440: Transmission type no.
Index 441: Rear PTO type no.
Index 451: Max speed limit (km/h)
Index 453: Tyre parameter, factory (dynamic radius). The value must conform to the tyres that are fixed on the
tractor.
15 Perform the calibrations.

MultiTool application: Transmission => Versu/Direct adjustments+calibrations => Calibrations =>
Calibrations
Calibration 010: Main gear calibration
Calibration 011: Group gear calibration
Calibration 051: Steering, middle position
Calibration 060: Speed sensors
16 Warm up the tractor by driving it.

Adjust the instrument display or tractor terminal to display the temperature of the transmission oil. The
recommended transmission oil temperature for performing the calibrations is +40...50˚C (allowed
+30...+60˚C).
17 Calibrate the power shuttle:

Calibration 031: F clutch (forwards), pre ---fill pressure
Calibration 041: F clutch (forwards), initial pressure
Calibration 032: R clutch (rearward), pre ---fill pressure
Calibration 042: R clutch (rearward), initial pressure
18 Calibrate the Powershift unit:

Calibration 033: C1 clutch, pre ---fill pressure
Calibration 043: C1 clutch, initial pressure
Go to next page
410
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 411.3 13
Continued
19 Calibrate the rear PTO.

These calibrations are not yet available. If there is a problem with starting the powert take ---off, adjust the
indexes for the pre ---fill time and initial pressure in the index adjustment mode.
Calibration 037: PTO clutch, pre ---fill time
Calibration 047: PTO clutch, initial pressure
Exit the calibration mode.
20 Test the pre ---fill of the F and R clutch.

1. Engage gear A1 and change the driving direction back and forth abruptly.
You should feel a small jerk, but the tractor must not creep in either direction.
2. If F clutch is not OK, perform calibration 031 (change the value).
If R clutch is not OK, perform calibration 032 (change the value).
21 Clutch pedal: Make the fine adjustments to the pre ---fill value.
adjustment
1. Engage gear A1 and slowly lift up the clutch pedal until the limit switch makes a clicking sound.
The tractor must not move, but you should feel a small jerk.
2. If the operation of the clutch is not OK, adjust the indexes:
--- Index 510: F direction clutch pedal, prefill pressure (---) decrement
--- Index 513: R direction clutch pedal, prefill pressure (---) decrement
22 Clutch pedal: Make the fine adjustments to the initial pressure value.
Note! Adjust the A ---pillar display to show the outside temperature view and open the index and save it.
The position of the pedal is displayed as a percentage on the display.
1. Choose index, for example 511 and save it => position information of the clutch pedal will come into
the A ---pillar display.
2. Engage gear A1 and slowly press the clutch pedal until the tractor stops.
The percentage on the A ---pillar display must be slightly under 10 %. Check also that the tractor stops
moving before the clutch pedal activates the limit switch.
--- Index 511: F direction clutch pedal, initial pressure (---) decrement
--- Index 514: R direction clutch pedal, initial pressure (---) decrement
Go to next page
411
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 411.3 14
Continued
23 Perform the fine adjustments for the power transmission system.

Test the function of the power transmission system with the different driving controls. Adjust the indexes, if
necessary.
Indexes 517---522: Driving start using the power shuttle lever.
Indexes 525---530: Changing driving direction with the power shuttle lever.
Indexes 533---538: Engaging the drive while the tractor is moving (with the HiShift button or power shuttle
lever).
Indexes 541---546: Driving start using the N AUTO function (Autotraction).
Indexes 557---586: Powershift gear engagements
Indexes 503---504: Rear PTO start (only performed, if there is a problem with starting the PTO).
24 Check the following indexes and adjust them, if necessary:

Indexes 2---90
Indexes 400---430
Indexes 454---499
Indexes 1000---1099
Exit the MultiTool application.
25 Calibrate the Sigma Power system.

Note! This calibration is only performed for models with Sigma Power equipment (T182 V and T202 V).
Note! The tractor must be in the normal driving mode, not the service mode.
Note! The calibration must be performed within 60 seconds of switching on the current.
1. Switch off the current.
2. Engage the parking brake.
3. Disengage the power take ---off (the speed control lever in the middle position and the PTO switch in the
OFF position).
4. Start the engine and adjust the engine speed to about 1800 rpm.
5. Allow the engine to run at 1800 rpm for approximately 10 seconds. The calibration results are saved
automatically.
6. Test the function of the Sigma Power function.
--- Measure the engaging torque with a dynanometric wrench or test the function by connecting a
suitable implement to the power take ---off.
--- The Sigma Power indicator light should be illuminated, when the required torque is high enough.
26 Perform a test drive.
27 Check whether any service codes were activated during the test drive. Address all problems and test drive
the tractor again.
28 Adjust the function ---specific indexes as required (based on the feel of the tractor and customer feedback).
412
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 411.4 15
Programming and settings procedure, Direct

OTHERWISE SOME CALIBRATIONS MAY FAIL OR ADJUSTING THE TRACTOR MAY BE UNNECESSARILY
COMPLICATED.
A1 When you program the B1 When you fit a new control unit: C1 When you fit a new engine
tractor TC1 (A1A), TC2 (A2A), UC1 control unit: EC (A1M)
(units not changed) (A3A), TT (P2) or LCD (P6)
2
WRITE DOWN THE POWER TRANSMISSION INDEXES
=> Index adjustment
1. Start the MultiTool application. Under Indexes, select Index adjustment.
2. Write down the values of the indexes number 1, 3, 30, 440, 441, 451 and 453. You may need
the values later.
3 COPY THE POWER TRANSMISSION INDEXES ONTO A MEMORY CARD (using MultiTool)
=> Save indexes to memory card
1. Start the MultiTool application. Under Indexes, select Save indexes to memory card.
2. Save the indexes. (Make sure that the tractor number is displayed correctly on the MultiTool
display.)
4 B4 Fit a new control unit to C4 Fit the control unit to the

the tractor. tractor.
5 PROGRAM THE TRACTOR

MultiTool application: Software => C,M,N,T...
1. Start the MultiTool application. Select the tractor model and wait while MultiTool establishes a
connection with the tractor.
--- If Multitool detects that one of the control units is missing (and a replacement control unit has
been fitted instead), a new window is displayed. In this window you can correct the CAN ---ID
of the replacement control unit.
--- The CAN ---ID numbers of the replacement control unit are the following: TC1 (A1A) = 003,
TC2 (A2A) = 004, UC1 (A3A) = 005, TT (P2) = 040, LCD (P6) = 059.
2 Load the software.
3. Load the parameters.
--- Once the software has been loaded, the parameters must ALWAYS be loaded as well.
Go to next page
413
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 411.4 16
Continued
6 PROGRAM THE ENGINE

MultiTool application: Software => EEM3CR engine (Common Rail)
1. Start the MultiTool application. Run the search function.
--- When the ID module of the engine is OK, MultiTool is able to suggest the appropriate engine
programme. Select this programme.
--- If the engine control unit cannot retrieve the required information from the ID module, MultiTool lists all
the programmes that are compatible with the engine control unit. Select the programme appropriate for
the tractor model in question. (Use the table of programmes.)
2. Load the software.
7 Note! Only perform this step if the TT control unit (the tractor terminal in the armrest) has been replaced or
additional hydraulic valves or levers have been fitted.
MultiTool application: Working hydraulics => CAN---hydr.,diagn.+set(LS, N2, T2) => Hydraulics
configuration download
Download the hydraulic configuration using the Valtra MultiTool service terminal:
2. Download the correct hydraulic configuration.
3. Use the Tabular view to make sure that all valves and controls are OK.
8 Note! Only perform this step if the engine control unit (EC) has been replaced or reprogrammed.
MultiTool application: EEM ENGINE => EEM2VP/EEM3CR testing+adjustments
Check the engine settings using the Valtra MultiTool service terminal:
1. Stop the tractor, engage the parking brake, switch off the engine and turn the ignition key to position 1.
3. Check the values of the settings. If necessary, adjust them to match the nominal values. (See table of
target values.)
9 1 P
Perform the tractor settings (units):
S ET
1. Press the down arrow button.

3. Adjust the settings.
4. Exit from the service menu by switching off the power.
Go to next page
414
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 411.4 17
Continued
10 1 P
Activate the equipment:
SET

2. Press the right arrow button.
3. Perform the equipment usage (ON= in use, OFF = not in use)
Front PTO, Sigma power, Front power lift
11 1 P
Perform the calibrations for the control levers of the hydraulics:
S ET

12 Load the saved power transmission system indexes from the memory card to the tractor.
MultiTool application: Transmission => Versu/Direct adjustments+calibrations => Indexes => Load
indexes from memory card
2. Under Indexes, select Load indexes from memory card.
3. Select the index file, whose name matches the tractor in question.
The TC1 control unit restores all index values in use before the programming was started.
13
Apply the new default values for the indexes.
MultiTool application: Transmission => Versu/Direct adjustments+calibrations => Reset indexes by
default values => Reset indexes by default values
2. Select Reset indexes by default values.
The TC1 control unit applies the factory default values to all the indexes included in the new software (indexes
500---599). The control unit also overrides the previous calibrations. All calibrations must therefore be
performed again.
Go to next page
415
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 411.4 18
Continued
14 Check the default index values of the power transmission system.
adjustment
Index 1: Tyre parameter (dynamic radius)
Index 3: Clutch pedal engaging position (from software version 1.7.0.0). Set the index value 2 (value 2 must be
selected when the function of the clutch pedal is tested later in this instruction).
Index 30: F&R engagement, rapidity (from software version 1.7.0.0). Set the index value 4 (value 4 must be
selected when the fine adjustment indexes for the power shuttle clutches are set later in this instruction).
Index 120: Transmission droop minimum. Set the index value to 5.
Index 451: Max speed limit (km/h)
Index 453: Tyre parameter, factory (dynamic radius). The value must conform to the tyres that are fixed on the
tractor.
15 Perform the calibrations.

MultiTool application: Transmission => Versu/Direct adjustments+calibrations => Calibrations =>
Calibrations
=> Start the engine
Calibration 010: Main gear calibration
Calibration 011: Group gear calibration
Calibration 020: Hydrostat unit calibration
Calibration 021: F traction force function (this calibration was available up to software v1.10.0.0)
Calibration 022: R traction force function (this calibration was available up to software v1.10.0.0)
Calibration 051: Steering, middle position
Calibration 060: Speed sensors
16 Warm up the tractor by driving it.

Adjust the instrument display or tractor terminal to display the temperature of the transmission oil. The
recommended transmission oil temperature for performing the calibrations is +40...50˚C (allowed
+30...+60˚C).
17 Calibrate the power shuttle:

Calibration 031: F clutch (forwards), pre ---fill pressure
Calibration 041: F clutch (forwards), initial pressure
Calibration 032: R clutch (rearward), pre ---fill pressure
Calibration 042: R clutch (rearward), initial pressure
Go to next page
416
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 411.4 19
Continued
18 Calibrate the rear PTO.

These calibrations are not yet available. If there is a problem with starting the powert take ---off, adjust the
indexes for the pre ---fill time and initial pressure in the index adjustment mode.
Calibration 037: PTO clutch, pre ---fill time
Calibration 047: PTO clutch, initial pressure
Exit the calibration mode.
19 Test the pre ---fill of the F and R clutch.

1. Engage speed range C and activate the automatic driving mode.
2. Use the transmission adjustment lever to set the driving speed to 1 km/h.
3. Set the engine speed to approximately 1700 rpm (using the pedal).
4. Change the driving direction back and forth abruptly.
Engaging the drive must not increase the driving speed above 1.2 km/h. When changing the driving
direction, you should feel a small jerk.
20 Clutch pedal: Make the fine adjustments to the pre ---fill value.
adjustment
1. Activate the manual driving mode (mode 2). Activate the mode with the MultiTool service terminal. Use
index number 140 and set the index value 1.
2. Engage speed range A and slowly lift up the clutch pedal until the limit switch makes a clicking sound.
The tractor must not move, but you should feel a small jerk.
--- Index 510: F direction clutch pedal, prefill pressure (---) decrement
--- Index 513: R direction clutch pedal, prefill pressure (---) decrement
21 Clutch pedal: Make the fine adjustments to the initial pressure value.
Note! Adjust the A ---pillar display to show the outside temperature view and open the index and save it.
The position of the pedal is displayed as a percentage on the display.
1. Choose index, for example 511 and save it => position information of the clutch pedal will come into
the A ---pillar display.
2. Engage gear A1 and slowly press the clutch pedal until the tractor stops.
The percentage on the A ---pillar display must be slightly under 10 %. Check also that the tractor stops
moving before the clutch pedal activates the limit switch.
--- Index 511: F direction clutch pedal, initial pressure (---) decrement
--- Index 514: R direction clutch pedal, initial pressure (---) decrement
Go to next page
417
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 411.4 20
Continued
22 Perform the fine adjustments for the power transmission system.

Test the function of the transmission system with the different driving controls. Adjust the indexes, if
necessary.
Indexes 517---522: Driving start using the power shuttle lever. Engage the direction in active standstill mode
(rapidly). The tractor is not allowed to move too much while you change the driving direction.
Indexes 525---530: Changing driving direction with the power shuttle lever
Indexes 533---538: Engaging the drive while the tractor is moving (with the RangeShift button or power shuttle
lever)
Indexes 503---504: Rear PTO start (only performed, if there is a problem with starting the PTO)
23 Check the following indexes and adjust them, if necessary:

Indexes 2---160
Indexes 400---430
Indexes 454---499
Indexes 1150---1180
Exit the MultiTool application.
24 Calibrate the Sigma Power system.

Note! This calibration is only performed for models with Sigma Power equipment (T182 D and T202 D).
Note! The tractor must be in the normal driving mode, not the service mode.
Note! The calibration must be performed within 60 seconds of switching on the current.
1. Switch off the current.
2. Engage the parking brake.
3. Disengage the power take ---off (the speed control lever in the middle position and the PTO switch in the
OFF position).
4. Start the engine and adjust the engine speed to about 1800 rpm.
5. Allow the engine to run at 1800 rpm for approximately 10 seconds. The calibration results are saved
automatically.
6. Test the function of the Sigma Power function.
--- Measure the engaging torque with a dynanometric wrench or test the function by connecting a
suitable implement to the power take ---off.
--- The Sigma Power indicator light should be illuminated, when the required torque is high enough.
25 Perform a test drive.
26 Check whether any service codes were activated during the test drive. Address all problems and test drive
the tractor again.
27 Adjust the function ---specific indexes as required (based on the feel of the tractor and customer feedback).
418
1.5.2008 All 411.5 21
Recognizing of the transmission
419
Model Code Page
22.1.2006
1.5.2008 All 411.5 22
6400 Ground PTO ID Letter N101cCR Ground PTO ID Letter

40 km/h Yes SG 40 km/h Yes LT
40 km/h No SH 40 km/h No LU
40 km/h, no DPS Yes SJ 40 km/h 24+24R No LX
40 km/h, no DPS No SK
N91h-- N111h Ground PTO ID Letter
6250H-- 6550H Ground PTO ID Letter 40 km/h Yes MA
40 km/h Yes HJ 40 km/h No MB
40 km/h No HK 40 km/h 24+24R No MD
6850H Ground PTO ID Letter N121h-- N141h Ground PTO ID Letter

40 km/h Yes HE 40 km/h Yes MG
40 km/h No HF 40 km/h No MH
50 km/h Yes HG 40 km/h 24+24R No MK
50 km/h No HH
N111eh Ground PTO ID Letter
C90-- C150 Ground PTO ID Letter 40 km/h Yes ME
40 km/h Yes GC 40 km/h No MF
40 km/h No GD
50 km/h, Yes GM N121h-- N141h Ground PTO ID Letter
C120e 40 km/h 50 km/h Yes ML
50 km/h, No GN 50 km/h No MN
C120e 40 km/h
M120-- M150 Ground PTO ID Letter

40 km/h Yes GI
40 km/h No GJ
50 km/h, Yes GK
M120e 40 km/h
50 km/h, No GL
M120e 40 km/h
XM130-- XM150 Ground PTO ID Letter

40 km/h Yes GI
40 km/h No GJ
420
Model Code Page
22.1.2006
1.5.2008 All 411.5 23
T120c-- T130c Ground PTO ID Letter T150-- T190, Ground PTO ID Letter
40 km/h Yes CE T160CR, T180CR,
T190CR
40 km/h No CF
40 km/h Yes GG
50 km/h Yes CG
40 km/h No GH
50 km/h No CH
50 km/h Yes GE
50 km/h No GF
T140ec Ground PTO ID Letter
40 km/h Yes CA
T121c-- T131c Ground PTO ID Letter
40 km/h No CB
40 km/h Yes CE
40 km/h No CF
T150c-- T170c, Ground PTO ID Letter
T170cCR
40 km/h Yes CC T161c-- T171c Ground PTO ID Letter
40 km/h No CD 40 km/h Yes CC
50 km/h Yes CA 40 km/h No CD
50 km/h No CB 50 km/h Yes CA

50 km/h No CB
T120cH-- T130cH Ground PTO ID Letter
40 km/h Yes HE T121h-- T131h Ground PTO ID Letter
40 km/h No HF 40 km/h Yes HE
50 km/h Yes HG 40 km/h No HF
50 km/h No HH 50 km/h Yes HG

50 km/h No HH
T140ecH Ground PTO ID Letter
40 km/h Yes HL T151eh Ground PTO ID Letter
40 km/h No HB 50 km/h Yes HL
50 km/h No HB
T150cH-- T170cH, Ground PTO ID Letter
T170cHCR T161h-- T191h Ground PTO ID Letter
40 km/h Yes HC 40 km/h Yes HC
40 km/h No HD 40 km/h No HD
50 km/h Yes HL 50 km/h Yes HL
50 km/h No HB 50 km/h No HB
T120-- T130 Ground PTO ID Letter T151eLS Ground PTO ID Letter

40 km/h Yes GI 50 km/h Yes TR
40 km/h No GJ 50 km/h No TS
50 km/h Yes GK
50 km/h No GL T161LS-- T191LS Ground PTO ID Letter
40 km/h Yes TO
T140e Ground PTO ID Letter 40 km/h No TP
40 km/h Yes GE 50 km/h Yes TR
40 km/h No GF 50 km/h No TS
421
Model Code Page
22.1.2006
1.5.2008 All 411.5 24
422
1.5.2008 6400 411.6 25
Tyre size parameters

6400
6400
Rear wheel no PS PS
40 km/h 40 km/h
13.6---38/8N 181 216
13.6R38 GY 181 215
13.6R ---38/8M 181 216
14.9R ---38/8M 175 209
14.9R ---38/8N 175 209
16.9---34/14IND 180 214
16.9---34/8N 180 214
16.9R34 GY 178 212
16.9R ---34/8M 180 214
16.9R ---34/8N 180 214
16.9R ---38/8GY 168 201
16.9R ---38/8M 168 201
16.9R ---38/8N 168 201
18.4---34/14FOR 174 207
18.4---34/14IND 174 207
18.4---34/8N 174 207
18.4---34/IND 174 207
18.4---38/14FOR 163 195
18.4---38/14IND 163 195
18.4---38/FI 163 195
18.4R ---34/8GY 174 207
18.4R ---34/8M 174 207
18.4R ---34/8N 174 207
18.4R38 TA 160 191
18.4R ---38/14M 163 195
18.4R ---38/8GY 163 195
18.4R ---38/M 163 195
20.8R38 GY 154 183
20.8R38 IND 154 184
20.8R38 TA 153 182
20.8R ---38/8M 157 187
20.8R ---38/M 157 187
20.8R42 146 173
230/95R48 TA 168 200
270/95R48 TA 163 194
340 / 85R38 CON 181 215
420 / 85R38 CON 167 199
460 / 85R38 CON 160 190
480/70R ---38 166 198
480/80R42 M 152 181
520 / 70R34 CON 171 203
520 / 70R34 GY 171 203
520 / 70R34 TA 171 204
520 / 70R38 CON 162 193
520 / 70R38 GY 160 191
520 / 85R38 CON 152 181
520/70R ---34 171 203
520/70R ---38 160 191
520/85R42 142 169
423
1.5.2008 6400 411.6 26
6400
Rear wheel no PS PS
40 km/h 40 km/h
540 / 65R38 GY 168 200
540/65R ---38/M 169 202
580 / 70R38 GY 153 182
580 / 70R38 TA 153 182
580/70R ---38 153 182
600 / 65R34 NO 170 203
600 / 65R34 TA 172 204
600 / 65R38 CON 162 193
600 / 65R38 GY 160 190
600 / 65R38 IND 161 191
600/65---34 FOR 171 204
600/65R ---34/M 174 208
600/65R ---38/M 161 192
620/75R ---30/M 167 199
650 / 65R38 NO 154 184
650/65R38 CON 155 185
650/65R38 FOR 153 183
650/65R38 GY 153 182
650/65R38M 154 184
650/65R42 147 175
650/75R38 146 173
680/75R32 M 154 183
424
1.5.2008 6250H-- 6850H 411.6 27
6250H-- 6850H
6250H---6550H 6850H
Rear wheel
40 km/h 40 km/h 50 km/h
13.6---38/8N 216 216 197
13.6R38 GY 215 215 197
13.6R ---38/8M 216 216 197
14.9R ---38/8M 209 209 191
14.9R ---38/8N 209 209 191
16.9---34/14IND 214 214 196
16.9---34/8N 214 214 196
16.9R34 GY 212 212 194
16.9R ---34/8M 214 214 196
16.9R ---34/8N 214 214 196
16.9R ---38/8GY 201 201 184
16.9R ---38/8M 201 201 184
16.9R ---38/8N 201 201 184
18.4---34/14FOR 207 207 190
18.4---34/14IND 207 207 190
18.4---34/8N 207 207 190
18.4---34/IND 207 207 190
18.4---38/14FOR 195 195 178
18.4---38/14IND 195 195 178
18.4---38/FI 195 195 178
18.4R ---34/8GY 207 207 190
18.4R ---34/8M 207 207 190
18.4R ---34/8N 207 207 190
18.4R38 TA 191 191 175
18.4R ---38/14M 195 195 178
18.4R ---38/8GY 195 195 178
18.4R ---38/M 195 195 178
20.8R38 GY 183 183 167
20.8R38 IND 184 184 168
20.8R38 TA 182 182 167
20.8R ---38/8M 187 187 171
20.8R ---38/M 187 187 171
20.8R42 173 173 159
230/95R48 TA 200 200 183
270/95R48 TA 194 194 178
340 / 85R38 CON 215 215 197
420 / 85R38 CON 199 199 182
460 / 85R38 CON 190 190 174
480/70R ---38 198 198 181
480/80R42 M 181 181 166
520 / 70R34 CON 203 203 186
520 / 70R34 GY 203 203 186
520 / 70R34 TA 204 204 187
520 / 70R38 CON 193 193 177
520 / 70R38 GY 191 191 174
520 / 85R38 CON 181 181 166
520/70R ---34 203 203 186
520/70R ---38 191 191 174
520/85R42 169 169 155
425
1.5.2008 6250H-- 6850H 411.6 28
6250H---6550H 6850H
Rear wheel
40 km/h 40 km/h 50 km/h
540 / 65R38 GY 200 200 183
540/65R ---38/M 202 202 185
580 / 70R38 GY 182 182 167
580 / 70R38 TA 182 182 167
580/70R ---38 182 182 167
600 / 65R34 NO 203 203 186
600 / 65R34 TA 204 204 187
600 / 65R38 CON 193 193 177
600 / 65R38 GY 190 190 174
600 / 65R38 IND 191 191 175
600/65---34 FOR 204 204 187
600/65R ---34/M 208 208 190
600/65R ---38/M 192 192 176
620/75R ---30/M 199 199 182
650 / 65R38 NO 184 184 168
650/65R38 CON 185 185 169
650/65R38 FOR 183 183 167
650/65R38 GY 182 182 167
650/65R38M 184 184 168
650/65R42 175 175 160
650/75R38 173 173 159
680/75R32 M 183 183 168
426
Model Code Page
22.1.2006
1.5.2008 C90-- C150 411.6 29
C90-- C150
The code number for the model C120e has always to be chosen from the 50 km/h table.
C90 ---C150 C120 ---C150 C90 ---C150 C120 ---C150

Rear wheel C120e Rear wheel C120e
40 km/h 50 km/h 40 km/h 50 km/h
13.6---38/8N 216 197 420 / 85R38 CON 199 182
13.6R38 GY 215 197 460 / 85R38 CON 190 174
13.6R ---38/8M 216 197 480/70R ---38 198 181
14.9R ---38/8M 209 191 480/80R42 M 181 166
14.9R ---38/8N 209 191 520 / 70R34 CON 203 186
16.9---34/14IND 214 196 520 / 70R34 GY 203 186
16.9---34/8N 214 196 520 / 70R34 TA 204 187
16.9R34 GY 212 194 520 / 70R38 CON 193 177
16.9R ---34/8M 214 196 520 / 70R38 GY 191 174
16.9R ---34/8N 214 196 520 / 85R38 CON 181 166
16.9R ---38/8GY 201 184 520/70R ---34 203 186
16.9R ---38/8M 201 184 520/70R ---38 191 174
16.9R ---38/8N 201 184 520/85R42 169 155
18.4---34/14FOR 207 190 540 / 65R38 GY 200 183
18.4---34/14IND 207 190 540/65R ---38/M 202 185
18.4---34/8N 207 190 580 / 70R38 GY 182 167
18.4---34/IND 207 190 580 / 70R38 TA 182 167
18.4---38/14FOR 195 178 580/70R ---38 182 167
18.4---38/14IND 195 178 600 / 65R34 NO 203 186
18.4---38/FI 195 178 600 / 65R34 TA 204 187
18.4R ---34/8GY 207 190 600 / 65R38 CON 193 177
18.4R ---34/8M 207 190 600 / 65R38 GY 190 174
18.4R ---34/8N 207 190 600 / 65R38 IND 191 175
18.4R38 TA 191 175 600/65---34 FOR 204 187
18.4R ---38/14M 195 178 600/65R ---34/M 208 190
18.4R ---38/8GY 195 178 600/65R ---38/M 192 176
18.4R ---38/M 195 178 620/75R ---30/M 199 182
20.8R38 GY 183 167 650 / 65R38 NO 184 168
20.8R38 IND 184 168 650/65R38 CON 185 169
20.8R38 TA 182 167 650/65R38 FOR 183 167
20.8R ---38/8M 187 171 650/65R38 GY 182 167
20.8R ---38/M 187 171 650/65R38M 184 168
20.8R42 173 159 650/65R42 175 160
230/95R48 TA 200 183 650/75R38 173 159
270/95R48 TA 194 178 680/75R32 M 183 168
340 / 85R38 CON 215 197
427
1.5.2008 M120-- M150 411.5 30
M120-- M150
The code number for the model M120e has always to be chosen from the 50 km/h table.
Rear wheel 40 km/h 50 km/h Rear wheel 40 km/h 50 km/h

13.6---38/8N 216 197 420 / 85R38 CON 199 182
13.6R38 GY 215 197 460 / 85R38 CON 190 174
13.6R ---38/8M 216 197 480/70R ---38 198 181
14.9R ---38/8M 209 191 480/80R42 M 181 166
14.9R ---38/8N 209 191 520 / 70R34 CON 203 186
16.9---34/14IND 214 196 520 / 70R34 GY 203 186
16.9---34/8N 214 196 520 / 70R34 TA 204 187
16.9R34 GY 212 194 520 / 70R38 CON 193 177
16.9R ---34/8M 214 196 520 / 70R38 GY 191 174
16.9R ---34/8N 214 196 520 / 85R38 CON 181 166
16.9R ---38/8GY 201 184 520/70R ---34 203 186
16.9R ---38/8M 201 184 520/70R ---38 191 174
16.9R ---38/8N 201 184 520/85R42 169 155
18.4---34/14FOR 207 190 540 / 65R38 GY 200 183
18.4---34/14IND 207 190 540/65R ---38/M 202 185
18.4---34/8N 207 190 580 / 70R38 GY 182 167
18.4---34/IND 207 190 580 / 70R38 TA 182 167
18.4---38/14FOR 195 178 580/70R ---38 182 167
18.4---38/14IND 195 178 600 / 65R34 NO 203 186
18.4---38/FI 195 178 600 / 65R34 TA 204 187
18.4R ---34/8GY 207 190 600 / 65R38 CON 193 177
18.4R ---34/8M 207 190 600 / 65R38 GY 190 174
18.4R ---34/8N 207 190 600 / 65R38 IND 191 175
18.4R38 TA 191 175 600/65---34 FOR 204 187
18.4R ---38/14M 195 178 600/65R ---34/M 208 190
18.4R ---38/8GY 195 178 600/65R ---38/M 192 176
18.4R ---38/M 195 178 620/75R ---30/M 199 182
20.8R38 GY 183 167 650 / 65R38 NO 184 168
20.8R38 IND 184 168 650/65R38 CON 185 169
20.8R38 TA 182 167 650/65R38 FOR 183 167
20.8R ---38/8M 187 171 650/65R38 GY 182 167
20.8R ---38/M 187 171 650/65R38M 184 168
20.8R42 173 159 650/65R42 175 160
230/95R48 TA 200 183 650/75R38 173 159
270/95R48 TA 194 178 680/75R32 M 183 168
340 / 85R38 CON 215 197
428
Model Code Page
22.1.2006
1.5.2008 N91h-- N141h 411.5 31
N91h-- N141h
The code number for the model N111eh has always to be chosen from the 50 km/h table.
N91h ---N141h N111eh, N91h ---N141h N111eh,

40 km/h N121h, 40 km/h N121h,
Rear wheel Rear wheel
N141h N141h
50 km/h 50 km/h
13.6---38/8 N 216 197 460 / 85R38 CON 190 174
13.6R38 GY 215 197 480/70R ---38 198 181
13.6R ---38/8 M 216 197 480/80R42 M 181 166
14.9R ---38/8 M 209 191 520 / 70R34 CON 203 186
14.9R ---38/8 N 209 191 520 / 70R34 GY 203 186
16.9---34/14 IND 214 196 520 / 70R34 TA 204 187
16.9---34/8 N 214 196 520 / 70R38 CON 193 177
16.9R34 GY 212 194 520 / 70R38 GY 191 174
16.9R ---34/8 M 214 196 520 / 85R38 CON 181 166
16.9R ---34/8 N 214 196 520/70R ---34 203 186
16.9R ---38/8 GY 201 184 520/70R ---38 191 174
16.9R ---38/8 M 201 184 520/85R42 169 155
16.9R ---38/8 N 201 184 540 / 65R38 GY 200 183
18.4---34/14 FOR 207 190 540/65R ---38/ M 202 185
18.4---34/14 IND 207 190 540 / 80R38 NO 181 166
18.4---34/8 N 207 190 580 / 70R38 GY 182 167
18.4---34/ IND 207 190 580 / 70R38 TA 183 168
18.4---38/14 FOR 195 178 580/70R ---38 182 167
18.4---38/14 IND 195 178 600 / 65R34 NO 203 186
18.4---38/ FI 195 178 600 / 65R34 TA 204 187
18.4R ---34/8 GY 207 190 600 / 65R38 CON 193 177
18.4R ---34/8 M 207 190 600 / 65R38 GY 190 174
18.4R ---34/8 N 207 190 600 / 65R38 IND 191 175
18.4R38 TA 191 175 600/65---34 FOR 204 187
18.4R ---38/14 M 195 178 600/65R ---34/ M 208 190
18.4R ---38/8 GY 195 178 600/65R ---38/ M 192 176
18.4R ---38/ M 195 178 620/70R42 KleberSuper9L 172 158
20.8R38 GY 183 167 620/75R ---30/ M 199 182
20.8R38 IND 184 168 650/60R38 M (XEOBIB) 195 178
20.8R38 TA 182 167 650/65R38 NO 184 168
20.8R ---38/8 M 187 171 650/65R38 CON 185 169
20.8R ---38/ M 187 171 650/65R38 FOR 183 167
20.8R42 173 159 650/65R38 GY 182 167
230/95R48 TA 196 180 650/65R38 M 184 168
270/95R48 TA 192 175 650/65R42 175 160
340 / 85R38 CON 214 196 650/75R38 173 159
420 / 85R38 CON 197 180 680/75R32 M 183 168
429
1.5.2008 T120c-- T170c 411.6 32
T120c-- T170c
T120c---T170c
Rear wheel no PS PS
40 km/h 40 km/h 50 km/h
13.6---38/8N 197 216 197
13.6R38 GY 197 215 197
13.6R ---38/8M 197 216 197
14.9R ---38/8M 191 209 191
14.9R ---38/8N 191 209 191
16.9---34/14IND 196 214 196
16.9---34/8N 196 214 196
16.9R34 GY 194 212 194
16.9R ---34/8M 196 214 196
16.9R ---34/8N 196 214 196
16.9R ---38/8GY 184 201 184
16.9R ---38/8M 184 201 184
16.9R ---38/8N 184 201 184
18.4---34/14FOR 190 207 190
18.4---34/14IND 190 207 190
18.4---34/8N 190 207 190
18.4---34/IND 190 207 190
18.4---38/14FOR 178 195 178
18.4---38/14IND 178 195 178
18.4---38/FI 178 195 178
18.4R ---34/8GY 190 207 190
18.4R ---34/8M 190 207 190
18.4R ---34/8N 190 207 190
18.4R38 TA 175 191 175
18.4R ---38/14M 178 195 178
18.4R ---38/8GY 178 195 178
18.4R ---38/M 178 195 178
20.8R38 GY 167 183 167
20.8R38 IND 168 184 168
20.8R38 TA 167 182 167
20.8R ---38/8M 171 187 171
20.8R ---38/M 171 187 171
20.8R42 159 173 159
230/95R48 TA 183 200 183
270/95R48 TA 178 194 178
340 / 85R38 CON 197 215 197
420 / 85R38 CON 182 199 182
460 / 85R38 CON 174 190 174
480/70R ---38 181 198 181
480/80R42 M 166 181 166
520 / 70R34 CON 186 203 186
520 / 70R34 GY 186 203 186
520 / 70R34 TA 187 204 187
520 / 70R38 CON 177 193 177
520 / 70R38 GY 174 191 174
520 / 85R38 CON 166 181 166
520/70R ---34 186 203 186
520/70R ---38 174 191 174
520/85R42 155 169 155
430
1.5.2008 T120c-- T170c 411.6 33
T120c---T170c
Rear wheel No PS PS
40 km/h 40 km/h 50 km/h
540 / 65R38 GY 183 200 183
540/65R ---38/M 185 202 185
580 / 70R38 GY 167 182 167
580 / 70R38 TA 167 182 167
580/70R ---38 167 182 167
600 / 65R34 NO 186 203 186
600 / 65R34 TA 187 204 187
600 / 65R38 CON 177 193 177
600 / 65R38 GY 174 190 174
600 / 65R38 IND 175 191 175
600/65---34 FOR 187 204 187
600/65R ---34/M 190 208 190
600/65R ---38/M 176 192 176
620/75R ---30/M 182 199 182
650 / 65R38 NO 168 184 168
650/65R38 CON 169 185 169
650/65R38 FOR 167 183 167
650/65R38 GY 167 182 167
650/65R38M 168 184 168
650/65R42 160 175 160
650/75R38 159 173 159
680/75R32 M 168 183 168
431
41. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE T120cH--
1.5.2008 T170cH 411.6 34
T120cH-- T170cH
T120cH---T170cH T120cH---T170cH
40 km/h 50 km/h 40 km/h 50 km/h
13.6---38/8N 216 197 420 / 85R38 CON 199 182
13.6R38 GY 215 197 460 / 85R38 CON 190 174
13.6R ---38/8M 216 197 480/70R ---38 198 181
14.9R ---38/8M 209 191 480/80R42 M 181 166
14.9R ---38/8N 209 191 520 / 70R34 CON 203 186
16.9---34/14IND 214 196 520 / 70R34 GY 203 186
16.9---34/8N 214 196 520 / 70R34 TA 204 187
16.9R34 GY 212 194 520 / 70R38 CON 193 177
16.9R ---34/8M 214 196 520 / 70R38 GY 191 174
16.9R ---34/8N 214 196 520 / 85R38 CON 181 166
16.9R ---38/8GY 201 184 520/70R ---34 203 186
16.9R ---38/8M 201 184 520/70R ---38 191 174
16.9R ---38/8N 201 184 520/85R42 169 155
18.4---34/14FOR 207 190 540 / 65R38 GY 200 183
18.4---34/14IND 207 190 540/65R ---38/M 202 185
18.4---34/8N 207 190 580 / 70R38 GY 182 167
18.4---34/IND 207 190 580 / 70R38 TA 182 167
18.4---38/14FOR 195 178 580/70R ---38 182 167
18.4---38/14IND 195 178 600 / 65R34 NO 203 186
18.4---38/FI 195 178 600 / 65R34 TA 204 187
18.4R ---34/8GY 207 190 600 / 65R38 CON 193 177
18.4R ---34/8M 207 190 600 / 65R38 GY 190 174
18.4R ---34/8N 207 190 600 / 65R38 IND 191 175
18.4R38 TA 191 175 600/65---34 FOR 204 187
18.4R ---38/14M 195 178 600/65R ---34/M 208 190
18.4R ---38/8GY 195 178 600/65R ---38/M 192 176
18.4R ---38/M 195 178 620/75R ---30/M 199 182
20.8R38 GY 183 167 650 / 65R38 NO 184 168
20.8R38 IND 184 168 650/65R38 CON 185 169
20.8R38 TA 182 167 650/65R38 FOR 183 167
20.8R ---38/8M 187 171 650/65R38 GY 182 167
20.8R ---38/M 187 171 650/65R38M 184 168
20.8R42 173 159 650/65R42 175 160
230/95R48 TA 200 183 650/75R38 173 159
270/95R48 TA 194 178 680/75R32 M 183 168
340 / 85R38 CON 215 197
432
1.5.2008 T120-- T170 411.6 35
T120-- T170
The code number for the model T140e has always to be chosen from the 50 km/h table.
T120, T130 T140e ---T170

Rear wheel
40 km/h 50 km/h 40 km/h 50 km/h
13.6---38/8N 216 197 217 196
13.6R38 GY 215 197 216 196
13.6R ---38/8M 216 197 217 196
14.9R ---38/8M 209 191 210 190
14.9R ---38/8N 209 191 210 190
16.9---34/14IND 214 196 215 195
16.9---34/8N 214 196 215 195
16.9R34 GY 212 194 214 194
16.9R ---34/8M 214 196 215 195
16.9R ---34/8N 214 196 215 195
16.9R ---38/8GY 201 184 202 183
16.9R ---38/8M 201 184 202 183
16.9R ---38/8N 201 184 202 183
18.4---34/14FOR 207 190 208 189
18.4---34/14IND 207 190 208 189
18.4---34/8N 207 190 208 189
18.4---34/IND 207 190 208 189
18.4---38/14FOR 195 178 196 177
18.4---38/14IND 195 178 196 177
18.4---38/FI 195 178 196 177
18.4R ---34/8GY 207 190 208 189
18.4R ---34/8M 207 190 208 189
18.4R ---34/8N 207 190 208 189
18.4R38 TA 191 175 192 174
18.4R ---38/14M 195 178 196 177
18.4R ---38/8GY 195 178 196 177
18.4R ---38/M 195 178 196 177
20.8R38 GY 183 167 184 167
20.8R38 IND 184 168 185 168
20.8R38 TA 182 167 183 166
20.8R ---38/8M 187 171 188 170
20.8R ---38/M 187 171 188 170
20.8R42 173 159 174 158
230/95R48 TA 200 183 201 182
270/95R48 TA 194 178 195 177
340 / 85R38 CON 215 197 216 196
420 / 85R38 CON 199 182 200 181
460 / 85R38 CON 190 174 191 173
480/70R ---38 198 181 199 181
480/80R42 M 181 166 182 165
520 / 70R34 CON 203 186 204 185
520 / 70R34 GY 203 186 204 185
520 / 70R34 TA 204 187 205 186
520 / 70R38 CON 193 177 194 176
520 / 70R38 GY 191 174 192 174
433
1.5.2008 T120-- T170 411.6 36
T120 T130 T140e ---T170

Rear wheel
40 km/h 50 km/h 40 km/h 50 km/h
520 / 85R38 CON 181 166 182 165
520/70R ---34 203 186 205 185
520/70R ---38 191 174 192 174
520/85R42 169 155 170 154
540 / 65R38 GY 200 183 201 182
540/65R ---38/M 202 185 203 184
580 / 70R38 GY 182 167 183 166
580 / 70R38 TA 182 167 183 166
580/70R ---38 182 167 183 166
600 / 65R34 NO 203 186 204 185
600 / 65R34 TA 204 187 205 186
600 / 65R38 CON 193 177 195 176
600 / 65R38 GY 190 174 191 174
600 / 65R38 IND 191 175 192 174
600/65---34 FOR 204 187 205 186
600/65R ---34/M 208 190 209 189
600/65R ---38/M 192 176 193 175
620/75R ---30/M 199 182 200 182
650 / 65R38 NO 184 168 185 167
650/65R38 CON 185 169 186 169
650/65R38 FOR 183 167 184 166
650/65R38 GY 182 167 183 166
650/65R38M 184 168 185 168
650/65R42 175 160 175 159
650/75R38 173 159 174 158
680/75R32 M 183 168 184 167
434
1.5.2008 T180-- T190 411.6 37
T180-- T190
T180 ---T190 T180 ---T190
40 km/h 50 km/h 40 km/h 50 km/h
13.6---38/8N 217 196 420 / 85R38 CON 200 181
13.6R38 GY 216 196 460 / 85R38 CON 191 173
13.6R ---38/8M 217 196 480/70R ---38 199 181
14.9R ---38/8M 210 190 480/80R42 M 182 165
14.9R ---38/8N 210 190 520 / 70R34 CON 204 185
16.9---34/14IND 215 195 520 / 70R34 GY 204 185
16.9---34/8N 215 195 520 / 70R34 TA 205 186
16.9R34 GY 214 194 520 / 70R38 CON 194 176
16.9R ---34/8M 215 195 520 / 70R38 GY 192 174
16.9R ---34/8N 215 195 520 / 85R38 CON 182 165
16.9R ---38/8GY 202 183 520/70R ---34 205 185
16.9R ---38/8M 202 183 520/70R ---38 192 174
16.9R ---38/8N 202 183 520/85R42 170 154
18.4---34/14FOR 208 189 540 / 65R38 GY 201 182
18.4---34/14IND 208 189 540/65R ---38/M 203 184
18.4---34/8N 208 189 580 / 70R38 GY 183 166
18.4---34/IND 208 189 580 / 70R38 TA 183 166
18.4---38/14FOR 196 177 580/70R ---38 183 166
18.4---38/14IND 196 177 600 / 65R34 NO 204 185
18.4---38/FI 196 177 600 / 65R34 TA 205 186
18.4R ---34/8GY 208 189 600 / 65R38 CON 195 176
18.4R ---34/8M 208 189 600 / 65R38 GY 191 174
18.4R ---34/8N 208 189 600 / 65R38 IND 192 174
18.4R38 TA 192 174 600/65---34 FOR 205 186
18.4R ---38/14M 196 177 600/65R ---34/M 209 189
18.4R ---38/8GY 196 177 600/65R ---38/M 193 175
18.4R ---38/M 196 177 620/75R ---30/M 200 182
20.8R38 GY 184 167 650 / 65R38 NO 185 167
20.8R38 IND 185 168 650/65R38 CON 186 169
20.8R38 TA 183 166 650/65R38 FOR 184 166
20.8R ---38/8M 188 170 650/65R38 GY 183 166
20.8R ---38/M 188 170 650/65R38M 185 168
20.8R42 174 158 650/65R42 175 159
230/95R48 TA 201 182 650/75R38 174 158
270/95R48 TA 195 177 680/75R32 M 184 167
340 / 85R38 CON 216 196
435
41. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE T121c--
1.5.2008 T171c 411.6 38
T121c-- T171c
T121c---T131c, T121c---T131c,
40 km/h 40 km/h
13.6---38/8 N 216 460 / 85R38 CON 190
13.6R38 GY 215 480/70R ---38 198
13.6R ---38/8 M 216 480/80R42 M 181
14.9R ---38/8 M 209 520 / 70R34 CON 203
14.9R ---38/8 N 209 520 / 70R34 GY 203
16.9---34/14 IND 214 520 / 70R34 TA 204
16.9---34/8 N 214 520 / 70R38 CON 193
16.9R34 GY 212 520 / 70R38 GY 191
16.9R ---34/8 M 214 520 / 85R38 CON 181
16.9R ---34/8 N 214 520/70R ---34 203
16.9R ---38/8 GY 201 520/70R ---38 191
16.9R ---38/8 M 201 520/85R42 169
16.9R ---38/8 N 201 540 / 65R38 GY 200
18.4---34/14 FOR 207 540/65R ---38/ M 202
18.4---34/14 IND 207 540 / 80R38 NO 181
18.4---34/8 N 207 580 / 70R38 GY 182
18.4---34/ IND 207 580 / 70R38 TA 183
18.4---38/14 FOR 195 580/70R ---38 182
18.4---38/14 IND 195 600 / 65R34 NO 203
18.4---38/ FI 195 600 / 65R34 TA 204
18.4R ---34/8 GY 207 600 / 65R38 CON 193
18.4R ---34/8 M 207 600 / 65R38 GY 190
18.4R ---34/8 N 207 600 / 65R38 IND 191
18.4R38 TA 191 600/65---34 FOR 204
18.4R ---38/14 M 195 600/65R ---34/ M 208
18.4R ---38/8 GY 195 600/65R ---38/ M 192
18.4R ---38/ M 195 620/70R42 KleberSuper9L 172
20.8R38 GY 183 620/75R ---30/ M 199
20.8R38 IND 184 650/60R38 M (XEOBIB) 195
20.8R38 TA 182 650/65R38 NO 184
20.8R ---38/8 M 187 650/65R38 CON 185
20.8R ---38/ M 187 650/65R38 FOR 183
20.8R42 173 650/65R38 GY 182
230/95R48 TA 196 650/65R38 M 184
270/95R48 TA 192 650/65R42 175
340 / 85R38 CON 214 650/75R38 173
420 / 85R38 CON 197 680/75R32 M 183
436
41. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE T121c--
1.5.2008 T171c 411.6 39
T161c---T171c, TT161c---T171c
40 km/h 40 km/h
13.6---38/8N 217 420 / 85R38CON 200
13.6R38GY 216 460 / 85R38CON 191
13.6R ---38/8M 217 480/70R ---38 199
14.9R ---38/8M 210 480/80R42M 182
14.9R ---38/8N 210 520 / 70R34CON 204
16.9---34/14IND 215 520 / 70R34GY 204
16.9---34/8N 215 520 / 70R34TA 205
16.9R34GY 214 520 / 70R38CON 194
16.9R ---34/8M 215 520 / 70R38GY 192
16.9R ---34/8N 215 520 / 85R38CON 182
16.9R ---38/8GY 202 520/70R ---34 205
16.9R ---38/8M 202 520/70R ---38 192
16.9R ---38/8N 202 520/85R42 170
18.4---34/14FOR 208 540 / 65R38GY 201
18.4---34/14IND 208 540/65R ---38/M 203
18.4---34/8N 208 580 / 70R38GY 183
18.4---34/IND 208 580 / 70R38TA 183
18.4---38/14FOR 196 580/70R ---38 183
18.4---38/14IND 196 600 / 65R34NO 204
18.4---38/FI 196 600 / 65R34TA 205
18.4R ---34/8GY 208 600 / 65R38CON 195
18.4R ---34/8M 208 600 / 65R38GY 191
18.4R ---34/8N 208 600 / 65R38IND 192
18.4R38TA 192 600/65---34FOR 205
18.4R ---38/14M 196 600/65R ---34/M 209
18.4R ---38/8GY 196 600/65R ---38/M 193
18.4R ---38/M 196 620/75R ---30/M 200
20.8R38GY 184 650 / 65R38NO 185
20.8R38IND 185 650/65R38CON 186
20.8R38TA 183 650/65R38FOR 184
20.8R ---38/8M 188 650/65R38GY 183
20.8R ---38/M 188 650/65R38M 185
20.8R42 174 650/65R42 175
230/95R48TA 201 650/75R38 174
270/95R48TA 195 680/75R32M 184
340 / 85R38CON 216
437
Model Code Page
22.1.2006
41. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE T121h--
1.5.2008 T191h 411.6 40
T121h-- T191h
T121h ---T131h T131h T121h ---T131h T131h
40 km/h 50 km/h 40 km/h 50 km/h
13.6---38/8 N 216 197 460 / 85R38 CON 190 174
13.6R38 GY 215 197 480/70R ---38 198 181
13.6R ---38/8 M 216 197 480/80R42 M 181 166
14.9R ---38/8 M 209 191 520 / 70R34 CON 203 186
14.9R ---38/8 N 209 191 520 / 70R34 GY 203 186
16.9---34/14 IND 214 196 520 / 70R34 TA 204 187
16.9---34/8 N 214 196 520 / 70R38 CON 193 177
16.9R34 GY 212 194 520 / 70R38 GY 191 174
16.9R ---34/8 M 214 196 520 / 85R38 CON 181 166
16.9R ---34/8 N 214 196 520/70R ---34 203 186
16.9R ---38/8 GY 201 184 520/70R ---38 191 174
16.9R ---38/8 M 201 184 520/85R42 169 155
16.9R ---38/8 N 201 184 540 / 65R38 GY 200 183
18.4---34/14 FOR 207 190 540/65R ---38/ M 202 185
18.4---34/14 IND 207 190 540 / 80R38 NO 181 166
18.4---34/8 N 207 190 580 / 70R38 GY 182 167
18.4---34/ IND 207 190 580 / 70R38 TA 183 168
18.4---38/14 FOR 195 178 580/70R ---38 182 167
18.4---38/14 IND 195 178 600 / 65R34 NO 203 186
18.4---38/ FI 195 178 600 / 65R34 TA 204 187
18.4R ---34/8 GY 207 190 600 / 65R38 CON 193 177
18.4R ---34/8 M 207 190 600 / 65R38 GY 190 174
18.4R ---34/8 N 207 190 600 / 65R38 IND 191 175
18.4R38 TA 191 175 600/65---34 FOR 204 187
18.4R ---38/14 M 195 178 600/65R ---34/ M 208 190
18.4R ---38/8 GY 195 178 600/65R ---38/ M 192 176
620/70R42 Kleber-
18.4R ---38/ M 195 178 172 158
Super9L
20.8R38 GY 183 167 620/75R ---30/ M 199 182
650/60R38 M (XEO-
20.8R38 IND 184 168 195 178
BIB)
20.8R38 TA 182 167 650/65R38 NO 184 168
20.8R ---38/8 M 187 171 650/65R38 CON 185 169
20.8R ---38/ M 187 171 650/65R38 FOR 183 167
20.8R42 173 159 650/65R38 GY 182 167
230/95R48 TA 196 180 650/65R38 M 184 168
270/95R48 TA 192 175 650/65R42 175 160
340 / 85R38 CON 214 196 650/75R38 173 159
420 / 85R38 CON 197 180 680/75R32 M 183 168
438
Model Code Page
22.1.2006
41. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE T121h--
1.5.2008 T191h 411.6 41
On the model T151eh code number must alvays be taken from the 50km/h table.
T151eh ---T191h T151eh ---T191h

40 km/h 50 km/h 40 km/h 50 km/h
13.6---38/8N 217 196 420 / 85R38CON 200 181
13.6R38GY 216 196 460 / 85R38CON 191 173
13.6R ---38/8M 217 196 480/70R ---38 199 181
14.9R ---38/8M 210 190 480/80R42M 182 165
14.9R ---38/8N 210 190 520 / 70R34CON 204 185
16.9---34/14IND 215 195 520 / 70R34GY 204 185
16.9---34/8N 215 195 520 / 70R34TA 205 186
16.9R34GY 214 194 520 / 70R38CON 194 176
16.9R ---34/8M 215 195 520 / 70R38GY 192 174
16.9R ---34/8N 215 195 520 / 85R38CON 182 165
16.9R ---38/8GY 202 183 520/70R ---34 205 185
16.9R ---38/8M 202 183 520/70R ---38 192 174
16.9R ---38/8N 202 183 520/85R42 170 154
18.4---34/14FOR 208 189 540 / 65R38GY 201 182
18.4---34/14IND 208 189 540/65R ---38/M 203 184
18.4---34/8N 208 189 580 / 70R38GY 183 166
18.4---34/IND 208 189 580 / 70R38TA 183 166
18.4---38/14FOR 196 177 580/70R ---38 183 166
18.4---38/14IND 196 177 600 / 65R34NO 204 185
18.4---38/FI 196 177 600 / 65R34TA 205 186
18.4R ---34/8GY 208 189 600 / 65R38CON 195 176
18.4R ---34/8M 208 189 600 / 65R38GY 191 174
18.4R ---34/8N 208 189 600 / 65R38IND 192 174
18.4R38TA 192 174 600/65---34FOR 205 186
18.4R ---38/14M 196 177 600/65R ---34/M 209 189
18.4R ---38/8GY 196 177 600/65R ---38/M 193 175
18.4R ---38/M 196 177 620/75R ---30/M 200 182
20.8R38GY 184 167 650 / 65R38NO 185 167
20.8R38IND 185 168 650/65R38CON 186 169
20.8R38TA 183 166 650/65R38FOR 184 166
20.8R ---38/8M 188 170 650/65R38GY 183 166
20.8R ---38/M 188 170 650/65R38M 185 168
20.8R42 174 158 650/65R42 175 159
230/95R48TA 201 182 650/75R38 174 158
270/95R48TA 195 177 680/75R32M 184 167
340 / 85R38CON 216 196
439
Model Code Page
22.1.2006
41. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE T151eLS--
1.5.2008 T191LS 411.6 42
T151eLS-- T191LS
On the model T151eLS code number must alvays be taken from the 50km/h table
T161LS --- T151eLS --- T161LS --- T151eLS ---

Rear wheel T191LS T191LS Rear wheel T191LS T191LS
40 km/h 50 km/h 40 km/h 50 km/h
13.6---38/8N 217 196 420 / 85R38CON 200 181
13.6R38GY 216 196 460 / 85R38CON 191 173
13.6R ---38/8M 217 196 480/70R ---38 199 181
14.9R ---38/8M 210 190 480/80R42M 182 165
14.9R ---38/8N 210 190 520 / 70R34CON 204 185
16.9---34/14IND 215 195 520 / 70R34GY 204 185
16.9---34/8N 215 195 520 / 70R34TA 205 186
16.9R34GY 214 194 520 / 70R38CON 194 176
16.9R ---34/8M 215 195 520 / 70R38GY 192 174
16.9R ---34/8N 215 195 520 / 85R38CON 182 165
16.9R ---38/8GY 202 183 520/70R ---34 205 185
16.9R ---38/8M 202 183 520/70R ---38 192 174
16.9R ---38/8N 202 183 520/85R42 170 154
18.4---34/14FOR 208 189 540 / 65R38GY 201 182
18.4---34/14IND 208 189 540/65R ---38/M 203 184
18.4---34/8N 208 189 580 / 70R38GY 183 166
18.4---34/IND 208 189 580 / 70R38TA 183 166
18.4---38/14FOR 196 177 580/70R ---38 183 166
18.4---38/14IND 196 177 600 / 65R34NO 204 185
18.4---38/FI 196 177 600 / 65R34TA 205 186
18.4R ---34/8GY 208 189 600 / 65R38CON 195 176
18.4R ---34/8M 208 189 600 / 65R38GY 191 174
18.4R ---34/8N 208 189 600 / 65R38IND 192 174
18.4R38TA 192 174 600/65---34FOR 205 186
18.4R ---38/14M 196 177 600/65R ---34/M 209 189
18.4R ---38/8GY 196 177 600/65R ---38/M 193 175
18.4R ---38/M 196 177 620/75R ---30/M 200 182
20.8R38GY 184 167 650 / 65R38NO 185 167
20.8R38IND 185 168 650/65R38CON 186 169
20.8R38TA 183 166 650/65R38FOR 184 166
20.8R ---38/8M 188 170 650/65R38GY 183 166
20.8R ---38/M 188 170 650/65R38M 185 168
20.8R42 174 158 650/65R42 175 159
230/95R48TA 201 182 650/75R38 174 158
270/95R48TA 195 177 680/75R32M 184 167
340 / 85R38CON 216 196
440
Model Code Page
41. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE N2 Series
19.2.2010 T2 Series 411.6 43
N122 V-- N142 V, N122 D -- N142 D, T132 V-- T202 V, T132 D -- T202 D
Rear tyre Parameter value

520/70R38 831
520/85R38 880
20.8R38 872
540/65R38 798
580/70R38 873
600/65R38 831
650/60R38 818
650/65R38 870
480/80R42 882
520/85R42 942
20.8R42 920
650/65R42 914
620/70R42 925
270/95R48 832
540/80R38 IND 880
650/65R42 IND 914
600/65---34 FOR 782
18.4---38/14 FOR 820
20.8---38/14 FOR 855
600/65R38 FOR 831
650/65R38 FOR 874
650/75---38 FOR 920
441
Model Code Page
41. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE N2 Series
19.2.2010 T2 Series 411.6 44
442
Series Code Page
1.5.2008
42. SETTINGS AND CALIBRATIONS
19.2.2010 All 420 1
Contents
42 Settings and calibrations:

421.1 ... EEM2 engine settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
421.2 ... EEM3 engine settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
421.3 ... Activation of the service mode FIII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
421.4 ... Service mode FIII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
421.5 ... Settings of Agroline instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
421.6 . . . Settings of Tractor terminal, LS models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
421.7 . . . Settings of Tractor terminal, Versu and Direct models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
421.8 . . . Adjustable indexes in Versu models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
421.9 . . . Adjustable indexes in Direct models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
421.10 . . Calibrations in Versu models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
421.11 . . Calibrations in Direct models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
443
Series Code Page
31.10.2006
1.5.2008 All 420 2
444
EEM2 ENGINE SETTINGS
Tractor model EC type

yp marking g Settings in MultiTool
(printed on the la- Maximum Maximum Control Pulse transi- Speed Signal Cruise UI Signal Exhaust Accelerator Active Error Control
bels attached on Vehicle Engine System tions/m Source Source 2) Gas Pedal Selection Indication Stop
the engine control Speed Speed When ID (=tire index) Brake 5) via Oil Pres- DIN
unit and on the (km/h) Bus sure Lamp Enabled
engine) 1) Defective 3)
(rpm)
6400 EEM 44.291 33 / 43 / 53 1800 AC24 Set tire index Wired Wired / Not Used Used / Both Dir Active / ON ON/OFF
Not Used Seat direction
4)
4)
4)
6550 H EEM 44.291 not needed 1800 AC54 not needed Bus / Nom spd Bus / Not Used Used / Seat Direction OFF ON/OFF
Not Used
445
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
1)
4)
5)
3)
2)
31.10.2006
22.1.2006
Series
ENGINE
With EEM2
ON = Control Stop switch
software for engine 66.295

OFF = No Control stop switch
Code
Not used = No Cruise buttons

421.1
Seat direction’ = No rear acc. pedal
Used = Exhaust gas brake installed

Not used = Exh. brake not installed
window in software update (MultiTool

1
and ServiceTool) e.g. EC066295 means

Official engine type. Also in ’Information’
Both dir active’ = Rear acc. pedal in use
Page
(rpm)
C120 44.278 not needed 1800 AC85 not needed Bus / Nom spd Bus / Not Used Used / Seat Direction OFF ON/OFF
Not Used
C120e Ecopower 44.279 not needed 1800 AC85 not needed Bus / Nom spd Bus / Not Used Used / Seat Direction OFF ON/OFF
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
1)
4)
5)
3)
2)
446


22.1.2006


Series
ENGINE
With EEM2
Code
421.1
2
Page
(rpm)
M120 44.278 not needed 1800 AC55 not needed Bus / Nom spd Bus / Not Used Used / Seat Direction OFF ON/OFF
Not Used
M120e Ecopower 44.279 not needed 1800 AC55 not needed Bus / Nom spd Bus / Not Used Used / Seat Direction OFF ON/OFF
Not Used
M130 44.277 not needed 1800 AC55 not needed Bus / Nom spd Bus / Not Used Used / Seat Direction OFF ON/OFF
Not Used
M150 44.276 not needed 1800 AC55 not needed Bus / Nom spd Bus / Not Used Used / Seat Direction Off ON/Off
Not Used
1)
4)
5)
3)
2)
447


22.1.2006


Series
ENGINE
With EEM2
Code
421.1
3
Page

the engine control Speed Speed When ID (=tire index) Brake via Oil Pres- DIN
unit and on the (km/h) Bus Defective sure Lamp Enabled
engine) 1) (rpm) 3)
T series (electrohydraulics, ’Hitech’ shuttle)

T120 EEM 66.295 not needed 1800 AC55 not needed Bus / Nom spd Bus / Not Used Used / Seat Direction OFF ON/OFF
Not Used
Not Used
T140 Ecopower 66.293 not needed 1800 AC55 not needed Bus / Nom spd Bus / Not Used Used / Seat Direction OFF
EEM Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
448
Not Used
T180 74.274 not needed 1800 AC61 not needed Bus / Wheel Bus Used / Seat Direction OFF ON
based Not Used
T190 74.235 not needed 1800 AC61 not needed Bus / Wheel Bus Used / Seat Direction OFF ON
based Not Used
1)
4)
5)
3)
2)
22.1.2006
Series
ENGINE
With EEM2

Code

421.1


4

Page
engine) 1) (rpm) 3)
T series (mechanical hydraulics, mechanical shuttle)

T120c 66.295 33 / 43 / 53 1800 AC24 Set tire index Wired Wired / Not Used Used / Both Dir Active / ON ON/OFF
4)
4)
T140ec 66.293 33 / 43 / 53 1800 AC24 Set tire index Wired Wired / Not Used Used / Both Dir Active / ON ON/OFF
4)
449
4)
4)
1)
4)
5)
3)
2)
22.1.2006
Series
ENGINE

With EEM2



Code

421.1

5
Page
engine) 1) (rpm) 3)
T series (mechanical hydraulics, ’HiTech’ shuttle)

T120cH 66.295 not needed 1800 AC54 not needed Bus / Nom spd Bus / Not Used Used / Seat Direction OFF ON/OFF
Not Used
Not Used
T140ecH 66.293 not needed 1800 AC54 not needed Bus / Nom spd Bus / Not Used Used / Seat Direction OFF ON/OFF
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
450
1)
4)
5)
3)
2)
22.1.2006


Series


ENGINE

With EEM2
Code
421.1
6
Page
(rpm)
S240 84.272 not needed 1800 AC71 not needed Bus / Wheel Bus Used / Seat Direction Off Off
based Not Used
S280 84.271 not needed 1800 AC71 not needed Bus / Wheel Bus Used / Seat Direction Off Off
based Not Used
1)
4)
5)
3)
2)
451




22.1.2006
Series
ENGINE
With EEM2
Code
421.1
7
Page
Series Code Page
42. SETTINGS AND CALIBRATIONS With EEM2
22.1.2006 ENGINE 421.1 8
452
Tractor model AC system
y Settings in MultiTool
Gas Pedal Selection Faults Shown by Lamp Tyre Index Speed Signal Source Cruise UI Signal
T170cCR AC2.7 1 ’Both active’ 1 ’ON’ tyre parameter 2 ’Wired’ 1 ’Wired’
T170cHCR AC5.7 1 ’Both active’ 0 ’OFF’ not needed 0 ’Nom spd’ 0 ’CAN’
T170CR AC5.6 1 ’Both active’ 0 ’OFF’ not needed 0 ’Nom spd’ 0 ’CAN’
T160CR, T180CR, T190CR AC6.6 1 ’Both active’ 0 ’OFF’ not needed 1 ’Wheel based’ 0 ’CAN’
N101cCR, T121c---T171c AC9.2 1 ’Both active’ 1 ’ON’ tyre parameter 2 ’Wired’ 1 ’Wired’
N101hCR, N111ehCR, N121h, N141h AC10.2 1 ’Both active’ 0 ’OFF’ not needed 0 ’Nom spd’ 0 ’CAN’
T191h AC10.21 1 ’Both active’ 0 ’OFF’ not needed 0 ’Nom spd’ 0 ’CAN’
N121LS, N141LS, T151eLS ---T191LS AC11.2 1 ’Both active’ 0 ’OFF’ not needed 1 ’Wheel based’ 0 ’CAN’
453
1.5.2008
19.2.2010
Series
ENGINE
With EEM3
Code
421.2
9
Page
ENGINE SETTINGS FOR VERSU AND DIRECT
NOTE: The amount of settings available depends on the software version of the engine control unit. From the software version 2.5.2.3 incl. there are only a few settings available.
Tractor model AC system

y Settings in MultiTool
Max. driving Maximum Gas pedal Vehicle speed Faults Shown Tyre Index Speed Signal Cruise UI EGB
speed engine speed selection limitation by Lamp Source Signal
N122 D, N142 D AC14.2 60 km/h 1) 1600 rpm 2) 0 ’Seat 0 ’OFF’ 0 ’OFF’ not needed 3 ’OFF’ 2 ’OFF’’ 2 ’OFF’ 3)
direction’
T132 D --- T202 D AC14.2 60 km/h 1) 1600 rpm 2) 0 ’Seat 0 ’OFF’ 0 ’OFF’ not needed 0 ’OFF’ 2 ’OFF’ 2 ’OFF’ 3)
direction’
N122 V, N142 V AC15.2 60 km/h 1) 1600 rpm 2) 0 ’Seat 0 ’OFF’ 0 ’OFF’ not needed 0 ’OFF’ 2 ’OFF’ 2 ’OFF’ 3)
direction’
T132 V --- T202 V AC15.2 60 km/h 1) 1600 rpm 2) 0 ’Seat 0 ’OFF’ 0 ’OFF’ not needed 0 ’OFF’ 2 ’OFF’ 2 ’OFF’ 3)
direction’
1) The value must be set to maximum (60 km/h) because the maximum driving speed is not limited by the engine control unit, but it is limited by the TC1 control unit.
2) ’Maximum engine speed when CAN is defective.’ The engine speed is limited to 1600 rpm if the engine control unit does not receive the driving speed value via the CAN bus.
3) EGB = ’Exhaust gas brake’. The value must be ’OFF’ since the EGB is not available.
454
1.5.2008
19.2.2010
Series
ENGINE
With EEM3
Code
421.2
10
Page
22.1.2006 Series Code Page
42. SETTINGS AND CALIBRATIONS With HiTech
Activation of the service mode FIII
F ---modes of the
tractor
mode FI
electric equipment.
Exit
Escaping from FIII mode occurs only by switching power off,

because the returning to F mode menu cannot be done in that
case.
455
Setting mode FIII
FIII: Setting mode

In the setting mode FIII the calibrations and changes of the adjusting valves can be made for the electric equipment.
Activation of the setting mode and the

point
Activation of the FIII---mode:

--- when the service mode is selected, step with the DPS
push buttons (1) up or down and select the F ---mode
symbol FIII.
--- after this confirm the selection by pushing the DPS pre ---
programming button (2)
--- the display is now in the setting mode and symbol
number appears to display= START LEVEL Example: Setting of HiShift button engagement speed, for-
wards.
Carrying ---out the setting:

1. Select setting point with the DPS buttons.
2. Confirm setting point with the DPS pre ---programming but-
ton.
3. Carry out adjustment.
4. When setting has been done, confirm setting with the DPS
pre ---programming button.
5. If needed, select new setting point with the DPS buttons or
escape from the test mode by switching off current.
456
Setting mode FIII

Setting mode FIII
Point name
130 Engagement speed limit of the parking brake
125 Steering angle sensor
120 Adjustment of the Sigma Power engagement
110 Driving speed unit
100 Outdoor temperature unit
92 Minimum revs limit of the AutoTraction
91 Maximum revs limit of the AutoTraction
90 Driving speed limit of the AutoTraction
74 Rear PTO engagement speed
73 Rear PTO clutch initial pressure
72 Rear PTO clutch pre filling time
65 DPS clutch (C3) initial pressure
62 DPS clutch (C3) pre filling time
58 HiShift--- button engagement speed, both directions ( only when starting)
57 Clutch pedal engagement speed, rearwards
56 Clutch pedal engagement speed, forwards
55 HiShift--- button engagement speed, rearwards (during driving)
54 HiShift--- button engagement speed, forwards (during driving)
53 R clutch initial pressure
52 F clutch initial pressure
51 R clutch pre filling time
50 F clutch pre filling time
31 Rear PTO ratio 2 (lever in rear position)
30 Rear PTO ratio 1 (lever in front position)
22 Maximum driving speed (km/h)
21 Calculation parameter of the driving speed
20 Tyre size parameter
START LEVEL OF THE MENU

10 4--- WD automatics
C 20 Clutch pedal calibration, (front and rear)

C 40 Semi--- automatic range gear
C 50 Gas pedal calibration, (front and rear)
C 60 Automatic calibration of rear PTO clutch
C 70 Steering calibration
C 80 Speed sensors calibration
C 90 Automatic calibration of F clutch
C100 Automatic calibration of R clutch
C110 Automatic calibration of DPS clutch (C1)
C120 Automatic calibration of DPS clutch (C2)
457
Setting of the parking brake engagement speed 130

In display Name Carrying ---out the setting
130 Engagement The driving speed limit will be adjusted here and when the driving speed goes under
speed limit of the the limit, the parking brake engages.
parking brake
One step change adjusts the driving speed 0,5 km/h. So by increasing the index the
driving speed for parking brake engagement raises and by decreasing the index the
driving speed drops.
The index adjustment one at a time and the adjustment range is between 2.0 ... 6.0
Setting of the steering angle sensor 125

125 Steering angle sen- On these models T 160CR, T180, 180CR, T190, 190CR and T151eLS --- T191LS there is
sor a steering angle sensor installed in the front axle.
Index value 1 = installed
On models that have Auto---Guide readiness or full Auto---Guide system or have no

streeting angle sensor
Index value 0 = not installed
Setting of the Sigma Power engagement 120

120 Adjustment of the The Sigma engagement moment will be adjusted here and when the engagement mo-
Sigma Power en- ment exceeds the limit, the Sigma engages.
gagement
One step change adjusts the engagement moment one percent. So by increasing the
index the engagement moment raises and by decreasing the index the engagement
moment drops.
The index adjustment one at a time and the adjustment range is between ---20 ... + 20
Setting of the outdoor and driving speed units 100 --- 110
110 Driving speed unit The driving speed unit will be selected here either 1 (km/h) or 2 (miles/h) for the front
pillar display.
100 Outdoor tempera- The outdoor temperature unit will be selcted here either 1 (˚C) or 2 (F˚) for the front
ture unit pillar display.
458
Setting of the traction release 90---92

92 Minimum revs limit The engine revs limit will be adjusted here and when the engine revs exceed the limit,
of the AutoTraction the tractor‘s traction engages.
One step change adjusts the revs 10 rpm. So by increasing the index the revs limit for
traction engagement raises and by decreasing the index the revs limit drops.
The index adjustment ten at a time and the adjustment range is between 900 ... 1500
91 Maximum revs limit The engine revs limit will be adjusted here and when the engine revs goes under the
of the AutoTraction limit, the tractor‘s traction releases.
One step change adjusts the revs 10 rpm. So by increasing the index the revs limit for
traction release raises and by decreasing the index the revs limit drops.
The index adjustment ten at a time and the adjustment range is between 860 ... 1000
The index 91 can’t be set over 92 adjusted value. The indexes have a difference of al-
ways minimum 40 step.
90 Driving speed limit The driving speed limit will be adjusted here and when the driving speed goes under
of the AutoTraction the limit, the tractor‘s traction releases when using the brake pedal.
One step change adjusts the driving speed 1 km/h. So by increasing the index the driv-
ing speed for traction release raises and by decreasing the index the driving speed
drops.
The index adjustment one at a time and the adjustment range is between 10 ... 18.
Setting of the rear PTO engagement speed 74

74 Rear PTO engage- The engagement delay limit will be adjusted here and when the engagement delay
ment speed exceeds the limit, the rear PTO engages.
One step change adjusts the engagement delay 0.2 sec. So by increasing the index
the engagement has more delay and by decreasing the index the engagement has less
delay.
The index adjustment one at a time and the adjustment range is between 0... --- 5
459
Manual calibration of the rear PTO 72 --- 73

Before manual calibration the following items must be observed:
--- Transmission oils are in the operating temperature. (+30˚C...+60˚C).
--- Tractor’s low pressure circuit must have a proper pressure (approx 18 bar).
If the PTO engagement causes so called ”double jerk” in the beginning of the engagement and the function has a great
delay, then:
--- decreasing the inital pressure index reduces the second jerk and increases the delay.
--- increasing the index increases the jerk and reduces the delay.
The effect of the indexes cannot be seen, if an implement is not connected to the rear PTO. In addition, rotational torque of
an implement affects the PTO engagement.
Big implement (e.g. a big baler):
--- index values can be altered, affects slowly when observing visually.
Small implement (e.g. hay turner):
--- index change small, affects quickly when observing visually.
73 Rear PTO NOTE Setting of the pre ---filling index must always be done before the setting of the initial pres-
clutch in- sures index.
itial pres- Increase then the initial pressure index (73) one step at a time (---4, ---3, ---2, ---1, 0, +1, +2, +3,
sure +4...) and test the rear PTO engagement after every index change until the implement acceler-
ation occurs in the correct way during engagement.
--- If the acceleration breaks when engaging increase the initial pressure index.
--- If the acceleration is too sharp, decrease the initial pressure index.
72 Rear PTO Set the rear PTO ---clutch initial pressure index (73) to ---9.
clutch pre Set the rear PTO ---clutch pre ---filling index (72) to ---9.
filling time Adjust engine revs to about 1200 r/min.
Increase the pre ---filling index (72) one step at a time (---3, ---2, ---1, 0, +1, +2, +3, +4...), and test
the rear PTO engagement after every index change until a clear jerk can be felt. Decrease then the
index one or two steps. Check again that the jerk is not too sharp.
When the desired index value is right, it is confirmed by pushing the DPS preprogramming button.
If the index for the clutches must be over +5 or smaller than ---5, there might be a fault in the valve or in the clutch.
460
Function of the PTO clutch
1) The control unit begins the control of the multi ---disc clutch. The clutch has not yet the pressure.
2) The control unit connects the proportional valve to open fully by giving momentarily the full voltage (battery voltage). This
time, A, is called a pre ---filling time of the clutch. With the pre ---filling the clearance of the clutch is taken away rapidly.
The length of the pre ---filling time can be increased or decreased by changing the pre ---filling index of the solenoid valve
concerned in the setting mode FIII. The setting range of the index is ---9...0...+9 (1 pre ---filling index = 0,01 second). The
pressure of the clutch rises because the return springs of the piston begin to resist the movement.
At the same time control unit notes the amount of current taken by the coil into the memory. With this feature will the
variations of cold and hot solenoid be compensated, in order that control current and clutch pressure should be constant.
In other words the control unit sets the control current in relation with the current taken by the coil.
3) After the pre ---filling time the control unit reduces the control current of the valve.
The movement of the piston stops at the point, where the clutch discs are already quite near each other. The pressure of the
clutch has not time to decrease. The driver can observe a very little jerk at this point. This little jerk marks the correct setting
of the pre ---filling index.
After that control unit supplies edgewave direct current (PWM=Pulse Width Modulation) and control unit increases the
supply power for the solenoid valve (pressure increases), so that the return springs do not press the clutch piston and the
discs backwards. This pressure/amount of current B, which is the beginning point of the exact controlling, is called the
initial pressure.
The starting pressure can be changed, if needed, by index in the setting mode FIII.
The setting range of the index is ---9...0...+9 (1 initial pressure = 1 % valve from control current). From this point begins
the real connecting of the clutch.
4) The control unit increases the control power slowly and evenly. The pressure rises unrushed and the capability of moment
transmitting begins to rise.
5) At this phase the clutch can transmit the whole torque of the engine.
6) The control unit connects the whole voltage (battery voltage) to the solenoid valve, after that the pressure rises rapidly to it’s
full value (about 18 bar). This pressure rising secures the full grip of the clutch.
461
Manual calibration of DPS gear 60 --- 65

If in connection with DPS gear change there occurs a “double jerk” or traction disengages for a while, check/set the DPS
clutch indexes.
--- If speed change between 1 > 2 is bad, set clutch C3 (62, 65) indexes.
65 C3 clutch NOTE Setting of the pre ---filling index must always be done before the setting of the initial pres-
initial pressures index.
sure Increase then the initial p pressure index (65)
( ) one step p at a time ((---4, ---3, ---2, ---1, 0, +1, +2, +3,
64 C2 clutch +4 ) and
+4...) d ttestt th
the gear engagementt after
ft every iindex
d change
h until
til th
the gears engage softly ftl and
d
initial pres- there is not delay or break in the traction. Check the function in different driving speeds, in trac-
sure tion, without traction and in engine braking.
--- If the traction breaks when engaging the speedspeed, increase the initial pressure index. index
63 C1 clutch
--- If the engagement is too sharp, decrease the initial pressure index.
initial pres- Set the initial pressure indexes for other DPS clutches by the same way.
sure
62 C3 clutch Set the C1 clutch initial pressure index (63) to ---9.
pre filling Set the C2 clutch initial pressure index (64) to ---9.
time Set the C3 clutch initial pressure index (65) to ---9.
Set the C1 clutch pre ---filling index (60) to ---3.
61 C2 clutch Set the C2 clutch pre ---filling index (61) to ---3.
pre filling Set the C3 clutch pre ---filling index (62) to ---3.
time Increase the pre ---filling index (62) one step at a time (---3, ---2, ---1, 0, +1, +2, +3, +4...) and test
the gear engagement after every index change until a clear jerk can be felt in the beginning of the
60 C1 clutch
engagement. Decrease then the index one or two steps. Check that in the starting driving there is
pre filling
a clear but small jerk. When the desired index value is right, it is confirmed by pushing the DPS
time
preprogramming button. Set the pre ---filling indexes for other DPS clutches by the same way.
462
Function of the DPS clutch
pressure of the clutch rises because the return springs of the piston begin to resist the movement. At the same time control
unit notes the amount of current taken by the coil into the memory. With this feature will the variations of cold and hot
solenoid be compensated, in order that control current and clutch pressure should be constant. In other words the control
unit sets the control current in relation with the current taken by the coil.
3) After the pre ---filling time the control unit reduces the control current of the valve.The movement of the piston stops at the
point, where the clutch discs are already quite near each other. The pressure of the clutch has not time to decrease. The
driver can observe a very little jerk at this point. This little jerk marks the correct setting of the pre ---filling index.
After that control unit supplies edgewave direct current (PWM=Pulse Width Modulation) and control unit increases the
supply power for the solenoid valve (pressure increases), so that the return springs do not press the clutch piston and the
discs backwards. This pressure/amount of current B, which is the beginning point of the exact controlling, is called the
initial pressure.
The starting pressure can be changed, if needed, by index in the setting mode FIII.The setting range of the index is
---9...0...+9 (1 initial pressure = 1 % valve from control current). From this point begins the real connecting of the clutch.
transmitting begins to rise. At the same time the pressure of the previous gear clutch will be decreased.
463
Setting of the F/R ---shuttle engagement point 54 --- 58

Before setting the following point must be observed:
--- Transmission oil is in the operating temperature (+30˚C...+60˚C).

58 HiShift---button By means of the index it is possible to adjust how quickly the traction is engaged when
engagement the HiShift button (on the gear lever) is released. The adjustment affects only to situations
speed, both when the tractor stays still and then driving is started (Note. the indexes 54 and 55 affect to
directions ( only situations when the tractor moves). Increasing the index value makes the engagement
when starting) quicker. The index affects to the both driving directions.
The value can be changed in steps of 1 and the adjustment range is between ---3...+3.
Test function of the HiShift with the both driwing directions.

57 Clutch engage- With this index the clutch pedal can be adjusted so, that it engages exact at the same
ment point of point in forward and reverse direction. To increase the index with one step all the clutch
the clutch pedal control values will increase one percent and vice versa. So when increasing the
pedal, driving index the clutch pedal engages deeper and vice versa.
rearwards When both indexes are zero, the clutch slips and engages little earlier when driving rear-
wards
wards.
56 Clutch engage-
ment point of The index adjustment one at a time and the adjustment range is between ---3...+3
the clutch
pedal, driving Check the function of the clutch pedal by moving forwards and rearwards when slipping
forwards and adjusting the index when necessary.
engagement the HiShift button is released (when driving rearwards). The adjustment affects only to
speed, rear- situations when the tractor is moving (Note. the index 58 affect to start off). Increasing the
wards (during index value makes the engagement quicker.
driving)
The value can be changed in steps of 1 and the adjustment range is between ---3...+3.
Test function of the HiShift with many different loads and in various driving speeds.
engagement the HiShift button is released (when driving forwards). The adjustment affects only to si-
speed, for- tuations when the tractor is moving (Note. the index 58 affect to start off). Increasing the
wards (during index value makes the engagement quicker.
driving)
The value can be changed in steps of 1 and the adjustment range is between ---3...+3. In
some models (CR models of N and T1) the adjustment range is enlarged to value +7 in
order to get extremely quick engagement e.g. when using heavy trailers. The software
with the enlarged range took effect in the production from tractor no. U05520 incl., and it is
included in the MultiTool software package from v4.0.0.0 incl.
Test function of the HiShift with many different loads and in various driving speeds.
464
Manual calibration of F/R shuttle 50 --- 53

If the shuttle engagement causes so called ”double jerk” in the beginning of the engagement and the function has a great
delay, then:
--- decreasing the initial pressure index reduces the second jerk and increases the delay
--- increasing the index increases the jerk and reduces the delay.

53 R clutch initial NOTE Setting of the pre ---filling index must always be done before the setting of the initial
pressure pressures index.
Increase then the initial pressure index (53) one step at a time (---4, ---3, ---2, ---1, 0, +1, +2,
+3,, +4...)) and test the shuttle engagement
g g after every
y index change
g until,, the tractor accel-
52 F clutch initial erates evenly and there is not delay or break in the traction.
pressure --- If the traction breaks when engaging, increase the initial pressure index.
--- If the engagement is too sharp, decrease the initial pressure index.
Set initial pressure index of the F clutch in the same way.
51 R clutch pre fill- Set the F clutch initial pressure index (52) to ---9.
ing time Set the R clutch initial pressure index (53) to ---9.
Set the F clutch pre ---filling index (50) to ---3.
Set the R clutch pre ---filling index (51) to ---3.
filling index (51) one step at a time ((---3,
Increase the pre ---filling 3, ---2,
2, ---1,
1, 0, +1, +2, +3, +4...)
50 F clutch pre fill- and test the shuttle engagement after every index change until a clear jerk can be felt.
ing time Decrease then the index one or two steps.Check that in the starting driving there is a clear
but small jerk.When the desired index value is right, it is confirmed by pushing the DPS
preprogramming button. Set the pre ---filling index for the other F clutch by the same way.
When you are ready with the indexes 50 and 51 you must set the indexes 52 and 53.
465
Function of the F/R shuttle clutch
pressure of the clutch rises because the return springs of the piston begin to resist the movement.
At the same time control unit notes the amount of current taken by the coil into the memory. With this feature will the
variations of cold and hot solenoid be compensated, in order that control current and clutch pressure should be constant.
In other words the control unit sets the control current in relation with the current taken by the coil.
3) After the pre ---filling time the control unit reduces the control current of the valve.
The movement of the piston stops at the point, where the clutch discs are already quite near each other. The pressure of the
clutch has not time to decrease. The driver can observe a very little jerk at this point. This little jerk marks the correct setting
of the pre ---filling index. After that control unit supplies edgewave direct current (PWM=Pulse Width Modulation) and control
unit increases the supply power for the solenoid valve (pressure increases), so that the return springs do not press the
clutch piston and the discs backwards. This pressure/amount of current B, which is the beginning point of the exact
controlling, is called the initial pressure. The starting pressure can be changed, if needed, by index in the setting mode
FIII.
The setting range of the index is ---9...0...+9 (1 initial pressure = 1 % valve from control current). From this point begins
the real connecting of the clutch.
transmitting begins to rise.
466
Setting of the rear ratio parameters 30 --- 31

PTO index values shall always be checked and set after programming or assembling the control unit.

31 Rear PTO ratio 2 Set the parameter value for lever position according to tractor‘s PTO unit. See table
(lever in rear posi- below.
tion)
30 Rear PTO ratio 1
(lever in front posi-
tion)
Parameter value with different PTO types:
PTO ratio Parameter value

540 347
540E 285
540E (In ecopower models 305
C120e, M120e, N111eh,
N111ehcr, T140e, T140ech,
T151eh)
1000 200
1000E 175
467
Setting of the maximum driving speed 21 --- 22

With the parameters 21 and 22 the tractor calculates and limits the driving speed.
22 Maximum driving With this parameter the driving speed of the tractor will be limited. The tractor compares
speed (km/h) the maximum driving speed to calculate speed and limits the driving speed when the
setted maximum speed value exceeds.
The maximum driving speed of the tractor must conform at issue country authori-
ties and laws.
One step change adjusts the driving speed limit 1 km/h. So by increasing the index the
driving speed limit raises and by decreasing the index the driving speed limit drops.
The index adjustment one at a time and the adjustment range is between 0...65
Examples:
30 km/h tractor = 33 set value.
NOTE The setting can be changed only once. If the setting has to be changed again,
download the parameters again. After this carry out all calibrations and adjustments
again.
21 Calculation para- With this parameter the tractor calculates the driving speed. The tractor is using this
meter of the driving parameter for the driving speed calculation, due to this the tractor controls the maxi-
speed mum driving speed.
Here is used the same parameter value as in setting point 20. The parameter value is
setted according to tyres or calculate the parameter with the form. The parameters vari-
able in according to tyres and transmission types (see table of the next page).
NOTE The setting can be changed only once. If the setting has to be changed again,
download the parameters again. After this carry out all calibrations and adjustments
again.
Setting of the tyre size parameter 20

20 Tyre size parameter With this parameter the tractor speedometer is adjusted to show the correct speed.
The parameter is also used as speed data for the DPS ---gear and the shuttle.
The parameter value is set according to tyres or by calculating the parameter with the
formula. The parameters vary in according to tyres and transmission types (see table in
the code 411.4).
After setting parameter, carry out speed sensors calibration C 80. (Later in this instucti-
on)
NOTE If tractor tyres cannot be found in the table below or tyres are worn ---out, the code number can be calculated as fol-
lows:
Example:
--- Agroline instrument present code number is 170.
--- Tractor max. driving speed is 40 km/h.
--- Agroline instrument shows max. driving speed of 39 km/h when driving the tractor.
The code value X=174 can be calculated as follows:

X=174
170 x 40
X= = 174
39
468
T180-- T190
Parameter value with different tyre sizes and transmission types:
T180 ---T190 T180 ---T190
40 km/h 50 km/h 40 km/h 50 km/h
13.6---38/8N 217 196 420 / 85R38 CON 200 181
13.6R38 GY 216 196 460 / 85R38 CON 191 173
13.6R ---38/8M 217 196 480/70R ---38 199 181
14.9R ---38/8M 210 190 480/80R42 M 182 165
14.9R ---38/8N 210 190 520 / 70R34 CON 204 185
16.9---34/14IND 215 195 520 / 70R34 GY 204 185
16.9---34/8N 215 195 520 / 70R34 TA 205 186
16.9R34 GY 214 194 520 / 70R38 CON 194 176
16.9R ---34/8M 215 195 520 / 70R38 GY 192 174
16.9R ---34/8N 215 195 520 / 85R38 CON 182 165
16.9R ---38/8GY 202 183 520/70R ---34 205 185
16.9R ---38/8M 202 183 520/70R ---38 192 174
16.9R ---38/8N 202 183 520/85R42 170 154
18.4---34/14FOR 208 189 540 / 65R38 GY 201 182
18.4---34/14IND 208 189 540/65R ---38/M 203 184
18.4---34/8N 208 189 580 / 70R38 GY 183 166
18.4---34/IND 208 189 580 / 70R38 TA 183 166
18.4---38/14FOR 196 177 580/70R ---38 183 166
18.4---38/14IND 196 177 600 / 65R34 NO 204 185
18.4---38/FI 196 177 600 / 65R34 TA 205 186
18.4R ---34/8GY 208 189 600 / 65R38 CON 195 176
18.4R ---34/8M 208 189 600 / 65R38 GY 191 174
18.4R ---34/8N 208 189 600 / 65R38 IND 192 174
18.4R38 TA 192 174 600/65---34 FOR 205 186
18.4R ---38/14M 196 177 600/65R ---34/M 209 189
18.4R ---38/8GY 196 177 600/65R ---38/M 193 175
18.4R ---38/M 196 177 620/75R ---30/M 200 182
20.8R38 GY 184 167 650 / 65R38 NO 185 167
20.8R38 IND 185 168 650/65R38 CON 186 169
20.8R38 TA 183 166 650/65R38 FOR 184 166
20.8R ---38/8M 188 170 650/65R38 GY 183 166
20.8R ---38/M 188 170 650/65R38M 185 168
20.8R42 174 158 650/65R42 175 159
230/95R48 TA 201 182 650/75R38 174 158
270/95R48 TA 195 177 680/75R32 M 184 167
340 / 85R38 CON 216 196
469
Setting of the 4---WD automatics 10

10 4---WD automatics The 4---WD automatics can be chosen here either on (0,5...20) or off (0).
Automatics can be switched off by selecting the setting value zero
When the 4---WD automatics is on, the 4---WD is engaged for a moment in the drive
direction change/start, which reduces wheel slip on a slippery ground. After the drive
direction change/start the 4WD is disengaged automatically and this active state time
can be adjusted.
One step change adjusts active state time 0.5 sec. So by increasing the index active
state time for 4---WD automatics engagement raises and by decreasing the index active
state time drops.
The index adjustment 0,5 at a time and the adjustment range is between 0,5...20
470
Calibration of the clutch c 20

Before calibration the following items must be observed:
--- Engine revs are at the low idling speed.
In display Name Carrying ---out the calibration

C 20 Clutch pedal ca- Depress the clutch pedal gently and evenly to the bottom and keep the pedal in bot-
libration, (front and tom for a while, at which time the control unit reads values in the calibrating points and
rear) saves them in memory. After the successful calibration, the numbers 01 appear con-
tinuously to display.
If the calibration failed, an interruption code appears. Then the old values remain in
the memory. Begin the calibration again.
Rear clutch pedal calibration

Before calibration turn the seat to reverse direction and select the calibration C 20
agaen. Carry out the calibration by the same way as for the front clutch pedal.
Calibration interruption codes for the clutch pedal:
C960 Clutch pedal position value does not change evenly between upper and lower positions.
C961 Clutch pedal lower position value outside the operating range.
C962 Clutch pedal upper position value outside the operating range.
C963 Saving of the calibration values failed.
Calibration of the semi ---automatic range gear c 40

--- Move the tractor to a safe place and ensure that there is enough space in front of and behind the tractor.
--- Apply the parking brake.
--- Put the main gear in neutral.
--- Set the engine speed with the hand throttle to approximately 1000 rpm.

C 40 Semi ---automatic Start automatic calibration by pressing the Powershift pre ---programming switch.
range gear Number 0 (zero) is displayed.
After the successful calibration, the numbers 01 appear to display.
Let the engine run idle and test functioning of the range gear.
If a service code or an interruption code is displayed, check the reason for the mal-
function in the service code list.
471
Calibration of the gaspedal c 50

--- Engine revs are at the low idling speed.

C 50 Gas pedal calibra- Set the mechanical gears in neutral (engine at low idling). Raise the engine revs evenly
tion, (front and and gently with the throttle lever up to max. revs during about 10 seconds, however all
rear) the time the revs must go up. When the max. revs have been reached, wait about 3
seconds and press the HiShift button. At which time the control unit reads values in the
calibrating points and saves them in a memory. Lower to the low idling speed. After the
successful calibration, the numbers 01 appear continuously to display.
If the calibration has failed, Interruption code appears. Begin the calibration again and
raise once again the revs slower during 12---15 seconds with the hand gas lever. When
you approach max. revs the depressing of the pedal be slowed a little
Calibration interruption codes for the gas pedal:
C910 Gas pedal position value does not change evenly between upper and lower positions.
C911 Gas pedal lower position value outside the operating range.
C912 Gas pedal upper position value outside the operating range.
C913 Engine rotation speed too low when the gas pedal is in lower position.
C914 Engine rotation speed too high, when the gas pedal is in upper position.
C915 Engine rotation speed values does not change evenly between min and max rotation speed range.
472
Automatic calibration of PTO clutch c 60

Before automatic calibration check/carry out following points:
--- Disengage the PTO.
--- Check that the working hydraulics are in the free circulation phase (levers to the neutral position N).
--- If the PTO clutch is to be calibrated, move the PTO lever to the front position. The PTO calibration is done without a load on
the PTO shaft.
--- Move the shuttle lever to the neutral position N.
--- Adjust the engine revs with the hand throttle to 1700 ---1800 r/min.

C 60 Automatic calibrati- After calibration point confirm the lower row at the display appears empty (during the
on of rear PTO whole calibration). After this the calibration proceeds automatically and stops either to
clutch an interruption code or to a successful calibration.
After the successful calibration, the numbers 01 appear continuously to display and
after this the numbers of the calibrated point change on display e.g. C 60 (the calibra-
tion symbol of the clutch, which has been calibrated is blinking). After this it can be
stepped to another calibration point etc. A calibration of a clutch takes about 1...1,5
minutes. If the calibration has failed, Interruption code appears. Then the old values
remain in the memory. Check the fault reason and begin the calibration again.
Interruption codes:
C901 The seat switch does not recognize a driver or clutch pedal has been depressed during calibration.
C902 Parking brake applied, engine revs wrong, gearbox temperatute wrong, mechanical gear is not engaged or trac-
tor on a sloping ground.
C903 Initial pressure calibration does not find a correct value in spite of many attempts. The tractor starts to move too
sharply. Ensure, that the tractor is on the level ground and that the correct mechanical gear has been engaged.
C904 Clutch which is calibrated does not transmit enough high torque. E.g. piston or valve trapped, pressure of low
pressure circuit is too low, leaks etc.
C905 Calculated initial pressure index is not within given limits (limits ---9...+9).
C906 Calculated pre ---filling index is not within given limits (e.g. clutch piston does not move freely or clutch worn out)
(limits ---9...+9).
C907 The pre ---filling time calibration does not find a correct value in spite of many attempts.
473
Calibration of the steering and speed sensors c 70 --- c 80

C 70 Steering calibration After calibration point confirm the lower row at the display is blinking the 00 sign. Turn
steering wheel from the left end position to the right end position and thereafter to middle
position and press the DPS pre ---programming button. Now the control unit reads end
position values in the calibrating points and saves them in to the memory.
After this digits 01 appear in the two RH side digits and thereafter starts blinking the 02
sign.
Drive straight and adjust driving speed with hand throttle about 6km/h (see speeds and
gears operator’s manual from the speed ranges tabel).
When driving speed is about 6km/h, push the DPS pre ---programming button. Now the
control unit reads middle position values in the calibrating points and saves them in to
the memory.
After the successful calibration, the numbers 02 appear continuously to display.
If the calibration has failed, Interruption code appears. Then the old values remain in
C 80 Speed sensors ca- Before the start of calibration:
libration --- Put the 4WD and differential lock rocker switches to the off position.
--- Check the tyre parameter.
After calibration point confirm the lower row at the display appears the radar speed, then
the radar must be checked. Drive straight and adjust driving speed with hand throttle
about 6km/h. See speed and gear in the operator’s manual speed range tabel and chec-
k by comparing with that of the radar speed.
If the radar is correct, confirm the radar speed with DPS pre ---programming button and
thereafter on the display blinking 00 sign. Drive straight and adjust driving speed with
hand throttle about 6km/h.
After the successful calibration, the numbers 01 appear continuously to display.
If the calibration has failed, Interruption code appears. Then the old values remain in
Calibration interruption codes for the steering angle sensor:
C950 End position values of steering angle sensor outside the operating range.
C951 Middle position value of steering angle sensor outside the operating range.
C953 Calibration points for middle position of the steering angle sensor not enough.
Calibration interruption codes for the speed sensors:
C930 Steering not calibrated.

C931 Steering not in middle position.
C932 Fault in the sensors. System assumes, that 4WD is switched on.
C933 4WD is switched on.
C934 Fault in the sensors. System assumes, that differential lock is switched on.
C935 Differential lock is switched on.
C937 Fault in the calibration program.
C938 Fault in the signal from transmission sensor.
C939 Fault in the signal from rear tyre sensor.
C940 Fault in the signal from front axle sensor.
C941 Fault in the radar signal.
C942 Fault in the calibration program.
C943 Driving speed of the calibration too low or fault in the radar signal.
C944 Driving speed of the calibration not even.
474
Automatic calibration of shuttle and DPS clutches c 90 --- c120

Before automatic calibrations check/carry out following points:
--- Calibrate the clutch pedal.
--- Drive the tractor on a level ground, preferably on asphalt, on tarmac or on hard gravel, where there is space forwards and
backwards for some meters (during calibration the tractor moves some centimeters forwards and backwards and stops
itself).
--- Remove possible pre ---programming of the DPS speeds by pressing the pre ---programming button more than 2 seconds
when the shuttle lever is in the neutral position N.
--- Disengage the differential lock, 4WD and PTO.
--- Check that the working hydraulics are in the free circulation phase (levers to the neutral position N). Turn the front wheel
straight ahead.
--- Move the shuttle lever to the neutral position N.
--- Engage a mechanical gear: In 40 km/h models gear M4 and in 50 km/h models gear M3.
--- Adjust the engine revs with the hand throttle to 1700 ---1800 r/min.

C 90 Automatic calibrati- After calibration point confirm the lower row at the display appears empty (during the
on of F clutch whole calibration). After this the calibration proceeds automaticallyy and stops either to
an interruption
i t ti code d or tto a successful
f l calibration.
lib ti
C 100 Automatic calibrati-
After the successful calibration, the numbers 01 appear continuously to display and
on of R clutch
after this the numbers of the calibrated point change on display e.g. C 90 (the calibra-
C 110 Automatic calibrati- tion symbol of the clutch, which has been calibrated is blinking). After this it can be
on of DPS clutch stepped to another calibration point etc. A calibration of a clutch takes about 1...1,5
(C1) minutes. If the calibration has failed, Interruption code appears. Then the old values
remain in the memory
memory. Check the fault reason and begin the calibration again
again.
C 120 Automatic calibrati-
on of DPS clutch
(C2)
Interruption codes:
C901 The seat switch does not recognize a driver or clutch pedal has been depressed during calibration.
C902 Parking brake applied, engine revs wrong, gearbox temperatute wrong, mechanical gear is not engaged or trac-
tor on a sloping ground.
C903 Initial pressure calibration does not find a correct value in spite of many attempts. The tractor starts to move too
sharply. Ensure, that the tractor is on the level ground and that the correct mechanical gear has been engaged.
C904 Clutch which is calibrated does not transmit enough high torque. E.g. piston or valve trapped, pressure of low
pressure circuit is too low, leaks etc.
C905 Calculated initial pressure index is not within given limits (limits ---9...+9).
C906 Calculated pre ---filling index is not within given limits (e.g. clutch piston does not move freely or clutch worn out)
(limits ---9...+9).
C907 The pre ---filling time calibration does not find a correct value in spite of many attempts.
475
476
Settings of Agroline instrument panel
Clock 12/24 EngineRPM FptoRPM kmh/miles AC100 AC0 Rpto on/off Fpto pn/off Sigma on/off
Tractor Mech/ Chassis no
model EEM 1)
100 series:
600, 700, 800, 900
Mech. 12/24 269 32 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 off off off
6000 series:
6200, 6300, 6400, 6600, 6800 (AC2.2/2.3)
6250H, 6350H, 6550H, 6650H, 6850H (AC5/5.2)
Mech. =>L51303 12/24 273 40 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 on off/on off
Mech. L51304 => 12/24 273 33 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 on off/on off
6400 (AC2.4)
6550H, 6850H (AC5.4)

EEM N28101 => 2) 12/24 440 51 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 on off/on off
6750H (AC5.2)
477
Mech. L51304=> 12/24 273 28 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 on off/on off
8000 series:
8050, 8150, 8450, 8550 (AC2.2/2.3)
8050H, 8150H, 8450H, 8550H (AC5/5.2)
Mech. =>N27550 12/24 273 33 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 on off/on off
1.5.2008
19.2.2010
8050, 8150 (AC2.4)

8050H, 8150H (AC5.4)
EEM N28101 => 2) 12/24 406 45 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 on off/on off
All
Series
8350H (AC5.2)
Mech. =>N27550 12/24 273 28 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 on off/on off
8750 (AC2.2/2.3)
8950H (AC5/5.2)
Mech. 12/24 273 33 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 on off/on on
8950 (AC6.0)
Code
421.5
EEM Agroline is not used in this tractor model, use Proline instrument panel.
1) Mech. = Mechanically controlled injection pump., EEM = Electronically controlled engine.
33
Page
2) Some tractors from no. N26114 to N28101 have also an EEM engine. See the list on page 35 (421.4).
3) After set---up procedure: Check that the “AC” display shows 99% when the lower links are at the top position. If the value is 99% clearly earlier you shoud change the setting to 7,25.
model EEM 1)
A series:
A65
A75
(Stanad. Mech. =>N51550 12/24 269 32 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 off off off
pump)
(Bosch VE Mech. P01101=> 12/24 304 32 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 off off off
pump)
A85, A95
(Stanad. Mech. =>N49450 12/24 269 32 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 off off off
pump)
(Bosch VE Mech. N49501=> 12/24 304 32 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 off off off
pump)
478
An series:
A75n
A85n, A95n
Mech 12/24 304 32 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 off off off
A series:
1.5.2008
19.2.2010
A72, A92, A92

Mech 12/24 440 53 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 off off off
All
Series
Code
421.5
34
Page
model EEM 1)
C series:
C90, C100, C110 (AC8.3)
Mech. 12/24 440 51 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 on off/on off
C120, C130, C150 (AC8.5)
EEM 12/24 440 51 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 on off/on off
C120e (AC8.5)
M series:
M120, M130, M150 (AC5.5)
M120e (AC5.5)
S series:
479
S230---S280 (AC7.0/7.1)
1.5.2008
19.2.2010
All
Series
Code
421.5
35
Page
model EEM 1)
N series:
N82h, N92h (AC13.0)
Mech 12/24 440 53 kmh/miles 7,013 2,88 on off/on off
N91c, N101c, N111c (AC9.0)
Mech. 12/24 440 51 kmh/miles 7,013 2,88 on off/on off
N101cCR (AC9.2)
N91h, N101h, N111h (AC10.0)
N111eh (AC10.1)

N101hCR, N111ehCR (AC10.2)
480
N121h, N141h (AC10.2)
N121LS, N141LS (AC11.2)
X and XM series:
X100, X110, X120
1.5.2008
19.2.2010

Mech. L51304=> 12/24 273 33 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 on off/on off
All
X100, X110, X120 FOREST

Series

XM130, XM150 (AC5.5)
2) Some tractors from no. N26114 to N28101 have also an EEM engine. See the list on page 35 (421.4)
Code
421.5
36
Page
model EEM 1)
T series:
T120, T130, T160, T170 (AC5.3)
Mech. =>N27550 2) 12/24 273 33 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 on off/on off
T120, T130, T150, T160, T170 (AC5.5)
EEM N28101=> 2) 12/24 406 47 khm/miles 7,013) 2,88 on off/on off
T120c, T130c, T150c, T160c, T170c (AC2.4)
T120cH, T130cH, T150cH, T160cH, T170cH (AC5.4)
T170cCR (AC2.7)
T170cHCR (AC5.7)
T170CR (AC5.6)

T140e (AC5.3)
Mech. =>N27550 2) 12/24 273 28 khm/miles 7,013) 2,88 on off/on off
481
T140e (AC5.5)
T140ec (AC2.4)
T140ecH (AC5.4)
EEM N28101=> 2) 12/24 406 42 kmh/miles 7,013) 2,88 on off/on off
T180, T190 (AC6.1/6.2)
T180CR, T190CR (AC6.6)
1.5.2008
19.2.2010
All
Series
Code
421.5
37
Page
model EEM 1)
T1 series:
T121c, T131c, T161c, T171c (AC9.2)
EEM 12/24 406 47 khm/miles 7,013) 2,88 on off/on off
T121h, T131h, T151eh, T161h, T171h (AC10.2)
EEM 12/24 406 47 khm/miles 7,013) 2,88 on off/on off
T191h (AC10.21)
T151eLS, T161LS, T171LS, T191LS (AC11.2)
482
1.5.2008
19.2.2010
All
Series
Code
421.5
38
Page
1.5.2008 All 421.5 39
Some tractors from no. N26114 to N28101 have also an EEM engine.
6550 N26114
T130 N26138
T160 N26225
8050Hi N26246
8050 N26321
T160 N26346
T120 N26405
6400 N26434
6400 N26507
T130 N26545
T160 N27108
8150Hi N27114
T140 N27125
T160 N27139
6400 N27144
T160 N27206
T160 N27214
6550Hi N27224
8150 N27234
T130 N27239
6400 N27308
T160 N27311
T140 N27320
T160 N27333
8150Hi N27340
6550Hi N27405
T130 N27413
T170 N27441
8050 N27448
8050Hi N27511
T160 N27514
T160 N27521
T140 N27525
6400 N27535
T160 N27547
483
1.5.2008 All 421.5 40
484
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 421.6 41
Settings of Tractor terminal, LS models

Adjusting the Tractor terminal
1. In the main menu, press the up arrow button .
2. Press the OK button until the view for adjusting the

display brightness and changing units is displayed.
3. Make the settings.
4. Leave the view by pressing the ESC button .
Activating the equipment

1. Go to the Service and Calibration mode from Tractor
terminal main menu by pressing OK button three
times and once ESC button .
2. Press the right arrow button twice.

3. Make the settings.(ON= in use, OFF = not in use)
= Front PTO
= Sigma power
= Front power lift

4. Exit the service menu by swithing the power off.
485
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 421.6 42
486
Model Code Page
42. SETTINGS AND CALIBRATIONS Versu
19.2.2010 Direct 421.7 43
Settings of Tractor terminal, Versu and Direct models

Adjusting the Tractor terminal Calibrating the control levers of the auxiliary
hydraulics
1. In the main menu, press the up arrow button .
2. Press the OK button until the view for adjusting the terminal main menu by pressing OK button three
display brightness and changing units is displayed.
times and once ESC button .
3. Make the settings.
2. Press the down arrow button four times.
3. Press the left arrow button .

4. Leave the view by pressing the ESC button .
Activating the equipment

terminal main menu by pressing OK button three
times and ESC button once.
2. Press the down arrow button four times.
3. Press the right arrow button .

4. Make the settings (ON= in use, OFF = not in use)
= Front PTO
= Sigma power
= Front power lift

487
Model Code Page
42. SETTINGS AND CALIBRATIONS Versu
19.2.2010 Direct 421.7 44
488
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.8 45
Adjustable indexes in Versu models

The most of indexes are available provided that the tractor is equipped with sufficiently up ---to---date software (software
version 1.7.0.0 Versu or later). The version of the TC1 software has to be 1.1.16.2 or later. Indexes can be adjusted by means
of the MultiTool service terminal (software package v6.0.0.0 or later) or by using the service mode in the tractor terminal.
Note that the both interfaces can not be used simultaneously.
Do not use the Multitool application or this instruction with older software since numbers or meanings of many indexes have
been modified.
Adjustments
Index Unit Minimum Maximum Standard Description Symbol in

no. value TT
display1)
1 mm 700 1000 905 Tyre parameter (dynamic radius)
2 ms 800 3000 1600 Clutch pedal, torque increase time limit

(0.8 s) (3.0 s) (1.6 s) The index determines how quickly the torque of the
main clutch is allowed to increase when the clutch
pedal is released quickly.
E.g. If the value is 1600 ms, the torque may
increase from 0 Nm to the maximum torque in 1.6
seconds.
3 2) 1 4 2 Clutch pedal, engagement position
2)
The index determines the position of the clutch
pedal by which the movement of the tractor stops
when the clutch pedal is pressed downwards.
1 = appr. 5% from the lowest pos.
Note. When raising the pedal the tractor starts to
move with a higher position ---% value.
Note. The adjustment moves the whole operation
range of the clutch pedal.
10 s 0 20 4 4WD automatics when starting out, time
20 0 1 1 4WD automatics when starting out, ON/OFF

OFF ON
30 2) 1 10 4 F&R engagement, rapidity
2)
(many (appr. The index determines how quickly the torque of the
seconds) 0.5s) power shuttle is increased to maximum value when
the clutch is engaged.
The index affects to all engagements of F and R
clutches.
1 = engagement is very slow
10 = engagement is very quick
50 0 1 1 C/D range AutoShifting, ON/OFF
OFF ON (in modes 1&2)
90 mbar 0 5 0 Rear PTO starting, initial pressure (+) increment
(+0 mbar) (+1000 (1 step = +200 mbar)
mbar) Use higher value for heavier implements (improves
PTO starting process).
220 % 20 100 50 Effect of engine torque on Powershift shifting
(This index does not need to be adjusted.)
The index determines the percentage of actual
engine torque that has an effect on Powershift
control.
E.g. If the value is 20, the engine torque affects
Powershift shifting slightly.
1) The index can also be adjusted by the operator.

2) The indexes no. 3 and 30 are available in the service mode and in operator’s settings from sw version 1.8.0.0 incl.
489
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.8 46
Equipment installed
Index Minimum 1) Maximum 1) Standard Description
no. value
400 0 2 0 Ground speed radar installed
401 0 2 0 Steering angle sensor installed
402 0 2 0 Sigma Power installed
(Sigma Power models only)
403 0 2 0 TwinTrac (reverse drive) installed
404 0 2 0 Creeper gear installed
405 0 2 0 ECO selection switch installed
(ECO models only)
406 0 2 0 Trailer hook release switch installed
407 0 2 0 PTO mudguard button installed
409 2) 0 2) 1 2) 0 Front throttle pedal limit switch installed
0 = (not installed) up until tractor no. V37319
1 = (installed) starting from tractor no. V37320
Note that the indexes no. 400...407 are so called auto---detection indexes which means that sensors and control switches are
automatically recognized if they are connected to the wire harness. Due to this the index value is automatically set to 0 or 1.
In a special case that you want to deactivate the function you can set the index value manually to 2.
1) Values and their meanings:
0 = equipment is not installed (automatic detection)
1 = equipment is installed (automatic detection)
2 = equipment is not in use (manually selected value)
2) Index 409: Check the function of the limit switch (for safety reasons). Use the input/output testing application in the
MultiTool. The input number in the engine control unit (EC) is Di7.
Values: 0 = the pedal is in top position, 1 = the pedal is pressed (the pedal is not in the top position)
Adjustments
Index Unit Minimum Maximum Standard Description
no. value
420 3) % ---20 20 0 Sigma Power engagement adjustment 3)
430 km/h 2 6 2 Parking brake speed limit (km/h)
440 1) 10 100 0 Transmission type no. 1)
441 1) 0 100 0 Rear PTO type no. 1)
451 2) km/h 33 53 43 Max speed limit (km/h) 1)
453 4) mm 700 1000 1000 Tyre parameter, factory 4)
454 0 1 1 LA/LB range shifting with creeper gear
(manual shifting at driving speed over 0.2 km/h)
0 = not allowed, 1 = allowed
1) The indexes number 440 and 441 must be adjusted before calibrations. Otherwise calibrations will fail. See figures 1
and 2 later in this instruction.
2) Setting index no. 451 requires specific actions to be taken:
Copy indexes onto a memory card  Upload indexes from memory card to tractor  Adjust index number 451 (this is
possible up until the next power switch ---off).
Note! Index 451 cannot be adjusted by means of the service mode in the tractor terminal.
3) Index 420 cannot be adjusted using the MultiTool. (The value becomes locked.) Adjust the value by means of the service
mode in the tractor terminal.
4) The value of the index 453 was set during the production process in the factory. The value was chosen according to the
original tyre size. The index is available from the software version 1.11.0.0. The index can not be adjusted by means of the
Tractor terminal.
The purpose of the index is to protect the transmission against too high rotation speed in a case that the operator adjusts
the tyre parameter (index no. 1) with an improper value.
After updating of the tractor software the index 453 must be checked and adjusted according to the tyre size.
490
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.8 47
Figure 1
V15118PJ
The letter code has been stamped on the left---hand side of the gearbox.
For example: V15118PJ where PJ = ID letter code
Tractor models Transmission type 1) ID letter code Index 440, value

N122 V --- N142 V 40 km/h PA, PB 10
N122 V --- N142 V 50 km/h PE, PF 12
T132 V --- T152 V 2) 40 km/h PC, PD 2) 11

T132 V --- T152 V 50 km/h PG, PH 13
T162e V --- T202 V 2) 40 km/h PK, PL 2) 14

T162e V --- T202 V 50 km/h PI, PJ 15
1) The mechanical type of the transmission

(Note that the maximum driving speed may differ from this value.)
2) If the tractor number is V02338 or earlier you should check if the tractor is one of the special pre ---serial tractors listed
below. If yes you should use the values given in the table below.
Values for the special pre ---serial tractors:

U50232 T202V, U51147 T182V, U51420 T202V, U51520 T172V, V02338 T152V
Tractor models Transmission type Rear axle type ID letter code Index 440, value
T162e V --- T202 V 40 km/h 650 PC, PD 16 1)
T162e V --- T202 V 40 km/h 750 PK, PL 17 1)
1) The values 16 and 17 are available when the tractor has software version 1.8.0.0 or later.
On these five tractors, the location of the forward speed sensor (B6) is different than in the other Versu tractors. On these
tractors, forward speed sensor (B6) counts the teeth of the gear wheel (45 pulses/revolution); whereas the sensor on all other
Versu tractors counts the teeth of a separate measuring gear (41 pulses/revolution).
This means that in these tractors different values for the index no. 440 need to be used than in the other Versu tractors.
491
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.8 48
Figure 2
The numeric code has been stamped on the rear side of

PTO housing.
For example: 61 where 61 = ID number
PTO type Numeric ID Index 441,

code value
540/1000 60 1 61
540/1000 + GS 1) 60 2
1000/540E 61 7
1000/540E + GS 1) 61 8
540/540E 62 5
540/540E + GS 1) 62 6
1000 63 3
1000 + GS 1) 63 4
1) GS = The tractor is equipped with ground speed PTO
492
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.8 49
Multi-- disc clutches

Rear PTO
Usually there is no need for calibrations or for adjusting the indexes for PTO. However, if the PTO starting cycle does not work
well, you should perform the PTO calibrations (calibrations number 037 and 047) with the implement connected. The
calibrations set the values for indexes no. 500 and 501.
Do not adjust the following indexes manually.

no. value
500 ms 52 244 180 Rear PTO clutch, pre ---fill time
501 mbar 1000 5000 3600 Rear PTO clutch, initial pressure
Use indexes 503 and 504 to adjust the operation of the clutch, if necessary. Note that there is also index no. 090 for an
adjustment performed by the operator.
For adjusting the function of the rear PTO clutch:

no. value
503 ms 0 144 0 Rear PTO, pre ---fill time increment (+)
504 mbar 0 4000 0 Rear PTO, initial pressure increment (+)
Power shuttle, clutches F and R

The indexes 506---509 must be adjusted using the calibration functions (calibrations number 031, 032, 041, 042). Do not
adjust these indexes manually.
After the calibrations, you should use indexes 510 ---546 to adjust the function of the clutches.
no. value
506 mbar 1) 7000 29000 11560 F clutch, pre ---fill pressure
507 mbar 1400 6000 3500 F clutch, initial pressure
508 mbar 1) 7000 29000 9240 R clutch, pre ---fill pressure
509 mbar 1400 6000 2000 R clutch, initial pressure
1) The unit displayed on the MultiTool display is not correct (ms). The correct unit is mbar.
Use indexes 510---546 to adjust the function of the clutches according to their use.
493
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.8 50
Clutch pedal
Always after calibration of F/R clutches you should adjust the clutch pedal by means of indexes no. 510 --- 514.
For adjusting the prefill pressure for clutch pedal use:

no. value
510 mbar 0 7000 500 F dir. Clutch pedal, prefill pressure(---) decrement
513 mbar 0 7000 1500 R dir. Clutch pedal, prefill pressure(---) decrement
Adjustment of the prefill pressure (indexes 510 and 513):

Engage the gear A1. Raise the clutch pedal slowly up to a click of the limit switch. Then, the tractor is not allowed to move,
but a little jerk should be notified.
---If the tractor starts out (i.e. starts to move) or if the jerk is too big, you should increase the index value. So, when increasing
the value the pre ---fill becomes smaller.
---If you don’t notify a little jerk you should decrease the index value
For adjusting the initial pressure for clutch pedal use:

no. value
511 mbar 0 5000 900 F dir. Clutch pedal, initial pressure(---) decrement
514 mbar 0 5000 700 R dir. Clutch pedal, initial pressure(---) decrement
Adjustment of the initial pressure (indexes 511 and 514):

Note! This working order is valid when the tractor has software version 1.8.0.0 or newer one.
Note! Before the adjustment you must check that the value of the index no. 3 (clutch pedal, engagement position) is 2.
Otherwise the given percentage values are not valid for the adjustment.
Note! Select the temperature value visible to the pillar display before you begin to adjust the indexes.
Open an index (e.g. no. 511) and save it by pressing Enter. The position of the pedal is displayed as a percentage on the
pillar display.
Engage the gear A1. Start to drive the tractor. Press the clutch pedal slowly downwards. The tractor must stop when the
position value on the display goes below 10 (7...10), see the figure 3.
---If the value is higher you should decrease the index value.
---If the value is lower you should increase the index value.
Check also that the movement of the tractor ends before the clutch pedal is in the position of the limit switch.
Figure 3
494
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.8 51
Adjustments for functions of the power shuttle

Adjust the following indexes only if the behaviour of the tractor needs to be improved.
For adjusting the function of F and R clutches when the power shuttle lever is used to start driving the tractor (i.e. when
the tractor is at a standstill and starts to move):
no. value
517 mbar 0 7000 600 F start out, pre ---fill pressure (+) increment
518 mbar 0 4000 800 F start out, initial pressure (+) increment
521 mbar 0 7000 200 R start out, pre ---fill pressure (+) increment
522 mbar 0 4000 600 R start out, initial pressure (+) increment
Testing instructions for indexes 517---522:

1. On flat surface: The tractor is at a standstill (stopped).  Engage the driving direction F (several times).  Adjust the
indexes for direction F, if necessary.  Repeat the same procedure for direction R.
Note! The tractor must be at a standstill when you engage the driving direction.
For adjusting the behaviour of F and R clutches when the power shuttle lever is used to change the driving direction:
no. value
525 mbar 0 7000 900 Change R»F, pre ---fill pressure increment (+)
526 mbar 0 4000 300 Change R»F, initial pressure increment (+)
529 mbar 0 7000 100 Change F»R, pre ---fill pressure increment (+)
530 mbar 0 4000 0 Change F»R, initial pressure increment (+)
495
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.8 52
For adjusting the function of F and R clutches when the clutch is engaged during movement (i.e. when the tractor has a
driving speed of over approximately 4 km/h):
no. value
533 mbar 0 7000 1300 F clutch, re ---engaging, pre ---fill pressure increment (+)
534 mbar 0 4000 1700 F clutch, re ---engaging, initial pressure increment (+)
537 mbar 0 7000 800 R clutch, re ---engaging, pre ---fill pressure increment (+)
538 mbar 0 4000 1500 R clutch, re ---engaging, initial pressure increment (+)
For adjusting the function of F and R clutches, when the N AUTO (Autotraction) function initiates the driving start (i.e.
when the tractor is at a standstill, the N AUTO function is activated with the switch and the gas pedal is pressed to move the
tractor):
no. value
541 mbar 0 7000 600 F clutch, N AUTO driving start, pre ---fill pressure increment (+)
542 mbar 0 4000 500 F clutch, N AUTO driving start, initial pressure increment (+)
545 mbar 0 7000 0 R clutch, N AUTO driving start, pre ---fill pressure increment (+)
546 mbar 0 4000 400 R clutch, N AUTO driving start, initial pressure increment (+)
496
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.8 53
Powershift, clutches C1, C2, C3 and C4

The indexes 548---555 must be adjusted by means of the calibration functions (calibrations number 033---036 and 043---046).
Do not adjust indexes number 548 ---555 manually.

no. value
548 1) mbar 2600 20000 5200 C1 clutch, pre ---fill pressure (4»3)
Affects Powershift shifting 4»3
549 mbar 800 4000 1400 C1 clutch, initial pressure (4»3)
550 1) mbar 2600 20000 8600 C2 clutch, pre ---fill pressure (2»3)
551 mbar 800 4000 1300 C2 clutch, initial pressure (2»3)
552 1) mbar 2600 20000 6800 C3 clutch, pre ---fill pressure (»2,»4)
Affects Powershift shifting 1»2, 3»2, 3»4, 5»4
553 mbar 800 4000 1200 C3 clutch, initial pressure (»2,»4)
Affects Powershift shifting 1»2, 3»2, 3»4, 5»4
554 1) mbar 2600 20000 7400 C4 clutch, pre ---fill pressure (2»1, 4»5)
Affects Powershift shifting 2»1, 4»5
555 mbar 800 4000 1700 C4 clutch, initial pressure (2»1, 4»5)
Affects Powershift shifting 2»1, 4»5
Use indexes 557---586 to adjust the function of the clutches according to the engaging functions they are used for.
497
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.8 54
Adjustments for Powershift functions
For adjusting the engagement function of the Powershift clutches. Each step can be adjusted separately.
no. value
557 mbar 0 7000 1000 PS 1»2, pre ---fill pressure increment (+)
558 mbar 0 4000 0 PS 1»2, initial pressure increment (+)
570 mbar 0 4000 0 PS 4 »5, initial pressure increment (+)
Autotraction (N AUTO)

no. value
1000 rpm 920 1500 1020 N AUTO, engagement, rpm
1001 rpm 880 1460 1) 980 N AUTO, disengagement, rpm
1002 m/h 10000 18000 12000 N AUTO, disengagement, km/h
(10 km/h) (18 km/h) (12 km/h)
1) The maximum value of index number 1001 depends on the value of index number 1000.
498
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.9 55
Adjustable indexes in Direct models

The most of indexes are available provided that the tractor is equipped with sufficiently up ---to---date software (software
version 1.6.0.0 Direct or later). The version of the TC1 software has to be 2.1.17.2 or later. Indexes can be adjusted by means
of the MultiTool service terminal (software package v6.2.0.0 or later) or by using the service mode in the tractor terminal.
Note that the both interfaces can not be used simultaneously.
Do not use the Multitool application or this instruction with older software since numbers or meanings of many indexes have
been modified.
Adjustments

no. value TT
display1)
1 2) mm 700 1000 905 Tyre parameter (dynamic radius) 2)
2 ms 800 3000 1600 Clutch pedal, torque increase time limit

(0.8 s) (3.0 s) (1.6 s) The index determines how quickly the torque of the
main clutch is allowed to increase when the clutch
pedal is released quickly.
E.g. If the value is 1600 ms, the torque may
increase from 0 Nm to the maximum torque in 1.6
seconds.
3 3) 1 4 2 Clutch pedal, engagement position
3)
The index determines the position of the clutch
pedal by which the movement of the tractor stops
when the clutch pedal is pressed downwards.
Note! When raising the pedal the tractor starts to
move with a higher position ---% value.
Note! The adjustment moves the whole operation
range of the clutch pedal.
10 s 0 20 4 4WD automatics when starting out, time
F R
20 0 1 1 4WD automatics when starting out, ON/OFF

OFF ON F R
30 3) 1 10 4 F&R engagement, rapidity

3)
(many (appr. The index determines how quickly the torque of the
seconds) 0.5s) power shuttle is increased to maximum value when
the clutch is engaged.
The index affects to all engagements of F and R
clutches.
1 = engagement is very slow
10 = engagement is very quick
50 0 1 1 C/D range AutoShifting, ON/OFF
OFF ON
90 mbar 0 5 0 Rear PTO starting, initial pressure (+) increment
(+0 mbar) (+1000 (1 step = +200 mbar)
mbar) Use higher value for heavier implements (improves
PTO starting process).
1) The index can also be adjusted by the operator (through the tractor terminal).
2) The index no. 1 is available in the service mode only (up to sw version 1.7.0.0). From sw version 1.9.0.0 incl it is available in
operator’s settings too.
3) The indexes no. 3 and 30 are available in the service mode (from sw version 1.7.0.0 incl). From sw version 1.9.0.0 incl they
are available in operator’s settings too.
499
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.9 56

no. value TT
display1)
100 rpm 1000 2250 2250 Engine speed limit, rpm
The setting limits the maximum engine speed in all
conditions (also when the engine braking function is
active).
Also adjust index number 101.
101 0 1 0 Engine speed limitation, ON/OFF
OFF ON Also adjust index number 100.
110 km/h 1 53 53 Driving speed limit, km/h
The setting limits the maximum driving speed in all
conditions. This index is for operator use. Index
number 451 is for service technician use.
Also adjust index number 111.
111 0 1 0 Driving speed limitation, ON/OFF
OFF ON Also adjust index number 110.
120 2) 1 10 5 Transmission droop minimum value.
This determines the minimum droop value used by
the system.
Up to software v1.11.0.0: The adjustment does not
affect to the system when the PTO (rear or front) is
engaged. (Instead, the system uses a fixed droop
value 2% that is not adjustable.)
From software v1.12.0.0 incl.: The adjustment
affects to the system also when PTO (rear or front)
is engaged. (The system uses the value that is set
by the index no.120, 1...10%.)
The adjusted value is used in the ”Power mode”. In
the ”ECO mode”, the system uses a much higher
droop value (also when PTO is engaged).
1 = transmission ratio is affected even by a minor
drop in engine speed (improves the sensitivity and
transmitted force of the tractor)
10 = engine speed may drop relatively much
before the transmission system adjusts the
transmission ration (a higher value makes the
tractor more economical)
The adjustment is used in the automatic driving
mode only.
130 0 1 1 Hydraulics assistant, ON/OFF
OFF ON The engine speed is automatically increased when
added output is required for hydraulics (in the
automatic and semi ---automatic driving modes)
140 0 1 0 Manual driving mode (mode 2), ON/OFF
OFF ON Note! The adjustment is not saved permanently.
The setting remains active only until the next
switch ---off or when the selection switch for the
driving mode is used for the next time.
2) Look at the figure 4, 5 and 6: Transmission droop values.
500
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.9 57

no. value TT
display1)
150 1 3 2 Engine brake
1 = minimum braking (”rolling mode”)
(Note that minimum braking mode does not
disengage the drive during engine braking.)
2 = normal engine braking
3 = maximum engine braking
160 0 1 0 Power take ---off cruise control, ON/OFF
OFF ON This setting determines whether the function is
active or not.
1 = When a PTO speed is selected (using the lever)
the system saves the engine speed that
corresponds to the selected nominal PTO speed.
The value is saved in the previously used cruise
control memory slot.
Equipment installed
Index Minimum 1) Maximum 1) Standard Description
no. value
400 0 2 0 Ground speed radar installed
401 0 2 0 Steering angle sensor installed
402 0 2 0 Sigma Power installed
(Sigma Power models only)
403 0 2 0 TwinTrac (reverse drive) installed
404 0 2 0 Creeper gear installed
405 0 2 1 ECO selection switch installed
406 0 2 0 Trailer hook release switch installed
407 0 2 0 PTO mudguard button installed
409 2) 0 2) 1 2) 1 Front throttle pedal limit switch installed
0 = (not installed) up until tractor no. V15107
1 = (installed) starting from tractor no. V15108
Note that the indexes no. 400...407 are so called auto---detection indexes which means that sensors and control switches are
automatically recognized if they are connected to the wire harness. Due to this the index value is automatically set to 0 or 1.
In a special case that you want to deactivate the function you can set the index value manually to 2.
1) Values and their meanings:
0 = equipment is not installed (automatic detection)
1 = equipment is installed (automatic detection)
2 = equipment is not in use (manually selected value)
2) Index 409: Check the function of the limit switch (for safety reasons). Use the input/output testing application in the
MultiTool. The input number in the engine control unit (EC) is Di7.
Values: 0 = the pedal is in top position, 1 = the pedal is pressed (the pedal is not in the top position)
501
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.9 58
Adjustments
no. value
420 3) % ---20 20 0 Sigma Power engagement adjustment 3)
430 km/h 2 6 2 Parking brake speed limit (km/h)
440 1) 100 199 0 Transmission type no. 1)
441 1) 0 100 0 Rear PTO type no. 1)
451 2) km/h 33 53 43 Max speed limit (km/h) 1)
453 4) mm 700 1000 1000 Tyre parameter, factory 4)
454 Not in use
1) The indexes number 440 and 441 must be adjusted before calibrations. Otherwise calibrations will fail. See figures 1
and 2 later in this instruction.
2) Setting index no. 451 requires specific actions to be taken:
Copy indexes onto a memory card  Upload indexes from memory card to tractor  Adjust index number 451 (this is
possible up until the next power switch ---off).
Note! Index 451 cannot be adjusted by means of the service mode in the Tractor Terminal.
3) Index 420 cannot be adjusted using the MultiTool. (The value becomes locked.) Adjust the value by means of the service
mode in the tractor terminal.
4) The value of the index 453 was set during the production process in the factory. The value was chosen according to the
original tyre size. The index is available from the software version 1.12.0.0. The index can not be adjusted by means of the
Tractor terminal.
The purpose of the index is to protect the transmission against too high rotation speed in a case that the operator adjusts
the tyre parameter (index no. 1) with an improper value.
After updating of the tractor software the index 453 must be checked and adjusted according to the tyre size.
502
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.9 59
Figure 1
V17512VJ
The letter code has been stamped on the left---hand side of the gearbox.
For example: V17512VJ where VJ = ID letter code
Tractor models Transmission type 1) ID letter code Index 440, value

N122 D --- N142 D 40 km/h VA, VB 100
N122 D --- N142 D 50 km/h VE, VF 102
T132 D --- T152 D 40 km/h VC, VD 101

T132 D --- T152 D 50 km/h VG, VH 103
T162 D --- T202 D 40 km/h VK, VL 104

T162 D --- T202 D 50 km/h VI, VJ 105
1) The mechanical type of the transmission

(Note that the maximum driving speed may differ from this value.)
503
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.9 60
Figure 2
The numeric code has been stamped on the rear side of

PTO housing.
For example: 61 where 61 = ID number
PTO type Numeric ID Index 441,

code value
540/1000 60 1 61
540/1000 + GS 1) 60 2
1000/540E 61 7
1000/540E + GS 1) 61 8
540/540E 62 5
540/540E + GS 1) 62 6
1000 63 3
1000 + GS 1) 63 4
1) GS = The tractor is equipped with ground speed PTO
504
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.9 61
Multi-- disc clutches

Rear PTO
Usually there is no need for calibrations or for adjusting the indexes for PTO. However, if the PTO starting cycle does not work
well, you should perform the PTO calibrations (calibrations number 037 and 047) with the implement connected. The
calibrations set the values for indexes no. 500 and 501.
Do not adjust the following indexes manually.

no. value
500 ms 52 244 180 Rear PTO clutch, pre ---fill time
501 mbar 1000 5000 3600 Rear PTO clutch, initial pressure
Use indexes 503 and 504 to adjust the operation of the clutch, if necessary. Note that there is also index no. 090 for an
adjustment performed by the operator.
For adjusting the function of the rear PTO clutch:

no. value
503 ms 0 144 0 Rear PTO, pre ---fill time increment (+)
504 mbar 0 4000 0 Rear PTO, initial pressure increment (+)
Power shuttle, clutches F and R

The indexes 506---509 must be adjusted using the calibration functions (calibrations number 031, 032, 041, 042). Do not
adjust these indexes manually.
no. value
506 mbar 1) 7000 29000 11560 F clutch, pre ---fill pressure
507 mbar 1400 6000 3500 F clutch, initial pressure
508 mbar 1) 7000 29000 9240 R clutch, pre ---fill pressure
509 mbar 1400 6000 2000 R clutch, initial pressure
Use indexes 510---546 to adjust the function of the clutches according to their use.
505
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.9 62
Clutch pedal
Always after calibration of F/R clutches you should adjust the behaviour of the clutch pedal by means of indexes
no. 510 --- 514.
For adjusting the prefill pressure for clutch pedal use:

no. value
510 mbar 0 7000 500 F dir. Clutch pedal, prefill pressure(---) decrement
513 mbar 0 7000 1500 R dir. Clutch pedal, prefill pressure(---) decrement
Adjustment of the prefill pressure (indexes 510 and 513):

Engage the transmission range A. Raise the clutch pedal slowly up to a click of the limit switch. Then, the tractor is not
allowed to move, but a little jerk should be notified.
--- If the tractor starts out (i.e. starts to move) or if the jerk is too big, you should increase the index value. So, when
increasing the value the pre ---fill becomes smaller.
--- If you don’t notify a little jerk you should decrease the index value.
For adjusting the initial pressure for clutch pedal use:

no. value
511 mbar 0 5000 900 F dir. Clutch pedal, initial pressure(---) decrement
514 mbar 0 5000 700 R dir. Clutch pedal, initial pressure(---) decrement
Adjustment of the initial pressure (indexes 511 and 514):

Note! This working order is valid when the tractor has software version 1.7.0.0 or newer one.
Note! Before the adjustment you must check that the value of the index no. 3 (clutch pedal, engagement position) is 2.
Otherwise the given percentage values are not valid for the adjustment.
Note! Select the temperature value visible to the pillar display before you begin to adjust the indexes.
Adjust the A pillar display to show the outside temperature view before you begin to adjust the indexes. Open an index (e.g.
no. 511) and save it by pressing Enter. The position of the pedal is displayed as a percentage on the pillar display.
Engage the transmission range A. Start to drive the tractor. Press the clutch pedal slowly downwards. The tractor must stop
when the position value on the display goes below 10 (7...10), see the figure 3.
---If the value is higher you should decrease the index value.
---If the value is lower you should increase the index value.
Check also that the movement of the tractor ends before the clutch pedal is in the position of the limit switch.
Figure 3
506
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.9 63
Adjustments for functions of the power shuttle

For adjusting the function of F and R clutches when the power shuttle lever is used to start driving the tractor (i.e. when
the tractor is at a standstill and starts to move):
no. value
517 mbar 0 7000 600 F start out, pre ---fill pressure (+) increment
518 mbar 0 4000 800 F start out, initial pressure (+) increment
521 mbar 0 7000 200 R start out, pre ---fill pressure (+) increment
522 mbar 0 4000 600 R start out, initial pressure (+) increment
Testing instructions for indexes 517---522:

1. On flat surface: The tractor is at a standstill (stopped).  Engage the driving direction F (several times).  Adjust the
indexes for direction F, if necessary.  Repeat the same procedure for direction R.
Note! The tractor must be at a standstill when you engage the driving direction.
2. On uphill: Find a place with a small/average rise.  Slowly drive to uphill terrain.  Raise the driving pedal until the
movement of the tractor stops.  Change the driving direction (do not touch any pedals).  During engagement the
tractor is allowed to move (”slide”) only a little.  If the tractor moves too much, you should increase the index values.
Note! You should engage the driving direction quite quickly after the stop in order to avoid the engagement of the passive
standstill function.
For adjusting the behaviour of F and R clutches when the power shuttle lever is used to change the driving direction:
no. value
525 mbar 0 7000 900 Change R»F, pre ---fill pressure increment (+)
526 mbar 0 4000 300 Change R»F, initial pressure increment (+)
529 mbar 0 7000 100 Change F»R, pre ---fill pressure increment (+)
530 mbar 0 4000 0 Change F»R, initial pressure increment (+)
507
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.9 64
For adjusting the function of F and R clutches when the clutch is engaged during movement (i.e. when the tractor has a
driving speed of over approximately 4 km/h):
no. value
533 mbar 0 7000 1300 F clutch, re ---engaging, pre ---fill pressure increment (+)
534 mbar 0 4000 1700 F clutch, re ---engaging, initial pressure increment (+)
537 mbar 0 7000 800 R clutch, re ---engaging, pre ---fill pressure increment (+)
538 mbar 0 4000 1500 R clutch, re ---engaging, initial pressure increment (+)
Special adjustments

no. value
1100 Not in use
1110 Not in use
1120 Not in use
1130 Not in use
1140 Not in use
1150 1) 30 50 30 Transmission droop maximum value
Note! Usually it is not necessary to adjust the index. The

index determines the maximum droop value that the
transmission may use.
For clarification on how the index works, see the figure below.
Use index number 120 to adjust the minimum droop value.
1160 Not in use
1170 Not in use
1171 Not in use
1172 Not in use
1173 Not in use
1174 Not in use
1175 Not in use
1176 Not in use
1177 Not in use
1180 10 9990 4000 Maximum change rate of torque for the Traction Force Control
function (Nm/s)
The index determines how quickly the torque of the main
clutch is allowed to increase when the Traction Force Control
function (”turbine clutch” function) is in use.
If the engagement is too quick (or jerky), for example, you

should decrease the value.
1) Look at the figure 4, 5 and 6: Transmission droop values.
508
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.9 65
Figure 4: Figure 5:
Power mode, PTO’s are not rotating. ECO mode, PTO’s are not rotating
or
ECO mode, PTO (rear or front) is rotating.
The droop value varies continuously between points A and B (figure 4) or between points D and B (figure 5).
Figure 6:
Power mode, PTO (rear or front) is rotating.
The droop value does not vary depending on the tractor’s current rate of acceleration.
From software version 1.12.0.0: The value is continuously the value that the operator has set (1...10%).
Earlier software versions: The value is continuously fixed 2%.
Descriptions for the symbols in the figures

a Tractor’s current rate of acceleration (measured by the TC1 control unit).
A The minimum droop value that the operator can adjust between 1...10%
The setting is valid for the Power mode only. The value is used when the acceleration of the tractor is zero or very low.
For example in this case the continuous line starts from value 5, what means that the operator has set the value to 5.
B The maximum droop value that the service technician can adjust (index number 1150).
Usually it is not necessary to adjust the index, so keep the value at 30.
C A fixed limit value for the rate of acceleration where the maximum droop value is used for controlling the transmission
(fixed value C is determined in the software and it cannot be adjusted)
D The minimum droop value that is used in ECO mode. The value can not be adjusted, but the value is automatically
calculated from the value A set by the operator. The value is always many times bigger than in Power mode.
For example in this case the operator has adjusted the setting A to value 5, and then he/she has selected the ECO mode.
The result is that the minimum droop value is approx. 15% (the continuous line starts from approx. 15%).
509
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.9 66
510
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.10 67
Calibrations in Versu models
Contents of the calibration instructions

1. General
2. Available calibrations
3. Saving and loading indexes
4. Calibration using the MultiTool service terminal
5. Calibration instructions
6. Calibration example
7. Useful tips for problem situations
8. Calibration values, Versu
1. General
Calibrations are available provided that the tractor is equipped with sufficiently up ---to---date software (software package
v1.7.0.0 Versu or later). The version of the TC1 software has to be 1.1.16.2 or later. Calibrations can be performed using the
MultiTool service terminal (software package 6.0.0.0 or later) or the service and calibration mode of the tractor terminal.
Do not attempt to perform the calibrations using outdated software versions. Calibration procedures have been greatly
improved since the release of old software versions.
Calibrations are presented in the same order they appear on the display of the MultiTool service terminal. Following this order
is the easiest and fastest method of performing the calibrations.
Calibration Name of calibration

number
010 Main gear calibration
011 Range gear calibration
051 Steering, middle position
060 Speed sensors
031 F clutch, pre ---fill pressure
041 F clutch, initial pressure
032 R clutch, pre ---fill pressure
042 R clutch, initial pressure
033 C1 clutch, pre ---fill pressure
043 C1 clutch, initial pressure
037 (PTO clutch, pre ---fill time)
047 (PTO clutch, initial pressure)
511
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.10 68

Note! It is recommended that you save the index values onto a memory card (Versu/Direct adjustment+calibrations in the
MultiTool application). This enables the tractor indexes to be restored once the programming procedures are finished. This
speeds up the adjustments performed for the tractor.
Saving the indexes onto a memory card:
1. Open the MultiTool main menu. 5. Press Enter.

2. Select Versu/Direct adjustment+calibrations. 6. Select Save indexes to memory card.
3. Press Enter. 7. Press Enter.
4. Select Indexes.
Make sure that the displayed tractor number matches the tractor being calibrated. By changing the last two digits in the
tractor number (00, 01, 02, etc.) you can save the tractor indexes into more than one file.
Start saving the indexes by pressing Enter. Wait while the values of all the indexes are saved onto the memory card. When all
the indexes have been saved, the message Saving to memory card is complete is displayed on the MultiTool display.
Loading indexes from memory card to the tractor

After the programming is finished, the indexes must be loaded from the memory card to the tractor.
1. Select Load indexes from memory card. 4. Select the file you saved before you started the
2. Press Enter. The selection window is displayed. programming procedures. (The tractor number must be
3. Press Enter. The list of saved files is displayed. the same.)
5. The values of all the indexes are loaded from the
memory card to the tractor.
512
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.10 69

Note! Before starting the calibration, exit the tractor terminal drive view and open the main menu (compass view). Otherwise,
the tractor terminal will activate the incorrect function (the customer setting mode) when the preprogramming button is
pressed during the calibration. (The customer setting mode must not be used while calibrations are being performed.)
In the tractor terminal drive view, press the ESC button shortly. The main menu is displayed.
Using the MultiTool application
1. Select Versu/Direct adjustment+calibrations from the MultiTool main menu and press Enter. The application starts.
2. Select Calibrations and press Enter.
3. The calibration page opens.
513
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.10 70
The calibrations appear on the display in the order that is most practical for performing the calibrations. Note that the list
extends beyond the screen and can be scrolled down with the down arrow button.
Move the blue cursor over the calibration you wish to perform and press Enter. Move the cursor over the Start command and
press Enter.
A yellow progress bar indicates that the calibration function has started. From this point forward all functions are specific to
each calibration. See further instructions later in this document.
You can get instructions on the calibrations by moving the blue cursor over Help and pressing Enter.
General instructions:
--- You can select a specific calibration by moving the blue cursor over the calibration in question and then pressing Enter.
--- The character * means that the calibration has not been performed.
--- The results of the calibration must be approved (saved) by pressing the preprogramming button (the button under the power
shuttle lever) shortly.
Note! Before you start the calibration, see the instructions specific to the calibration in question (later in this instruction).
514
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.10 71
Calibration number 010: main gear calibration

This calibration tests the function of the position sensor in the main gear shifting cylinder. The calibration also saves the values
of the position sensor in different positions of the selector fork. Using these values, the system can control and monitor the
position of the selector fork efficiently.
Instruction
Engage the parking brake, press down the clutch pedal and start the engine. Choose the calibration and press Enter. The
chosen calibration starts running. Wait.
If the calibration fails, an interruption code is displayed on the MultiTool display. Note! Up until tractor software version 1.7.0.0
the interruption codes do not always match the codes presented in the table. The presented code values are valid from the
next software version.
Code Description
1 The selector fork extends too far (in the direction of the lower gear)
2 The selector fork is too far from the N position after shifting down
4 The selector fork is too close to the N position after shifting down
8 The position sensor supplies a too small voltage in the N position
16 The position sensor supplies a too large voltage in the N position
32 The selector fork is too close to the N position after shifting up
64 The selector fork is too far from the N position after shifting up
128 The selector fork extends too far (in the direction of the higher gear)
Calibration number 011: range gear calibration

This calibration tests the function of the position sensor in the range gear shifting cylinder. The calibration also saves the
values of the position sensor in different positions of the selector fork. Using these values, the system can control and monitor
the position of the selector fork efficiently.
Instruction
Code Description
64 The selector fork is toofar from the N position after shifting up
515
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.10 72
Calibration number 051: steering, middle position

This calibration saves the value of the position sensor that corresponds to the middle position of the front tyres. The system
uses the saved value to calculate how much and in which direction the tyres are turned at any specific moment. The value is
used by, for example, the differential lock automatics.
Instruction
Disengage the four ---wheel drive automatics, disengage the differential lock and start the engine. Drive forwards (with speed
range B) and start the calibration by pressing Enter. Do not turn the steering wheel during calibration.
Code Description
3 The calibration is interrupted prematurely (unsuccessful calibration)
4 The front wheels are too far from the assumed middle position
5 There is a fault in the steering angle sensor
6 (This code should never be displayed)
Calibration number 060: speed sensors

This calibration measures the signals of all the driving speed sensors in relation to the signal supplied by the ground speed
radar (B10), when the tractor is driven straight forwards and there is no wheel slip. Based on the calibrated values, the system
can calculate, for example, wheel slip percentages that are used to control the four ---wheel drive and differential lock
automatics and other functions. The sensors that are calibrated are: driving speed sensor B6, rear wheel speed sensor B9,
front axle speed sensor B17.
Warning! The system takes control of the tractor during the calibration. The system engages the required gear and activates
the cruise control (about 1700 rpm). The driving speed of the tractor is above 2.5 km/h. The duration of the calibration is about
five seconds.
Instruction
The following circumstances must be valid before the calibration:
--- the engine is running
--- 4WD and differential lock switches are at Off position
--- the speed range B is selected
The middle position of the steering must be calibrated (calibration number 051) before this calibration is started (if the front
axle of the tractor is fitted with a position sensor). Choose a location with even ground and sufficient free space. There must
be at least 100 metres of unobstructed straight road in front of the tractor. Start out (start driving), then run the calibration by
pressing Enter, now the cruise control takes the speed control. Steer the tractor straight forward.
After the calibration is finished, the speedometer should start indicating the driving speed.
Code Description
4 Front wheels are not in the middle position
5 There is a fault in the steering angle sensor signal
7 The time available for the calibration was exceeded
8 Automatic driving speed adjustment was unsuccessful (disable modes Auto1 and Auto2)
9 Driving speed varies too much during the calibration
516
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.10 73
Code Description
10 Driving speed too small during calibration
11 Driving speed too great during calibration
12 4WD (four ---wheel drive) is engaged (disengage 4WD)
13 4WD (four ---wheel drive) is in error mode (correct the problem)
14 Differential lock is engaged (disengage the differential lock)
15 Differential lock is in error mode (correct the problem)
16 Steering angle sensor is not calibrated
17 Front wheels are not in middle position (drive straight)
18 One of the speed sensors (B6, B9, B10, B17) is in error mode (correct the problem)
Calibrations number 031-- 036, 041-- 046: calibrating the multi-- disc clutches in power transmission
These calibrations are used to determine the basic values for each multi ---disc clutch in the power transmission system:
pre ---fill pressure and initial pressure. Using the calibrated values, the system is able to control the clutches (during driving
start, for example) with speeds and pressures appropriate for each clutch.
During the calibration, the power shuttle and Powershift units are interlocked so as to prevent the output shaft of the power
shuttle unit from rotating. (See table below.) In this situation, increasing the pressure of the clutch to be calibrated slows down
the engine, whereby engine torque is increased. The value is displayed on the MultiTool display. The value must be compared
with the target values.
Table of multi ---disc clutches locked during calibration

F clutch The clutches R, C1 and C2 are locked
R clutch The clutches F, C1 and C2 are locked
C1 clutch The clutches F, R and C2 are locked
When, for example, the F clutch is being calibrated, clutches R, C1 and C2 are pressurized. In other words, the rotation of the
power shuttle output shaft is prevented.
During the calibration of the pre ---fill pressure, the system attempts to define the pressure at which the multi ---disc clutch
clearances reduce to zero within a certain time frame and the clutch transfers a small torque. (This is the target value of the
calibration.)
During the calibration of the initial pressure, the system attempts to define the pressure at which the multi ---disc clutch “drags”
a little, i.e. transfers a small torque. (This is the target value of the calibration.)
The target values of the calibrations are presented under Calibration values, Versu.
The calibrated values must not be edited manually in the index adjustment mode. If necessary, the fine adjustments to the
function of the clutches in different driving situations can be performed using separate adjustment indexes. (See the separate
instruction for adjusting the indexes.)
517
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.10 74
Instruction
The recommended transmission oil temperature, at which the calibrations can be performed most successfully, is
+40...+50 ˚C. (Allowed temperature range is +30...60 ˚C)
--- the parking brake is engaged
--- the air conditioning is switched Off
--- the power take ---off (rear and front) is disengaged
--- the working hydraulics is switched Off
--- all the working lights and headlights are switched Off
Start the calibration and press the HiShift button. The test starts running: the engine speed increases to about 1000 rpm and
the clutch slows down the engine. The torque of the engine increases and the torque value is displayed on the MultiTool
display. Compare the displayed value with the target values. If necessary, adjust the index value and perform the test again.
Repeat the cycle until you achieve the target value.
Perform the calibration of the pre ---fill pressure and the initial pressure on all multi ---disc clutches. Note! Always calibrate the
pre ---fill pressure before you calibrate the initial pressure.
Code Description
1 Engine speed too low
2 Engine speed too high
3 Air conditioning is on (turn off the air conditioning)
4 Temperature of power transmission system is too low
5 Temperature of power transmission system is too high
6 Pre ---fill pressure is not within acceptable limits (in calibration of pre ---fill pressure)
6 Initial pressure is not within acceptable limits (in calibration of initial pressure)
7 Engine torque grows too high
If the tractor gives some of service codes 8074---xx ---003...8079---xx ---003 during the calibration you should switch power off
and then start the engine again. Then try the calibration again.
Once the calibrations are finished, the multi ---disc clutches need to be tested and all required fine adjustments have
to be made. Perform the adjustments according to the adjustment instructions.
Calibrations number 037, 047: calibrating the rear PTO multi-- disc clutch
These calibrations are not yet available. If there is a problem in starting the power take ---off, adjust the indexes for pre ---fill time
and initial pressure in the index adjustment mode.
518
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.10 75
Calibrating the F clutch pre-- fill pressure

Note! Remember to exit the tractor terminal drive view and open the main menu (compass view).
Highlight calibration number 031 and press Enter. Initiate the calibration by highlighting Start and pressing Enter.
A yellow progress bar indicates that the calibration function has started. When the progress bar has moved to 100 percent,
the bar displays the value 0 %. Press the down arrow button in the MultiTool service terminal. The current value (e.g. 9960
mbar) is displayed.
Test the effect of the adjusted index by pressing the HiShift button. (The button is located under the armrest. See the
adjoining figure.) Press the button shortly. A long press of the button will restore the previous value of the index. The Status
field on the MultiTool display shows the result of the test. (In this example, the result is 20.) Check whether the value is within
acceptable limits. (Perform the test at least three times. Allow at least five seconds between the tests to let the multi ---disc
clutch cool down.)
Because the calibration results do not quite match the target value, use the Powershift shifting buttons on the armrest to
adjust the index value. (In this example, the value has been increased to 12160 mbar.) Press the HiShift button. The Status
field on the MultiTool display shows the result of the test. Check whether the value is within acceptable limits. (Perform the test
at least three times. Allow at least five seconds between the tests to let the multi ---disc clutch cool down.) Repeat the cycle
until you achieve an acceptable test result.
519
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.10 76
When the result of the test is acceptable, save the index value by pressing the preprogramming button (the button under the
power shuttle lever) shortly. The MultiTool display shows the message Calibration OK.
With the calibration completed, you can now move on to the next calibration.
Calibration will not start

1. Make sure that the prerequirements for performing the calibration have been met. Check the prerequirements under the
calibration instructions in question (under heading “Instruction”).
2. Try running the calibration at least three times.
3. If you are still unable to start the calibration, exit the MultiTool calibration page and rerun the calibration software.
4. If you are still unsuccessful, exit the calibration page, switch off the current and restart the tractor. Rerun the calibration
software. Try running the calibration at least three times.
Saving the calibrated value is unsuccessful

(During saving the message Calibration not available is displayed.)
1. The tractor terminal may be in the drive display mode. Switch off the current and restart the tractor.
2. Exit the drive display by pressing the ESC button on the armrest. The main menu is displayed.
3. Start the calibration software of the MultiTool service terminal.
520
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.10 77
8. Calibration values, Versu

v1.7.0.0 Versu or later). The version of the TC1 software has to be 1.1.16.2 or later.
Calibration Name of calibration Calibration result, target Calibration result,

number value (Nm) acceptable values (Nm)
031 F clutch, pre ---fill pressure 30 20---30
041 F clutch, initial pressure 40 35---40
032 R clutch, pre ---fill pressure 30 20---30

042 R clutch, initial pressure 40 35---40
033 C1 clutch, pre ---fill pressure 20 20---25

043 C1 clutch, initial pressure 40 40---45



037 1) PTO pre ---fill time --- ---

047 1) PTO initial pressure --- ---
1) PTO calibrations are not yet available.
521
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 421.10 78
522
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.11 79
Calibrations in Direct models N122 D --- N142 D, T132 D --- T202 D
Contents of the calibration instructions

1. General
8. Calibration values, Direct
1. General
v1.6.0.0 Direct or later). The version of the TC1 software has to be 2.1.17.2 or later. Calibrations can be performed using the
MultiTool service terminal (software package 6.3.0.0 or later) or the service and calibration mode of the tractor terminal.
Do not attempt to perform the calibrations using outdated software versions. Calibration procedures have been greatly
improved since the release of old software versions.
Calibrations are presented in the same order they appear on the display of the MultiTool service terminal. Following this order
is the easiest and fastest method of performing the calibrations.
Calibration Name of calibration

number
010 Main gear calibration
011 Range gear calibration
020 Hydrostat unit calibration
021 1) F clutch traction force control calibration
022 1) R clutch traction force control calibration
051 Steering, middle position
060 Speed sensors
031 F clutch, pre ---fill pressure
041 F clutch, initial pressure
032 R clutch, pre ---fill pressure
042 R clutch, initial pressure
037 (PTO clutch, pre ---fill time)
047 (PTO clutch, initial pressure)
1) Calibrations no. 21 and 22 have been removed from the software version 1.11.0.0 incl.
523
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.11 80

Note! It is recommended that you save the index values onto a memory card (Versu/Direct adjustment+calibrations in the
MultiTool application). This enables the tractor indexes to be restored once the programming procedures are finished. This
speeds up the adjustments performed for the tractor.
Saving the indexes onto a memory card:
1. Open the MultiTool main menu. 5. Press Enter.

2. Select Versu/Direct adjustment+calibrations. 6. Select Save indexes to memory card.
3. Press Enter. 7. Press Enter.
4. Select Indexes.
Make sure that the displayed tractor number matches the tractor being calibrated. By changing the last two digits in the
tractor number (00, 01, 02, etc.) you can save the tractor indexes into more than one file.
Start saving the indexes by pressing Enter. Wait while the values of all the indexes are saved onto the memory card. When all
the indexes have been saved, the message Saving to memory card is complete is displayed on the MultiTool display.
Loading indexes from memory card to the tractor

After the programming is finished, the indexes must be loaded from the memory card to the tractor.
1. Select Load indexes from memory card. 4. Select the file you saved before you started the
2. Press Enter. The selection window is displayed. programming procedures. (The tractor number must be
3. Press Enter. The list of saved files is displayed. the same.)
5. The values of all the indexes are loaded from the
memory card to the tractor.
524
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.11 81

Note! Before starting the calibration, exit the tractor terminal drive view and open the main menu (compass view). Otherwise,
the tractor terminal will activate the incorrect function (the customer setting mode) when the preprogramming button is
pressed during the calibration. (The customer setting mode must not be used while calibrations are being performed.)
In the tractor terminal drive view, press the ESC button shortly. The main menu is displayed.
Using the MultiTool application
1. Select Versu/Direct adjustment+calibrations from the MultiTool main menu and press Enter. The application starts.
2. Select Calibrations and press Enter.
3. The calibration page opens.
525
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.11 82
The calibrations appear on the display in the order that is most practical for performing the calibrations. Note that the list
extends beyond the screen and can be scrolled down with the down arrow button.
Move the blue cursor over the calibration you wish to perform and press Enter. Move the cursor over the Start command and
press Enter.
A yellow progress bar indicates that the calibration function has started. From this point forward all functions are specific to
each calibration. See further instructions later in this document.
You can get instructions on the calibrations by moving the blue cursor over Help and pressing Enter.
General instructions:
--- You can select a specific calibration by moving the blue cursor over the calibration in question and then pressing Enter.
--- The character * means that the calibration has not been performed.
--- The results of the calibration must be approved (saved) by pressing the preprogramming button (the button under the power
shuttle lever) shortly.
Note! Before you start the calibration, see the instructions specific to the calibration in question (later in this instruction).
526
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.11 83
Calibration number 010: main gear calibration

This calibration tests the function of the position sensor in the main gear shifting cylinder. The calibration also saves the values
of the position sensor in different positions of the selector fork. Using these values, the system can control and monitor the
position of the selector fork efficiently.
Instruction
Code Description
64 The selector fork is too far from the N position after shifting up
Calibration number 011: range gear calibration

This calibration tests the function of the position sensor in the range gear shifting cylinder. The calibration also saves the
values of the position sensor in different positions of the selector fork. Using these values, the system can control and monitor
the position of the selector fork efficiently.
Instruction
Code Description
8 The position sensor supplies too small a voltage in the N position
16 The position sensor supplies too large a voltage in the N position
64 The selector fork is toofar from the N position after shifting up
527
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.11 84
Calibration number 020: hydrostat unit calibration

This calibration automatically performs two functions at once. The first one calibrates the standstill function while the other one
determines the change ---over point for engaging the multi ---disc clutches.
Based on the calibration for the standstill function, the system is able to actively hold the tractor at standstill and to control the
stopping and driving start of the tractor on, for example, an uphill road.
The calibration of the change ---over point is used by the system to determine the correct timing for engaging multi ---disc
clutches C1 and C2. Correctly adjusted timing prevents jerking motions of the tractor when the clutches are engaged and
disengaged.
The calibration function also tests the internal operation of the hydrostat. During the calibration process, the output of the
hydrostat is adjusted between the minimum and maximum output values. At the same time, the system measures the
hydrostat’s internal speeds of rotation. If there is a problem with the function of the hydrostat or measuring the speeds of
rotation is unsuccessful, the calibration will fail.
Instruction
Engage the parking brake and start the engine. Allow the engine and the transmission system to warm up to a normal
operating temperature (at least +20 ˚C). Let the engine run for at least one minute to ensure that the hydrostat unit has
enough time to warm up and to purge any air from the system.
Start the calibration with the MultiTool service terminal. Press the down arrow button in the MultiTool service terminal to display
the running number. Wait until the number on the MultiTool display increases from about 430 to about 1030. The duration of
the calibration is apporoximately 30 seconds. When the calibration is finished, the MultiTool display shows the message
Calibration OK.
Note! You must not interrupt the calibration process. However, if the calibration is not finished within a minute and the number
on the display stops running, you can abort the calibration by pressing the ESC button of the MultiTool service terminal. This
situation may be caused by a fault in the hydrostat unit.
If the calibration fails, an interruption code is displayed on the MultiTool display.
Calibrations number 021 and 022: Traction Force Control calibration

Note! Calibrations no. 21 and 22 have been removed from the software version 1.11.0.0 incl. (the calibrations were
unnecessary).
This calibration performs a calibration for the Traction Force Control function. Based on the calibration, the system is able to
control the traction force accurately and economically (and to produce the required torques). In addition, the calibration is
used to protect the hydrostat unit from overload and overheating.
Traction Force Control operates only at low driving speeds. The function can be controlled using the potentiometer ( ) on
the side panel of the cab. The potentiometer is used to set the torque that is transferred by the power shuttle unit, when the
driving pedal is not being pressed. When the driving pedal is pressed, the torque transferred by the power shuttle unit starts
to increase. The function also affects the power transmission system during driving start and when braking the tractor.
528
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.11 85
The calibration function activates the manual driving mode and engages a small transmission ratio. The service technician
starts the calibration and chooses the driving direction that is opposite to the clutch being calibrated. The tractor starts moving
in the selected direction slowly. After this, the pressure in the multi ---disc clutch under calibration is increased slowly. This
causes the clutch to have a braking effect. The pressure is increased until the pressure of the hydrostat unit has reached a
specific limit value (close to 400 bar). At this point, the noise level of the power transmission system is relatively loud. When
the calibration is finished, the clutch for the other driving direction is disengaged and the calibrated value is saved into system
memory. The calibration is used to determine, for example, the control current of the control valve that corresponds to the
maximum torque allowed for the power shuttle (over 1000 Nm).
The calibrations for the forward driving and reverse driving unit clutches are separate (calibrations number 21 and 22).
Instruction: 021, F clutch traction force control calibration (forward driving direction)
Note! The calibration has been removed from the software version 1.11.0.0 incl.
Note! The tractor moves slowly during the calibration. Make sure that there is enough space in front of and behind the tractor.
operating temperature (at least +20 ˚C). Start calibration number 021 from the MultiTool service terminal. Press the down
arrow button in the MultiTool service terminal to display the running number. Engage the reverse driving direction. The tractor
starts moving backwards slowly. Wait. (The number on the MultiTool display varies between approximately 30 and 40.) When
the calibration is close to being finished, the noise level of the power transmission system increases audibly. (The calibration
takes about 10 to 15 seconds to finish.) When the calibration is finished, the MultiTool display shows the message Calibration
OK. Move the power shuttle lever to the parking brake position (P). The engine slows down to idling speed and the calibration
ends.
Instruction: 022, R clutch traction force control calibration (reverse driving direction)
Note! The calibration has been removed from the software version 1.11.0.0 incl.
Note! The tractor moves slowly during the calibration. Make sure that there is enough space in front of and behind the tractor.
operating temperature (at least +20 ˚C). Start calibration number 022 from the MultiTool service terminal. Press the down
arrow button in the MultiTool service terminal to display the running number. Engage the forward driving direction. The tractor
starts moving forwards slowly. Wait. (The number on the MultiTool display varies between approximately 30 and 40.) When
the calibration is close to being finished, the noise level of the power transmission system increases audibly. (The calibration
takes about 10 to 15 seconds to finish.) When the calibration is finished, the MultiTool display shows the message Calibration
OK. Move the power shuttle lever to the parking brake position (P). The engine slows down to idling speed and the calibration
ends.
Note! If necessary, the calibration can be aborted by moving the power shuttle lever to the parking brake position (P). You
can also stop the movement of the tractor by pressing down the clutch pedal. However, the calibration remains active until the
power shuttle lever is moved to the parking brake position (P).
Code Description
2 Error in the pressure sensor signal (or the user aborted the calibration)
255 The calibration was aborted by the user
529
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.11 86
Calibration number 051: steering, middle position

This calibration saves the value of the position sensor that corresponds to the middle position of the front tyres. The system
uses the saved value to calculate how much and in which direction the tyres are turned at any specific moment. The value is
used by, for example, the differential lock automatics.
Instruction
Disengage the four ---wheel drive automatics, disengage the differential lock and start the engine. Drive forwards (with speed
range B) and start the calibration by pressing Enter. Do not turn the steering wheel during calibration.
Code Description
3 The calibration is interrupted prematurely (unsuccessful calibration)
4 The front wheels are too far from the assumed middle position
5 There is a fault in the steering angle sensor
Calibration number 060: speed sensors

This calibration measures the signals of all the driving speed sensors in relation to the signal supplied by the ground speed
radar (B10), when the tractor is driven straight forwards and there is no wheel slip. Based on the calibrated values, the system
can calculate, for example, wheel slip percentages that are used to control the four ---wheel drive and differential lock
automatics and other functions. The sensors that are calibrated are: driving speed sensor B6, rear wheel speed sensor B9,
front axle speed sensor B17.
Warning! The system takes control of the tractor during the calibration. The system engages the required gear and activates
the cruise control (about 1700 rpm). The driving speed of the tractor is above 2.5 km/h. The duration of the calibration is about
five seconds.
Instruction
--- 4WD and differential lock switches are at Off position
--- the speed range B is selected
--- the transmission lever is at max position
--- the speed balance control knob is turned to the middle position (centre pos.)
--- the traction force control knob is turned to the minimum position (extreme anti ---clockwise pos.)
The middle position of the steering must be calibrated (calibration number 051) before this calibration is started (if the front
axle of the tractor is fitted with a position sensor). Choose a location with even ground and sufficient free space. There must
be at least 100 metres of unobstructed straight road in front of the tractor. Start out (start driving), then run the calibration by
pressing Enter, now the cruise control takes the speed control. Steer the tractor straight forward.
After the calibration is finished, the speedometer should start indicating the driving speed.
530
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.11 87
Code Description
4 Front wheels are not in the middle position
5 There is a fault in the steering angle sensor signal
7 The time available for the calibration was exceeded
8 Automatic driving speed adjustment was unsuccessful (disable modes Auto1 and Auto2)
9 Driving speed varies too much during the calibration
10 Driving speed too small during calibration
11 Driving speed too great during calibration
12 4WD (four ---wheel drive) is engaged (disengage 4WD)
13 4WD (four ---wheel drive) is in error mode (correct the problem)
14 Differential lock is engaged (disengage the differential lock)
15 Differential lock is in error mode (correct the problem)
16 Steering angle sensor is not calibrated
17 Front wheels are not in middle position (drive straight)
18 One of the speed sensors (B6, B9, B10, B17) is in error mode (correct the problem)
Calibrations number 031-- 032, 041-- 042: calibrating the multi-- disc clutches of the power shuttle unit
These calibrations are used to determine the basic values for both multi ---disc clutches (F and R clutches) of the power shuttle
unit: pre ---fill pressure and initial pressure. Using the calibrated values, the system is able to control the clutches (during
driving start, for example) with speeds and pressures appropriate for each clutch.
During the calibration, the power shuttle and Powershift units are interlocked so as to prevent the output shaft of the power
shuttle unit from rotating. (See table below.) In this situation, increasing the pressure of the clutch to be calibrated tries to slow
down the engine, whereby engine torque is increased. The value is displayed on the MultiTool display. The value must be
compared with the target values.
Table of multi ---disc clutches locked during calibration

F clutch The clutches R and C1 are locked
R clutch The clutches F and C1 are locked
When, for example, the F clutch is being calibrated, clutches R and C1 are pressurized. In other words, the rotation of the
power shuttle output shaft is prevented.
During the calibration of the pre ---fill pressure, the system attempts to define the pressure at which the multi ---disc clutch
clearances reduce to zero within a certain time frame and the clutch transfers a small torque. (This is the target value of the
calibration.)
During the calibration of the initial pressure, the system attempts to define the pressure at which the multi ---disc clutch “drags”
a little, i.e. transfers a small torque. (This is the target value of the calibration.)
The target values of the calibrations are presented under Calibration values, Direct.
The calibrated values must not be edited manually in the index adjustment mode. If necessary, the fine adjustments to the
function of the clutches in different driving situations can be performed using separate adjustment indexes. (See the separate
instruction for adjusting the indexes.)
531
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.11 88
Instruction
The recommended transmission oil temperature, at which the calibrations can be performed most successfully, is
+40...+50 ˚C. (Allowed temperature range is +30...60 ˚C)
--- the parking brake is engaged
--- the air conditioning is switched Off
--- the power take ---off (rear and front) is disengaged
--- the working hydraulics is switched Off
--- all the working lights and headlights are switched Off
--- the traction force control knob is turned to the minimum position (extreme anti ---clockwise pos.)
Start the calibration and press the RangeShift button. The test starts running: the engine speed increases to about 1000 rpm
and the clutch tries to slow down the engine. The torque of the engine increases and the torque value is displayed on the
MultiTool display. Compare the displayed value with the target values. If necessary, adjust the index value and perform the
test again. Repeat the cycle until you achieve the target value.
Perform the calibration of the pre ---fill pressure and the initial pressure on all multi ---disc clutches. Note! Always calibrate the
pre ---fill pressure before you calibrate the initial pressure.
Code Description
1 Engine speed too low
2 Engine speed too high
3 Air conditioning is on (turn off the air conditioning)
4 Temperature of power transmission system is too low
5 Temperature of power transmission system is too high
6 Pre ---fill pressure is not within acceptable limits (in calibration of pre ---fill pressure)
6 Initial pressure is not within acceptable limits (in calibration of initial pressure)
7 Engine torque grows too high
If the tractor gives some of service codes 8074---xx ---003...8079---xx ---003 during the calibration you should switch power off
and then start the engine again. Then try the calibration again.
After finishing the calibrations, test the function of the F and R clutches.
Testing the pre-- fill of the F and R clutch:

1. Engage speed range C and activate the automatic driving mode.
2. Use the transmission adjustment lever to set the driving speed to 1 km/h.
3. Set the engine speed to approximately 1400 rpm (using the pedal).
4. Change the driving direction back and forth abruptly. The engagement of the driving direction should cause a small jerk.
The tractor must not creep in either direction. Engaging the drive must not increase the driving speed above 1.2 km/h.
Once the calibrations are finished, the multi ---disc clutches need to be tested and all required fine adjustments have
to be made. Perform the adjustments according to the adjustment instructions.
Calibrations number 037, 047: calibrating the rear PTO multi-- disc clutch
These calibrations are not yet available. If there is a problem in starting the power take ---off, adjust the indexes for pre ---fill time
and initial pressure in the index adjustment mode.
532
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.11 89
Calibrating the F clutch pre-- fill pressure

Note! Remember to exit the tractor terminal drive view and open the main menu (compass view).
Highlight calibration number 031 and press Enter. Initiate the calibration by highlighting Start and pressing Enter.
A yellow progress bar indicates that the calibration function has started. When the progress bar has moved to 100 percent,
the bar displays the value 0 %. Press the down arrow button in the MultiTool service terminal. The current value (e.g. 9960
mbar) is displayed.
Test the effect of the adjusted index by pressing the RangeShift button. (The button is located under the armrest. See the
adjoining figure.) Press the button shortly. A long press of the button will restore the previous value of the index. The Status
field on the MultiTool display shows the result of the test. (In this example, the result is 20.) Check whether the value is within
acceptable limits. (Perform the test at least three times. Allow at least five seconds between the tests to let the multi ---disc
clutch cool down.)
Because the calibration results do not quite match the target value, use the cruise control adjustment buttons on the armrest
to adjust the index value. (In this example, the value has been increased to 12160 mbar.) Press the RangeShift button. The
Status field on the MultiTool display shows the result of the test. Check whether the value is within acceptable limits. (Perform
the test at least three times. Allow at least five seconds between the tests to let the multi ---disc clutch cool down.) Repeat the
cycle until you achieve an acceptable test result.
533
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.11 90
When the result of the test is acceptable, save the index value by pressing the preprogramming button (the button under the
power shuttle lever) shortly. The MultiTool display shows the message Calibration OK.
With the calibration completed, you can now move on to the next calibration.
Calibration will not start

1. Make sure that the prerequirements for performing the calibration have been met. Check the prerequirements under the
calibration instructions in question (under heading “Instruction”).
2. Try running the calibration at least three times.
3. If you are still unable to start the calibration, exit the MultiTool calibration page and rerun the calibration software.
4. If you are still unsuccessful, exit the calibration page, switch off the current and restart the tractor. Rerun the calibration
software. Try running the calibration at least three times.
Saving the calibrated value is unsuccessful

(During saving the message Calibration not available is displayed.)
1. The tractor terminal may be in the drive display mode. Switch off the current and restart the tractor.
2. Exit the drive display by pressing the ESC button on the armrest. The main menu is displayed.
3. Start the calibration software of the MultiTool service terminal.
534
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.11 91
8. Calibration values, Direct

v1.6.0.0 Direct or later). The version of the TC1 software has to be 2.1.17.2 or later.
Note! The values presented in the table are preliminary target values. The values may be changed or adjusted at a later date.
Calibration Name of calibration Calibration result, target Calibration result,

number value (Nm) acceptable values (Nm)
031 F clutch, pre ---fill pressure 30 25---30
041 F clutch, initial pressure 40 35---45
032 R clutch, pre ---fill pressure 30 25---30

042 R clutch, initial pressure 40 35---45
037 1) PTO pre ---fill time --- ---

047 1) PTO initial pressure --- ---
1) PTO calibrations are not yet available.
535
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 421.11 92
536
51. Testmode FII and
50. Tools I/O tests
52. MultiTool
538
51. TESTMODE FII AND I/O TESTS
19.2.2010 All 510 1
Contents
NOTE: The test mode FII is available in the A pillar display unit and in the Tractor Terminal in some models.
The I/O test is available in the Valtra MultiTool service terminal and in the Tractor Terminal in some models.
51 Test mode FII and I/O tests

511.1 . . . Activation of the Test mode FII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Engine
512.1 . . . EC unit of engines with Bosch VP30 injection pump,
Hitech models (Test mode FII or I/O test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
512.2 . . . EC unit of CR engines; HiTech, LS, Versu and Direct models
(Test mode FII or I/O test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
512.3 . . . EC unit of CR engines, Syncro models (Test mode FII or I/O test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Transmission
513.1 . . . TC1 unit of HiTech models (Test mode FII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
513.2 ... TC2 unit of T180---T190, T180CR ---T190CR (Test mode FII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
513.3 ... TC1 unit of LS models (Test mode FII or I/O test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
513.4 ... TC2 unit of LS models (Test mode FII or I/O test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
513.5 ... TC1 unit of Versu models (I/O test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
513.6 ... TC2 unit of Versu models (I/O test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
513.7 ... TC1 unit of Direct models (I/O test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
513.8 . . . TC2 unit of Direct models (I/O test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Armrest
514.1 . . . UC1 unit of LS models (I/O test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
514.2 . . . TT unit of LS, Versu and Direct models (I/O test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
514.3 . . . UC1 unit of Versu models (I/O test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
514.4 . . . UC1 unit of Direct models (I/O test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
TwinTrac
515.1 . . . UC2 unit of LS, Versu and Direct models (I/O test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
539
19.2.2010 All 510 2
540
Model Code Page
51. TESTMODE FII AND I/O TESTS HiTech
22.1.2006 511.1 1
Activation of the Test mode FII
F ---modes of the
tractor
mode FI
electric equipment.

Exit
Escaping from FIII mode occurs only by switching power off, because the returning to F mode menu cannot be done in that case.
541
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 511.1 2
Test mode FII
FII: Test mode:

It is possible in the test mode FII to check the (electric) function of various components (control unit input and output signals)
by comparing actual values shown to the display from the different components with the correct values.
After confirming the test mode FII, select the TC1 control unit mark A or the TC2 control unit mark C or the EC control unit
mark E. This concerns only the test mode.
Note! In the test mode the DPS speed is always DPS1. The shuttle and PTO function normally, but the display functions are
not shown. The DPS pre ---programming cannot be done in the test mode. Also the DPS automatic functions are not in use.
542
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 511.1 3
Activation of the test mode and the point
Activation of the FII---mode:

--- when the service mode is selected, step with the DPS
push buttons (1) up or down and select the F ---mode
symbol FII.
--- after this confirm the selection by pushing the DPS
pre ---programming button (2)
--- now symbol A, C or E starts to blink in the middle Example: Direction F, test of the front control lever.
display block.
Carrying ---out the test:
--- select module A (TC1) C (TC2) E (EC) by stepping again
1. Select test point with the DPS buttons.
with the push buttons (1).
2. Confirm test point with the DPS pre ---programming
--- confirm the selection by pushing the button (2) after
button.
which (A or C or E) remains without blinking in the
display. 3. Carry out testing.
--- the display is now in the test mode and symbol number 4. When testing has been done, confirm testing with the
appears to display= START LEVEL DPS pre ---programming button.
5. If needed, select new test point with the DPS buttons or
escape from the test mode by switching off current.
543
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 511.1 4
544
51. TESTMODE FII AND I/O TESTS With HiTech
EC unit of engines with Bosch VP30 injection pump, Hitech models (Test mode FII or
I/O test)
Point name
Fi 3 Not in use
Fi 2 Not in use
Fi 1 Engine speed signal (B5M)
Ai 16 Supply voltage for Bosch VP 30 injection pump controller (B6M)
Ai 15 Ignition lock
Ai 14 Signal voltage of the intake air temperature (B3M)
Ai 13 Signal voltage of the rear gas pedal position sensor (B2W)
Ai 12 The Engine control unit inside temperature
Ai 11 Not in use
Ai 10 Supply voltage for EC unit
Ai 9 Signal voltage of the engine oil pressure sensor (B2M)
Ai 8 Signal voltage of the hand throttle potentiometer (R1M)
Ai 7 Signal voltage of the front gas pedal position sensor (B15)
Ai 6 Signal voltage of the boost pressure (B3M)
Ai 5 Signal voltage of the control stop
Ai 4 Not in use
Ai 3 Signal voltage of the engine coolant temperature sensor (B4M)
Ai 2 Starting allowed
Ai 1 Supply voltage for engine sensors
do11 EC unit power supply control
do10 Safety shutdown (MAB)
do 9 Bosch VP 30 injection pump power supply control
do 8 Control of the starter motor relay (K14)
do 7 Control of the coolant temperature lamp
do 6 Control of the oil pressure lamp
do 5 Control of the cruise lamp
do 4 Control of the preheating lamp
do 3 Control of the fuel lamp
do 2 Grill. Control of preheating relay for engine intake air (K2M)
do 1 Control of the fuel pump relay (K60)
di 9 Fuel pressure sensor (B7M)
di 8 Not in use
di 7 Not in use
di 6 Not in use
di 5 Cruise control setting --- switch (S5M)
di 4 Cruise control setting + switch (S5M)
di 3 Cruise control setting km/h switch (S1M)
di 2 Cruise control setting rpm switch (S1M)

Cruise OFF button (S2M)
di 1
545
Test of the EC unit speed sensor signals Fi 1-- Fi 3

In display Name Value Carrying ---out the test
Fi 3 Not in use
Fi 2 Not in use
Fi 1 Engine speed 1000 r/min=600 The lower row of the display shows the value of the test
signal (B5M) 2000 r/min=1200 point in herz.
Set the engine revs to 1000 r/min and compare the value
with the given values in the LH side column. Raise the
revs to 2000 and compare the reading.
546
Test of the EC unit sensors Ai 1-- Ai 16

In display Name Value Carrying ---out
the test
Ai 16 Supply voltage for When engine is running the supply voltage must be The lower row
Bosch VP 30 between 12...15 V. of the display
injection pump Fault code activates if supply voltage is below 6,8 V or over 17,0 V. shows the
controller (B6M) value of the test
point in voltage.
voltage
Ai 15 Ignition lock Ignition lock ON position, signal about 6,0 V.
Ai 14 Signal voltage of Compare the voltage value with the given temperature value:
th iintake
the t k air
i ttem-
3,6 V = ---20 Celsius 1,0 V = +100 Celsius
perature (B3M)
3,2 V = 0 Celsius 0,7 V = +115 Celsius
2,3 V = +40 Celsius 0,4 V = +130 Celsius
1,5 V = +80 Celsius
Ai 13
Ai 12 The EC unit inside Compare the voltage value with the given temperature value:
t
temperature
t
0,50 V = ---20 Celsius
Ai 11 Not in use Always 4,1 V.
Ai 10 Supply voltage for When engine is running the supply voltage must be between 12...15
EC unit V.
Fault code activates if supply voltage is below 7,8 V or over 17,0 V.
Ai 9 Signal voltage of Compare the voltage value with the given pressure value:
th engine
the i oilil pres-
0,5 V = 0 bar 2,5 V = 5 bar
sure sensor (B2M)
0,9 V = 1 bar 2,9 V = 6 bar
1,3 V = 2 bar 3,3 V = 7 bar
1,7 V = 3 bar 3,7 V = 8 bar
2,1 V = 4 bar 4,1 V = 9 bar
Ai 8 Signal voltage of The hand throttle potentiometer min. position, signal
the hand throttle about 0,0.
potentiometer The hand throttle potentiometer max. position, signal
(R1M) about 5,0 V.
Note! The voltage value must change evenly between the end posi-
tions of the potentiometer.
Ai 7 Signal voltage of Gas pedal fully up, signal about 0,8 V
the gas pedal posi- Pedal fully down, signal about 4,0 V
tion sensor (B15) Note! The voltage value must change evenly between up and down
positions.
Ai 6 Signal voltage of Compare the voltage value with the given pressure value:
th b
the boostt pressure
0,5 V = 0,5 bar 2,5 V = 2,0 bar
(B3M)
0,9 V = 0,8 bar 2,9 V = 2,3 bar
1,3 V = 1,1 bar 3,3 V = 2,6 bar
1,7 V = 1,4 bar 3,7 V = 2,9 bar
2,1 V = 1,7 bar 4,1 V = 3,2 bar
Ai 5 Signal voltage of Control stop off, signal about 4,1 V.
the control stop Control stop on, signal about 0,8 V.
Ai 4 Not in use Always 4,1 V.
Ai 3 Signal voltage of Compare the voltage value with the given temperature value:
th engine
the i coolant
l t
1,0 V = ---50 Celsius 2,9 V = +75 Celsius
temperature sensor
(B4M)
Ai 2 Starting allowed Allowed 0,0 V, not allowed 4,0 V.
Ai 1 Supply voltage for Supply voltage must be between 4,6...5,2 V.
engine sensors
547
Test of the EC unit outputs do 1 -- do 11

In display Name 1 in display 0 in display Carrying ---out the test
do11 EC unit power On Off Here is checked the con-
supply control tact between control unit
andd th
the relay.
l
do10 Safety shutdown On Off
(MAB)
The lower row of the dis-
do 9 Bosch VP 30 On Off play shows the control of
injection pump current 1 or 0
power sypply
control 1= energized
0 unenergized
0=
do 8 Control of the Starting allowed Starting not allowed
starter motor relay
(K14)
do 7 Control of the On Off
coolant
temperature lamp
do 6 Control of the oil On Off
pressure lamp
cruise lamp
preheating lamp
do 3 Control of the fuel On Off
lamp
do 2 Grill. Control of Preheating on Preheating off
preheating relay
for engine intake
air (K2M)
do 1 Control of the fuel Lift pump on Lift pump off
pump relay (K60)
Test of the EC unit switches di 1 -- di 9

di 9 Fuel pressure sensor Pressure OK Low pressure Here is checked the
(B7M) contact between switch
and
d control
t l unit.
it
di 8 Not in use Always
di 7 Not in use Always The lower row of the dis-
play shows the electric
di 6 Not in use Always connection 1 or 0
di 5 Cruise control setting --- Switch right edge down Switch middle position
switch (S5M) 1= On
0 Off
0=
di 4 Cruise control setting + Switch left edge down Switch middle position
switch (S5M)
di 3 Cruise control setting Switch left edge down Switch middle position
km/h switch (S1M)
di 2 Cruise control setting Switch right edge down Switch middle position
rpm switch (S1M)
di 1 (S2M) Cruise OFF button Button depressed Button up
(S2M)
548
51. TESTMODE FII AND I/O TESTS HiTech, LS,
19.2.2010 Versu, Direct 512.2 5
EC unit of CR engines; HiTech, LS, Versu and Direct models (Test mode FII or I/O test)
MultiTool In display Point name
FI 01 Fi 1 Not in use
AI 13 Ai 13 Signal voltage of the intake air temperature sensor (inside the
boost pressure sensor B5M)
AI 12 Ai 12 Signal voltage of the rear gas pedal sensor B2W
AI 11 Ai 11 Not in use
AI 10 Ai 10 Signal voltage of the rail pressure sensor B7M
AI 09 Ai 9 Signal voltage of the fuel feed pressure sensor B8M (absolute
pressure)
AI 08 Ai 8 Signal voltage of the oil pressure sensor B6M
AI 07 Ai 7 Signal voltage of the hand throttle potentiometer R1M
AI 06 Ai 6 Signal voltage of the front gas pedal sensor B15
AI 05 Ai 5 Signal voltage of the boost pressure sensor B5M (absolute
pressure)
AI 02 Ai 2 Signal voltage of the engine coolant temperature sensor B3M
AI 01 Ai 1 Signal voltage of the fuel temperature sensor B4M
DO 17 do 17 Control of the preheating lamp
DO 16 do 16 Not in use
DO 14 do 14 Not in use (Control of the exhaust gas brake valve Y1N)
DO 11 do11 Not in use
DO 10 do10 Not in use
DO 09 do 9 Control of the start relay K1M (low side)
DO 08 do 8 Control of the start relay K1M (high side)
DO 07 do 7 Control of the STOP lamp (engine overheating)
DO 06 do 6 Control of the oil pressure lamp
DO 05 do 5 Control of the cruise lamp
DO 03 do 3 Control of the fuel lamp (water in fuel/fuel pressure low)
DO 02 do 2 Grill. Control of the relay K3M for preheating of engine intake air
DO 01 do 1 Control of the lift pump relay K2M
DI 13 di 13 Ignition switch (start request)
DI 12 di 12 Water sensor B1M in fuel filter
DI 11 di 11 P brake
DI 10 di 10 Not in use (Exhaust gas brake pedal/brake pedals)
DI 09 di 9 Not in use
DI 08 di 8 Control stop switch
DI 05 di 5 Cruise control setting --- switch
DI 04 di 4 Cruise control setting + switch
DI 03 di 3 Cruise control setting km/h switch
DI 02 di 2 Cruise control setting rpm switch
DI 01
di 1 Cruise off button
NOTE If there is constantly text “CAN” in the display instead of a value it means that the control unit TC1 does not receive
necessary CAN messages from other control units constantly (constantly = many seconds). Check the condition of the CAN
bus.
549
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
19.2.2010 Versu, Direct 512.2 6
Test of the EC unit speed sensor signals Fi 1

MultiTool In display Name Value Carrying ---out the test
MultiTool In display Name Value Carrying ---out

the test
AI 13 Ai 13 Signal voltage of the Compare the voltage value with the given
intake air temperature temperature value:
sensor (inside the
boost pressure sensor 4,77 V = ---30 ˚C
B5M) 4,61 V = ---20 ˚C
4,37 V = ---10 ˚C
4,06 V = 0 ˚C
3,67 V = +10 ˚C
3,23 V = +20 ˚C
2,76 V = +30 ˚C
2,31 V = +40 ˚C
1,90 V = +50 ˚C
1,53 V = +60 ˚C
1,23 V = +70 ˚C
0,98 V = +80 ˚C
0,76 V = +90 ˚C ~ max.allowed
0,60 V = +100 ˚C
AI 12 Ai 12 Signal voltage of the Gas pedal fully up, signal about 0,8 V
rear pedal sensor B2W Pedal fully down, signal about 4,0 V
NOTE The voltage value must change evenly be-

tween up and down positions
NOTE Model NLS: This is visible in I/O test of the

control unit UC2
AI 11 Ai 11 Not in use Always about 4,2 V
550
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
19.2.2010 Versu, Direct 512.2 7

the test
AI 10 *) Ai 10 Signal voltage of the Compare the voltage value with the given pressure
rail pressure sensor value:
B7M
0,50 V = 0 bar = 0 Mpa
0,72 V = 100 bar = 10 Mpa
0,94 V = 200 bar = 20 Mpa ~ min.allowed
1,17 V = 300 bar = 30 Mpa
1,39 V = 400 bar = 40 Mpa
1,83 V = 600 bar = 60 Mpa
2,28 V = 800 bar = 80 Mpa
2,72 V = 1000 bar = 100 Mpa
3,17 V = 1200 bar = 120 Mpa
3,61 V = 1400 bar = 140 Mpa max.(4 cyl.
1,06 V = 1600 bar = 160 Mpa max.(6 cyl.)
4,50 V = 1800 bar = 180 Mpa
Typical values (without load):

at 650 rpm 300---350 bar
at 850 rpm 300---350 bar
at 1500 rpm 400---500 bar
at 2000 rpm 600---700 bar
NOTE Values depend on the engine and tractor

model
fuel feed pressure value:
sensor B8M (absolute
pressure) 0,5 V = 0,0 bar = 0 kPa vacuum
0,9 V = 0,3 bar = 30 kPa vacuum
1,80 V = 1,0 bar = 100 kPa
1,95 V = 1,1 bar = 110 kPa min.allowed
2,10 V = 1,2 bar = 120 kPa
2,50 V = 1,5 bar = 150 kPa
2,90 V = 1,8 bar = 180 kPa
3,16 V = 2,0 bar = 200 kPa ~ max.allowed
3,30 V = 2,1 bar = 210 kPa
AI 08 Ai 8 Signal voltage of the Compare the voltage value with the given pressure
oil pressure sensor value:
B6M
0,5 V = 0 bar
0,9 V = 1 bar
1,3 V = 2 bar
1,7 V = 3 bar
2,1 V = 4 bar
2,5 V = 5 bar
2,9 V = 6 bar
3,3 V = 7 bar
3,7 V = 8 bar
4,1 V = 9 bar
AI 07 Ai 7 Signal voltage of the The hand throttle potentiometer min. position,
hand throttle signal about 0,0
potentiometer R1M The hand throttle potentiometer max. position,
signal about 5,0 V

tween the end positions of the potentiometer
*) Visible also by MultiTool EEM3CR application
551
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
19.2.2010 Versu, Direct 512.2 8

the test
AI 06 Ai 6 Signal voltage of the Gas pedal fully up, signal about 0,8 V
front gas pedal sensor Pedal fully down, signal about 4,0 V
B15
tween up and down positions
boost pressure sensor value:
B5M (absolute
pressure) 0,50 V = 0,5 bar = 50 kPa suction
0,79 V = 0,75 bar = 75 kPa suction
1,07 V = 1,0 bar = 100 kPa
1,64 V = 1,5 bar = 150 kPa
2,21 V = 2,0 bar = 200 kPa
3,36 V = 3,0 bar = 300 kPa
AI 02 Ai 2 Signal voltage of the Compare the voltage value with the given
engine coolant temperature value:
temperature sensor
B3M 4,75 V = ---30 ˚C
4,59 V = ---20 ˚C
4,38 V = ---10 ˚C
4,08 V = 0 ˚C
3,70 V = +10 ˚C
3,27 V = +20 ˚C
2,79 V = +30 ˚C
2,34 V = +40 ˚C
1,88 V = +50 ˚C
1,55 V = +60 ˚C
1,24 V = +70 ˚C
0,98 V = +80 ˚C
0,78 V = +90 ˚C
0,61 V = +100 ˚C
0,53 V = +106 ˚C power limitation
0,45 V = +113 ˚C engine stops
AI 01 *) Ai 1 Signal voltage of the Compare the voltage value with the given
fuel temperature temperature value:
sensor B4M
4,75 V = ---30 ˚C
4,59 V = ---20 ˚C
4,38 V = ---10 ˚C
4,08 V = 0 ˚C
3,70 V = +10 ˚C
3,27 V = +20 ˚C
2,79 V = +30 ˚C
2,34 V = +40 ˚C
1,88 V = +50 ˚C
1,55 V = +60 ˚C
1,24 V = +70 ˚C
0,98 V = +80 ˚C
552
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
19.2.2010 Versu, Direct 512.2 9

Multitool In display Name 1 in display 0 in display Carrying ---out
out
the test
DO 17 do 17 Control of the When preheating lamp
preheating lamp on
DO 16 do 16 Not in use Always
DO 14 do 14 Control of the exhaust When exhaust gas
gas brake valve Y1N brake valve on
DO 11 do11 Not in use Always
DO 10 do10 Not in use Always
DO 09 *) do 9 Control of the start When start relay on
relay K1M (low side) (”1” is visible
momentarily)
Start the engine
DO 08 *) do 8 Control of the start When start relay on
relay K1M (high side) (”1” is visible
momentarily)
DO 07 Control of the STOP When the STOP lamp is
lamp on due to engine
overheating
After switching power

on the output is “1” for
a while
DO 06 do 6 Control of the oil When oil pressure lamp
pressure lamp on
When engine is not

running
Blinks when service

code(s) is active
DO 05 do 5 Control of the cruise When cruise lamp on
lamp
DO 03 do 3 Control of the fuel If the value blinks 0/1
lamp (the most of check the items DI12
instrument panels do and AI09
not blink the fuel lamp)
DO 02 *) Grill. Control of the When control voltage
relay K3M for on grill relay
preheating of engine
intake air
DO 01 *) do 1 Control of the lift pump When control voltage
relay K2M on lift pump relay
553
Model Code Page
31.10.2006
19.2.2010 Versu, Direct 512.2 10

MultiTool In display Name 1 in display 0 in display Carrying ---out
out
the test
DI 13 *) Ignition switch (start When ignition switch on
request) start position
DI 12 di 12 Water sensor B1M in When water on fuel

fuel filter filter
DI 11 *) di 11 P brake When P ---brake on
DI 10 di 10 Exhaust gas brake When exhaust gas
pedal/brake pedals brake pedal or driving
brake pedals pushed.
Selecting switch S1N
must be on
DI 09 di 9 Low idle speed locked Always
to 850 rpm
DI 08 *) di 8 Control stop switch The switch is at position Engine must be
on stopped
DI 05 di 5 Cruise control setting The right edge pressed Middle / left position
--- switch down
DI 04 di 4 Cruise control setting The left edge pressed Middle / right position
+ switch down
Di 03 di 3 Cruise control setting The left edge pressed Middle / right position
km/h switch down
Di 02 di 2 Cruise control setting The right edge pressed Middle / left position
rpm switch down
Di 01 di 1 Cruise off button Button pressed Button up
554
51. TESTMODE FII AND I/O TESTS Syncro with
19.2.2010 CR engines 512.3 11
EC unit of CR engines, Syncro models (Test mode FII or I/O test)

MultiTool Point name
FI 01 Signal of the driving speed sensor B6
AI 13 Signal voltage of the intake air temperature sensor (inside the
boost pressure sensor B5M)
AI 12 Signal voltage of the rear gas pedal sensor B2W
AI 11 Not in use
AI 10 Signal voltage of the rail pressure sensor B7M
AI 09 Signal voltage of the fuel feed pressure sensor B8M (absolute
pressure)
AI 08 Signal voltage of the oil pressure sensor B6M
AI 07 Signal voltage of the hand throttle potentiometer R1M
AI 06 Signal voltage of the front gas pedal sensor B15
AI 05 Signal voltage of the boost pressure sensor B5M (absolute
pressure)
AI 04 Not in use
AI 03 Not in use
AI 02 Signal voltage of the engine coolant temperature sensor B3M
AI 01 Signal voltage of the fuel temperature sensor B4M
DO 17 Control of the preheating lamp
DO 16 Not in use
DO 15 Not in use
DO 14 Not in use (Control of the exhaust gas brake valve Y1N)
DO 13 Not in use
DO 12 Not in use
DO 11 Not in use
DO 10 Not in use
DO 09 Control of the start relay K1M (low side)
DO 08 Control of the start relay K1M (high side)
DO 07 Control of the STOP lamp (engine overheating)
DO 06 Control of the oil pressure lamp
DO 05 Control of the cruise lamp
DO 04 Not in use
DO 03 Control of the fuel lamp (water in fuel/fuel pressure low)
DO 02 Grill. Control of the relay K3M for preheating of engine intake air
DO 01 Control of the lift pump relay K2M
DI 13 Ignition switch (start request)
DI 12 Water sensor B1M in fuel filter
DI 11 Clutch pedal
DI 10 Not in use (Exhaust gas brake pedal/brake pedals)
DI 09 Low idle rise up 650=>850rpm
DI 08 Control stop switch
DI 07 Cruise off (HiShift button pressed)
DI 06 Cruise off (clutch pedal or brake pedal pressed)
DI 05 Cruise control setting --- switch
DI 04 Cruise control setting + switch
DI 03 Cruise control setting km/h switch
DI 02 Cruise control setting rpm switch
DI 01 START LEVEL OF THE MENU
Cruise off button
555
19.2.2010 CR engines 512.3 12
Test of the EC unit speed sensor signals Fi 1

MultiTool Name Value Carrying ---out the test
FI 01 Signal of the driving Transmission type 50 The lower row of the display shows the value of the test
speed sensor B6 km/h: point in herz
1000 r/min = 70---90
Engage gear M1. Set the engine revs to 1000 r/min and
Transmission type 40 drive the tractor forwards. Compare the reading with the
km/h: given value
1000 r/min = 60---80
MultiTool Name Value Carrying ---out

the test
AI 13 Signal voltage of the Compare the voltage value with the given temperature value:
intake air temperature
sensor (inside the 4,77 V = ---30 ˚C
boost pressure sensor 4,61 V = ---20 ˚C
B5M) 4,37 V = ---10 ˚C
4,06 V = 0 ˚C
3,67 V = +10 ˚C
3,23 V = +20 ˚C
2,76 V = +30 ˚C
2,31 V = +40 ˚C
1,90 V = +50 ˚C
1,53 V = +60 ˚C
1,23 V = +70 ˚C
0,98 V = +80 ˚C
0,60 V = +100 ˚C
AI 12 Signal voltage of the Gas pedal fully up, signal about 0,8 V
rear pedal sensor B2W Pedal fully down, signal about 4,0 V
NOTE The voltage value must change evenly between up and

down positions
AI 11 Not in use Always about 4,2 V
556
19.2.2010 CR engines 512.3 13

the test
AI 10 *) Signal voltage of the Compare the voltage value with the given pressure value:
rail pressure sensor
B7M 0,50 V = 0 bar = 0 Mpa
0,72 V = 100 bar = 10 Mpa
0,94 V = 200 bar = 20 Mpa ~ min.allowed
1,17 V = 300 bar = 30 Mpa
1,39 V = 400 bar = 40 Mpa
1,83 V = 600 bar = 60 Mpa
2,28 V = 800 bar = 80 Mpa
2,72 V = 1000 bar = 100 Mpa
3,17 V = 1200 bar = 120 Mpa
3,61 V = 1400 bar = 140 Mpa max.(4 cyl.
1,06 V = 1600 bar = 160 Mpa max.(6 cyl.)
4,50 V = 1800 bar = 180 Mpa
Typical values (without load):

at 650 rpm 300---350 bar
at 850 rpm 300---350 bar
at 1500 rpm 400---500 bar
at 2000 rpm 600---700 bar
NOTE Values depend on the engine and tractor model

fuel feed pressure
sensor B8M (absolute 0,5 V = 0,0 bar = 0 kPa vacuum
pressure) 0,9 V = 0,3 bar = 30 kPa vacuum
1,80 V = 1,0 bar = 100 kPa
1,95 V = 1,1 bar = 110 kPa min.allowed
2,10 V = 1,2 bar = 120 kPa
2,50 V = 1,5 bar = 150 kPa
2,90 V = 1,8 bar = 180 kPa
3,30 V = 2,1 bar = 210 kPa
AI 08 Signal voltage of the Compare the voltage value with the given pressure value:
oil pressure sensor
B6M 0,5 V = 0 bar
0,9 V = 1 bar
1,3 V = 2 bar
1,7 V = 3 bar
2,1 V = 4 bar
2,5 V = 5 bar
2,9 V = 6 bar
3,3 V = 7 bar
3,7 V = 8 bar
4,1 V = 9 bar
AI 07 Signal voltage of the The hand throttle potentiometer min. position, signal about 0,0
hand throttle The hand throttle potentiometer max. position, signal about 5,0 V
potentiometer R1M
NOTE The voltage value must change evenly between the end
positions of the potentiometer
557
19.2.2010 CR engines 512.3 14

the test
AI 06 Signal voltage of the Gas pedal fully up, signal about 0,8 V
front gas pedal sensor Pedal fully down, signal about 4,0 V
B15
NOTE The voltage value must change evenly between up and
down positions
boost pressure sensor
B5M (absolute 0,50 V = 0,5 bar = 50 kPa suction
pressure) 0,79 V = 0,75 bar = 75 kPa suction
1,07 V = 1,0 bar = 100 kPa
1,64 V = 1,5 bar = 150 kPa
2,21 V = 2,0 bar = 200 kPa
3,36 V = 3,0 bar = 300 kPa
AI 02 Signal voltage of the Compare the voltage value with the given temperature value:
engine coolant
temperature sensor 4,75 V = ---30 ˚C
B3M 4,59 V = ---20 ˚C
4,38 V = ---10 ˚C
4,08 V = 0 ˚C
3,70 V = +10 ˚C
3,27 V = +20 ˚C
2,79 V = +30 ˚C
2,34 V = +40 ˚C
1,88 V = +50 ˚C
1,55 V = +60 ˚C
1,24 V = +70 ˚C
0,98 V = +80 ˚C
0,78 V = +90 ˚C
0,61 V = +100 ˚C
0,53 V = +106 ˚C power limitation
0,45 V = +113 ˚C engine stops
AI 01 *) Signal voltage of the Compare the voltage value with the given temperature value:
fuel temperature
sensor B4M 4,75 V = ---30 ˚C
4,59 V = ---20 ˚C
4,38 V = ---10 ˚C
4,08 V = 0 ˚C
3,70 V = +10 ˚C
3,27 V = +20 ˚C
2,79 V = +30 ˚C
2,34 V = +40 ˚C
1,88 V = +50 ˚C
1,55 V = +60 ˚C
1,24 V = +70 ˚C
0,98 V = +80 ˚C
558
19.2.2010 CR engines 512.3 15

Multitool Name 1 in display 0 in display Carrying ---out
out
the test
DO 17 Control of the When preheating lamp on
preheating lamp
DO 16 Not in use Always
DO 14 Control of the exhaust When exhaust gas brake valve on
gas brake valve Y1N
DO 10 Not in use
DO 09 *) Control of the start When start relay on
relay K1M (low side) (”1” is visible momentarily)
St t the
Start th engine
i
DO 08 *) Control of the start When start relay on
relay K1M (high side) (”1” is visible momentarily)
DO 07 Control of the STOP When the STOP lamp is on due to engine
lamp overheating
After switching power on the output is “1”

for a while
DO 06 Control of the oil When oil pressue lamp on
pressure lamp
When engine is not running
Blinks when service code(s) is active

DO 05 Control of the cruise When cruise lamp on
lamp
DO 03 Control of the fuel If the value blinks 0/1 check the items Normally
lamp (the most of DI 12 and AI 09
instrument panels do
not blink the fuel lamp)
DO 02 *) Grill. Control of the When control voltage on grill relay
relay K3M for
preheating of engine
intake air
DO 01 *) Control of the lift pump When control voltage on lift pump relay
relay K2M
559
19.2.2010 CR engines 512.3 16

MultiTool Name 1 in display 0 in display Carrying ---out
out
the test
DI 13 *) Ignition switch (start When ignition switch on start position
request)
DI 12 Water sensor B1M in When water on fuel filter

fuel filter
DI 11 *) Clutch pedal When clutch pedal fully pushed
DI 10 Exhaust gas brake When exhaust gas brake pedal or driving
pedal/brake pedals brake pedals pushed. Selecting switch
S1N must be on
DI 09 Low idle speed locked Always
to 850 rpm
DI 08 *) Control stop switch The switch is at position on Engine must be
stopped
DI 07 Cruise off (HiShift When HiShift button pressed
button pressed)
DI 06 Cruise off (clutch pedal When clutch pedal pushed (even a little)
or brake pedal or brake pedal (L or R) pushed
pressed)
DI 05 Cruise control setting The right edge pressed down Middle / left
--- switch position
DI 04 Cruise control setting The left edge pressed down Middle / right
+ switch position
Di 03 Cruise control setting The left edge pressed down Middle / right
km/h switch position
Di 02 Cruise control setting The right edge pressed down Middle / left
rpm switch position
Di 01 Cruise off button Button pressed Button up
560
TC1 unit of HiTech models (Test mode FII)
Test mode of the TC1 control unit, FII / A (HiTech, M, T) Exceptions in C series
Point name Point name
Po 6 PTO valve (Y2)
Po 5 R valve (Y12)
Po 4 F valve (Y11)
Po 3 DPS C3--- clutch valve (Y17)
Fi 6 Rear PTO speed (B7)
Fi 5 Shuttle output speed signal (lower sensor B13)
Fi 4 Shuttle output speed signal (upper sensor B12)
Fi 3 Not in use
Fi 2 Transmission speed signal (B6)
Fi 1 Engine speed signal (B11)
Ai 6 Not in use
Ai 5 Signal voltage of the rear clutch pedal position sensor (B1W)
Ai 4 Signal voltage of the front clutch pedal position sensor (B16)
Ai 3 Not in use
Ai 2 Signal voltage of the transmission oil temperature sensor (B14)
Ai 1 Signal voltage of the outdoor temperature sensor (B17)
do 6 Not in use
do 5 Control of the parking brake valve (Y18)
do 4 Not in use
do 3 Not in use
do 2 Not in use
do 1 Not in use
di 24 Rear brake pedal limit switch (S9W) Lifting / lowering switch (S10E)
di 23 Automatic traction switch (S76)
di 22 Rear lever. Parking brake. Reed relay (S7W) Differential lock switch (Auto DL) (S78)
di 21 Rear DPS pre--- programming push button (S4W) DL / 4WD switch (S79, left side depressed)
di 20 Rear clutch pedal limit switch (S2W) 4WD (S79, right side depressed)
di 19 Rear lever. Direction R. Reed relay (S6W) Left brake pedal switch (S20)
di 18 Rear lever. Direction F. Reed relay (S5W) Right brake pedal switch (S10)
di 17 PTO start push button (S1A, S2A)
di 16 Front lever. Parking brake. Reed relay (S15)
di 15 PTO rocker switch (S25)
di 14 Reverse drive controls. Seat direction (S3W) Not in use
di 13 PTO speed 2. Rear position. Limit switch (S29)
di 12 PTO speed 1. Front position. Limit switch (S28)
di 11 Front DPS pre--- programming push button (S51)
di 10 Front lever. Direction R. Reed relay (S41)
di 9 Front lever. Direction F. Reed relay (S40)
di 8 DPS auto/manual switch (S47)
di 7 DPS automatic gear change switch (S47)
di 6 Front clutch pedal limit switch (S9)
di 5 Seat limit switch (S60)
di 4 PTO start, switch (S25)
di 3 HiShift button (S45). Test both buttons.
di 2 DPS push buttons, down (S23)
di 1 DPS push buttons, up (S23)
1 Version number of the software in the TC1 control unit.
10 TC1 control unit supply voltage

11 Outdoor temperature degrees in Celsius or Fahrenheit (B17)
12 Gearbox oil temperature degrees in Celsius (B14)
13 Front gas pedal position in percent (B15)
14 Front clutch pedal position in percent (B16)
15 Rear clutch pedal position in percent (B1W) Not in use
16 Direction information (B12 and B13)
100 Total number of the F clutch engagements
101 Total engaging time (in hours) of the F clutch
102 Total number of the R clutch engagements
103 Total engaging time (in hours) of the R clutch
104 Total number of the C1 clutch engagements
105 Total engaging time (in hours) of the C1 clutch
110 Total number of engine starts.
111 Operational hours of the TC1 control unit in total
561
Test of the TC1 control unit proportional outputs Po 1 -- Po 6

Po 6 PTO valve (Y2) The lower row of the display shows the value of the test point
in ampere
ampere.
Po 5 R valve (Y12)
Sett th
S the engine
i speed d to
t about
b t 1000 rpm.
Po 4 F valve (Y11)
After the test point confirm, the proportional valve is controlled
Po 3 DPS C3---clutch valve (Y17) 1,1 ---2,2 with the full current. The display value should be between the
limiting values.
Po 2 DPS C2---clutch valve (Y6)
If at display LO=wire damage
Po 1 DPS C1---clutch valve (Y4) If at display HI=short circuit or valve takes too high current.
Test of the TC1 control unit speed sensor signals Fi 1 -- Fi 6

Fi 6 Rear PTO speed 540=170---200 The lower row of the display shows the value of the test
(B7) 540E=220---250 point in herz.
1000=310---350
540E (T140)=200 ---230 Engage the PTO. Set the engine revs to 1000 r/min and
1000E (T140)=360 ---400 compare the values.
Fi 5 Shuttle output 1000 r/min=180---210 (F) The lower row of the display shows the value of the test
speed signal 1500 r/min=280---310 (F) point in herz.
(lower sensor B13) 1800 r/min=340---380 (F)
Set the gears in neutral. Set the engine revs to 1000
1000 r/min=190---220
r/min 190 220 (R) r/min. Engage forward direction (F) and compare the
Fi 4 Shuttle output 1500 r/min=300---330 (R) value with the given value. Make the same check also
speed signal 1800 r/min=360---400 (R) in the reverse direction (R). Raise the engine revs to
(upper sensor 1500 and 1800 r/min and measure again in both direc-
B12) tions. Compare the reading with the given values. If one
of the values deviates, carry out a comparing measure-
ment.
Fi 3 Not in use
Fi 2 Transmission Transmission type 50 km/h: The lower row of the display shows the value of the test
speed signal (B6) 1000 r/min=70 ---90 point in herz.
1500 r/min=110 ---140
1800 r/min=130 ---170 Engage gear M1. Set the engine revs to 1000 r/min and
drive the tractor forwards. Compare the reading with
Transmission type 40 km/h: the given value. Test also at 1500 and 1800 rpm engine
1000 r/min=60 ---80 revs and compare the values.
1500 r/min=90 ---120
1800 r/min=120 ---150
Fi 1 Engine speed sig- 1000 r/min=570 ---660 The lower row of the display shows the value of the test
nal (B11) 1500 r/min=800 ---1000 point in herz.
1800 r/min=1000 ---1200
Set the engine revs to 1000 r/min and compare the
value with the given values. Raise the revs to 1500 and
1800 r/min and compare the values.
562
Test of the TC1 control unit temperature and position sensor signals Ai 1 -- Ai 6
In display Name Carrying ---out the test
Ai 6 Not in use
Ai 5 Signal voltage of the rear clutch The lower row of the display shows the value of the test point in voltage.
pedal position sensor (B1W)
Clutch pedal fully up, signal between 0,3...2,4 V.
Pedal in bottom, signal between 2,5...4,7 V.
The voltage value changed by the program appears as per cent value in
menu point 15.
Ai 4 Signal voltage of the front clutch The lower row of the display shows the value of the test point in voltage.
pedal position sensor (B16)
Clutch pedal fully up, signal between 0,3...2,4 V.
Pedal in bottom, signal between 2,5...4,7 V.
The voltage value changed by the program appears as per cent value in
menu point 14.
Ai 3 Not in use
Ai 2 Signal voltage of 1,0V = ---50 Celsius The lower row of the display shows the value of the test
the transmission oil 1,4V = ---20 Celsius point in voltage
temperature sensor 1,6V = 0 Celsius
(B14) 1,9V = +20 Celsius Compare the voltage value with the given temperature
2,2V = +40 Celsius value in the LH side column.
2,5V = +60 Celsius
2,8V = +80 Celsius The voltage value changed by the program appears as
3,1V = +100 Celsius Celsius value in menu point 12.
3,4V = +120 Celsius
Ai 1 Signal voltage of 1,0V = ---50 Celsius The lower row of the display shows the value of the test
the outdoor tem- 1,4V = ---20 Celsius point in voltage
perature sensor 1,6V = 0 Celsius
(B17) 1,9V = +20 Celsius Compare the voltage value with the given temperature
2,4V = +50 Celsius value in the LH side column.
The voltage value changed by the program appears as
Celsius value in menu point 11.
Test of the TC1 control unit outputs do 1 -- do 6

do 6 Not in use Here is checked the contact
between control unit and the
do 5 Control of parking Parking brake disengaged. Parking brake engaged. proportional valve.
brake valve (Y18)
do 4 Not in use The lower row of the display
shows the control of current
do 3 1 or 0
do 2
1= energized
do 1 0= unenergized
563
Test of the TC1 control unit switches di 1 -- di 24

In display Series Name 1 in display 0 in display Carrying ---out
the test
di 24 C90 ---C150 Lifting / lowering Button depressed Button up Here is checked the
switch (S10E) contact between
switch
it h and
d control
t l unit.
it
Other HiTechs Rear brake pedal limit Pedal fully down Pedal up
switch (S9W)
di 23 Automatic traction AutoTraction on AutoTraction off The lower row of the
switch (S76) displayy shows the
electric ti 1
l t i connection
di 22 C90 ---C150 Differential lock (Auto applied disengaged
or 0
DL) (S78)
Other HiTechs Rear lever. Parking Parking brake ap- Parking brake dis-
brake. Reed relay plied engaged 1= On
(S7W) 0= Off
di 21 C90 ---C150 DL / 4WD (S79, left applied disengaged
side)
Other HiTechs Rear DPS pre ---pro- Button depressed. Button up
gramming push button Visible only for a
(S4W) while.
di 20 C90 ---C150 4WD (S79, right side) applied disengaged
Other HiTechs Rear clutch pedal limit Pedal fully down Pedal up
switch (S2W)
di 19 C90 ---C150 Left brake pedal switch Pedal depressed Pedal up
(S20)
Other HiTechs Rear lever. Direction R. R direction se- Direction disen-
Reed relay (S6W) lected gaged
di 18 C90 ---C150 Right brake pedal Pedal depressed Pedal up
siwtch (S10)
Other HiTechs Rear lever. Direction F. F direction selected Direction disen-
Reed relay (S5W) gaged
di 17 PTO start push button Button depressed Button up
(S1A, S2A)
di 16 Parking brake. Reed Parking brake ap- Parking brake dis-
relay (S15) plied engaged
di 15 PTO rocker switch On, PTO start Disengaged
(S25)
di 14 C90 ---C150 Not in use
Other HiTechs Reverse drive controls. Seat rearwards Seat forwards
Seat direction (S3W)
di 13 PTO speed 2. Rear Speed selected Speed disengaged
position. Limit switch
(S29)
di 12 PTO speed 1. Front Speed selected Speed disengaged
position. Limit switch
(S28)
di 11 DPS pre ---program- Button depressed. Button up
ming push button Visible only for a
(S51) while.
di 10 Direction R. Reed relay R direction se- Direction disen-
(S41) lected gaged
di 9 Direction F. Reed relay F direction selected Direction disen-
(S40) gaged
di 8 DPS auto/manual Auto 1 or 2 on DPS manual mode
switch (S47) (man)
di 7 DPS automatic gear Auto position 1 Auto position 2
change switch (S47)
564

In display Series Name 1 in display 0 in display Carrying ---out
the test
di 6 Clutch pedal limit Pedal fully down Pedal up Here is checked the
switch (S9) contact between
switch and control unit.
di 5 Seat limit switch (S60) Driver sits on the No signal The lower
Th l row off the
h
seat display shows the
electric connection 1
or 0
di 4 PTO start, switch (S25) PTO switch in Disengaged 1= On

START position 0= Off
di 3 HiShift button (S45). Button depressed Button up Here is checked the

Test both buttons. contact between
switch and control unit.
di 2 DPS push buttons, Button depressed Button up The lower row off the
down (S23) display shows the
electric connection 1
or 0
di 1 DPS push buttons, up Button depressed Button up 1= On

(S23) 0= Off
565
Test of the TC1 control unit software version 1

1 Version number of the software in Here is checked the software and parameter versions of the TC1 control
the TC1 control unit. unit.
SOF (software) = Software version e.g. 61.8.36.0

PAr (parameter) = Parameter version e.g. 1.23.0.0
Example: Test of the software versions
2. Confirm test point with the DPS pre ---programming button.
3. Check software versions.

In this case software no. 61.8.36.3 and parameter no. 1.23.0.0
4. When versions have been checked, confirm testing with the

DPS pre ---programming button.
5. If needed, select new test point with the DPS buttons or esca-
pe from the test mode by switching off current.
566
Test of the TC1 control unit supply voltage 10

10 TC1 control unit supply volt- The lower row of the display shows the value of the test point in voltage
age
When engine is running the supply voltage must be between 12...15 V.

Fault code activates if supply voltage is below 10,5 V or over 17,5 V.
Test of the TC1 control unit temperature sensor signals 11 -- 12

11 Outdoor temperature degrees in The lower row of the display shows the value of the test point in Celsius
Celsius or Fahrenheit (B17) or Fahrenheit.
Compare the value with the ambient outdoor temperature.
12 Gearbox oil temperature degrees The lower row of the display shows the value of the test point in Celsius.
in Celsius (B14) Compare the reading with the actual gearbox temperature.
Test of the TC1 control unit pedal position sensor signals 13 -- 15

13 Front gas pedal position in per- The lower row of the display shows the value of the test point in percent.
cent (B15) When the pedal is fully up, the value should be smaller than 2. When
the pedal is down, the value should be greater than 95. Check also that
the value changes evenly when the pedal is moved (in the middle of the
pedal stroke, the value should be about 50).
14 Front clutch pedal position in per- The lower row of the display shows the value of the test point in percent.
cent (B16) When the pedal is fully up, the value should be greater than 97. With
the pedal at the bottom, the value should be smaller than 2. Also check,
that the value changes
g evenly y when the p
pedal is moved ((in the middle of
15 the pedal travel, the value should be about 50).
Note! If in the display there is a line (--- ---) instead of the test point, carry
out the calibration of the pedal concerned.
Test of the TC1 control unit speed sensor signals 16

16 Direction informa- 1= Direction forward (F) The lower row of the display shows the direction informa-
tion (B12 and B13) 2= Direction backward (R) tion 1 or 2
Shift the gears in neutral and set the engine revs to idling
speed (approx 850 r/min). Engage the forward direction
(F) and increase slowly the engine revs up to max. The
reading must be 1 and must remain the same during the
whole test. Engage reverse direction (R) and repeat the
same measurement. The reading must be 2 during the
whole measurement.
If one of the direction readings does not function (value is
faulty or it changes when engine revs alternate), but F4
and F5 values are correct, the control unit TC1 may be
defective.
567
Test of the TC1 control unit counters 100 -- 111

In display Name
100 Total number of the F clutch engagements
101 Total engaging time (in hours) of the F clutch
102 Total number of the R clutch engagements
103 Total engaging time (in hours) of the R clutch
110 Total number of engine starts
111 Operational hours of the TC1 control unit in total
The readings of the counters are shown shortened as follows:

--- the two intermediate segments show the two first significant digits of the reading
--- the RH side segment shows the number of zeroes.
E.g. b 55 3 means that driving direction forwards has been engaged 55 000 times.
Last Number of
digit zeroes
0 ---
1 0
2 00
3 000 (thousands)
4 0000
5 00000
6 000000 (millions)
Note! The greatest value of the hour recorders is 9999 after which the counters are zeroed.
568
19.2.2010 T180-- T190 513.2 9
TC2 unit of T180---T190, T180CR ---T190CR (Test mode FII)

Test mode of the TC2 control unit , FII / C
Point name
Po 6 Not in use
Po 5 Control of the rear working light relay (K2)
Po 4 Control of the reverse buzzer (H27)
Po 3 Not in use
Po 2 Not in use
Po 1 Not in use
Fi 6 Not in use
Fi 5 Sigma--- PTO speed signal (B5)
Fi 4 Sigma--- engine speed signal (B4)
Fi 3 Rear wheel speed signal (B1C)
Fi 2 Front axle speed signal (B5C)
Fi 1 Radar speed signal (B10)
Ai 6 Not in use
Ai 5 Not in use
Ai 4 Not in use
Ai 3 Not in use
Ai 2 Not in use
Ai 1 Signal voltage of the front tyre position sensor (B2C)
do 6 Not in use
do 5 Differential lock valve (Y1)
do 4 Not in use
do 3 4--- WD valve (Y3)
do 2 Not in use
do 1 Not in use
di 24 Not in use
di 23 Not in use
di 22 Headlights switch (S1)
di 21 Not in use
di 20 Not in use
di 19 Not in use
di 18 Not in use
di 17 Not in use
di 16 Not in use
di 15 Not in use
di 14 Front PTO switch (S38)
di 13 Change over switch for side pillar display (S7C)
di 12 4--- WD On/off switch (S3C)
di 11 4--- WD automatic position switch (S3C)
di 10 Rear PTO automatic stop switch (S9C)
di 9 Not in use
di 8 Not in use
di 7 Not in use
di 6 Differential lock switch , on/off (S1C)
di 5 Differential lock switch, AUTO --- position (S1C)
di 4 Right brake light limit switch (S10)
di 3 Left brake light limit switch (S20)
di 2 Powerlift switch (S10E)
di 1 Not in use

10 Frequency difference of the Sigma sensors
569
19.2.2010 T180-- T190 513.2 10
Test of the TC2 control unit proportional outputs Po 1 -- Po 6

Po 6 Not in use
Po 5 Control of rear wor- 0= Forward direction (F) The lower row of the display shows the amount of the
king light relay (K2) control current in percent.
100 = Reverse direction (R)
Switch the headlights / parking lights on (S1).
Put the rear working light switch (S2) to middle position
Po 4 Control of reverse 0= Forward direction (F) (automatic---position on).
buzzer (H27)
100 = Reverse direction (R) Engage reverse direction (R) and the value must be 100.
Engage forward direction (F) and the value must be 0.
Po 3 Not in use
Po 2 Not in use
Po 1 Not in use
Test of the TC2 control unit speed sensors signals Fi 1 -- Fi 6

Fi 6 Not in use
Fi 5 Sigma ---PTO 1000 r/min= 167 The lower row of the display shows the value of the
speed signal (B5) 1500 r/min= 250 test point in herz.
r/min= 300
1800 r/min Shift the gears in neutral. Adjust engine revs with hand
Fi 4 Sigma ---engine throttle. Compare the reading with the given values.
speed signal (B4) Check also, that the value changes evenly in the whole
revs range of the engine .
Fi 3 Rear wheel speed Transmission type 50 km/h: The lower row of the display shows the value of the
signal (B1C) 1000 r/min= 8 test point in herz.
1500 r/min= 12 Engage gear M1. Set the engine revs to 1000 r/min
1800 r/min= 14 and drive the tractor forwards. Compare the reading
with the given value. Test also at 1500 and 1800 rpm
Transmission type 40 km/h: engine revs and compare the values.
1000 r/min= 6
1500 r/min= 9
1800 r/min= 11
Fi 2 Front axle speed Transmission type 50 km/h:
signal (B5C) 1000 r/min= 60
1500 r/min= 90
1800 r/min= 110
Transmission type 40 km/h:

1000 r/min= 50
1500 r/min= 70
1800 r/min= 90
Fi 1 Radar speed signal Transmission type 50 km/h:
(B10) 1000 r/min= 65
1500 r/min= 100
1800 r/min= 115
Transmission type 40 km/h:

1000 r/min= 60
1500 r/min= 90
1800 r/min= 106
570
19.2.2010 T180-- T190 513.2 11
Test of the TC2 control unit position sensor signals Ai 1 -- Ai 6

Ai 6 Not in use --- ---
Ai 1 Signal voltage of 1,4 = Wheels turned left The lower row of the display shows the value of the
the front tyre posi- 2,5 = Wheels straigth ahead test point in voltage.
tion sensor (B2C) 3,6 = Wheels turned right
Turn steering to end positions and check that value
changes evenly.
Take end positions values to memory and calculate
mid point.
After this turn steering to middle position, and so the
value must be about in the mid point.
Test of the TC2 control unit outputs do 1 -- do 6

do 6 Not in use Here is checked the contact
between control unit and the
do 5 Differential lock Differential lock engaged Differential lock disengaged
proportional valve.
valve (Y1)
do 4 Not in use The lower row of the display
shows the control of current 1
do 3 4 ---WD valve 4 ---WD disengaged 4WD engaged or 0
(Y3)
do 2 Not in use 1= energized
0= unenergized
do 1 Not in use
571
19.2.2010 T180-- T190 513.2 12

di 24 Not in use Here is checked the contact
between switch and control
di 23 Not in use
unit.
di 22 Headlights switch (S1) Left side pushed or in Right side pushed
middle postion
(Parking lights data for The lower row of the display
automatic reverse light shows the electric connection
connection) 1 or 0
di 21 Not in use 1 On
1=
di 20 Not in use 0= Off
di 19 Not in use
di 18 Not in use
di 17 Not in use
di 16 Not in use
di 15 Not in use
di 14 Front PTO switch (S38) Right side pushed Left side pushed
di 13 Change over switch for Right side pushed Left side pushed or in
side pillar display (S7C) middle postion
di 12 4 ---WD On/off switch Right side pushed Left side pushed or in
(S3C) middle postion
di 11 4---WD automatic position Middle position Left or right side
switch (S3C) pushed
di 10 Rear PTO automatic stop Right side pushed Left side pushed
switch (S9C)
di 9 Not in use
di 8 Not in use
di 7 Not in use
di 6 Differential lock switch , Right side pushed Left side pushed or in
on/off (S1C) middle position
di 5 Differential lock switch, Middle position Left or right side
AUTO ---position (S1C) pushed
di 4 Right brake light limit Pedal down Pedal up
switch (S10)
di 3 Left brake light limit Pedal down Pedal up
switch (S20)
di 2 Powerlift switch (S10E) Right side pushed Left side pushed or in
middle position
di 1 Not in use
572
19.2.2010 T180-- T190 513.2 13
Test of the TC2 control unit software version 1

1 Version number of the software in Here is checked the software and parameter versions of the TC2 control
the TC2 control unit unit.
SOF (software) = Software version e.g. 61.5.30.0
PAr (parameter) = Parameter version e.g. 1.15.0.0
Example: Test of the software and parameter versions.
2. Confirm test point with the DPS pre ---programming button.
3. Check software versions.

In this case software no. 61.5.30.0 and parameter no. 1.15.0.0
4. When versions have been checked, confirm testing with the

DPS pre ---programming button.
5. If needed, select new test point with the DPS buttons or esca-
pe from the test mode by switching off current.
Test of the TC2 control unit Sigma sensors signal 10

10 Frequency difference of the The lower row of the display shows the amount of the control current in per-
Sigma sensors cent.
Frequency difference must be between 0 --- 1. Check the frequency differ-

ence in the whole revs range of the engine .
The frequency difference of Sigma sensors is zero percent, when both sen-
sors send similar herz values. If another sensor don‘t send a signal, then the
frequency difference is 100 percent.
Note! The phase difference of the sensors can not be checked in this way.
573
19.2.2010 T180-- T190 513.2 14
574
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.3 15
TC1 unit of LS models (Test mode FII or I/O test)

Note! Test mode FII and the I/O test performed with MultiTool can cause mutual interference, if both are used in the same
control unit simultaneously. (In this case, the system functions slowly or inadequately.) Use only one test mode at a time.
Note! The I/O test performed with MultiTool displays some values differently from test mode FII. If this is the case, the
instructions for the values displayed by the MultiTool device are also presented.
Test mode of TC1 control unit, FII/A Note

Multi- FII Description of the test item
Tool
PO 08 Po 8 M range valve (Y18T)
PO 07 Po 7 H range valve (Y17T)
PO 06 Po 6 Rear PTO valve (Y2T)
PO 05 Po 5 R switch valve (Y9T)
PO 04 Po 4 F switch valve (Y8T)
PO 03 Po 3 DPS C3 clutch valve (Y10T)
FI 06 Fi 6 Rear PTO speed signal (B2T)
FI 05 Fi 5 Power shuttle speed signal (lower B13)
FI 04 Fi 4 Power shuttle speed signal (upper B12)
FI 02 Fi 2 Transmission speed signal (B3T)
FI 01 Fi 1 Engine speed signal (B9T)
AI 05 Ai 5 Range gear gear change switch (S5T, gear lever to the right)
AI 04 Ai 4 Signal voltage of the front clutch pedal position sensor (B16)
AI 03 Ai 3 Position of the range gear selector fork (B11T)
AI 02 Ai 2 Signal voltage of transmission oil temperature sensor (B10T)
AI 01 Ai 1 Signal voltage of outdoor temperature sensor (B17)
DO 06 do 6 Control of the brake cooling valve (Y21T)
DO 05 do 5 Control of the parking brake valve (Y11T)
DI 24 di 24 Brake pedal switches (S10/S20/S2W)
DI 23 di 23 Automatic traction control switch (S17S)
DI 20 di 20 LL creeper gear lever in forward position, creeper gear engaged (S50)
DI 19 di 19 LL creeper gear lever in rear position , creeper gear not engaged (S49)
DI 18 di 18 EcoPower switch (S19S)
DI 17 di 17 PTO start button, in mudguards (S1A, S2A)
DI 16 di 16 Front lever, parking brake, reed relay (S15)
DI 15 di 15 PTO rocker switch (S6S) Also perform the test under di 4.
DI 13 di 13 PTO speed 2, lever in rear position (S29)
DI 12 di 12 PTO speed 1, lever in front position (S28)
DI 11 di 11 DPS preprogramming button, front (S51)
DI 10 di 10 Front lever, direction R, reed relay (S41)
DI 9 di 9 Front lever, direction F, reed relay (S40)
DI 8 di 8 DPS gear change automatics rocker switch (S18S) Also perform the test under di 7.
DI 7 di 7 DPS gear change automatics rocker switch (S18S) Also perform the test under di 8.
DI 6 di 6 Front clutch pedal limit switch (S9)
DI 5 di 5 Seat limit switch (S11A)
DI 4 di 4 PTO rocker switch (S6S) Also perform the test under di 15.
DI 3 di 3 Gear lever HiShift button (S45/1)
Di 2 di 2 DPS button pressed down, gear lever (S23/1--- )
DI 1 di 1 DPS button released, gear lever (S23/1+)
INITIAL MENU LEVEL
--- 1 Version number of the software in the TC1 control unit.
--- 10 TC1 control unit supply voltage

--- 11 Outdoor temperature in Celsius or Fahrenheit degrees (B17)
--- 12 Gearbox oil temperature in Celsius or Fahrenheit degrees (B10T)
--- 13 Front gas pedal position in percentage (B15)
--- 14 Front clutch pedal position in percentage (B16)
15 Rear clutch pedal position, not in use, see control unit UC2 (CAN--- ID 6), input Ai2
---
(under code 512.2)
--- 16 Direction indication (B12 and B13)
575
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.3 16
Testing the TC1 control unit proportional outputs, Po 1 -- Po 8 and PO 01 -- PO 08
FII Multi --- Description Value Performing the test

Tool
Po 8 PO 08 M range valve Set the motor speed to approximately 1000 rpm.
(Y18T)
Test mode FII:
The bottom row of the display displays the value LO.
The value stays the same. The value is always LO even if
the speed range is changed (the output in question does
not enable current measurements).
MultiTool:
Note! The tractor must be in normal operating mode (not in

test mode FII).
The value indicates the output level of the control unit with
values between 0---250. If the value is 0, the valve is not
energized. When the value is 250, the valve is fully
energized (= battery voltage). Other values fall between
these values.
Test mode FII:
Notation 0 ---> 250 ---> 0, for example, means that the
always LO
initial value is 0, which increases up to 250 and then goes
back down to 0.
MultiTool:
When both tests ((Po7 and Po8)) result in value 250,, both
0---250 (output level)
Po 7 PO 07 H range valve sides of the shifting cylinder are fully pressurised and the
(Y17T) selector fork moves to the middle position (neutral).
0 = unenergized
250 = fully energized
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
The following is a table of the range gear control values:
Po7 Po8
M or H engaged 0 0
LL engaged 0 0
neutral (N) 0 0
Gear range shift:

M --- >H 0 --- > appr. 125 --- > 0 0 --- > 250 --- > 0
H --- > M 0 --- > 250 --- > 0 0 --- > appr. 125 --- > 0
M --- > LL 0 --- > 250 --- > 0 0 --- > 250 --- > 0
H --- > LL 0 --- > 250 --- > 0 0 --- > 250 --- > 0
LL --- > N 0 --- > 250 --- > 0 0 --- > 250 --- > 0
N --- > M 0 --- > 250 --- > 0 0 --- > appr. 80 --- > 0
576
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.3 17

Tool
Po 6 PO 06 Rear PTO valve Set the motor speed to approximately 1000 rpm.
(Y2T)
Test mode FII:
Once the item to be tested has been confirmed, the
proportional valve in question is momentarily fed with
maximum voltage and current.
Po 5 PO 05 R clutch valve The bottom row of the display shows the momentary
(Y9T) current in amperes.
(power shuttle) If the display reads LO, the circuit is broken.
If the display reads HI, a short---circuit or valve is taking up
too much power.
MultiTool:
Po 4 PO 04 F clutch valve Note! The tractor must be in normal operating mode (not in
(Y8T) test mode FII).
(power shuttle)
Test mode FII: The value indicates the output level of the control unit with
1,1---2,2 (measured values between 0---250. If the value is 0, the valve is not
current, A) energized. When the value is 250, the valve is fully
energized (= battery voltage). Other values fall between
MultiTool: these values.
Po 3 PO 03 DPS C3 clutch valve 0---250 (output level) When the output is activated, the value increases from 0 to
(Y10T) 250 either directly or in steps.
(Powershift) 0 = unenergized
250 = fully energized --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
Control values of rear PTO output Po 6:
PTO engaged 250

PTO stopped 0
Po 2 PO 02 DPS C2 clutch --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
valve (Y5T) The following table contains the control values for the power
(Powershift) shuttle:
Direction Po4 Po5

forward 250 0
reverse 0 250
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
Po 1 PO 01 DPS C1 clutch The following is a table of DPS gear control values.
valve (Y4T) Two outputs must have the value 250 for one of the DPS
(Powershift) gears to be engaged. Otherwise the DPS gear is in neutral.
Powershift gear Po1 Po2 Po3

1 250 250 0
2 250 0 250
3 0 250 250
577
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.3 18
Testing the TC1 control unit speed sensor signals, Fi 1 -- Fi 6 and FI 01 --- FI 06
Tool
Fi 6 FI 06 Rear PTO speed sig- 540 = 170---200 The bottom row of the display shows the value for
nal (B2T) 540E = 220---250 the item to be tested in herzes.
1000 = 310---350
540E = 200---240 Engage the PTO. Set the motor speed to 1000 rpm
1000E = 360---400 and compare the values.
Fi 5 FI 05 Power shuttle speed 1000 rpm = 180---210 (F) The bottom row of the display shows the value for
signal (lower sensor 1500 rpm = 280---310 (F) the item to be tested in herzes.
B13) 1800 rpm = 340---380 (F)
Set the transmission in neutral. Set the motor
1000 rpm = 190---220 (R) speed to 1000 rpm. Engage the forward direction
1500 rpm
p = 300---330 (R)
( ) and comparep the value with the p
presented values.
Fi 4 FI 04 Power shuttle speed 1800 rpm = 360---400 (R) Repeat the same test with the shuttle lever in
signal (upper sensor reverse driving position (R). Set the motor speed
B12) first to 1500 rpm and then to 1800 rpm. Measure
the values again in both positions of the power
shuttle lever. Compare the values with the values in
the table.
Fi 3 FI 03 Not in use Always 0
Fi 2 FI 02 Transmission speed Transmission type 50 km/h: The bottom row of the display shows the value for
signal (B3T) 1000 rpm = 70---90 the item to be tested in herzes.
1500 rpm = 110---140
1800 rpm = 130---170 Engage gear M1. Set the engine speed to 1000
rpm and drive forward. Compare the measured
Transmission type 40 km/h: values with the reference values. Test also engine
1000 rpm = 60---80 speeds 1500 and 1800 rpm and compare the
1500 rpm = 90---120 values.
1800 rpm = 120---150
Note! When test mode FII is active, there is no
visual indication of the engaged range gear.
However, you can deduce the engaged gear in the
following manner: when speed range M and gear 1
are engaged and engine revolutions are 1000 rpm,
driving speed is approximately 1,5 km/h.
Fi 1 FI 01 Engine speed signal 1000 rpm = 570---660 The bottom row of the display shows the value for
(B9T) 1500 rpm = 800---1000 the item to be tested in herzes.
1800 rpm = 1000---1200
Set the motor speed to 1000 rpm and compare the
measured values with the values given in the table.
Then increase the engine speed up to 1500 and
1800 rpm and compare the values again.
578
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.3 19
Testing TC1 control unit temperature and position sensor signals, Ai 1 -- Ai 6 and AI 01 --- AI 06
FII Multi --- Description Performing the test
Tool
Ai 6 AI 06 Not in use
Ai 5 AI 05 Range gear, shift request switch Test mode FII:
(S5T, gear lever to the right) The bottom row of the display shows the value for the item to be
tested in volts.
Gear lever moved to the right (extreme position): 2.4...3.0 V.
Other positions of the gear lever: 0.9...1.3 V.
Ai 4 AI 04 Signal voltage of the front clutch The bottom row of the display shows the value for the item to be
pedal position sensor (B16) tested in volts.
Clutch pedal fully up: signal 0.3...2.4 V.

Clutch pedal depressed: signal 2.5...4.7 V.
The voltage value changed by the program appears as a percentage

value under menu item 14.
Ai 3 AI 03 Position of the range gear selec- Test mode FII:
tor fork (B11T) The motor must be running, the parking brake must be engaged and
the main gear must be in neutral.
The bottom row of the display shows the value for the item to be
tested in volts.
M range engaged: 0.75...2.0 V.
H range engaged: 3.2...4.5 V.
N position (neutral): 2.15...2.95 V.
You can change the speed range by pressing down the clutch pedal,
moving the gear lever to the neutral position and then pushing it to the
right with sufficient force. If necessary, the neutral position can be
engaged by first engaging and then disengaging the creeper gear
(extra equipment). The range gear may also be engaged if there is a
malfunction.
Note! If the tractor is not equipped with a creeper gear, the range gear
can be shifted to neutral as follows: disconnect the connector of the
B11T position sensor, start the motor and then reattach the connector.
Pay specific attention to work safety.

Tool
Ai 2 AI 02 Signal voltage of 1.0V = ---50 degrees The bottom row of the display shows the value for the
transmission oil 1.4V = ---20 degrees item to be tested in volts.
temperature sensor 1.6V = 0 degrees
(B10T) 1.9V = +20 degrees Compare the voltage value with the temperatures in the
2.2V = +40 degrees column on the left.
2.5V = +60 degrees
2.8V = +80 degrees The voltage value changed by the program appears as
3.1V = +100 degrees degrees in Celsius under menu item 12.
3.4V = +120 degrees
Ai 1 AI 01 Signal voltage of 1.0V = ---50 degrees The bottom row of the display shows the value for the
outdoor tempera- 1.4V = ---20 degrees item to be tested in volts.
ture sensor (B17) 1.6V = 0 degrees
1.9V = +20 degrees Compare the voltage value with the temperatures in the
2.4V = +50 degrees column on the left.
The voltage value changed by the program appears as

degrees in Celsius under menu item 11.
579
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.3 20
Testing TC1 control unit outputs, do 1 -- do 6 and DO 01 --- DO 06

FII Multi --- Description 1 on display 0 on display Performing the test
Tool
do 6 DO 06 Control of the brake Cooling (the valve is No cooling (the valve This test is for checking the level
cooling valve (Y21T) energized) is not energized) of the output.
Test mode FII:

Activate test mode FII and start
the engine. Drive at a speed of
over 15 km/h and brake with the
brake pedals. In this situation, the
brake cooling valve is energized
for the entire duration of braking.
If braking lasts for over 5
seconds, the brake cooling
function remains in operation for
a duration of over 10 seconds
after the braking has ended.
The bottom row of the display

shows the status of the control
current: 1 or 0.
do 5 DO 05 Control of the park- Parking brake Parking brake This test is for checking the level
ing brake solenoid disengaged (the valve engaged (the valve is of the output.
valve (Y11T) is energized) not energized)
The bottom row of the display
shows the status of the control
current: 1 or 0.
do 4 DO 04
do 3 DO 03
Not in use
do 2 DO 02
do 1 DO 01
580
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.3 21
Testing TC1 control unit switches, di 1 -- di 24 ja DI 1 -- DI 24

Tool
di 24 DI 24 Brake pedal switches Pedal depressed Pedal not
(S10/S20/S2W) depressed
di 23 DI 23 Automatic traction control switch Automatic traction Automatic traction
(S17S) control in control not in
operation operation
di 22 DI 22
Not in use Always
y 0
di 21 DI 21 This test item is for checking
the contact between the
di 20 DI 20 LL creeper gear lever in forward Lever in forward Lever not in control unit and the switch.
position creeper gear engaged
position, position forward position
(S50) The bottom row of the display
di 19 DI 19 LL creeper gear lever in rear Lever not in rear Lever in rear shows the status of the
position creeper gear not
position, position position electric connection: 1 or 0.
engaged (S49)
1 = ON
di 18 DI 18 EcoPower switch (S19S) Eco mode on Eco mode off 0 = OFF
di 17 DI 17 PTO start button, in mudguards Button depressed Button not
(S1A, S2A) depressed
di 16 DI 16 Front lever, parking brake, reed Parking brake Parking brake not
relay (S15) engaged engaged
di 15 DI 15 PTO rocker switch (S6S), also ON, start OFF
perform the test under di 4
581
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.3 22
Testing TC1 control unit switches, di 1 -- di 24 ja DI 1 -- DI 24

Tool
di 14 DI 14 Not in use Always 0
di 13 DI 13 PTO speed 2, lever in rear Speed selected Speed
position (S29) disengaged
di 12 DI 12 PTO speed 1, lever in front Speed selected Speed
position (S28) disengaged
di 11 DI 11 DPS preprogramming button, Button Button not
front (S51) depressed. The depressed
information is
displayed only
momentarily.
Keep the button
depressed to
display the
information for a
longer time.
di 10 DI 10 Front lever, direction R, reed Reverse direction Direction
relay (S41) selected disengaged This test item is for checking
g
di 9 DI 09 Front lever, direction F, reed Forward direction Direction the contact between the
relay (S40) selected disengaged control unit and the switch.
di 8 DI 08 DPS gear change automatics Auto 1 or Auto 2 DPS manual use The bottom row of the display
rocker switch (S18S) on shows the status of the
di 7 DI 07 DPS gear change automatics Switch in Auto 1 Switch in Auto 2 electric connection: 1 or 0.
rocker switch (S18S) position (middle or OFF position
position) (left or right side 1 = ON
pressed down) 0 = OFF
di 6 DI 06 Front clutch pedal limit switch Pedal depressed Pedal not

(S9) depressed
di 5 DI 05 Seat limit switch (S11A) Driver sits in the No seat signal
seat
di 4 DI 04 PTO rocker switch (S6S), also START position OFF or ON
perform the test under di 15 position
di 3 DI 03 Gear lever HiShift button (S45/1) Button depressed Button not
depressed
di 2 DI 02 DPS button for downshifting, in Button depressed Button not
gear lever (S23/1---) depressed
di 1 DI 01 DPS button for upshifting, in Button depressed Button not
gear lever (S23/1+) depressed
582
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.3 23
Testing the TC1 control unit software version 1

On display Description Performing the test
1 Version number of the software in This test item is for checking the software and parameter versions of the
the TC1 control unit (not available TC1 control unit.
if using MultiTool)
SOF (software) = software version, e.g. 61.8.36.0
PAR (parameter) = parameter version, e.g. 1.23.0.0
Example: checking software versions
1. Select the item to be tested using the DPS buttons.
2. Confirm the item to be tested using the DPS preprogramming button.
3. Check the software versions. In this case, software version is 61.8.36.0 and
parameter version is 1.23.0.0.
4. When you have checked the versions, confirm testing with the DPS
preprogramming button.
5. If necessary, select a new item to be tested using the DPS buttons or exit
the test mode by switching off the current.
Testing the TC1 control unit supply voltage, 10
10 TC1 control unit supply volt- The bottom row of the display shows the value for the item to be tested in
age, not available if using volts.
MultiTool
When the engine is running, the supply voltage must remain between 12 and
15 volts.
A service code will be activated if the supply voltage falls below 10.5 V or
exceeds 17.5 V.
583
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.3 24
Testing the TC1 control unit temperature sensor signals, 11 -- 12

11 Outdoor temperature in Celsius or The bottom row of the display shows the value for the item to be tested in
Fahrenheit degrees, not available Celsius or Fahrenheit degrees.
if using MultiTool (B17) Compare the measured value with the actual outdoor temperature.
12 Gearbox oil temperature in The bottom row of the display shows the value for the item to be tested in
Celsius or Fahrenheit degrees, Celsius or Fahrenheit degrees.
not available if using MultiTool Compare the measured value with the actual gearbox temperature.
(B10T)
Testing the TC1 control unit pedal position sensor signals, 13 -- 15

13 Front gas pedal position in per- The bottom row of the display shows the value for the item to be tested in
centage, not available if using percentage.
MultiTool (B15) When the pedal is fully up, the value should be smaller than 2. When the
pedal is depressed, the value should be greater than 95. Also make sure
that the value changes evenly when the pedal is moved. (When the pedal
is in the middle position, the value should be approximately 50.)
14 Front clutch pedal position in per- The bottom row of the display shows the value for the item to be checked
centage, not available if using in percentage.
MultiTool (B16) When the pedal is fully up, the value should be greater than 97. When
the pedal
p is depressed,
p , the value should be smaller than 2. Also make
15 Rear clutch pedal position, not in sure that the value changes evenly when the pedal is moved. (When the
use, see control unit UC2 (CAN --- pedal is in the middle position, the value should be approximately 50.)
ID 6), input Ai2 (under code
512.2) Note! If a line (--- ---) is shown on the display instead of the item to be
tested, calibrate the pedal in question.
Testing the TC1 control unit speed sensor signals, 16

On display Description Value Performing the test
16 Direction indica- 1 = direction forward (F) The bottom row of the display shows the direction information
tion, not available 2 = reverse direction (R) 1 or 2.
if using MultiTool
(B12 and B13) Shift the gears to neutral and reduce the engine revolutions to
idling speed. Engage the forward direction (F) and slowly
increase the engine speed up to maximum revolutions. The
value must be 1 and remain constant for the entire duration of
the test. Engage the reverse direction (R) and repeat the same
test. The value must be 2 and remain constant for the entire
duration of the test.
If either one of the direction recognition functions does not

function properly (the value is incorrect or changes with the
engine speed), but values F4 and F5 are correct, control unit
TC1 may be defective.
584
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.4 25
TC2 unit of LS models (Test mode FII or I/O test)

Note! The I/O test performed with MultiTool displays some values differently from test mode FII. If this is the case, the
instructions for the values displayed by the MultiTool device are also presented.
TC2, FII/C (A2A, CAN-- ID 4)

Test mode of the TC2 control unit, FII/C Note
FII Multi--- Description of the test item
Tool
Po 8 PO 08 U--- Pilot automatics indicator light (U--- Pilot rocker switch S15S)
Po 7 PO 07 Control of front loader power socket X81/5 using relay K22 (control with the lower
joystick button)
Po 6 PO 06 Control of front loader power socket X81/1 using relay K20 (control with the upper
joystick button)
Po 5 PO 05 Control of the relay of the rear working lights (K9)
Po 4 PO 04 Control of the reverse buzzer (H27)
Po 3 PO 03 Not in use
Fi 6 FI 06 Not in use
Fi 5 FI 05 Sigma speed signal of PTO (B5T)
Fi 4 FI 04 Sigma speed signal of the engine (B6T)
Fi 3 FI 03 Rear wheel speed signal (B1T)
Fi 2 FI 02 Front axle speed signal (B7T)
Fi 1 FI 01 Radar speed signal (B8T)
Ai 1 AI 01 Signal voltage of the front tyre position sensor (B2C)
do 6 DO 06 Front PTO pilot valve (Y9)
do 5 DO 05 Differential lock valve (Y1T)
do 4 DO 04 Not in use
do 3 DO 03 4WD valve (Y3T)
do 2 DO 02 Power supply to the CAN valves of the hydraulics (Y19T) using relay K21
do 1 DO 01 Control of the power socket X5S (2--- pole) using relay K16 (control by U--- Pilot)
di 24 DI 24 Power socket rocker switch (S10S)
di 23 DI 23 Front loader down (S4M), button on the front of the tractor
di 22 DI 22 Headlights’ rocker switch (S1)
di 21 DI 21 Front loader up (S3M), button on the front of the tractor
di 20 DI 20 Not in use
di 15 DI 15 U--- Pilot rocker switch (S15S), recording/saving Also perform the test under di 9.
di 14 DI 14 Front PTO rocker switch (S16S)
di 12 DI 12 4WD rocker switch, ON position (S4S) Also perform the test under di 11.
di 11 DI 11 4WD rocker switch, AUTO position (S4S) Also perform the test under di 12.
di 10 DI 10 Switch for the automatic stopping function of rear PTO (S8S)
di 9 DI 09 U--- Pilot rocker switch (S15S) Also perform the test under di 15.
di 8 DI 08 Change--- over switch for front linkage and front loader (S14S)
di 7 DI 07 Implement up (connector X89, located under the side panel) Signal from implement
di 6 DI 06 Differential lock rocker switch, ON position (S5S) Also perform the test under di 5.
di 5 DI 05 Differential lock rocker switch, AUTO position (S5S) Also perform the test under di 6.
di 4 DI 04 Limit switch of the right brake light (S10) Also perform the test under di 3.
di 3 DI 03 Limit switch of the left brake light (S20) Also perform the test under di 4.
INITIAL MENU LEVEL

10 --- Frequency difference of the Sigma sensors
585
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.4 26

Tool
Po 8 PO 08 U ---Pilot automatics Test mode FII: The output controls the indicator light of the switch. The indicator
indicator light (in 0---100 light indicates, when U ---Pilot has been activated with the rocker
the U ---Pilot rocker switch.
switch S15S) MultiTool:
0---250 Note! The engine must be running.
Test mode FII:

The bottom row of the display shows the momentary control value
of the output in percentage.
The indicator light is controlled (switch in middle position): 100
The indicator light is not controlled: 0 (approximately 34, when
headlights of parking lights are switched on)
MultiTool:
The value indicates the output level of the control unit in the range
0---250.
The indicator light is controlled (switch in middle position): 250
headlights of parking lights are switched on)
Po 7 PO 07 Control of front --- --- Test mode FII:
loader power Always displays value --- --- (the output has no current measurement
socket X81/5 using function).
relay K22 (control
with the lower MultiTool:
joystick button) Always displays value --- (there is no function).
Note! You can verify the operation by using a multimeter to

measure the voltage in connector X81/5.
Po 6 PO 06 Control of front Test mode FII: Test mode FII:
loader power 0---100 The bottom row of the display shows the momentary control value
socket X81/1 using of the output:
relay K20 (control MultiTool: 100 = connector X81/1 receives a voltage of +12 V (when the
with the upper 0---250 upper button of the joystick is pressed)
joystick button) 0 = connector X81/1 receives no voltage
MultiTool:
The value indicates the level of the control unit output in the range
0---250.
The indicator light is controlled: 250
headlights or parking lights are switched on)
Note! You can verify the operation by using a multimeter to

measure the voltage in connector X81/1.
586
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.4 27

Tool
Po 5 PO 05 Control of the relay Test mode FII: Switch on the headlights or parking lights. Shift the main gear to
of the rear working 0---100 neutral. The value changes according to the selected driving
lights (K9) direction.
MultiTool:
0---250 Note! If the rocker switch of the tractor’s rear working lights (S2)
has three positions, switch it to the automatic position (middle
position). In this position the rear working lights should come on
when the power shuttle lever is switched to the reverse driving
position.
Test mode FII:

direction forward: 0
reverse direction: 100
MultiTool:
0---250.
Po 4 PO 04 Control of the Test mode FII: Shift the main gear to neutral. The value changes according to the
reverse buzzer 0---100 selected driving direction.
(H27)
MultiTool: If the tractor is equipped with a reverse buzzer, a warning signal
0---250 should be sounded, when the reverse driving direction is engaged.
Test mode FII:

MultiTool:
0---250.
Po 3 PO 03 Not in use Always 0
587
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.4 28
Testing the TC2 control unit speed sensors signals, Fi 1 -- Fi 6 and FI 01 -- FI 06

Tool
Fi 6 FI 06 Not in use Always --- ---
Fi 5 FI 05 Sigma speed 1000 rpm = approximately 167 The bottom row of the display shows the value
signal of PTO (B5T) 1500 rpm = approximately 250 for the item to be tested in herzes.
1800 rpm = approximately 300 Shift the transmission to neutral. Use the hand
throttle to set the engine speed.
speed Compare the
Fi 4 FI 04 Sigma speed The values only apply to tractor values with reference values. Also make sure that
signal of the models with Sigma Power the value changes evenly without peaks or drops
engine (B6T) equipment. (In other models the throughout the entire engine speed range.
value is always 0.)
Fi 3 FI 03 Rear wheel speed Transmission type 50 km/h: The bottom row of the display shows the value
signal (B1T) 1000 rpm = approximately 8 for the item to be tested in herzes. Disengage the
1500 rpm = approximately 12 four wheel drive and the differential lock.
1800 rpm = approximately 14
Engage gear M1. Set the engine speed to 1000
Transmission type 40 km/h: rpm and drive forward. Compare the measured
1000 rpm = approximately 6 values with the reference values. Test also
1500 rpm = approximately 9 engine speeds 1500 and 1800 rpm and compare
1800 rpm = approximately 11 the values.
Note! The tyre

y sizes of the tractor and the
Fi 2 FI 02 Front axle speed Transmission type 50 km/h: combination off tyres used affect
ff the values. The
signal (B7T) 1000 rpm = 54---64 values therefore do not have to correspond with
1500 rpm = 82---94 the reference values exactly.
1800 rpm = 100---114
Note! When test mode FII is active, there is no
Transmission type 40 km/h: visual indication of the engaged gear range.
1000 rpm = 40---52 However, you can deduce the engaged gear in
1500 rpm = 62---77 the following manner: when speed range M and
1800 rpm = 75---92 gear 1 are engaged and engine revolutions are
1000 rpm, driving speed is approximately 1,5
km/h.
Fi 1 FI 01 Radar speed signal Transmission type 50 km/h, The bottom row of the display shows the value
(B8T) 1000 rpm: for the item to be tested in herzes. Disengage the
T series: 52 ---68 four wheel drive and the differential lock.
N series: 52 ---64
Engage gear M1. Set the engine speed to 1000
Transmission type 40 km/h, rpm and drive forward. Compare the measured
1000 rpm: values with the reference values.
T series: 42 ---66
N series: 42 ---51 Note! The tyre sizes of the tractor and the
combination of tyres used affect the values. The
The radar gives the following values therefore do not have to correspond with
values according to the driving the reference values exactly.
speed (the value is affected by
the contour and quality of the Note! When test mode FII is active, there is no
ground, e.g. pools of water): visual indication of the engaged range gear.
However, you can deduce the engaged gear in
Driving speed Value the following manner: when speed range M and
2 km/h approx. 73 gear 1 are engaged and engine revolutions are
4 km/h approx. 146 1000 rpm, driving speed is approximately 1,5
6 km/h approx. 220 km/h.
8 km/h approx. 293
10 km/h approx. 366
588
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.4 29
Testing the TC2 control unit position sensor signals, Ai 1 -- Ai 6 and AI 01 -- AI 06

Tool
Ai 6 Ai 6 Not in use Always 0 ---
Ai 2 Ai 2 Not in use Always 5.0 ---
Ai 1 Ai 1 Signal voltage of approx. 1.4 = left extreme position The bottom row of the display shows the
the steering angle approx. 2.5 = straight value for the item to be tested in volts.
sensor (B2C), not approx. 3.6 = right extreme position
N111eLS, N121LS Turn the steering wheel evenly from the left
and N141LS N111eLS ---N141LS: extreme position to the right extreme
always 5.0 (there is no sensor) position. The value should increase steadily
with no interruptions. Write down the values
in the left and right extreme positions. When
the steering wheel is centered, the value
should fall approximately halfway between
the values for the extreme positions. The
values do not have to match the reference
values exactly because the sensor is
calibrated.
589
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.4 30
Testing the TC2 control unit outputs, do 1 -- do 6 and DO 01 -- DO 06

Tool
do 6 DO 06 Front PTO pilot The valve is The valve is This test item is for checking the status of
valve (Y9) energized energized the control unit output.
The output only functions when controlled

by U ---Pilot automatics. Record a U ---Pilot
program that switches the output on and
off. Run the U ---Pilot program and observe
whether the status of the output changes
according to the U ---Pilot program.
do 5 DO 05 Differential lock Differential lock Differential lock not This test item is for checking the status of
valve (Y1T) activated activated the control unit output.

by automatic functions (differential lock or
U ---Pilot automatics). Record a U ---Pilot
do 4 DO 04 Not in use --- Value 0 is always
displayed
do 3 DO 03 4WD valve (Y3T) 4WD not engaged 4WD engaged This test item is for checking the status of
the control unit output.

by automatic functions (differential lock or
U ---Pilot automatics). Record a U ---Pilot
do 2 DO 02 Power supply to The relay is The relay is not This test item is for checking the status of
the CAN valves energized (power energized the control unit output.
of the hydraulics supply on)
(Y19T) using Activate the hydraulics by pressing the
relay K21 activation switch (next to the display in the
arm rest). The tractor terminal sends the
TC2 control unit a command to control relay
K21. This causes the hydraulic valves to be
supplied with current and the indicator
lights of the valve control units to be lit.
do 1 DO 01 Control of the The relay is The relay is not This test item is for checking the status of
power socket energized (power energized the control unit output.
X5S (2 ---pole) supply on)
using relay K16 The output only functions when controlled
(control by by automatic functions (differential lock or
U ---Pilot), upper U ---Pilot automatics). Record a U ---Pilot
power socket program that switches the output on and
590
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.4 31
Testing the TC2 control unit switches, di 1 -- di 24 and DI 01 -- DI 24

Tool
di 24 DI 24 Power socket rocker switch Left side pressed Right side This test item is for checking the
(S10S), upper switch down (on) pressed down contact between the control unit
and
d the
th switch
it h.
di 23 DI 23 Front lift down (S4M), FII: MultiTool:
button on the front of the always --- --- button not
The bottom row of the display shows
tractor pressed down
the status of the electric connection:
MultiTool:
1 or 0.
button pressed
down
1 = ON
di 22 DI 22 Headlights’ rocker switch Right side Left side pressed 0 = OFF
(S1) pressed down down (headlights
(OFF position) on) or middle
position (parking
lights on)
di 21 DI 21 Front lift up (S3M), button FII: MultiTool:
on the front of the tractor always --- --- button not
pressed down
MultiTool:
button pressed
down
di 20 DI 20 Not in use Value --- --- is Value --- --- is
always displayed always displayed
di 18 DI 18 Not in use Value 0 is always Value 0 is always
displayed displayed
displayed displayed
di 15 DI 15 U ---Pilot rocker switch Left side pressed Other positions Also perform test item di 9.
(S15S), recording/saving down
di 14 DI 14 Front PTO rocker switch Left side pressed Right side
(S16S) down (on) pressed down
displayed displayed
di 12 DI 12 4WD rocker switch, ON Left side pressed Right side Also perform test item di 11.
position (S4S) down (ON) pressed down or
middle position
di 11 DI 11 4WD rocker switch, AUTO Middle position Left or right side Also perform test item di 12.
position (S4S) (AUTO) pressed down
di 10 DI 10 Switch for the automatic Left side pressed Right side
stopping function of rear down pressed down
PTO (S8S)
di 9 DI 09 U ---Pilot rocker switch Left side pressed Right side Also perform test item di 15.
(S15S) down or middle pressed down
position
591
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.4 32
Testing the TC2 control unit switches, di 1 -- di 24 and DI 01 -- DI 24

Tool
di 8 DI 08 Change ---over switch for Left side pressed Right side Test mode FII:
front linkage and front down (front pressed down The tractor is equipped with this
loader (S14S) linkage) (front loader) change ---over switch if both a front
linkage and a front loader are
Perform this test even if the installed. Check the value in both
tractor has no change ---over positions of the switch:
switch (to ensure front 1 = the switch is in the front
loader safety). linkage position (left side pressed
down)
0 = the switch is in the front loader
position
If the tractor has no change ---over

switch, the values should read as
follows:
1 = the tractor is equipped with
front linkage (a wire that connects
two poles replaces the switch)
0 = the tractor is equipped with a
front loader (there is no wire in
place of the switch)
di 7 DI 07 Implement up, signal from Input active Input not active Test mode FII:
implement (connector X89, If necessary, this input can be
located under the side controlled with a limit switch of an
panel) external implement that connects
the poles of connector X89 with
(surface area measurement each other. In this case, the input is
of the Proline instrument activated and the surface area
panel) measurement function of the
Proline instrument panel is paused.
The value is always 0 if connector

X89 is not connected. The
connector is located under the side
panel of the cab.
1 = the input is active (surface area

measurement is not in operation)
0 = the input is not active (surface
area measurement is in operation)
di 6 DI 06 Differential lock rocker Left side pressed Right side Also perform test item di 5.
switch, ON position (S5S) down pressed down or
middle position
di 5 DI 05 Differential lock rocker Middle position Left or right side Also perform test item di 6.
switch, AUTO position (S5S) pressed down
di 4 DI 04 Limit switch of the right Pedal depressed Pedal not Also perform test item di 3.
brake light (S10) depressed
di 3 DI 03 Limit switch of the left brake Pedal depressed Pedal not Also perform test item di 4.
light (S20) depressed
displayed displayed
di 1 DI 01 Not in use Always --- --- Always --- ---
592
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.4 33
Testing the TC2 control unit software version 1

1 Version number of the software in This test item is for checking the software and parameter versions of the
the TC2 control unit (not available TC2 control unit.
if using MultiTool) SOF (software) = software version, e.g. 61.5.30.0
PAR (parameter) = parameter version, e.g 1.15.0.0
Example: checking software versions
1. Select the item to be tested using the DPS buttons.
2. Confirm the item to be tested using the DPS preprogramming button.
3. Check the software versions. In this case, software version is 61.5.30.0

parameter version is 1.15.0.0.
4. When you have checked the versions, confirm testing with the DPS
preprogramming button.
5. If necessary, select a new item to be tested using the DPS buttons or exit
the test mode by switching off the current.
593
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 513.4 34
Testing the frequency difference of TC2 control unit Sigma sensors, 10

10 Frequency difference of the The bottom row of the display shows the value for the item to be tested in
Sigma sensors (only tractor percentage.
models with Sigma Power
equipment, in other models The frequency difference must be between 0 and 1. Check the frequency
the value is always 0), not difference throughout the entire engine speed range.
available if using MultiTool
The frequency difference of Sigma sensors is zero percent when both
sensors transmit similar herz values. If one of the sensors does not transmit
a signal, the frequency difference is 100 percent.
Note! This method cannot be used for checking the phase displacement of
sensors.
594
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 513.5 35
TC1 unit of Versu models (I/O test)

Note! The I/O test performed with the tractor terminal and the MultiTool service terminal can cause mutual interference, if both
are used for the same control unit simultaneously. (In this case, the system functions slowly or inadequately.) Use only one
test mode at a time.
Note! The control unit controls the transmission and the rear power lift. There is no separate control unit for the power lift.
TC1, A1A, control unit no. 3 (CAN-- ID 3)

MultiTool Description of the test item Note
AI 01 Range gear, position of the selector fork (B19)
AI 02 Main gear, position of the selector fork (B20)
AI 03 Clutch pedal (front) position sensor (B16)
AI 04 Trailer hook release switch (S86)
AI 05 Not in use
AI 06 Power shuttle lever, front: F, N, R, P (S41) Test also AI 16.
AI 07 PS preprogramming button, front (S51)
AI 08 Driver detection (switch inside in the seat) (S11)
AI 09 Not in use
AI 10 Hydraulic oil temperature (B23)
AI 16 Power shuttle lever, N ”safety switch” (in S41) Test also AI 6.
AI 18 Not in use
AI 23 Eco/Power switch (S19)
AI 24 4WD rocker switch, OFF/AUTO/ON (S30)
AI 25 Differential lock rocker switch, OFF/AUTO/ON (S22)
AI 26 Steering angle sensor, in front axle (B2C)
AI 27 Brake pedal switch, left (S20)
AI 28 Brake pedal switch, right (S10)
AI 29 PS shifting automatics switch (S18)
AI 30 PTO lever switches, front pos.=speed 1 (S28), rear pos.=speed 2 (S29)
AI 31 PTO switch, OFF and standby positions (S25)
AI 32 PTO switch, start position (S25)
AI 33 PTO start switch, on mudguards, left (S2E) and right (S2E)
AI 34 Clutch pedal switch, front (S9)
AI 35 AutoTraction (N Auto) switch (S17)
AI 36 LL creeper gear lever, the switch at rear position (neutral request) (S49)
AI 37 LL creeper gear lever, the switch at front position, creeper gear engaged (S50)
AI 39 Outdoor temperature sensor (B26)
AI 40 Transmission oil temperature sensor (B14)
FI 01 PTO speed sensor (B7)

FI 02 Front axle speed sensor (B17)
FI 03 Transmission output speed sensor (B6)
FI 04 Rear wheel speed sensor (B9)
FI 05 SigmaPower engine speed sensor (B11)
FI 06 SigmaPower PTO speed sensor (B5)
FI 08 Transmission input speed sensor (B21)
FI 09 Power shuttle speed sensor (B13)
Po 01 PS C1 clutch valve (Y31, Powershift)

Po 05 F (forwards) clutch valve (power shuttle, Y11)
595
Model Code Page
51. TEST MODE FII AND I/O TESTS
19.2.2010 Versu 513.5 36

Po 6 R (reverse) clutch valve (power shuttle, Y12)
Po 7 PTO clutch valve (Y2)
Po 8 Trailer hook release valve (Y19)
Po 11 Not in use
Po 12 Control of front loader power socket X80/1 using relay K7 (control with the lower joystick
button)
Po 13 Control of front loader power socket X80/4 using relay K8 (control with the upper joystick
button)
Po 14 Parking brake valve (Y18)
Po 15 Brake cooling valve (Y10)
Po 16 4WD clutch valve (Y3)
Po 19 Differential lock valve (Y1)
Po 20 Power supply to the CAN valves of the hydraulics (Y28) using relay K4
Po 22 ”Reverse ON””
Output for reverse buzzer (H27) and automatic rear working lights switch (S8)
Po 23 Range gear M valve (Y16), gray connector
Po 24 Range gear H valve (Y17), blue connector
Po 25 Main gear 1 valve (Y26), black connector with cable tie
Po 26 Main gear 2 valve (Y27), black connector
Test mode of the TC1 control unit, rear linkage

AI 11 Not in use
AI 12 Power lift, position sensor (B1E)
AI 13 Power lift, draft sensor left (B3E)
AI 14 Power lift, draft sensor right (B2E)
AI 15 Power lift, implement position sensor (external sensor) (B4E)
AI 17 Power lift, lowering switch on right/left mudguard (S2E, S4E)
AI 19 Power lift, set value for upper lifting limit (from settings panel A2E pin 5)
AI 20 Power lift, set value for lowering speed (signal from settings panel A2E pin 6)
AI 21 Power lift, set value for mixture control (signal from settings panel A2E pin 3)
AI 22 Power lift, set value for drive balance control (signal from settings panel A2E pin 2)
AI 38 Power lift, lifting switch on right/left mudguards (S1E, S3E)
FI 07 Radar, ground speed (B10)
Po 09 Power lift, lifting valve (Y2E)
Po 10 Power lift, lowering valve (Y1E)
Po 17 Power lift, slip control light (to settings panel A2E pin 12)
Po 18 Power lift, diagnose light (to settings panel A2E pin 19)
Po 21 Power lift, ”low side” connection for lifting/lowering valves Y1E, Y2E
Values in the tables
Indicated value Actual measured value

0V 0...0.1 V
1.6 V (”floating”) 1.55...1.7 V
2.9 V 2.8...3.0 V
3.3 V 3.2...3.4 V
5V 4.9...5.1 V
5.8 V 5.7...5.9 V
(Approx. 5.8 V is the maximum value that AI
inputs can measure. The actual voltage can be
higher than 5.9 V.)
596
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 513.5 37
TC1 analog inputs
I/O Pin no. Description Value Performing the

test test
AI 1 22 Range gear, position of the Ranges A, B (gear M) = 0.75---1.6 V
selector fork (B19) Ranges C, D (gear H) = 3.55---4.75V
Short to battery = approx. 5.8 V
Short to ground = 0 V
AI 2 23 Main gear, position of the selector Ranges A, C (gear 1) = 0.75---1.6 V
fork (B20) Ranges B, D (gear 2) = 3.55---4.75 V
AI 3 24 Clutch pedal (front) position Up = low voltage (e.g. 1.1 V)
sensor (B16) Pressed = high voltage (e.g. 3.5 V)
AI 4 25 Trailer hook release switch (S86) Pressed down (symbol side) = 5 V
Not pressed down = 3.3 V
Short to ground or open circuit = 0 V
AI 5 26 Not in use Approximately 0 V
AI 6 32 Power shuttle lever, front: F, N, R, F = approx. 2.7 V (2.61...2.71 V) Test also AI 16.
P (S41) N = approx. 3.4 V (3.33...3.43 V)
R = approx. 4.1 V (4.05...4.15 V)
P = approx. 1.6 V (1.53...1.63 V)
AI 7 33 PS preprogramming button, front Not pressed down = 3.3 V Keep the button
(S51) Pressed down = 5 V pressed down
Short to ground / open circuit = 0 V for a long time.
Short to battery = approx. 5.8 V This cannot be
tested with
tractor terminal.
Use the MultiTool
I/O test.
AI 8 34 Driver detection (switch inside in Driver NOT on the seat = 0 V
the seat) (S11) Driver on the seat = 5 V
AI 10 36 Hydraulic oil temperature (B23) 1.5 V = +150 ˚C
3.5 V = ---50 ˚C
AI 16 42 Power shuttle lever, N position Position N = approx. 5.8 V Test also Ai 6.
”safety switch” (in S41) Other positions = approx. 0.5 V
Open circuit /short to ground = 0 V
AI 23 54 Eco/Power switch (S19) ECO off = 3.3 V
ECO on = 5 V
Open circuit = approx. 1.6 V (”floating”)
AI 24 55 4WD rocker switch, OFF =approx. 5.8 V
OFF/AUTO/ON (S30) AUTO (middle position) = approx. 2.9 V
(in pre ---serial tractors approx. 3.3 V)
ON (symbol side) = 5 V
AI 25 56 Differential lock rocker switch, OFF = approx. 5.8 V
597
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 513.5 38
TC1 analog inputs
I/O Pin no. Description Value Performing the test

test
AI 26 57 Steering angle sensor, in Values are not accurate. It is sufficient that the
front axle (B2C) values are approx. the values given here (there is a
calibration for the sensor).
Max left = approx. 3.8 V
Tyres in aligned position (middle position) =
approx. 2 V
Max right = approx. 0.5 V
AI 27 58 Brake pedal switch, left Pedal not pressed (up) = approx. 5.8 V Note: When only
(S20) Braking started (started to press pedal) = 0 V right pedal pressed,
Open circuit = approx. 1.6 V (”floating”) voltage in the left
pedal input approx.
1.6 V (1.3...1.8 V)
AI 28 59 Brake pedal switch, right Pedal not pressed (up) = approx. 5.8 V Note: When only left
(S10) Braking started (started to press pedal) = 0 V pedal pressed,
Open circuit = approx. 1.6 V (”floating”) voltage in the right
pedal input approx.
1.6 V (1.3...1.8 V)
AI 29 60 PS shifting automatics Middle position = approx. 1.6 V (”floating”)
switch (S18) Symbol side pressed down = 5 V
Other side pressed down = 3.3 V
AI 30 61 PTO lever switches, front Lever in front position = 2.9 V Diodes between 3.3
position=speed 1 (S28), Lever in rear position = 4.6 V V / switch and 5 V /
rear position=speed 2 No speed selected = approx. 5.8 V switch
(S29) Open circuit = approx. 1.6 V (”floating”)
Short to ground = 0 V See connection
below (diagram 2)
AI 31 62 PTO switch, OFF and OFF = approx. 1.6 V (”floating”) PTO emergency
standby positions (S25) Standby/start = 3.3 V (if auto PTO off), switch is between
5 V (if auto PTO on) output (Po 07) and
Short to ground = 0 V the valve (Y2)
See connection
below (diagram 4)
AI 32 63 PTO switch, start position Start = 3.3 V (if auto PTO off), See connection
(S25) 5 V (if auto PTO on) below (diagram 4)
Other positions = approx. 1.6 V
AI 33 64 PTO start switch, on Not pressed (L/R)= 3.3 V See connection
mudguards, left (S2E) and Pressed (L/R) = 5 V below (diagram 4)
right (S2E) Open circuit = approx. 1.6 V (”floating”)
Short to ground (L/R) = 0 V
Short to battery (L/R) = approx. 5.8 V
AI 34 65 Clutch pedal switch, front Clutch pedal NOT pressed down (pedal up) = See connection
(S9) approx. 1.6 V below (diagram 3)
Clutch pedal pressed (pedal down) = approx. 0 V
AI 35 66 AutoTraction (N Auto) Autotraction OFF = 3.3 V
switch (S17) Autotraction ON (symbol side) = 5 V
Middle position = approx. 1.6 V
598
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 513.5 39

test
AI 36 67 LL creeper gear lever, the LL OFF (lever in rear pos.) = 5 V Diodes between 3.3
switch in rear position Lever in other positions = 2.9 V V / switch
(neutral request, S49) Short to ground = 0 V
Open circuit = approx. 1.6 V (”floating”) See connection
Short to battery = approx. 5.8 V below (diagram 1)
AI 37 68 LL creeper gear lever, the LL ON (lever in front pos.) = 5 V Diodes between 3.3
switch in forward position, Lever in other positions = 2.9 V V / switch
creeper gear engaged Short to ground = 0 V
(S50) Open circuit = approx. 1.6 V (”floating”) See connection
Short to battery = approx. 5.8 V below (diagram 1)
AI 39 10 Outdoor temperature 1.5 V = +150 ˚C
sensor (B26) 3.5 V = ---50 ˚C (displays approx. 0 V up to the
software version 1.7.0.0)
AI 40 11 Transmission oil 1.5 V = +150 ˚C
temperature sensor (B14) 3.5 V = ---50 ˚C (displays approx. 0 V up to the
TC1 DSM speed sensor inputs (for Bosch 2 -- wire Hall sensor with sensing for direction of rotation)

test
FI 8 12 Transmission input speed Engine 650 rpm = approx. 430---450 Hz Parking brake engaged
sensor (B21) Engine 850 rpm = approx. 570---590 Hz
Engine 1500 rpm = approx. 1010---1040 Hz
Engine 2000 rpm = approx. 1350---1380 Hz
FI 9 13 Power shuttle speed Engine 850 rpm = approx. 260---280 Hz Speed range A,
sensor (B13) Engine 1500 rpm = approx. 460---490 Hz Powershift gear 1,
driving forwards
599
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 513.5 40
TC1 HALL speed sensor inputs

test
FI 1 14 PTO speed sensor (B7) Engine 850 rpm: approx. 163 Hz (540), approx. PTO speed selected,
197 Hz (540E), approx. 283 Hz (1000) PTO running
Engine 2000 rpm: approx. 384 Hz (540), approx.
470 Hz (540E), approx. 667 Hz (1000)
FI 2 15 Front axle speed sensor Transmission type 50 km/h: Range A, PowerShift
(B17) Engine 1000 rpm = 53---55 Hz gear 1, 1000 rpm
FI 3 16 Transmission output Transmission type 50 km/h: Range A, PowerShift
speed sensor (B6) Engine 1000 rpm (approx. 1.6 km/h) = 77---78 gear 1, 1000 rpm
Hz
FI 4 17 Rear wheel speed sensor Transmission type 50 km/h: Range A, PowerShift
(B9) Engine 1000 rpm (approx. 1.6 km/h) = approx. gear 1, 1000 rpm
7 Hz
FI 5 1) 18 SigmaPower engine Engine 1000 rpm = approx. 167 Hz
speed sensor (B11) Engine 1800 rpm = approx. 300 Hz
FI 6 1) 19 SigmaPower PTO speed Engine 1000 rpm = approx. 167 Hz
sensor (B5) Engine 1800 rpm = approx. 300 Hz
1) Only in Sigma models
TC1 PWM (Propo) outputs with accurate current measurement (PWM = ”Pulse Width Modulation”)

test
PO 1 74 PS C1 clutch valve (Y31, PS 1, 2 or 3: approx. 60---65
Powershift) (engine running)
PO 2 75 PS C2 clutch valve (Y32, PS 3, 4 or 5: approx. 60---65
Powershift) (engine running)
The value indicates the output level in
PO 3 76 PS C3 clutch valve (Y33, PS 2 or 4: approx. 60 ---65 (engine percent.
Powershift) running) 100 = valve fully energized =>
>
PO 4 77 PS C4 clutch valve (Y34, PS 1 or 5: approx. 60 ---65 (engine approx. 1.5 A => 24 bar
Powershift) running) 0 = valve not energized => 0 A => 0
bar
PO 5 78 F (forward) clutch valve Direction F: approx. 60---65
(power shuttle, Y11) (engine running)
PO 6 79 R (reverse) clutch valve Direction R: approx. 60---65
(power shuttle, Y12) (engine running)
600
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 513.5 41
TC1 PWM (Propo) outputs with less accurate current measurement (PWM = ”Pulse Width Modulation”)

test
PO 7 80 PTO clutch valve (Y2) 100 = valve fully energized
PO 8 81 Trailer hook release valve 100 = valve fully energized
(Y19)
PO 11 82 Not in use Approximately 0 V
PO 12 83 Control of front loader Switch pressed down= 100
power socket X80/1 using --- ---> The relay gets energized
relay K7 (control with the
lower joystick button)
PO 13 84 Control of front loader Switch pressed down= 100
upper joystick button)
PO 14 85 Parking brake valve (Y18) Parking brake ON = 0 See connection below
Parking brake OFF = 100 (diagram 5).
PO 15 86 Brake cooling valve (Y10) 100 = valve fully energized
--- ---> cooling is on
PO 16 87 4WD clutch valve (Y3) 4WD ON = 0
4WD OFF = 100
PO 19 90 Differential lock valve (Y1) DL ON = 100
DL OFF = 0
PO 20 52 Power supply to the CAN Supply ON = 100
valves of the hydraulics Supply OFF = 0
(Y28) using relay K4
TC1 PWM outputs with accurate current measurement (PWM = ”Pulse Width Modulation”)

test
PO 22 51 ”Reverse ON” Shuttle lever in position R = 100
Output for reverse buzzer (relays get energized)
(H27) and automatic rear Other positions = 0
working lights switch (S8)
PO 23 91 Range gear M valve (Y16), When shifting the range When shifting the speed range:
gray connector 0 --- ---> (30...60) --- ---> 0 B ---> C, C ---> B
PO 24 92 Range gear H valve (Y17), When shifting the range When shifting the speed range:
blue connector 0 --- ---> (20...60) --- ---> 0 B ---> C, C ---> B
PO 25 93 Main gear 1 valve (Y26), When shifting the range
black connector with cable 0 --- ---> (25...60) --- ---> 0 When shifting any speed range.
tie
PO 26 94 Main gear 2 valve (Y27), When shifting the range
When shifting any speed range.
black connector 0 --- ---> (20...60) --- ---> 0
601
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 513.5 42
Rear power lift

test
AI 12 38 Power lift, position sensor (B1E) AC 98 % (top pos.) = approx. 3.7 V
AC 0 % (down pos.) = approx. 0.65 V
AI 13 39 Power lift, draft sensor left (B3E) No draft = approx. 2.4 V
AI 14 40 Power lift, draft sensor right (B2E) No draft = approx. 2.4 V
AI 15 41 Power lift, implement position Sensor not connected = approx. 0 V
sensor (external sensor) (B4E)
AI 17 43 Power lift, lowering switch on Switch pressed down = 5 V
right/left mudguard (S2E, S4E) Not pressed down = 3.3 V
AI 19 45 Power lift, set value for upper 0.2...0.3 (minimum position) --- 0.8 --- 1.4 Check especially the
lifting limit (from settings panel --- 1.9 --- 2.5 --- 3.1 --- 3.6 --- 4.2 --- 4.8 values in minimum and
A2E pin 5) (maximum position) maximum positions.
AI 20 46 Power lift, set value for lowering 0.7...0.8 (minimum) --- 0.9 --- 1.1 --- 1.4 --- Check especially the
speed (signal from settings panel 1.7 --- 2.2 --- 2.8 --- 3.6 --- 4.8 (maximum) values in minimum and
A2E pin 6) In pre ---serial tractors: maximum positions.
0.5 (minimum) --- 0.7 --- 0.9 --- 1.2 --- 1.7
--- 2.1 --- 2.6 --- 3.5 --- 4.8 (maximum)
AI 21 47 Power lift, set value for mixture 4.75...4.85 (P) --- 3.6 --- 3.1 --- 2.6 --- 2.1 --- Check especially the
control (signal from settings panel 1.6 --- 1.2 --- 0.7 --- 0.2 (position 8) values in minimum and
A2E pin 3) maximum positions.
AI 22 48 Power lift, set value for drive 0.2...0.3 (OFF) --- 0.8 --- 1.4 --- 1.9 (Slip Check especially the
balance control (signal from control) values in minimum and
settings panel A2E pin 2) maximum positions.
AI 38 69 Power lift, lifting switch on Switch pressed down = 5 V
right/left mudguards (S1E, S3E) Not pressed down = 3.3 V
FI 7 20 Radar, ground speed (B10) Transmission type 50 km/h: Range A, PowerShift
Engine 1000 rpm (approx. 1.6 km/h) = gear 1.
51---53 Hz
Po 9 29 Power lift, lifting valve (Y2E) Lifting = 100 (valve energized)
Po 10 7 Power lift, lowering valve (Y1E) Lowering = 100 (valve energized)
Po 17 88 Power lift, slip control light (to Light illuminates = 100 Power lift in working
settings panel A2E pin 12) In pre ---serial tractors: position (AutoControl
Light illuminates = 0 position), slip control
activated, driving
forwards
Po 18 89 Power lift, diagnostics light (to Light illuminates = 100 Try to use the lift
settings panel A2E pin 19) In pre ---serial tractors: without activating it first
Light illuminates = 0 => the diagnose light
illuminates.
Po 21 73 Power lift, ”low side” connection Power lift does not lift or lower: 0 Engine running, lift and
for lifting / lowering valves Y1E, Lifting or lowering: 10---80 (value varies) lower the power lift
Y2E. “Low side” connection
adjusts the quantity of current.
602
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 513.5 43
Connections without I/O testing

test
--- 1 Battery (+15). Through the ignition
switch, from the fuse F25
--- 3 Battery (+30). Continuous, from the fuse
F40
F40
--- 8 VCRTL (+15). Through the ignition
--- 2 Sypply --- GND
--- 9 Signal --- GND
--- 72 3.3 V reference voltage 50 mA
--- 71 5 V reference voltage 100 mA
--- 70 5 V reference voltage for sensors 150 mA
--- 27 CAN1_L
--- 28 CAN1_H
--- 49 CAN2_L (for R&D use only)
--- 50 CAN2_H (for R&D use only)
--- 21 Not in use (LIN bus)
--- 30 Not in use
Connector and pin positions
603
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 513.5 44
Diagram 1
Diagram 2
PTO speed 2 PTO speed 1
Diagram 3
Ai34 Po05 Po06

+12V
F R
Clutch
pedal
switch
S9
604
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 513.5 45
Diagram 4
S2E
S2E
X31
605
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 513.5 46
Diagram 5: safety circuit of parking brake
12V
TC2 TC1
AI06 Po14
K2
V6.3
Shuttle lever
P switch
(NO) Handbrake
S56 solenoid
Y18
606
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 513.6 47
TC2 unit of Versu models (I/O test)


DI 01 Not in use
DI 02 Not in use
DI 03 Not in use
DI 04 NA--- PTO (North American PTO), inductive switch on the PTO shaft (S102) Test also DI 18.
DI 05 Not in use
DI 06 Air conditioning active (compressor), output from air conditioning to relay K3
DI 07 Change--- over switch for front linkage and front loader (S37)
DI 08 Implement up, signal from implement (connector X89, located under the side panel)
DI 09 Front PTO rocker switch, standby position (S16) Test also DI 16.
DI 10 Not in use
DI 11 Hydraulic oil level low limit switch (S54)
DI 12 Power socket rocker switch (S34), the upper switch Test also DI 15.
DI 13 Front lift lifting switch on the front of the tractor (S83)
DI 14 Front lift lowering switch on the front of the tractor (S82)
DI 15 Power socket rocker switch (S34), the upper switch, activation position Test also DI 12.
DI 16 Front PTO rocker switch, starting position (S16) Test also DI 09.
DI 17 Not in use
DI 18 NA--- PTO enabled diagnostics (short to ground diagnosed, S102) Test also DI 04.
DI 19 U--- Pilot rocker switch, ON position (S15) Test also DI 20.
DI 20 U--- Pilot rocker switch, REC position (S15) Test also DI 19.
DI 21 Not in use
DI 22 Not in use
DO 01 U--- Pilot automatics indicator light (in U--- Pilot rocker switch S15)
DO 02 Front PTO START/STOP signal, signal from TC2 to front PTO control unit (A15)
AI 01 Not in use
AI 02 Working hydraulics valve 1, rear mudguard buttons (+), right (S90) and left (S94)
AI 03 Working hydraulics valve 1, rear mudguard buttons (--- ), right (S91) and left (S95)
AI 04 Not in use
AI 05 Not in use
AI 06 Parking brake safety switch, relay K2 (”safety input”)
AI 07 Not in use
AI 08 Not in use
PO 01 Pilot pressure for CAN valves of the hydraulics, valves Y35 (front) and Y36 (rear), using relay K5
PO 02 Control of power socket X17 (2--- pole DIN) using relay K13 (control by U--- Pilot), the upper power
socket
607
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 513.6 48
TC2 digital inputs, DI 01 -- DI 22

test
DI 01 A2A1/13 Not in use 0
DI 04 A2A1/16 NA ---PTO (North American 1 = 21/20---spline PTO shaft 1 = +12 V
PTO). Only in tractors that => the PTO is allowed to 0 = floating
are delivered to North rotate Test also DI 18.
America. 0 = some other PTO shaft
Inductive switch on the => the PTO is not allowed to
PTO shaft (S102) rotate
DI 06 A2A2/16 Air conditioning active 0 = relay not energized (AC
(compressor), output from compressor stopped)
air conditioning to relay K3 1 = relay energized (AC
This input is needed for compressor is running)
controlling the electrical 0 = floating, 1 = +12 V
Visco fan of the engine.
DI 07 A2A2/17 Change ---over switch for 0 = side opposite to the The tractor is equipped with this
front linkage and front symbol pressed down (front change ---over switch if both front linkage
loader (S37) loader) and a front loader are installed. Check the
Perform this test even if 1 = symbol side pressed value in both positions of the switch:
the tractor has no down (front linkage) 1 = the switch is in the front linkage
change ---over switch (to 0 = floating position (left side pressed down)
ensure front loader safety). 1 = + 12 V 0 = the switch is in the front loader
position
If the tractor has no change ---over switch,
the values should read as follows:
1 = the tractor is equipped with front
linkage (a wire that connects two poles
replaces the switch)
0 = the tractor is equipped with a front
loader (there is no wire in place of the
switch)
DI 08 A2A2/18 Implement up, signal from 0 = input not active 0 = floating
implement (connector 1 = input active 1=0V
X89, located under the
side panel)
(This input can be used for
surface area measurement
of the Proline instrument
panel)
DI 09 A2A2/19 Front PTO rocker switch, 0 = OFF position 0 = floating
standby position (S16) 1 = middle position or symbol 1 = +12 V
side pressed down Test also DI 16.
608
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 513.6 49

test
DI 11 A2A2/21 Hydraulic oil level low limit 0 = oil level too low 0 = floating
switch (S54) 1 = oil level normal 1=0V
DI 12 A2A2/22 Power socket rocker 0 = side opposite to the 0 = floating
switch (S34), the upper symbol pressed down (OFF) 1 = +12 V
switch 1 = middle position or symbol
side pressed down (ON) Test also DI 15.
DI 13 A2A2/23 Front lift lifting switch on 0 = switch not pressed down 0 = floating
the front of the tractor 1 = switch pressed down 1 = +12 V
(S83)
DI 14 A2A2/24 Front lift lowering switch 0 = switch not pressed down 0 = floating
on the front of the tractor 1 = switch pressed down 1 = +12 V
(S82)
DI 15 A2A2/25 Power socket rocker 1 = symbol side pressed 0 = floating
switch (S34), the upper down 1 = +12 V
switch, activation position 0 = other positions
Test also DI 12.
DI 16 A2A2/26 Front PTO rocker switch, 1 = symbol side pressed 0 = floating
starting position (S16) down 1 = +12 V
0 = other positions
Test also DI 09.
DI 18 A2A2/28 NA ---PTO (North American 0 = PTO is allowed to start 0 = +12 V
PTO). Only in tractors that 1 = short to gnd = PTO is not 1=0V
are delivered to North allowed to start Test also DI 04.
America.
Monitoring the switch
S102 fuctioning
DI 19 A2A2/29 U ---Pilot rocker switch, ON 0 = side opposite to symbol 0 = +12 V
position (S15) pressed down (OFF) 1=0V
1 = middle position or symbol
side pressed down (ON) Test also DI 20.
DI 20 A2A2/30 U ---Pilot rocker switch, 1 = symbol side pressed 0 = +12 V
REC position (S15) down (REC) 1=0V
0 = other positions
Test also DI 19.
DI 21 Not in use 0
DI 22 Not in use 0
TC2 digital outputs, DO 01 -- DO 02

test
DO 01 A2A1/4 U ---Pilot automatics 1 = the Start the engine. Turn the U ---Pilot activation/recording switch to
indicator light (in indicator light is the OFF position and then to centre position. The indicator light
U ---Pilot rocker on illuminates to indicate that the U ---Pilot is in standby mode.
switch S15) 0 = the
indicator light is
off
DO 02 A2A1/3 Front PTO 0 = output not This test item is for checking the status of the control unit
START/STOP active output.
signal, signal from 1 = output is Start the front PTO.
TC2 to front PTO active
control unit (A15)
609
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 513.6 50
TC2 analog inputs, AI 01 -- AI 08

test
AI 01 A2A1/6 Not in use Approximately 0 V
AI 02 A2A1/7 Working hydraulics valve 1, 0 V = switch not 0 = floating
rear mudguard buttons (+), pressed 1=5V
right (S90) and left (S94) 5 V = switch pressed
8 V = short to +12 V Note: The 5 V reference voltage is supplied by
(=fault) the TC1 control unit.
AI 03 A2A2/1 Working hydraulics valve 1, 0 V = switch not 0 = floating
rear mudguard buttons (---), pressed 1=5V
right (S91) and left (S95) 5 V = switch pressed
8 V = short to +12 V Note: The 5 V reference voltage is supplied by
(=fault) the TC1 control unit.
AI 06 A2A2/4 Parking brake safety switch, Shuttle lever in position P OFF = 12 V
relay K2 (”safety input”) P=0V P ON = 0 V
Shuttle lever in other
The system monitors this positions = 5 V See connection below (diagram 1).
input automatically. If relay K2
does not operate correctly, the
corresponding service code
will be activated.
TC2 proportional outputs, PO 01 -- PO 02

test
PO 01 A2A1/2 Pilot pressure for 0 = no supply Activate the hydraulics.
CAN valves of the 100 = valves
hydraulics, valves are energized
Y35 (front) and Y36 (pilot pressure
(rear), using relay connected)
K5
PO 02 A2A1/1 Control of power 0 = relay not This test item is for checking the status of the control unit output.
socket X17 energized The output only functions when controlled by U ---Pilot
(2 ---pole DIN) using 100 = relay automatics. Record an U ---Pilot program that switches the
relay K13 (control energized output on and off. Run the U ---Pilot program and observe
by U ---Pilot), the whether the status of the output changes according to the
upper power U ---Pilot program.
socket
610
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 513.6 51
Diagram 1: Safety circuit of P brake

12V
TC2 TC1
AI06 Po14
K2
V6.3
Shuttle lever
P switch
(NO) Handbrake
S56 solenoid
Y18
611
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 513.6 52
612
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 513.7 53
TC1 unit of Direct models (I/O test)

Note! The control unit controls the transmission and the rear power lift. There is no separate control unit for the power lift.

Test mode of the TC1 control unit, transmission Note
MultiTool Description of the test item
AI 01 Range gear, position of the selector fork (B19)
AI 02 Main gear, position of the selector fork (B20)
AI 03 Clutch pedal (front) position sensor (B16)
AI 04 Trailer hook release switch (S86)
AI 05 Hydrostat pressure sensor, inner (Mp) (B24)
AI 06 Power shuttle lever, front: F, N, R, P (S41) Test also AI 16.
AI 07 PS preprogramming button, front (S51)
AI 08 Driver detection (switch inside in the seat) (S11)
AI 09 Hydrostat pressure sensor, outer (Ms) (B25)
AI 10 Hydraulic oil temperature (B23)
AI 16 Power shuttle lever, N ”safety switch” (in S41) Test also Ai 6.
AI 18 Hydrostat temperature (B22)
AI 23 Eco/Power switch (S19)
AI 24 4WD rocker switch, OFF/AUTO/ON (S30)
AI 25 Differential lock rocker switch, OFF/AUTO/ON (S22)
AI 26 Steering angle sensor, in front axle (B2C)
AI 27 Brake pedal switch, left (S20)
AI 28 Brake pedal switch, right (S10)
AI 29 Engine brake mode switch (S18)
AI 30 PTO lever switches, front pos.=speed 1 (S28), rear pos.=speed 2 (S29)
AI 31 PTO switch, OFF and standby positions (S25)
AI 32 PTO switch, start position (S25)
AI 33 PTO start switch, on mudguards, left (S2E) and right (S2E)
AI 34 Clutch pedal switch, front (S9)
AI 35 Driving mode switch, automatic/semiautomatic (S17)
AI 36 Not in use
AI 37 Not in use
AI 39 Outdoor temperature sensor (B26)
AI 40 Transmission oil temperature sensor (B14)
FI 01 PTO speed sensor (B7)

FI 02 Front axle speed sensor (B17)
FI 03 Transmission output speed sensor (B6)
FI 04 Rear wheel speed sensor (B9)
FI 05 SigmaPower engine speed sensor (B11)
FI 06 SigmaPower PTO speed sensor (B5)
FI 08 Hydrostat speed sensor (B21)
FI 09 Power shuttle speed sensor (B13)

Po 03 Hydrostat valve (Y33)
Po 04 Not in use
Po 05 F (forwards) clutch valve (power shuttle, Y11)
613
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 513.7 54

Po 06 R (reverse) clutch valve (power shuttle, Y12)
Po 07 PTO clutch valve (Y2)
Po 08 Trailer hook release valve (Y19)
Po 11 Not in use
Po 12 Control of front loader power socket X80/1 using relay K7 (control with the lower joystick
button)
Po 13 Control of front loader power socket X80/4 using relay K8 (control with the upper joystick
button)
Po 14 Parking brake valve (Y18)
Po 15 Brake cooling valve (Y10)
Po 16 4WD clutch valve (Y3)
Po 19 Differential lock valve (Y1)
Po 20 Power supply to the CAN valves of the hydraulics (Y28) using relay K4
Po 22 ”Reverse ON””
Output for reverse buzzer (H27) and automatic rear working lights switch (S8)
Po 23 Range gear M valve (Y16), gray connector
Po 24 Range gear H valve (Y17), blue connector
Po 25 Main gear 1 valve (Y26), black connector with cable tie
Po 26 Main gear 2 valve (Y27), black connector
Test mode of the TC1 control unit, rear linkage

AI 11 Not in use
AI 12 Power lift, position sensor (B1E)
AI 13 Power lift, draft sensor left (B3E)
AI 14 Power lift, draft sensor right (B2E)
AI 15 Power lift, implement position sensor (external sensor) (B4E)
AI 17 Power lift, lowering switch on right/left mudguard (S2E, S4E)
AI 19 Power lift, set value for upper lifting limit (from settings panel A2E pin 5)
AI 20 Power lift, set value for lowering speed (signal from settings panel A2E pin 6)
AI 21 Power lift, set value for mixture control (signal from settings panel A2E pin 3)
AI 22 Power lift, set value for drive balance control (signal from settings panel A2E pin 2)
AI 38 Power lift, lifting switch on right/left mudguards (S1E, S3E)
FI 07 Radar, ground speed (B10)
Po 09 Power lift, lifting valve (Y2E)
Po 10 Power lift, lowering valve (Y1E)
Po 17 Power lift, slip control light (to settings panel A2E pin 12)
Po 18 Power lift, diagnose light (to settings panel A2E pin 19)
Po 21 Power lift, ”low side” connection for lifting/lowering valves Y1E, Y2E
Values in the tables
Indicated value Actual measured value

0V 0...0.1 V
1.6 V (”floating”) 1.55...1.7 V
2.9 V 2.8...3.0 V
3.3 V 3.2...3.4 V
5V 4.9...5.1 V
5.8 V 5.7...5.9 V
(Approx. 5.8 V is the maximum value that AI
inputs can measure. The actual voltage can be
higher than 5.9 V.)
614
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 513.7 55
TC1 analog inputs

test test
AI 01 22 Range gear, position of the Ranges A, B (gear M) = 0.75---1.6 V
selector fork (B19) Ranges C, D (gear H) = 3.55---4.75V
AI 02 23 Main gear, position of the selector Ranges A, C (gear 1) = 0.75---1.6 V
fork (B20) Ranges B, D (gear 2) = 3.55---4.75 V
AI 03 24 Clutch pedal (front) position Up = low voltage (e.g. 1.1 V)
sensor (B16) Pressed = high voltage (e.g. 3.5 V)
AI 04 25 Trailer hook release switch (S86) Pressed down (symbol side) = 5 V
Not pressed down = 3.3 V
Short to ground or open circuit = 0 V
Short to battery = 12 V
AI 05 26 Hydrostat pressure sensor, inner Engine speed 650 rpm, parking brake ON: The pressure is
(Mp) (B24) 1.2 ---1.3 V not allowed to
0 rpm, parking brake ON: approx. 1.0 V rise above 420
1.0 V = 0 bar bar (= 3.8 V).
3.8 V = 420 bar
5.0 V = 600 bar
AI 06 32 Power shuttle lever, front: F, N, R, F = approx. 2.7 V (2.61...2.71 V) Test also AI 16.
P (S41) N = approx. 3.4 V (3.33...3.43 V)
R = approx. 4.1 V (4.05...4.15 V)
P = approx. 1.6 V (1.53...1.63 V)
AI 07 33 PS preprogramming button, front Not pressed down = 3.3 V Keep the button
(S51) Pressed down = 5 V pressed down
Short to ground / open circuit = 0 V for a long time.
Short to battery = approx. 5.8 V This cannot be
tested with
tractor terminal.
Use the MultiTool
I/O test.
AI 08 34 Driver detection (switch inside in Driver NOT on the seat = 0 V
the seat) (S11) Driver on the seat = 5 V
AI 09 35 Hydrostat pressure sensor, outer Engine speed 650 rpm, parking brake ON: The pressure is
(Ms) (B25) 1.1 ---1.2 V not allowed to
0 rpm, parking brake ON: approx. 1.0 V rise above 420
1.0 V = 0 bar bar (= 3.8 V).
3.8 V = 420 bar
5.0 V = 600 bar
AI 10 36 Hydraulic oil temperature (B23) 1.5 V = +150 ˚C
3.5 V = ---50 ˚C
AI 16 42 Power shuttle lever, N position Position N = approx. 5.8 V Test also Ai 6.
”safety switch” (in S41) Other positions = approx. 0.5 V
Open circuit /short to ground = 0 V
AI 18 44 Hydrostat temperature (B22) 1.5 V = +150 ˚C
3.5 V = ---50 ˚C (displays approx. 0 V up to the
AI 23 54 Eco/Power switch (S19) ECO off = 3.3 V
ECO on = 5 V
Open circuit = approx. 1.6 V (”floating”)
615
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 513.7 56
TC1 analog inputs

test test
AI 24 55 4WD rocker switch, OFF =approx. 5.8 V
AI 25 56 Differential lock rocker OFF = approx. 5.8 V
switch, OFF/AUTO/ON AUTO (middle position) = approx. 2.9 V
(S22) (in pre ---serial tractors approx. 3.3 V)
AI 26 57 Steering angle sensor, in Values are not accurate. It is sufficient that the
front axle (B2C) values are approx. the values given here (there is a
calibration for the sensor).
Max left = approx. 3.8 V
Tyres in aligned position (middle position) =
approx. 2 V
Max right = approx. 0.5 V
AI 27 58 Brake pedal switch, left Pedal not pressed (up) = approx. 5.8 V Note: When only
(S20) Braking started (started to press pedal) = 0 V right pedal pressed,
Open circuit = approx. 1.6 V (”floating”) voltage in the left
pedal input approx.
1.6 V (1.3...1.8 V)
AI 28 59 Brake pedal switch, right Pedal not pressed (up) = approx. 5.8 V Note: When only left
(S10) Braking started (started to press pedal) = 0 V pedal pressed,
Open circuit = approx. 1.6 V (”floating”) voltage in the right
pedal input approx.
1.6 V (1.3...1.8 V)
AI 29 60 Engine brake mode switch Middle position = approx. 1.6 V (”floating”)
(S18) Symbol side pressed down = 5 V
Other side pressed down = 3.3 V
AI 30 61 PTO lever switches, front Lever in front position = 2.9 V Diodes between 3.3
position=speed 1 (S28), Lever in rear position = 4.6 V V / switch and 5 V /
rear position=speed 2 No speed selected = approx. 5.8 V switch
(S29) Open circuit = approx. 1.6 V (”floating”)
Short to ground = 0 V See connection
below (diagram 1)
AI 31 62 PTO switch, OFF and OFF = approx. 1.6 V (”floating”) PTO emergency
standby positions (S25) Standby/start = 3.3 V (if auto PTO off), switch is between
5 V (if auto PTO on) output (Po 07) and
Short to ground = 0 V the valve (Y2)
See connection
below (diagram 3)
AI 32 63 PTO switch, start position Start = 3.3 V (if auto PTO off), See connection
(S25) 5 V (if auto PTO on) below (diagram 3)
Other positions = approx. 1.6 V
AI 33 64 PTO start switch, on Not pressed (L/R)= 3.3 V See connection
mudguards, left (S2E) and Pressed (L/R) = 5 V below (diagram 3)
right (S2E) Open circuit = approx. 1.6 V (”floating”)
Short to ground (L/R) = 0 V
Short to battery (L/R) = approx. 5.8 V
616
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 513.7 57

test test
AI 34 65 Clutch pedal switch, front Clutch pedal NOT pressed down (pedal up) = See connection
(S9) approx. 1.6 V below (diagram 2)
Clutch pedal pressed (pedal down) = approx. 0 V
AI 35 66 Driving mode switch, Middle position = approx. 1.6 V (”floating”)
automatic/semiautomatic Symbol side pressed down = 5 V
(S17) Other side pressed down = 3.3 V
AI 36 67 Not in use Approximately 1.6 V
AI 37 68 Not in use Approximately 1.6 V
AI 39 10 Outdoor temperature
sensor (B26) 1.5 V = +150 ˚C
3 5 V = ---50 ˚C (displays approx
3.5 approx. 0 V up to the
AI 40 11 Transmission oil software version 1.8.0.0)
temperature sensor (B14)
TC1 DSM speed sensor inputs (for Bosch 2 -- wire Hall sensor with sensing for direction of rotation)

test
FI 08 12 Hydrostat speed sensor Engine 650 rpm, parking brake ON: 460---480 Speed range A, Speed
(B21) Hz Balance knob in center
Engine 850 rpm, parking bake ON: approx. 615 position, transmission
Hz adjustment lever in
Engine 1000 rpm, parking brake ON: approx. maximum position
720 Hz
Engine 1000 rpm, driving forwards: approx. 170
Hz
FI 09 13 Power shuttle speed Engine 650 rpm, parking brake ON: 0 Hz Speed range A, Speed
sensor (B13) Engine 1000 rpm, driving forwards: approx. 300 Balance knob in center
Hz position, transmission
adjustment lever in
maximum position
617
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 513.7 58
TC1 HALL speed sensor inputs
I/O test Pin no. Description Value Performing the test

FI 01 14 PTO speed sensor (B7) Engine 850 rpm: approx. 163 Hz (540),
approx. 200 Hz (540E), approx. 283 Hz
(1000)
Engine 2000 rpm: approx. 384 Hz (540),
approx. 667 Hz (1000)
FI 02 15 Front axle speed sensor (B17) Transmission type 50 km/h: Speed range A, Speed
Engine 1000 rpm = approx. 55 Hz Balance knob in center
position, transmission
adjustment lever in
maximum position
FI 03 16 Transmission output speed Transmission type 50 km/h: Speed range A, Speed
sensor (B6) Engine 1000 rpm (approx. 1.6 km/h) = Balance knob in center
75---78 Hz position, transmission
adjustment lever in
maximum position
FI 04 17 Rear wheel speed sensor (B9) Transmission type 50 km/h: Speed range A, Speed
Engine 1000 rpm (approx. 1.6 km/h) = Balance knob in center
approx. 7 Hz position, transmission
adjustment lever in
maximum position
FI 05 1) 18 SigmaPower engine speed Engine 1000 rpm = approx. 167 Hz
sensor (B11) Engine 1800 rpm = approx. 300 Hz
Note: In SigmaPower models
only.
FI 06 1) 19 SigmaPower PTO speed Engine 1000 rpm = 167 Hz
sensor (B5) Engine 1800 rpm = 300 Hz
Note: In SigmaPower models
only.
1) Only in Sigma models
618
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 513.7 59
TC1 PWM (Propo) outputs with accurate current measurement (PWM = ”Pulse Width Modulation”)
I/O Pin Description Value Performing the test

test no.
Po 01 74 PS C1 clutch valve (Y31, Parking brake ON: value = 0
Powershift) The value is approx. 55---65 when the driving
speed is below the limits listed here:
Transm. 50 km/h
range A: approx. 4 km/h
Transm. 40 km/h
range A: approx. 3.2 km/h
Note that the speed value depends on the
tyre size too. Speed
p range
g A,, Speed
p
Po 02 75 PS C2 clutch valve (Y32, Parking brake ON: value = 0 Balance knob in center
Powershift) The value is approx. 55---65 when the driving position, transmission
speed is above the limits listed under Po 01. adjustment lever in maximum
position
Po 03 76 Hydrostat valve (Y33) 0 km/h: approx. 28
The value indicates the output
Engine 1000 rpm, driving forwards: approx.
level in percent.
47
100 = valve fully energized
Po 04 77 Not in use 0 => approx. 1.5 A => 24 bar
0 = valve not energized =>>0
Po 05 78 F (forward) clutch valve 0 km/h, parking brake ON: 0 A => 0 bar
(power shuttle, Y11) 0 km/h, N,F,R: 70---80 (when the power
shuttle is locked by pressure)
Engine 1000 rpm, driving forwards: approx.
40---60
Po 06 79 R (reverse) clutch valve 0 km/h, parking brake ON: 0
(power shuttle, Y12) 0 km/h, N,F,R: approx. 70---80 (when the
power shuttle is locked by pressure)
Engine 1000 rpm, driving rearwards: approx.
40---60
619
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 513.7 60
TC1 PWM (Propo) outputs with less accurate current measurement (PWM = ”Pulse Width Modulation”)

test
Po 07 80 PTO clutch valve (Y2) 100 = valve fully energized
Po 08 81 Trailer hook release valve 100 = valve fully energized
(Y19)
Po 11 82 Not in use Approximately 0 V
Po 12 83 Control of front loader Switch pressed down= 100
lower joystick button)
Po 13 84 Control of front loader Switch pressed down= 100
upper joystick button)
Po 14 85 Parking brake valve (Y18) Parking brake ON = 0
Parking brake OFF = 100
Po 15 86 Brake cooling valve (Y10) 100 = valve fully energized
--- ---> cooling is on
Po 16 87 4WD clutch valve (Y3) 4WD ON = 0
4WD OFF = 100
Po 19 90 Differential lock valve (Y1) DL ON = 100
DL OFF = 0
Po 20 52 Power supply to the CAN Supply ON = 100
valves of the hydraulics Supply OFF = 0
(Y28) using relay K4
TC1 PWM outputs with accurate current measurement (PWM = ”Pulse Width Modulation”)

test
Po 22 51 ”Reverse ON” Shuttle lever in position R = 100
Output for reverse buzzer (relays get energized)
(H27) and automatic rear Other positions = 0
working lights switch (S8)
Po 23 91 Range gear M valve (Y16), When shifting the range When shifting the range
gray connector 0 --- ---> (30...70) --- ---> 0 B--->C, C--->B
Po 24 92 Range gear H valve (Y17), When shifting the range When shifting the range
blue connector 0 --- ---> (20...70) --- ---> 0 B--->C, C--->B
Po 25 93 Main gear 1 valve (Y26), When shifting the range
black connector with cable 0 --- ---> (30...70) --- ---> 0 When shifting any of the ranges
tie
Po 26 94 Main gear 2 valve (Y27), When shifting the range
When shifting any of the ranges
black connector 0 --- ---> (50...70) --- ---> 0
620
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 513.7 61
Rear power lift

test
AI 12 38 Power lift, position sensor (B1E) AC 98 % (top pos.) = approx. 3.7 V
AC 0 % (down pos.) = approx. 0.65 V
AI 13 39 Power lift, draft sensor left (B3E) No draft = approx. 2.4---2.5 V
AI 14 40 Power lift, draft sensor right (B2E) No draft = approx. 2.4---2.5 V
AI 15 41 Power lift, implement position Sensor not connected = approx. 0 V
sensor (external sensor) (B4E)
AI 17 43 Power lift, lowering switch on Switch pressed down = 5 V
right/left mudguard (S2E, S4E) Not pressed down = 3.3 V
AI 19 45 Power lift, set value for upper 0.2...0.3 (minimum position) --- 0.8 --- 1.4 Check especially the
lifting limit (from settings panel --- 1.9 --- 2.5 --- 3.1 --- 3.6 --- 4.2 --- 4.8 values in minimum and
A2E pin 5) (maximum position) maximum positions.
AI 20 46 Power lift, set value for lowering 0.7...0.8 (minimum) --- 0.9 --- 1.1 --- 1.4 --- Check especially the
speed (signal from settings panel 1.7 --- 2.2 --- 2.8 --- 3.6 --- 4.8 (maximum) values in minimum and
A2E pin 6) In pre ---serial tractors: maximum positions.
0.5 (minimum) --- 0.7 --- 0.9 --- 1.2 --- 1.7
--- 2.1 --- 2.6 --- 3.5 --- 4.8 (maximum)
AI 21 47 Power lift, set value for mixture 4.75...4.85 (P) --- 3.6 --- 3.1 --- 2.6 --- 2.1 --- Check especially the
control (signal from settings panel 1.6 --- 1.2 --- 0.7 --- 0.2 (position 8) values in minimum and
A2E pin 3) maximum positions.
AI 22 48 Power lift, set value for drive 0.2...0.3 (OFF) --- 0.8 --- 1.4 --- 1.9 (Slip Check especially the
balance control (signal from control) values in minimum and
settings panel A2E pin 2) maximum positions.
AI 38 69 Power lift, lifting switch on Switch pressed down = 5 V
right/left mudguards (S1E, S3E) Not pressed down = 3.3 V
FI 07 20 Radar, ground speed (B10) Engine 1000 rpm, forwards: Speed range A, Speed
approximately 52 Hz Balance knob in center
position, transmission
adjustment lever in
maximum position
Po 09 29 Power lift, lifting valve (Y2E) Lifting = 100 (valve energized)
Po 10 7 Power lift, lowering valve (Y1E) Lowering = 100 (valve energized)
Po 17 88 Power lift, slip control light (to Light illuminates = 100 Power lift in working
settings panel A2E pin 12) In pre ---serial tractors: position (AutoControl
Light illuminates = 0 position), slip control
activated, driving
forwards
Po 18 89 Power lift, diagnostics light (to Light illuminates = 100 Try to use the lift
settings panel A2E pin 19) In pre ---serial tractors: without activating it first
Light illuminates = 0 => the diagnose light
illuminates.
Po 21 73 Power lift, ”low side” connection Power lift does not lift or lower: 0 Engine running, lift and
for lifting / lowering valves Y1E, Lifting or lowering: 10---80 (value varies) lower the power lift
Y2E. “Low side” connection
adjusts the quantity of current.
621
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 513.7 62
Connections without I/O testing

test
--- 1 Battery (+15). Through the ignition
F40
F40
--- 8 VCRTL (+15). Through the ignition
--- 72 3.3 V reference voltage 50 mA
--- 71 5 V reference voltage 100 mA
--- 70 5 V reference voltage for sensors 150 mA
--- 27 CAN1_L
--- 28 CAN1_H
--- 49 CAN2_L (for R&D use only)
--- 50 CAN2_H (for R&D use only)
--- 21 Not in use (LIN bus)
--- 30 Not in use
Connector and pin positions
622
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 513.7 63
Diagram 1
PTO speed 2 PTO speed 1
Diagram 2
Ai34 Po05 Po06

+12V
F R
Clutch
pedal
switch
S9
623
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 513.7 64
Diagram 3
S2E
S2E
X31
624
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 513.8 65
TC2 unit of Direct models (I/O test)


DI 01 Not in use
DI 02 Not in use
DI 03 Not in use
DI 04 NA--- PTO (North American PTO), inductive switch on the PTO shaft (S102) Test also DI 18.
DI 05 Not in use
DI 06 Air conditioning active (compressor), output from air conditioning to relay K3
DI 07 Change--- over switch for front linkage and front loader (S37)
DI 08 Implement up, signal from implement (connector X89, located under the side panel)
DI 09 Front PTO rocker switch, standby position (S16) Test also DI 16.
DI 10 Brake pressure, pressure switch (S46)
DI 11 Hydraulic oil level low limit switch (S54)
DI 12 Power socket rocker switch (S34), the upper switch Test also DI 15.
DI 13 Front lift lifting switch on the front of the tractor (S83)
DI 14 Front lift lowering switch on the front of the tractor (S82)
DI 15 Power socket rocker switch (S34), the upper switch, activation position Test also DI 12.
DI 16 Front PTO rocker switch, starting position (S16) Test also DI 09.
DI 17 Not in use
DI 18 NA--- PTO enabled diagnostics (short to ground diagnosed, S102) Test also DI 04.
DI 19 U--- Pilot rocker switch, ON position (S15) Test also DI 20.
DI 20 U--- Pilot rocker switch, REC position (S15) Test also DI 19.
DI 21 Not in use
DI 22 Not in use
DO 01 U--- Pilot automatics indicator light (in U--- Pilot rocker switch S15)
DO 02 Front PTO START/STOP signal, signal from TC2 to front PTO control unit (A15)
AI 01 Not in use
AI 02 Working hydraulics valve 1, rear mudguard buttons (+), right (S90) and left (S94)
AI 03 Working hydraulics valve 1, rear mudguard buttons (--- ), right (S91) and left (S95)
AI 04 Traction Force Control, setting knob (R2)
AI 05 Speed Balance, setting knob (R3)
AI 06 Not in use
AI 07 Not in use
AI 08 Not in use
PO 01 Pilot pressure for CAN valves of the hydraulics, valves Y35 (front) and Y36 (rear), using relay K5
PO 02 Control of power socket X17 (2--- pole DIN) using relay K13 (control by U--- Pilot), the upper power
socket
625
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 513.8 66

test
DI 04 A2A1/16 NA ---PTO (North American 1 = 21/20---spline PTO shaft 1 = +12 V
PTO). Only in tractors that => the PTO is allowed to 0 = floating
are delivered to North rotate Test also DI 18.
America. 0 = some other PTO shaft
Inductive switch on the => the PTO is not allowed to
PTO shaft (S102) rotate
DI 05 A2A2/15 Not in use
DI 06 A2A2/16 Air conditioning active 0 = relay not energized (AC
(compressor), output from compressor stopped)
air conditioning to relay K3 1 = relay energized (AC
This input is needed for compressor is running)
controlling the electrical 0 = floating, 1 = +12 V
Visco fan of the engine.
DI 07 A2A2/17 Change ---over switch for 0 = side opposite to the The tractor is equipped with this
front linkage and front symbol pressed down (front change ---over switch if both front linkage
loader (S37) loader) and a front loader are installed. Check the
Perform this test even if 1 = symbol side pressed value in both positions of the switch:
the tractor has no down (front linkage) 1 = the switch is in the front linkage
change ---over switch (to 0 = floating position (left side pressed down)
ensure front loader safety). 1 = + 12 V 0 = the switch is in the front loader
position
If the tractor has no change ---over switch,
the values should read as follows:
1 = the tractor is equipped with front
linkage (a wire that connects two poles
replaces the switch)
0 = the tractor is equipped with a front
loader (there is no wire in place of the
switch)
DI 08 A2A2/18 Implement up, signal from 0 = input not active 0 = floating
implement (connector 1 = input active 1=0V
X89, located under the
side panel)
(This input can be used for

surface area measurement
of the Proline instrument
panel)
DI 09 A2A2/19 Front PTO rocker switch, 0 = OFF position 0 = floating
standby position (S16) 1 = middle position or symbol 1 = + 12 V
side pressed down Test also DI 16.
DI 10 A2A2/20 Brake pressure, pressure 1 = brake pedal(s) not
switch (S46) pressed down
0 = brake pedal(s) pressed
down (brake pressure
notified)
0 = floating, 1 = 0 V
626
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 513.8 67

test
DI 11 A2A2/21 Hydraulic oil level low limit 0 = oil level too low 0 = floating
switch (S54) 1 = oil level normal 1=0V
DI 12 A2A2/22 Power socket rocker 0 = side opposite to the 0 = floating
switch (S34), the upper symbol pressed down (OFF) 1 = +12 V
switch 1 = middle position or symbol Test also DI 15.
side pressed down (ON)
DI 13 A2A2/23 Front lift lifting switch on 0 = switch not pressed down 0 = floating
the front of the tractor 1 = switch pressed down 1 = +12 V
(S83)
DI 14 A2A2/24 Front lift lowering switch 0 = switch not pressed down 0 = floating
on the front of the tractor 1 = switch pressed down 1 = +12 V
(S82)
DI 15 A2A2/25 Power socket rocker 1 = symbol side pressed 0 = floating
switch (S34), the upper down 1 = +12 V
switch, activation position 0 = other positions
Test also DI 12.
DI 16 A2A2/26 Front PTO rocker switch, 1 = symbol side pressed 0 = floating
starting position (S16) down 1 = +12 V
0 = other positions Test also DI 09.
DI 18 A2A2/28 NA ---PTO (North American 0 = PTO is allowed to start 0 = +12 V
PTO). Only in tractors that 1 = short to gnd = PTO is not 1=0V
are delivered to North allowed to start Test also DI 04.
America.
Monitoring the switch
S102 fuctioning
DI 19 A2A2/29 U ---Pilot rocker switch, ON 0 = side opposite to symbol 0 = +12 V
position (S15) pressed down (OFF) 1=0V
1 = middle position or symbol Test also DI 20.
side pressed down (ON)
DI 20 A2A2/30 U ---Pilot rocker switch, 1 = symbol side pressed 0 = +12 V
REC position (S15) down (REC) 1=0V
0 = other positions Test also DI 19.
DI 21 Not in use 0
DI 22 Not in use 0
TC2 digital outputs, DO 01 -- DO 02

test
DO 01 A2A1/4 U ---Pilot automatics 1 = the Start the engine. Turn the U ---Pilot activation/recording switch to
indicator light (in indicator light is the OFF position and then to centre position. The indicator light
U ---Pilot rocker on illuminates to indicate that the U ---Pilot is in standby mode.
switch S15) 0 = the
indicator light is
off
DO 02 A2A1/3 Front PTO 0 = output not This test item is for checking the status of the control unit
START/STOP active output.
signal, signal from 1 = output is Start the front PTO.
TC2 to front PTO active
control unit (A15)
627
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 513.8 68
TC2 analog inputs, AI 01 -- AI 08

test
AI 02 A2A1/7 Working hydraulics valve 1, 0 V = switch not pressed 0 = floating
rear mudguard buttons (+), 5 V = switch pressed 1=5V
right (S90) and left (S94) 8 V = short to +12 V (=fault)
Note: The 5 V reference voltage is
supplied by the TC1 control unit.
AI 03 A2A2/1 Working hydraulics valve 1, 0 V = switch not pressed 0 = floating
rear mudguard buttons (---), 5 V = switch pressed 1=5V
right (S91) and left (S95) 8 V = short to +12 V (=fault)
Note: The 5 V reference voltage is
supplied by the TC1 control unit.
AI 04 A2A2/2 Traction Force Control, setting Decreasing voltage, when turning
knob (R2) potentiometer clockwise
Approx. 4.7 V = knob rotated to
minimum position
(anti ---clockwise)
maximum position (clockwise)
AI 05 A2A2/3 Speed Balance, setting knob Decreasing voltage, when turning
(R3) potentiometer clockwise
minimum position
(anti ---clockwise)
maximum position (clockwise)
TC2 proportional outputs, PO 01 -- PO 02

test
PO 01 A2A1/2 Pilot pressure for 0 = no supply Activate the hydraulics.
CAN valves of the 100 = valves
hydraulics, valves are energized
Y35 (front) and Y36 (pilot pressure
(rear), using relay connected)
K5
PO 02 A2A1/1 Control of power 0 = relay not This test item is for checking the status of the control unit output.
socket X17 energized The output only functions when controlled by U ---Pilot
(2 ---pole DIN) using 100 = relay automatics. Record an U ---Pilot program that switches the
relay K13 (control energized output on and off. Run the U ---Pilot program and observe
by U ---Pilot), the whether the status of the output changes according to the
upper power U ---Pilot program.
socket
628
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 514.1 1
UC1 unit of LS models (I/O test)

UC1 (CAN ID 5)

DI 01 DPS push buttons, up
DI 02 DPS push buttons, down
DI 03 Autocontrol switch, transport
DI 04 Autocontrol switch, working
DI 05 Autocontrol switch, middle pos.
DI 06 Powerlift forced lowering
DI 07 U ---Pilot program start / choice
DI 08 Not in use
DI 09 U ---Pilot STOP
DI 10 Cruise control setting RPM switch
DI 11 Cruise control setting km/h switch
DI 12 Cruise STOP
DI 13 Joystick button 1 (control of the change valve 1, the upper
button)
DI 14 Joystick button 2 (control of the change valve 2, the lower
button)
DI 15 Not in use
DI 16 Not in use
DI 17 Not in use
DI 18 Not in use
DI 19 Not in use
DI 20 Not in use
DO 01 U ---Pilot led
DO 02 Not in use
AI 01 Powerlift position knob
AI 02 Hydraulic joystick, Direction 1 (forward / backwards)
AI 03 Hydraulic joystick, Direction 2 (left / right)
AI 04 Hydraulic lever 3
AI 06 Hydraulic lever 3F
AI 08 Not in use
FI 01 Not in use
FI 02 Not in use
PO 01 Not in use
PO 02 Not in use
629
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 514.1 2
UC1 digital inputs

out
the test
DI 01 DPS push button, up 1 = Button pressed
Connector A3A1/13
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
DI 02 DPS push button, 1 = Button pressed
down
Connector A3A1/14
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
DI 03 Autocontrol switch, 1 = Switch in transport pos. (the black side)
transport 0 = Other positions
Connector A3A1/15
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
DI 04 Autocontrol switch, 1 = Switch in working pos. (the side with a label)
working 0 = Other positions
Connector A3A1/16
0 = Floating
1 = +12V
DI 05 Autocontrol switch, 1 = Middle position
middle pos. 0 = Other positions
Connector A3A2/15
0 = Floating
1= +12 V
DI 06 Powerlift forced 1 = Button pressed
lowering
Connector A3A2/16
0 = Floating
1 = +12V
DI 07 U ---Pilot program start / 1 = Button pressed
choice
Connector A3A2/17
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
DI 08 Not in use Always 0, Connector A3A2/18
DI 09 U ---Pilot STOP 1 = Button up
0 = Button pressed
Connector A3A2/19
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
DI 10 Cruise control setting 1 = Button pressed
RPM switch
Connector A3A2/20
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
km/h switch
Connector A3A2/21
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
630
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 514.1 3

the test
DI 12 Cruise STOP button 1 = Button up
0 = Button pressed
Connector A3A2/22
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
DI 13 Joystick button 1 1 = Button pressed When pressing
(control of the change the button you
valve 1, the upper Connector A3A2/23 should hear a
button) 0 = Floating sound from the
1 = +12 V (When pressing the button the relay K20 gives +12 V relay K20
to the connector X81/1)
(control of the change the button you
valve 2, the lower Connector A3A2/24 should hear a
button) 0 = Floating sound from the
1 = 0 V (When pressing the button the relay K22 gives +12 V to relay K22
the connector X81/5)
UC1 Digital outputs

the test
DO 01 U ---Pilot led 1 = The led illuminates Start the
engine,
Connector A3A1/4 Activate the
0=0V U ---Pilot (move
1 = +12 V the U ---Pilot
rocker switch to
the middle
position)
DO 02 Not in use Always 0, Connector A3A1/3
UC1 analog inputs

the test
AI 01 Powerlift position knob 0 V = Pos. 0
5 V = Pos. 10
Connector A3A1/6
The voltage is increasing from Pos. 0 to Pos. 10
AI 02 Hydraulic joystick, ~ 1,2 V = ---100 % ~ 0,5 V = --- max position
Direction 1 ~ 2,5 V = 0 %
(Forward / Backwards) ~ 3,9 V = + 100 % ~ 4,5 V = + max position
Connector A3A1/7
The voltage is decreasing away from the driver (forward)
(Left / Right) ~ 3,9 V = + 100 % ~ 4,5 V = + max position
Connector A3A2/1
The voltage is decreasing away from the driver (to the right)
631
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 514.1 4

the test
AI 04 Hydraulic lever 3 ~ 1,5 V = ---100 % ~ 0,5 V = --- max position
~ 2,5 V = 0 %
~ 3,6 V = + 100 % ~ 4,5 V = + max position
Connector A3A2/2
The voltage is decreasing away from the driver (downwards)
~ 2,5 V = 0 %
~ 3,6 V = + 100 % ~ 4,5 V = + max position
Connector A3A2/3
AI 06 Hydraulic lever 3F ~ 1,5 V = ---100 % ~ 0,5 V = --- max position
~ 2,5 V = 0 %
~ 3,6 V = + 100 % ~ 4,5 V = + max position
Connector A3A2/4
~ 2,5 V = 0 %
~ 3,6 V = + 100 % ~ 4,5 V = + max position
Connector A3A2/5
AI 08 Not in use Always 0, Connector A3A2/6
UC1 frequency inputs

the test
FI 02 Not in use Always 0, Connector A3A2/10
UC1 proportional outputs

Multitool Name Value Carrying ---out
out
the test
PO 01 Not in use Always 0, Connector A3A1/2
632
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 514.2 5
TT unit of LS, Versu and Direct models (I/O test)

TT, FII / N (CAN-- ID 40)

TT MultiTool Description of the test item
display
--- DI 01 Left arrow button
--- DI 02 Hydraulics activation button
--- DI 03 OK button
--- DI 04 Down arrow button
--- DI 05 Up arrow button
--- DI 06 Right arrow button
--- DI 07 ESC button
--- DO 01 Indicator light of the activation switch
--- AI 01 Left rotary setting switch
--- AI 02 Right rotary setting switch
DI 02
DO 01
DI 05
DI 03
DI 06
AI 01 AI 02 DI 01 DI 04 DI 07
633
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 LS models 514.2 6
Testing the TT control unit buttons, DI 01 -- DI 07

TT Multi --- Description 1 on display 0 on display Performing the test
display Tool
--- DI 01 Left arrow button Button pressed Button not MultiTool:
down pressed down This test item is for checking
g the
contact
t t between
b t th
the control
t l unitit
--- DI 02 Hydraulics activation button Button pressed Button not
and the button.
down pressed down
--- DI 03 OK button Button pressed Button not The display shows the status of
down pressed down the electric connection: 1 or 0.
--- DI 04 Down arrow button Button pressed Button not
down pressed down
--- DI 05 Up arrow button Button pressed Button not
down pressed down
--- DI 06 Right arrow button Button pressed Button not
down pressed down
--- DI 07 ESC button Button pressed Button not
down pressed down
Testing the TT control unit outputs, DO 01

TT Multi --- Description 1 on 0 on Performing the test
display Tool display display
--- DO 01 Indicator light of Light on Light off MultiTool:
the activation During I/O testing, the status of the output changes
switch continuously from 0 to 1 and back. The indicator light
blinks in the same rhythm with the status changes.
When the test mode has been activated, the

activation button does not function. The blinking of
the indicator light is an indication of the test mode of
the tractor terminal, during which tractor terminal
buttons do not function normally.
Testing the signals of the TT control unit setting switches , AI 01 -- AI 02

TT Multi --- Description Value Performing the test
display Tool
--- AI 01 Left rotary setting Position Value MultiTool:
switch 1 0.4 (0.3---0.5) The voltage value indicates the position of the
2 0.8 (0.7---0.9) setting switch. Check the value in all switch
3 1.2 (1.1---1.3) positions. The value increases when the switch
is turned clockwise.
--- AI 02 Right rotary setting Position Value MultiTool:
switch 1 0.4 (0.3---0.5) The voltage value indicates the position of the
2 0.8 (0.7---0.9) setting switch. Check the value in all switch
3 1.2 (1.1---1.3) positions. The value increases when the switch
4 1.6 (1.5---1.7) is turned clockwise.
5 2.0 (1.9---2.1)
6 2.9 (2.78 ---2.98)
634
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 514.3 7
UC1 unit of Versu models (I/O test)
UC1 (CAN ID 5)

DI 01 Powershift push button, up
DI 02 Powershift push button, down
DI 06 Powerlift forced lowering button
DI 07 U ---Pilot program engage/pause button
DI 08 Not in use
DI 09 U ---Pilot STOP button
DI 10 Cruise control setting RPM button
DI 11 Cruise control setting km/h button
DI 12 Cruise OFF button
DI 13 Joystick button 1 (control of the change valve 1, the
upper button)
lower button)
DI 15 HiShift button (under the armrest)
DI 16 Hand throttle lever, switch in min. pos.
DI 17 Not in use
DI 18 Hand throttle lever, switch in max. pos.
DI 19 Not in use
DI 20 Not in use
DI 21 Not in use
DI 22 Not in use
DO 01 U ---Pilot indicator light on the engage/pause button

DO 02 Not in use

AI 08 Hand throttle lever
FI 01 Not in use
FI 02 Not in use
PO 01 Not in use
PO 02 Not in use
635
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 514.3 8
UC1 digital inputs

out
the test
DI 01 Powershift push 1 = Button pressed
buttons, up (S2A) Connector A3A1/13
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
DI 02 Powershift push 1 = Button pressed
buttons, down (S3A) Connector A3A1/14
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
transport pos. (S1A) 0 = Other positions
Connector A3A1/15
0 = Floating
1=0V
working pos. (S1A) 0 = Other positions
Connector A3A1/16
0 = Floating
1=0V
middle pos. (S1A) 0 = Other positions
Connector A3A2/15
0 = Floating
1= 0 V
lowering button (S4A) Connector A3A2/16
0 = Floating
1 = +12V
DI 07 U ---Pilot program 1 = Button pressed
engage/pause button Connector A3A2/17
(S5A) 0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
DI 09 U ---Pilot STOP button 1 = Button up
(S6A) 0 = Button pressed
Connector A3A2/19
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
RPM button (S7A) Connector A3A2/20
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
km/h button (S8A) Connector A3A2/21
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
636
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 514.3 9

the test
DI 12 Cruise OFF button 1 = Button up
Connector A3A2/22
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
(control of the change Connector A3A2/23 the button you
valve 1, the upper 0 = Floating should hear a
button) (R1A) 1 = 0 V (When pressing the button the relay K7 gives +12 V to sound from the
the connector X80/1) relay K7

valve 2, the lower 0 = Floating should hear a
DI 15 HiShift button (S14A) 1 = Button pressed

Connector A3A2/25
DI 16 Hand throttle lever 1 = Lever at rear position (min. pos.)
(R7A) 0 = Other position
Connector A3A2/26
DI 18 Hand throttle lever 0 = Lever at front position (max. pos.)
(R7A) 1 = Other position
Connector A3A2/28
DI 21 Not in use Always 0
UC1 digital outputs

the test
DO 01 U ---Pilot indicator light 1 = The led illuminates when a recorded U ---Pilot program runs. Record a
on the engage/pause Connector A3A1/4 simple U ---Pilot
button (S5A) 0=0V program. Run
1 = +12 V the program.
637
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Versu 514.3 10
UC1 analog inputs

the test
(R6A) 5 V = Pos. 10
Connector A3A1/6
(forward / backwards) ~ 3,9 V = + 100 % ~ 4,5 V = + max position
(R1A) Connector A3A1/7
(left / right) (R1A) ~ 3,9 V = + 100 % ~ 4,5 V = + max position
Connector A3A2/1
AI 04 Hydraulic lever 3 (R2A) ~ 1,5 V = ---100 % ~ 0,5 V = --- max position
~ 2,5 V = 0 %
~ 3,6 V = + 100 % ~ 4,5 V = + max position
Connector A3A2/2
~ 2,5 V = 0 %
~ 3,6 V = + 100 % ~ 4,5 V = + max position
Connector A3A2/3
(R4A) ~ 2,5 V = 0 %
~ 3,6 V = + 100 % ~ 4,5 V = + max position
Connector A3A2/4
~ 2,5 V = 0 %
~ 3,6 V = + 100 % ~ 4,5 V = + max position
Connector A3A2/5
AI 08 Hand throttle lever ~ 0,45 V = Lever at rear position (min. pos.)
(R7A) ~ 4,5 V = Lever at front position (max. pos.)
Connector A3A2/6

the test

out
the test
638
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 514.4 11
UC1 unit of Direct models (I/O test)
UC1 (CAN ID 5)

DI 01 Cruise control button, +
DI 02 Cruise control button, ---
DI 06 Powerlift forced lowering button
DI 07 U ---Pilot program engage/pause button
DI 08 Not in use
DI 09 U ---Pilot STOP button
DI 10 Cruise control setting km/h switch 2 (KMH2)
DI 11 Cruise control setting km/h switch 1 (KMH1)
DI 12 Cruise OFF button
upper button)
lower button)
DI 15 RangeShift button (under the armrest)
DI 16 Transmission adjustment lever, switch in min. pos.
DI 17 Not in use
DI 18 Transmission adj. lever, switch in max. pos.
DI 19 Not in use
DI 20 Not in use
DI 21 Not in use
DI 22 Not in use
DO 01 U ---Pilot indicator light on the engage/pause button

DO 02 Not in use

AI 08 Transmission adjustment lever
FI 01 Not in use
FI 02 Not in use
PO 01 Not in use
PO 02 Not in use
639
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 514.4 12
UC1 digital inputs

out
the test
DI 01 Cruise control 1 = Button pressed
button, + (S2A) Connector A3A1/13
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
DI 02 Cruise control 1 = Button pressed
button, --- (S3A) Connector A3A1/14
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
transport pos. (S1A) 0 = Other positions
Connector A3A1/15
0 = Floating
1=0V
working pos. (S1A) 0 = Other positions
Connector A3A1/16
0 = Floating
1=0V
middle pos. (S1A) 0 = Other positions
Connector A3A2/15
0 = Floating
1= 0 V
lowering button (S4A) Connector A3A2/16
0 = Floating
1 = +12V
DI 07 U ---Pilot program 1 = Button pressed
engage/pause button Connector A3A2/17
(S5A) 0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
DI 09 U ---Pilot STOP button 1 = Button up
Connector A3A2/19
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
km/h switch 2 (S7A) Connector A3A2/20
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
km/h switch 1 (S8A) Connector A3A2/21
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
640
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 514.4 13

the test
DI 12 Cruise OFF button 1 = Button up
Connector A3A2/22
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
valve 1, the upper 0 = Floating should hear a

valve 2, the lower 0 = Floating should hear a
DI 15 RangeShift button 1 = Button pressed

(S14A) Connector A3A2/25
DI 16 Transmission 1 = Lever at rear position (min. pos.)
adjustment lever (R7A) 0 = Other position
Connector A3A2/26
DI 18 Transmission 0 = Lever at front position (max. pos.)
adjustment lever (R7A) 1 = Other position
Connector A3A2/28
UC1 digital outputs

the test
DO 01 U ---Pilot indicator light 1 = The led illuminates when a recorded U ---Pilot program runs. Record a
on the engage/pause Connector A3A1/4 simple U ---Pilot
button (S5A) 0=0V program. Run
1 = +12 V the program.
641
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 514.4 14
UC1 analog inputs

the test
(R6A) 5 V = Pos. 10
Connector A3A1/6
(forward / backwards) ~ 3,9 V = + 100 % ~ 4,5 V = + max position
(R1A) Connector A3A1/7
(left / right) (R1A) ~ 3,9 V = + 100 % ~ 4,5 V = + max position
Connector A3A2/1
~ 2,5 V = 0 %
~ 3,6 V = + 100 % ~ 4,5 V = + max position
Connector A3A2/2
~ 2,5 V = 0 %
~ 3,6 V = + 100 % ~ 4,5 V = + max position
Connector A3A2/3
(R4A) ~ 2,5 V = 0 %
~ 3,6 V = + 100 % ~ 4,5 V = + max position
Connector A3A2/4
~ 2,5 V = 0 %
~ 3,6 V = + 100 % ~ 4,5 V = + max position
Connector A3A2/5
AI 08 Transmission ~ 0,45 V = Lever at rear position (min. pos.)
adjustment lever ~ 4,5 V = Lever at front position (max. pos.)
(R7A)) Connector A3A2/6

the test

out
the test
642
Model Code Page
51. TESTMODE FII AND I/O TESTS LS, Versu,
19.2.2010 Direct 515.1 1
UC2 unit of LS, Versu and Direct models (I/O test)

UC2, the control unit for the reverse drive controls, TwinTrac (CAN-- ID 6)
DI 01 Clutch pedal limit switch
DI 02 Seat direction switch
DI 03 Not in use
DI 04 Rear DPS pre ---programming push button
DI 05 Rear lever direction R. Reed relay
DI 06 Rear lever direction F. Reed relay
DI 07 Rear lever parking brake. Reed relay
DI 08 Not in use
DI 09 Not in use
DI 10 Not in use
DI 11 Not in use
DI 12 Not in use
DI 13 Not in use
DI 14 Not in use
DI 15 Not in use
DI 16 Not in use
DI 17 Not in use
DI 18 Not in use
DI 19 Not in use
DI 20 Rear brake pedal limit switch
DO 01 Not in use
DO 02 Rear steering wheel preventing valve
AI 01 Not in use
AI 02 Signal voltage of the rear clutch pedal position sensor
AI 03 Not in use
AI 04 Not in use
AI 05 Not in use
AI 06 Not in use
AI 07 Not in use
AI 08 Not in use
FI 01 Not in use
FI 02 Not in use
PO 01 Not in use
PO 02 Not in use
643
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 515.1 2
UC2 digital inputs

out
the test
DI 1 Clutch pedal limit 1 = Pedal pressed fully down
switch
Connector A1W1/13
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
DI 2 Seat direction switch 1 = Seat rearwards
0 = Other directions
Connector A1W1/14
0 = Floating
1=0V
DI 3 Not in use Always 0, Connector A1W1/15
DI 4 Rear DPS 1 = Button depressed
pre ---programming
push button Connector A1W1/16
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
DI 5 Rear lever direction R. 1 = R direction selected (lever against the rear window)
Reed relay
Connector A1W2/15
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
DI 6 Rear lever direction F. 1 = F direction selected (lever against the the driver)
Reed relay
Connector A1W2/16
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
DI 7 Rear lever parking 1 = P position selected
brake. Reed relay
Connector A1W2/17
0 = Floating
1 = +12 V
DI 20 Rear brake pedal limit 1 = Pedal pressed fully down
switch
Connector A1W2/30
0 = floating
1=0V
644
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 515.1 3
UC2 digital outputs

out
the test
DO 1 Not in use Always 0, Connector A1W1/4
DO 2 Rear steering wheel 1 = valve energized Turn the seat
preventing valve 0 = valve not energized (rear steering wheel can be used)
Connector A1W1/3
0 = 0 V = valve open
1 = +12 V = valve closed
UC2 analog inputs

the test
AI 01 Not in use Always 0, Connector A1W1/6
AI 02 Signal voltage of the Clutch pedal fully up, signal between 0,3...2,4 V.
rear clutch pedal Pedal in bottom, signal between 2,5...4,7 V.
position sensor
Connector A1W1/7
Voltage is increasing as the pedal is pressed

the test
FI 01 Not in use Always 0, Connector A1W2/8
FI 02 Not in use Always 0, Connector A1W2/10
Multitool Name Carrying ---out

out
the test
PO 01 Not in use Always 0, Connector A1W1/2
PO 02 Not in use Always 0, Connector A1W1/1
645
Model Code Page
19.2.2010 Direct 515.1 4
646
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 520 1
Contents
52 MultiTool:
521.1 . . . General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
521.2 . . . Buttons and their functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
521.3 . . . Valtra MultiTool start---up,
choosing the language and adjustment of the brightness of the display. . . . . . . . . . 7
521.4 . . . Use of the MultiTool Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
521.5 . . . Loading a MultiTool software package to the memory card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
521.6 . . . Settings of the engine control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
521.7 . . . CAN ---ID setting to control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
521.8 . . . SOFTWARE UPDATE:Tractor models C, M, T and other models with EEM engine 23
521.9 . . . SOFTWARE UPDATE:Tractor models HiTech and X, that have not EEM engine . . 29
521.10 . . I/O test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
521.11 . . CAN bus testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
521.12 . . EEM2 testing and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
521.13 . . Basic settings of tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
521.14 . . Service of LS hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
647
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 520 2
648
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.1 1
Valtra MultiTool
General description
Parts:
The MultiTool and basic equipment can be ordered by separate part numbers or by using package numbers.
Package 36000300 Incl. MultiTool and necessary equipment, no protection case
Package 36000400 Incl. MultiTool and necessary equipment, with protection case
1. Service terminal (35677600)

Valtra has established the Valtra MultiTool service terminal
for servicing and updating of Valtra tractors. MultiTool can
be used for Valtra tractors that are equipped with an electri-
cal engine control system and/or electrical transmission
control system i.e. for all HiTech, C, M, S, T and Mezzo/
Mega EEM models.
MultiTool is small and compact. It can be easily fastened to

a tractor by means of an adjustable arm (e.g. to the door
hand grip). MultiTool is simple and logical. A very important
design principle has been it’s easy & reliable use. MultiTool
has some properties that PC’s do not have, e.g. two CAN
bus lines. MultiTool does not have any internal batteries but
it uses a power supply from the 3---pin power socket of the
tractor.
2. . Memory card
empty card (35168510).
programmed card (35990100).
card adapter (35168600)
Memory cards are available either empty or programmed.

For a MultiTool memory card with software, the memory
card must be connected with an adapter to the MultiTool s
card slot. The newest service software must always be
saved to the card. Valtra has chosen an industrial type
memory card made by SanDisk corporation. This type is
especially designed for heavy industrial use e.g. it endures
low temperatures. The memory capacity of the card is 32
megabytes.
Industrial type memory card, properties: (card type marking
SDCFBI ---32---201---80).
--- temperature range: ---40ºC...+85ºC
--- endures power cuts
--- checks and repairs memory faults automatically
--- each card has been individually tested
--- endures many writing times (about 2 million times)
--- endures vibration better than ”camera memory cards”
--- long guarantee time
3. MultiTool cable (35660430)

There are many connections on the MultiTool cable: power
plug, 25---pin connector to MultiTool, a connector to the
tractor diagnostic connector X43 (on side panel), a green
connector to control unit’s RS ---line (for CAN ---ID setting),
and yellow CAN2 connector for prospective functions.
649
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.1 2
4. Power supply adapter (35841300).

When MultiTool is used elsewhere than in a tractor this
adapter is needed. The adapters other end must be con-
nected to the MultiTool cable (35660430) and the other end
to a power supply (35368700).
5. Power supply (35368700).

This is used together with the power supply adapter
(35841300) when power is taken from 230VAC power
socket.
6. Holder (35791000).
This part comes with the MultiTool (35677600). This is also
available separately as a spare part. With this adjustable
holder the MultiTool can be fixed and adjusted in a position
where the display is easily readable.
7. Clamp (35791200).
This part comes with the MultiTool (35677600). This is also
available separately as a spare part. With this clamp the
MultiTool can be attached to the tractor’s door handle.
8. Protection case (35841400).

External diameters are approx 46 x 34 x 16 cm. The case
has been designed for the MultiTool and for equipment.
Padding for the case must be ordered separately.
9. Padding for the case (35909300).

This has been designed specially for the MultiTool and for
necessary equipment. It has also storage slots for e.g.
many memory cards. .
10. A cable for S series (35775300).

This cable can be connected to X70 connector. It is also
possible to measure resistances and voltages of CAN bus
lines by this cable.
650
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.2 3
Buttons and their functions:
When the ignition key has been turned back to the ON

position the MultiTool returns to the Main Menu..
ESC:
--- exit from applications
--- opening additional menus
ARROW BUTTONS:
--- moving on the display
--- opening and closing of folders
--- choosing values
ENTER:
--- starting applications
--- acceptance of selections
ESC:
Application nr.1, exit from applications:

Long press: By pressing ESC a long time you may exit
from the actual application to the Main Menu.
In some applications a direction window appears and asks
you to switch power off for five (5) seconds. Follow the in-
struction.
651
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.2 4
Application nr.2, Opening additional menus: Application nr 3, Leaving a function:

Short press: By pressing ESC momentarily you may get an Short press: By pressing ESC momentarily you may exit
additional menu in some applications. There you may start from selection screens or from additional menus that are
additional functions or watch for example more information. open. By pressing ESC momentarily you may also abort
For example in software loading application more informa- some functions that are going on, for example connection
tion can be got ”Information” and ”System log” as follows: to the tractor (if connection to tractor does not succeed).
Start the application ”Update C, M, T or other EEM mo- However try to avoid the aborting of programming applica-
dels”. Choose the correct tractor model. After that the Multi- tions.
Tool looks for Information from the control units. After that
you get an extra menu by pressing ESC button momentar-
ily.
A long ESC press would return the MultiTool back to the

main menu line where the cursor was before starting the
applica-
Choose for example ”Information”. tion.
Accept by pressing Enter.
The ”Information” window will open.
.
Open the folder ”+ Module identification (CAN ---ID) 4” by
pressing the arrow to the right.
A list opens. All information from the control unit CAN ---ID 4
(TC2) can be seen there.
Information about the other control units can be seen the

same way.
652
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.2 5
ENTER:
Application 1, Starting applications:
The unopened menu lines can be opened by going on one
of the lines and pressing the right arrow key, e.g. on the line
’+ Software’
You may start applications by the Enter button. Applications

are those lines on the Main Menu that do not have a plus
(+) or a minus (---) mark on the beginning of the line.
Application 2, Acceptance of selections:

In applications the selected values are accepted by pres-
sing the Enter button.
ARROW BUTTONS:
By pressing the arrow down you can go on the line you

want to start.
Application nr. 1, Moving on the display: The cursor

can be moved to up or down by arrow buttons, in some
applications also to left or right.
Application nr. 2, Opening and closing of folders:
Right:
In front of the unopened menu line there is a plus (+) mark.

The menu line can be opened by going on it and pressing The selected application is started by pressing the Enter
the arrow to the right (for example on the line ”+ TRACTOR button.
TOOLS”). Left:
It works in reverse order than the right arrow key. By this

button menus can be closed one by one, and minus (---)
mark changes to plus (+) mark.
Application nr. 3, Choosing values:

Up/Down:
Below the menu line appears more unopened menu lines

with + marks. Note that now there is minus (---) mark on the
line ’ --- TRACTOR TOOLS’.
In some applications this is used to change numerical va-

lues e.g. in the application ”Set CAN ---ID to a control unit”.
653
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.2 6
The CAN ---ID can be chosen by pressing arrow up or

down. Then the selection screen is yellow. When CAN ---ID
is accepted by the Enter button the selection screen be-
comes blue and choosing can not be done anymore.
After that pressing the arrow down moves the blue cursor
down where you may choose in this case ”KWPLoader.s19”
by pressing the Enter button.
654
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.3 7
Valtra MultiTool start ---up, choosing the

language and adjustment of the bright-
ness of the display
1. Start-- up, all models except S230-- 280
1.1 Put the memory card to the MultiTool (there must be
a software package on the memory card).
1.2 Connect the MultiTool to the tractor‘s diagnostic con-
nector X43.
1.3 Connect the connector housing ’PWR’ to the tractor‘s
3---pin power socket.
1.4 Turn ignition key ON.
Note! If the MultiTool does not start, make sure that the
memory card is in the MultiTool before you connect the
cable to the 3---pin power socket.
After that the MultiTool starts and tries to create a connec-

tion to tractor. Next the MultiTool asks you to enter the chas-
sis number of the tractor. Read it from the tractor’s type
plate, write it on the window by the arrow buttons. (If the
MultiTool finds the tractor no. from the tractor by itself the
numbers appears in the window automatically.)
Note. The tractor number must be entered because the
MultiTool needs it to make the ’log file’ (like a record). The
log file can be used e.g. in problem cases even afterwards
since it is saved on the memory card. The log file can also
be sent e.g. by e ---mail to Valtra.
The MultiTool also tries to save the tractor no. to the tractor
so that the tractor could tell the number to the MultiTool
when servicing the tractor next time.
1. Start-- up, S 230-- 280
1.1 Put the memory card to the MultiTool (there must be

a software package on the memory card).
1.2 Connect S ---series cable 35775300 to the tractor‘s
diagnostic connector X70. After that connect the Multi-
Tool with it‘s own cable end to the earlier cable.
1.3 Connect the connector housing ’PWR’ to the tractor‘s
3---pin power socket.
1.4 Turn ignition key ON.
Note! If the MultiTool does not start, make sure that the
memory card is in the MultiTool before you connect the
cable to the 3---pin power socket!
Press Enter.
2. Choosing the MultiTool language (Pass this

article if language is already correct)
After the MultiTool start---up you are on the MultiTool Main
Menu. Move the cursor, if it is not already on the ”Lan-
guage” ---line.
655
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.3 8
Menu opens.
Press Enter. The MultiTool ---language ---menu opens. Move

the cursor on the line where the right language is situated.
Move the cursor on the line ’MultiTool settings’.
Open ”MultiTool ---settings” --- menu by pressing the arrow
to the right.
Move the cursor on the line ”Adjust the display”.
Press Enter. The MultiTool goes back to the Main Menu and
the language is the one you chose. Applications will work
with that language (those applications that have been trans-
Press Enter.
lated, other applications are in English).
You can adjust the brightness of the display by the arrow
3. Adjustment of the brightness of the display buttons (right/left).
Go to the line ”MultiTool ---SYSTEM” and press arrow to
right to open the menu.
When the brightness is correct press Enter. The MultiTool

returns to the Main Menu.
Press the right arrow key.
656
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.4 9
Use of the MultiTool Main Menu:

There is a ’plus’ mark in front of the unopened folders. Then
you know that there is more in the folder.
It can be opened by pressing the arrow to the right.
The folder ’Software’ opens.
When you push arrow to the right the folder will open and
the ’plus’ mark (+) changes to ’minus’ mark (---), and a
submenu opens.
Move the cursor on the line where the required application

is situated (now ”Update C, M, T or other EEM models”).
So, there are no (+) or (---) character in front of the applica-
tion line.
Closing of folders:
Folder can be closed by pushing the arrow to the left in any
line. Then the minus (---) changes to plus (+) again.
If a folder contains unopened lower folders (like earlier), the

plus mark is in front of them again. Then you have to go on
the line where the required folder is situated, by pressing
the arrow button down (now for example ”Software”).
657
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.4 10
Start the application by pressing Enter.
Now the chosen application will start.
Leaving applications:
You may leave any application and return to the MultiTool
Main menu by pressing ESC for a long time.
658
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.5 11
Loading a MultiTool software package to

4. Choose the drive (by double ---click) where the memory
the memory card. card is situated. (Mostly Removable Disk E: ). MAKE SURE
Take care that there are two latest software versions on your THAT YOU CHOOSE THE CORRECT DISK DRIVE!!
memory cards! It means that always when you get a new
software version, put it to the card where the oldest version
is. By doing so you always have also the previous version
with you in the field, just in case it is required.
Version 1.2.0.0 Version 1.3.0.0
5. Choose from the pull---down menu: Edit, Select All.
Press the DELETE --- button (on the keyboard). After that
Windows asks ”Are you sure you want to delete these xx
items?” Choose ”Yes”.
Version 1.4.0.0 Version 1.5.0.0

Tip: It is beneficial to attach a paper sticker to a memory
card where the version number can be written, for example
v1.3.0.0
QUICK INSTRUCTION:
1. Find a memory card where the oldest MultiTool software After that a question may appear: ”The file xxxxxx is a
package is saved. read --- only file. Are you sure you want to delete it ?”
2. Set the card to a computer. Delete all the files and folders Choose ”Yes to All”
on the memory card.
3. Save the newest program package to the memory card
(from e ---mail, from Valtra Service Bulletin databank or from
CD ---disc).
4. Extract the program package to the memory card.
5. Take the memory card from the computer (at first switch
off the memory card by the Windows command ”Unplug or
eject hardware”
When the memory card is empty, close the Windows win-
dow.
DETAILED INSTRUCTION: 6. Open your mail where the newest MultiTool--- software is
1 .Start the computer which has a place for a memory card attached.
or an offline adapter. Note! A software package can also be taken from other
2. Place the memory card in the computer. places: From Valtra Service Bulletin databank or from CD
---disc.
TThis example has been done for Lotus Notes mail soft-
ware. Users of other mail software, refer to the instructions
made for that e ---mail software .
7. Double ---click the attachment file. Choose ”Detach”.
3. Start the application ”My Computer” on the Windows

desktop
659
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.5 12
8. Choose the drive where the memory card is situated. In 13. To the point ”Extract to:” choose the drive where the
this case, as it mostly is, ”Removable Disk E:” and press memory card is situated, now e:\. Press ”Extract”.
”Detach”. Now the MultiTool software package is copied
from mail to the memory card.
Extraction of the software package takes a few minutes.

The Window looks like this:
Exit from your e ---mail software.
9. Start the application ”My Computer” on the Windows
desktop.
10. Choose the drive (by double ---clicking) where the mem- When the window closes the programs have been saved
ory card is situated. (Mostly removable Disk E: ). on the memory card to the right places. Close the Winzip ---
window.
14. Remove the memory card safely by clicking the card
icon on the lower right corner on the Windows desktop
screen.
11. Choose the software package just saved (For example

MultiTool _v1.3.0.0.zip) on the drive where the memory card
is situated (by double clicking the mouse s left button).
Choose ”Stop xxx Mass Storage Device --- Drive(E:)”,
where E: is the drive where the memory card is situated.
Wait until Windows gives the message ”The ‘xxx Storage

Device‘ device can now be safely removed from the sys-
tem.
12. WinZip software will start.
Choose OK.
Choose the command ”Extract”.. Now you may remove the memory card from the computer.
POINTERS FOR POSSIBLE PROBLEMS

Loading a MultiTool software package to memory card
does not succeed or MultiTool does not start.
---> Clear out the memory card and load the software pack-
age to the card.
If still the same problem ---> Format the memory card and
load the software package to the card.
660
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.5 13
How to format a memory card: Formatting begins...

1. Choose ”My Computer”.
6. When the formatting process is ready you will see the

message ”Format complete”. Choose OK.
2. With the mouse’s left button choose the drive where the 7. This window appears again. Close it by choosing
memory card is situated (for example ”Removable Disk ”Close”.
E:”). Click the mouse’s right button at the same place.
MAKE SURE THAT YOU CHOOSE CORRECT DISK
DRIVE!!
3. Choose ”Format”.
8. Load the newest MultiTool software package to the mem-
ory card according to the instruction above.
4. Choose the ”File system” to ”FAT” (not FAT32).
5. A message appears. Choose OK if you are sure that you

want to clear and format the memory card.
661
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.5 14
662
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.6 15
Settings of the engine control unit

You must make settings to the engine control unit in the
following cases:
---when you have fixed a new EEM fuel injection pump
(VP30, VP44)
---when you have fixed a new engine control unit EC
---when you have fixed optional equipment that affects the
engine (Cruise control, Control stop)
Settings to the engine control unit can be made via CAN

bus via the X43 diagnostic socket. More detailed instruction
to connect the MultiTool to the tractor is in a separate
chapter of this manual.

The MultiTool begins to make connection to the engine
control unit via CAN bus.
Note! There is only CAN bus connection, not RS wires as

on the other control units. It means that the CAN bus must
Move the cursor to the line ’TRACTOR TOOLS’. be in order to make it possible to make a connection to the
engine control unit.
Open the folder by pressing the right arrow key.

Move the cursor to the line ’EEM engine’.
Note. If MultiTool can not make a connection to the engine
controller the picture above stays on the display. Turn the
ignition switch to the off position for a few seconds and
then back to the ON position. If there is still a problem it is
better to exit from the application by switching the MultiTool
off (disconnect the MultiTool cable from the 3 pin power
socket).
Check that the CAN bus on the tractor works all right.
Check also that CAN bus is connected to the right pins on
X43 connector housing. CAN Hi (yellow) to pin no. 1, CAN
Lo (green) to pin no. 2.
By using a multimeter measure the resistance between pins
no. 1 and 2 (ignition switch on off position). The resistance
must be about 60 ohm, in Mezzo/Mega EEM about 120
ohm.
Open the folder by pressing the right arrow key.
Move the cursor to the line ’EEM2 engine tool (VP pump)’.
663
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.6 16
When the connection is ready the window is as follows. Change the value by the up/down arrow keys to number 5.
There you can see the settings that are now in the engine Do not press the Enter key.
control unit.
Move the black cursor to the right on the number 1.
Change the value by up/down arrow keys to number 5.
Make sure that the settings are made according to a

separate instruction table.
Note. Use of other values than given on the table is strictly
forbidden. If somebody violates this prohibition he/she
takes all responsibilities concerning risks of safety and viol- Press Enter.
ations against laws. In those cases Valtra will not take any Now the value is saved to the memory of the engine control
responsibility. unit, and the line becomes blue.
By means of settings on this display we tell to the engine
control unit what kind of tractor it is connected to and how it
should work in that tractor. There are differences in func-
tions and electrical connections between tractor models.
Making and changing settings:

Other settings can be made by the same way.
Note. When a line is blue you may choose one of the lines
by moving the cursor up or down.
Settings, meaning and instructions:
When a line is yellow you may change the value on the line
and accept it by pressing Enter.
Max vehicle speed(km/h):
By this setting we limit the maximum driving speed. This
Move the cursor (blue bar) by up/down arrow keys to the value must be set only on models Mezzo EEM and Mega
line where you want to go to change something, e.g. to the EEM. On other models this information comes from other
line ’Control system ID’. control units via CAN bus
In this case we change the Control system ID AC61 (AC6.1)
to AC55 (AC5.5).
Tractor’s nominal Max driving speed
speed (enter this value) Note. When making this setting you must abide by the
30 km/h 33 established law in the country concerned.
40 km/h 43
50 km/h 53
Max eng speed when bus defective (rpm):

When you are on the right line press Enter. By this setting we set the limit for the engine speed for
cases when there is malfunction on the CAN bus. If the
The colour of the cursor becomes yellow that means that engine control unit does not receive information about the
you may change the value on that line. driving speed via the CAN bus the limitation of max driving
speed can not work properly.
This means that we limit engine speed so that the max driv-
ing speed can not raise over the max limit if the CAN bus is
not working properly.
Trying to raise the engine max speed by means of this set-
ting is strictly forbidden.
Move the black cursor by the left/right arrow keys on the
number 6. Control System ID:
By this setting we tell to the engine control unit what control
system there is used in the tractor concerned. E.G. setting
AC24 means AC2.4 control system.
This setting has been designed for safety reasons. E.G. if
you send HiTech software (AC5.4) to an M series tractor
(AC5.5) the TC1 control unit sends different information to
the engine controller than we have told to the engine con-
troller, and the engine does not start.
If this setting is wrong the engine does not start.
664
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.6 17
Pulse transitions/m: Active error indication via oil pressure lamp:

By this setting we tell to the engine control unit the tyre By this setting we tell to the engine control unit if it must
index that is used for limiting maximum driving speed. The inform about engine faults by blinking the oil pressure light.
tyre index is the same that is used for pillar display and for There are two alternatives:
the instrument panel. See the values on tables in the ON: The service codes from the engine are shown by blink-
Operator’s Manual or in the Service Manual. ing the oil pressure light. This alternative is needed only on
This index must be set only for Mezzo and Mega models. model without a pillar display.
On other models the engine controller receives this Off: The oil pressure light does not blink but the faults are
information from other controllers via CAN bus. shown on the pillar display as service codes. This alterna-
tive must be selected on every model that has a pillar dis-
Speed signal source: play.
By this setting we tell to the engine control unit where it Control stop DIN Enabled:
should read the actual driving speed of the tractors By this setting we tell to the engine control unit if the ’Con-
There are three alternatives: trol stop’ equipment has been fixed on the tractor or not.
Wired: the driving speed signal comes straight from the Choose ’ON’ if there is the ’Control stop’ rocker switch
driving speed sensor (not from other control units) fixed, otherwise ’Off’.
Bus / nom spd (nom. speed): the driving speed info comes
from other control units as a CAN message Pump serial # in ECU:
Bus / wheel based: the driving speed info comes from other On this line you see the serial number of the injection pump
control units as a CAN message (models that have a radar (VP30/VP44) that is saved in the memory on the engine
for diff lock and 4WD automatics) control unit. This serial no. must be just the same as the
serial no. ’Pump serial # in pump’ on the lowest line. If not
Cruise UI signal source: the engine does not give full power.
By this setting we tell to the engine control unit if there is
’Cruise control’ assembled and how it is electrically con-
nected.
There are three alternatives:
Not used: Choose this alternative if the switches for Cruise
control have not been assembled on the tractor concerned.
Wired: On some models the additional info for Cruise func-
tion (e.g. HiShift button pressed/not pressed) are con-
nected straight to inputs of the engine controller. Then you
must select this alternative (see the table for every model).
Bus: On the most of the tractor models the additional info
for Cruise function (e.g. HiShift button pressed/not pressed)
come via CAN bus to the engine controller. Then you must
select this alternative (see the table for every model).
Exhaust gas brake:
By this setting we tell to the engine control unit if there is an If the serial numbers are not the same move the cursor by
exhaust gas brake fixed on the tractor or not. Choose al- arrow keys to the point ’Couple’ and press Enter.
ways ’Not used’ since this equipment is not available.
Accelerator pedal selection:
By this setting we tell to the engine control unit how it must
’listen to’ the accelerator pedals.
There are two alternatives:
Both dir active: This alternative must be selected to those
models where the seat direction switch has not been fixed.
Then the engine controller ’listens’ to the front and rear ac-
celerator pedals simultaneously.
Seat direction: On most of the models there is seat direc-
tion switch fixed. So, the engine controller knows the direc-
tion of the driver. Then the engine controller ’listens’ to only
either front or rear accelerator pedal.
665
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.6 18
Then the engine controller asks the serial no. from the injec-
tion pump and saves it to memory of its own. After this the
both serial numbers on display are the same.
Note. If you make settings without the injection pump e.g.
on a table it is possible to enter the pump serial no. man-
ually on the line ’Pump serial # in ECU’.
Pump serial # in pump:

On this line you see the serial number of the injection pump
(VP30/VP44) that is saved in the memory on the injection
pump. It is not possible to enter the serial no. on this line
but it is possible to check that the serial numbers on the
pump and on the engine controller are the same.
Escaping from the application

When you have made all the settings and you have
checked them you may exit from the application by pres-
sing the ESC button for a long time (over 3 seconds). Then
the MultiTool returns to the main menu.
666
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.7 19
CAN---ID setting to control unit.

Usually this procedure is not necessary. The CAN ---ID of a After connection turn ignition key to the ON position.
spare part unit is 254. This means that when programming
with software ”Update C, M, T or other EEM models” the Go to ”TRACTOR TOOLS” folder (by up/down arrow but-
CAN ---ID 254 can be changed to the right one during pro- tons).
gramming, for example number 3 (TC1).
This procedure is needed if a control unit has lost CAN ---ID

or CAN ---ID is not correct. For example if a service man has
a control unit with him/her it is possible to change the right
CAN ---ID to the control unit in the field.
CAN ---ID setting in tractor:

There is a green connector ’RS’ on the MultiTool cable
(35660430) that can be connected to control unit connector
housing A1A6 as shown in the drawing below. Via this the
MultiTool gets connection to the control unit‘s RS ---line
(CAN ---ID can be set via RS ---line only). Connect the con-
nector housing A1A1 (on tractor wire harness) to the unit
connector housing A1A1 so that the control unit gets power
supply from the tractor during CAN ---ID setting. Open the folder by pressing the right arrow button.
Go to the folder ”Software”.
Open the folder by pressing the right arrow button.
CAN ---ID setting on a table:

Notice! When you work on the table, power supply can be
taken from the HiTech programming adapter (34042500). Go to the line ”Set CAN ---ID to a control unit”.
Connect the adapter’s connector A1A1 to control unit as
shown in the picture below.
667
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.7 20
Application ”Set CAN ---ID to a control unit” starts.

You can choose CAN ---ID number only when the window is
yellow. If it is blue press the Enter button once in order to
change the colour to yellow.
Next the software asks you to connect RS connector to the

right control unit. You have done it already in the beginning
of this instruction.
Note ! CAN ---ID of TC1 (A1A) control unit can be set also Press Enter.
via diagnostic connector X43 (on side panel). Connect then The selection window becomes blue.
the connector X43 of the MultiTool cable. This is possible
because the RS line of TC1 unit is connected to the diag-
nostic connector X43.
Go by down arrow key to line ”KWPLoader.s19”.
Press Enter.
There appears a yellow ”SELECT” window.
Press Enter.
Push the arrow button to up until there is a right CAN ---ID

on the window.
Choose CAN ---ID depending on the control unit. For
example TC1 = 3. You can check information for that
model on the newest Service Bulletin containing software
information for that model.
Note! It is not allowed that there are two or more control
units with similar CAN ---ID. Then programming doesn‘t
work and tractor doesn‘t work either.
668
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.7 21
There comes an advice that asks you to turn the power off.
Turn ignition key to OFF position for about five (5) seconds After successful loading there is the CAN ---ID in the selec-
until you hear a beep. tion window that has been loaded to the control unit, in-
Turn power on. formation from KWPLoader and the control unit‘s type (it is
not necessary to take note of these, these are mostly for
The MultiTool begins to erase the memory of the control possible problem situations).
unit.
Press ESC key for a long time in order to leave the applica-
Next the MultiTool sends the CAN ---ID to the control unit. At tion.
the same time a ’KWP Loader’ is sent to the control unit. There comes an advice that asks you to turn the power off.
That software ’teaches’ the control unit how to ”communi-
cate” with other control units and with the MultiTool.
Turn ignition key to the OFF position for about five (5) sec-
onds until you hear a beep. Turn the power ON.
When CAN ---ID sending has been successful a message
”CAN ---ID setting complete” appears. Note! Turning power off is needed so that the control unit
can start correctly after CAN ---ID setting.
Software goes back to the MultiTool Main Menu.
669
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.7 22
Now the control unit is ready for ”package loading”. So, the
control unit has not yet been programmed finally.
Turn tractor power off.

Connect the control unit to the tractor’s wiring harness (con-
nect all connectors).
Turn the power on.
After that you may continue programming: start the applica-
tion ”Update C, M, T or other EEM models”.
670
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.8 23
SOFTWARE UPDATE
Tractor models C, M, T and other models with ”Update” application opens.

EEM engine:
Go to ”TRACTOR TOOLS” folder (up ---/down buttons).
”SELECT” --- menu opens. Move cursor to the line where

the right tractor model is situated. Note that the same
model marking may have many alternatives (e.g.
Open the folder by pressing the arrow to the right.
T120---T170 AC5.3 and T120---T170 EEM).
Go to the folder ”Software”. Open the folder by pressing the
arrow to the right.
Connection creating starts. First the MultiTool tries to create

a connection via CAN bus and if it does not answer then via
Go to the line ”Update C, M, T or other EEM models” (This
RS 232 line. (Because some tractor models do not have
is so called packet loading system).
CAN bus.)
When the connection is ready the message ”CAN connec-
tion created”.
Press Enter.
.
671
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.8 24
Note! If the error message ”Communication error” appears If control units on the tractor correspond to the selected
it means that the MultiTool can not communicate with the tractor model (right amount, type and CAN ---ID) the Multi-
tractor via CAN bus or RS232 line. Tool offers a suitable software package to be sent to the
Some tips for clearing the situation: tractor (below the blue bar).
---Check that you have connected the MultiTool cable to the On the right, at point ”Software in tractor” is shown the soft-
tractor. ware package and the parameter package in the tractor
---If this does not help switch the power OFF for about 5 now. (Note that in the first MultiTool software packages this
seconds, and switch the power ON. shows the version only if software is the same as software
---Check power supply and grounding of the control units package on the memory card.)
(measure it on the connectors of the control unit).
---It is also impossible to communicate with the tractor if
there is not CAN ---ID number in control units. Set CAN ---ID
no. 3 to the control unit TC1, (there is a separate instruction
how to set CAN ---ID).
---Check the connections of the diagnosis adapter X43 (ac-
cording to electrical diagram).
Then MultiTool receives information from the tractor con-

cerning control units and software in control units.
Move the cursor by the arrow button down to the line where
the suitable software package is situated, e.g. T190
V1.25.0.0. Check that this version is the newest version for
this tractor model. This information can be found in Service
Bulletins.
Note. If there is a spare control unit (CAN ---ID 254) the

MultiTool does not go ahead before you have changed the
CAN ---ID to the right one. (Reason: CAN ---ID of a new spare
unit is 254, except EC that has CAN ---ID 0).
If situation is so the MultiTool shows a window ”Spare part
unit, CAN ID change”, by which the CAN ---ID can be
changed quickly without escaping from the whole applica-
tion.
More detailed instruction can be found later on this instruc-
tion, below the header ”Guided CAN ---ID change”. Press Enter.
The MultiTool makes an information list of control units and Note. Older software versions are allowed to be sent to a
software in the tractor. tractor only on special situations and only with permission
from Valtra Service. (Use of older software may be harmful
for some control unit.)
Choose the type of loading, usually”Update”. This selection

sends a program file only to those control units where the
right program file is missing, or where the program file is
not the right version.
The choice ”Replace all” is used only for special cases. For
example if in spite of the software download the tractor
doesn‘t work correctly, it is possible to erase all control units
and send the right program file to every control unit.
Note. The information list can be seen by pressing ESC

momentarily and then selecting ”Information” on the menu.
Exit by pressing ESC momentarily.
672
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.8 25
Press Enter. If everything is OK the MultiTool shows a message ”Soft-

The MultiTool begins to send the selected software pack- ware sent successfully”.
age to the tractor. The blue bar running on the window in-
forms the progress of the sending process.
Note. Time used for sending depends on how many con-
trol units the software is sent to.
Note! After sending the software you must always send a

suitable parameter package too. Otherwise the tractor may
have malfunctions and those may cause safety risks.
The MultiTool asks tractor to send the information about After sending the software package, parameter packages
control units and software in order to check that software available appear below the software package line, e.g.
has been saved on the control unit properly. T190_50.
Move the cursor on the line where the suitable parameter
package is situated. (Choose it according to Service Bull-
etin.)
Note! that when you choose the driving speed class you
have to go along with laws and decrees that are valid in that
country.
The MultiTool makes an information list about control units

and software in the tractor.
Press Enter.
673
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.8 26
Choose the type of sending. Usually use ”Update”. This The MultiTool updates the list software and parameters.
selection sends parameter file only to those control units
where the right parameter file is missing, or where the para-
meter file is not the right version.
The choice ”Replace all” is used only for special cases. For
example if you want to send parameters to every control
unit again
If everything is OK the MultiTool shows a message ”Para-

meters sent successfully” for a few seconds.
Press Enter.
The MultiTool begins to send the parameter package to the

tractor.
The blue bar running on the window informs on the send-
ing progress.
After the parameter package sending process you will see

the names of the software and parameter packages which
are now in the tractor. They appear below the header ”Soft-
ware in tractor”.
Compare that these are right according to the Service Bull-
etin.
At the end the MultiTool asks the control units to tell if the
parameters are saved in the control units correctly.
Note. The information list can be seen by pressing ESC

momentarily and then selecting ”Information” on the menu.
Exit by pressing ESC.
Now the tractor has been programmed.
Exit from the application by pressing ESC for a long time.
Make settings and calibrations in the tractor‘s set mode FIII.
674
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.8 27
”Guided CAN-- ID change”.

After you have chosen the tractor model the MultiTool soft-
ware ”jumps” to this window if there is any new spare part
control unit in the tractor (CAN ---ID 254). The updating pro-
cess can not continue before you have changed the CAN ---
ID to the right one. The CAN ---ID saved in a new spare unit
is 254, (except EC that has CAN ---ID 0).
A window ”Spare part unit, CAN ---ID change” appears.
Press Enter.
No. 254 moves down and the colour changes.
Press Enter.
A list ”New units found” opens. the MultiTool has found a
control unit with CAN ---ID 254 (blue cursor is on that line).
This is the control unit where you must change the CAN ---ID
to the right one.
Press the right arrow key. The cursor moves to a list ”Con-
trol units missing”.
Press Enter.
”SELECT” list opens. On the list you see the missing con-
trol units (,CAN ---ID of those). There could be more than
one unit missing too.
Move the cursor on the line where the right CAN ---ID stays
(i.e. that CAN ---ID that you want to set to the control unit).
675
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.8 28
Press Enter. When the CAN ---ID has been changed a message appears:
The CAN ---ID you chose moves down and changes colour. ” Can ---ID number was changed = 3” (depending on what
CAN ---ID you have chosen).
Now you are starting a process to change the CAN ---ID

from 254 to 003.
The control unit has now CAN ---ID no. 3.
By pressing the right arrow move the cursor on window Press ESC momentarily to exit from this window.
”Change id”.
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position for about 5 sec-
onds, and after that switch ON again. By doing this the con-
trol units restart and the updating process has the best
chance of success.
Now you may continue updating the tractor. Move back to

the chapter ”SELECT” in this instruction.
Press Enter.
Now the MultiTool sends a command to the control unit that
it must change this CAN ---ID from 254 to 003 (=3).
676
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.9 29
SOFTWARE UPDATE
Tractor models HiTech and X, that have
not EEM engine.
Go to ”TRACTOR --- TOOLS” in menu (up/down but- The Update application opens. The cursor stays on the
tons). folder ”Software”.
Open this folder by pressing the arrow to the right. Open the folder by pressing the arrow to the right.
Go to ”Software” folder.
Open the folder by pressing the arrow to the right.
Move the cursor to the row where the suitable software for
the tractor is (choose it on basis of Service bulletin). For
Go to ”Update HiTech or X (not EEM)”. example the software ac5_v86.s19 is suitable for a HiTech 2
tractor.
Press Enter.
Press Enter.
677
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.9 30
A message window appears.
Turn the ignition key to OFF until you hear beep (after about After that you must always send the right parameter file too.
5s). Switch the power ON. Move the cursor to the folder where the suitable parameters
The MultiTool erases the memory of the control unit. are, e.g. ”Parameters for HiTech 2”.
After erasing the MultiTool sends the software to the tractor. Open the folder by pressing the arrow to the right.
The blue bar informs of the sending process. The sending The folder e.g. ”Parameters for HiTech 2” opens.
process takes from three to five minutes depending on the
software version to send.
Move to the row where the suitable parameter file is situ-

ated (choose by means of Service bulletin).
When the software has been sent successfully you see the
message ”Software sent successfully”.
Press Enter.
678
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.9 31
The MultiTool sends the parameter file to the tractor. The

blue bar informs of the sending process.
When the sending process is successful a message ”Para-

meters sent successfully” appears for a few seconds.
Note. If the process is not successful you should take the

following actions: Switch the power off for about 30 sec-
onds, switch the power ON, try to send the parameter file
once more.
After that software goes back to the Update window. In the
upper left corner you see the software and the parameter
file that has been sent to the tractor. In the upper right
corner you see the ”Check code” e.g. 3786. That must be
the same as in the table in the Service bulletin for that
model. The same check code is visible also on the pillar
display in test mode FII.
You have now updated the software of the tractor.
Leave by pressing ESC button for a long time.
Make settings and calibrations in set mode FIII.
679
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.9 32
680
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.10 33
I/O test
This instruction is valid for the MultiTool software package
’MultiTool_v1.7.0.0’ and the later ones.
I/O test makes it possible to test incoming signals (inputs)

and outgoing signals (outputs) of a control unit. The ap-
plication name ’I/O test’ comes from the words ’input’ and
’output’.
E.G. when engaging the differential lock by pressing the
rocker switch a certain input of the control unit must be-
come active.
After that the control unit gives output to the function (cur-
rent to the valve). This output can also be seen in I/O test.
By using I/O test we can see the situation ’by eyes of a con-
trol unit’. The items on I/O test are the same as the items on
the pillar display in the test mode FII. So, the same tables Start the application by pressing ‘Enter‘.
on the Service Manual can be used for both tests.
The application starts. The MultiTool asks you to wait.
Note! It is possible to test inputs and outputs of those con-
trol units that understand properly the query message sent
by the MultiTool. This depends on how new/old software
there is on the tractor. The situation in April 2004 is (in pro-
duction and in MultiTool software packages):
---C120---C150: Works with units EC

(0), TC1 (3)
---M, T, Hi EEM, Mezzo/Mega EEM: Works with unit EC (0)
---S240, S280: Works with unit EC (0)
Later there are coming new software for the tractors where
the I/O test will work in every tractor model with the control
units EC, TC1 and TC2 (summer 2004).
When that kind of software will be loaded to an earlier
manufactured tractor the control units will get an ability to Now the MultiTool begins to make communication with all the
communicate with the MultiTool I/O test software. control units on CAN bus. The MultiTool sends a query mess-
age to every control unit and asks them to send information
On the MultiTool Main menu open the folder ’TRACTOR about all inputs and outputs. This takes a few seconds only,
TOOLS’ by pressing the right arrow key. Move the cursor the MultiTool asks you to wait.
on to the line ’Testing’.
Then you see how many control units (modules) have been
Open the folder ’Testing’ by pressing the right arrow key. found (units that can communicate with the MultiTool I/O
test).
Go down on the line ‘I/O testing, C, M, T or other EEM mo-
dels‘.
681
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.10 34
The I/O test for a control unit is now visible. Instruction on

every I/O item can be found on test mode FII tables in the
Service Manual for that tractor model. The yellow cursor
can be moved on the item that you are testing. So it is
easier to see the right item on the display.
Additional property, a picking list ’Custom’:

You may ’collect’ many I/O items to a separate list that can
be shown separately (with bigger characters). So it is easier
to see the right inputs or outputs. In addition to that this is
very useful when testing a certain function e.g. 4WD func-
tion because all the inputs and outputs for that function
from many control units can be collected to one ’cluster’
(and no extra items on display). So, it is possible to collect
items from many control units to a ’picking list’.
Choose ’OK’ by pressing ‘Enter‘.
Move the yellow cursor on the item you want to pick to a
A selection list appears on the display and you see the con- list. Press Enter.
trol units that have been found. The selected item becomes orange coloured which means
There are CAN ---ID numbers of the control units on the that the item is now on the picking list.
selection list. In this case the MultiTool has found the the
engine control unit EC (CAN ---ID 0) and the transmission
controller TC1 (CAN ---ID 3).
CAN ---ID numbers of control units:
EC A1M CAN ---ID 0 (00)

TC1 A1A CAN ---ID 3 (03)
TC2 A1C CAN ---ID 4 (04)
When you move the cursor away from the selected item the
selected item becomes red coloured and the cursor is yel-
low.
Choose the control unit that you want to test. By pressing

’Enter’ on number 3 the I/O test for TC1 starts.
The I/O test page for TC1 appears on the display. Check
that you are ’inside’ the right control unit (red frame on the
figure below).
Now you may select another item to the picking list, e.g.
DI02.
When you select this item it becomes orange coloured etc
682
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.10 35
Accept by Enter.
Then we select another item more. Move the cursor on the
item AI02. The selected items are now visible on the picking list in larger
characters.
At first there is CAN ---ID no. (red frame in the figure below), I/O
item (yellow frame) and the value measured (blue frame).
Press ‘Enter‘.
The item becomes orange coloured.
If you want additionally to select I/O items from another

control unit to the same picking list press ESC key momen-
tarily. In this case choose 0 that is the engine control unit
EC.
Move the cursor on the line where CAN ---ID 0 (EC) is situ-
ated.
Now you have chosen three inputs on the picking list.
If you want these three selected items (DI01, DI02, AI02) in

larger characters on the display press ESC key momentar-
ily. Move the cursor on the lowest line ’Custom’ that means
’Own list’.
Accept by Enter.
The items can be picked as in the previous case (with mod-

ule 3). Check that you are ’inside’ the right control unit (red
frame on the figure below).
683
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.10 36
If you now want to see the picking list press ESC momen- Move the cursor on the item that you want to remove from the
tarily. Move the cursor on the line ’Custom’. picking list. In this case AI10.
Press Enter.
Now the item AI10 becomes yellow and it is not on the picking
list any more.
Press ‘Enter‘.
The picking list appears. There are also earlier chosen

items from control unit no. 03.
Note!The whole picking list will be erased if you exit from
the I/O test application.
Escaping from the I/O test application:
Press ESC key for a long time. The MultiTool goes to ’Multi-
Tool Main menu’.
Note. If you press ESC shortly a selection window will ap-

pear:
If you want to continue I/O testing choose one of the

Removing items from the picking list: choices.
If you want to remove some items from the picking list you If you want to exit from the I/O test application press ESC
should go to I/O test page for that control unit. key for a long time. The MultiTool goes to ’MultiTool Main
menu’
There items can be removed in the same way as you se-
lected those. When you press Enter on a red (selected)
item the colour changes to yellow that means the item is
not on the picking list any more.
In this case we remove item AI10.
684
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.11 37
CAN bus testing 2. Starting the application

INDEX
1. Application ’CAN bus testing’ in general
2. Starting the application
3. Choosing data to be shown in columns
4. Adjusting the width of columns
5. Selecting operation modes
6. Checking what control units are active on the CAN bus
7. Selecting the tractor model (+ the filter ’pass filter’ +
clearing the display by ’clear log’)
8. Viewing of CAN messages and signals (incl. graphics)
On the MultiTool Main menu move the cursor on the line
’SPECIAL TOOLS’.
Open the folder ’SPECIAL TOOLS’ by pressing the right
1. Application ’CAN bus testing’ in general arrow key.

’MultiTool_v1.13.0.0’ and the later ones.
This instruction gives basic knowledge about using the
application ’CAN bus testing’. Further information for the
case at issue will be given separately when needed.
Move the cursor on to the line ’CAN bus Testing’.
Note. This application is for special cases only, not for Start the application by pressing “Enter”.
everyday use. Usually a fault can be found by means of the
Service codes, the Test mode FII or I/O test.
The application ’Can bus testing’ makes it possible to see

and read CAN messages on the CAN bus of Valtra tractors
on ---line. Every CAN message includes one or many
’signals’ that contain data sent by a certain control unit.
An example of a CAN message that contains signals (in this

case two signals):
PTOINFO R (= a CAN message)
--- PTOStatus: running (= a signal included in the CAN
message, (PTO is running).
--- PTOSpeed: 960 (= a signal included in the CAN
message, (PTO speed is 960).
Now the MultiTool begins to ’listen’ to CAN messages on

the CAN bus line. The message display opens.
Now you may continue to one of the following chapters.
Or if you want to exit from the application press ESC for a
few seconds.
685
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.11 38
3. Choosing data to be shown in columns
It is possible to choose what to see on the columns.

Move the cursor up to the upper line by pressing
arrow up key. Move the cursor above the column
that you want to change, in this case the 3rd
column ’Diff(s)’.
Press the Enter key for a few seconds.
The window ’Select column data’ opens.
The alternatives to choose are described in the table below:
Selection Declaration / function

’Empty’ There is no data on the column (= empty column).
’IDx’ (hexadecimal ID). Identification number of the CAN message in hexadecimal format
’IDdec’ (decimal ID). Identification number of the CAN message in decimal format
’Name’ Name of the CAN message.
’BC’ (Byte count). Amount of bytes in the data field of the CAN message.
’Data’ Data included in the message in hexadecimal format
’Time(s)’ This tells the time when the MultiTool has received the message last. The time is in seconds since the application
’CAN bus testing’ has been started. This time continues even after giving the command ’Clear log’.
’Diff(s)’ (Differential time). Time interval in seconds between two messages of the same identification (IDx or IDdec).
’Count’ Total amount of messages that MultiTool has been received since the application ’CAN bus testing’ has been
started. This counter can be cleared by giving the command ’Clear log’.
Move the cursor on the line where the required type of data
is situated, in this case ’IDx’.
Press Enter.
Now you have selected the data on the 3rd column, it is

now ’Idx’ (message name in hexadecimal format).
When you are ready with the selections you may move the
cursor back on messages by pressing the down arrow key.
686
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.11 39
4. Adjusting the width of columns
It is possible to adjust the width of each column separately

if needed.
Move the cursor up to the upper line by pressing the up
arrow key. Move the cursor above the column that you want
to change, in this case the 2nd column ’Name’.
Press Enter.
The cursor becomes yellow coloured.
Now it is possible to adjust the width by using the right / left

arrow keys.
When the width is suitable press Enter. The cursor be-

comes blue coloured again.
When the adjustment is correct you may move the cursor
back on message display by pressing the down arrow key.
687
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.11 40
5. Selecting operation modes
This menu contains the necessary ’Load configuration’

function and some special functions.
On the message window press ESC shortly. The menu
’Select operation’ appears.
There are many alternatives to choose. They are described in the table below:
Selection Description
’Clear log’ When selecting this operation the MultiTool clears the display and starts to ’listen’ to the CAN messages again.
The counters on the column ’Count’ start from zero again.
’Load This selection must be done every time since different tractor models may have different CAN bus messages.
configuration’ When you choose this there will appear a new menu where the tractor model must be selected.
’Load trace window’ This selection is not in use.
’Pass filter’ ’Enabled’: the MultiTool shows only the CAN messages that are defined in the database selected by the
operation ’Load configuration’.
---’Disabled’: the MultiTool shows all CAN messages that are active.
Move the cursor on the line required and press Enter.
688
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.11 41
6. Checking what control units are active on CAN

bus
It is possible to see what control units are continuously

’alive’ on the tractor. This means that those control units
send CAN messages all the time in certain time intervals.
On the message window press ESC shortly. The menu ’Se-

The names of found control units are on the column ’Name’
lect operation’ appears.
(e.g. TC2).
Note. If the view is not like this and it is full of lines, ensure
that the status of the ’Pass filter’ is ’enabled’.
Note. In order to see all control units you must turn the
ignition switch to STOP position for over 3 seconds, and
then back to position 1. Some of control units (e.g. ’ISOAD’)
send a CAN message only once after the power has been
switched on.
---Check that the counters on the column ’Count’ increase

all the time (on every line, except on the line ’ISOAD’).
This means that units send messages continuously.
Move the cursor on the line ’Load configuration’. ---Check that the time interval ’Diff(s)’ does not vary very
Press Enter. much (check every line).
Note. On the line ’ISOAD’ the Diff(s) tells the time that has
rolled on since it has been switched on previously.
---Check that ’Diff(s) is according to the column ’Allowed
Diff(s)’ in the table below (check every line, except
’ISOAD’).
Control unit Nominal Allowed

Diff(s) Diff(s)
TC1 A1A Transmission 1,0 s about 1,3 s
max
TC2 A1C Transmission 0,1 s about 0,15 s
max
The menu ’Load configuration’ appears.
EC A1M Engine 0,1 s about 0,15 s
Move the cursor on the line ’Control Units On Can Bus.dbc’
max
(shows control units that are sending CAN ---messages).
Press Enter. ICL A1P Instrument 0,5 s about 0,8 s
Now your choice is shown on the second line (’Control panel max
Units On Can Bus.dbc’). ISOAD A3G ISO ---adapter --- ---
(ISO11783,
ISO11786)
689
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.11 42
7. Selecting the tractor model 8. Viewing of CAN messages and signals (incl.
graphics)
It is necessary to select the ’Configuration’ that corresponds
the tractor model in case. Otherwise the messages are not Note. Before viewing CAN messages you must select the
recognized properly by the MultiTool. tractor model as described in the chapter ’Selecting the
tractor model’ in this instruction. Otherwise the messages
are not recognized properly by the MultiTool.
When you have selected the tractor model by the function
’Load configuration’ the MultiTool starts to ’listen’ to CAN
messages. The order of the CAN messages on display may
vary.
Note. In order to see all CAN messages you must turn the
ignition switch to STOP position for over 3 seconds, and
then back to position 1. Some of control units (e.g. ’ISOAD’)
send a CAN message only once after the power has been
On the message window press ESC shortly. The menu switched on.
’Select operation’ appears.
Move the cursor on the line ’Load configuration’.

Press Enter.
Move the cursor on the message that you want to view, in

this case the message ’EEC2’.
Another menu appears. Move the cursor on the line where

the right tractor model is situated, in this case ’C, M, T,
HiTech, Mezzo---Mega.dbc’.
Press Enter to accept the selection.
Now you see your selection on the second line of the When CAN bus works correctly the numerical data in the
window (C, M, T...). columns ’Time(s)’ and ’Count’ must increase all the time.
Note. There is instruction in chapter ’Choosing data to be
shown in columns’ how to read data shown on the
message line.
If you want to view signals included in the message you

should open the message by pressing shortly the right
arrow key.
Now MultiTool is ready to show CAN messages and

signals.
This message ’EEC2’ seems to include many signals. In

this case we want to view ’droop percentage’ data. Move
the cursor down on the line ’CurrentDroopPercentage’.
690
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.11 43
Press Enter.
Selection ’View signal in gauge’:

Leave the window by pressing ESC shortly.
The menu ’Select signal function’ appears. By this menu it

is possible to select the format to view the signal.
Selection ’View signal in xy ---cordinate’:
Selection ’View signal in bar diagram’:

This view is of ’oscilloscope’ type i.e. the time runs to the

right and the value draws line on the display.
Selection ’View signal information’:

This view is mainly for R&D staff. It tells about the structure
of the signal. E.G. ’Unit: %’ means that the values given in
this signal are in percent.
691
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.11 44
There are also ’Symbolic values’ in some signals. They give

information about the special values of the signal. In this
signal the ’value 255.000 = NA’ means that if the signal
value is 255 it is not available on the CAN bus.
The previous view appears.

Choose another signal to view if needed.
Close the message by pressing the left arrow key.
Now it is possible to view other messages by moving the

cursor on the line required.
Leave the application by pressing ESC button for long.
692
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.12 45
EEM2 testing and adjustments

INDEX
1. Application ’EEM2 testing and adjustments’ in general
3. Testing
3.1. Basic information
3.2. Engine starting test
3.3. Load values and curves
4. Adjustments
4.1. Basic adjustments
4.1.1. Set the engine hours
4.1.2. Set the low idle speed
4.1.3. Set the high idle speed
1. Application ’Engine testing and adjustments’

in general
’MultiTool_v1.13.0.0’ and the later versions. Open the folder ’EEM engine’ by pressing the right arrow
This instruction gives basic knowledge about using the key. Move the cursor on the line ’EEM2: testing and
application ’Engine testing and adjustments’. adjustments’.
Start the application by pressing “Enter”.
The application starts. The MultiTool asks you to wait

On the MultiTool Main menu move the cursor on the line
’TRACTOR TOOLS’.
The page ’Basic information’ opens.
Open the folder ’TRACTOR TOOLS’ by pressing the right

arrow key. Move the cursor on the line ’EEM engine’.
693
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.12 46
3. Testing 3.2. Engine starting test

3.1. Basic information
By means of this page it is possible to get information

about the function mode of the engine quickly, e.g. if there
are active service codes or not.
By means of this page it is possible to make a diagnosis

why an engine does not fire.
Press ESC shortly to select another page. Move on the line
’Engine starting test’ and press Enter.
Green colour means that the item is OK. Red colour means
that something is wrong.
The declarations for this page are in the table below.
Item: Declaration:
Engine (Running / Stop). Informs if the engine is running
status
Engine Operating hours counter in the engine control
hours unit. This should be about the same value as
operating hours in the instrument panel.
Service (No / Yes). No = There are no active service
code codes in EC = There are no registered faults in
active the engine.
Yes = There are one or more service codes
active in the engine control unit.
Injection The green vertical bar shows the theoretical The page ’Engine starting test’ opens.
quantity injection quantity (mg/stroke). The value is not In this case everything is correct as every item is green.
precise.
Normal = the engine is allowed to give
maximum power.
Reduced = The allowed maximum injection
quantity is lower than normally (e.g. an active
service code may affect this).
Try to start the engine and simultaneously look what

happens on the display. If every square is green it means
that all measured values are inside the allowed limits and it
should be possible to start the engine. Limits are in
parenthesis next to each square (also the colour is
determined according that limit).
694
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.12 47
Note. The green bar in the square ’Injection quantity’ has

some height if the EC engine control unit is asking the
pump to inject fuel (=OK).
If some of the squares are red it means that those
measured values are not inside the allowed limits. There is
the measured value inside every square. Compare it to the
limits and find the reason for the fault.
In this case there is a fault that prevents the engine from
starting. The power supply for the injection pump is missing
and the CAN bus of the injection pump does not work. In
this case the reason is a broken fuse.
Item: Declaration:
Safety Input Ai2, pin no. 32 of the EC control unit.
circuit Shows if the starting safety circuit is OK (parking brake on, in some models the clutch pedal is pressed down).
Control stop Input Ai5, pin no. 34 of the EC control unit.
Shows if the Control Stop (optional equipment) has been activated by the switch S36. If yes the engine does not
start. It is possible to test the function of the switch in the display when the engine is not running (i.e. when there
is no oil pressure in the engine).
EC supply Input Ai10, pin no. 70 of the EC control unit.
voltage The engine control unit measures the supply voltage it receives.
Inj. pump Input Ai16, pin no. 1 of the EC control unit.
supply volt. The engine control unit gives this supply voltage to the injection pump (measured in the EC unit). The voltage
that the pump really receives is a little bit lower because of voltage loss in the wires.
Ignition key Input Ai15, pin no. 21 of the EC control unit.
This voltage must come from the ignition key before the EC starts to work.
Fuel delivery Input Di9, pin no. 55 of the EC control unit.
pressure This shows if the delivery pressure is high enough (a pressure switch attached to the fuel filter, not in every tractor).
Note also that the value is 1 though the wire from the switch is disconnected.
Engine RPM The engine that the EC unit has measured. During starting it must be high enough so that the injection pump
pumps properly. Below 100 rpm the starting does not succeed usually. In those cases check the condition of the
battery and the generator.
Lift pump Output Do1, pin no. 50 of the EC control unit.
relay This output controls the relay K60 (or K1M) that controls the fuel lift pump.
Air Output Do2, pin no. 3 of the EC control unit.
preh.relay ON= The EC gives power supply to the pre ---heater, OFF= No supply.
This output controls the relay K2M.1, that controls the pre ---heater (’grill’ ) R1 by means of the relay K2M.2. In some
tractor models (e.g. 6850EEM) the Do2 controls the Thermostart device.
Starting Output Do8, pin no. 52 of the EC control unit.
relay This output controls the relay K14 that controls the starter motor (The EC gives ground for the relay).
(Not in use) This item is not in use. Later here will be an item that informs about the function of the CAN bus for the injection
pump.
Injection The green vertical bar shows the theoretical injection quantity (mg/stroke). The values are not precise.
quantity Note that in this case the bar has no height since the EC does not require the injection pump to inject fuel.
695
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.12 48
3.3. Load values and curves
Press ESC shortly to select another page. Move on the line

’Load values and curves’ and press Enter.
The page ’Load values and curves’ opens.
Green colour means that the item is OK. Red colour means
that something is wrong.
Item: Declaration:
Load % at this This shows how much the engine is loaded at present. The value tells how many percent of the max injection
rpm: quantity of that engine speed is being used. We can say this also means torque % being used.
100 % means that the engine gives maximum torque (max of that rpm).
Boost pressure: This shows the boost pressure by two different units (kPa and bar).
Note that there is not a boost pressure sensor in every tractor model.
Moment.fuel This shows the fuel consumption at present, unit l/h (litres per hour). The engine control unit calculates this
consump: by the basis of injection quantity.
Droop %: This shows the ’droop’ value that the engine uses now (it is determined by the software in the engine control
unit). This value means how much the engine speed may decrease when the load increases. Typical values
are from 2 to 5 percent.
Many factors affect the value, e.g. engine speed and the Cruise Control (’rpm cruise’).
Torque curve This item tells which of the torque curves are being used. Usually there is one curve only (no. 3). In some
number: models there are many curves (e.g. the models T180 and T190).
Injection The green vertical bar shows the theoretical injection quantity (mg/stroke). The values are not precise.
quantity
696
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.12 49
4. Adjustments 4.1.1. Set the engine hours

4.1. Basic adjustments
This setting can also be made when the engine is running.

Press ESC shortly to select another page. Move on the line Move on the line ’Engine hours’.
’Adjustments’. Press Enter to open the folder.
Move on the line ’Basic adjustments’.
Press Enter.
The page ’Basic adjustments’ opens.
Press Enter. The field becomes yellow.
Set the right value by the up/down arrow keys.
697
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.12 50
4.1.2. Set the low idle speed
By means of this setting the low idle speed can be adjusted

to lower or higher. The adjustment range is ---50...0...+50
revolutions per minute (rpm). The value 0 means the
standard idle speed (usually 850 rpm, see the Service
manual).
E.g. if the value is ’ ---30’ the low idle speed is then 850 --- 30
= 820 rpm.
Press Enter. The field becomes blue (but the value is not
saved to the engine yet).

Move on the line ’Low idle speed(RPM):’.
Move on the field ’Save’.

Press Enter. All three values are saved to the engine.
Press Enter. The field becomes yellow. Set the right value
by the arrow keys. Up/down changes the value one step,
left/right changes the value 10 steps.
If the values in the both columns are the same the saving
procedure has been successful.
698
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.12 51
4.1.3. Set the high idle speed
By means of this setting the maximum engine speed can

be adjusted lower or higher. If a tractor has so small tyres
that it can’t reach the nominal speed (30, 40 or 50 km/h),
the high idle speed of the engine can be increased by this
setting.
After the adjustment the maximum driving speed must be
checked, and if needed, the high idle speed must be
decreased.
Note that the maximum driving speed must conform to

the local country authorities and laws.
The adjustment range is ---50...0...+50 revolutions per

Move on the field ’Save’. minute (rpm). The value 0 means the standard high idle
speed (look at the Service manual).
E.g. the max high idle speed of the model M150 is 2400
rpm. If the value is ’20’, the new high idle speed is 2400 +
20 = 2420 rpm.

If the values in the both columns are the same the saving
procedure has been successful. Test how the adjustment
affected the low idle speed (look at the tachometer).
Move on the line ’High idle speed(RPM)’.
Press Enter. The field becomes yellow. Set the right value
by the arrow keys. Up/down changes the value one step,
left/right changes the value 10 steps.
699
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.12 52
Move on the line ’Save’.

If the values in both columns are the same the saving
procedure has been successful. Test how the adjustment
affected the high idle speed (check the driving speed on
the instrument panel).
Press ESC shortly to select another page.
You may exit from the application by pressing ESC for a
longer period.
700
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.13 53
Basic settings of a tractor

INDEX
1. The application ’Basic settings’ in general
3. Making settings
4. Error messages
1. The application ’Basic settings’ in general

’MultiTool_v2.7.0.0’ and later versions. This instruction
outlines information on the application ’Basic settings’.
A control system of a tractor contains settings that are used

by tractor software when it operates. During production the
settings are set in every tractor. In repair work the settings
must be checked and modified if needed. Start the application by pressing Enter.
The settings must be set (or must be at least checked) e.g. The MultiTool will ask you to wait.
in the following cases.
---when a spare control unit EC, TC1 or TC2 is attached
---when the tractor has been reprogrammed
---when the speed class of the tractor is being changed,
e.g. 43 km/h => 53 km/h
---when the tyre size is being changed significantly
Note. When making settings you must abide by the

established law in the country concerned.
Settings to the engine control unit can be made via CAN

bus via the X43 diagnostic socket. More detailed instruction
to connect the MultiTool to the tractor is in a separate
chapter of this manual.
Settings are used in tractor models equipped with an EEM

engine (S series excluded). If settings are not available all
those values will be 0 (zero), and saving of any new values
will not work. The application ’Basic settings’ opens.
2. Starting the application 3. Making settings

Move the cursor to the line ’TRACTOR TOOLS’. Note. Ensure that the engine is stopped and the parking
brake is engaged. Otherwise it is not possible to save new
settings to the tractor.
The view ’Basic settings’:

In the left window are the names of the settings, e.g. ’Max
driving speed’ and ’Tyre index’. In the right window is the
current value of the setting in the tractor. In the picture
below the maximum speed of the tractor is 43 km/h.

arrow key.
Move the cursor to the line ’Settings’.
Open the folder by pressing the right arrow key. Move on
the line ’Basic settings’.
701
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.13 54
Note. If some of the values are 0 (zero), the setting is not

available in that tractor. Also, if the setting is 0 (Zero), it is
not possible to change that setting.
When the correct value is shown, save it by pressing the

Enter button.
The MultiTool then asks you to wait.

In the example below, we set the Tyre index value to 174.
Move the cursor to the line ’Tyre index’. In the right window
the current value (200) is visible.
When the saving process is successful, the message ’Write

successful’ appears.
Press Enter to change the value. The value field becomes

yellow.
Press Enter.
The MultiTool returns to the ’Basic settings’ view.

Change the value by up/down arrow keys.
702
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.13 55
If the error message ’Write timeout!’ appears, the reason is

usually that the setting is not used in that tractor. Also check
that the MultiTool cable is connected to the X43 connector.
Exit by pressing Enter, and set other settings if required.
If you want to change another setting move to that line and

press Enter.
If you want to exit from the application press and hold the
ESC button.
The MultiTool will then return to the Main menu. When saving the values, if the engine is running or the
parking brake is not engaged the saving process will not
work, and the error message ’Write error! Stop engine,
engage P brake!’ appears.
Exit by pressing Enter. Engage the parking brake, stop the
engine, then turn the ignition switch back to position 1.
Now the settings are saved in the tractor.
4. Error messages
If the error message ’Write not available!’ appears, that

setting is not used in the tractor. Exit by pressing Enter, and
set other indexes if required.
703
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
22.1.2006 All 521.13 56
704
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 521.14 57
Service of LS hydraulics 2.2 Replacing the tractor terminal (TT)

INDEX
1. Application ’CAN hydr.,diagn.+set(NLS/TLS)’ in general ---Fit the new TT tractor terminal to the armrest
---Update the tractor software with the newest software
2. Working orders package available
2.1 Diagnosing of the hydraulic system ---Send the correct hydraulics configuration file to the tractor
2.2 Replacing the tractor terminal (TT) ---Calibrate every control lever (the joystick and the other
2.3 Replacing a valve or a valve control unit levers)
2.4 Replacing a control lever ---Check the controls by the ’Tabular view’, make sure every
2.5 Adding more components to the system lever reaches +100%, ---100% and both function areas +F
and ---F
3. Starting the MultiTool application --- Test the system functions correctly by operating the
4. Diagnostics --- Tabular view hydraulics
5. Sending a hydraulics configuration
6. Setting the CAN ---ID of a valve control unit
7. Sending a valve spool data file 2.3 Replacing a valve or a valve control unit by a spare part
8. Closing the application ---Remove the old part

9. Tables ---Fit a new valve or valve control unit mechanically on the
tractor
1.Application ’CAN hydr.,diagn.+set (NLS/TLS)’ ---Connect tractor’s wiring harness to the valve (only one
new valve per time)
in general
---In MultiTool: open the ’Tabular view’ to see a list of
components
---Change the CAN ---ID of the new valve (’new’) to a
’MultiTool_v3.5.0.0’ and the later versions. This section
CAN ---ID that corresponds to the valve number
gives basic information about using the MultiTool
---Send a valve spool data file that corresponds to the valve
application for CAN hydraulics.
number
---Connect tractor’s wire harness to another new valve (if
Abbreviations and terms:
replaced), change the CAN ---ID and send a spool data file
---Restart the hydraulic system by the function ’Hydraulic
TT = the user terminal on the armrest (Can ---ID 40)
system identification’
PVED ---CC = a hydraulic valve control head, CAN
controlled (CAN ---ID 128---137) ---By means of the ’Tabular view’ check that the new valve
reaches all the positions: +100%, ---100% and ’Floating’ (if
Spare part ID = the PVED ---CC as a spare part has the valve reaches at least +95% and ---95% the result is
CAN ---ID 128 acceptable).
---Test the system functions correctly by operating the
A configuration = A package of files that includes hydraulics
information of parts (the controls and the valves) needed in
the hydraulic system. The files are finally situated in the TT.
2.4 Replacing a control lever
A curve file = a file that gives parameters to the TT to make
a non ---linear control value into a linear signal voltage that is ---Remove the old part
sent by any control lever (this file is automatically included ---Fit a new control lever to the armrest and connect the
in a configuration) connector
---Calibrate the new control lever
Valve spool data = a file that gives parameters to the ---Check the new control lever by the ’Tabular view’, make
PVED ---CC to move the valve spool in that specific valve. sure that the lever reaches
The file is finally situated inside the PVED ---CC. +100%, ---100% and both function areas +F and ---F
--- Test the system functions correctly by operating the
hydraulics
2. Working orders
2.1 Diagnosing of the hydraulic system
---Open the ’Tabular view’

---Check the signals of controls
---Activate the hydraulics
---Check the valves function by checking the indication light
on valve control units
---Start the engine
---Test the movement of the valve spools (look at the value
’Estimated flow’)
---Test the system functions correctly by operating the
hydraulics
705
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 521.14 58
2.5 Adding more components to the system (as additional

equipment)
---Fit new valves and control levers to the tractor

---Send the correct hydraulics configuration file to the tractor
---Connect tractor’s wire harness to a new valve (one new
valve at a time)
---In MultiTool: open the ’Tabular view’ to see a list of
components
---Change the CAN ---ID of the new valve (’new’) to a
CAN ---ID that corresponds to the valve number
---Send a valve spool data file that corresponds with the
valve number
---Connect tractor’s wire harness to another new valve (if
fitted), change the CAN ---ID and send a spool data file
---Restart the hydraulic system by the function ’Hydraulic
system identification’
---Calibrate every control lever (the joystick and the other arrow key. Move the cursor onto the line ’Working
levers) hydraulics’.
---Check the controls by the ’Tabular view’, make sure that
every lever reaches +100%, ---100% and both function
areas +F and ---F
---By means of the ’Tabular view’ check that the new valves
reach all the positions: +100%, ---100% and ’Floating’ (if the
valve reaches at least +95% and ---95% the result is
acceptable).
--- Test the system functions correctly by operating the
hydraulics
3.Starting the MultiTool application
Connect the MultiTool to the diagnostics connector.
Turn the ignition switch on (or start the engine if you want to
use the hydraulics).
Open the folder ’Working hydraulics’ by pressing the right

arrow
key. Move the cursor onto the line ’CAN
hydr.,diagn.+set(NLS/TLS)’.
Start the application by pressing ”Enter”.
On the MultiTool Main menu move the cursor to ’TRACTOR

TOOLS’.
706
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 521.14 59
Note. If you don’t follow the instruction the detection

process may fail since the TT detects the controls based on
their signal voltage.
Note. The MultiTool takes the control of the power supply

for the hydraulic valves but for safety reasons it does not
activate the control of the hydraulic system. Nearly all The MultiTool then retrieves the information from the
service actions can be done without activation. If use of the hydraulic valves (PVED ---CC).
valves is necessary you should activate the hydraulics by
pressing the button next to the display.
The main menu for hydraulics appears.

Descriptions of the items in the menu:
The MultiTool asks the TT to send the current configuration. ---’Hydr. system identification’ makes the same three steps
Then the MultiTool retrieves the configuration from the TT. of detection as the three previous steps in this instruction.
---’Tabular view’ shows the system as a whole. It can be
used for diagnostics.
---’Hydraulics configuration download’ enables you to send
a configuration (two files) to the TT.
---’Valve CAN ---ID change’ is used for changing the
CAN ---ID of any PVED ---CC valve (e.g. a spare part ID 128
can be changed to ID 131).
---’Valve spool data download’ is needed to send a correct
spool data file to the PVED ---CC valve control head.
The MultiTool asks you to move all the levers to their centre
positions. This means the joystick and the control levers for
the hydraulics situated on the armrest. Press Enter to start
detection of the controls.
707
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 521.14 60
The column ’Information’:

4.Diagnostics -- Tabular view ---tells the model or the type of the component
---’PVED ---CC’ is the valve control head (Sauer ---Danfoss)
---’locking’ and ’lon ---locking’ mean if there is a mechanical
’lock’ in the control lever (the joystick does not have a lock
but the other levers have it)
---if you open the line by pressing Enter you can see more
detailed information (this is described later in this
instruction)
The column ’Status’:

---tells if the component corresponds to the configuration
file in the TT, it can have four different values: ’OK’,
’Missing’, ’New’, ’Multi’ (the meanings are described later in
this instruction)
The following figures show many different cases and

suggestions for corrective actions.
Move the blue cursor on the line ’Tabular view and Press
Enter to start the function.
Move the blue cursor on the line ’Tabular view and Press
Enter to start the function.
The user interface for the function opens.
The tabular view shows the components of CAN hydraulics ---Green ’OK’ means that the component is found (and it
that should be in the tractor according to the configuration corresponds the configuration file in the TT).
data in the TT. It also checks if components are connected ---Red ’Missing’ means that the component is missing when
and if they are the correct type. compared to the configuration file in the TT. In this case the
In this case ’OK’ is visible on every line, so it seems that the valve no. 4 (CAN ---ID 132) is missing.
system above is working correctly. ---Red ’Error’ means that a control lever or a switch is
The amount of components in the view depends on what missing or it gives signal voltage that is out of acceptance
configuration file is in the TT. limits.
Description of the contents of the columns:
The column ’Component’:

---tells the name of the component used in the MultiTool.
(A table of components is in the section ’Tables’ in this
instruction.)
The column ’CAN ---ID’:

---The valves: tells the CAN identification number of the
component
---Other components: tells what control unit the component
is connected to
The column ’Input’:

---tells what input number the component is connected to
708
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 521.14 61
---Yellow ’New’ means that an extra component is found Valve 0 is found as an extra component. The ’Valve 0’ is a
(when compared to the configuration file). In this case the new spare part with CAN ---ID 128 (it always has CAN ---ID
’Valve 7’ is found as an extra component. 128 when it comes from Spare Parts).
This may be because of two different reasons: In this case the ’Valve 2’ is missing and a spare part
valve/valve control unit is connected => change the
a) you have connected an extra valve that should not be CAN ---ID of the ’Valve 0’ from 128 to 130.
connected => disconnect the extra valve (and check that
there is the terminator resistor on the last valve)
b) there is a wrong configuration file in the TT => check Detailed information about components:
the configuration no. in the TT Detailed information about a component can be seen if
necessary.
Hydraulic valves:
---Orange ’Multi’ means that two or more valves with the

same CAN ---ID have been found (based on how many
messages per second is coming from a certain
PVED ---CC). In this case the ’Valve 3’ is found ’Multi’ that Move the blue cursor on the component name in the
means there are two or more valves with the CAN ---ID 131. column on left and press Enter. Now you can see more
At the same time the ’Valve 4’ is found ’Missing’. information and some values.
This may be because of two different reasons: ---Output name: this shows the valve number, as it is shown
in the TT terminal for the operator, e.g. in NLS AC11.2
a) you have changed the CAN ---ID of the ’Valve 4’ from 132 models output name for ’Valve 1’ is ’1’ and for ’Valve 7’ it is
to 131, so there are two valves with CAN ---ID 131 ’1F’ (the information comes from the configuration file in the
=> disconnect the Valve 3 (the proper one) from the wire TT).
harness => change the CAN ---ID of the ’Valve 4’ from 131
to 132 => connect the Valve 4 back to the harness
b) you have replaced the ’Valve 4’ with another valve that

already has CAN ---ID 131=> the same corrective actions
as in the case a)
709
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 521.14 62
---Estimated flow: Control levers (the joystick and the other levers):
this shows the percentage of maximum flow the valve can
pass through at that moment. This is based on the known
position of the valve spool as there is a position sensor
inside the valve (the information comes from the valve
control unit). In this case the ’Valve 1’ is 30% open to the
positive port. If the value is with a minus the valve is open to
the minus port.
The range of values is:
Float... ---100%... ---0%...Blocked...+0%...+100% (Float = the
actuator can move freely, Blocked = the valve is at closed
position)
Note. the engine must be running, and the hydraulics must

be activated.
Note. When testing a valve you should check that the valve
reaches all the positions i.e. the ’Estimated flow’ should
reach all values mentioned above (if the valve reaches at
least +95% and ---95% the result is acceptable). Move the blue cursor onto the component name in the
column on left and press Enter. Now you can see values of
---’HW part no.’: this number is the same as printed on the the lever, in this case 3.86 V / + 100%. The value 3.86 V is a
valve control unit signal voltage given by the control lever. The value +100%
---’HW version’: special info concerning the electronics is a control value calculated from the signal voltage. Based
inside the valve control unit on the control value (e.g. +100%) the terminal TT sends
control commands to the valve in this case (+100% means
---’Serial no.’: the serial number of the valve control unit (this that the operator wants to get full flow from the valve in this
number is printed on the valve control unit too) case to plus direction).
---’SW part no.’: Sauer ---Danfoss part no. for the application The range of values is:
software in the valve control unit ---F... ---100%... ---0%....N...+0%...+100%...+F (---F and +F =
---’SW version’: version no. of the application software in the the lever is on the function position i.e. pressed over the
valve control unit force threshold, N = the lever is on neutral / center
position).
---Spool ID and Housing ID: these tell about the spool data Check that the signal voltage and the percent value change
file in the valve control unit (the information comes from the evenly when you move the lever evenly.
valve control unit).
(A table of Spool IDs and Housing IDs is in the section Note. When testing a lever you should check that the lever
’Tables’ in this instruction. ) reaches all the positions (i.e. the ’Signal value’ should reach
all values mentioned above).
If the ID numbers are not right you must download the
proper valve spool data file to the valve in case.
If a lever is missing or it gives a signal voltage that is out of

acceptance limits a red ’Error’ is shown in the ’Status’
column. Then the signal values are e.g. 0.00 V / E Vcc and
the values don’t change when you move the lever.
710
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 521.14 63
The selection switch for the joystick: The external control buttons for the front lift:
Move the blue cursor onto the component name in the Move the blue cursor onto the component name in the
column on the left and press Enter. Now you can see the column on left and press Enter. Now you can see values of
values of the selection switch, in this case 0.40 V / R1. The an external button, in this case ’ON / +30%’. The value ON
value 0.40 V is a signal voltage given by the selection means that the button is pressed. The value +30% is a
switch. The value R1 means that the switch is on position control value and it is 30% because the flow is limited by
no. 1. the system in order to limit the motion speed of the front lift.
The values for three positions are:
The values are:
Ext. button (type:Port B) The lifting button for the front lift (at
front of the tractor)
---not pressed: OFF / N
---pressed: ON / + 30%
Ext. button (type: Port A) The lowering button for the front
lift (at front of the tractor)
about 0.40 V / R1 ---not pressed: OFF / N
---pressed: ON / --- 30%
If a button or its’ wiring is broken the signal values are OFF

/ N and the value doesn’t change when you press the
button.
about 0.80 V / R2
about 1.20 V / R3
711
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 521.14 64
5. Sending a hydraulics configuration

By this function it is possible to send a configuration file of
hydraulics to the TT terminal. There are many different
configurations available.
The configuration is a guide for the TT terminal of how to
control the hydraulic system, e.g. that the control lever no. 3
affects to the valve no. 3.
Now you can see the drawing that shows the amount of
valves included in the configuration. Press ESC shortly to
exit from the view.
Move the blue cursor onto the line ’Hydraulics configuration

download’ and press Enter to start the function.
Move the cursor by pressing the right arrow key to the field
’Select’.
The user interface for the function opens.
Press Enter to open a list of configurations available. The

configuration no. ’0.hcm’ is not used usually, it is for special
repairs only.
Move the cursor onto the configuration no. that you want to
send to the TT terminal, ’2.hcm’ in this case. Press Enter to
choose it.
In the field on the left there is the number of the

configuration file that is now stored in the TT terminal. If you
want to see a drawing you should go to the field ’View’ on
the left and press Enter.
712
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 521.14 65
Choose the correct configuration no. by means of the

figures about ’Variations’ in the Operator’s Manual
(’Summary, valves and couplings’ in the section ’F.
Operating instructions’). The number of the configuration
must be the same as the number of the ’Variation’, e.g. for
the ’Variation 2’ choose the configuration ’2.hcm’.
In order to send the configuration move the cursor to the

field ’Download’ and press Enter.
In the field on right you see the configuration no. that you
have selected to be sent. The cursor goes straight to the
field ’Download’.
Now you should accept your choice. Move the cursor to the
field ’Download’ and press Enter. If you want to cancel the
process choose ’Cancel’ and press Enter.
If you want to see a drawing you should go to the field

’View’ and press Enter.
The MultiTool sends the configuration file to the TT terminal.
Now you can see the drawing that shows the amount of
valves included in the configuration. Press ESC shortly to
exit from the view.
713
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 521.14 66
Then the MultiTool sends the ’Curve file’ to the TT terminal. Then the MultiTool makes the same checks as in the
beginning of the application.
When the process is finished you see the message

’Configuration download complete’. Press Enter. The MultiTool asks you to move all the levers to their centre
The MultiTool restarts the hydraulic system in order to take

the new configuration in use. Wait.
Wait.
714
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 521.14 67
At the end the application returns to the menu. The user interface for the function opens.
After this it is recommended to start the ’Tabular view’ in

order to see the system as a whole.
6. Setting the CAN-- ID of a valve control unit

By this function it is possible to change the CAN ---ID of any
valve control unit. Every valve control unit has a specific
CAN ---ID, e.g. 129, that the TT terminal uses when
commanding the valve. The CAN ---ID is like an individual
name for the valve.
The CAN ---ID must be set in the following situations:

---when a valve/valve control unit is replaced by a spare part
---when a valve/valve control unit is replaced by a reused

part
---when more valves are added to the system
In this case we change the CAN ---ID 128 to 130.
Note. For safety reasons the CAN ---ID numbers must be set Press Enter when the cursor is in the field ’Current
as instructed in this instruction. An improper CAN ---ID may CAN ---ID’. In the field there is a list of valve (CAN ---ID
cause an unexpected function of the hydraulic system. numbers) that the MultiTool has found in the tractor.
In this case there is no. 128 found as a new component. It
is ’new’ since it is not included in the actual configuration. A
spare part valve/valve control unit has always the CAN ---ID
128.
Move the cursor on the CAN ---ID 128 and press Enter to
select it.
Move the blue cursor on the line ’Valve CAN ---ID change’
and press Enter to start the function.
715
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 521.14 68
Now you have chosen that you want to change the Now you have chosen that you want to change the
CAN ---ID of the new valve no. 128 (the CAN ---ID becomes CAN ---ID of the new valve from 128 to 130 (the CAN ---ID
also visible on the drawing). also becomes visible on the drawing).
Move the cursor to the right by pressing the right arrow key In order to change the CAN ---ID move the cursor to the field
and press Enter. ’Change’ and press Enter.
In the field ’New CAN ---ID’ there is a list of CAN ---ID Now you should accept your choice. Move the cursor to the
numbers that are possible (except the CAN ---ID’s that are field ’Download’ and press Enter. If you want to cancel the
already found in the tractor). process choose ’Cancel’ and press Enter.
In this case there is no. 130 found as a missing component.
It is ’missing’ since it is included in the actual configuration
but it is not found in the tractor.
Move the cursor on the CAN ---ID 130 and press Enter to
select it.
716
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 521.14 69
Now the MultiTool sets the CAN ---ID of the valve control The MultiTool asks you to move all the levers to their centre
unit. positions. This means the joystick and the control levers for
Now the MultiTool sets the CAN ---ID of the valve control
unit.
Wait.
Now the MultiTool restarts the valves in order to make the

new CAN ---ID to take effect. At the end the application returns to the menu.

order to see the system as a whole.
717
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 521.14 70
7. Sending a valve spool data file

By this function it is possible to send the correct valve spool
data to any valve control unit. The spool data file is a guide
for the valve control unit of how to move the valve spool to
achieve the demanded flow. If the spool data is incorrect
the valve may work poorly, e.g. it can not achieve maximum
flow or the centre position.
Note. You can check if there is a proper spool data in a

valve: Go to the ’Tabular view’ => choose the valve you
want to check => Check ’Spool ID’ and ’Housing ID’..
(A table of Spool IDs and Housing IDs is in the section
’Tables’ in this instruction.)
The spool data file must be sent in the following situations:

---when a valve/valve control unit is replaced by a spare part
In this case we send a spool data file to the valve control
---when a valve/valve control unit is replaced by a reused unit of valve no. 2 (CAN ---ID 130).
part Press Enter when the cursor is in the field ’Select’. In the
---when more valves are added to the system field there is a list of valves (CAN ---ID numbers) that the
---if any of the valves are not working properly MultiTool has found in the tractor. Move the cursor to the
correct CAN ---ID, in this case 130 and press Enter.
Move the blue cursor on the line ’Valve spool data Now you have chosen the CAN ---ID 130.
download’ and press Enter to start the function.
Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the line where
The user interface for the function opens. the correct spool data file is situated. Choose the correct
file, in this case the file ’NLS_TLS aux 1,2,3,4,5’. Press Enter
to select your choice.
Note. Choose the correct file by means of a table in the

chapter ’Tables’ in this instruction.
718
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 521.14 71
Now you should accept your choice. Move the cursor to the The application returns to the selection page. In the field
field ’Download’ and press Enter. If you want to cancel the ’Current spool data:’ in the upper right corner you can see
process choose ’Cancel’ and press Enter. the name of the spool data file that was sent to the valve
control unit.
If you want to send a spool data file to another valve, you

need to select another CAN ---ID. To do that you should
move the cursor upwards to the field ’Valve’ and press
Enter. Then select the CAN ---ID and so on.
When you have finished downloading spool data files press

ESC shortly to return to the menu.
Now the MultiTool sends the selected spool data file to the
valve control unit of the valve no.2 (CAN ---ID 130).
Note. After sending spool data files to the valves the valves
must be restarted. To do that you should move the cursor
on the line ’Hydraulic system identification’ and press Enter.
When the process is finished you see the message

’Download complete’. Press Enter.
719
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 521.14 72
The MultiTool performs the same checks as in the At the end the application returns to the menu.
beginning when starting the application. Wait.
order to see the system as a whole. Check also that the
’Spool ID’ and the ’Housing ID’ are correct.
8.Closing the application

Press ESC for long to close the hydraulics application.
The MultiTool asks you to move all the levers to their centre
Note. If you don’t follow the instruction the detection

process may fail since the TT detects the controls based on
their signal voltage. Switch the ignition key OFF and wait until the MultiTool
beeps. Then switch the ignition ON.
Then MultiTool retrieves information from the hydraulic

valves (PVED ---CC). The MultiTool comes back to the main menu.
If you see any error message during the ’Hydraulic system
identification’ you should start the identification process
again.
720
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 521.14 73
9.Tables
The valves:
Table 1, the valves in the models NLS (AC11.2) and TLS (AC11.2):
Component name in Valve no. in the figure CAN ---ID Spool data file name Spool ID Housing ID
MultiTool above
Valve 1 1 129 NLS_TLS aux 1,2,3,4,5 157B9631 157B6958
Valve 7 1F 135 NLS_TLS aux 1F,2F,3F 157B9631 157B6957

Valve 0 A spare part 129* --- --- ---
* The CAN ---ID of the spare part valve/valve control unit must be changed from 128 to a proper one, e.g. to 130 if the ’Valve 2’
is replaced. Also the correct spool data file must be sent to the valve.
721
Model Code Page
52. MULTITOOL
1.5.2008 All 521.14 74
Controls on the armrest:

1
6
4 5
2
3
Controls at front for the front lift:
Table 2, the controls in the models NLS (AC11.2) and TLS (AC11.2):
Component name in MultiTool Control name Pos. no. in the Range 2)

figures above
Control lever 1 The joystick, direction 1 3 N = centre position
(forward ---backward) ---0%... ---100%
+0% +100%
+0%...+100%
Control lever 2 The joystick, direction 2 3
---F = function area
(left---right)
+F = function area
Control lever 3 The lever no. 3 4
Control lever 4 The lever no. 4 4
Control lever 5 The lever no. 3F 4/51)
Control lever 6 The lever no. 5 4/5
Selection switch The selection switch for the 2 R1 = pos. ’OFF’

joystick (off/rear/front) R2 = pos. ’rear hydr.’
R3 = pos. ’front hydr.’
Ext. button (type:Port B) Lifting button for the front lift (at 7 N = not pressed
front of the tractor) +30% = pressed
Ext. button(type: Port A) Lowering button for the front lift 8 N = not pressed
(at front of the tractor) ---30% = pressed
1) The physical location of the lever may vary depending on the total amount of levers.
2) Detailed instructions for the range are in the section ’Diagnostics --- Tabular view’ in this instruction.
722
61. ESD
60. Other
62. Instrument panel

display unit
63. 37---39, Software for

Valtra tractors
724
Model Code Page
61. ESD
22.1.2006 All 610 1
Contents
61 ESD:
611.1 . . . ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
725
Model Code Page
61. ESD
22.1.2006 All 610 2
726
Model Code Page
61. ESD
22.1.2006 All 611.1 1
ESD (Static electricity)

Static electricity (= frictional electricity)
Static electricity is generated everywhere we move and work. When we are electrically charged and touch a conductive
object, the charge is discharged from our body to the object, causing an ’electric shock’. This phenomenon is known as ESD
(= Electro Static Discharge).
A static charge means that a substance is in a state of electric disequilibrium, which means that the charged object has a
deficit or excess of electrons. Static charges are generated in objects when they touch or rub against other objects.
A static charge may cause problems if it is allowed to discharge uncontrollably. Static charge discharges may damage the
sensitive instruments of the circuit board. The likelihood of the discharge depends on the voltage that exists between the
objects involved in the discharge, and the force of the discharge depends on the amount of discharge energy. With the help
of earthing, the static charge can be discharged in a controlled fashion.
An electrostatic discharge does not necessarily destroy the entire device. Its functionality may be disrupted only partially, or
the device may even seem to function properly, but its lifetime reduces dramatically. Sometimes, damage like this is
impossible to detect even in testing, which affects product reliability. In complex devices and systems, finding and replacing a
single defective component may be difficult and expensive.
Regarding the electric functionality of components, ESD defects can be divided into two main types:
1) Immediate defects, which lead to an obvious deterioration or complete failure of the component right away. The defect is
usually easy to detect, by functional testing, for example.
2) Latent defects, which do not cause drastic changes in immediate component functionality, but rather erode component
reliability and lead to changes in functionality only after weeks or months have passed.
Detecting slight ESD damage is often very difficult. The emergence of latent defects is especially problematic for the user, as
the defect is usually detected only when the component or device breaks down completely. Latent defects amount to up to
90% of all static electricity ---induced component failures.
Depending on its voltage, a static electricity discharge can be felt, heard, or seen.
--- feeling requires a voltage of appr. 3000V
--- hearing requires a voltage of 4000V
--- seeing requires a voltage of over 5000V.
Circuit boards can withstand static electricity discharges of appr. 100V.
Special requirements for handling uncased circuit boards

Uncased circuit boards include for example the T/M/C work hydraulics circuit board (34832900, 34628000), the LCD panel
(34921400), the power lift control unit (33497800), the DPS control unit (32845300) and the S series working lights control unit
(34406300).
When circuit boards are handled, the requirements of the circuit board unit manufacturer and the ESD standard
(SFS ---EN ---61340---5---1/2) must be complied with.
Protection from static electricity and observance of ESD requirements
ESD requirements concerning circuit board handling

Using charge ---absorbing materials
--- storage of circuit boards in their delivery packaging
Using material that protects from static discharges
--- transfer of circuit boards from delivery packaging to installation
--- handling, storage, and dispatch of circuit boards that are to be returned
Use of ESD bracelet
--- when installing circuit boards
--- always when the circuit board is not in its packaging
727
Model Code Page
61. ESD
22.1.2006 All 611.1 2
Circuit board handling instructions concerning maintenance
--- Handling and storage of circuit boards separately from other components.
--- Keep the circuit boards in their packaging prior to installation.
--- Always use the bracelet when taking a circuit board from its packaging and when the circuit board is not in its
packaging.
--- Maintain general cleanness during installation.
--- Return circuit boards in their delivery packaging.
Package markings
ESD bracelet
Use of ESD bracelet during maintenance tasks (Connect the bracelet to ground pin)
728
Model Code Page
62. INSTRUMENT PANEL DISPLAY UNIT
22.1.2006 All 620 1
Content
62 Instrument panel display unit:

621.1 . . . Setting the backlight level of the display unit (Agroline and Proline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
729
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 620 2
730
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 621.1 1
Setting the backlight level of the display unit (Agroline and Proline)
Agroline (changing a parameter value)
12.8
T D321
Activate the backlight brightness level (bL) in the setting mode. The backlights of the instrument panel will flash few times.
Select the right level by pressing the opposite side to the symbol of the change over switch (12.8), adjusting area 1---7.
The backlight brightness level is set and the display goes into ”normal” mode after about 10 seconds without making any
changes or by pressing the symbol side of the change over switch (12.8) for over 3 seconds.
Proline (changing a parameter value)
Increasing a parameter value

--- Press the symbol side of the display change over switch (13.9), the parameter value will increase one step at a time
or
--- Press and hold down the symbol side of the display change over switch (13.9), the parameter value will increase
continuously.
731
Model Code Page
22.1.2006 All 621.1 2
732
63. SOFTWARE FOR VALTRA TRACTORS
19.2.2010 All 630 1
Content
63 Software for Valtra tractors:
Add the newest Service Bulletin 37-- 39 software for Valtra tractors after this page.
733
63. SOFTWARE FOR VALTRA TRACTORS
19.2.2010 All 630 2
734
Distribution
EXPORT
Service Bulletin
SB Product
Mezzo EEM, Mega EEM
Group
37
Regarding HiTech, T Series, M Series, N Series, C Series No
039
VALTRA MultiTool SERVICE TERMINAL Issued by Date Sheet
SOFTWARE MPe/LSa 947 2010 / 19 1(11)
New software for Valtra MultiTool has now been released. This software is to be used for servicing
Valtra tractors with a Valtra MultiTool service terminal.
Valtra MultiTool software can be found in the Valtra Service Bulletin and Part Information Database,
and also with this bulletin on the Internet at https://dealer.valtra.com.
If you do not have access to the database or the dealer.valtra.com website, please contact your
nominated Valtra or Agco contact person.
Please see the general information in the Diagnostics and Programming Manual for details on
programming, calibration and engine settings. Some instructions are included as an attachment to this
bulletin.
This Service Bulletin contains the MultiTool software package MultiTool_v7.1.0.0. (version 7.1.0.0).
This software package replaces all previous software packages.
Note! To open the software package on a memory card, you must have "WinZip" software installed
on your computer. E.g. Any package unzipped using the facility included in Windows Vista is not
compatible with MultiTool.
NOTE. The use of previous versions (V1.0.0.0 – V3.6.3.0) of the MultiTool software package
(released prior to v.4.0.0.0) is prohibited. All previous software packages V1.0.0.0 – V3.6.3.0
must be deleted from all storage locations so that they can never be recalled (memory cards,
computer drives, memory sticks etc.). This should be done in order to avoid damaging the engine
control unit during tractor programming (the previous MultiTool versions cannot distinguish the new
EEM3 controller from the old one).
Note. This change is not related to a campaign, but is due to normal software development. New
software may not be downloaded to a tractor without a valid reason.
Memory card
This software package cannot be stored on a 32 MB or a 128 MB memory card. The suitable memory
cards tested are:
- SimpleTech SLCF 256 MM1 UI (256 MB), part no. 37064700 (NB: possible time of delivery)
- Cactus KC1GFI-303 (1 GB), part no. 39367500 (NB: possible time of delivery)
Note. Valtra will not be liable for the functioning of MultiTool if memory cards from other
manufacturers or of another model are used instead of those described in this Bulletin.
SB 37-039 2010 / 19 2
The software package contains:
1) MultiTool software
This new version contains the following MultiTool applications. Functions and properties that
were not available in MultiTool version 6.6.1.0 or that have been updated in this new version are
underlined (if any changes have been made):
Note: the latest useful functions added are as follows:
* Reading stored service codes, saving them on a memory card and deleting them from the memory.
* Package programming Î A number of properties that make the software easier to use have
been added e.g. information on missing control units and a reorganised information page.
* Package programming and engine programming Î The engine software has been removed
from tractor software packages for all models equipped with the Common Rail engine control.
When the tractor is programmed, the package programming is carried out first and then the engine
control unit is programmed.
A different procedure may be followed in exceptional cases, such as when only the engine control
unit needs to be programmed (e.g. due to a damaged ID module). Under such circumstances, the
engine control unit can be programmed separately and the tractor left unprogrammed, thus
avoiding unnecessary transmission calibrations.
• Starting MultiTool and searching for/entering the frame number

From MultiTool software package v6.0.0.0 onwards, the tractor number on the TC1
control unit can be changed if necessary. This feature is needed, for example when a
TC1 control unit from another tractor is installed in a tractor.
• Basic tractor settings (maximum driving speed and tyre parameter) For models with
a mechanical or VP injection system (EEM2). Not for synchro models or tractors with
Common Rail engine.
• Transmission function for Versu and Direct tractor models: "Versu/Direct settings +
calibrations" This application can be used to set the indexes of the transmission control
unit and to calibrate the transmission in Versu and Direct models. All indexes can also be
saved on a memory card from which they can be restored to the tractor. It is also possible
to restore the default settings ("factory settings"). The names of the indices are visible on
the MultiTool display, so it is possible to find the correct index without even using the
manual. Versu tractors: The names of the indices and calibrations appear in all MultiTool
languages from MultiTool version 6.0.0.0 onwards. Direct tractors: The names of the
indices and calibrations appear in most MultiTool languages from MultiTool version
6.6.0.0 onwards.
SB 37-039 2010 / 19 3
The functioning of setting indices and calibrating has been improved from MultiTool
version 6.7.1.0 onwards. Previously, unnecessary error messages could appear and the
calibration page would only open after several attempts.
• Tractor hydraulics testing and settings (NLS, T1LS, Versu and Direct models)
This application can be used to view the hydraulic control system and the functioning
of its components. These functions are also required when installing auxiliary valves
and spare parts. The functions are: table view (troubleshooting), hydraulic assembly
upload, valve guide head CAN-ID change and valve spool data change.
MultiTool software package v4.5.1.0 includes an addition to the valve CAN-ID

change function: When the valve guide CAN-ID is changed, MultiTool runs a check
on the two valve control unit parameters and corrects them if necessary. The latest
software package must be used when servicing and repairing the hydraulic system.
More detailed instructions are available in Service Bulletin no. 92-51 and its appendix.
MultiTool software package v4.7.0.0 includes an addition to the tabular view of

hydraulics: the uppermost line "TT commands" has been added. It displays the
valve commands sent by the tractor terminal in real time: neutral (middle pos.), -
100%...+100%, floating). This function can be used to check the following,
for example:
- does the armrest function correctly e.g. does the time or float command stay on
- does the valve comply with the command it receives
Files for the Versu and Direct models have been added to the downloadable hydraulics
configuration from MultiTool package 6.0.0.0 onwards.
SB 37-039 2010 / 19 4
• EEM2VP engine: basic settings

Basic settings for engine with a VP pump (EEM2).
• EEM2VP/EEM3CR: testing and adjustments

For troubleshooting and adjusting EEM engines featuring VP pumps and
Common Rail.
Automatic detection of the engine's electrical system (EEM2 or EEM3).
In tractors with a Common Rail engine, basic engine settings and adjustments can be
performed with the MultiTool, starting with tractor no. T23150.
The number of the currently active torque curve can now also be seen in Versu and
Direct tractors from MultiTool software version 6.7.1.0 onwards (with previous
software versions this information was not available).
The numbering of the torque curves on the MultiTool display has also been changed to
comply with new standards (applies to all Common Rail EEM3 engines). This change
does not apply to EEM2 engines (with VP distributor pumps).
The torque curves are now numbered 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (previously 1, 2, 3, 4). The current
number is one number smaller than the previous number. For instance, torque curve
number 2 selected in the image would previously have been torque curve number 3.
In tractors with a Common Rail engine, the MultiTool can be used to temporarily
bypass the power reduction caused by the ID module, starting with tractor no. U02107.
When this function has been activated, the engine supplies full power for 50 operating
hours, in which time the spare part will become available.
If you wish to apply the aforementioned functions to an older tractor, the
MultiTool_v4.5.0.0 software package or above must first be installed.
In tractors with Common Rail engines, MultiTool can now show several specification
numbers in the control unit software instead of only one specification number shown
before. The function is valid from MultiTool_v4.7.0.0 onwards. The function is useful
when an engine control unit manufactured in 2008 is installed in a previously
manufactured tractor. The engine now supplies full power if any of the specification
numbers of the engine control unit are identical to the specification number in the ID
module. E.g. the correct case is shown in the figure below (number 74512 is in both
columns).
SB 37-039 2010 / 19 5
In tractors with Common Rail engines, MultiTool can be used to combine the engine
control unit and the ID module (engine serial number is changed to match the ID
module number). The function can be used when installing a used control unit in
another tractor (in the event of a fault, the engine control unit can be replaced to see if
this solves the problem and, if necessary, the control unit can even be left in the
tractor). This function is valid with engine control unit software version 1.4.0.0,
2.4.1.0 or above. If the software is older, program the tractor using MultiTool_v4.7.0.0
or above. E.g. the figure below illustrates a situation in which the engine serial number
in the engine control unit does not match the number in the ID module. The control
units must be coupled using the function by pressing the Enter key.
• Reading active service codes

Engine service codes can be viewed in the form SPN-FMI-SA as defined in the standards
(e.g. 000091-03-000), i.e. in the same way that the service codes of models N121LS and
N141LS can be seen in the tractor itself. In Versu, Direct and Advance (LS) models,
MultiTool can also be used to view the service codes of other control units. Moreover,
service codes can be saved on the memory card as a file (saved in the directory under a
"log/" name containing the tractor and engine numbers). Note! Service code reading can
be started directly from the MultiTool main menu by selecting "Testing".
• Reading and removing stored service codes

Some of the control units store the service codes in their own memory as an error log file.
This MultiTool application can be used to read the service codes stored in the control
units. Moreover, service codes can be saved on the memory card as a file (saved in the
directory under a "log/" name containing the tractor and engine numbers). If necessary, the
stored codes can also be deleted from the memory of a control unit.
The service codes can only be deleted from one control unit at a time. Note. It is not
currently possible to delete the lift linkage (CAN-ID 035) service codes and MultiTool
displays an error message if you try to delete them. After trying to delete the lift linkage
service codes, it is advisable to switch off the power for a moment using the ignition
switch. This problem will later be resolved by changing the TC1 software.
SB 37-039 2010 / 19 6
Note. It is only possible to read the stored service codes of hydraulic valves when the
hydraulics have been activated (valves are powered). It is prohibited to delete the
service codes of hydraulic valves, so MultiTool will not allow deletion.
• Input/output testing
Displays the values of the inputs and outputs of control units (EC, TC1, TC2, UC1,
UC2, TT, ISOAD, SUS1 cab suspension).
In Versu and Direct tractors, some of the inputs and outputs of the TC1 have not been
visible on the MultiTool display (not enough space on the display). This problem has
been solved from MultiTool software package v6.1.0.0 onwards. The test has also
been speeded up: Now the display only displays 10 items at a time, so the values from
the control unit can be retrieved more quickly than before. The previous and following
items can be displayed by scrolling the screen using the left/right arrow keys.
• Programming, HiTech, "HiTech, X (not EEM) – R41107"

This can be used to program the HiTech and X(HiTech) models without EEM engine
and when the tractor number is below R41108.
• Package programming, "C,M,N,T / EEM / 6250-6350 R41108--":

This can be used to program tractors using a "package" in tractor models that support
this method. From MultiTool software package v6.0.0.0 onwards, "package
programming" no longer includes software for Common Rail engines (applies to
all CR models). In these models, the engine must be programmed separately using the
new "Programming EEM3CR engine" application to which it is possible to go directly
from "package loading" after the other control units have been loaded. The engine can
also be left unprogrammed. You can also access the engine programming directly from
the main menu, so the engine can be programmed separately without needing to
program other tractor control units.
After the software package and parameter package have been sent, an information
window appears telling the user which control units have received new software/
parameters. For instance, the following text may appear: "Note. New software in control
units no.: 3. Information on software saved on memory card in 'log' directory".
On the Information page, the control units are grouped so that the standard control
units that belong to the software package are at the top, and the other control units are
at the bottom in their own group. An additional group may appear between them
telling the user which control units should be in use or which control units are missing
(only in fault situations). See figure below
SB 37-039 2010 / 19 7
From MultiTool software package v6.0.0.0 onwards, the package programming can
tell the user what is wrong if the control units in the tractor do not match the
software package of the selected tractor model. In this case, it will also indicate
which control unit is missing or superfluous.
For example, the following text may appear: "Error, number of control units is
incorrect. Missing control units: CAN-ID: 3. See Information page".
From MultiTool software package v6.0.0.0 onwards, the package programming

prevents the user from exiting the application if the software package has been
loaded, but the parameter package has not. In this case, the following text appears:
"Parameters missing. Send parameter file".
The aim of this feature is to prevent the TC1/TC2 control unit from being locked
("disappearing from the CAN bus"), which sometimes occurs while programming
a tractor.
• Programming, EEM3CR engine:

This allows the Common Rail engine to be programmed separately. From MultiTool
software package v6.0.0.0 onwards, "package programming" no longer includes software
for Common Rail engines (applies to all CR models). It is now possible to program the
engine control unit without accessing the software in other control units.
This application can be launched directly from the MultiTool Main Menu, or it is
possible to go to it directly from the "package loading" after the other control units
have been loaded.
- If the ID module is not damaged and it is connected to the wiring harness, MultiTool
can automatically find the software suitable for the engine control unit of the tractor in
question (based on the information from the ID module).
- If the information in the ID module is not available (the module is broken or
missing), MultiTool will list all the software available, and the service technician must
then choose the software suitable for the tractor in question.
SB 37-039 2010 / 19 8
MultiTool recognises the different EEM3 engine control unit generations (1 and 2),
and can automatically select the appropriate software (separate software has been
developed for the two control unit versions). Therefore it is not necessary for the
service technician to know the version of the control unit, because MultiTool offers
only the applicable software packages for download. The control unit was changed at
the beginning of 2008; see Service Bulletin no. 24-133.
On the information page, the following information is visible: “EC Eng Spec Number:”
This is the official number (there may be several) of the software for the Common Rail
engine in question. One of the numbers must match the number in the ID module.
• Programming, optional equipment

This can be used to program optional tractor equipment one control unit at a time.
Separate instructions have been provided for the software; they are attached to these
instructions. Optional equipment that can be programmed:
-ISOAD, CAN-ID 220 (ISOBUS and implement signal control unit ISO11783/11786)
-UC2, CAN-ID 6 (TwinTrac control unit in LS models)
-SUS1, CAN-ID 47 (cab suspension control unit)
-SECU, CAN-ID 50 (Additional control unit for Auto-Guide)
• CAN-ID setting
Note. This only applies to control unit no. 33373030 ("old" TC1 and TC2); it does not
apply to Versu and Direct control units.
If required, this can be used to download the correct Can ID to the TC1 or TC2 control
unit, for example, while installing a used control unit in the tractor when the Can ID of
the unit is incorrect or missing.
If required, this can also be used to download the boot software to the ISOAD (Isobus)
control unit. Can-ID is also loaded with this. Note. An RS connector—which can only
be found in the old MultiTool cable no. 35660430—must be used to connect the
control unit. The boot software must be downloaded to the ISOAD control unit if a
software or parameter package cannot be loaded.
• Testing the CAN bus

This application allows messages and the control units that send messages on CAN
bus to be viewed. Choosing the function "Control Units On Can Bus" provides a quick
view of live control units (i.e. units that are sending CAN messages). Note that control
units ISOAD, SUS1 and LCD (pillar display) do not send messages continuously, but
only send one message when the input voltage is switched on.
• Special download
This may only be used in special cases. Further details are provided by Valtra on a
case-by-case basis. For example, if incorrect software is downloaded to the engine
control unit, the unit may be damaged and cannot be used any more.
• Most applications can operate in nine different languages: Fin, Swe, Eng, De, Fr, Sp,
Nl, Ita and Port.
SB 37-039 2010 / 19 9
2) Tractor software
This software package contains the following tractor software packages:
2a) Software that can be loaded with the MultiTool application

"Software"> ’HiTech,X (not EEM) –R41107’:
The rows with new or changed software packages have been typed in bold.
Tractor models: Software version:

HiTech 1.0 (Î K41106) AC5 V53, V65
HiTech 2.0 (K41107- AC5.2 V86
ÎR41107)
2b) Software that can be loaded with the MultiTool application

"Software" > "C,M,N,T / EEM2 / 6250-6350 R41108--":
The rows with new or changed software packages have been typed in bold.

HiTech 2.0 (R41108Î) AC5.2 V1.0.0.0
HiTech 8950AC6 AC6.0 V3.0.0.0
HiTech EEM AC5.4 V1.15.0.0
Mezzo EEM, Mega EEM AC2.4 V1.6.0.0
C90-C110 AC8.3 V1.10.0.0

C120-C150 AC8.5 V1.12.0.0

M120-M150 AC5.5 V1.16.0.0
N82h-N92h AC13.0 V1.0.0.0

N91h-N111h AC10.0 V1.0.0.0
N111eh AC10.1 V1.0.0.0
N101cCR AC9.2 No software package; program the engine separately 1)
N101hCR AC10.2 V2.6.0.0
N111ehCR AC10.2 V2.6.0.0
N121h-N141h AC10.2 V2.6.0.0
N111eLS AC11.2 V2.15.0.0
N121LS-N141LS AC11.2 V2.15.0.0
N122V-N142V (Versu) AC15.2 V1.11.0.0
N122D-N142D (Direct) AC14.2 V1.13.0.0
T120-T170 AC5.3 V1.10.0.0

T120-T170 EEM AC5.5 V1.16.0.0
T120c-T170c AC2.4 V1.6.0.0
T120cH-T170cH AC5.4 V1.15.0.0
T180, T190 AC6.1-6.2 V1.33.0.0
T160CR AC6.6 V2.5.0.0
T170CR AC5.6 V2.5.0.0
T170cCR AC2.7 No software package; program the engine separately 1)
T170cHCR AC5.7 V2.5.0.0
T180CR-T190CR AC6.6 V2.5.0.0
T121c-T171c AC9.2 No software package; program the engine separately 1)
SB 37-039 2010 / 19 10
T121h-T171h AC10.2 V2.6.0.0

T151eh AC10.2 V2.6.0.0
T191h AC10.21 V2.6.0.0

T151eLS-T191LS AC11.2 V2.14.0.0
T132V-T202V (Versu) AC15.2 V1.11.0.0
T132D-T202D (Direct) AC14.2 V1.13.0.0
1)
Program the engine of these tractor models using MultiTool application "EEM3CR engine
(Common Rail)". See the following section of these instructions (2c) and "Software for Valtra
CR engines".
2c) EEM3CR engine (Common Rail) Software that can be loaded with the MultiTool
application "Software" > "EEM3CR engine":
Note. Two software versions have been developed for certain tractor models (due to the CR
engine control unit change). MultiTool automatically selects the software that includes the
applicable software. This is also explained in the table "Software for Valtra CR engines".
The rows with new or changed software have been typed in bold.
Tractor models: Software versions:

N1 series V1.5.0.0, V2.5.0.0
N2 series (Versu, Direct) V2.5.2.3
T series V1.5.0.0, V2.5.0.0

T190CR V1.5.2.4, V2.5.2.3
T1 series V1.5.0.0, V2.5.0.0

T191h, T191LS V1.5.2.4, V2.5.2.3
T2 series (Versu, Direct) V2.5.2.3
2d) Optional equipment

Software that can be loaded with MultiTool "Software in tractor" > "Optional equipment":
The rows with new or changed software have been typed in bold.
Optional equipment: Software version:

Isobus and implement signal connector ISO11783 / ISO11786 V0.4.4.14
"AutoComfort" SUS1 cab suspension V1.0.1.1
UC2 "TwinTrac" reverse drive controls V1.0.4.0
Auto-Guide SECU additional control unit V1.0.1.2
SB 37-039 2010 / 19 11
Using the MultiTool software package:
User instructions for the MultiTool software package can be found in the "Diagnostics and
Programming Manual",
section no. 52.
The "Software for Valtra tractors" appendix contains tables to help you select the appropriate
software version for your tractor.
The "Software for Valtra CR engines" appendix contains tables to help you select the appropriate
software version for your engine.
The "Software for Valtra optional equipment" appendix contains tables to help you select the
appropriate software version for optional equipment.
Changes to software are described in the "Software changes" appendix.
If MultiTool does not start, check the following:

-The memory card is connected to MultiTool before MultiTool is connected to the tractor or power source.
-The backlight in the MultiTool keyboard is lit (current supply is in working order)
-The type of the memory card is correct (types mentioned above under memory card section).
-Prepare the memory card again: 1. Format the card. 2. Unzip the software package on the card.
-If all of the above are in order but MultiTool still does not start, please contact your nominated
Valtra or Agco contact person. MultiTool equipment can be updated with a special software package
(MTool bootcode update v0.93.zip).
The recommended memory card is SimpleTech SLCF256MM1UI, part no. 37064700 or Cactus
KC1GFI-303 (1 GB), part no. 39367500.
If this doesn't help either, try to update the special software package with a 32 or 64 MB Sandisk
memory card.
This Service Bulletin is updated each time new software is officially released.
(Note: Valtra Service Tool is no longer supported. Previous Service Tool software versions can be
found as attachments in bulletins 37-36, 37-37, 37-38 and 37-40.)
APPENDICES Software for Valtra tractors

Software for Valtra CR engines
Software for Valtra optional equipment
Software changes
Programming procedure_Versu
Calibration instructions_Versu
Indexes_Versu
Programming procedure_Direct
Calibration instructions_Direct
Indexes_Direct
This is technical information and the repair of these parts shall be handled under the normal warranty
terms and conditions.
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 1/21
SOFTWARE FOR VALTRA TRACTORS
1. Index
1. Index................................................................................................................................................1
2. Notes on how to use the tables ......................................................................................................2
2.1. MultiTool application "Software" > "C,M,N,T…: ...................................................................2
2.2. MultiTool application "Software" > "HiTech,X…:..................................................................3
3. C Series............................................................................................................................................4
3.1. C90-C150 [AC8.3, 8.5].............................................................................................................4
4. M and XM Series ...........................................................................................................................5
4.1. M120-M150, XM130-XM150 [AC5.5]....................................................................................5
5. N Series............................................................................................................................................6
5.1. N91-N141 (cCR, h, eh, hCR, ehCR, LS) [AC9.2, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, 11.2]................................6
5.2. N82-N92 ( h ) [AC13.0]............................................................................................................7
5.3. N122-N142 (V) Versu [AC15.2] ..............................................................................................8
5.3. N122-N142 (D) Direct [AC14.2]..............................................................................................9
6. T Series..........................................................................................................................................10
6.1. T120-T190 (-, e, CR ) [AC5.3, 5.5, 5.6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.6] ............................................................10
6.2. T120-T170 (cH, ecH, cHCR) [AC5.4, 5.7] ............................................................................12
6.3. T120-T170 (c, ec, cCR) [AC2.4, 2.7] .....................................................................................13
6.4. T121-T191 (c, h, eh, LS) [AC9.2, 10.2, 10.21, 11.2] .............................................................14
6.5. T132-T202 (V, eV) Versu [AC15.2] ......................................................................................15
6.5. T132-T202 (D) Direct [AC14.2].............................................................................................16
7. HiTech EEM.................................................................................................................................17
7.1. 6550H-8150H, 8950AC6 [AC5.4, 6.0]...................................................................................17
8. HiTech 1 and 2 (not EEM) ..........................................................................................................18
8.1. 6250-8950 ÎK41106 [AC5]..................................................................................................18
8.2. 6550-8950, X100-X120 K41107Î [AC5.2]..........................................................................19
8.3. 6250-6350 K41107ÎR41107 [AC5.2] ..................................................................................19
8.4.6250-6350 R41108Î [AC5.2] ................................................................................................20
9. Mezzo & Mega EEM Series ........................................................................................................21
9.1. 6400 EEM-8150 EEM [AC2.4] ..............................................................................................21
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 2/21
2. Notes on how to use the tables
These instructions contain tables to help you select the correct software for models:
C, M, N, T, Hitech, Mezzo EEM and Mega EEM.
Engine software:
Some software packages also include software for the electronic EC engine control unit.
-Engines with the Common Rail injection system: The engine software is not included in the
software package
-Other engines: The engine software is included in the software package
The EC engine control unit must always be connected to the tractor’s wiring harness during
programming.
Notes on how to use the tables:
Figures 1, 2 and 3 contain instructional notes relating to the columns mentioned in the software
tables on the following pages.
2.1. MultiTool application "Software" > "C,M,N,T…:
Column 4
Column 5
Column 6
Figure 1.
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 3/21
2.2. MultiTool application "Software" > "HiTech,X…:
Column 4a
Column 5a
Column 6a
Column 6b
Figure 2.
Column 7a
Figure 3.
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 4/21
3. C Series
Note. The TC1 and TC2 control units must have part no. 33373030.
Only use software and parameter packages mentioned in the table below. Earlier versions
must not be used.
Only use the MultiTool software version 4.0.0.0 or above.
Note: Some models have two alternative software packages. See note 2 for details on how to select
the correct software.
3.1. C90-C150
[AC8.3, 8.5]
Table: Choosing the correct software for a specific tractor
1. Tractor model 2. Control 3 4. Tractor model 5. Software package 6. Parameter
units 1) (see Figure 1 on the to be loaded package to be
(CAN-ID) first page) loaded
Tractors with mechanically injection pump (Bosch VE):

C90 AC8.3 3 C90-C110
C90 AC8.3 + turbine clutch 3 C90-C110 AC8.3 AC8.3_V1.10.0.0 C90-C110_HT
C100 AC8.3 3 C90-C110
C100 AC8.3 + turbine clutch 3 C90-C110_HT
C110 AC8.3 3 C90-C110
C110 AC8.3 + turbine clutch 3 C90-C110_HT
Tractors with electronically controlled injection pump (Bosch VP):

C120 AC8.5 03 C120 V1.12.0.0 A or C120
C120 AC8.5 + turbine clutch 03 C120-C150 AC8.5 C120 V1.12.0.0 B 2) C120_HT
C120e AC8.5 EcoPower 03 C120e V1.12.0.0 A or C120e
C120e V1.12.0.0 B 2)
C130 AC8.5 03 C130 V1.12.0.0 A or C130
C130 AC8.5 + turbine clutch 03 C130 V1.12.0.0 B 2) C130_HT
C150 AC8.5 03 C150 V1.12.0.0 A or C150
C150 V1.12.0.0 B 2)
Note. 1) The CAN ID numbers of the control units (control units included in the software package):
Control unit EC (A1M) TC1 (A1A)
CAN-ID 0 3
Note 2)
How to find the correct software package:
Download software package A. If service code E228 appears, you must download package B.
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 5/21
4. M and XM Series
must not be used.
Note: Some models have two alternative software packages. Please see note 3 for details on how to
select the correct software.
4.1. M120-M150, XM130-XM150

[AC5.5]
1. Tractor model 2. Control 3 4. Tractor model 5. Software package 6. Parameter package
units 1) (see Figure 1 on the to be loaded to be loaded
(CAN-ID) first page)
M120 AC5.5 2) 03 M120 V1.16.0.0 A or M120

M120 AC5.5 + turbine clutch 03 M120-M150 AC5.5 M120 V1.16.0.0 B 3) M120_HT
M120e AC5.5 EcoPower 2) 03 M120e V1.16.0.0 A or M120e
M120e V1.16.0.0 B 3)
M130 AC5.5 03 M130 V1.16.0.0 A or M130
XM130 AC5.5 M130 V1.16.0.0 B 3)
M130 AC5.5 + turbine clutch 03 M130_HT
M150 AC5.5 03 M150 V1.16.0.0 A or M150
XM150 AC5.5 M150 V1.16.0.0 B 3)
CAN-ID 0 3
Note 2)
For model M120, you must always check whether the motor is an EcoPower (low rpm) or a standard version.
This can be seen from the markings printed on the engine type label (also on the engine control unit):
44.278, 2200 rpm = M120 (standard rpm)
44.279, 1800 rpm = M120e (EcoPower)
Reason: When series production first started, the M120 model was EcoPower (low rpm), but now it is standard rpm.
Note. 3)
How to find the correct software package:
Download software package A. If service code E228 appears, you must download package B.
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 6/21

5. N Series
must not be used.
5.1. N91-N141 (cCR, h, eh, hCR, ehCR, LS)

[AC9.2, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, 11.2]

1. Tractor model 2. Control 4. Tractor model 5. Software package 6. Parameter
Tractors with mechanically controlled injection pump:

N91h, N101h, N111h AC10.0 3 N91h to N111h
N91h, N101h, N111h AC10.0 3 N91h-N111h AC10.0 AC10.0 V1.0.0.0 N91h-N111h_HT
+ turbine clutch
Tractors with electronically controlled VP injection pump:

N111eh AC10.1 03 N111eH AC10.1 N111eH V1.0.0.0 N111eH
Tractors with common rail fuel system:

N101cCR AC9.2 - 2) - -
--
N101hCR AC10.2 3 N101-N141hCR

N101hCR AC10.2 +turbine 3 N101hCR-N141h AC10.2 V2.6.0.0 N101-
clutch N121hCR_HT
N111ehCR AC10.2 3 N111ehCR
N121h AC10.2 3 N101-N141hCR
N121h AC10.2 +turbine clutch 3 N101-
N121hCR_HT
N141h AC10.2 3 N101-N141hCR
LS (Advance) models:
N111eLS AC11.2 3 4 5 40 N111eLS
N121LS AC11.2 3 4 5 40 N111eLS-N141LS AC11.2 V2.15.0.0 N121LS-N141LS
N121LS AC11.2 +turbine clutch 3 4 5 40 N121LS_HT
N141LS AC11.2 3 4 5 40 N121LS-N141LS
Control unit EC (A1M) TC1 (A1A) TC2 (A1C, A2A) UC1 (A3A) TT (P2)
CAN-ID 0 3 4 5 40
Note. 2) No software package exists for the tractor model. Program the engine separately with the MultiTool
application: "Programming, EEM3CR engine".
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 7/21

must not be used.
5.2. N82-N92 ( h )
[AC13.0]


N82h, N92h AC10.0 3 N82h-N92h
N82h, N92h AC10.0 3 N82h-N92h AC13.0 AC13.0 V1.0.0.0 N82h-N92h _HT
+ turbine clutch
Control unit TC1 (A1A)
CAN-ID 3
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 8/21
must not be used.
5.3. N122-N142 (V) Versu

[AC15.2]
V (Versu) models:
N122 V AC15.2 3 4 5 40 59
N142V AC15.2 3 4 5 40 59 N122V-N142V V AC15.2 V1.11.0.0 VERSU N122V-N142V
(See Notice 2)
Control unit TC1 (A1A) TC2 (A2A) UC1 (A3A) TT (P2) ICL (P6) Pillar display
CAN-ID 3 4 5 40 59
Note 2) Before programming the tractor, write down the values of indices 1, 3, 30, 440, 441, 451 and 453. Sometimes
the values of these indexes may disappear during software upload and the indexes need to be reset. Having the values
written down can also be useful in potential problem situations.
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 9/21
must not be used.
5.3. N122-N142 (D) Direct

[AC14.2]
D (Direct) models:
N122 D AC14.2 3) 3 4 5 40 59
N142 D AC14.2 3) 3 4 5 40 59 N122D-N142D V AC14.2 V1.13.0.0 DIRECT N122D-N142D
(See Notice 2)
CAN-ID 3 4 5 40 59
Note 3) The type plate of Direct tractors may display an incorrect AC ID for the control system (under "Model"), e.g.
N122 D AC15.2 instead of N122 D AC14.2. This only applies to tractors with chassis number V43423 or earlier.
In some tractors, identification must be performed based on the first part of the model number. For instance, T132 D is
a Direct tractor according to this table. It is also possible to identify the tractor model by the cab equipment: The Direct
model side panel is equipped with a Speed Balance control that is not present on Versu models.
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 10/21

6. T Series
must not be used.
6.1. T120-T190 (-, e, CR )

[AC5.3, 5.5, 5.6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.6]

T120, T130 AC5.3 3 T120-T130
T140e AC5.3 EcoPower 3 T120-T170 AC5.3 AC5.3_V1.10.0.0 T140e
T160, T170 AC5.3 3 T160-T170

T120 AC5.5 2) 03 T120 V1.16.0.0 2) T120
T130 AC5.5 2) 03 T120-T170 EEM AC5.5 T130 V1.16.0.0 2) T130
T140e AC5.5 EcoPower 2) 03 T140e V1.16.0.0 2) T140e
T150 AC5.5 03 T150 V1.16.0.0 A or T150
T150 V1.16.0.0 B 4)
T160 AC5.5 2) 03 T160 V1.16.0.0 2) T160
T170 AC5.5 2) 03 T170 V1.16.0.0 2) T170
T180 AC6.1/6.2 3) 034 T180-T190 AC6.1-6.2 T180 V1.33.0.0 3) T180

T190 AC6.1/6.2 3) 034 T190 V1.33.0.0 3) T190

T160CR AC6.6 34 T160CR AC6.6 V2.5.0.0 T160CR
T170CR AC5.6 3 T170CR AC5.6 V2.5.0.0 T170CR
T180CR AC6.6 34 T180CR-T190CR AC6.6 V2.5.0.0 T180CR

T190CR AC6.6 34 T190CR
Control unit EC (A1M) TC1 (A1A) TC2 (A1C)
CAN-ID 0 3 4
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 11/21
Note 2) Tractors T120-T170 up to and including frame no. P10550 (if EC software is older than version 1.2.0.0): The
engine control unit must be replaced by a spare EC unit before software is updated. If not, this will result in service
code E228 (power parameters too high) and power reduction. This is because later software requires higher maximum
power limits saved in the engine control unit.
Note 3) Tractors T180-T190 up to and including tractor model no. N17207 (if EC software is older than version
1.0.0.0): After reprogramming, service code E228 (power parameters too high) may appear if the engine control unit's
software is older than version 1.0.0.0. The EC control unit must then be replaced. This is because later software requires
higher maximum power limits saved in the engine control unit.
Note 4) Finding the correct software package: Download software package A. If service code E228 appears, you must
download package B.
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 12/21
must not be used.
6.2. T120-T170 (cH, ecH, cHCR)

[AC5.4, 5.7]

T120cH AC5.4 03 T120cH V1.15.0.0 T120cH
T130cH AC5.4 03 T120cH-T170cH AC5.4 T130cH V1.15.0.0 T130cH
T140ecH AC5.4 EcoPower 03 T140ecH V1.15.0.0 T140ecH
T150cH AC5.4 03 T150cH V1.15.0.0 A T150cH
T160cH AC5.4 03 T160cH V1.15.0.0 T160cH
T170cH AC5.4 03 T170cH V1.15.0.0 T170cH

T170cHCR AC5.7 3 T170cHCR AC5.7 V2.5.0.0 T170cHCR
CAN-ID 0 3
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 13/21
must not be used.
6.3. T120-T170 (c, ec, cCR)

[AC2.4, 2.7]

T120c AC2.4 0 T120c V1.6.0.0 No parameters
T130c AC2.4 0 T120c-T170c AC2.4 T130c V1.6.0.0 No parameters
T140ec AC2.4 EcoPower 0 T140ec V1.6.0.0 No parameters
T150c AC2.4 0 T150c V1.6.0.0 A No parameters

T170cCR AC2.7 - 2) - -
--
Control unit EC (A1M)
CAN-ID 0
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 14/21
must not be used.
6.4. T121-T191 (c, h, eh, LS)

[AC9.2, 10.2, 10.21, 11.2]
1. Tractor model 2. Control 4. Tractor model 5. Software 6. Parameter
units 1) (see Figure 1 on the package to be package to be
(CAN-ID) first page) loaded loaded
"Synchro" transmission (Common Rail fuel system):

T121c AC9.2 -- -- --
2)
T131c AC9.2 -- -- -- --
T161c AC9.2 -- -- --
T171c AC9.2 -- -- --
"HiTech" transmission (Common Rail fuel system):

T121h AC10.2 3 T121h
T131h AC10.2 3 T121h-T171h AC10.2 V2.6.0.0 T131h
T151eh AC10.2 3 T151eh
T161h AC10.2 3 T161-T171h
T171h AC10.2 3 T161-T171h
T191h AC10.21 34 T191h AC10.21 V2.6.0.0 T191h
LS (Advance) models (Common Rail fuel system):

T151eLS AC11.2 3 4 5 40 T151eLS
T161LS AC11.2 3 4 5 40 T151LS-T191LS AC11.2 V2.14.0.0 T161LS-T171LS
T171LS AC11.2 3 4 5 40
T191LS AC11.2 3 4 5 40 T191LS
Control unit TC1 (A1A) TC2 (A2A) UC1 (A3A) TT (P2)
CAN-ID 3 4 5 40
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 15/21
must not be used.
6.5. T132-T202 (V, eV) Versu

[AC15.2]
V (Versu) models:
T132 V AC15.2 3 4 5 40 59
T152 V AC15.2 3 4 5 40 59 T132V-T202V V AC15.2 V1.11.0.0 VERSU T132V-T202V
T162e V AC15.2 3) 3 4 5 40 59
T172 V AC15.2 3 4 5 40 59 (See Notice 2)
T182 V AC15.2 3 4 5 40 59
T202 V AC15.2 3 4 5 40 59
CAN-ID 3 4 5 40 59
Note 3) Model T162e V AC15.2: When the tractor is programmed using software version 1.11.0.0 VERSU or above,
the engine must also be programmed using the engine software version 2.5.2.3 or above. This ensures that the correct
torque curves are used.
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 16/21
must not be used.
6.5. T132-T202 (D) Direct

[AC14.2]
D (Direct) models:
T132 D AC14.2 3) 3 4 5 40 59 T132D-T202D
T152 D AC14.2 3) 3 4 5 40 59 T132D-T202D V AC14.2 V1.13.0.0 DIRECT T132D-T202D
T162 D AC14.2 3) 4) 3 4 5 40 59 T162D
T172 D AC14.2 3) 3 4 5 40 59 (See Notice 2) T132D-T202D
T182 D AC14.2 3) 3 4 5 40 59 T182D
T202 D AC14.2 3) 3 4 5 40 59 T132D-T202D
CAN-ID 3 4 5 40 59
Note 3) The type plate of Direct tractors may display an incorrect AC ID for the control system (under "Model"), e.g.
T132 D AC15.2 instead of T132 D AC14.2. This only applies to tractors with chassis number V43423 or earlier.
In some tractors, identification must be performed based on the first part of the model number. For instance, T132 D is
a Direct tractor according to this table. It is also possible to identify the tractor model by the cab equipment: The Direct
model side panel is equipped with a Speed Balance control that is not present on Versu models.
Note 4) Model T162 D AC14.2: When the tractor is programmed using software version 1.12.0.0 DIRECT or above,
the engine must also be programmed using the engine software version 2.5.2.3 or above. This ensures that the correct
torque curves are used.
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 17/21
7. HiTech EEM
Only use software and parameter packages mentioned in the table below. Earlier versions must not
be used.
Note: Some models have two alternative software packages. Please see notes 3 and 4 for details on
how to select the correct software.
7.1. 6550H-8150H, 8950AC6

[AC5.4, 6.0]
1. Tractor model 2. Control 3 4. Tractor model 5. Software package 6. Parameter package

6550H AC5.4 03 6550 V1.15.0.0 A or 6550
6550H AC5.4+ turbine clutch 03 HiTech EEM AC5.4 6550 V1.15.0.0 B 3) 6550_HT
6850H AC5.4 03 6850 V1.15.0.0 A or 6850

6850H AC5.4+ turbine clutch 03 6850 V1.15.0.0 B 3) 6850_HT
8050H AC5.4 2) 03 8050 V1.15.0.0 2) 8050
8150H AC5.4 2) 03 8150 V1.15.0.0 2) 8150
Tractors with electronically controlled inline injection pump:

8950Hi AC6 50km/h 034 8950_50
8950Hi AC6 50km/h, 42" 034 8950 AC6.0 AC6.0 v3.0.0.0 8950_50_42" TYRES
tyres
8950Hi AC6 40km/h 034 8950_40
Control unit EC (A1M) TC1 (A1A) TC2 (A1C)
CAN-ID 0 3 4
Note 2) Tractor models 8050H EEM and 8150H EEM up to and including frame no. P10550 (if EC software is older
than version 1.2.0.0): The EC unit must be replaced before software is updated. If not, this will result in service code
E228 (power parameters too high) and power reduction. This occurs due to the fact that later software requires higher
maximum power limits to be saved in the engine control unit.
Note. 3)
Finding the correct software package: Download software package A. If service code E228 appears, you must download
package B.
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 18/21

8. HiTech 1 and 2 (not EEM)
Note. Software in tables 1, 2 and 3 can only be loaded via the MultiTool application "Update
HiTech or X…".
must not be used.
Note. Be sure to check that the tractor is either HiTech 1 or HiTech 2. If you transmit HiTech
software version 53, 65 or 86 to any other tractor model (e.g. T series), the Tc1 control unit will be
erased and the CAN-ID will be lost.
8.1. 6250-8950 ÎK41106

[AC5]
Table 1. HiTech 1 tractor no. H49112 – K41106
These files can be used with the control unit part no. 33373010.
The files can be copied into the control units with serial no. xxxx00400 or above.
1a. 2a. Tractor model 4a. Tractor model, 5a. Software 6a. Parameter file to be 7a. Check
Tractor see Figure 2 package to be loaded, see Figure 2 code 1 1)
no. loaded, see see Figure 3
Figure 2
- J38342 6250, 6350, 6550, In MultiTool, AC5V53.S19 6250_8950_5365.txt 23 53
6650, 6850, choose "HiTech,X
8050, 8150, 8450, (not EEM)"
8550, 8950
8350 AC5V53.S19 8350_5365.txt 33 53
J38343 6250, 6350, 6550, In MultiTool, AC5V65.S19 6250_8950_5365.txt 23 65
-K41106 6650, 6850, choose "HiTech,X
8050, 8150, 8450, (not EEM)"
8550, 8950
8350 AC5V65.S19 8350_5365.txt 33 65
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 19/21
8.2. 6550-8950, X100-X120 K41107Î

[AC5.2]
Table 2. HiTech 2.0 — tractor no. K41107 and above
These files can be used with control units no. 33373020 and 33373030.
1a. 2a. Tractor model 4a. Tractor 5a. Software 6b. Parameter file to be 7a. Check
Tractor model, see package to be loaded, see Figure 2 code 1 1)
no. Figure 2 loaded, see see Figure 3
Figure 2
K41107 6550, 6650, 6850 In MultiTool, AC5V86.S19 6250_6850_86.txt 18 86
and 6550, 6650, 6850 choose "HiTech,X AC5V86.S19 6250_6850_HT_86.txt 28 86
above + turbine clutch (not EEM)"
6750 AC5V86.S19 6750_86.txt 68 86
8050, 8150 AC5V86.S19 8050_8150_86.txt 38 86
8350 AC5V86.S19 8350_86.txt 48 86
8450, 8550, 8950 AC5V86.S19 8450_8950_86.txt 58 86
X100, X110, X120 AC5V86.S19 X100_X120_86.txt 18 86
Note 1) Check code 1 is shown in the MultiTool and on the tractor display (in test mode FII).
Check codes 9953, 9965 and 9986 are not permitted (they signify that the parameter file is missing).
8.3. 6250-6350 K41107ÎR41107

[AC5.2]
Table 3. HiTech 2.0 — tractor (6250, 6350) no. K41107–R41107
These files can be used with control units no. 33373020 and 33373030.
Tractor models no. R39101-R39150 are also fitted with the new pillar display no. 34921400: (models 6250H, 6350H):
R39110, R39113, R39117, R39118, R39121, R39134, R39135, R39142. Use table 4 to select the correct software for
these tractors. See Note 2 below table 4.
1a. 2a. Tractor model 4a. Tractor 5a. Software 6b. Parameter file to be 7a. Check
Tractor model, see package to be loaded, see Figure 2 code 1 1)
no. Figure 2 loaded, see see Figure 3
Figure 2
K41107– 6250, 6350 In MultiTool, AC5V86.S19 6250_6850_86.txt 18 86
R41107 6250, 6350 choose "HiTech,X AC5V86.S19 6250_6850_HT_86.txt 28 86
+ turbine clutch (not EEM)"
Note 1) Check code 1 is shown in the MultiTool and on the tractor display (in test mode FII).
Check codes 9953, 9965 and 9986 are not permitted (they signify that the parameter file is missing).
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 20/21
8.4.6250-6350 R41108Î
[AC5.2]
Table 4. HiTech 2.0 — tractor (6250, 6350) no. R41108-
Note. Software in table 4 can only be loaded via the MultiTool application "C,M,N,T,…".
Only use MultiTool software version 4.0.0.0 or above.

Note. The TC1 control unit part no. must be 33373030.

6250H, 6350H AC5.2 3 6250-6350 V1.0.0.0 6250-6350

HiTech AC5.2 R41108-
6250H, 6350H AC5.2 3 6250-6350 V1.0.0.0 6250-6350_HT
+ turbine clutch
Note. 1) The CAN ID numbers of the control units (control units included in the software package): (tractors 6250-
6350 R41108-):
Control unit TC1 (A1A)
CAN-ID 3
Note 2. Additional information for tables 3 and 4.

The pillar display(s) in models 6250H and 6350H, tractor model no. R39101 to R41107 incl.:
If the display is like this If the display is like this

(part no. 33456900) (part no. 34921400)
Î Use table 3. Î Use table 4.
Version 33 28.4.2010
Page 21/21
9. Mezzo & Mega EEM Series
must not be used.

9.1. 6400 EEM-8150 EEM

[AC2.4]
1. Tractor model 2. Control 4. Tractor model 5. Software package 6. Parameter package

6400 AC2.4 (Mezzo) 0 6400 V1.6.0.0 A or No parameters
Mezzo-Mega EEM AC2.4 6400 V1.6.0.0 B 3)
8050 AC2.4 (Mega) 2) 0 8050 V1.6.0.0 2) No parameters
8150 AC2.4 (Mega) 2) 0 8150 V1.6.0.0 2) No parameters
Control unit EC (A1M)
CAN-ID 0
Note 2) Tractor models 8050 EEM and 8150 EEM up to and including tractor model no. P10550 (if EC software is
older than version 1.2.0.0): The engine control unit must be replaced by a spare EC unit before software is updated. If
not, this will result in service code E228 (power parameters too high) and power reduction. This occurs due to the fact
that later software requires higher maximum power limits to be saved in the engine control unit.
Note. 3)
Finding the correct software package: Download software package A. If Sisu service code no. 173 appears (oil pressure
LED flashes), download package B. The service code is also shown in MultiTool as number 009101-31-000
("EEM2VP/EEM3CR testing+adjustments").
Version 09 5.5.2010
Page 1/8
SOFTWARE FOR VALTRA CR ENGINES

This instruction is valid for tractor models with the EEM3 Common Rail fuel system.
1. Index
1. Index................................................................................................................................................1
2. The displays of the MultiTool application ...................................................................................2
2.1. MultiTool software "Software" > "EEM3CR engine (Common Rail)": ..................................2
3. Basic instructions ...........................................................................................................................3
4. Software, N series...........................................................................................................................4
4.1. N101-N141 (cCR, hCR, h, LS).................................................................................................4
4.2. N122-N142 (V, D) ....................................................................................................................5
5. Software, T series ...........................................................................................................................6
5.1. T160-T190 (cCR, chCR, CR) ...................................................................................................6
5.2. T121-T191 (c, h, eh, LS, eLS) ..................................................................................................7
5.3. T132-T202 (V, eV, D) ..............................................................................................................8
Version 09 5.5.2010
Page 2/8
2. The displays of the MultiTool application
Figures 1 and 2 contain instructional notes relating to the columns mentioned in the software tables
on the following pages.
2.1. MultiTool software "Software" > "EEM3CR engine (Common Rail)":
Column 2
Engine software
Figure 1.
"HW ID"
Column 3
Specif. no. in ID module
Specif. no. in engine

software (1 to 6 numbers).
One of these numbers must
also be visible on the row
above (ID module)
Figure 2.
Version 09 5.5.2010
Page 3/8
3. Basic instructions
Only use the software mentioned in the tables below. Earlier versions must not be used.
Previous Current
Control unit part number 8370 69216 8370 71189
"HW ID" of the control unit EEM-S301 EEM-S302 (See figure 2)
Instructions:
Start the MultiTool software downloading application: "Software" Æ "EEM3CR engine (Common
Rail)".
MultiTool will search the memory card for software that has the same specification number as the
ID module e.g. 74512 (see figure 2). Based on this, it will suggest software suitable for the engine
in question.
This automated process functions under the following conditions:
-there is software present for any engine model in the engine control unit
-the ID module is undamaged and its connection to the engine control unit is in working order
Note. If there is no software in the engine control unit (new part) or if the ID module cannot be
found, MultiTool cannot suggest software suitable for the engine in question. In this case, a list of
all suitable software for the engine control unit in question appears. Select a suitable option using
the tables in these instructions.
1. Always begin by checking the tractor model number and the number of the electrical
system on the type plate e.g. T190CR AC6.6.
2. Find the model in column 1 of the table.
3. Column 2 on the same row of the table shows the engine software options suitable for the
tractor. MultiTool suggests options that are suitable for the engine control unit in question.
4. Select the suitable software file and accept the option to download it to the engine control
unit.
5. After you have loaded the software, you can check that the specification numbers match:
one of the numbers in the engine control unit must be the same as the number in the ID
module. (See figure 2.)
Note. If the wrong software is downloaded to the engine, the tractor will display a service
code, and the engine output and the maximum engine speed will be limited.
Version 09 5.5.2010
Page 4/8
4. Software, N series
These instructions contain tables to help you select the correct software for Common Rail engines
in Valtra tractors.
4.1..1. N101-N141 (cCR, hCR, h, LS)

[AC9.2, 10.2, 11.2]
1. Tractor model 2. Software to be loaded 3. Suitable for engine whose
ID module "Specif. no, ID
module" is:
N101 cCR AC9.2 EEM_N101_Sv1.5.0.0.hex Sv1.5.0.0: 44 507
N101 hCR AC10.2 or
EEM_N101_Sv2.5.0.0.hex 1) Sv2.5.0.0: 44 518 or 44 507
N111e hCR AC10.2 EEM_N111e_Sv1.5.0.0.hex Sv1.5.0.0: 44 506
N111e LS AC11.2 or
EEM_N111e_Sv2.5.0.0.hex 1) Sv2.5.0.0: 44 519 or 44 506
N121 h AC10.2 EEM_N121_Sv1.5.0.0.hex Sv1.5.0.0: 44 500
N121 LS AC11.2 or
EEM_N121_Sv2.5.0.0.hex 1) Sv2.5.0.0: 44 520 or 44 500
N141 h AC10.2 EEM_N141_Sv1.5.0.0.hex Sv1.5.0.0: 49 500
N141 LS AC11.2 or
EEM_N141_Sv2.5.0.0.hex 1) Sv2.5.0.0: 49 518 or 49 500
1)
Software version Sv1.x.x.x is intended for the previously used (2005-2007) engine control unit,
part no. 8370 69216 (HW ID for control unit: EEM-S301).
Software version Sv2.x.x.x is intended for the currently used (2008-) engine control unit, part no.
8370 71189 (HW ID for control unit: EEM-S302).
MultiTool automatically only offers software that is suitable for the control unit in question.
Version 09 5.5.2010
Page 5/8
4.2. N122-N142 (V, D)

[AC15.2, 14.2]
module" is:
N122 V AC15.2 EEM_N122_Sv2.5.2.3_R4.hex 1) 44528
N122 D AC14.2
N142V AC15.2 EEM_N142_Sv2.5.2.3_R7.hex 1) 49530

N142 D AC14.2
1)
8370 71189 (HW ID for control unit: EEM-S302). It cannot be used in the engine control unit used
previously, part no. 8370 69216 (HW ID for control unit: EEM-S301).
Version 09 5.5.2010
Page 6/8
5. Software, T series
These instructions contain tables to help you select the correct software for Common Rail engines
in Valtra tractors.
5.1. T160-T190 (cCR, chCR, CR)

[AC2.7, 5.6, 5.7, 6.6]
1. Tractor model 2. Software to be loaded 3. Suitable for engine
whose ID module "Specif.
no, ID module" is:
T160 CR AC6.6 EEM_T161_T160_Sv1.5.0.0.hex Sv1.5.0.0: 66 513
or
EEM_T161_T160_Sv2.5.0.0.hex 1) 2) Sv2.5.0.0: 66 550 or 66 513
T170 CR AC5.6 EEM_T171c_T170_Sv1.5.0.0.hex Sv1.5.0.0: 74 514
T170 cCR AC2.7 or
T170 cHCR AC5.7 EEM_T171c_T170_Sv2.5.0.0.hex 1) Sv2.5.0.0: 74 534 or 74 514
or
EEM_T171_T180_Sv2.5.0.0.hex 1) Sv2.5.0.0: 74 535 or 74 513
or
EEM_T191_T190_Sv2.5.2.3.hex 1) 3) Sv2.5.2.3: 74 536 or 74 512
1)
2)
When programming the engine of tractor model T160 CR AC6.6, take the following into consideration:
Firstly, check which engine specification number is in the ID module (using MultiTool).
If the number in the ID module is 66 500 or 66 501 or 66 509, do not program the engine because
the new software is not compatible with ID modules containing these numbers.
In this case, the ID module must be replaced before programming the engine.
3)
The software versions 1.5.2.4 and 2.5.2.3 of tractor T190CR support the cooling system pressure sensor
(the function is in use if the pressure sensor has been installed). When the pressure of the cooling system
rises high enough, the software allows the temperature of the coolant to rise higher than normal.
Version 09 5.5.2010
Page 7/8
5.2. T121-T191 (c, h, eh, LS, eLS)

[AC9.2, 10.2, 10.21, 11.2]
module" is:
T121 c AC9.2 EEM_T121c_Sv1.5.0.0.hex Sv1.5.0.0: 66 527
or
EEM_T121c_Sv2.5.0.0.hex 1) Sv2.5.0.0: 66 546 or 66 527
T121 h AC10.2 EEM_T121_Sv1.5.0.0.hex Sv1.5.0.0: 66 517
or
EEM_T121_Sv2.5.0.0.hex 1) Sv2.5.0.0: 66 545 or 66 517
or
EEM_T131c_Sv2.5.0.0.hex 1) Sv2.5.0.0: 66 548 or 66 524
T131 h AC10.2 EEM_T131_Sv1.5.0.0.hex Sv1.5.0.0: 66 519
or
EEM_T131_Sv2.5.0.0.hex 1) Sv2.5.0.0: 66 547 or 66 519
T151e h AC10.2 EEM_T151_Sv1.5.0.0.hex Sv1.5.0.0: 66 518
T151e LS AC11.2 or
EEM_T151_Sv2.5.0.0.hex 1) Sv2.5.0.0: 66 549 or 66 518
or
EEM_T161c_Sv2.5.0.0.hex 1) Sv2.5.0.0: 66 551 or 66 525
T161 h AC10.2 EEM_T161_T160_Sv1.5.0.0.hex Sv1.5.0.0: 66 513
T161 LS AC11.2 or
EEM_T161_T160_Sv2.5.0.0.hex 1) Sv2.5.0.0: 66 550 or 66 513
T171 c AC9.2 EEM_T171c_T170_Sv1.5.0.0.hex Sv1.5.0.0: 74 514
or
EEM_T171c_T170_Sv2.5.0.0.hex 1) Sv2.5.0.0: 74 534 or 74 514
T171 LS AC11.2 or
EEM_T171_T180_Sv2.5.0.0.hex 1) Sv2.5.0.0: 74 535 or 74 513
T191 LS AC11.2 or
EEM_T191_T190_Sv2.5.2.3.hex 1) 2) Sv2.5.2.3: 74 536 or 74 512
1)
2)
The software versions 1.5.2.4 and 2.5.2.3 of tractors T191h and T191LS support the cooling
system pressure sensor (the function is in use if the pressure sensor has been installed). When the
pressure of the cooling system rises high enough, the software allows the temperature of the coolant
to rise higher than normal.
Version 09 5.5.2010
Page 8/8
5.3. T132-T202 (V, eV, D)

[AC15.2, 14.2]
module" is:
T132 V AC15.2 EEM_T132_Sv2.5.2.3_R5.hex 1) 66536
T132 D AC14.2
T152 V AC15.2 EEM_T152_Sv2.5.2.3_R4.hex 1) 66537

T152 D AC14.2
T162e V AC15.2 2) EEM_T162_Sv2.5.2.3_R6.hex 1) 2) 66538
T162 D AC14.2 3) EEM_T162_Sv2.5.2.3_R6.hex 1) 3) 66538
T172 V AC15.2 EEM_T172_Sv2.5.2.3_R4.hex 1) 66539

T172 D AC14.2
T182 V AC15.2 EEM_T182_Sv2.5.2.3_R10.hex 1) 74526

T182 D AC14.2
T202 V AC15.2 EEM_T202_Sv2.5.2.3_R9.hex 1) 74527

T202 D AC14.2
1)
8370 71189 (HW ID for control unit: EEM-S302). It cannot be used in the engine control unit used
previously, part no. 8370 69216 (HW ID for control unit: EEM-S301).
2)
Model T162e V AC15.2: When the engine is programmed using software version 2.5.2.3 or above,
the tractor must also be programmed using software version 1.11.0.0 VERSU or above. This ensures
that the correct torque curves are used.
3)
Model T162 D AC14.2: When the engine is programmed using software version 2.5.2.3 or above, the
tractor must also be programmed using software version 1.12.0.0 DIRECT or above. This ensures that
the correct torque curves are used.
Version 03 17.9.2009
Page 1/11
SOFTWARE FOR VALTRA OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
1. Index
1. Index................................................................................................................................................1
2. Notes on how to use the tables ......................................................................................................2
2.1. MultiTool software "Software in tractor" > "Optional equipment":.........................................2
3. ISOBUS and implement signal connector (ISO 11783, ISO 11786)..........................................3
3.1. Software package ......................................................................................................................3
3.2. Parameter packages...................................................................................................................3
600 - 900 ......................................................................................................................................3
6000-8750 (Mezzo, Mega)...........................................................................................................3
6250–8950 (HiTech) ....................................................................................................................4
A65–A95, A72–A92 ....................................................................................................................4
C90–C150 ....................................................................................................................................4
M120–M150 ................................................................................................................................4
X100–X120..................................................................................................................................4
XM130-XM150 ...........................................................................................................................5
N82–N92, N91–N141 ..................................................................................................................5
N122 – N142................................................................................................................................5
T120-T190 ...................................................................................................................................6
T121-T191 ...................................................................................................................................7
T132-T202 ...................................................................................................................................7
4. "AutoComfort" cab suspension....................................................................................................8
T121–T191, T132–T202..............................................................................................................8
5. "TwinTrac" reverse drive controls ..............................................................................................9
N121–N141, T151–T191 .............................................................................................................9
N122 – N142, T132 – T202 .........................................................................................................9
6. "SECU" steering control unit.....................................................................................................10
6.1. Software packages...................................................................................................................10
6.2. Parameter packages.................................................................................................................10
T132–T202.................................................................................................................................10
Version 03 17.9.2009
Page 2/11
2. Notes on how to use the tables
These instructions contain tables to help you select the correct software for Valtra optional equipment.
The software and parameter loading must only be performed on one piece of optional equipment at
a time.
Notes on how to use the tables:
Figure 1 contains instructions for using columns mentioned in the software tables on the following
pages.
2.1. MultiTool software "Software in tractor" > "Optional equipment":
Column A3
Column A4
Column B4
Figure 1.
Column A2
"HW ID"
Column A5
Column B5
Figure 2.
Version 03 17.9.2009
Page 3/11
3. ISOBUS and implement signal connector

(ISO 11783, ISO 11786)
be used.
The part number for the control unit is 35573620.

The "HW ID" of the control unit is: ISOAD401 (see figure 2)
3.1. Software package
Table A: Choosing the software package, see figures 1 and 2

A1. A2. A3. A4. A5.
Tractor model CAN-ID *) Control unit Software package Software version number *)
All tractor models for 220 "ISOAD ISOBUS" V0.4.4.14 0.4.4.14

which the equipment is
available
*)
Shown on the Information page
3.2. Parameter packages
Table B: Choosing the parameter package, see figures 1 and 2

600 - 900
600, 700, 800, 900 Optional equipment is not available for these models.
6000-8750 (Mezzo, Mega)
B1. B2. B3. B4. B5.

Tractor model Tractor no. Other issues affecting Parameter package Parameter
the selection version no. *)
Mech. injection pump J05133- Radar: No ISOBUS1 2.1.0.2
6000, 6200, 6300, 6400, Radar: Yes ISOBUS1_Radar 2.1.1.2
6600, 6800, 8050, 8150,
8400, 8450, 8550, 8750
EEM models: J05133- Radar: No ISOBUS1 2.1.0.2
6400, R23412 Radar: Yes ISOBUS1_Radar 2.1.1.2
8050, 8150 (AC2.4) R23413- 1) Radar: No ISOBUS3 2.5.0.2
Radar: Yes ISOBUS3_Radar 2.5.1.2
*)
1)
From this tractor number onwards, the cab wiring set has an X5X connector.
Version 03 17.9.2009
Page 4/11
6250–8950 (HiTech)
B1. B2. B3. B4. B5.

6250H, 6350H, 6650H, Radar: No ISOBUS1 2.1.0.2
6750H (AC5.2) Radar: Yes ISOBUS1_Radar 2.1.1.2
6550H, 6850H, -R08508 Radar: No ISOBUS1 2.1.0.2

8050H, 8150H (AC5.4) Radar: Yes ISOBUS1_Radar 2.1.1.2
R08509- 1) Radar: No ISOBUS4 2.2.0.2
8350H, 8450H, 8550H, Radar: No ISOBUS1 2.1.0.2

8950H (AC5.2) Radar: Yes ISOBUS1_Radar 2.1.1.2
*)
1)
A65–A95, A72–A92
A65, A75, A85, A95 Optional equipment is not available for these models.
A72, A82, A92
C90–C150
C90, C100, C110, C120, Optional equipment is not available for these models.
C120e, C130, C150
(AC8.3, AC8.5)
M120–M150
B1. B2. B3. B4. B5.

M120, M120e, M130, -N27550 Radar: No ISOBUS1 2.1.0.2
M150 (AC5.5) Radar: Yes ISOBUS1_Radar 2.1.1.2
N28101- 1) Radar: No ISOBUS4 2.2.0.2
*)
1)
X100–X120
B1. B2. B3. B4. B5.

X100, X110, X120 Radar: No ISOBUS1 2.1.0.2
(AC5.2) Radar: Yes ISOBUS1_Radar 2.1.1.2
*)
Version 03 17.9.2009
Page 5/11
XM130-XM150
B1. B2. B3. B4. B5.

XM130, XM150 (AC5.5) Radar: No ISOBUS4 2.2.0.2
*)
N82–N92, N91–N141
B1. B2. B3. B4. B5.

N91c, N101c, N111c Radar: No ISOBUS2 2.1.2.2
N91h, N101h, N111h
(AC10.0)
N82h, N92h (AC13.0)
N101cCR (AC9.2) Radar: No ISOBUS3 2.5.0.2

N111eh (AC10.1) Radar: No ISOBUS4 2.2.0.2

N101hCR, N111ehCR, Radar: Yes ISOBUS4_Radar 2.2.1.2
N121h, N141h (AC10.2)
N121LS, N141LS Front PTO: No ISOBUS6 2.6.0.2

(AC11.2) Front PTO: Yes ISOBUS6_Front PTO 2.6.1.2
*)
N122 – N142
B1. B2. B3. B4. B5.

N122V, N142V (AC15.2) Front PTO: No ISOBUS7 2.7.0.4
Front PTO: Yes ISOBUS7_Front PTO 2.7.1.4
N122D, N142D (AC14.2) Front PTO: No ISOBUS7 2.7.0.4
Front PTO: Yes ISOBUS7_ Front PTO 2.7.1.4
*)
Version 03 17.9.2009
Page 6/11
T120-T190
B1. B2. B3. B4. B5.

T120, T130, T140e, T150, -N27550 Radar: No ISOBUS1 2.1.0.2
T160, T170 Radar: Yes ISOBUS1_Radar 2.1.1.2
(AC5.3, AC5.5) N28101- 2) Radar: No ISOBUS4 2.2.0.2
T120c, T130c, T140ec, -R23412 Radar: No ISOBUS1 2.1.0.2

T150c, T160c, T170c Radar: Yes ISOBUS1_Radar 2.1.1.2
(AC2.4) R23413- 1) Radar: No ISOBUS3 2.5.0.2
T120cH, T130cH, -R08508 Radar: No ISOBUS1 2.1.0.2

T140ecH, T150cH, Radar: Yes ISOBUS1_Radar 2.1.1.2
T160cH, T170cH R08509- 1) Radar: No ISOBUS4 2.2.0.2
T180, T190 -N19223 ISOBUS1_Radar 2.1.1.2

(AC6.1, AC6.2)
N19224- 1) Front PTO: No ISOBUS5 2.3.0.2
Front PTO: Yes ISOBUS5_Front PTO 2.3.1.2
T170CR (AC5.6), Radar: No ISOBUS4 2.2.0.2

T170cHCR (AC5.7) Radar: Yes ISOBUS4_Radar 2.2.1.2
T170cCR (AC2.7) Radar: No ISOBUS3 2.5.0.2
T160CR, T180CR, Front PTO: No ISOBUS5 2.3.0.2

T190CR (AC6.6) Front PTO: Yes ISOBUS5_Front PTO 2.3.1.2
*)
1)
2) From this tractor number onwards, the tractor has an EEM engine.
Also, the following tractors manufactured before tractor number N28101 are handled according to
line N28101- (because they have an EEM engine):
N26138 T130 N27108 T160 N27239 T130 N27441 T170

N26225 T160 N27125 T140 N27311 T160 N27514 T160
N26346 T160 N27139 T160 N27320 T140 N27521 T160
N26405 T120 N27206 T160 N27333 T160 N27525 T140
N26545 T130 N27214 T160 N27413 T130 N27547 T160
Version 03 17.9.2009
Page 7/11
T121-T191
B1. B2. B3. B4. B5.

T121c, T131c, T161c, Radar: No ISOBUS3 2.5.0.2
T171c (AC9.2) Radar: Yes ISOBUS3_Radar 2.5.1.2
T121H, T131H, T151eH, Radar: No ISOBUS4 2.2.0.2

T161H, T171H (AC10.2) Radar: Yes ISOBUS4_Radar 2.2.1.2
T191H (AC10.21)
T151eLS, T161LS, Front PTO: No ISOBUS6 2.6.0.2

T171LS, T191LS Front PTO: Yes ISOBUS6_Front PTO 2.6.1.2
(AC11.2)
*)
T132-T202
B1. B2. B3. B4. B5.

T132V, T152V, T162eV, Front PTO: No ISOBUS7 2.7.0.4
T172V, T182V, T202V Front PTO: Yes ISOBUS7_Front PTO 2.7.1.4
(AC15.2)
T132D, T152D, T162D, Front PTO: No ISOBUS7 2.7.0.4

T172D, T182D, T202D Front PTO: Yes ISOBUS7_ Front PTO 2.7.1.4
(AC14.2)
*)
Version 03 17.9.2009
Page 8/11
4. "AutoComfort" cab suspension
be used.
The part number for the control unit is 37246400.

The "HW ID" of the control unit is: A5DC-002 (see figure 2)

A1. A2. A3. A4. A5.
Tractor model CAN-ID *) Control unit Software package Software
version number *)
All models for which this
optional equipment is 47 “SUS1 Cab SUS1 V1.0.1.1 1.0.1.1
intended. suspension”
*)
T121–T191, T132–T202
B1. Tractor model B4. Parameter package B5. Parameter
version no. *)
T121h, T131h, T151eh, T161h,
1)
T171h (AC10.2) SUS1 0.0.0.0
T191H (AC10.21)
T151eLS, T161LS, T171LS,

T191LS (AC11.2)
T132V-T202V (AC15.2)
T132D-T202D (AC14.2)
*)
1)
The parameter version number is 0.0.0.0 even though the control unit has the correct parameters.
If the correct parameter package name is displayed under "Show software on the tractor", the
control unit has the correct parameters.
Version 03 17.9.2009
Page 9/11
5. "TwinTrac" reverse drive controls
be used.
The control unit part number is 36686600.

The "HW ID" of the control unit is: IOEM-003 (see figure 2)

A1. A2. A3. A4. A5.
version number *)
All models for which this
optional equipment is 6 “UC2 TwinTrac” UC2 1.0.4.0
intended.
*)
N121–N141, T151–T191
B1. B4. B5.
Tractor model Parameter package Parameter
version no. *)
N121LS–N141LS (AC11.2)
ADVANCE 1.1.7.0
T151eLS–T191LS (AC11.2)
*)
N122 – N142, T132 – T202

B1. B4. B5.
version no. *)
N122V – N142V (AC15.2)
N122D – N142D (AC14.2) VERSU&DIRECT 1.1.4.1
T132V–T202V (AC15.2)
T132D–T202D (AC14.2) VERSU&DIRECT 1.1.4.1
*)
Version 03 17.9.2009
Page 10/11
6. "SECU" steering control unit
be used.
The control unit part number is 37246400.

The "HW ID" of the control unit is: A5DC-002 (see figure 2)
6.1. Software packages

A1. A2. A3. A4. A5.
version number *)
T132V-T202V (AC15.2)
T132D-T202D (AC14.2) SECU V1.0.1.2 1.0.1.2
control valve type A 1) 50 “SECU Steering
control unit (AG)”
control valve type B 1) - 2) -
*)
1)
See figures 3, 4 and 5
2)
Software and parameters will be released later (when the new control valve is used)
T132–T202
B1. B4. B5.
version no. *)
T132V-T202V (AC15.2)
2)
T132D-T202D (AC14.2) SECU 0.0.0.0
control valve type A 1)
control valve type B 1) - -

*)
1)
See figures 3, 4 and 5
2)
The parameter version number is 0.0.0.0 even though the control unit has the correct parameters.
If the correct parameter package name is displayed under "Show software on the tractor", the
control unit has the correct parameters.
Version 03 17.9.2009
Page 11/11
Identifying the control valve type:
Type A. Type B.
Old control valve New control valve
(Valtra part number 37060500) (Valtra part number 39251500)
Markings on the valve type plate:

OSPC… Type: OSPEC…
11015775 11052121
Figure 3 Figure 4
Location of the type plate
Figure 5
Version 32 6/05/10
Page 1/18
CHANGES TO VALTRA TRACTOR SOFTWARE

MultiTool_V7.1.0.0
Changes made to MultiTool software since v6.6.1.0 are set out in this document.
Models N101hCR-N141h / T121h-T171h / T170CR / T170cHCR / T191h

New software versions have been installed in the following tractor models:
N101hCR, N111ehCR, N121h, N141h AC10.2 v2.6.0.0
T121h, T131h, T151eh, T161h, T171h AC10.2 v2.6.0.0
T170CR AC5.6 v2.5.0.0
T170cHCR AC5.7 v2.5.0.0
T191h AC10.21 v2.6.0.0
The software was implemented in production starting with tractor number V47436 and
onwards. Some previously manufactured tractors may also have been fitted with the above-
mentioned software version.
The software is part of MultiTool software packages starting with v6.7.0.0 and onwards.
Changes implemented, sorted according to function:
(T191h) Cruise control, driving speed:

Improvements have been made to cruise control functions while TwinTrac reverse drive
controls are in use. The rear brake pedal now releases the cruise control, whereas previously
its functioning was deficient.
(T191h) Traction control (N Auto):

Improvements have been made to cruise control functions when TwinTrac reverse drive
controls are in use. The rear brake pedal now releases the cruise control, whereas previously
its functioning was deficient.
Alarms and warnings:

- Engine service codes have been added:
L128 (9171-06-000) engine intake air preheater control, short circuit to ground
L129 (9171-05-000) engine intake air preheater control, open circuit
These service codes were activated previously when the above-mentioned malfunction
occurred; although they were not shown on the pillar display. In MultiTool, they were
shown as a long code (for example, 9171-06-000).
Models N111eLS-N141LS AC11.2 (Advance)

Models T151eLS-T191LS AC11.2 (Advance)
Version 32 6/05/10
Page 2/18
Software package V2.14.0.0 Advance was developed. The software was implemented in
production starting with tractor number V47436 and onwards. Some previously
manufactured tractors may also have been fitted with software version v2.14.0.0.
The software version is part of the MultiTool_v6.7.0.0 software package.
Note. Do not use the MultiTool_v6.7.0.0 software package for programming Advance
tractor models. Use package v6.7.1.0 or above.
Software package V2.15.0.0 Advance was developed (N121LS, N141LS only). The
software was implemented in production starting with tractor number W03220 and onwards.
The software is part of MultiTool software packages starting with v6.7.1.0 and onwards.
V2.14.0.0 Advance (N and T): Changes implemented, sorted by function:
(Advance v2.14.0.0) Rear power take-off:

Rear power take-off control has been further developed. The rear power take-off has stalled
occasionally in some tractors, especially when the power lift AutoControl selector was in the
transport position.
(Advance v2.14.0.0) Rear power lift:

The safety of the rear power lift was developed further by implementing the following
change: when the power lift is locked, it can be activated only while the driver is seated. The
power lift can, however, be controlled by pressing the fender buttons.
(Advance v2.14.0.0) Auxiliary working hydraulics:

- The safety of the working hydraulic control levers has been further improved. When the
hydraulics are activated, the control levers must be moved to the centre position—
permanently or temporarily—before the valve starts to function. E.g. if one of the levers is
not in the centre position or the voltage of the lever does not match that of the centre
position, the valve in question cannot be controlled after the hydraulics have been activated.
- Use of hydraulic CAN valves with the U-Pilot headland management system has been
improved. Previously, in some tractors the valve float position could only be activated with
the control lever. It can now be activated with the U-Pilot as well. The valve software
version must be 2.04 or above (the software version can be viewed using the MultiTool
hydraulics application).
- Tractor terminal tolerance towards CAN bus defects has been improved. If any of the
CAN-controlled hydraulic valves send defective CAN messages to the TT, it will attempt to
continue normal valve operation. Defective CAN messages can be caused by, for example,
faulty CAN bus connectors in the valve guide heads or couplings, or lack of an end resistor.
If there is a problem with the functioning of the tractor's working hydraulic valves, e.g.
some or each of the valves "disappear" from the TT screen, the tractor should be
reprogrammed using software version 2.14.0.0 or later before undertaking any other repair
measures.
Version 32 6/05/10
Page 3/18
- Brake cooling has been altered: when the tractor's driving speed drops below 5 kph, the
flow of brake cooling oil ceases. Previously, cooling continued when the driving speed
dropped to under 5 kph, and may have continued even though the brake pedals were no
longer being pressed. Therefore, working hydraulics functioned slowly in some situations.
(Advance v2.14.0.0) Tractor Terminal displays and functions

- Tractor Terminal memory control has been enhanced. In some tractors, Tractor Terminal
user settings and counters have intermittently reverted back to the zero position (after
approximately 250 start-ups). This applies to the views chosen for the shared driving
display, implement width and counters (for example, fuel consumption counters).
Note. Despite the change, the settings/values may revert to the default position if the
tractor's main switch is switched off too soon after turning the ignition key to the STOP
position. Tractor Terminal settings are stored in the memory when the ignition key is
switched to the STOP position. Storing may take up to two seconds — you should wait at
least two seconds before turning off the main switch to allow sufficient time for storing the
values.
Note. Should the engine stop by "choking" as a result of an excessive load, the power should
always be switched off by turning off the ignition key before restarting the engine. Doing
this allows Tractor Terminal to store the current settings and counters in the memory.
- The displays with volume shown in gallons: the displays have been fixed.
(Advance v2.14.0.0) Alarms and warnings:

- Service code 6175-02-003 (malfunction S5T of the range gear limit switch) has been
changed. In some tractors, the above-mentioned service code has appeared, although
measuring results indicate the signal voltage transmitted by the limit switch is correct. The
permissible voltage range has also been altered; the new range is:
Off = 0.6 V-1.6 V, On = 2.2 V-3.0 V
- Service code 629-09-005 is no longer displayed in Tractor Terminal because it was

intermittently displayed for no reason, for example, when storing U-Pilot software.
MultiTool does, however, display the above-mentioned service code, although it can be
ignored if it is not displayed continually.
V2.15.0.0 Advance (N only): Changes implemented:

Tractor models N121LS and N141LS AC11.2:
(Advance v2.15.0.0) Engine power graph control has been fixed. In the previous software
v2.14.0.0, the correct power graph was not always used.
Instruction N121LS—and N141LS—for tractor nos. V47436 – W03219 (or if the tractor has
been fitted with software version 2.14.0.0): if the customer complains about engine output,
the tractor should be updated by installing the newest software version 2.15.0.0.
Models N122D-N142D AC14.2 (Direct)

Models T132D-T202D AC14.2 (Direct)
Version 32 6/05/10
Page 4/18
Another software package, V1.11.0.0 Direct, was developed. The software was
implemented in production starting with tractor number W03220 and onwards. Some
previously manufactured tractors may also have been fitted with software v1.11.0.0.
Another software package, V1.12.0.0 Direct, was developed. The software package
contained an error and it was not used in production at all. If tractors have been fitted with
software version 1.12.0.0 in service, they have to be updated with version 1.13.0.0 as
soon as possible.
The software version was part of the MultiTool_v6.9.0.0 software package, which was in
limited distribution from 9 to 12 April 2010.
Another software package, V1.13.0.0 Direct has been compiled. The software has been
implemented in production from tractor number W20104 onwards. Some previously
manufactured tractors may also have been fitted with software v1.13.0.0.
V1.11.0.0 Direct: Changes made, sorted by function:
(Direct v1.11.0.0) Engine start-up/running cold:

Changes made to the software in order to facilitate start-up and running cold include the
following:
- The automatic bleeding function of the hydrostatic unit in the power transmission has been
changed. In some tractors, the bleeding function being turned on has made it more difficult
to start the engine, or has caused the engine to stop.
The new, changed bleeding function: starting the engine Î engine should run properly for
several seconds Î engine running speed increases (as high as 1200 rpm) if the hydrostatic
return oil temperature drops below +5ºC (you should wait for 1–30 seconds for the rotation
speed to increase) Î bleeding begins Î after the bleeding has ended, the idling speed
remains higher than normal until the hydrostatic return oil temperature has reached +5ºC.
- Auxiliary working hydraulic output is restricted at low temperatures. See section entitled
"Auxiliary working hydraulics".
- See also the "Common Rail engines" section at the end of this document.
(Direct v1.11.0.0) Power shuttle and driving start:

- Improvements made to power shuttle functioning include enhancing the disc clutch control
temperature compensation. Temperature compensation changes the prefill pressure
according to the oil temperature, thereby attempting to keep the connections unchanged
regardless of the temperature.
- Driving start and acceleration after braking (or engine braking) has been enhanced. The
engine load now affects the transmission control also. As a result, the transmission control
reacts faster, particularly in the case of a heavy engine load.
Version 32 6/05/10
Page 5/18
- Power shuttle activation at speeds exceeding 10 kph: the effect of the driving pedal
position on this function has been changed so that the tractor starts to slow down sooner
than before.
(Direct v1.11.0.0) Driving pedal

- Automatic driving mode: driving pedal function has been changed so that an even driving
speed is easier to maintain. When the pedal moves only a little (less than 4%) the driving
speed does not change. A more significant change must occur in the pedal position in order
to cause a change in driving speed.
- Automatic driving mode: pedal effect on the change in power transmission ratio has been
further developed. When pressing the pedal hard and fast, the engine rotation speed could
temporarily rise exceedingly high. As a result, the power transmission ratio also changed far
too much and, in some instances, continued to change back and forth.
(Direct v1.11.0.0) Manual driving mode (Mode 2):

- Engine braking power has been changed as follows:
minimum (1): braking power has not been changed
normal (2): braking power has not been changed
efficient (3): braking power has been increased
- Power shuttle has been enhanced. When the driving direction was changed, power shuttle
engagement was choppy at (random) times.
- Power transmission speed range has been changed. Now, in the neutral (N) position, the
range can be reduced or enlarged, while previously it was only possible to reduce it in the N
position.
(Direct v1.11.0.0) Auxiliary working hydraulics:

- The auxiliary working hydraulic output when the temperature is under +5ºC (hydrostat
return oil temperature) is restricted to around 10% of the maximum so that the power used
by the hydraulic pump does not make the engine running cold more difficult. The restriction
is removed when the hydrostatic return oil temperature rises over +5ºC. The restriction is
also removed when the driver adjusts the valve user setting control (flow control).
- Working hydraulic safety has been further enhanced by preventing its accidental use at
high driving speeds. The speed limit for this function can be adjusted in the operator setting
mode. The adjusting range is 5…55 kph (the factory setting is 20 kph).
2
1
Operation: when the tractor has been driven a distance further than 1 km at a speed
exceeding the speed limit (for example, 20 kph) without using the working hydraulic valves,
Version 32 6/05/10
Page 6/18
working hydraulics is switched off. In that case, a symbol lights up in the right-hand corner
of the display (point 1 in the picture). The distance can also consist of shorter stretches, in
which case the driving speed is over the limit. Working hydraulics should be reactivated
before use (using the working hydraulics on/off button). The driver is given advance notice
on working hydraulics being switched off around 30 seconds before completing the 1 km
drive: the symbol begins to flash at two points in the driving display (points 1 and 2 in the
picture).
This function will be added to the User's Manual.
Note. After programming the tractor, you should inform the customer of the new function
and its adjustment.
(Direct v1.11.0.0) Other functional changes:

- Control of power transmission disc clutch C2 has been enhanced. In some instances, disc
clutch C2 failed to be switched on, preventing the tractor from accelerating and gathering
greater speed.
- Control of transmission disc clutches C1 and C2 has been enhanced. In some instances, the
engagement was sharp (on occasion).
(Direct v1.11.0.0) Tractor Terminal displays and functions:

- A new adjustable setting has been added to the operator setting mode. Instructions will be
added to the User's Manual.
Switching off working hydraulics, setting driving speed (5-55). Symbol:
- Hydrostatic temperature display has been repaired. At temperatures under 0ºC, it

previously showed the wrong reading.
user settings and counters have intermittently reverted back to the zero position (after 32
switch-offs). This applies to the views chosen for the shared driving display, implement
width and counters (for example, fuel consumption counters).
• Note. Despite the change, the settings/values may revert to the default position if the
tractor's main switch is switched off too soon after turning the ignition key to the
STOP position. Tractor Terminal settings are stored in the memory when the ignition
key is switched to the STOP position. Storing may take up to two seconds — you
should wait at least two seconds before turning off the main switch to allow
sufficient time for storing the values.
• Note. Should the engine stop by "choking" as a result of an excessive load, the
power should always be switched off by turning off the ignition key before restarting
the engine. Doing this allows Tractor Terminal to store the current settings and
counters in the memory.
(Direct v1.11.0.0) Alarms and warnings:

- Service code 007200-31-003 (hydrostatic overheating) has been enhanced. Service code
may have appeared for no reason when the hydrostatic temperature was low (under 0ºC).
- The software has been designed so that service code 10294-00-003 should no longer be
activated. In some tractors, the error disrupted the transmission traction engagement and
caused cruise control values to revert to the default position.
Version 32 6/05/10
Page 7/18
(Direct v1.11.0.0) Maintenance properties:

- Calibrations no. 21 and 22 (calibration of traction adjustment of F and R switches) have
been removed as unnecessary.
- When calibrations, index settings or the I/O test are run on the Valtra MultiTool service
terminal, the Tractor Terminal exits the corresponding function modes. This ensures a
secure and fast operation of MultiTool programmes.
If you want to go back to these functions in the Tractor Terminal, you must exit these
programmes in MultiTool and switch off the tractor power for a moment.
V1.13.0.0 Direct: Changes made, sorted by function:
(Direct v1.13.0.0) Power transmission speed range shift:

- The engagement speed of the power transmission speed range C Î D and D Î C has
been increased.
- The engagement speed of speed ranges C and D is now also impacted by the engine load.
This enhances the operation of the tractor, especially when driven on the road. When the
engine load is high, it is particularly useful for the speed range to change more quickly.
(Direct v1.13.0.0) Braking:

- Previously, when pressing the brake pedal heavily on a slippery surface, the engine might
have stopped. Now the power transmission is directed differently in this situation; braking
power feedback is received from the pressure sensor of the brake pressure system. This
change enables the power transmission to respond more effectively in the above-mentioned
situation.
(Direct v1.13.0.0) Engine braking:

- The effectiveness of engine braking has been enhanced. When the driving pedal is
released, engine braking commences, during which the engine rotation speed can increase to
driver adjustable maximum value and no more than 200 rpm over it. Previously, it was only
possible to increase speed to 50 rpm over the above-mentioned limit.
(Direct v1.13.0.0) Engine start-up/running cold:

- The speed of the hydrostatic bleeding function following engine start-up has been
increased. In the previous software version v1.11.0.0, the speed of the bleeding function was
decreased, but that caused the function to take too long.
(Direct v1.13.0.0) Four-wheel drive (4WD)

- The four-wheel drive automatic function has been enhanced, as in some situations the four-
wheel drive did not disengage automatically.
(Direct v1.13.0.0) Cruise control (engine rpm):

- The engine cruise control engages more smoothly and has virtually no effect to the speed.
(Direct v1.13.0.0) PTO cruise control:

- The function is in use when it has been activated in the tractor terminal and a PTO speed
has been selected. The engine rpm matching the selected nominal PTO speed will then be
stored in the memory slot of the engine cruise control that was last used.
Version 32 6/05/10
Page 8/18
The function limits the maximum engine rpm to the cruise control value, and if the cruise
control is activated, the engine rpm is adjusted to match its speed. The cruise control speed
can be adjusted between the engine rpm (that matches the selected PTO speed) and the idle
speed. For example, when engaging the PTO speed of 1000, the value can be adjusted
between 2000 rpm and 850 rpm.
Both engine cruise control memory slots can be used for this function. This is particularly
useful when two different maximum rpms (and thus two different cruise control speeds) are
available for the PTO. When the other memory slot is set to 2000 rpm and the other to 1100
rpm, for instance, the PTO speed can be easily decreased and increased by activating the
engine cruise controls 1 and 2 in turn. Moreover, the driving pedal can always be used
without affecting the PTO speed.
Previously, this function limited the maximum engine rpm to the value that corresponds
with the nominal rpm of the selected PTO speed. For example, when engaging the PTO
speed of 1000, the limitation was set to 2000 rpm. The value could not be adjusted.
(Direct v1.13.0.0) Rear PTO:

- Rear power take-off signal light control has been enhanced, as it was experiencing delays.
The signal light indicated the termination of power take-off with a delay of four seconds
after the power lift had been moved into transport position. However, the power take-off
actually stops three seconds after the power lift has been moved into transport position.
(Direct v1.13.0.0) Power take-off (PTO) and ECO/Power selector switch:

- When the front and/or rear power take-off are in use and the ECO/Power selector switch is
in the Power position, the acceleration of the tractor may be insufficient for some tasks. This
is due to the fact that in Power mode (PTO in use) the transmission slip is always fixed at
2%, which prevents the tractor from accelerating quickly.
For this reason, the tractor functions have been changed so that the transmission uses a
transmission slip value defined by the driver (1 to 10%). The adjustment is made using the
previously used Tractor Terminal setting (transmission slip). When the transmission slip
value is set to 8, the transmission uses a fixed transmission slip rate of 8%. The value does
not change during operation.
If the acceleration of a tractor needs to be increased when using the power take-off, a high
transmission slip value must be used. In such cases, it is worth noting that the speed of the
power take-off will vary more because the engine running speed can decrease more before
the power transmission ratio begins to change. In heavy PTO use or when a specific engine
speed is required, it is advisable to use a small slip value.
The changes mentioned above do not apply to the ECO mode.
(Direct v1.13.0.0) Auxiliary working hydraulics:

- The joystick mid-range function (software) has been altered so that when the position lock
is engaged for a valve a small movement of the joystick will not disengage the position lock.
It often happens, that when the joystick is moved in the direction of valve no. 1 (for
example), the joystick also moves a little to towards valve no.2.
- The working hydraulics help function (engine rpm increase) is no longer in use during
engine braking, which prevents excessively forceful engine braking.
- The working hydraulics help function (engine rpm increase) has been improved so that it
Version 32 6/05/10
Page 9/18
also works smoothly when driving slowly. Before this correction, the working hydraulics
caused major changes in driving speed or even stopped the tractor totally (if the help
function was active) when driving slowly.
(Direct v1.13.0.0) Other functional changes:

- Engine idle motion increases automatically (as high as 1200 rpm), if the hydrostatic return
oil temperature is high. This ensures the proper cooling and lubrication of the hydrostatics.
Previously, the idle motion could rise unnecessarily high (as high as 2000 rpm).
- The deficiency of previous software version (1.12.0.0) regarding pressure monitoring in

the transmission hydrostatic unit has been fixed. If tractors have been fitted with software
version 1.12.0.0 in service, they have to be updated with version 1.13.0.0 as soon as
possible.
(Direct v1.13.0.0) Tractor Terminal displays and functions:

- Power transmission settings menu can now be accessed via the rear controls by pressing
the preprogramming button (under the reverse shuttle lever). Previously, this was only
possible via the front controls button.
(Direct v1.13.0.0) Alarms and warnings:

- The following service code functions have been repaired:
8012-07-003 Hydrostatic speed sensor B21, voltage is too high
8013-07-003 Shuttle-unit speed sensor B13, voltage is too high
Previously, fault activation may have prevented the TC1 control unit from functioning at all
(TC1 could not be found from CAN bus connectors). The fault activation is currently only
restricting the use of the tractor.

8015-08-003, 8016-08-003, 8017-08-003.
Previously, these service codes may have been activated with no reason.
(Direct v1.13.0.0) Maintenance properties:

- Speed sensor calibration function no. 60 has been altered to make calibration easier. The
function has been made identical to the equivalent function on Versu tractors. The change
does not require a change in the order of working or the work instructions.
- The service mode has been updated with a new installable index no. 453, "tyre parameter,
factory". The index value must correspond with the tyres on the tractor. The index value
must be set in the following circumstances:
• When the TC1 control unit is being installed as a spare part.
• If the TC1 indices have not been recorded to a memory card prior to the tractor being
programmed.
Models N122V-N142V AC15.2 (Versu)

Models T132V-T202V AC15.2 (Versu)
Software package V1.8.0.0 Versu was developed. The software was implemented in
production starting with tractor number V47436 and onwards. Some previously
Version 32 6/05/10
Page 10/18
The software version is included in MultiTool_v6.7.0.0 and v6.7.1.0 software packages.
Note. Do not use the MultiTool_v6.7.0.0 or v6.7.1.0 software package to program Versu
tractor models. Instead, software package v6.8.0.0 or later should be used.
Software package V1.10.0.0 Versu was developed. The software was implemented in
production starting with tractor number W03220 and onwards. Some previously
Software package V1.11.0.0 Versu was developed. The software has been implemented in
production from tractor number W20104 onwards. Some previously manufactured tractors
may also have been fitted with software v1.11.0.0.
V1.8.0.0 Versu: Changes made, sorted by function:
(Versu v1.8.0.0) Transport Boost – power range:

- Higher Transport Boost power range is switched on in C and D transmission areas
regardless of driving speed (e.g. also when standing still). Previously, it was switched on
only in the D area when the tractor was moving.
(Versu v1.8.0.0) Changing transmission speed range:

- The power transmission speed ranges can now be switched on more quickly (main gear
and range selection lever).
- The "Speed matching" function has been enhanced (speed matching when changing speed
range).
(Versu v1.8.0.0) Clutch pedal:

- Clutch pedal accuracy has been improved.
- New adjustment index no. 3. An operation curve can be selected for the clutch pedal from
among four different curves (a new feature). The selection is made by changing the value of
index no. 3 between 1 and 4. The factory default value is 2, which suits most uses. The
setting is in use in the operator setting mode and service mode. See separate instruction for
index adjustment.
Simply stated, the index is used to adjust the clutch pedal "point of disengagement", e.g.
how far down the pedal must be pressed so that transmission disengages and the tractor
stops. The same adjustment affects the clutch pedal's "engagement point", where the power
shuttle starts to transmit torque.
(Versu v1.8.0.0) Power shuttle and driving start:

- The functioning of the power shuttle control has been generally improved.
- When changing driving directions, powershift first gear is always engaged, provided that
powershift automatic transmission (mode 1 or mode 2) is in use.
- Improved engine operation when starting to drive: if the engine rotation speed drops too
low when starting to drive, the power shuttle control changes in order to prevent the engine
from stopping easily.
Version 32 6/05/10
Page 11/18
- New adjustment index no. 30. The speed of the power shuttle traction engagement can be
adjusted (a new feature). The adjustment is made by changing the value of index no. 30
between 1 and 10 (=fastest speed). The traction engagement can be set to very slow, very
fast or anything in between. The factory default value is 4, which suits most uses. The
setting is in use in the operator setting mode and service mode. See separate instruction for
index adjustment.
- Temperature compensation has been added to power shuttle disc clutch prefill control. This
changes the prefill pressure according to the oil temperature. At a temperature of +50ºC, the
prefill pressure matches the prefill index value, while at lower temperatures, the prefill
pressure increases. However, in software version 1.8.0.0 the pressure increases too much
and the engagement may become choppy. During calibration, the oil temperature should be
around +50ºC, otherwise prefill adjustment becomes more difficult and the index adjustment
area is not always sufficient.
(Versu v1.8.0.0) Powershift, automatic transmission:

- Mode 1 automatic transmission function has been enhanced, including in the ECO driving
mode: gear switching points have been changed.
- Mode 1 automatic transmission and cruise control joint functioning has been improved.
(Versu v1.8.0.0) Four-wheel drive (4WD):

- The functioning of the automatic 4WD has been improved at very low speeds (under 0.5
kph)
(Versu v1.8.0.0) Differential lock:

- Automatic function does not engage differential lock at driving speeds under 1.5 kph.
Reliable sensor signals are achieved only at speeds exceeding 1.5 kph. The previous limit
was around 0.3 kph.
(Versu v1.8.0.0) Auxiliary working hydraulics:

- The operation of the hydraulic joystick buttons has been speeded up. Previously, socket
control was delayed.
Note. In software version 1.8.0.0, the lower joystick button does not function properly: it
does not control the socket at all. This will be corrected in the next software version.
- The safety of the working hydraulic control levers has been further improved. When the
hydraulics are activated, the control levers must be moved to the centre position—
permanently or temporarily—before the valve starts to function. E.g. if one of the levers is
not in the centre position or the voltage of the lever does not match that of the centre
position, the valve in question cannot be controlled after the hydraulics have been activated.
- Use of hydraulic CAN valves with the U-Pilot headland management system has been
improved. Previously, in some tractors the valve float position could only be activated with
the control lever. It can now be activated with the U-Pilot as well. The valve software
version must be 2.04 or above (the software version can be viewed using the MultiTool
hydraulics application).
- Tractor terminal tolerance towards CAN bus defects has been improved. If any of the
CAN-controlled hydraulic valves send defective CAN messages to the TT, it will attempt to
Version 32 6/05/10
Page 12/18
continue normal valve operation. Defective CAN messages can be caused by, for example,
faulty CAN bus connectors in the valve guide heads or couplings, or lack of an end resistor.
If there is a problem with the functioning of the tractor's working hydraulic valves, e.g.
some or each of the valves "disappear" from the TT screen, the tractor should be
reprogrammed using software version 1.8.0.0 or later before undertaking any other repair
measures.
(Versu v1.8.0.0) U-Pilot headland management system:

- The maximum number of functions to be recorded is 30; previously it was 25.
- Powershift control has been improved, ensuring smooth operation of all gears. If several
subsequent powershift gears were programmed in headland automatics, the correct
powershift gear did not always engage.
(Versu v1.8.0.0) ISOBUS and implement signal connector:

- The tractor driving direction information has been changed for the ISOAD control unit
(implement signal connection/ISOBUS). The information is sent immediately as the driving
direction is selected with the direction lever. This way the information is received from the
ISOAD control unit before the tractor starts moving.
Previously, the information was sent only after the driving direction disc clutch was
engaged.
The new method works better when additional devices/implements are attached to the
tractor and they need information on the selected driving speed even before the tractor
moves.
(Versu v1.8.0.0) A pillar display:

- The rounding of the driving speed reading has been changed so that the reading matches
the one displayed on the Tractor Terminal screen. Previously, the readings differed from one
another at driving speeds exceeding 15 kph.
- The time display has been corrected. In the 12-hour mode, the times between 12:00 and
12:59 were displayed incorrectly (for example, 12:40 was displayed as 00:40).
- If driving speed data were missing, the value 1073 was displayed. The software has been
corrected so that in the above-described instance, four lines (- - - -) are displayed on the
screen.
(Versu v1.8.0.0) Tractor Terminal displays and functions:

- Implement width can now be set easily: width value can be changed one number at a time,
e.g. even big changes to the width are now easy to make. Previously, the value had to be
scrolled in 1 cm increments. Implement width is indicated with the number 1 in the picture
below. The left/right arrow keys are used to move to a different number; next, the up/down
arrow keys are used to change the value.
Version 32 6/05/10
Page 13/18
user settings and counters have intermittently reverted back to the zero position (after 32
switch-offs). This applies to the views chosen for the shared driving display, implement
width and counters (for example, fuel consumption counters).
• Note. Despite the change, the settings/values may revert to the default position if the
tractor's main switch is switched off too soon after turning the ignition key to the
STOP position. Tractor Terminal settings are stored in the memory when the ignition
key is switched to the STOP position. Storing may take up to two seconds — you
should wait at least two seconds before turning off the main switch to allow
sufficient time for storing the values.
• Note. Should the engine stop by "choking" as a result of an excessive load, the
power should always be switched off by turning off the ignition key before restarting
the engine. Doing this allows Tractor Terminal to store the current settings and
counters in the memory.
- The fuel consumption displays have been corrected (the readings in some displays were
incorrect).
- Odometer, showing miles: odometer functions have been fixed.
- Odometer, showing miles: the trip meter functions have been fixed.
- The displays with volume shown in gallons: the displays have been fixed.
- Functioning of the wheel slip percentage: repairs were made to display functions.
- Cruise control display: the reading below 1 kph is now more accurate.
- Three new adjustable settings have been added to the operator setting mode. Instructions
will be added to the Operator's Manual and service instructions.
Setting the clutch pedal's engagement point (1-4). This adjustment can also be made in
Service mode (index no. 3).
Power shuttle switching speed (1-10). This adjustment can also be made in Service mode
(index no. 30).
(Versu v1.8.0.0) Alarms and warnings:

- Low hydraulic oil level alarm added: The instrument panel shows the text "Hydraulic oil
level low" (this is explained in section 5.3.3 of the Operator's Manual).
- Excessive power transmission speed alarm added: "SLOW DOWN, HIDASTA" (this is
explained in section 5.3.4 of the Operator's Manual). The alarm is activated if the speed of
the power shuttle is too high.
- Excessive PTO shaft speed warning added: The instrument panel shows the text "SLOW
DOWN, PTO SPEED TOO HIGH" (this is explained in section 5.3.5 of the Operator's
Manual).
Version 32 6/05/10
Page 14/18
- Service codes have been added to TC1 to facilitate the development of transmission
software. The numbering of these service codes begins at 10000, for example, 10294-00-
003. If you detect service codes of this type (10000 or above), you should report them to
your contact person at Valtra. You should also report any indications of a malfunction, for
example, transmission drive disruption. The function during which the service code
appeared should also be reported. Based on this information, software functions can be
further developed.
- Service codes 8057-xx-003 (front-axle steering angle sensor malfunction) have been
changed. In some tractors, the service code has appeared, even though according to
measurements, the sensor is in good condition.
- In some tractors, the TC1 control unit has caused the "exclamation mark" alarm LED to
switch on in the instrument panel even when no service code has been active. The
functioning has been fixed by changing the TC1 controller software.
- New service codes have been added to detect any contact button misuses or errors.
6310-02-040 hydraulics valve no. 1 plus button located in the rear mudguard was pressed
while driving speed exceeded 2 kph (or the button is malfunctioning).
6311-02-040 hydraulics valve no. 1 minus button located in the rear mudguard was pressed
while driving speed exceeded 2 kph (or the button is malfunctioning).
6313-02-040 front linkage lift button at the front of the tractor was pressed while driving
speed exceeded 2 kph (or the button malfunctions).
6314-02-040 front linkage lift button at the front of the tractor was pressed while driving
speed exceeded 2 kph (or the button malfunctions).
(Versu v1.8.0.0) Maintenance properties:

- When calibrations, index settings or the I/O test are run on the Valtra MultiTool service
terminal, the Tractor Terminal exits the corresponding function modes. This ensures a
secure and fast operation of MultiTool programmes.
If you want to go back to these functions in the Tractor Terminal, you must exit these
programmes in MultiTool and switch off the tractor power for a moment.
- In software version 1.8.0.0, the oil temperature during calibration should be around +50ºC,
otherwise prefill adjustment becomes more difficult and the index adjustment range is not
always sufficient.
- The functioning of temperature inputs Ai39 and Ai40 were fixed in the TC1 I/O test.
Previously, they displayed around 0 V.
- The storing and reading of the TC1 control unit defect history has been fixed.
- Index processing in TC1 has been improved. In some tractors, not all indexes were
displayed on the TT and MultiTool screen, for example, no. 1000…1002.
- New values to select from have been added for indices 440 (transmission type number).
These values are used for the special pre-series tractors and apply to tractor numbers:
U50232 T202V, U51147 T182V, U51420 T202V, U51520 T172V, V02338 T152V
Version 32 6/05/10
Page 15/18
Tractor models Transmission Rear axle type ID letter code Index 440,
type value
T162eV – T202V 40 kph 650 PC, PD 16
T162eV – T202V 40 kph 750 PK, PL 17
In these five tractors, the location of forward speed sensor B6 is different from that of the
other Versu tractors. In these tractors, forward speed sensor B6 counts the teeth of the gear
wheel (45 pulses/revolution); whereas the sensor in all other Versu tractors counts the teeth
of a separate measuring gear (41 pulses/revolution).
(Versu v1.10.0.0) Powershift:

- Powershift gear engagement has been improved; previous engagement was occasionally
too choppy, especially in smaller tractor models.
- Powershift disc clutch prefill temperature compensation was implemented. Temperature
compensation changes the prefill pressure according to the oil temperature, thereby
attempting to keep the connections unchanged regardless of the temperature.
(Versu v1.10.0.0) Power shuttle and driving start:

- In the previous software version 1.8.0.0, shuttle disc clutch prefill temperature
compensation was implemented. Temperature compensation changes the prefill pressure
according to the oil temperature. At a temperature of +50ºC, the prefill pressure matches the
prefill index value, while at lower temperatures, the prefill pressure increases. However, in
software version 1.8.0.0, the pressure increases too much and the connections may become
choppy.
In software version v1.10.0.0, the effect of temperature compensation has been adjusted.

- The functioning of the lower joystick button has been corrected in the software: in
previous software versions 1.8.0.0 and 1.9.0.0 it did not control the front socket at all.
- Working hydraulic safety has been further enhanced by preventing its accidental use at
high driving speeds. A more detailed description of this function can be found in Direct
model changes in section "Auxiliary working hydraulics".
(Versu v1.10.0.0) Sigma Power:

- A new function has been added to indicate when the Sigma Power function has not been
calibrated. If calibration has not been carried out, the Sigma Power indicator light flashes on
the instrument panel.

- The software has been designed so that service code 10294-00-003 should no longer be
activated. In some tractors, the error disrupted the transmission traction engagement and
caused cruise control values to revert to the default position.
Version 32 6/05/10
Page 16/18
(Versu v1.11.0.0) Changing transmission speed range:

- If the clutch pedal or HiShift clutch button is pressed after the transmission speed range is
changed, the engine running speed is defined on the basis of the position of the driving pedal
and the hand throttle. Previously, the engine running speed might have 'run away', i.e.
increased too much, in the above-mentioned situation.
(Versu v1.11.0.0) Automated power shift preprogramming:

- The preprogrammed power shift for reverse shuttle did not engage the correct power gear
in all situations; the function has been enhanced in various ways.
- It is not possible to preprogram the powershift while the creeper gear is engaged. It was
previously not possible to shift, but preprogramming was still possible and the setting was
visible in the Tractor Terminal display.
(Versu v1.11.0.0) Cruise control (engine rpm):

- The engine cruise control engages more smoothly and has virtually no effect on the speed.
(Versu v1.11.0.0) Four-wheel drive (4WD)

- The four-wheel drive automatic function has been enhanced, as in some situations the four-
wheel drive did not disengage automatically.
(Versu v1.11.0.0) The rear power take-off:

- Rear power take-off signal light control has been enhanced, as it was experiencing delays.
The signal light indicated the termination of power take-off with a delay of four seconds
after the power lift had been moved into transport position. However, the power take-off
actually stops three seconds after the power lift has been moved into transport position.

- The joystick mid-range function (software) has been altered so that when the position lock
is engaged for a valve a small movement of the joystick will not disengage the position lock.
It often happens, that when the joystick is moved in the direction of valve no. 1 (for
example), the joystick also moves a little to towards valve no.2.
(Versu v1.11.0.0) Tractor Terminal displays and functions:

- Power transmission settings menu can now be accessed via the rear controls by pressing
the preprogramming button (under the reverse shuttle lever). Previously, this was only
possible via the front controls button.

8012-07-003 Power transmission input speed sensor B21, voltage is too high
8013-07-003 Shuttle-unit speed sensor B13, voltage is too high
Previously, fault activation may have prevented the TC1 control unit from functioning at all
(TC1 could not be found from CAN bus connectors). The fault activation is currently only
restricting the use of the tractor.

8015-08-003, 8016-08-003, 8017-08-003.
Version 32 6/05/10
Page 17/18
Previously, these service codes may have been activated with no reason.
(Versu v1.11.0.0) Maintenance properties:

- The service mode has been updated with a new installable index no. 453, "tyre parameter,
factory". The index value must correspond with the tyres on the tractor. The index value
must be set in the following circumstances:
• When the TC1 control unit is being installed as a spare part.
• If the TC1 indices have not been recorded to a memory card prior to the tractor being
programmed.
Common Rail engines, N2 and T2 series (Versu and Direct)

All N2 and T2 series engines have received a new software version V2.5.2.3. The software
has been implemented in production from tractor number W20104 onwards. Some
previously manufactured tractors may also have been fitted with software v2.5.2.3.
The software is part of the MultiTool_v7.1.0.0 software package.
Engine V2.5.2.3, Versu and Direct: Changes made, sorted by function:
(v2.5.2.3) Engine start-up/running cold:

- Engine cold start-up has been enhanced.
- An effort has been made to decrease the engine running sound at low temperatures (under
30ºC).
(v2.5.2.3) Engine torque graphs:

- The engine torque at low speeds has been increased (starting from 850 rpm).
- Tractor models T162e V and T162 D torque graph figures have been standardised with
those of other tractor models so that, when the engine is being programmed, different
parameter packages for these two models are not required.
(v2.5.2.3) Cooling system fan controls:

- The fan running speed adjustment has been generally improved to prevent the engine from
overheating in hot conditions, for example. The fan runs at a minimum of approx. 500 rpm;
previously, it was liable to stop altogether.
- The fan speed is affected by the air conditioning unit being on. The effectiveness of the air
conditioning unit therefore increases in situations where the engine temperature is still low
but the temperature of the surrounding environment is high.
In the N series, the fan speed can increase to almost 2400 rpm and to around 1500 rpm in the
T series as a result of the air conditioning being on.
- The heat protection of the clutch hub of the fan has been enhanced. When the fan has been
running on low speed for a long time (meaning the clutch hub has been slipping), the fan
will run on full speed for a while to cool the clutch hub.
(v2.5.2.3) Other characteristics:

- Efforts have been made to reduce the amount of smoke created during acceleration.
Version 32 6/05/10
Page 18/18
(v2.5.2.3) Alarms and warnings:

- The engine software has been updated with the service codes for controlling the cooling
system fan and cooling system pressure sensor, which were missing from previous software
versions.
(v2.5.2.3) Maintenance properties:

- Visible settings and adjustments on service tools have been reduced, as not all of them are
required for Versu and Direct models.
Known software features (to be considered)

NOTE. They do not apply to the Versu and Direct model tractors.
1. The operator/customer setting mode FIII cannot be accessed if the brake pedals are
depressed.
2. Technician setting mode FIII: When an index is stored, the software may exit the FIII
mode. However, the value is correctly stored. The setting mode must be re-entered.
3. The LS models test mode FII cannot be accessed if the seat is facing towards the rear.
4. Test mode FII (control unit TC1): outputs Po7 and Po8 do not show any value or may
show incorrect values.
5. Operator/customer fault memory mode FI: the customer/operator can accidentally clear
the fault memory.
6. LS model calibrations: automatic calibrations of disc clutches will not show a service
code although the mechanical gear is in the neutral position. Other models show code
C902.

Calibrari, Coduri de Eroare Pana x20001, Programare

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Calibrari, Coduri de Eroare Pana x20001, Programare

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

10 Autocontrols

Type plate (EEC)

A Series 6000 Series

An, Mezzo, Mega, HiTech Series

AUTOCONTROL (AC 2.4)

CAN BUS (AC 2.4)

6250H --- 6850H, components

CAN BUS (AC 5.4)

AUTOCONTROL (AC 8.3)

CAN BUS (AC 8.3)

AUTOCONTROL (AC 8.5)

CAN BUS (AC 8.5)

AUTOCONTROL (AC 5.5)

CAN BUS (AC 5.5)

AUTOCONTROL (AC 9.2)

CAN BUS (AC 9.2)

AUTOCONTROL (AC 13.0)

CAN BUS (AC 13.0)

AUTOCONTROL (AC 10.0, AC 10.1 and AC 10.2)

CAN BUS (AC 10.0)

CAN BUS (AC 10.1)

CAN BUS (AC 10.2)

AUTOCONTROL (AC 11.2)

CAN BUS (AC 11.2)

CAN bus (AC15.2)

CAN bus (AC14.2)

T120c ---T170c, components

AUTOCONTROL (AC 2.4)

CAN BUS (AC 2.4)

AUTOCONTROL (AC 5.4)

CAN BUS (AC 5.4)

AUTOCONTROL (AC 5.5)

CAN BUS (AC 5.5)

AUTOCONTROL (AC 6.1)

CAN BUS (AC 6.1)

AUTOCONTROL (AC 6.6)

CAN BUS (AC 6.6)

T121c ---T171c, construction

AUTOCONTROL (AC 9.2)

CAN BUS (AC 9.2)

AUTOCONTROL (AC 10.2 and AC 10.21)

CAN BUS (AC 10.2)

CAN BUS (AC 10.21)

AUTOCONTROL (AC 11.2)

CAN BUS (AC 11.2)

CAN bus (AC15.2)

CAN bus (AC14.2)

6400 AC2.4 Syncro EEM2 AGROLINE

6250H AC5.2 HiTech TC1 INFOLINE

6350H AC5.2 HiTech TC1 INFOLINE

C90 AC8.3 HiTech TC1 INFOLINE (x)

M120 AC5.5 HiTech EEM2 TC1 AGROLINE (x)

N101cCR AC9.2 Syncro EEM3 AGROLINE

N91h AC10.0 HiTech TC1 AGROLINE

T120c AC2.4 Syncro EEM2 AGROLINE

T150c AC2.4 Syncro EEM2 AGROLINE

T120cH AC5.4 HiTech EEM2 TC1 AGROLINE

T120 AC5.3 HiTech TC1

T160 AC5.3 HiTech TC1

T120 AC5.5 HiTech EEM2 TC1 AGROLINE (x)

T140e AC5.5 HiTech EEM2 TC1 AGROLINE (x)

T121c AC9.2 Syncro EEM3 ARGOLINE (x)

T161c AC9.2 Syncro EEM3 ARGOLINE (x)